CB Specs

Public Works and Government Services Canada Architectural and Engineering Services Ontario Region
Kingston, Ontario Correctional Service Canada COLLINS BAY INSTITUTION 1455 Bath Road
COLLINS BAY INSTITUTION BUILDING CBB11

PWGSC Project No. R.043791.001
SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 1 of 2 ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL
Issued for Bid 2011-05-25
PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 1 2011-05-25
Section VOLUME 1 OF 2
Title
Pages
Division 01 - General Requirements 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES 01 29 83 PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 32 16.06 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM) 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA SECURITY REQUIREMENT 01 35 29.06 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 42 13 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 52 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01 56 00 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 01 61 00 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 71 00 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 74 11 CLEANING 01 74 20 CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 91 31 COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN 01 91 51 BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL (BMM) Division 02 - Existing Conditions 02 41 23 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 02 81 01 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Division 03 - Concrete 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 30 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Division 04 - Masonry 04 05 10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MASONRY 04 05 12 MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 19 MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCING 04 05 23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY Division 05 - Metals 05 12 23 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS
4 1 2 2 3 14 7 11 6 6 3 11 4 4 5 3 6 3 3 3 6 2 8 3 4 33 5 8 6 5 7 18 9 12 4 5 4 11 7
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 2 2011-05-25
05 05 05 05
21 31 50 51
00 00 01 29
STEEL STEEL METAL METAL
JOIST FRAMING DECKING FABRICATIONS STAIRS AND LADDERS
6 5 18 6 4 11 6 4 6 10 4 19 11 6 6 7 12 8 12 12 5 9 9 6 7 3 4 7 12 4 18 18 5 6 8
Division 06 - Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 12 CARPENTRY 06 40 01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 21 13 BOARD INSULATION 07 21 16 BLANKET INSULATION 07 21 29.03 SPRAYED INSULATION - POLYURETHANE FOAM 07 27 00.01 AIR BARRIERS 07 46 13 PREFORMED METAL SIDING 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 72 69 ROOF ANCHORS AND SAFETY RESTRAINTS 07 84 00 FIRE STOPPING 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Division 08 - Openings 08 11 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 50 50 WINDOWS 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 70 05 CABINET AND MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE 08 71 11 FINISH HARDWARE 08 80 50 GLAZING Division 09 - Finishes 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 53 00.01 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION 09 65 00 RESILIENT TILE AND SHEET FLOORING 09 68 01 CARPETING AND CARPET TILE 09 80 00 ACOUSTIC TREATMENT 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 96 46 INTUMESCENT PAINTING 09 96 57 EPOXY COATING FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS 09 96 58 EPOXY FLOORING
Division 10 - Specialties 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES CHALKBOARDS, WHITEBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS 5 10 28 00 MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES & RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 10 Division 11 - Equipment 11 19 12 DETENTION HARDWARE 11 19 13 DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES 11 19 14 DETENTION GRILLE DOORS AND BARRIERS 49 28 10
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 3 2011-05-25
11 19 15 VOLUME 2 OF 2
DETENTION WINDOW SECURITY GRILLES
11
Division 21 - Fire Suppression 21 12 01 STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY 21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Division 22 - Plumbing 22 10 10 PLUMBING PUMPS 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 13 17 DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - CAST IRON AND COPPER 22 30 05 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 42 01 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 22 42 03 COMMERCIAL WASHROOM FIXTURES 22 42 16 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS 22 42 20 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS AND BATHTUBS 22 47 00 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
11 16 4 9 4 5 10 6 4 4 4
Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 03 01 USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DURING CONSTRUCTION 2 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS - MECHANICAL 30 23 05 05 INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK 6 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 4 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 3 23 05 17 PIPE WELDING 5 23 05 19.01 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS 3 23 05 23.01 VALVES - BRONZE 5 23 05 23.02 VALVES - CAST IRON 5 23 05 23.05 BUTTERFLY VALVES 4 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 9 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 6 23 05 53.01 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 8 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 9 23 05 94 PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS 4 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 7 23 07 15 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING 10 23 08 02 CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS 4 23 11 23 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 5 23 21 13.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: COPPER 7 23 21 13.02 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: STEEL 5 23 21 14 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 5 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS 5 23 23 00 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT 5 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS 6 23 31 13.01 METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA 8 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 5 23 33 14 DAMPERS - BALANCING 2 23 33 15 DAMPERS - OPERATING 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 4 2011-05-25
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
33 33 33 34 36 37 37 41 51 52 72 73 81 82 83 84
16 46 53 00 00 13 20 00 00 00 00 10 23 39 00 13
DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE FLEXIBLE DUCTS ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING HVAC FANS AIR TERMINAL UNITS DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES LOUVRES, INTAKES AND VENTS PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS HEATING BOILERS AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT AIR HANDLING - BUILT-UP COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT HEATERS RADIANT HEATING UNITS HUIMIDIFIERS
4 4 3 5 3 4 3 4 3 6 3 13 7 4 5 3 5 3 7 3 4 3 5 18 3 8 16 12 4 2 5 4 3 2 3 5 3 4 2 5 2 2 4 4 8 4 1 4
Division 25 - Integrated Automation 25 01 11 EMCS START-UP, VERIFICATION AND COMMISSIONING 25 01 12 EMCS TRAINING 25 05 01 EMCS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 25 05 02 EMCS SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS 25 05 03 EMCS PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 25 05 54 EMCS IDENTIFICATION 25 08 20 EMCS WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE 25 10 00 EMCS EQUIPMENT/ PRODUCTS 25 10 01 EMCS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) 25 30 02 EMCS FIELD INSTALLATION 25 90 01 EMCS SITE REQUIREMENTS, APPLICATIONS AND SYSTEMS SEQUENCES OF OPERATION Division 26 - Electrical 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 03 ARC FLASH ELECTRICAL COORDINATION AND STUDIES 26 05 20 WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0 - 1000 V 26 05 21 WIRES AND CABLES (0 - 1000 V) 26 05 28 GROUNDING - SECONDARY 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 31 SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS 26 05 32 OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 34 CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43.01 INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS 26 05 80 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS 26 05 81 MOTORS: 0.746 TO 149 KW 26 09 23.01 METERING AND SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS 26 09 23.02 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - PHOTOELECTRIC 26 09 23.03 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - INCANDESCENT DIMMING 26 09 23.04 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - FLUORESCENT DIMMING 26 09 24 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT - LOW VOLTAGE 26 12 16.01 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY 26 24 05 SPRINKLER PROOF EQUIPMENT 26 24 16.01 PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 5 2011-05-25
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
24 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 33 43 50 52 53
19 26 30 16.02 20 23 01 03 10 23 53 13 00 00 00
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES WIRING DEVICES SNOW MELTING CABLE MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS - CLASS 'A' DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON-FUSED CONTACTORS CONTROL DEVICES MOTOR STARTERS TO 600 V ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS STATIC TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS LIGHTING EMERGENCY LIGHTING EXIT LIGHTS
6 4 3 2 2 2 2 4 5 10 24 10 8 3 4 4 2 2 7 2 4 9 7 5 2 21 9 19 23 20 20
Division 27 - Communications 27 05 14 COMMUNICATION CABLES INSIDE BUILDINGS 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 10 05 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 13 13 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 27 41 16 TELEVISION SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 27 51 23 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security 28 08 01 COMMISSIONING FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 28 13 01 PATHWAYS FOR GUARD TOUR SYSTEM 28 13 27 SECURITY DOOR SUPERVISION 28 13 27 FIGURES 1 TO 9 28 13 29 EMERGENCY INMATE CELL CALL 28 16 02 PORTABLE PERSONAL ALARM SYSTEM 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS DETAIL E101 E102 E103 E104 E105 E106 E107 E108 E109 E110 E111 E112 E113 E114 E115 E116 E117 SHEETS TYPE 'AA' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'BB' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'BA' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'CC' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'DD' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'EE' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'F4' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'GG' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'H4' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'H8' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'JJ' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'KK' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'LL' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'C' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE '1' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE '2' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE '3' LIGHTING FIXTURE
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 6 2011-05-25
E118 E119 E120 E121 E122 E123 E124
TYPE '4' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE '5' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'A' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'R' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'X' LIGHTING FIXTURE CELL CALL/CANCELLATION DETAIL SMOKE DETECTOR GUARD 3 10 4 2 2 4 10 6 6 4 4 13 5 4
Division 31 - Earthwork 31 22 13 ROUGH BOARDING 31 23 10 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 63 23 BORED CONCRETE PILES Division 32 - Exterior Improvements 32 11 20 GRANULAR BASE 32 11 24 GRANULAR SUB-BASE 32 12 17 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 32 31 14 STEEL CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 32 91 19.13 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING 32 92 19.16 HYDRAULIC SEEDING Division 33 - Utilities 33 01 30 MAINTENANCE HOLE REPAIRS 33 05 14 MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS 33 11 17 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 34 02 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCEMAINS 33 44 01 STORM SEWERS
END
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01 11 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PRECEDENCE
.1
For Federal Government projects, Division 1 Sections take precedence over technical specification sections in other Divisions of this Project Manual.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
.1
Work of this Contract comprises general construction of new, 96 bed, maximum security living units building facility, located at Collins Bay Institution, Kingston, Ontario and further identified as "Collins Bay Institution Building CBB11".
1.3 CONTRACT METHOD
.1
Construct Work under single, stipulated price contract.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT
.1
Perform work in accordance with most recent editions of the National Building Code (NBC), the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), standards of Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS), and any other applicable codes, provincial or local, provided that in any case of conflict or discrepancy the more stringent requirements shall apply. Meet or exceed requirements of: .1 Contract documents. .2 Specified standards, codes and referenced documents.
.2
1.5 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED
.1
Maintain at the job site, one copy each of the following: .1 Conract drawings. .2 Specifications. .3 Addenda. .4 Change orders. .5 Field test reports. .6 Permits and licenses. .7 Copy of approved Work Schedule. .8 Waste Reduction Workplan. .9 Bills of lading, and material receipts from receiving facility. .10 Other documents as requested by Departmental Representative.
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01 11 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.6
COST BREAKDOWN
.1
Within 48 hours of notification of acceptance of bid furnish a cost breakdown by Section aggregating contract price. Show separately cost of equipment purchased exempt from Ontario Retail Sales Tax under your Ontario Sales Tax licence number. Within 48 hours of acceptance of bid submit a list of subcontractors.
.2
.3
1.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
.1
Contractor shall limit use of site for Work, for storage, and for access, as indicated and as directed by Departmental Representative. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Departmental Representative. Cooperate with Departmental Representative in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate usage of the site. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this Contract.
.2 .3
.4
1.8
OCCUPANCY
.1
Institution grounds, facilities and buildings will be occupied during entire construction period for execution of normal operations. Cooperate with Departmental Representative in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate Institution's usage and operations.
.2
1.9 DEPARTMENTAL REPRESENTATIVE FURNISHED ITEMS
.1
Departmental Representative's Responsibilities: .1 Arrange for delivery of shop drawings, product data, samples, manufacturer's instructions, and certificates to Contractor. .2 Deliver supplier's bill of materials to Contractor. .3 Arrange and pay for delivery to site in accordance with Progress Schedule. .4 Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor. .5 Submit claims for transportation damage. .6 Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective or missing items.
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01 11 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.9 DEPARTMENTAL REPRESENTATIVE FURNISHED ITEMS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Arrange for manufacturer's field services; .7 arrange for and deliver manufacturer's warranties and bonds to Contractor. Contractor Responsibilities: .1 Designate submittals and delivery date for each product in progress schedule. .2 Review shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals. Submit to Consultant notification of any observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non-conformance with Contract Documents. .3 Receive and unload products at site. .4 Inspect deliveries jointly with Owner; record shortages, and damaged or defective items. .5 Handle products at site, including uncrating and storage. .6 Protect products from damage, and from exposure to elements. .7 Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products. .8 Provide installation inspections required by public authorities. .9 Repair or replace items damaged by Contractor or subcontractor on site (under his control).
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Section 01 14 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXISTING SERVICES
.1
Notify, Departmental Representative and utility companies of intended interruption of services and obtain required permission. Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give Departmental Representative 48 hours of notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service throughout course of work. Keep duration of interruptions minimum. Carry out interruptions after normal working hours of occupants, preferably on weekends. Provide for personnel pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Construct barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00.
.2
.3 .4
1.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Submit schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06.
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
Section 01 29 83 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
.1
Particular requirements for inspection and testing to be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative are specified under various sections.
1.2 APPOINTMENT AND PAYMENT
.1
Departmental Representative will appoint and pay for services of testing laboratory except as follows: .1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities. .2 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience. .3 Testing, adjustment and balancing of conveying systems, mechanical and electrical equipment and systems. .4 Mill tests and certificates of compliance. .5 Tests specified to be carried out by Contractor under the supervision of Departmental Representative. .6 Additional tests specified in the following paragraph. Where tests or inspections by designated testing laboratory reveal Work not in accordance with contract requirements, pay costs for additional tests or inspections as required by Departmental Representative to verify acceptability of corrected work.
.2
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
.1
Provide labour, equipment and facilities to: .1 Provide access to Work to be inspected and tested. .2 Facilitate inspections and tests. .3 Make good Work disturbed by inspection and test. .4 Provide storage on site for laboratory's exclusive use to store equipment and cure test samples. Notify Departmental Representative sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and scheduling of test. Where materials are specified to be tested, deliver representative samples in required quantity to testing laboratory.
.2
.3
PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
Section 01 29 83 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.4
Pay costs for uncovering and making good Work that is covered before required inspection or testing is completed and approved by Departmental Representative.
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Section 01 31 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
.1
Coordination of progress schedules, submittals, use of site, temporary utilities, construction facilities, and construction Work, with progress of Work of other contractors, under instructions of Departmental Representative.
1.2 PROJECT MEETINGS
.1
Schedule and administer weekly project meetings throughout progress of Work as determined by Departmental Representative. Prepare agenda for meetings. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date to Departmental Representative. Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings. Preside at meetings. Record minutes. Include significant proceedings and decisions. Identify action by parties. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after each meeting and transmit to Departmental Representative, meeting participants and affected parties not in attendance.
.2 .3
.4 .5 .6 .7
1.3 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP
.1
Within 15 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in contract to discuss and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities. Senior representatives of the Director, Departmental Representative, Contractor, major subcontractors, field inspectors and supervisors will be in attendance. Establish time and location of meeting and notify parties concerned minimum 5 days before meeting. Incorporate mutually agreed variations to Contract Documents into Agreement, prior to signing.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 31 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP (Cont'd)
.5
Agenda to include following: Appointment of official representative of .1 participants in Work. .2 Schedule of Work, progress scheduling in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06. .3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences in accordance with Section 01 51 00. .5 Delivery schedule of specified equipment in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06. .6 Site security in accordance with Section 01 52 00. .7 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, and administrative requirements (GC). .8 Departmental Representative provided Products. .9 Record drawings in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .10 Maintenance in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .11 Commissioning in accordance with Section 01 91 00. .12 Take-over procedures, acceptance, and warranties in accordance with Section 01 77 00 and 01 78 00. .13 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, and holdbacks (GC). .14 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .15 Insurances and transcript of policies (GC).
Comply with Departmental Representative's allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, access, traffic, and parking facilities. During construction coordinate use of site and facilities through Departmental Representative's procedures for intra-project communications: Submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination of drawings, recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. Comply with instructions of Departmental Representative for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities.
.6
.7
.8
Section 01 31 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.3 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP (Cont'd)
.9
Coordinate field engineering and layout work with Departmental Representative.
1.4 ON-SITE DOCUMENTS
.1
Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following: .1 Contract drawings. .2 Specifications. .3 Amendments. .4 Reviewed shop drawings. .5 Change orders. .6 Other modifications to Contract. .7 Field test reports. .8 Copy of approved Work schedule. .9 Manufacturers' installation and application instructions. .10 Labour conditions and wage schedules. .11 Material Safety Data Sheets. .12 Labour and Material Bonds. .13 All applicable Municipal Permits.
1.5
SCHEDULES
.1
Submit preliminary construction progress schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06 and Commissioning Schedule in accordance with Sections 01 91 00 and 01 91 31, to Departmental Representative, coordinated with Departmental Representative's project schedule. After review, revise and resubmit schedule to comply with revised project schedule. During progress of Work revise and resubmit as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS
.1
During course of Work and 2 weeks prior to project completion, schedule progress meetings bi-weekly. Schedule separate commissioning meetings in accordance with Section 01 91 00. Contractor, major subcontractors involved in Work and Departmental Representative are to be in attendance. Notify parties minimum 5 days prior to meetings.
.2 .3
.4
Section 01 31 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS (Cont'd)
.5
Record minutes of meetings and circulate to attending parties and affected parties not in attendance within 3 days after meeting.
Agenda to include following: .1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. .2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting. .3 Field observations, problems, conflicts. .4 Problems which impede construction schedule. .5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules. .6 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. .7 Revision to construction schedule. .8 Progress schedule, during succeeding work period. .9 Review submittal schedules: expedite as required. .10 Maintenance of quality standards. .11 Review proposed changes for affect on construction schedule and on completion date. .12 Other business.
.6
1.7
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Make submittal to Departmental Representative for review. Submit preliminary shop drawings, product data and samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 01 91 00 for review for compliance with Contract Documents; for field dimensions and clearances, for relation to available space, and for relation to Work of other contracts. After review, revise and resubmit for transmittal to Departmental Representative. Submit requests for payment for review, and for transmittal to Departmental Representative. Submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents, and obtain instructions through Departmental Representative. Process substitutions through Departmental Representative. Process change orders through Departmental Representative.
.3 .4
.5 .6
Section 01 31 16 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.7 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)
.7
Deliver closeout submittals for review and preliminary inspections, for transmittal to Departmental Representative.
1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
.1
Provide information required by Departmental Representative for preparation of coordination drawings. Review and approve revised drawings for submittal to Departmental Representative.
.2
1.9 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
.1 .2
Notify Departmental Representative when Work is considered ready for Substantial Performance. Accompany Departmental Representative on preliminary inspection to determine items listed for completion or correction. Comply with Departmental Representative's instructions for correction of items of Work listed in executed certificate of Substantial Performance. Notify Departmental Representative of instructions for completion of items of Work determined in Departmental Representative's final inspection.
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01 31 19 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
ADMINISTRATIVE
.1
Schedule and administer project meetings throughout the progress of the work at the call of Departmental Representative. Prepare agenda for meetings. Distribute written notice of each meeting three (3) days in advance of meeting date to Departmental Representative. Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings. Preside at meetings. Record the meeting minutes. Include significant proceedings and decisions. Identify actions by parties. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three (3) days after meetings and transmit to meeting participants and, affected parties not in attendance Departmental Representative. Representative of Contractor, subcontractor and suppliers attending meetings will be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of party each represents.
.2 .3
.4 .5 .6
.7
.8
1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
.1
Within 7 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in contract to discuss and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities. Departmental Representative, Contractor, major subcontractors, field inspectors and supervisors will be in attendance. Establish time and location of meeting and notify parties concerned minimum 5 days before meeting. Incorporate mutually agreed variations to Contract Documents into Agreement, prior to signing.
.2
.3
.4
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01 31 19 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING (Cont'd)
.5
Agenda to include: Appointment of official representative of .1 participants in the Work. .2 Schedule of Work: in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06. .3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips. Submit submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences in accordance with Section 01 52 00. .5 Delivery schedule of specified equipment. .6 Site security in accordance with Section 01 56 00. .7 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, administrative requirements. .8 Departmental Representative provided products. .9 Record drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .10 Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .11 Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .12 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, hold backs. .13 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms. .14 Insurances, transcript of policies.
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
.1
During course of Work and two (2) weeks prior to project completion, schedule progress meetings bi-weekly. Contractor, major subcontractors involved in Work and Departmental Representative are to be in attendance. Notify parties minimum 3 days prior to meetings. Record minutes of meetings and circulate to attending parties and affected parties not in attendance within 3 days after meeting. Agenda to include the following: .1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. .2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting. .3 Field observations, problems, conflicts.
.2
.3 .4
.5
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01 31 19 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS (Cont'd)
.5
Agenda to include the following:(Cont'd) Problems which impede construction .4 schedule. .5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules. .6 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. .7 Revision to construction schedule. .8 Progress schedule, during succeeding work period. .9 Review submittal schedules: expedite as required. .10 Maintenance of quality standards. .11 Review proposed changes for affect on construction schedule and on completion date. .12 Other business.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PRECEDENCE
.1
For Federal Government projects Division 1 Sections take precedence over technical specification sections in other Divisions of the specifications.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1
Activity: element of Work performed during course of Project. Activity normally has expected duration, and expected cost and expected resource requirements. Activities can be subdivided into tasks. Actual Finish Date (AF): point in time that Work actually ended on activity Actual Start Date (AS): point in time that Work actually started on activity. Bar Chart (Gantt chart): graphic display of schedule-related information. In typical bar chart, activities or other Project elements are listed down left side of chart, dates are shown across top, and activity durations are shown as date-placed horizontal bars. Baseline: original approved plan (for Project, work package, or activity), plus or minus approved scope changes. Completion Milestones: they are firstly Certificate of Substantial Performance and secondly Certificate of Completion. Constraint: applicable restriction that will affect performance of Project. Factors that affect activities can be scheduled. Control: process of comparing actual performance with planned performance, analyzing variances, evaluating possible alternatives, and taking appropriate corrective action as needed. Critical Activity: any activity on a critical path. Most commonly determined by using critical path method.
.2 .3 .4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3 DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)
.10
Critical Path: series of activities that determines duration of Project. In deterministic model, critical path is usually defined as those activities with float less than or equal to specified value, often zero. It is longest path through Project.
Critical Path Method (CPM): network analysis technique used to predict Project duration by analyzing which sequence of activities (which path) has least amount of scheduling flexibility (least amount of float). Data Date (DD): date at which, or up to which, Project's reporting system has provided actual status and accomplishments. Duration (DU): number of work periods (not including holidays or other non-working periods) required to complete activity or other Project element. Usually expressed as workdays or work weeks. Early Finish Date (EF): in critical path method, earliest possible point in time on which uncompleted portions of activity (or Project) can finish, based on network logic and schedule constraints. Early finish dates can change as Project progresses and changes are made to Project plan. Early Start Date (ES): in critical path method, earliest possible point in time on which uncompleted portions of activity (or Project) can start, based on network logic and schedule constraints. Early start dates can change as Project progresses and changes are made to Project Plan. Finish Date: point in time associated with activity's completion. Usually qualified by one of following: actual, planned, estimated, scheduled, early, late, baseline, target, or current. Float: amount of time that activity may be delayed from its early start without delaying Project finish date. Float is mathematical calculation, and can change as Project progresses and changes are made to Project plan. This resource is available to both PWGSC and Contractor. Lag: modification of logical relationship that directs delay in successor task.
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 3 2011-05-25
.19
Late Finish Date (LF): in critical path method, latest possible point in time that activity may be completed without delaying specified milestone (usually Project finish date).
Late Start Date (LS): in critical path method, latest possible point in time that activity may begin without delaying specified milestone (usually Project finish date). Lead: modification of logical relationship that allows acceleration of successor task. Logic Diagram: see Project network diagram. Master Plan: summary-level schedule that identifies major activities and key milestones. Milestone: significant event in Project, usually completion of major deliverable. Monitoring: capture, analysis, and reporting of Project performance, usually as compared to plan. Near-Critical Activity: activity that has low total float. Non-Critical Activities: activities which when delayed, do not affect specified Contract duration. Project Control System: fully computerized system utilizing commercially available software packages. Project Network Diagram: schematic display of logical relationships of Project activities. Always drawn from left to right to reflect Project chronology. Project Plan: formal, approved document used to guide both Project execution and Project control. Primary uses of Project plan are to document planning assumptions and decisions, facilitate communication among stakeholders, and document approved scope, cost, and schedule baselines. Project plan may be summary or detailed. Project Planning: development and maintenance of Project Plan. Project Planning, Monitoring and Control System: overall system operated by Departmental
.20
.21 .22 .23 .24 .25
.26 .27
.28
.29
.30
.31 .32
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 4 2011-05-25
.32
(Cont'd) Representative to enable monitoring of Project Work in relation to established milestones. Project Schedule: planned dates for performing activities and planned dates for meeting milestones. Dynamic, detailed record of tasks or activities that must be accomplished to satisfy project objectives. Monitoring and control process involves using project schedule in executing and controlling activities and is used as basis for decision making throughout project life cycle. Quantified days duration: working days based on 5 day work week, discounting statutory holidays. Risk: uncertain event or condition that, if it occurs, has positive or negative effect on Project's objectives. Scheduled Finish Date Work was scheduled to Scheduled finish date of dates delimited by finish date. (SF): point in time that finish on activity. is normally within range early finish date and late
.33
.34 .35
.36
.37
Scheduled Start Date (SS): point in time that Work was scheduled to start on activity. Scheduled start date is normally within range of dates delimited by early start date and late start date. Start Date: point in time associated with activity's start, usually qualified by one of following: actual, planned, estimated, scheduled, early, late, target, baseline, or current. Work Breakdown Structure (WBS): deliverable-oriented grouping of project elements that organizes and defines total Work scope of Project. Each descending level represents increasingly detailed definition of Project Work.
.38
.39
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Construction Progress Schedule (Project Time Management): describes processes required to ensure timely completion of Project. These processes ensure that various elements of Project are properly co-ordinated. It consists of planning, time estimating, scheduling, progress monitoring and control.
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (Cont'd)
.2
Planning: this is most basic function of management, that of determining presentation of action and is essential. .1 It involves focusing on objective consideration of future, and integrating forward thinking with analysis; therefore, in planning, implicit assumptions are made about future so that action can be taken today. .2 Planning and scheduling facilitates accomplishment of objectives and should be considered continuous interactive process involving planning, review, scheduling, analysis, monitoring and reporting.
Ensure that planning process is iterative and results in generally top-down processing with more detail being developed as planning progresses, and decisions concerning options and alternatives are made. This implies progressively more reliability of scheduling data. Detail Project schedule is used for analysis and progress monitoring. Ensure project schedule efficiencies through monitoring. .1 When activities begin on time and are performed according to estimated durations without interruptions, original Critical Path will remain accurate. Changes and delays will however, create an essential need for continual monitoring of Project activities. .2 Monitor progress of Project in detail to ensure integrity of Critical Path, by comparing actual completions of individual activities with their scheduled completions, and review progress of activities that has started but are not yet completed. .3 Monitoring should be done sufficiently often so that causes of delays are immediately identified and removed if possible. Project monitoring and reporting: as Project progresses, keep team aware of changes to schedule, and possible consequences. In addition to Bar Charts and CPM networks, use narrative reports to provide advice on seriousness of difficulties and measures to overcome them. .1 Narrative reporting begins with statement on general status of Project followed by summarization of delays, potential problems, corrective measures and Project status criticality.
.3
.4
.5
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.5 CPM REQUIREMENTS
.1
Ensure Master Plan and Detail Schedule are practical and remain within specified Contract duration. Master Plan and Detail Schedule deemed impractical by Departmental Representative are revised and resubmitted for approval. Acceptance of Master Plan and Detail Schedule showing scheduled Contract duration shorter than specified Contract duration does not constitute change to Contract. Duration of Contract may only be changed through bilateral Agreement. Consider Master Plan and Detail Schedule deemed practical by Departmental Representative, showing Work completed in less than specified Contract duration, to have float. First Milestone on Master Plan and Detail Schedule will identify start Milestone with an "ES" constraint date equal to Award of Contract date. Calculate dates for completion milestones from Plan and Schedule using specified time periods for Contract. Certificate of Substantial Performance with "LF" constraint equal to calculated date. Calculations on updates to be such that if early finish of Certificate of Substantial Performance falls later than specified Contract duration then float calculation to reflect negative float. Delays to non-critical activities, those with float may not be basis for time extension. Do not use float suppression techniques such as software constraints, preferential sequencing, special lead/lag logic restraints, extended activity times or imposed dates other than required by Contract. Allow for and show Master Plan and Detail Schedule adverse weather conditions normally anticipated. Specified Contract duration has been predicated assuming normal amount of adverse weather conditions. Provide necessary crews and manpower to meet schedule requirements for performing Work within specified Contract duration. Simultaneous use of
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7 .8
.9 .10
.11
.12
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 7 2011-05-25
1.5 CPM REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.12
(Cont'd) multiple crews on multiple fronts on multiple critical paths may be required. Arrange participation on and off site of subcontractors and suppliers, as required by Departmental Representative, for purpose of network planning, scheduling, updating and progress monitoring. Approvals by Departmental Representative of original networks and revisions do not relieve Contractor from duties and responsibilities required by Contract. Ensure that it is understood that Award of Contract or time of beginning, rate of progress, Certificate of Substantial Performance and Certificate of Completion as defined times of completion are of essence of this contract.
.13
.14
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit to Departmental Representative Project Control System for planning, scheduling, monitoring and reporting of project progress. Submit Project Control System to Departmental Representative for approval; failure to comply with each required submission, may result in progress payment being withheld in accordance with Federal Government's GC5 Terms of Payment. Include costs for execution, preparation and reproduction of schedule submittals in bid documents. Submit letter ensuring that schedule has been prepared in co-ordination with major sub-contractors. Refer to article "Progress monitoring and reporting" of this specification Section for frequency of Project control system submittals. Submit Project planning, monitoring and control system data as part of initial schedule submission and monthly status reporting and as required by Departmental Representative in following form. .1 USB drive or CD files in original scheduling software containing schedule and cash flow information, labelled with data date,
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 8 2011-05-25
.7
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) specific update, and person responsible for update. .2 Master Plan Bar Chart. .3 Construction Detail schedule Bar Chart. .4 Listing of project activities including milestones and logical connectors, networks (sub-networks) from Project start to end. Sort activities by activity identification number and accompany with descriptions. List early and late start and finish dates together with durations, codes and float. .5 Criticality report listing activities and milestones with negative, zero and up to 5 days total float used as first sort for ready identification of critical or near critical paths through entire project. List early and late starts and finishes dates, together with durations, codes and float for critical activities. .6 Progress report in early start sequence, listing for each trade, activities due to start, underway, or finished within two months from monthly update date. List activity identification number, description and duration. Provide columns for entry of actual start and finish dates, duration remaining and remarks concerning action required.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Use experienced personnel, fully qualified in planning and scheduling to provide services from start of construction to Certificate of Completion, including Commissioning.
1.8 PROJECT MEETING
.1
Meet with Departmental Representative within 5 working days of Award of Contract date, to establish Work requirements and approach to project construction operations.
1.9 WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE (WBS)
.1
Prepare construction Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) within 5 working days of Award of Contract date. Develop WBS through at least five levels: Project, stage, element, sub-element and work package.
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 9 2011-05-25
1.10 PROJECT MILESTONES
.1
Mandatory and recommended project milestones form targets for both Master Plan and Detail Schedule of CPM construction network system. .1 Excavation completed. .2 Substructure completed. .3 Superstructure completed. .4 Building closed-in and weatherproofed. .5 Interior finishing and fitting, mechanical and electrical work completed. .6 Certificate of Substantial Performance. .7 Outside work completed. .8 Certificate of Completion.
1.11
MASTER PLAN
.1
Structure and base CPM construction networks system on WBS coding in order to ensure consistency throughout Project. Prepare comprehensive construction Master Plan (CPM logic diagram) and dependent Cash Flow Projection within working days of finalizing Agreement to confirm validity or alternates of identified milestones. .1 Master Plan will be used as baseline. .1 Revise baseline as conditions dictate and as required by Departmental Representative. .2 Departmental Representative will review and return revised baseline within 5 work days. Reconcile revisions to Master Plan and Cash Flow Projections with previous baseline to provide continuous audit trail. Initial and subsequent Master Plans will include: .1 USB drive or CD containing schedule and cash flow information, clearly labelled with data date, specific update, and person responsible for update. .2 Bar chart identifying coding, activity durations, early/late and start/finish dates, total float, completion as percentile, current status and budget amounts. .3 Network diagram showing coding, activity sequencing (logic), total float, early/late dates, current status and durations. .4 Actual/projected monthly cash flow: expressed annually and monthly and shown in both graphical and numerical form.
.2
.3
.4
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 10 2011-05-25
1.12 DETAIL SCHEDULE
.1
Provide detailed project schedule (CPM logic diagram) within 5 working days of Award of Contract date showing activity sequencing, interdependencies and duration estimates. Include listed activities as follows: .1 Shop drawings. .2 Samples. .3 Approvals. .4 Procurement. .5 Construction. .6 Installation. .7 Site works. .8 Testing. .9 Commissioning and acceptance. Detail CPM schedule to cover in detail period of construction beginning from Award of Contract date. .1 Show remaining activities for CPM construction network system up to Certificate of Completion and develop complete detail as project progresses. .2 Detail activities completely and comprehensively throughout duration of project. Relate Detail Schedule activities to basic activities and milestones developed and approved in Master Plan. Clearly show sequence and interdependence of construction activities and indicate: .1 Start and completion of all items of Work, their major components, and interim milestone completion dates. .2 Activities for procurement, delivery, installation and completion of each major piece of equipment, materials and other supplies, including: .1 Time for submittals, resubmittals and review. .2 Time for fabrication and delivery of manufactured products for Work. .3 Interdependence of procurement and construction activities. .3 Include sufficient detail to assure adequate planning and execution of Work. Activities should generally range in duration from 3 to 15 workdays each. Provide level of detail for project activities such that sequence and interdependency of Contract tasks are demonstrated and allow co-ordination and control of project activities. Show continuous flow from left to right.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 11 2011-05-25
1.12 DETAIL SCHEDULE (Cont'd)
.6
Ensure activities with no float are calculated and clearly indicated on logical CPM construction network system as being, whenever possible, continuous series of activities throughout length of Project to form "Critical Path". Increased number of critical activities is seen as indication of increased risk.
Insert Change Orders in appropriate and logical location of Detail Schedule. After analysis, clearly state and report to Departmental Representative for review effects created by insertion of new Change Order.
.7
1.13 REVIEW OF THE CONSTRUCTION DETAIL SCHEDULE
.1
Allow 5 work days for review by Departmental Representative of proposed construction Detail Schedule. Upon receipt of reviewed Detail Schedule make necessary revisions and resubmit to Departmental Representative for review within 5 work days. Promptly provide additional information to validate practicability of Detail Schedule as required by Departmental Representative. Submittal of Detail Schedule indicates that it meets Contract requirements and will be executed generally in sequence.
.2
.3
.4
1.14 COMPLIANCE WITH DETAIL SCHEDULE
.1 .2
Comply with reviewed Detail Schedule. Proceed with significant changes and deviations from scheduled sequence of activities that cause delay, only after written receipt of approval by Departmental Representative. Identify activities that are behind schedule and causing delay. Provide measures to regain slippage. .1 Corrective measures may include: .1 Increase of personnel on site for effected activities or work package. .2 Increase in materials and equipment. .3 Overtime work or additional work shifts. Submit to Departmental Representative, justification, project schedule data and supporting evidence for approval of extension to Contract completion date or interim milestone
.3
.4
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 12 2011-05-25
1.14 COMPLIANCE WITH DETAIL SCHEDULE (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) date when required. Include as part of supporting evidence: .1 Written submission of proof of delay based on revised activity logic, duration and costs, showing time impact analysis illustrating influence of each change or delay relative to approved contract schedule. .2 Prepared schedule indicating how change will be incorporated into the overall logic diagram. Demonstrate perceived impact based on date of occurrence of change and include status of construction at that time. .3 Other supporting evidence requested by Departmental Representative. .4 Do not assume approval of Contract extension prior to receipt of written approval from Departmental Representative. In event of Contract extension, display in Detail Schedule that scheduled float time available for work involved has been used in full without jeopardizing earned float. .1 Departmental Representative will determine and advise Contractor number of allowable days for extension of Contract based on project schedule updates for period in question, and other factual information. .2 Construction delays affecting project schedule will not constitute justification for extension of contract completion date.
.5
1.15 PROGRESS MONITORING AND REPORTING
.1
On ongoing basis, Detail Schedule on job site must show "Progress to Date". Arrange participation on and off site of subcontractors and suppliers, as, and when necessary, for purpose of network planning, scheduling, updating and progress monitoring. Inspect Work with Departmental Representative at least once monthly to establish progress on each current activity shown on applicable networks. Update and reissue project Work Breakdown Structure and relevant coding structures as project develops and changes. Perform Detail Schedule update monthly with status dated (Data Date) on last working day of month. Update to reflect activities completed to date, activities in progress, logic and duration changes.
.2
.3
Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 13 2011-05-25
1.15 PROGRESS MONITORING AND REPORTING (Cont'd)
.4
Do not automatically update actual start and finish dates by using default mechanisms found in project management software.
Submit to Departmental Representative copies of updated Detail Schedule. Requirements for monthly progress monitoring and reporting are basis for progress payment request. Submit monthly written report based on Detail Schedule, showing Work to date performed, comparing Work progress to planned, and presenting current forecasts. Report must summarize progress, defining problem areas and anticipated delays with respect to Work schedule, and critical paths. Explain alternatives for possible schedule recovery to mitigate any potential delay. Include in report: .1 Description of progress made. .2 Pending items and status of: permits, shop drawings, Change Orders, and possible time extensions. .3 Status of Contract completion date and milestones. .4 Current and anticipated problem areas, potential delays and corrective measures. .5 Review of progress and status of Critical Path activities.
.5 .6
.7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01 33 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
ADMINISTRATIVE
.1
Submit to Departmental Representative submittals listed for review. Submit promptly and in orderly sequence to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. Do not proceed with Work affected by submittal until review is complete. Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI Metric units. Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric units converted values are acceptable. Review submittals prior to submission to Departmental Representative. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be returned without being examined and considered rejected. Notify Departmental Representative, in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations. Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by Departmental Representative's review of submittals. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Departmental Representative review. Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site. Submit number of hard copies specified for each type and format of submittal and in also submit
.2 .3 .4 .5
.6
.7 .8
.9
.10 .11
Section 01 33 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.1 ADMINISTRATIVE (Cont'd)
.11
(Cont'd) in electronic format as pdf files. Forward pdf files on CD or through email.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work. Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario of Canada. Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been co-ordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications. Allow 5 working days for Departmental Representative's review of each submission. Adjustments made on shop drawings by Departmental Representative are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work. Make changes in shop drawings as Departmental Representative may require, consistent with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Departmental Representative in writing of revisions other than those requested. Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: .1 Date. .2 Project title and number. .3 Contractor's name and address. .4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample. .5 Other pertinent data.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.6
.7
Section 01 33 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA (Cont'd)
.8
Submissions shall include: Date and revision dates. .1 .2 Project title and number. .3 Name and address of: .1 Subcontractor. .2 Supplier. .3 Manufacturer. .4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents. .5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable: .1 Fabrication. .2 Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions, and clearances. .3 Setting or erection details. .4 Capacities. .5 Performance characteristics. .6 Standards. .7 Operating weight. .8 Wiring diagrams. .9 Single line and schematic diagrams. .10 Relationship to adjacent work.
After Departmental Representative's review, distribute copies. Submit three copy of shop requested in Departmental request. hard copies and one electronic drawings for each requirement specification Sections and as Representative may reasonably
.9 .10
.11
Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of test reports for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. .1 Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that material, product or system identical to material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements. .2 Testing must have been within 3 years of date of contract award for project.
.12
Section 01 33 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.13
Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of certificates for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. .1 Statements printed on manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements. .2 Certificates must be dated after award of project contract complete with project name.
Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of manufacturers instructions for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. .1 Pre-printed material describing installation of product, system or material, including special notices and Material Safety Data Sheets concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of Manufacturer's Field Reports for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Data for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. Delete information not applicable to project. Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project. If upon review by Departmental Representative, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. The review of shop drawings by Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC) is for sole
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18 .19 .20
.21
Section 01 33 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
.21
(Cont'd) purpose of ascertaining conformance with general concept. .1 This review shall not mean that PWGSC approves detail design inherent in shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of construction and Contract Documents. .2 Without restricting generality of foregoing, Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of Work of sub-trades.
1.3
SAMPLES
.1
Submit for review samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections. Label samples with origin and intended use. Deliver samples prepaid to Departmental Representative's business address. Notify Departmental Representative in writing, at time of submission of deviations in samples from requirements of Contract Documents. Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples. Adjustments made on samples by Departmental Representative are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work. Make changes in samples which Departmental Representative may require, consistent with Contract Documents. Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material against which installed Work will be verified.
.2 .3
.4 .5
.6
.7
1.4
MOCK-UPS
.1
Erect mock-ups in accordance with 01 45 00.
Section 01 33 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.5 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
.1
Submit electronic and hard copy of colour digital photography in jpg format, standard resolution monthly with progress statement and as directed by Departmental Representative. Project identification: name and number of project and date of exposure indicated. Number of viewpoints: viewpoints and their location as determined by Departmental Representative. Frequency of photographic documentation: as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
.4
1.6 FEES, PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES
.1 .2 .3 .4
Provide authorities having jurisdiction with information requested. Pay fees and obtain certificates and permits required. Furnish certificates and permits. Submit acceptable certificate stating that suspended ceiling systems provide adequate support for electrical fixtures, as required by current bulletin of Electrical Inspection Department of Ontario Hydro.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA SECURITY
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PURPOSE
.1
To ensure that both the construction project and the institutional operations may proceed without undue disruption or hindrance and that the security of the Institution is maintained at all times.
DEFINITIONS
.1
"Contraband" means: .1 An intoxicant, including alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics. .2 Tobacco or associated tobacco products. .3 An igniting device, lighter or matches. .4 A weapon or a component thereof, ammunition for a weapon, and anything that is designed to kill, injure or disable a person or that is altered so as to be capable of killing, injuring or disabling a person, when possessed without prior authorization. .5 An explosive or a bomb or a component thereof. .6 Currency over any applicable prescribed limit, when possessed by an inmate without prior authorization. .7 Any item not described in paragraphs 2.1.1 to 2.1.6 that could jeopardize the security of a Penitentiary or the safety of persons, when that item is possessed without prior authorization. "Unauthorized Smoking and related Items" means all smoking items including, but not limited to, cigarettes, cigars, tobacco, chewing tobacco, cigarette making machines, matches and lighters. "Commercial Vehicle" means any motor vehicle used for the shipment of material, equipment and tools required for the construction project. "CSC" means Correctional Service Canada. "Director" means Director, Warden or Superintendent of the Institution as applicable. "Construction Employees" means persons working for the General Contractor, the sub-contractors, equipment operators, material suppliers, testing and inspection companies and regulatory agencies. "Departmental Representative" means the project manager from Public Works and Government Services Canada.
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
.7
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)
.8
"Perimeter" means the fenced or walled area of the Institution that restrains the movement of the inmates.
"Construction Limits" means the area as shown on the contract drawings that the Contractor will be allowed to work". This area may or may not be isolated from the security area of the Institution. "CPIC" means RCMP Canadian Police Information Centre. "Commissionaire" means designated representative of Director, to monitor construction related activities including surveillance of inmate labour.
.9
.10 .11
3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Prior to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall meet with the Director or his/her representative to: .1 Discuss the nature and extent of all activities involved in the Project. .2 Establish mutually acceptable security procedures in accordance with this instruction and the institution's particular requirements. Contractor shall: .1 Ensure that all Construction Employees are aware of the security requirements. .2 Ensure that a copy of the security requirements is always prominently on display at the job site. .3 Co-operate with institutional personnel in ensuring that security requirements are observed by all Construction Employees. Ensure sub-contractors provide lists of contact names and "after hours" telephone numbers, in case the Contractor needs to contact them after work hours on behalf of the Institution. This information will be considered confidential and the Contractor is responsible for its secure storage. The Contractor shall also provide the Director or designated representative of the Institution with a list of Contractor's company contact names and "after hours" telephone numbers, in case of emergency.
.2
.3
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
4 CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES
.1
Submit to the Director a signed security clearance request form for each construction employee seeking admission to the Institution. Allow two (2) weeks for processing of security clearances (CPIC's). Employees will not be admitted to the Institution without a valid security clearance (CPIC) in place and a recent picture identification such as a provincial driver's license. Security clearances obtained from other CSC Institutions are not valid at this Institution. The Director may require that facial photographs may be taken of Construction Employees and these photographs may be displayed at appropriate locations in the Institution or in an electronic database for identification purposes. The Director may require that Photo ID cards be provided for all Construction Employees. ID cards will then be left at the designated entrance to be picked upon arrival at the institution and shall be displayed prominently on the Construction Employees' clothing at all time while Construction Employees are in the institution. Photograph ID's issued to construction employees by the Institution must be added to tool lists and returned to the Institution at the completion of their work activity at the site. Entry to Institutional Property will be refused to any person there may be reason to believe may be a security risk. Any person employed on the construction site will be subject to immediate removal from Institutional Property if they: .1 Appear to be under the influence of alcohol, drugs or narcotics. .2 Behave in an unusual or disorderly manner. .3 Are in possession of contraband. Smoking is prohibited anywhere on CSC property.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
VEHICLES
.1
All unattended vehicles on CSC property shall have windows closed; doors and trunks shall be locked and keys removed. The keys shall be securely in the possession of the owner or an employee of the company that owns the vehicle. Failure to comply with the above will result in an immediate shutdown of the job site and
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 4 2011-05-25
VEHICLES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) stoppage of work for an indefinite period of time at the Contractor's expense. The Director may limit at any time the number and type of vehicles allowed within the Institution. Drivers of delivery vehicles for material required by the project will not require security clearances but must remain with their vehicle the entire time that the vehicle is in the Institution. The Director may require that these vehicles be escorted by Institutional Staff or Commissionaires while in the Institution. If the Director permits trailers to be left inside the secure perimeter of the Institution, these trailers' doors will be locked at all times. All windows will be securely locked when left unoccupied. All trailer windows shall be covered with expanded metal mesh. All storage trailers inside and outside the perimeter shall be locked when not in use. Sub-contractors will be responsible for providing locks and keys for their trailers, and to supply an extra key to the Contractor, in case access is required after work hours.
.2
.3
.4
PARKING
.1
Parking area(s) to be used by Construction Employees will be designated by the Director. Parking in other locations will be prohibited and vehicles may be subject to removal. All Contractor's vehicles brought inside the Institution will have to be removed at the end of each day.
SHIPMENTS
.1
All shipments of project material, equipment and tools shall be addressed in the Contractor's name to avoid confusion with the Institution's own shipments. The Contractor must have his/her own employees on site to receive any deliveries or shipments. CSC staff will NOT accept receipt of deliveries or shipments of any material, equipment or tools.
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 5 2011-05-25
TELEPHONES
.1
There will be no installation of telephones, Facsimile machines and computers with Internet connections permitted within the perimeter of the Institution unless prior approval of the Director is received. The Director will ensure that approved telephones, facsimile machine and computers with internet connections are located where they are not accessible to inmates. All computers will have an approved password protection that will stop an internet connection to unauthorized personnel. Wireless cellular and digital telephones, including but not limited to devices for telephone messaging, pagers, BlackBerries, telephone used as 2-way radios, are not permitted within the Institution unless approved by the Director. If wireless cellular telephones are permitted, the user will not permit their use by any inmate. The Director may approve but limit the use of two way radios.
.2
.3
.4
WORK HOURS
.1 .2
Work hours within the Institution are: Monday to Friday 07:30 hrs to 16:00 hrs. Work will not be permitted during weekends and statutory holidays without the permission of the Director. A minimum of two days (48 hours) advance notice will be required to obtain the required permission. In case of emergencies or other special circumstances, this advance notice may be waived by the Director.
10
OVERTIME WORK
.1
No overtime work will be allowed without permission of the Director. Give a minimum forty-eight (48) hours advance notice when overtime work on the construction project is necessary and approved. If overtime work is required because of an emergency such as the completion of a concrete pour or work to make the construction safe and secure, the Contractor shall advise the Director as soon as this condition is known and follow the directions given by the Director. Costs to the Departmental Representative for such events may be attributed to the Contractor.
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 6 2011-05-25
10
OVERTIME WORK (Cont'd)
.2
When overtime work, weekend, or statutory holiday work is required and approved by the Director, extra staff members may be posted by the Director or his/her designate, to maintain the security surveillance. The Departmental Representative may post extra staff for inspection of construction activities. The actual cost of this extra staff may be subject to reclamation by the Departmental Representative.
11 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.1
The Contractor and sub-contractors are to maintain a complete list of all tools and equipment on site and make this inventory available for inspection when required. Tool lists are to be prepared by the Contractor in consultation with the Commissionaire at the entrance to the Institution, upon arrival. The tool lists will then be vetted by institutional security and, once approved, the Contractor, sub-contractors, and tools will be permitted access. Throughout the construction project maintain up-to-date the list of tools and equipment specified above. .1 On a daily basis, the Contractor and sub-contractors shall utilize a sign-out system for any tools issued. At a minimum the sign-out system shall include a name of the tool, to whom it was issued, and confirmation that it was returned. All tools not issued shall be secured at all times. Particular attention is to be given to the distribution and location of power-driven and cartridge-driven tools, cartridges, files, saw blades, rod saws, wire, rope, ladders and any sort of jacking device. Store all tools and equipment in a secure room or in secure lockable tool boxes. location of room and/or location and type of tool boxes are subject to the approval of the Director. Lock secure storage room and/or all tool boxes when not in use. Keys to remain in the possession of the employees of the Contractor. Sub-contractors shall provide the Contractor with a copy of keys to secure stoarge room and/or tool boxes, in case access is required after hours.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 7 2011-05-25
11 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
.6
Scaffolding shall be secured and locked when not erected and when erected, will be secured in a manner agreed upon with the Institutional designate.
All missing or lost tools or equipment shall be reported immediately to the Director. The Director will ensure that the security staff members (Commissionaires) carry out checks and verifications of the Contractor's tools and equipment against the list provided by the Contractor. These checks may be carried out at the following intervals: .1 At the beginning and conclusion of every construction project. .2 Weekly, when the construction project extends longer than a one week period. .3 The Contractor may be subject to random checks by security staff to ensure proper storage and security of tools throughout the project. Inspection is to be done by the Commissionaires with the assistance of The Contractor and/or sub-contractor, and may take about one and a half (1-1/2) hours to complete. During this procedure every tool listed by the Contractor and/or sub-contractor has to be located and accounted for. At the end of each work day the Contractor and all sub-contractors are required to ensure all tools are accounted for before leaving the site for the day. Once tools have been verified by the Contractor and/or each sub-contractor, the Contractor and/or sub-contractors shall proceed to the Commissionaire's on-site office (immediately prior to leaving the Institution) to submit verbal and written declarations to this effect, to the Commissionaire on duty. The written declaration amounts to a person signing a logbook to record this activity. Certain tools/equipment such as cartridges, drill bits and hacksaw blades are highly controlled items. The Contractor will be given at the beginning of the day, a quantity that will permit one day's work. Used blades/cartridges will be returned to the Director's representative at the end of each day. If propane or natural gas is used for heating the construction, the Institution will require
.7 .8
.9
.10
.11
.12
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 8 2011-05-25
11 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
.12
(Cont'd) that an employee of the Contractor supervise the construction site during non-working hours. If torches or grinders are required tools to perform Work, Contractor must complete a Hot Work Permit as supplied by CSC. Completed original form(s) are copied and posted on the work site in a conspicuous location. Original documents are to remain with the Institutional Fire Chief. If the Contractor needs to remove tools from the site, he/she shall be responsible to notify the Commissionaire on duty, who will record this information, noting name of the Contractor, tool, date, and will initial the entry. Tool lists are to be modified accordingly. If the Contractor needs to bring additional tools or return previously removed tools to the work site, the Contractor is responsible to alert the Commissionaire, upon entering the Institution. Modify tool lists accordingly.
.13
.14
12
HARDWARE
.1
Security Hardware/ Keys - Existing: .1 Turn over all removed security hardware to the Director of the Institution for disposal or for safekeeping until required for re-installation. Security Hardware/ Keys - New: .1 Arrange with the security hardware supplier to have the cylinders and keys for the security hardware to be delivered from the manufacturer directly to the Institution, specifically the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO). .2 The SMO will provide a receipt to the Contractor for security hardware and keys. .3 Provide a copy of the security hardware and keys receipt to the Departmental Representative. Construction Hardware/ Keys: .1 The Contractor will use standard construction cylinders for locks for his/her use during the construction period. .2 The Contractor will issue instructions to his/her employees and sub-trades, as necessary, to ensure safe custody of the construction set of keys.
.2
.3
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 9 2011-05-25
12
HARDWARE (Cont'd)
.3
Construction Hardware/ Keys:(Cont'd) .3 Upon completion of each phase of the construction, the CSC representative will, in conjunction with the lock manufacturer: .1 Accept the operational keys and cylinders directly from the lock manufacturer. .2 CSC will arrange for removal and return of the construction cores and install the operational cores in all locks. Upon putting operational security keys into use, the CSC construction escort shall obtain these keys as they are required from the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO) and open doors as required by the Contractor. The Contractor shall issue instructions to his/her employees advising them that all security keys shall always remain with the CSC construction escort.
.4
13 PRESCRIPTION DRUGS
.1
Employees of the Contractor who are required to take prescription drugs during the workday shall obtain approval of the Director to bring a one day supply only into the Institution.
14 SMOKING RESTRICTIONS
.1
Contractors and construction employees are not permitted to smoke inside correctional facilities or outdoors within the perimeter of a correctional facility and must not possess unauthorized smoking items within the perimeter of a correctional facility. Contractors and construction employees who are in violation of this policy will be requested to immediately cease smoking or dispose of any unauthorized smoking items and, if they persist, will be directed to leave the institution. Smoking is only permitted outside the perimeter of a correctional facility in an area to be designated by the Director.
.2
.3
15
CONTRABAND
.1
Weapons, ammunition, explosives, alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics are prohibited on Institutional Property. Discovery of Contraband on the construction site and the identification of the person(s)
.2
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 10 2011-05-25
15
CONTRABAND (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) responsible for the Contraband shall be reported immediately to the Director. Contractors shall be vigilant with both their staff and the staff of their sub-contractors and suppliers that the discovery of Contraband may result in cancellation of the security clearance of the affected employee. Serious infractions may result in the removal of the company from the Institution for the duration of the construction. Presence of arms and ammunition in vehicles of Contractors, sub-contractors and suppliers or employees of these will result in the immediate cancellation of security clearances for the driver of the vehicle.
.3
.4
16
SEARCHES
.1 .2
All vehicles and persons entering Institutional property may be subject to search. When the Director suspects, on reasonable grounds, that an employee of the Contractor is in possession of Contraband or unauthorized items, he/she may order that person to be searched. All employees entering the Institution may be subject to screening of personal effects for traces of Contraband drug residue.
.3
17 ACCESS TO AND REMOVAL FROM INSTITIUION PROPERTY
.1
Construction personnel and commercial vehicles will not be admitted to the Institution after normal working hours, unless approved by the Director.
18 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES
.1
Escorted commercial vehicles will be allowed to enter or leave the Institution through the vehicle access gate during the following hours: .1 08:00 hrs to 11:30 hrs. .2 12:30 hrs to 15:45 hrs. Construction vehicles shall not leave the Institution until an inmate count is completed. The Contractor shall advise the Director twenty four (24) hours in advance to the arrival on the
.2 .3
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 11 2011-05-25
18 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) site of heavy equipment such as concrete trucks, cranes, etc. Vehicles being loaded with soil or other debris, or any vehicle considered impossible to search, must be under continuous supervision by CSC Staff or Commissionaires working under the authority of the Director. Commercial Vehicles will only be allowed access to Institutional Property when their contents are certified by the Contractor or his/her representative as being strictly necessary to the execution of the construction project. Vehicles shall be refused access to Institutional Property if, in the opinion of the Director, they contain any article which may jeopardize the security of the Institution. Private vehicles of Construction Employees will not be allowed within the security wall or fence of medium or maximum security Institutions without the permission of the Director. With prior approval of the Director, a vehicle may be used in the morning and evening to transport a group of employees to the work site. This vehicle will not remain within the Institution the remainder of the day. With the approval of the Director, certain equipment may be permitted to remain on the construction site overnight or over the weekend. This equipment must be securely locked, with the battery removed. The Director may require that the equipment be secured with a chain and padlock to another solid object.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
19 MOVEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES ON INSTITUTIONAL PROPERTY
.1
Subject to the requirements of good security, the Director will permit the Contractor and his/her employees as much freedom of action and movement as is possible. However, notwithstanding paragraph above, the Director may: .1 Prohibit or restrict access to any part of the Institution. .2 Require that in certain areas of the Institution, either during the entire construction project or at certain intervals, Construction Employees only be allowed access
.2
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 12 2011-05-25
19 MOVEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES ON INSTITUTIONAL PROPERTY (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) when accompanied by a member of the CSC security staff. During the lunch and coffee/health breaks, all employees will remain within the construction site. Employees are not permitted to eat in the officer's lounge and dining room.
.3
20 SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION
.1
Construction activities and all related movement of personnel and vehicles will be subject to surveillance and inspection by CSC security staff members to ensure that established security requirements are met. CSC staff members will ensure that an understanding of the need to carry out surveillance and inspections, as specified above, is established among Construction Employees and maintained throughout the construction project.
.2
21 STOPPAGE OF WORK
.1
The Director may request at any time that the Contractor, his/her employees, sub-contractors and their employees not enter or leave the work site immediately due to a security situation occurring within the Institution. The Contractor's site supervisor shall note the name of the staff member making the request and the time of the request and obey the order as quickly as possible. The Contractor shall advise the Departmental Representative within 24 hours of this delay to the progress of the work.
.2
22 CONTACT WITH INMATES
.1
Unless specifically authorized, it is forbidden to come into contact with inmates, to talk with them, to receive objects from them or to give them objects. Any employee doing any of the above will be removed from the site and his/her security clearance revoked. It is forbidden to take pictures of inmates, of CSC staff members or of any part of the Institution other than those required as part of this Contract.
.2
Sect 01 35 13.01 Page 13 2011-05-25
23 COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION PROJECT
.1
Upon completion of the construction project or, when applicable, the takeover of a facility, the Contractor shall remove all remaining construction material, tools and equipment that are not specified to remain in the Institution as part of the construction contract.
END
SECURITY REQUIREMENTS CBB11 CONSTRUCTION ZONE CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA
Sect 01 35 13.02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PURPOSE
.1
To ensure that both the construction project and the institutional operations may proceed without undue disruption or hindrance and that the security of the Institution is maintained at all times. Security requirements of Section 01 35 13.02 apply to Building CBB11 Construction Zone.
.2
DEFINITIONS
.1
"Contraband" means: .1 An intoxicant, including alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics. .2 Tobacco or associated tobacco products. .3 An igniting device, lighter or matches. .4 A weapon or a component thereof, ammunition for a weapon, and anything that is designed to kill, injure or disable a person or that is altered so as to be capable of killing, injuring or disabling a person, when possessed without prior authorization. .5 An explosive or a bomb or a component thereof. .6 Currency over any applicable prescribed limit, when possessed by an inmate without prior authorization. .7 Any item not described in paragraphs 2.1.1 to 2.1.6 that could jeopardize the security of a Penitentiary or the safety of persons, when that item is possessed without prior authorization. "Unauthorized Smoking and related Items" means all smoking items including, but not limited to, cigarettes, cigars, tobacco, chewing tobacco, cigarette making machines, matches and lighters. "Commercial Vehicle" means any motor vehicle used for the shipment of material, equipment and tools required for the construction project. "CSC" means Correctional Service Canada. "Director" means Director, Warden or Superintendent of the Institution as applicable. "Construction Employees" means persons working for the General Contractor, the sub-contractors, equipment operators, material suppliers, testing and inspection companies and regulatory agencies. "Departmental Representative" means the project manager from Public Works and Government Services Canada.
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
.7
Sect 01 35 13.02 Page 2 2011-05-25
DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)
.8
"Perimeter" means the fenced or walled area of the Institution that restrains the movement of the inmates.
"Construction Limits" means the area as shown on the contract drawings that the Contractor will be allowed to work, identified as and called Building CBB11 Construction Zone. "CPIC" means RCMP Canadian Police Information Centre. "Commissionaire" means designated representative of Director, to monitor construction related activities including surveillance of inmate labour.
.9
.10 .11
3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Co-operate with institutional personnel in ensuring that security requirements are observed by all construction employees.
4 CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMITTANCE
.1
Submit to the Director a signed security clearance request form for each construction employee seeking admission to the Institution. Allow two (2) weeks for processing of security clearances (CPIC's). Employees will not be admitted to the Institution without a valid security clearance (CIPC) in place and a recent picture identification such as a provincial driver's license. Security clearances obtained from other CSC Institutions are not valid at this Institution. The Director requires that facial photographs (ID Cards) be displayed prominently on the Construction Employees' clothing at all times while Construction Employees are in the Institution. Entry to Institutional Property will be refused to any person there may be reason to believe may be a security risk. Any person employed on the construction site will be subject to immediate removal from Institutional Property if they: .1 Appear to be under the influence of alcohol, drugs or narcotics. .2 Behave in an unusual or disorderly manner. .3 Are in possession of contraband.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Sect 01 35 13.02 Page 3 2011-05-25
4 CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMITTANCE (Cont'd)
.6
Smoking is prohibited anywhere on CSC property.
VEHICLES
.1
All unattended vehicles on CSC property shall have windows closed; doors and trunks shall be locked and keys removed. The keys shall be securely in the possession of the owner or an employee of the company that owns the vehicle. Failure to comply with the above will result in an immediate shutdown of the job site and a stoppage of work for an indefinite period of time at the Contractor's expense. The Director may limit at any time the number and type of vehicles allowed within the Institution. If the Director permits trailers to be left inside the secure perimeter of the Institution, or within the fenced construction site compound, these trailers' doors will be locked at all times. All windows will be securely locked when left unoccupied. All trailer windows shall be covered with expanded metal mesh. All storage trailers inside and outside the perimeter shall be locked when not in use.
.2
.3
PARKING
.1
Parking area(s) to be used by Construction Employees will be designated by the Director. Parking in other locations will be prohibited and vehicles may be subject to removal.
SHIPMENTS
.1
All shipments of project material, equipment and tools shall be addressed in the Contractor's name to avoid confusion with the Institution's own shipments. The Contractor must have his/her own employees on site to receive any deliveries or shipments. CSC staff will NOT accept receipt of deliveries or shipments of any material, equipment or tools.
Sect 01 35 13.02 Page 4 2011-05-25
WORK HOURS
.1
Work hours within the fenced construction site are: 07:00 hrs to 17:00 hrs, seven days per week.
OVERTIME WORK
.1
No overtime work will be allowed without permission of the Director. Give a minimum forty-eight (48) hours advance notice when overtime work on the construction project is necessary and approved. If overtime work is required because of an emergency such as the completion of a concrete pour or work to make the construction safe and secure, the Contractor shall advise the Director as soon as this condition is known and follow the directions given by the Director.
10 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.1
Keep all tools and equipment under constant supervision, particularly power-driven and cartridge-driven tools, cartridges, files, saw blades, rod saws, wire, rope, ladders and any sort of jacking device. Ensure that these tools and equipment are not accessible to inmates on the outside of the fenced perimeter enclosure. Ensure that at the end of each work day, and when not in use, all tools and equipment are locked in a secure room or in secure lockable tool boxes. All missing or lost tools or equipment shall be reported immediately to the Director.
.2
.3
11
HARDWARE
.1
Security Hardware/ Keys - Existing: .1 Turn over all removed security hardware to the Director of the Institution for disposal or for safekeeping until required for re-installation. Security Hardware/ Keys - New: .1 Arrange with the security hardware supplier to have the cylinders and keys for the security hardware to be delivered from the manufacturer directly to the Institution, specifically the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO). .2 The SMO will provide a receipt to the Contractor for security hardware and keys.
.2
Sect 01 35 13.02 Page 5 2011-05-25
11
HARDWARE (Cont'd)
.2
Security Hardware/ Keys - New:(Cont'd) .3 Provide a copy of the security hardware and keys receipt to the Departmental Representative. Construction Hardware/ Keys: .1 The Contractor will use standard construction cylinders for locks for his/her use during the construction period. .2 The Contractor will issue instructions to his/her employees and sub-trades, as necessary, to ensure safe custody of the construction set of keys. .3 Upon completion of each phase of the construction, the CSC representative will, in conjunction with the lock manufacturer: .1 Accept the operational keys and cylinders directly from the lock manufacturer. .2 CSC will arrange for removal and return of the construction cores and install the operational cores in all locks. Upon putting operational security keys into use, the CSC construction escort shall obtain these keys as they are required from the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO) and open doors as required by the Contractor. The Contractor shall issue instructions to his/her employees advising them that all security keys shall always remain with the CSC construction escort.
.3
.4
12 PRESCRIPTION DRUGS
.1
Employees of the Contractor who are required to take prescription drugs during the workday shall obtain approval of the Director to bring a one day supply only into the Institution.
13
CONTRABAND
.1
Weapons, ammunition, explosives, alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics are prohibited on Institutional Property. Discovery of Contraband on the construction site and the identification of the person(s) responsible for the Contraband shall be reported immediately to the Director. Contractors shall be vigilant with both their staff and the staff of their sub-contractors and suppliers that the discovery of Contraband may result in cancellation of the security clearance
.2
.3
Sect 01 35 13.02 Page 6 2011-05-25
13
CONTRABAND (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) of the affected employee. Serious infractions may result in the removal of the company from the Institution for the duration of the construction. Presence of arms and ammunition in vehicles of Contractors, sub-contractors and suppliers or employees of these will result in the immediate cancellation of security clearances for the driver of the vehicle.
.4
14
SEARCHES
.1 .2
All vehicles and persons entering Institutional property may be subject to search. When the Director suspects, on reasonable grounds, that an employee of the Contractor is in possession of Contraband or unauthorized items, he/she may order that person to be searched.
15 ACCESS TO AND REMOVAL FROM INSTITIUION PROPERTY
.1
Construction personnel and commercial vehicles will not be admitted to the Institution or the fenced primary construction site after normal working hours, unless approved by the Director. Access to the primary construction site will be through the south sallyport controlled by Commissionaires to provide Contractor access. During normal course of business Institutional staff will not be permitted on to the site due to Health and Safety Regulations.
.2
16 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES
.1
Vehicles shall be refused access to Institutional Property if, in the opinion of the Director, they contain any article which may jeopardize the security of the Institution. Private vehicles of Construction Employees will not be allowed within the security wall or fence of medium or maximum security Institutions without the permission of the Director. When equipment is permitted to remain on the construction site overnight or over the weekend this equipment must be securely locked and disabled.
.2
.3
Sect 01 35 13.02 Page 7 2011-05-25
17 SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION
.1
Construction activities and all related movement of personnel and vehicles will be subject to surveillance and inspection by CSC security staff members to ensure that established security requirements are met. CSC staff members will ensure that an understanding of the need to carry out surveillance and inspections, as specified above, is established among Construction Employees and maintained throughout the construction project.
.2
18 STOPPAGE OF WORK
.1
The Director may request at any time that the Contractor, his/her employees, sub-contractors and their employees not enter or leave the work site immediately due to a security situation occurring within the Institution. The Contractor's site supervisor shall note the name of the staff member making the request and the time of the request and obey the order as quickly as possible. The Contractor shall advise the Departmental Representative within 24 hours of this delay to the progress of the work.
.2
19 CONTACT WITH INMATES
.1
Unless specifically authorized, it is forbidden to come into contact with inmates, to talk with them, to receive objects from them or to give them objects. Any employee doing any of the above will be removed from the site and his/her security clearance revoked. It is forbidden to take pictures of inmates, of CSC staff members or of any part of the Institution other than those required as part of this Contract.
.2
20 COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION PROJECT
.1
Upon completion of the construction project or, when applicable, the takeover of a facility, the Contractor shall remove all remaining construction material, tools and equipment that are not specified to remain in the Institution as part of the construction contract.
END
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA): Canada .1 CSA S350-M1980(R2003), Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures. National Building Code 2005 (NBC): .1 NBC 2010, Division B, Part 8 Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition Sites. National Fire Code 2010 (NFC): .1 NFC 2010, Division B, Part 5 Hazardous Processes and Operations, Article 5.6.1.3 - Fire Safety Plan. Province of Ontario: .1 Occupational Health and Safety Act Revised Statutes of Ontario 1990, Chapter O.1 as amended, and Regulations for Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91 as amended. .2 Workplace Safety and Insurance Act, 1997. .3 Municipal statutes and authorities. Treasury Board of Canada Secretariat (TBS): .1 Treasury Board, Fire Protection Standard April 1, 2010 www.tbs-sct.gc.ca/pol/doc-eng.aspx ?id=17316&section=text. Fire Commissioner of Canada (FCC): .1 FC-301 Standard for Construction Operations, June 1982. .2 FC-302 Standard for Welding and Cutting, June 1982. Labour Program Fire Protection Engineering Services 4900 Yonge Street 8th Floor North York, Ontario M2N 6A8 and copies may be obtained from: Human Resources and Social Development Canada Labour Program Fire Protection Engineering Services Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0J2
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan: Within 7 days after date of Notice to Proceed
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) and prior to commencement of Work. Health and Safety Plan must include: .1 Results of site specific safety hazard assessment. .2 Results of safety and health risk or hazard analysis for site tasks and operations found in work plan. .3 Measures and controls to be implemented to address identified safety hazards and risks. .4 Provide a Fire Safety Plan, specific to the work location, in accordance with NBC, Division B, Article 8.1.1.1 prior to commencement of work. The plan shall be coordinated with, and integrated into, the existing Facility Emergency Procedures and Evacuation Plan in place at the site. Departmental Representative will provide Facility Emergency Procedures and Evacuation Plan. Deliver two copies of the Fire Safety Plan to the Departmental Representative not later than 14 days before commencing work. .5 Contractor's and sub-contractors' Safety Communication Plan. .6 Contingency and Emergency Response Plan addressing standard operating procedures specific to the project site to be implemented during emergency situations. Coordinate plan with existing Facility Emergency Response requirements and procedures provided by Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative will review Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety Plan and provide comments to Contractor within 5 days after receipt of plan. Revise plan as appropriate and resubmit plan to Departmental Representative within 3 days after receipt of comments from Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative's review of Contractor's final Health and Safety plan should not be construed as approval and does not reduce the Contractor's overall responsibility for construction Health and Safety. Submit names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health. Submit records of Contractor's Health and Safety meetings when requested. Submit 4 copies of Contractor's authorized representative's work site health and safety inspection reports to Departmental
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 3 2011-05-25
.7
(Cont'd) Representative, weekly and as directed by Departmental Representative. Submit copies of orders, directions or reports issued by health and safety inspectors of the authorities having jurisdiction. Submit copies of incident and accident reports. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Sections 01 47 15 and 02 81 01. Submit Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB)- Experience Rating Report. Medical Surveillance: where prescribed by legislation, regulation or safety program, submit certification of medical surveillance for site personnel prior to commencement of Work, and submit additional certifications for any new site personnel to Departmental Representative.
.8
.9 .10 .11 .12
1.3 FILING OF NOTICE
.1
File Notice of Project with Provincial authorities prior to commencement of Work.
1.4
WORK PERMIT
.1 .2
Obtain building permits related to project prior to commencement of Work. Obtain Hot Work Permit from Departmental Representative.
1.5 SAFETY ASSESSMENT
.1
Perform site specific safety hazard assessment related to project.
1.6
MEETINGS
.1
Schedule and administer Health and Safety meeting with Departmental Representative prior to commencement of Work.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1 .2
Comply with the Acts and regulations of the Province of Ontario. Comply with specified standards and regulations to ensure safe operations at site.
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan based on hazard assessment prior to beginning site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications. Departmental Representative may respond in writing, where deficiencies or concerns are noted and may request re-submission with correction of deficiencies or concerns either accepting or requesting improvements. Relief from or substitution for any portion or provision of minimum Health and Safety standards specified herein or reviewed site-specific Health and Safety Plan shall be submitted to Departmental Representative in writing.
.2
.3
1.9 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Comply with Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act, R.S.O. 1990 Chapter O.1, as amended.
1.10 RESPONSIBILITY
.1
Be responsible for health and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected by conduct of Work. Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, territorial and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan. Where applicable the Contractor shall be designated "Constructor", as defined by Occupational Health and Safety Act for the Province of Ontario.
.2
.3
1.11 UNFORSEEN HAZARDS
.1
Should any unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition become evident during performance of Work, immediately stop work and advise Departmental Representative verbally and in writing. Follow procedures in place for Employees Right to Refuse Work as specified in the Occupational Health and Safety Act for the Province of Ontario.
.2
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.12 POSTING OF DOCUMENTS
.1
Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous location on site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province of Ontario, and in consultation with Departmental Representative. .1 Contractor's Safety Policy. .2 Constructor's Name. .3 Notice of Project. .4 Name, trade, and employer of Health and Safety Representative or Joint Health and Safety Committee members (if applicable). .5 Ministry of Labour Orders and reports. .6 Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects for Province of Ontario. .7 Address and phone number of nearest Ministry of Labour office. .8 Material Safety Data Sheets. .9 Written emeregency Response Plan. .10 Site Specific Safety Plan. .11 Valid certificate of first aider on duty. .12 WSIB "In Case of Injury At Work" poster. .13 Location of toilet and cleanup facilities.
1.13 CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE
.1
Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by authority having jurisdiction or by Departmental Representative. Provide Departmental Representative with written report of action taken to correct non-compliance of health and safety issues identified. Departmental Representative may stop Work if non-compliance of health and safety regulations is not corrected.
.2
.3
1.14
BLASTING
.1
Blasting or other use of explosives is not permitted.
1.15 POWDER ACTUATED DEVICES
.1
Powder actuated devices are not permitted.
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.16
WORK STOPPAGE
.1
Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work. Assign responsibility and obligation to competent supervisor to stop or start Work when, at competent supervisor's discretion, it is necessary or advisable for reasons of health or safety. Departmental Representative may also stop Work for health and safety considerations.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END
ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01 35 43 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DEFINITIONS
.1
Environmental Pollution and Damage: presence of chemical, physical, biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health and welfare; unfavourably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade environment aesthetically, culturally and/or historically. Environmental Protection: prevention/control of pollution and habitat or environment disruption during construction. Control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants.
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to site, submit Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by Departmental Representative. Environmental Protection Plan is to present comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental issues which must be addressed during construction. Address topics at level of detail commensurate with environmental issue and required construction tasks. Environmental protection plan: include: .1 Names of persons responsible for ensuring adherence to Environmental Protection Plan. .2 Names and qualifications of persons responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from site. .3 Names and qualifications of persons responsible for training site personnel. .4 Descriptions of environmental protection personnel training program. .5 Erosion and sediment control plan which identifies type and location of erosion and sediment controls to be provided including monitoring and reporting requirements to assure
.3
.4
Section 01 35 43 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
Environmental protection plan:(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) that control measures are in compliance with erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations. .6 Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials on site. .7 Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of temporary roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet weather. Plans include measures to minimize amount of mud transported onto paved public roads by vehicles or runoff. .8 Work area plan showing proposed activity in each portion of area and identifying areas of limited use or non-use. Plan to include measures for marking limits of use areas including methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas. .9 Spill Control Plan: including procedures, instructions, and reports to be used in event of unforeseen spill of regulated substance. .10 Non-Hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris. .11 Air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust, debris, materials, and trash, do not become air borne and travel off project site. .12 Contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous substances to be used on job site; identifies intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into air, water, or ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations for storage and handling of these materials. .13 Waste water management plan that identifies methods and procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water, hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. .14 Historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands.
Section 01 35 43 Page 3 2011-05-25
.4
Environmental protection plan:(Cont'd) .15 Pesticide treatment plan: to be included and updated, as required. .16 Halocarbon Control Plan: submit documentation specified in PWGSC Ontario Region Halocarbon Information Sheet dated March 2010 including a signed, completed copy of the information sheet.
1.3
FIRES
.1
Fires and burning of rubbish on site not permitted.
1.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTES
.1 .2
Do not bury rubbish and waste materials on site unless approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials, such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner into waterways, storm or sanitary sewers.
1.5
DRAINAGE
.1
Provide erosion and sediment control plan that identifies type and location of erosion and sediment controls to be provided. Plan: include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that control measures are in compliance with erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) to be substituted for erosion and sedimentations control plan. Provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep excavations and site free from water. Do not pump water containing suspended materials into waterways, sewer or drainage systems. Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authority requirements.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 01 35 43 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 SITE CLEARING AND PLANT PROTECTION
.1 .2
Protect trees and plants on site and adjacent properties where indicated. Wrap in burlap, trees and shrubs adjacent to construction work, storage areas and trucking lanes, and encase with protective wood framework from grade level to height of 2 m. Protect roots of designated trees to dripline during excavation and site grading to prevent disturbance or damage. Avoid unnecessary traffic, dumping and storage of materials over root zones. Minimize stripping of topsoil and vegetation. Restrict tree removal to areas indicated or designated by Departmental Representative.
.3
.4 .5
1.7 WORK ADJACENT TO WATERWAYS
.1 .2 .3
Do not operate construction equipment in waterways. Do not use waterway beds for borrow material. Do not dump excavated fill, waste material or debris in waterways.
1.8 POLLUTION CONTROL
.1 .2 .3
Maintain temporary erosion and pollution control features installed under this contract. Control emissions from equipment and plant to local authorities' emission requirements. Prevent sandblasting and other extraneous materials from contaminating air and waterways beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures. Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris. Provide dust control for temporary roads. Spills of deleterious substances: .1 Immediately contain, limit spread and clean up in accordance with provincial regulatory requirements. .2 Report immediately to Ontario Spills Action Centre: 1-800-268-6060. .3 Further information on dangerous goods emergency cleanup and precautions including a list of companies performing this work can be
.4
.5
Section 01 35 43 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.8 POLLUTION CONTROL (Cont'd)
.5
Spills of deleterious substances:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) obtained from the Transport Canada 24-hour number (613) 996-6666 collect.
1.9
HALOCARBONS
.1
Comply with Federal Halocarbon Regulations 2003 under the Canadian Environmental Protection Act 1999, EPAM and PWGSC Ontario Region Halocarbon Information Sheet dated March 2010.
1.10 HISTORICAL/ ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONTROL
.1
Provide historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands known to be on project site: and/or identifies procedures to be followed if historical archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands not previously known to be onsite or in area are discovered during construction. Plan: include methods to assure protection of known or discovered resources and identify lines of communication between Contractor personnel and Departmental Representative.
.2
1.11
NOTIFICATION
.1
Departmental Representative will notify Contractor in writing of observed noncompliance with Federal, Provincial or Municipal environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of Contractor's Environmental Protection plan. Contractor: after receipt of such notice, inform Departmental Representative of proposed corrective action and take such action for approval by Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative will issue stop order of work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time extensions granted or equitable adjustments allowed to Contractor for such suspensions.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 43 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.12 RISK
SPECIES AT
.1
If peregrine falcons are encountered the Contractor shall cease all work and contact Departmental Representative for advice regarding mitigation measures. Contractor shall protect and not disturb the falcons and their offspring in accordance with Section 01 35 43. Falcons will become aggressive if disturbed.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 41 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES AND CODES
.1
Perform Work in accordance with National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010, National Fire Code of Canada (NFC) 2005 and Ontario Building Code (OBC) 2006, including all amendments up to bid closing date and other codes of provincial or local application provided that in case of conflict or discrepancy, more stringent requirements apply. Meet or exceed requirements of: .1 Contract documents. .2 Specified standards, codes and referenced documents.
.2
1.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL DISCOVERY
.1
Stop work immediately and notify Departmental Representative if materials which may contain designated substances or PCB's are discovered in course of work.
1.3 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT
.1
Comply with smoking restrictions.
1.4 RELICS AND ANTIQUITIES
.1
Relics and antiquities, and items of historical or scientific interest such as cornerstones and contents, commemorative plaques, inscribed tables, and similar objects found on site shall remain the property of Parks Canada. Protect such articles and request directives from Departmental Representative. Should historic objects be uncovered during excavating, stop work immediately and notify the Departmental Representative. Do not resume work until directed to by the Departmental Reperesentative.
.2
1.5 ACCESSIBLE DESIGN
.1
Comply with CAN/CSA-B651-04, Accessible Design for the Built Environment, unless specified otherwise. In any case of conflict or discrepancy between the building codes and CAN/CSA-B651, the requirements of CAN/CSA-B651 shall apply.
Section 01 41 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.6 STATISTICAL INFORMATION
.1
Provide statistical information to Departmental Representative: .1 Within ten working days after March 31 and September 30 occurring between commencement of work and final completion .2 Within ten working days after final completion. Include in statistical information: .1 Statement of total person days of labour used on site in performance of contract, including labour provided under sub-contracts. .2 Estimate of total value in dollars of material delivered to site and installed, including material provided and installed under sub-contracts. This information is required by Government of Canada solely to provide statistics that will aid in assessing socio-economic benefits of this project.
.2
.3
1.7
TAXES
.1
Pay applicable Federal, Provincial and Municipal taxes.
1.8
EXAMINATION
.1 .2
Examine existing conditions and determine conditions affecting work. Conduct concrete floor moisture testing using Calcium Chloride moisture tests. .1 Submit test results to Departmental Representative for approval prior to installing 2 any flooring. Conduct one test per 100 m of area being covered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Section 01 41 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
Section 01 42 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
.1
The abbreviations and acronyms are commonly found in the Project Manual and represent the associated organizations or terms.
1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS
.1
A: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15
AB: anchor bolt. AC: acoustic. AC PAN: acoustic panel. ACU: acoustic unit ceiling. AFF: above finished floor. AC PLAS: acoustic plaster. ACT: acoustic tile. ACR CU LVR: acrylic cube louvre. ADH: adhesive. ADJ: adjustable. A/C: air conditioner. AL: aluminum. ANOD: anodized. ARCH: architecture. ARCH BLK: architectural block.
.2
B: .1 B: base. .2 BEAST: benthic assessment of sediment. .3 BH: borehole. .4 BL: bottom layer. .5 BLK: block. .6 BLKD: bulkhead. .7 BM: beam. .8 BOT: bottom. .9 BMP: best management practice. .10 B PL: base plate. .11 BRG: bearing. .12 BRK: brick. .13 BSMT: basement. .14 BTEX: benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene, and xylenes. .15 BUR: built-up roof. C: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 CAL: caliper. CANTIL: cantilever. CB: catch basin. CC: centre to centre. CCN: contemplated change notice. CDF: controlled density fill. CEC: Canadian Electical Code. CF: chair fabric. CHAN: channel.
.3
Section 01 42 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS (Cont'd)
.3
C:(Cont'd) .10 CHS: Canadian Hydrographic Service. .11 CJ: construction joint. .12 CL: centreline. .13 CK: cork. .14 CLG: ceiling. .15 CLR: clear. .16 COL: column. .17 CONC: concrete. .18 CONC BLK: concrete block. .19 CONC BRK: concrete brick. .20 CONT: continuous. .21 CONT J: control joint. .22 COMPL: complete. .23 CM: centimetre. .24 CPL: cement plaster. .25 CPM: critical path method. .26 CPT: carpet. .27 CPTT: carpet tile. .28 CT: ceramic tile. .29 CVT: conductive vinyl tile. .30 C/W: complete with. D: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 E: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 D: deep. DD: dutch door. DEG: degree. DF: drinking fountain. DIA: diameter. DIM: dimension. DL: dead load. DMNT: demountable. DP: dampproofing. DR: door. DRP: drapery. DWL: dowel. EA: each. ECF: engineered containment facility. EE: each end. EF: each face. EL: elevation. ELEC: electric. ELEV: elevator. EM: expanded metal. ENCL: enclosure. EQ: equal. EXH: exhaust. EXIST: existing. EXPJ: expansion joint. EXP STRUCT: exposed structure. EXT: exterior. EW: each way.
.4
.5
Section 01 42 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
.6
F: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16

G: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 H: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 I: .1 .2 .3 .4 J: .1
FC: fuel contributed. FD: floor drain. FDN: foundation. FEAT W: feature wall. FEXT: fire extinguisher. FH: fire hose. FHC: fire hose cabinet. FHR: fire hose rack. FIN: finish. FIP: federal identity program. FL: floor. FLD: field. FLUOR: fluorescent. FR: frame. FRR: fire resistance rating. FTG: footing.
GALV: galvanized steel. GBD: gypsum board. GC: General Conditions. GF: ground floor. GFCI: ground fault circuit interrupter. GL: glass or glazing. GL BLK: glass block. GPC: gypsum plaster ceiling. GPW: gypsum plaster wall. HB: hose bib. HC: hollow core. HCWD: hollow core wood door. HDW: hardware. HDWD: hardwood. HM: hollow metal. HOR: horizontal. HOR EF: horizontal each face. HP: hydro pole. HPA: Hamilton Port Authority. HRV: heat recovery ventilator. HT: height. HTR: heater. HWT: hot water tank. HYD: hydrant. ICF: insulated concrete formwork. ID: inside diameter. INS: insulation. INTLK: interlock. JT: joint.
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 01 42 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
.11 .12
K: .1
L: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 M: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 N: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 O: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 P: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5
KPL: kick plate.

LAV: lavatory. LDG: landing. LG: long. LINO: linoleum. LL: live load. MAS: masonry. MAS FL: masonry flashing. MAX: maximum. MCL: metal cube louvre. MECH: mechanical. MET: metal. MET DK: metal deck. MET FL: metal flashing. MET GRID CLG: metal grid ceiling. MET GRTG: metal grating. MET LIN CLG: metal linear ceiling. MET T PTN: metal toilet partition. MH: maintenance hole. MIN: minimum. MLP: metal lath and plaster. MO: masonry opening. MR: marble. MT: metal threshold. MWP: membrane waterproofing. NBC: National Building Code. NF: near face. NFC: National Fire Code. NIC: not in contract. NRC: noise reduction coefficient. NRP: non removable pin. NTS: not to scale. OBC: Ontario Building Code. OC: on centre. OD: outside diameter. OPNG: opening. OPR: operator. OVHD: overhead. OWSJ: open web steel joist. P: prefinished. PAH: polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons. PARG: parging. PCC: precast concrete. PCT: porcelain ceramic tile.
.13
.14
.15
.16
Section 01 42 13 Page 5 2011-05-25
.16
P:(Cont'd) PED ACS FLG: pedestal access flooring. .6 PF: panel fabric. .7 .8 PL: plate. .9 PLAM: plastic laminate. .10 PLAS: plaster. .11 PLYWD: plywood. .12 PR: pair. .13 PREFAB: prefabricated. .14 PRFL: profile. .15 PT: paint. .16 PTN: partition. .17 PVC: polyvinyl cholide. Q: .1 .2 .3 R: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 S: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 QTB: quarry tile base. QTF: quarry tile floor. QTR: quarry tile roof. R: radius. RA: return air. RB: resilient base. RC: reinforced concrete. RCPT: receptacle. RD: roof drain. REINF: reinforced/reinforcing. REQD: required. REQT: requirement. RFT: rubber floor tile. RM: room. RO: rough opening. RP: radiant panel. RRS: recycled rubber sheet. RRT: recycled rubber tile. RSD: rolling steel door. RSF: rubber sheet flooring. RWL: rain water leader. SAN SEW: sanitary sewer. SCHED: schedule. SC: solid core. SCRN: screen. SCWD: solid core wood door. SD: smoke developed. SDT: static dissipative tile. SECT: section. SL: sliding. SPEC: specification. SS: stainless steel. STC: sound tranmission class. STD: standard. STL: steel. STL BM: steel beam.
.17
.18
.19
Section 01 42 13 Page 6 2011-05-25
.19
S:(Cont'd) .16 STL FL DK: steel floor deck. .17 STL PL: steel plate. .18 STN: stone. .19 STR: structure or structural. .20 ST SEW: storm sewer. .21 S&U: stain and urethane. .22 S&V: stain and varnish. .23 SVT: solid vinyl tile. T: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 U: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 V: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 T: top. T&B: top and bottom. TCB: turbidity control plan. TEL: telephone. TER: terrazzo. TERT: terrazzo tile. THKNS: thickness. THR: threshold. TMPD: tempered. TOPG: topping. TRANSV: transverse. TYP: typical. U: urethane. UCUT: undercut. UGRD: underground. UOS: unless otherwise specified. U/S: underside. UR: urinal. VCF: vinyl coated fabric. VCT: vinyl compositition tile. VERT: vertical. VERT B: vertical blinds. VERT EF: vertical each face. VSF: vinyl sheet flooring. VT: vinyl tile. VWC: vinyl wall covering.
.20
.21
.22
.23
W: .1 WC: water closet. .2 W-C: wall connectors. .3 WD: wood. .4 WDV: wood veneer. .5 WH: wall hydrant. .6 WHMIS: workplace hazardous materials information system. .7 WP: waterproofing. .8 WR: washroom. .9 WSIB: Workplace Safety and Insurnace Board. .10 WT: weight.
Section 01 42 13 Page 7 2011-05-25
.23
W:(Cont'd) .11 WTP: water treatment plant.
1.3 STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS
.1
Standards writing organizations: .1 AA - Aluminum Association. .2 ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association. .3 ANSI - American National Standards Institute. .4 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating and Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. .5 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. .6 AWI/AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada. .7 AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association. .8 AWWA - American Water Works Association. .9 BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. .10 CCDC - Canadian Construction Documents Committee. .11 CCMPA - Canadian Concrete Masonry Producers Association. .12 CGSB - Canadian General Standards Board. .13 CNTA - Canadian Nursery Trades Association. .14 CPCA - Canadian Painting Contractors Association. .15 CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association. .16 CSA - Canadian Standards Association. .17 CSC - Construction Specifications Canada. .18 CSDMA - Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association. .19 CSI - Construction Specifications Institute. .20 CSSBI - Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute. .21 CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association. .22 DHI - Door and Hardware Insitute. .23 EEMAC - Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada. .24 ESA - Electrical Safety Authority. .25 FCC - Fire Commissioner of Canada. .26 FSC - Forest Stewardship Council. .27 GANA - Glass Association of North America. .28 HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association.
Section 01 42 13 Page 8 2011-05-25
1.3 STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .29 IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc. .30 ISO - International Organization for Standardization. .31 IWFA - International Window Film Association. .32 LEED - LEED Canada, Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design. .33 MPI - Master Painters Insitute. .34 NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. .35 NCPI - National Clay Pipe Institute. .36 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. .37 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. .38 OPSD - Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings. .39 OPSS - Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications. .40 PPI - Plasctics Pipe Institute. .41 SDI - Steel Door Intitute. .42 SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District. .43 TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association. .44 TIAC - Thermal Insulation Association of Canada. .45 TTMAC - Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada. .46 UL - Underwriters Laboratories. .47 ULC - Underwriters Laboratories of Canada. .48 US EPA - United States Environmental Protection Agency. .49 WH - Warnock Hersey.
1.4 FEDERAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENGIES
.1
Departments, agencies and crown corporations. .1 CEAA - Canadian Environmental Assessment Agency. .2 CSC - Correctional Service Canada. .3 CRA - Canada Revenue Agency. .4 DND - Department of National Defence. .5 EC - Environment Canada. .6 FHBRO - Federal Heritage Buildings Review Office. .7 HC - Health Canada. .8 HCD - Heritage Conservation Directorate. .9 LC - Labour Canada. .10 PC - Parks Canada. .11 PWGSC - Public Works and Government Services Canada. .12 RCMP - Royal Canadian Mounted Police.
Section 01 42 13 Page 9 2011-05-25
1.4 FEDERAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENGIES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .13 TBS - Treasury Board Secretariat. .14 TC - Transport Canada.
1.5 PROVINCIAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENGIES
.1 .2 .3 .4
MOEE - Ontario Ministry of Environment and Energy. MOL - Ontario Ministry of Labour. MTO and MOT - Ontario Ministry of Transportation. TSSA - Technical Standards and Safety Authority.
1.6 INTERNATIONAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENCIES
.1 .2
DOHMH - New York City Department of Health and Mental Hygiene, USA. GSA - Government Services Administration, USA.
1.7 UNITS OF MEASURE METRIC
.1
The following abbreviations of units of measure are commonly found in the Project Manual: .1 C: Celsius. .2 cm: centimetre. .3 kg: kilogram. .4 kg/m3: kilogram per cubic metre. .5 kN: kilonewton. .6 kPa: kilopascals. .7 kw: kilowatts. .8 l/s: litre per second. .9 m: metre. .10 m3: cubic metre. .11 mg/kg: milligrams per kilogram. .12 mg/L: milligrams per litre. .13 mm: millimetres. .14 MPa: megapascal. .15 NTU: nephelometric turbidity unit. .16 ppm: parts per million. .17 ug/L: micrograms per litre. .18 ug/m3: micrograms per cubic metre.
Section 01 42 13 Page 10 2011-05-25
1.8 UNITS OF MEASURE IMPERIAL
.1
The following abbreviations of units of measure are commonly found in the Project Manual: .1 F: Fahrenheit. .2 ft: foot/feet. .3 ga: guage. .4 gpm: gallons per minute. .5 in: inches. .6 lbs: pounds. .7 NTU: nephelometric turbidity unit. .8 psi: pounds-force per square inch. .9 ppm: parts per million.
1.9
LEED TERMS
.1
Acronyms .1 CI: .2 EQ: .3 MR: .4 NC:
specific to LEED: commercial interiors. environmental quality. material and resources. new construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
INSPECTION
.1
Allow Departmental Representative access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress. Give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Departmental Representative instructions, or law of Place of Work. If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work. Departmental Representative may order any part of Work to be examined if Work is suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract Documents, Departmental Representative shall pay cost of examination and replacement.
.2
.3
.4
1.2 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES
.1
Inspection and testing shall be carried out by an independent agency acceptable to and approved by the Departmental Representative. Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies will be engaged by the Contractor for purpose of inspecting and/or testing portions of Work. Cost of such services will be borne by the Contractor. Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies. Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents. If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect
.2
.3 .4
.5
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) and irregularities as advised by Departmental Representative at no cost to Departmental Representative. Pay costs for retesting and reinspection.
1.3
ACCESS TO WORK
.1
Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication plants. Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.
.2
1.4
PROCEDURES
.1
Notify appropriate agency and Departmental Representative in advance of requirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made. Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in Work. Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.
.2
.3
1.5
REJECTED WORK
.1
Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by Departmental Representative as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with Contract Documents. Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly. If in opinion of Departmental Representative it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Departmental Representative may deduct from Contract Price difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which shall be determined by Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.6
REPORTS
.1 .2
Submit 4 copies of inspection and test reports to Departmental Representative. Provide copies to subcontractor of work being inspected or tested, manufacturer or fabricator of material being inspected or tested.
1.7 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS
.1 .2
Furnish test results and mix designs as may be requested. The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in Contract Documents or beyond those required by law of Place of Work shall be appraised by Departmental Representative and may be authorized as recoverable.
1.8
MOCK-UPS
.1
Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in specifications. Include for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups. Construct in all locations as specified in specific Section, and as directed by Departmental Representative. Prepare mock-ups for Departmental Representative's review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in Work. Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. If requested, Departmental Representative will assist in preparing a schedule fixing dates for preparation. Specification section identifies whether mock-up may remain as part of Work or if it is to be removed and when.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.9
MILL TESTS
.1
Submit mill test certificates as requested and/or required of specification Sections.
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.10 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Submit testing, adjusting and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building equipment systems. Submit Commissioning Documentation in accordance with Sections 01 91 00, 01 91 31 and 01 91 51.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Section 01 51 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Green Building Council (CaGBC) 01 33 00.
1.2 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
.1 .2
Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously. Remove from site all such work after use.
1.3
DEWATERING
.1
Provide temporary drainage and pumping facilities to keep excavations and site free from standing water.
1.4
WATER SUPPLY
.1 .2
Provide continuous supply of potable water for construction use. Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company and pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal.
1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION
.1
Provide temporary heating required during construction period, including attendance, maintenance and fuel. Construction heaters used inside building must be vented to outside or be non-flameless type. Solid fuel salamanders are not permitted. Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to: .1 Facilitate progress of Work. .2 Protect Work and products against dampness and cold. .3 Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces. .4 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage, installation and curing of materials. .5 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working environment. Maintain temperatures of minimum 10C in areas where construction is in progress.
.2
.3
.4
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Section 01 51 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION (Cont'd)
.5
Ventilating: Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, .1 mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied during construction. .2 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas. .3 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons. .4 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials. .5 Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities. .6 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful contaminants.
Permanent heating system of building, may not be used when available. Be responsible for damage to heating system if use is permitted. Ensure Date of Substantial Performance and Warranties for heating system do not commence until entire system is in as near original condition as possible and is certified by Departmental Representative. Pay costs for maintaining temporary heat, when using permanent heating system Departmental Representative will pay utility charges when temporary heat source is existing building equipment. Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment to: .1 Conform with applicable codes and standards. .2 Enforce safe practices. .3 Prevent abuse of services. .4 Prevent damage to finishes. .5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside. Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providing adequate heat and protection during construction.
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT
.1
Maximum power supply 4 wire, 600 amps, 60 3 phase, 4 wire, 400 and will be provided
of 347/600 volts, 3 phase, Hz, and 120/208 volts, amps, 60 Hz is available for construction use at no
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Section 01 51 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) cost. Connect to existing power supply in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code. Temporary power for electric cranes and other equipment requiring in excess of above is responsibility of Contractor. Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal. Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project. Ensure level of illumination on all floors and stairs is not less than 162 lx. Electrical power and lighting systems installed under this Contract may be used for construction requirements only with prior approval of Departmental Representative provided that guarantees are not affected. Make good damage to electrical system caused by use under this Contract. Replace lamps which have been used for more than 3 months.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.7 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATION FACILITIES
.1
Provide and pay for temporary telephone, fax, data hook up lines and equipment, and on-going services and supplies necessary for both own use and use of Departmental Representative. Cellular telephone systems are not permitted on Institution property.
.2
1.8 FIRE PROTECTION
.1
Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during performance of Work required by insurance companies having jurisdiction and governing codes, regulations and bylaws. Burning rubbish and construction waste materials is not permitted on site.
.2
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Section 01 51 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Section 01 52 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.189-2000, Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood. .2 CGSB 1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)/ Office of Water .1 EPA 833-R-06-004, May 2007, Developing Your Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan A Guide for Construction Sites.
.2
.3
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
Prepare site plan indicating proposed location and dimensions of area to be fenced and used by Contractor, number of trailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress to fenced area and details of fence installation. Identify areas which have to be gravelled to prevent tracking of mud. Indicate use of supplemental or other staging area. Provide construction facilities in order to execute work expeditiously. Remove from site all such work after use.
.2 .3 .4 .5
1.4
SCAFFOLDING
.1
Provide and maintain scaffolding, ramps, ladders, swing staging, platforms and temporary stairs, as required.
Section 01 52 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5
HOISTING
.1
Provide, operate and maintain hoists/cranes required for moving of workers, materials and equipment. Make financial arrangements with subcontractors for use thereof. Hoists/cranes shall be operated by qualified operator.
.2
1.6 SITE STORAGE/LOADING
.1
Confine work and operations of employees to areas defined by Contract Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber premises with products. Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with a weight or force that will endanger the Work.
.2
1.7 CONSTRUCTION PARKING
.1
Parking will be permitted on site in designated areas only and as directed by the Director, provided it does not disrupt performance of Work. Provide and maintain adequate access to project site. Build and maintain temporary roads where indicated or directed by Departmental Representative and provide snow removal during period of Work. If authorized to use existing roads for access to project site, maintain such roads for duration of Contract and make good damage resulting from Contractors' use of roads. Clean construction runways and taxi areas where used by Contractor's equipment.
.2 .3
.4
.5
1.8
OFFICES
.1
Provide office heated to 22C, lighted 750 lx and ventilated, of sufficient size to accommodate site meetings and furnished with drawing laydown table. Provide a clearly marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readily available location. Subcontractors may provide their own offices as necessary. Direct location of these offices in coordination with Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
Section 01 52 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.9 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE
.1
Provide and maintain, in a clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for storage of tools, equipment and materials. Materials, tools, equipment not accommodated in lockable weatherproof sheds on site, must be removed and stored outside the Institution on a daily basis, unless directed otherwise by Departmental Representative.
.2
1.10 SANITARY FACILITIES
.1
Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances. Post notices and take such precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition. When permanent water and drain connections are completed, provide temporary water closets and urinals complete with temporary enclosures, inside building. Permanent facilities may be used on approval of Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
1.11 CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE
.1 .2
Signs and notices for safety and instruction shall be in both official languages. Maintain approved signs and notices in good condition for duration of project, and dispose off site on completion of project or earlier if directed by Departmental Representative.
1.12 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
.1 .2
Provide access and temporary relocated roads as necessary to maintain traffic. Maintain and protect traffic on affected roads during construction period except as otherwise specifically directed by Departmental Representative. Provide measures for protection and diversion of traffic, including provision of watch-persons and flag-persons, erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in front of equipment and work, and erection and maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs Protect travelling public from damage to person and property.
.3
.4
Section 01 52 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.12 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC (Cont'd)
.5
Contractor's traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from site to interfere as little as possible with public traffic.
Verify adequacy of existing roads and allowable load limit on these roads. Contractor: responsible for repair of damage to roads caused by construction operations. Construct access and haul roads necessary. Haul roads: constructed with suitable grades and widths; sharp curves, blind corners, and dangerous cross traffic shall be avoided. Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for safe movement of traffic. Dust control: adequate to ensure safe operation at all times. Location, grade, width, and alignment of construction and hauling roads: subject to approval by Departmental Representative. Lighting: to assure full and clear visibility for full width of haul road and work areas during night work operations. Provide snow removal during period of Work, including areas at and around all security fence gates in the area of fenced construction site, and existing fire route as indicated on drawings. Remove, upon completion of work, haul roads designated by Departmental Representative.
.6
.7 .8
.9
.10 .11
.12
.13
.14
1.13
CLEAN-UP
.1 .2 .3 .4
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material from work site daily. Clean dirt or mud tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways. Store materials resulting from demolition activities that are salvageable. Stack stored new or salvaged material.
Section 01 52 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
.1
Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, sediment and erosion control drawings and sediment and erosion control plan, specific to site, that complies with EPA 833-R-06-004 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
.2
.3
END
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
Section 01 56 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-1.189-2000, Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA-O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood.
.2
.1 .2
Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously. Remove from site all such work after use.
1.3
HOARDING
.1
Erect temporary site enclosure using modular freestanding fencing: galvanized, minimum 1.8 m high, chain link or welded steel mesh, pipe rail. Provide one lockable truck entrance gate and at least one pedestrian door as directed and conforming to applicable traffic restrictions on adjacent streets. Equip gates with locks and keys. Maintain fence in good repair.
1.4 GUARD RAILS AND BARRICADES
.1
Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around deep excavations, open shafts, open stair wells, open edges of floors and roofs. Provide as required by governing authorities.
.2
1.5 WEATHER ENCLOSURES
.1
Provide weather tight closures to unfinished door and window openings, tops of shafts and other openings in floors and roofs. Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings; enclose building interior work for temporary heat. Design enclosures to withstand wind pressure and snow loading.
.2
.3
Section 01 56 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.6 DUST TIGHT SCREENS
.1
Provide dust tight screens or insulated partitions to localize dust generating activities, and for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and public. Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete.
.2
1.7
ACCESS TO SITE
.1
Provide and maintain access roads, ramps and construction runways as may be required for access to Work.
1.8 PUBLIC TRAFFIC FLOW
.1
Provide and maintain competent signal flag operators, traffic signals, barricades and flares, lights, or lanterns as required to perform Work and protect the public.
1.9
FIRE ROUTES
.1
Maintain access to property including overhead clearances for use by emergency response vehicles.
1.10 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY
.1 .2
Protect surrounding property from damage during performance of Work. Be responsible for damage incurred.
1.11 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES
.1
Provide protection for finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment during performance of Work. Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings. Confirm with Departmental Representative locations and installation schedule 3 days prior to installation. Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.
.2 .3
.4
Section 01 56 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 61 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1 .2 .3
Within text of specifications, reference may be made to reference standards. Conform to these standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in specifications. If there is question as to whether any product or system is in conformance with applicable standards, Departmental Representative reserves right to have such products or systems tested to prove or disprove conformance. The cost for such testing will be born by Departmental Representative in event of conformance with Contract Documents or by Contractor in event of non-conformance. Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards in effect on date of submission of Bids, except where specific date or issue is specifically noted. OPSS Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications and OPSD Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings quoted in these specifications are available online at http://www.raqsa.mto.gov.on.ca/ techpubs/ops.nsf/OPSHomepage.
.4
.5
.6
1.2
QUALITY
.1
Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided. Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection. Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly
.2
.3
Section 01 61 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 QUALITY (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) with Departmental Representative based upon requirements of Contract Documents. Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout building. Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.
.4
.5
1.3
AVAILABILITY
.1
Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable, notify Departmental Representative of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work. In event of failure to notify Departmental Representative at commencement of Work and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Departmental Representative reserves right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.
.2
1.4 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
.1
Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable. Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in Work. Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures. Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls. Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden
.2
.3 .4 .5
Section 01 61 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather. Store sheet materials and lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed moisture. Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion. Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Departmental Representative's satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.5
TRANSPORTATION
.1 .2
Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work. Transportation cost of products supplied by Departmental Representative will be paid for by Departmental Representative. Unload, handle and store such products.
1.6 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers. Notify Departmental Representative in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that Departmental Representative may establish course of action. Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes Departmental Representative to require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.
.2
.3
Section 01 61 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.7 QUALITY OF WORK
.1
Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Departmental Representative if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results. Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Departmental Representative reserves right to require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless. Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with Departmental Representative, whose decision is final.
.2
.3
1.8
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision. Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.
.2
1.9
CONCEALMENT
.1
In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except where indicated otherwise. Before installation, inform Departmental Representative if there is interference. Install as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
1.10
REMEDIAL WORK
.1
Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified as defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required. Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.
.2
1.11 LOCATION OF FIXTURES
.1
Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as approximate.
Section 01 61 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.11 LOCATION OF FIXTURES (Cont'd)
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of conflicting installation. Install as directed.
1.12
FASTENINGS
.1
Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise. Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials. Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected specification Section. Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not acceptable. Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly. Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not acceptable.
.2 .3
.4
.5 .6
1.13 FASTENINGS EQUIPMENT
.1
Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable for service. Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use Type 304 stainless steel for exterior areas. Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts. Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.
.2
.3 .4
Section 01 61 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.14 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS
.1
Prevent overloading of any part of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing structural member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Departmental Representative.
1.15 EXISTING UTILITIES
.1
When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at times directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work, Institution's occupants, and pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location of capped service.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
Section 01 71 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Existing survey control points and property limits.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR
.1
Qualified registered land surveyor, licensed to practise in Place of Work, acceptable to Departmental Representative.
1.3 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
.1 .2
Existing base horizontal and vertical control points are designated on drawings. Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to starting site work. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Departmental Representative. Report to Departmental Representative when reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. Require surveyor to replace control points in accordance with original survey control.
.3 .4
.5
1.4 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
.1
Establish two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established bench marks by survey control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data in Project Record Documents. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation. Stake for grading, fill and topsoil placement. Establish pipe invert elevations. Establish foundation locations and floor elevations. Establish lines and levels for mechanical and electrical work.
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Section 01 71 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5 EXISTING SERVICES
.1
Before commencing work, establish location and extent of service lines in area of Work and notify Departmental Representative of findings. Remove abandoned service lines within 2 metres of structures. Cap or otherwise seal lines at cut-off points as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
1.6 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES
.1
Location of equipment, fixtures and outlets indicated or specified are to be considered as approximate. Locate equipment, fixtures and distribution systems to provide minimum interference and maximum usable space and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for safety, access and maintenance. Inform Departmental Representative of impending installation and obtain approval for actual location. Submit field drawings to indicate relative position of various services and equipment when required by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
1.7
RECORDS
.1 .2
Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. On completion of foundations and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of Work. Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandoned service lines.
.3
1.8
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit name and address of surveyor to Departmental Representative. On request of Departmental Representative, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. Submit certificate signed by surveyor certifying and noting those elevations and locations of completed Work that conform and do not conform with Contract Documents.
.3
Section 01 71 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
EXECUTION
Section 01 73 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: .1 Structural integrity of elements of project. .2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. .3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. .4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. .5 Work of separate contractor. Include in request: .1 Identification of project. .2 Location and description of affected Work. .3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration. .4 Description of proposed Work, and products to be used. .5 Alternatives to cutting and patching. .6 Effect on Work of separate contractor. .7 Written permission of affected separate contractor. .8 Date and time work will be executed.
.3
1.2
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Required for original installation. Change in Materials: Submit request for substitution in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.3
PREPARATION
.1
Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage.
.2 .3 .4
EXECUTION
Section 01 73 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3 PREPARATION (Cont'd)
.5
Provide protection from elements for areas which are to be exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water.
1.4
EXECUTION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete Work. Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work. Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. Remove samples of installed Work for testing Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed on masonry work without prior approval. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection. Refinish assemblies by refinishing entire unit. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with firestopping material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, full thickness of the construction element.
.7
.8
.9
.10 .11
.12
.13
EXECUTION
Section 01 73 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 EXECUTION (Cont'd)
.14
Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas except where indicated otherwise.
1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
CLEANING
Section 01 74 11 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PROJECT CLEANLINESS
.1
Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by other Contractors. Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Departmental Representative. Do not burn waste materials on site. Clear snow and ice from access to building, bank/pile snow in designated areas only or remove from site, as directed. Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials and debris. Provide and use clearly marked separate bins for recycling. Refer to Section 01 74 20. Remove waste material and debris from site at end of each working day. Dispose of waste materials and debris off site. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, and maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and remove from premises at end of each working day. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use of building ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces nor contaminate building systems.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9
.10
.11
.12
.13
CLEANING
Section 01 74 11 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2
FINAL CLEANING
.1
When Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work. Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work clean and suitable for occupancy. Prior to final review, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment. Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by other contractors. Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Departmental Representative. Do not burn waste materials on site. Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris. Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass. Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls and floors. Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces. HEPA vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens. Wax, seal or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer. Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation. Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces. Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, downspouts, areaways, sunken wells, and drainage systems.
.2
.3 .4 .5
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15
CLEANING
Section 01 74 11 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.2 FINAL CLEANING (Cont'd)
.16 .17
Sweep and wash clean paved areas.

Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment. Remove debris and surplus materials from crawl areas and other accessible concealed spaces. Remove snow and ice from access to building.
.18 .19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Section 01 74 20 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DEFINITIONS
.1
Materials Source Separation Program (MSSP): consists of series of ongoing activities to separate reusable and recyclable waste material into material categories from other types of waste at point of generation. Recyclable: ability of product or material to be recovered at end of its life cycle and re manufactured into new product for reuse. Recycle: process by which waste and recyclable materials are transformed or collected for purpose of being transferred into new products. Recycling: process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for purpose of using in altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. Reuse: repeated use of product in same form but not necessarily for same purpose. Reuse includes: .1 Salvaging reusable materials from re modelling projects, before demolition stage, for resale, reuse on current project or for storage for use on future projects. .2 Returning reusable items including pallets or unused products to vendors. Salvage: removal of structural and non structural materials from deconstruction/disassembly projects for purpose of reuse or recycling. Separate Condition: refers to waste sorted into individual types. Source Separation: acts of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from first time they became waste.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7 .8
1.2
DOCUMENTS
.1
Maintain at job site, one copy of following documents: .1 Material Source Separation Plan.
Section 01 74 20 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Prepare and submit following prior to project start up: .1 Submit 2 copies of Materials Source Separation Program (MSSP) description.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE
.1
Carefully deconstruct and source separate materials/equipment and divert, from D&C waste destined for landfill to maximum extent possible. Target for this project is 95% diversion from landfill. Reuse, recycle, compost, anaerobic digest or sell material for reuse except where indicated otherwise. On site sales are not permitted. Source separate waste and maintain waste audits in accordance with the Environmental Protection Act, Ontario Regulation 102/94 and Ontario Regulation 103/94. .1 Provide facilities for collection, handling and storage of source separated wastes. .2 Source separate the following waste: .1 Brick and portland cement concrete. .2 Corrugated cardboard. .3 Wood, not including painted or treated wood or laminated wood. .4 Gypsum board, unpainted. .5 Steel. Submit a Waste Reduction Workplan indicating the materials and quantities of material that will be recycled and diverted from landfill. .1 Indicate how material being removed from the site will be reused, recycled, composted or anaerobically digested using Deconstruction and Waste Products Workplan Summary. Submit proof that all waste is being disposed of at a licensed land fill site or waste transfer site. A copy of the disposal/waste transfer site's license and a letter verifying that said landfill site will accept the waste must be supplied to Departmental Representative prior to removal of waste from the demolition site.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 74 20 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 MATERIALS SOURCE SEPARATION PROGRAM (MSSP)
.1 .2
Prepare MSSP and have ready for use prior to project start up. Implement MSSP for waste generated on project in compliance with approved methods and as reviewed by Departmental Representative. Provide on site facilities for collection, handling, and storage of anticipated quantities of reusable and recyclable materials. Provide containers to deposit reusable and recyclable materials. Locate containers in locations, to facilitate deposit of materials without hindering daily operations. Locate separated materials in areas which minimize material damage. Collect, handle, store on site, and transport off site, salvaged materials in separate condition. .1 Transport to approved and authorized recycling facility. Collect, handle, store on site, and transport off site, salvaged materials in combined condition. .1 Ship materials to site operating under Certificate of Approval. .2 Materials must be immediately separated into required categories for reuse or recycling.
.3
.4 .5
.6 .7
.8
1.6 WASTE PROCESSING SITES
.1
Province of: Ontario. .1 Ministry of Environment and Energy, 135 St. Clair Avenue West, Toronto, ON, M4V 1P5. .2 Telephone: 800-565-4923 or 416-323-4321. .3 Fax: 416-323-4682. Recycling Council of Ontario: 215 Spadina Avenue, #225, Toronto, ON, M5T 2C7. .1 Telephone: 416-657-2797 .2 Fax: 416-960-8053 .3 Email: rco@rco.on.ca. .4 Internet: http://www.rco.on.ca/.
.2
Section 01 74 20 Page 4 2011-05-25
.1
Store, materials to be reused, recycled and salvaged in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. Unless specified otherwise, materials for removal become Contractor's property. Protect, stockpile, store and catalogue salvaged items. Separate non salvageable materials from salvaged items. Transport and deliver non salvageable items to licensed disposal facility. Protect surface drainage, mechanical and electrical from damage and blockage. Separate and store materials produced during dismantling of structures in designated areas. Prevent contamination of materials to be salvaged and recycled and handle materials in accordance with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities. .1 On site source separation is recommended. .2 Remove co mingled materials to off site processing facility for separation. .3 Provide waybills for separated materials.
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6 .7
1.8 DISPOSAL OF WASTES
.1 .2 .3 .4
Do not bury rubbish or waste materials. Do not dispose of waste into waterways, storm, or sanitary sewers. Remove materials from deconstruction as deconstruction/disassembly Work progresses. Prepare project summary to verify destination and quantities on a material by material basis as identified in pre demolition material audit.
1.9 USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES
.1
Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to normal use of premises.
.2
Provide temporary security measures approved by Departmental Representative.
Section 01 74 20 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.10
SCHEDULING
.1
Co-ordinate Work with other activities at site to ensure timely and orderly progress of Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
Handle waste materials not reused, salvaged, or recycled in accordance with appropriate regulations and codes.
3.2
CLEANING
.1
Remove tools and waste materials on completion of Work, and leave work area in clean and orderly condition. Clean up work area as work progresses. Source separate materials to be reused/recycled into specified sort areas.
.2 .3
3.3 DIVERSION OF MATERIALS
.1
The diversion of waste materials from landfills is highly encouraged. Separate, recyclable and reusable materials where possible. On site sale of salvaged, recovered, reusable, or recyclable materials is not permitted.
.2
Section 01 74 20 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.4 CANADIAN GOVERNMENTAL DEPARTMENTS CHIEF RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ENVIRONMENT
.1
Government Chief Responsibility for the Environment. Province Ontario General Inquiries Ministry of (416) Environment 323-4321 and Energy (800) 135 St Clair 565-4923 Avenue West Toronto, ON M4V 1P5 Environment (416) Canada 734-4494 Toronto, ON Address Fax (416) 323-4682
END
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Section 01 77 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 INSPECTION AND DECLARATION
.1
Contractor's Inspection: Contractor and all subcontractors shall conduct an inspection of Work, identify deficiencies and defects, and repair as required to conform to Contract Documents. .1 Notify Departmental Representative in writing of satisfactory completion of Contractor's Inspection and that corrections have been made. .2 Request Departmental Representative's Inspection. Departmental Representative's Inspection: Departmental Representative and Contractor will perform inspection of Work to identify obvious defects or deficiencies. Contractor to correct Work accordingly. Completion: submit written certificate that following have been performed: .1 Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. .2 Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed. .3 Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully operational. .4 Certificates required by Boiler Inspection Branch, Fire Commissioner and Utility companies have been submitted. .5 Operation of systems have been demonstrated to Institution's personnel. .6 Work is complete and ready for final inspection. Final Inspection: when items noted above are completed, request final inspection of Work by Departmental Representative and Contractor. If Work is deemed incomplete by Departmental Representative, complete outstanding items and request reinspection.
.2
.3
.4
1.2
CLEANING
.1 .2
In accordance with Section 01 74 11. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Section 01 77 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUBMISSION
.1 .2
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Departmental Representative's comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Departmental Representative, four final copies of maintenance manuals and commissioning documentation in English. Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new, undamaged or defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in Work. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided. Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products at own expense. Pay costs of transportation.
.3 .4 .5
.6
.7 .8
.9
1.2
FORMAT
.1 .2 .3
Organize data in the form of an instructional manual. Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 219 x 279 mm with spine and face pockets. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. Identify contents of each binder on spine. Cover: Identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title of project and identify subject matter of contents.
.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 FORMAT (Cont'd)
.5 .6
Arrange content by systems, under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents.
Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data. Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger Provide CAD files in dwg format on CD or USB drive.
.7 .8 .9
1.3 CONTENTS EACH VOLUME
.1
Table of Contents: provide title of project; .1 date of submission; names, .2 addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor with name of responsible parties; .3 schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume. For each product or system: .1 list names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. Product Data: mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information. Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in Section 01 45 00. Training: Refer to Section 01 79 00.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.4 AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES
.1
In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Departmental Representative one record copy of: .1 Contract Drawings. .2 Specifications.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Amendments. .3 .4 Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. .5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. .6 Field test records. .7 Inspection certificates. .8 Manufacturer's certificates. Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage. Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Departmental Representative. Turn one set, paper copy and electronic copy, of AS-BUILT drawings and specifications over to Departmental Representative on completion of work. If project is completed without significant deviations from Contract drawings and specifications submit to Departmental Representative one set of drawings and specifications marked "AS-BUILT".
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
1.5 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Record information on set of black line opaque drawings, and in copy of Project Manual, provided by Departmental Representative. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for recording information. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded.
.2
.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.5 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
.4
Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. .2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. .3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. .4 Field changes of dimension and detail. .5 Changes made by change orders. .6 Details not on original Contract Drawings. .7 References to related shop drawings and modifications.
Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items. .2 Changes made by Amendments and change orders. Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, required by individual specifications sections.
.5
.6
1.6
FINAL SURVEY
.1
Submit final site survey certificate in accordance with Section 01 71 00, certifying that elevations and locations of completed Work are in conformance, or non-conformance with Contract Documents.
1.7 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operation characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications. Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.
.2
.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.7 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.4
Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 45 00 and 01 91 00. Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification sections.
.5
.6 .7 .8 .9
.10 .11 .12
.13
.14 .15
1.8 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
.1
Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.8 MATERIALS AND FINISHES (Cont'd)
.2
Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.
.3
.4
1.9
SPARE PARTS
.1
Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections and as directed by Departmental Representative. Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work. Deliver to location as directed; place and store. Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual. Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
.2 .3 .4
.5
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work. Deliver to location as directed; place and store. Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual. Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
.2 .3 .4
.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
1.11
SPECIAL TOOLS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section. Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment. Deliver to location as directed; place and store. Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.
.1
Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures. Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room. Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.
.2 .3 .4 .5
1.13 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
.1 .2
Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing. List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Departmental Representative's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Certificate of Substantial Performance is determined. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
.3
.4
.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
1.13 WARRANTIES AND BONDS (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.6 .7
Co-execute submittals when required.

Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Section 01 79 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
.1
Demonstrate scheduled operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Departmental Representative's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Performance. Departmental Representative will provide list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their attendance at agreed-upon times.
.2
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
.1
When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Institution's personnel, and provide written report that demonstration and instructions have been completed. Submit training schedule of time and date for demonstration and training of each item of equipment and each system in accordance with the training plan four weeks prior to designated dates, for Departmental Representative's approval. Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstration, that demonstration and instructions have been satisfactorily completed. Report shall give time and date of each demonstration and training, with list of persons present.
.2
.3
.4
1.3 CONDITIONS FOR DEMONSTRATIONS
.1 .2
Equipment has been inspected and put into operation. Testing, adjusting, and balancing has been performed in accordance with Sections 01 91 00 and 01 91 31 and equipment and systems are fully operational. Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals for use in demonstrations and instructions.
.3
Section 01 79 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4
PREPARATION
.1 .2
Verify that conditions for demonstration and instructions comply with requirements. Verify that designated O&M personnel are present.
1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting,, servicing, and maintenance of each item of equipment at scheduled and/or agreed upon times, at the designated location. Instruct personnel in all phases of operation and maintenance using operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
.2
.3 .4
1.6 TIME ALLOCATED .1 FOR INSTRUCTIONS
Ensure amount of time required for instruction of each item of equipment or system as follows: .1 Heating Plant Connection: 2 x 4 hours of instruction. .2 Cooling and Ventilation System: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .3 Smoke Control System: 2 x 8 hours of instruction. .4 Control System: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .5 Plumbing System: 2 x 8 hours of instruction. .6 Electrical System: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .7 Fire Alarm System: 2 x 8 hours of instruction. .8 Emergency Generator System: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .9 Elevators: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .10 Other systems as required (minimum 2 different occurrences to deal with facility's staff shifts).
Section 01 79 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
COMMISSIONING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 91 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Co-operate with System Commissioning Administrator or testing agency under provisions specified in Section 01 45 00. System Commissioning Administrator: current member in good standing of AABC, NEBB, certified to perform specified services. One of the commissioning requirements is that the General Contractor must engage a qualified independent System Commissioning Administrator (SCA) to coordinate and organize all Pre-Commissioning Testing, Commissioning Testing, and O&M Training. The SCA must complete the Contractor's Commissioning Documentation as specified in this Section. The System Commissioning Administrator: a qualified independent System Commissioning Administrator (SCA) for scheduling, coordination and supervision of Contractor's commissioning activities during construction, acceptance, and post-acceptance stages. The System Commissioning Administrator shall provide Contractor's Commissioning Documentation. Unless approved by the PWGSC Commissioning Manager, the System Commissioning Administrator shall be a NEBB qualified SCA in building systems commissioning. The Contractor shall hire and submit the name of SCA with documentation confirming qualifications within 15 working days of award of contract. Comply with applicable procedures and standards of the certification sponsoring association. Perform services under direction of supervisor qualified under certification requirements of sponsoring association.
.2
.3 .4
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards For Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total Systems Balance, Air Distribution-Hydronics Systems, 2002. ASHRAE Guideline 1-2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process. ASHRAE Guideline 4-2008, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building System.
.2 .3
Section 01 91 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 REFERENCES (Cont'd)
.4 .5
NEBB Procedural Standards for Whole Building Systems Commissioning of New Construction, 2009.
ANSI/NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems, 2009. ASHRAE Guideline 0, 2005 - The Commissioning Process. The most stringent requirements of the above noted commissioning standards and guidelines shall apply.
.6 .7
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Within 15 working days of Award of Contract, submit name of System Commissioning Administrator proposed to perform services who has managerial responsibilities for coordination of all commissioning activities. Submit documentation to confirm System Commissioning Administrator compliance with quality assurance provision. Submit 3 preliminary specimen copies of each type of startup checklist, product information and performance verification report forms proposed for use. Submit completed report forms within 3 days after completion of each testing to Departmental Representative for review and verification. Fifteen days prior to Substantial Performance, submit 3 copies of final reports on applicable forms for functional performance verification. Submit post-commissioning reports of testing, adjusting, and balancing postponed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other reasons beyond Contractor's control, promptly after execution of those services. The "Commissioning" for this project is defined as, planned program of activities which enhance quality management and information' transfer that extends throughout all stages of project delivery. The commissioning activities shall include the standard activities and the enhanced activities which are traditionally not provided by the design and construction industry and which are defined in this document.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 01 91 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4
REPORT FORMS
.1 .2
System Commissioning Administrator having managerial responsibility shall make reports. Report forms shall include: .1 Startup Checklists. .2 Product Information (PI) Report forms. .3 Performance Verification (PV) Report forms. Ensure each form bears signature of recorder, and that of supervisor of reporting organization. Submit signed form to Departmental Representative for review, approval and signature. Identify each instrument used for testing, adjusting and balancing and its latest date of calibration.
.3
.4
.5
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
.1 .2
Prepare each system for testing and balancing. Cooperate with System Commissioning Administrator or testing organization and provide access to equipment and systems. Provide personnel and operate systems at designated times, and under conditions required for proper testing, adjusting, and balancing. Notify testing organization and Departmental Representative 7 days prior to time project will be ready for testing, adjusting, and balancing. Accurately record data for each step. Report to Departmental Representative any deficiencies or defects noted during performance of services. Correct deficiencies identified in accordance with Departmental Representative's written instructions. The key members of the commissioning team, include the Contractor, the Departmental Representative, and the Commissioning Authority (Isotherm Engineering Ltd.). .1 It is the Contractor's responsibility to engage a qualified independent System Commissioning Administrator (SCA) to represent the Contractor including sub-contractors. The
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
Section 01 91 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES (Cont'd)
.8
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) SCA shall be responsible for carrying out the Contractor's commissioning activities under the direction of the Departmental Representative. .2 The PWGSC Commissioning Manager (or its representative) will be assisted by the Departmental Representative and other project team members for overview of the commissioning activities on behalf of the PWGSC Project Manager. The PWGSC Commissioning Manager is the Commissioning Authority for this project. The Contractor is responsible for the following standard commissioning activities and enhanced commissioning activities during project construction, commissioning and operation phases. .1 Construction Phase: .1 Engage a qualified independent System Commissioning Administrator as single point of contact for all matters relating to commissioning (enhanced activity). .2 Conduct Separate commissioning meetings and prepare minutes of meeting. .3 Submit shop drawings (standard activity). .4 Conduct equipment installation and start-up tests, and submit test reports (standard activity). .5 Perform TAB and submit TAB report (standard activity). .6 Conduct System Start-up Verification Testing and complete Start-up Checklists and PI Report forms (enhanced activity). .2 Commissioning Phases: .1 Conduct separate commissioning meetings and prepare minutes of meeting. .2 Conduct Functional Performance Testing and complete PV Report forms (enhanced activity). .3 Demonstrate system operations (standard activity). .4 Submit Maintenance Manuals (formerly called O&M Manuals) (standard activity). .5 Submit "As-Built" drawings (standard activity). .6 Conduct O&M training (standard activity). .3 Operation Phase: .1 Conduct separate commissioning meetings and prepare minutes of meeting. .2 Conduct deferred Functional Performance Testing and complete PV Report forms (enhanced activity).
.9
Section 01 91 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
.9
(Cont'd) .3 Operation Phase:(Cont'd) .3 Provide fine-tuning (standard activity). .4 Provide specified inspection and maintenance services during warranty period (standard activity). The Departmental Representative will carry out the following commissioning activities related to the Contractor: .1 Prepare Start-up Checklists PI and PV Report Forms and Functional Performance Test Forms (enhanced activity). .2 Prepare Standard Operation Procedures (SOP) Manual (formerly called Systems Manual) (enhanced activity). .3 Review and approve shop drawings standard activity). .4 Review and inspect installation, and prepare construction deficiencies report (standard activity). .5 Review and approve TAB report (standard activity). .6 Direct and approve System Start-up Verification Testing (enhanced activity). .7 Direct and approve Functional Performance Testing (enhanced activity). .8 Review and approve Maintenance Manuals (standard activity). .9 Review and approve "As-Built" drawings (standard activity). .10 Update Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) Manual (enhanced activity). .11 Review O&M training (standard activity). .12 Prepare commissioning report (enhanced activity). .13 Witness post-acceptance commissioning testing (enhanced activity). .14 Direct and approve post-acceptance fine-tuning and review warranty services (standard activity). .15 Update commissioning report (enhanced activity). The PWGSC Commissioning Manager (or its representative) will carry out the following commissioning activities related to the Contractor and the Departmental Representative: .1 Review and approve, the qualifications of the System Commissioning Administrator (SCA) submitted by the Contractor. .2 Review and approve Start-up Checklists, PI and PY Report. Forms prepared by the Departmental Representative.
.10
.11
Section 01 91 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
.11
(Cont'd) Witness System Start-up Verification .3 Testing conducted by the Contractor and review test reports. .4 Witness Functional Performance Testing conducted by the Contractor and review test reports. .5 Review and approve O&M training conducted by the Contractor. .6 Review commissioning documentation submitted by the Contractor and Departmental Representative. .7 Review and approved commissioning report prepared by the Departmental Representative. .8 Witness the post-acceptance commissioning testing conducted by the Contractor and review test reports. .9 Review and approve updated commissioning report prepared by the Departmental Representative.
1.6
PREPARATION
.1 .2
Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Departmental Representative to facilitate spot checks during testing and functional performance verification. Retain possession of instruments and remove at completion of services. Verify systems installation is complete and in continuous operation. Verify lighting is turned on when lighting is included in cooling load. Verify equipment such as computers, laboratory and electronic equipment are in full operation when these equipment are included in cooling load.
.3 .4 .5 .6
1.7
EXECUTION
.1
Test equipment, balance distribution systems, and adjust devices for HVAC, and all systems, as directed and requested by Departmental Representative. The commissioning shall not be limited to the HVAC systems. Include the following systems in the commissioning scope: .1 Emergency power & appurtenances (including automatic transfer switches). .2 Fire alarm system.
Section 01 91 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
1.7 EXECUTION (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .3 Security system. .4 Lighting controls system. .5 Smoke control systems. .6 Access control systems. .7 Lifting platforms, lifts and/or elevators. .8 Integration between systems. .9 Interlocks and safety devices. .10 Electrical coordination studies and arc flash studies/ratings. .11 Electrical transformers. .12 Electrical load balance. .13 Power factor correction system. .14 Sprinkler & standpipe systems. Test hydronic systems, adjust and record liquid flow at each piece of equipment.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN
Section 01 91 31 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1 .2
American Water Works Association (AWWA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .2 NFPA 14-2010, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Systems. .3 NFPA 20-2010, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Fire Pumps for Fire Protection. Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC) .1 PWGSC - Commissioning Guidelines CP.4 -3rd edition-03. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).
.3
.4
1.2
DEFINITIONS
.1
This Section describes HVAC System Commissioning. HVAC System Commissioning is to be a joint team effort to: .1 Ensure that all HVAC equipment, controls and systems function together properly and meet design intent. .2 Ensure that system performance parameters are documented for fine-tuning of control sequences and operational procedures. The commissioning process shall encompass and co-ordinate the following areas: .1 System documentation. .2 Equipment start-up and Performance Testing (Pre-Functional Testing). .3 Testing and balancing. .4 Control system calibration. .5 System start-up and Performance Testing (Functional Testing). .6 Training. .7 Deficiency Documentation and Resolution. Commissioning Team: .1 The Commissioning Team shall consist of: .1 Department's Representative. .2 Commissioning Authority. .3 Consultant, as required. .4 Contractor. .5 Mechanical, Electrical, and speciality sub-contractors, as required.
.2
.3
Section 01 91 31 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Commissioning Team:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .6 Equipment suppliers, as required by Contractor. .2 The trades represented on the Commissioning Team may include sheet metal, piping and fitting, controls, and balancing, as required. .3 The lead hand for each trade who will perform or supervise the commissioning work is to be designated as a representative to the Commissioning Team.
1.3
RESPONSIBILITY
.1
Commissioning Authority. .1 Verify Pre-Functional and Functional performance of HVAC systems for compliance with design intent as specified in the appropriate Specification sections. .2 Provide the documentation with standard Pre-Functional and Functional performance reports on completion of the testing. .3 Verify submissions for HVAC system operation and maintenance manuals, as-built (record) documents, spare parts listing, special tools listing, and other items as may be specified. .4 Co-ordinate and direct training of personnel for operation and maintenance of HVAC systems and equipment. .5 Co-ordinate and direct each step of the commissioning process, and recommend acceptance or non-acceptance to the Departmental Representative. .6 Prepare, in writing, documentation of any deficiencies discovered during the commissioning process. Submit to Departmental Representative. .7 The Commissioning Authority is not responsible for: .1 Contracting methods. .2 Contracting safety. .3 Product liability/warranties. .4 Maintenance/long-term building operation. .5 System functions which have changed since commissioning. .6 Problems which arise out of recommended resolutions which are not implemented. .7 Testing the operation of each and every component (e.g. shutoff valve, breaker, etc.). .8 Normal wear and tear on equipment and systems.
Section 01 91 31 Page 3 2011-05-25
.2
Contractor .1 Verify completeness of the building envelope, perimeter, and interior items which affect proper operation and control of HVAC equipment and systems. .2 Be responsible for appointing the commissioning team members from the sub and speciality trades. .3 Assure participation and co-operation of sub-contractors and speciality sub-contractors (mechanical, electrical, TAB, building management, etc.) under the Contractor's supervision as required for the commissioning process. .4 Be responsible for coordinating deficiency corrections. Sub-Contractors and Speciality Sub-Contractors: Ensure that sub-contractors and speciality sub-contractors: .1 Are responsible for providing labour, material, equipment, required within the scope of the respective sub-trade or speciality trade to facilitate the commissioning process. .2 Perform Pre-Functional and Functional Performance Tests as required by the commissioning process. .3 Are responsible for correcting deficiencies with regards to the labour and materials that they provided for the project. Consultant .1 Consultant to provide the Design Intent Documentation for commissioning. .2 Consultant to observe Pre-Functional and Functional Performance Testing, when deemed necessary. .3 Consultant to provide technical capabilities for resolution of deficiencies, where required.
.3
.4
1.4
GENERAL
.1
The Commissioning Process is detailed in ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 The Commissioning Process. The commissioning plan will be modified to reflect the actual construction schedule. Mechanical, Electrical and Transportation System commissioning Pre-Functional and Functional Performance Tests to begin after equipment and systems, along with related equipment, systems, structures and areas are complete.
.2
Section 01 91 31 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.4 GENERAL (Cont'd)
.3
The testing and balancing agency to perform the TAB after the Pre-Functional Tests have been completed and documented.
Provide a fully functional facility and its systems: .1 Systems, equipment and components meet user's functional requirements before date of acceptance, and operate consistently at peak efficiencies and within specified energy budgets under normal loads. .2 Facility user and O&M personnel have been fully trained in aspects of installed systems. .3 Optimized life cycle costs. .4 Complete documentation relating to installed equipment and systems. Term "Cx" in this section means "Commissioning". Use this Cx Plan as master planning document for Cx: .1 Outlines organization, scheduling, allocation of resources, documentation, pertaining to implementation of Cx. .2 Communicates responsibilities of team members involved in Cx Scheduling, documentation requirements, and verification procedures. .3 Sets out deliverables relating to O&M, process and administration of Cx. .4 Describes process of verification of how built works meet design requirements. .5 Produces a complete functional system prior to issuance of Certificate of Occupancy. .6 Management tool that sets out scope, standards, roles and responsibilities, expectations, deliverables, and provides: .1 Overview of Cx. .2 General description of elements that make up Cx Plan. .3 Process and methodology for successful Cx. Acronyms: .1 Cx - Commissioning. .2 CA - Commissioning Authority. .3 BMM - Building Management Manual. .4 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems. .5 MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. .6 PI - Product Information. .7 PV - Performance Verification. .8 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. .9 WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System.
.4
.5 .6
.7
Section 01 91 31 Page 5 2011-05-25
.8
Commissioning terms used in this Section: .1 Bumping: short term start-up to prove ability to start and prove correct rotation. .2 Deferred Cx - Cx activities delayed for reasons beyond Contractor's control due to lack of occupancy, weather conditions, need for heating/cooling loads.
1.5 COMMISSIONING SCOPE MEETING
.1
After the contract award and before HVAC system construction begins, a commissioning scope meeting of all members of the Commissioning Team is to be held at a time and place designated by the Departmental Representative. The purpose of the meeting is to familiarize all parties with the requirements of the commissioning process, and to ensure that the responsibilities of each party are clearly understood. Ensure that the appropriate sub-contractors and speciality sub-contractors are in attendance.
1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Commissioning Authority for review fourteen (14) days prior to the Functional Performance Tests. Refer to Section 01 78 00 for more details.
.2
1.7 START-UP (PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST
.1
Ensure that Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for the Pre-Functional Performance Tests. These tests ensure that all equipment and systems are installed in accordance with the Specifications, Drawings and manufacturers' requirements. Ensure the Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for co-ordinating schedule for Pre-Functional tests of various equipment and systems. In the Pre-Functional Test, all HVAC mechanical system and sub-system elements, including control devices, to be checked for the following: .1 Verify that each element has been properly installed, properly identified, and that all connections (including electrical) have been made correctly. .2 Verify that each element has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt
.2
.3
Section 01 91 31 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.7 START-UP (PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) tension, control sequence, flow direction, or other conditions which may cause damage or reduce system performance. .3 Verify that tests, meter readings, and specific mechanical/electrical performance characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. .4 Test format to be supplied, witnessed and completed by the Commissioning Authority. .5 Pre-Functional performance Tests to be completed prior to starting Functional Performance Tests. .6 Pre-Functional Performance Tests need to be performed once only, if there are no deficiencies, as determined by the Commissioning Authority. Re-testing of corrected items is the responsibility of the Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors. .7 Completion of the Pre-Functional Performance Tests is the responsibility of the Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors who are to sign and date each Test. .8 Notify the Commissioning Authority, in writing, at least fourteen (14) days prior to the date of Pre-Functional Performance Testing. Schedule the Pre-Functional performance tests, over a period of consecutive business days, during the appropriate seasons for the relevant HVAC component.
1.8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING (TAB)
.1
The TAB should commence immediately following the Pre-functional Testing and shall be done in accordance with the Construction Schedule. The Control sub-contractor to assist the TAB agency with equipment and/or manpower to allow their testing of dampers, actuators, and motors to be performed in a timely manner. The TAB agency to submit one (1) draft copy of the TAB report to the Commissioning Authority and provide the necessary reviews prior to the Functional Testing. The TAB agency to submit one (1) copy of the final TAB reports to the Commissioning Authority.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 91 31 Page 7 2011-05-25
1.9 CONTROL COMMISSIONING AND CALIBRATION
.1
To be completed by the Control sub-contractor prior to the Functional Testing and in accordance with the specification.
1.10 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS
.1
The Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for the Functional Performance Tests. These tests ensure that all equipment and systems operate in accordance with design intent. The tests are dynamic tests, and test the systems through all possible modes of operation. The Functional Performance Testing to be done during two separate periods - one during the cooling season and one during the heating season. The first (cooling) testing period occurs as soon after completion of installation as practical. The heating testing period occurs as soon as weather conditions make it practical to test warm-up, zone heating and economizer functions. The Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for co-ordinating the Functional Performance Tests for the HVAC mechanical systems and sub-systems, the life safety systems as well as other functional systems requiring power or mechanical interface. In the Functional Performance Tests, all HVAC mechanical systems, including control systems, life safety systems and other systems requiring M&E interface shall be checked for the following: .1 Verify that each system and sub-system is operating, and complies with Contract Specifications and the Design Intent Document through the entire range of operating conditions. .2 Notify the Commissioning Authority and engineer, in writing, at least fourteen (14) day prior to date of Functional Performance Tests. Schedule each of the two seasonal Functional Performance Test periods over a period of consecutive business days. .3 Re-testing of corrected items is the responsibility of the Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors. .4 The following personnel are to be present during Functional Performance Testing: .1 The Mechanical sub-contractor and other relevant sub-contractors. .2 The Controls sub-contractor.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 91 31 Page 8 2011-05-25
1.10 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) The Electrical sub-contractor and .3 other specialized sub-contractors or suppliers. .4 The Elevator sub-contractor. .5 Other specialized system suppliers as required. .6 The Commissioning Authority. .7 Departmental Representative (operation personnel), and consultant may be present for some or all of Functional Performance Testing. .8 Deficiencies in system, sub-system, or element performance will be brought to the attention of the Commissioning Team. Deficiencies will be resolved on a case-by-case basis.
1.11 CONTROL VERIFICATION
.1
Controls verification will be done in conjunction with the Functional Performance Testing and in accordance with the specification.
1.12
TRAINING
.1
Training for facility and administration personnel will be designed and scheduled by the Commissioning Authority. The Commissioning Authority will provide the training schedule detailing the times for the various activities and the locations of the training. This detail will also include the allotted time for video-taping, any manufacturer's literature requirements, and lesson plans for the manufacturer's representatives to follow. The Mechanical sub-contractor and their sub-contractors will ensure that required manufacturers will attend as per the agreed to schedule.
.2
.3
1.13
REPORTS
.1
Documentation, General. .1 The Commissioning Authority is responsible for recording and maintaining detailed inspection and testing data on the test documentation reports. The data record shall be comprehensive and concise.
Section 01 91 31 Page 9 2011-05-25
1.13 REPORTS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .2 All data must be recorded as soon as possible during the course of the inspection and testing. .3 All documentation to have the date, time, and names of persons participating in the inspection and testing. .4 All test instruments to be documented for valid calibration. .5 The recording work sheets, inspection check lists, and Performance Testing plans must all be approved by the Departmental Representative and the Commissioning Authority prior to the Start of Functional Performance Testing.
.2
The Commissioning Authority to prepare and submit the following reports: .1 Interim Report. Submit after completion of first functional seasonal commissioning period. Report shall document tests performed, any modifications to tests, comparison to TAB and other agency tests, and verification of compliance with design intent for ambient conditions under which initial commissioning was performed. .2 Final Report. Submit after completion of last functional seasonal commissioning period. Report shall verify performance of HVAC equipment and systems during each seasonal commissioning process. Document any field modifications to the testing process and why these modifications were made.
1.14 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
.1
General Requirements. .1 Operating equipment and systems shall be tested in the presence of the Departmental Representative and Commissioning Authority to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. To minimize the time of Commissioning Team members, testing shall be done in four seasonal single blocks of time insofar as possible. .2 The Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors to notify the Commissioning Authority, in writing, fourteen (14) days prior to tests scheduled under requirements of this Section. .3 Testing to be conducted under specified design operating conditions as recommended or approved by the Commissioning Authority and
Section 01 91 31 Page 10 2011-05-25
1.14 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) Departmental Representative, and outlined in the Pre-Functional and Functional Performance Tests. .4 All elements of systems shall be tested to demonstrate that total systems satisfy all requirements of these Specifications. Testing to be accomplished on hierarchical basis. Test each piece of equipment for proper operation, followed by each sub-system, followed by entire system, followed by any inter-ties of other major systems. .5 All special testing materials and equipment shall be provided by the appropriate sub-contractor, as determined by the Contractor. .6 Provide a copy of all test reports and records to the Commissioning Authority. Test Procedure and Test Documentation. .1 The Commissioning Authority will provide the Mechanical sub-contractor with Pre-Functional and Functional test procedures and test documentation reports. The Mechanical sub-contractor may propose alternate documentation and may alter the test procedures and test documentation to suit as-built conditions. However, the Mechanical sub-contractor is expected to co-operate to the level of detail and general approach of the provided test procedures and test documentation. .2 The Commissioning Authority shall verify test and air balance (TAB) readings for at least 20 percent (20%) of the supply (maximum and minimum primary air), return, and exhaust diffusers, registers and grilles. If more than one-fifth of these readings differ from the documented TAB readings by more than 15 percent, then the TAB shall be repeated in its entirety. The TAB agency shall pay the extra costs. .3 The verification testing procedures shall address all operating characteristics of all mechanical equipment and systems. Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist. .1 The Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for completing Pre-Functional Performance Testing. .2 Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist: .1 Perform and submit one (1) Pre-Functional Performance Test for each of the following: .1 boiler(s) .2 chiller(s) .3 cooling tower(s) .4 heating/cooling units
.2
.3
Section 01 91 31 Page 11 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .5 air handling unit (s) .6 pump(s) .7 piping .8 ductwork .9 heat recovery equipment .10 rain water harvesting system .11 variable speed drives .12 transformers .13 coordination study .14 grounding testing (Megger) .15 distribution panels breakers and interrupting settings .16 fire alarm .17 preliminary electrical load balance .18 emergency generator pre-startup Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB). .1 Comply with the Specification. Functional Performance Test Checklist. .1 The Mechanical & Electrical sub-contractors shall assist the Commissioning Authority in completing and submitting Functional Performance Testing. .2 Functional Performance Test Checklist: .1 Perform one (1) Functional Performance Test for each of the above noted systems with the addition of: .1 Building Automation System (BAS). .2 Lighting controls. .3 Fire alarm. .4 Fire pump. .5 Smoke control system. .6 Automatic transfer switch(es). .7 Emergency power generator. .8 Power factor correction equipment. .9 Integrated system testing. Training. .1 General: .1 Each of the following manufacturers/suppliers to deliver training to the Departmental Reprsentative appointed staff and management who will provide operating services: .1 Boiler(s) .2 Chiller(s) .3 Cooling tower(s) .4 Heating/cooling units
.4 .5
.6
Section 01 91 31 Page 12 2011-05-25
.6
(Cont'd) .1 General:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .5 Air handling unit(s) .6 Pump(s) .7 Heat recovery equipment .8 Rain water harvesting system .9 Variable speed drives .10 Transformers .11 Distribution panels breakers and interrupting settings .12 Preliminary electrical load balance .13 Building Automation System (BAS) .14 Lighting controls .15 Fire alarm .16 Fire pump .17 Smoke control system .18 Automatic transfer switch(es) .19 Emergency power generator .20 Power factor correction equipment .2 Each of the manufacturers required to deliver training as part of this specification to comply with training schedules, formats and structures designed and provided by the Commissioning Authority, who has the final approval on the substance, content and quality of the instruction to be delivered. .3 Submittals. .1 Manufacturer/suppliers to submit lesson plans to the Commissioning Authority two (2) weeks prior to the scheduled training session. .2 Each manufacturer/supplier to revise the lesson plan according to the direction and assistance of Commissioning Authority. .3 If requested by Commissioning Authority the revised lesson plan shall be re-submitted one (1) week prior to the scheduled training sessions. .4 Quality Assurance. .1 The Departmental Representative reserves the right to videotape each training session. .2 Each manufacturer/supplier required to deliver training shall use the following tools to facilitate learning: .1 Visual aids: use of overhead projectors, flipcharts, videos and/or slides.
Section 01 91 31 Page 13 2011-05-25
.6
(Cont'd) .1 General:(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) .2 Printed material: each participant shall receive a copy of the material to be reviewed at the commencement of each session.
.7
Deficiency Resolution for HVAC Mechanical System Commissioning. .1 If acceptable performance cannot be achieved, then the necessary corrective measures should be carried out. The consultant and/or the Mechanical sub-contractor should issue appropriate directions in this regard. .2 The allocation of cost of deficiency resolution shall be determined by the Commissioning Team, on a case-by-case basis.
1.15 DEVELOPMENT OF THE CX PLAN
.1
Cx Plan will form part of the tender documents and will continue to evolve with the evolution of the construction process. It shall be updated by the Commissioning Authority with the input of the professionals and the contractors, and to take into account: .1 Approved shop drawings and product data. .2 Approved changes to contract. .3 Contractor's project schedule. .4 Cx schedule. .5 Contractor's, sub-contractor's, suppliers' requirements. .6 Project construction team's and Cx team's requirements. Submit completed Cx Plan to Departmental Representative and obtain written approval.
.2
1.16 REFINEMENT OF CX PLAN
.1
During construction phase, revise, refine and update Cx Plan to include: .1 Changes resulting from facility program modifications. .2 Approved design and construction changes. Revise, refine and update every 6 weeks during construction phase. At each revision, indicate revision number and date. Submit each revised Cx Plan to Departmental Representative for review and obtain written approval.
.2
.3
Section 01 91 31 Page 14 2011-05-25
1.16 REFINEMENT OF CX PLAN (Cont'd)
.4
Include testing parameters at full range of operating conditions and check responses of equipment and systems.
1.17 COMPOSITION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CX TE
.1
Commissioning Authority to maintain overall responsibility for project and is the main point of contact between members of commissioning team. Departmental Representative will select Cx Team consisting of following members: .1 PWGSC Design Quality Review Team: during construction, will conduct periodic site reviews to observe general progress. .2 PWGSC Quality Assurance Commissioning Manager: ensures Cx activities are carried out to ensure delivery of a fully operational project including: .1 Review of Cx documentation from operational perspective. .2 Review for performance, reliability, durability of operation, accessibility, maintainability, operational efficiency under conditions of operation. .3 Protection of health, safety and comfort of occupants and O&M personnel. .4 Monitoring of Cx activities, training, development of Cx documentation. .5 Work closely with members of Cx Team. .3 Commissioning Authority is responsible for: .1 Organizing Cx. .2 Monitoring operations Cx activities. .3 Witnessing, certifying accuracy of reported results. .4 Witnessing and certifying TAB and other tests. .5 Developing BMM. .6 Ensuring implementation of final Cx Plan. .7 Performing verification of performance of installed systems and equipment. .8 Implementation of Training Plan. .4 Construction Team: Contractor, sub-contractors, suppliers and support disciplines, are responsible for construction/installation in accordance with contract documents, including: .1 Testing. .2 TAB. .3 Performance of Cx activities.
.2
Section 01 91 31 Page 15 2011-05-25
1.17 COMPOSITION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CX TE (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .4 Construction Team:(Cont'd) Delivery of training and Cx .4 documentation. .5 Assigning one person as point of contact with Departmental Representative, PWGSC Cx Manager, and consultant, and for administrative and coordination purposes. .6 Demonstrations. .7 Training. .8 Testing. .9 Preparation, submission of test reports. .5 CSC/Property Manager: represents lead role in Operation Phase and onwards and is responsible for: .1 Receiving facility. .2 Day-to-day operation and maintenance of facility.
1.18 CX PARTICIPANTS
.1
Employ the following Cx participants to verify performance of equipment and systems: .1 Installation Contractor/sub-contractor: .1 Equipment and systems except as noted. Equipment manufacturer: equipment specified to be installed and started by manufacturer. .1 To include performance verification. Specialist sub-contractor: equipment and systems supplied and installed by specialist sub-contractor. Specialist Cx agency: .1 Possessing specialist qualifications and installations providing environments essential to client's program but are outside scope or expertise of Cx specialists on this project. Departmental Representative: responsible for intrusion and access security systems. Ensure that Cx participant: .1 Could complete work within scheduled time frame. .2 Available for emergency and troubleshooting service during first year of occupancy by user for adjustments and modifications outside responsibility of O&M personnel, including: .1 Modify ventilation rates to meet changes in off-gassing.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
Section 01 91 31 Page 16 2011-05-25
1.18 CX PARTICIPANTS (Cont'd)
.6
Ensure that Cx participant:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .2 Changes to heating or cooling loads beyond scope of EMCS. .3 Changes to EMCS control strategies beyond level of training provided to O&M personnel. .4 Redistribution of electrical services. .5 Modifications of fire alarm systems. .6 Modifications to voice communications systems. Provide names of participants to Departmental Representative and details of instruments and procedures to be followed for Cx 3 months prior to starting date of Cx for review and approval.
.7
1.19
EXTENT OF CX
.1
Cx Structural and Architectural Systems: .1 Architectural and structural: .1 Accessibility and operational safety: .2 Vertical transportation systems: .1 Passenger elevators. .2 Freight elevators. .3 Dynamic, seismic structural systems. .4 Doors, windows, related hardware: .1 Automatic door operators. .2 Operable partitions. .3 Detention hardware. Commission mechanical systems and associated equipment: .1 Plumbing systems: .1 Domestic CWS and HWS. .2 Domestic water pressure booster system. .3 Regular sanitary waste systems. .4 Reclaimed water systems. .5 Sewage pumps. .6 Bilge/storm/bilge pumps. .7 Storm water systems. .8 Sump pumps. .2 HVAC and exhaust systems: .1 HVAC systems. .2 General exhaust systems. .3 Exhaust systems and related systems. .4 Laboratory fume hoods and related systems. .5 Heat recovery systems. .6 Smoke control systems installed. .7 Stair/elevator shaft pressurization systems.
.2
Section 01 91 31 Page 17 2011-05-25
1.19 EXTENT OF CX (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .3 Fire and life safety systems: .1 Special fire suppression systems. .2 Fire pumps, including transfer switches and controllers. .3 Wet pipe sprinkler systems. .4 Dry pipe sprinkler systems. .5 Standpipe and hose systems. .6 Total flooding fire extinguishing systems. .7 Fire extinguishers. .8 Integrated testing of fire & life safety systems for the whole building. .4 Noise and vibration control systems for mechanical systems. .5 Seismic restraint and control measures. .6 IAQ environmental control systems: .1 Indoor conditions. .2 Indoor air quality (IAQ). .7 Environmental control systems. .8 EMCS. .9 Energy metering systems for steam, hot water, chilled water and electricity. Commission electrical systems and equipment: .1 High voltage: .1 High voltage switch gear and transformation equipment. .2 High voltage distribution systems. .2 Low voltage below 750 V: .1 Low voltage equipment. .2 Low voltage distribution systems. .3 Voice communications systems. .4 Electronic data and communications information systems. .3 Emergency power generation systems: .1 Generators. .2 Fuel systems. .3 Transfer switchgear and controllers. .4 Uninterruptible power systems. .4 Lighting systems: .1 Lighting equipment. .2 Distribution systems. .3 Emergency lighting systems, including battery packs. .4 Fire exit emergency signage. .5 Fire alarm systems, equipment: .1 Annunciators. .2 Control panels. .3 Fire alarm battery banks. .4 Devices. .5 Integrated testing of fire & life safety systems for the whole building.
.3
Section 01 91 31 Page 18 2011-05-25
1.19 EXTENT OF CX (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) .6 Other systems and equipment: .1 Intrusion and access security and safety systems. .2 Lightning protection systems.
1.20 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO O&M PERSPECTIVES
.1
General requirements: .1 Compile English documentation. .2 Documentation to be computer-compatible format ready for inputting for data management. Provide deliverables: .1 Warranties. .2 Project record documentation. .3 Inventory of spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials. .4 Maintenance Management System (MMS) identification system used. .5 WHMIS information. .6 MSDS data sheets. .7 Electrical Panel inventory containing detailed inventory of electrical circuitry for each panel board. Duplicate of inventory inside each panel.
.2
1.21 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO THE CX PROCESS
.1
General: Start-up, testing and Cx requirements, conditions for acceptance and specifications form part of relevant technical sections of these specifications. Definitions: .1 Cx as used in this section includes: .1 Cx of components, equipment, systems, subsystems, and integrated systems. .2 Factory inspections and performance verification tests. Provide deliverables: .1 Cx Specifications. .2 Startup, pre-Cx activities and documentation for systems, and equipment. .3 Completed installation checklists (ICL). .4 Completed product information (PI) report forms. .5 Completed performance verification (PV) report forms. .6 Results of Performance Verification Tests and Inspections. .7 Description of Cx activities and documentation.
.2
.3
Section 01 91 31 Page 19 2011-05-25
1.21 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO THE CX PROCESS (Cont'd)
.3
Provide deliverables:(Cont'd) Description of Cx of integrated systems .8 and documentation. .9 Tests witnessed by PWGSC Design Quality Review Team and the Commissioning Authority. .10 Cx Reports. .11 Prescribed activities during warranty period. Departmental Representative and Commissioning Authority to witness and certify tests and reports of results provided to Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative and consultant to participate.
.4
.5
1.22 PRE-CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION
.1
Items listed in this Cx Plan include the following: .1 Pre-Start-Up inspections: by Departmental Representative and commissioning team members prior to permission to start up and rectification of deficiencies to Departmental Representative's satisfaction. .2 Departmental Representative to use approved check lists. .3 Departmental Representative will monitor all of these pre-start-up inspections. .4 Include completed documentation with Cx report. .5 Conduct pre-start-up tests: conduct pressure, static, flushing, cleaning, and "bumping" during construction as specified in technical sections. To be witnessed and certified by Departmental Representative and does not form part of Cx specifications. .6 Departmental Representative will monitor some of these inspections and tests. .7 Include completed documentation in Cx report. Pre-Cx activities - ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL: .1 Exterior walls: conduct thermographic surveys to ensure appropriate level of tightness after exterior envelope has been completed. Permanent HVAC systems are able to provide appropriate negative or positive pressure, a temperature of at 20 degrees C can be maintained between inside and outside and wind speed is less than 10 kph. .2 Raised floor systems: verify freedom for air movement through-out.
.2
Section 01 91 31 Page 20 2011-05-25
1.22 PRE-CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) Vertical transportation: .3 Passenger and freight elevators. .1 Equipment:. .4 .1 Laboratory equipment. .2 Dock levellers. .5 Doors, windows, related hardware: .1 Automatic door operators. .2 Operable partitions. .3 Door and window hardware. Pre-Cx activities - MECHANICAL: .1 Plumbing systems: .1 "Bump" each item of equipment in its "stand-alone" mode. .2 Complete pre-start-up checks and complete relevant documentation. .3 After equipment has been started, test related systems in conjunction with control systems on a system-by-system basis. .2 HVAC equipment and systems: .1 "Bump" each item of equipment in its "stand-alone" mode. .2 At this time, complete pre-start-up checks and complete relevant documentation. .3 After equipment has been started, test related systems in conjunction with control systems on a system-by-system basis. .4 Perform TAB on systems. TAB reports to be approved by Departmental Representative. .3 EMCS: .1 EMCS trending to be available as supporting documentation for performance verification. .2 Perform point-by-point testing in parallel with start-up. .3 Carry out point-by-point verification. .4 Demonstrate performance of systems, to be witnessed by Departmental Representative prior to start of 30 day Final Acceptance Test period. .5 Perform final Cx and operational tests during demonstration period and 30 day test period. .6 Only additional testing after foregoing have been successfully completed to be "Off-Season Tests".
.3
Section 01 91 31 Page 21 2011-05-25
.4
Pre-Cx activities - LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTEGRATED TESTING. Include equipment and systems identified. .1 Fire protection & alarm. .1 .1 Duct mounted smoke detectors. .2 Smoke detectors. .3 Manual pull stations + key operation. .4 Speakers + audibility. .5 Strobes. .6 Sprinklers (zones, alarms, flow & pressure). .7 Standpipe (alarms, flow & pressure). .8 Pressure & flow devices. .9 Pumps (jockey/fire/etc). .10 Pressurization fans. .11 Security door hardware. .12 Emergency power generator and components. .2 Reports of test results to be witnessed and certified by Departmental Representative before verification.
Pre-Cx activities - ELECTRICAL: .1 High voltage distribution systems over 750 V. .2 Low voltage distribution systems under 750 V. .1 Requires independent testing agency to perform pre-energization and post-energization tests. .3 Emergency power generation systems .1 Transfer switches: test by simulating loss of power. Verify availability of power at equipment requiring same. .2 Uninterruptible power systems: test under full and partial load conditions. .4 Lighting systems:. .1 Lighting controls. .2 Interface with audio-visual systems. .3 Low voltage systems. .4 Emergency lighting systems: .1 Tests to include verification of lighting levels and coverage, initially by disrupting normal power. .5 Fire alarm systems: test after other safety and security systems are completed. Testing to include a complete verification in accordance with ULC requirements. Demonstrate devices and zones to Departmental Representative. .6 Other low voltage systems including: .1 Communications. .2 Data communications systems.
.5
Section 01 91 31 Page 22 2011-05-25
.5
Pre-Cx activities - ELECTRICAL:(Cont'd) Security, surveillance and intrusion alarm .7 systems: to include verification by Departmental Representative. .8 Lightning protection systems.
1.23
START-UP
.1 .2
Start up components, equipment and systems. Equipment manufacturer, supplier, installing specialist sub-contractor, as appropriate, to start-up, under Contractor's direction, equipment, systems. Departmental Representative to monitor all of these start-up activities. .1 Rectify start-up deficiencies to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Performance Verification (PV): .1 Approved Cx Agent to perform. .1 Repeat when necessary until results are acceptable to Departmental Representative. .2 Use procedures modified generic procedures to suit project requirements. .3 Departmental Representative to witness and certify reported results using approved PI and PV forms. .4 Departmental Representative to approve completed PV reports and provide to Departmental Representative. .5 Departmental Representative reserves right to will verify up to 30% of reported results at random. .6 Failure of randomly selected item shall result in rejection of PV report or report of system startup and testing.
.3
.4
1.24 CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION
.1
Perform Cx by specified Cx agency using procedures developed by Departmental Representative and approved by Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative to monitor Cx activities. Upon satisfactory completion, Cx agency performing tests to prepare Cx Report using approved PV forms.
.2 .3
Section 01 91 31 Page 23 2011-05-25
1.24 CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION (Cont'd)
.4
Departmental Representative to witness, certify reported results of, Cx activities and forward to Departmental Representative.
Departmental Representative reserves right to verify a percentage of reported results at no cost to contract.
.5
1.25 CX OF INTEGRATED SYSTEMS AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION
.1
Cx to be performed by specified Cx specialist, using procedures developed by Departmental Representative and approved by Departmental Representative. Tests to be witnessed by Departmental Representative and documented on approved report forms. Upon satisfactory completion, Cx specialist to prepare Cx Report, to be certified by Departmental Representative and submitted to Departmental Representative for review. Departmental Representative reserves right to verify percentage of reported results. Integrated systems to include: .1 HVAC and associated systems forming part of integrated HVAC systems. .2 Smoke control systems. .3 Stair shaft pressurization systems. .4 Indoor air quality. .5 Environmental space conditions. .6 Fire alarm systems. .7 Fire pumps and controllers. .8 Voice communications systems. .9 Emergency power generator. .10 Transfer switch and controllers. .11 Emergency lighting systems. .12 Security door hardware. Identification: .1 In later stages of Cx, before hand-over and acceptance Departmental Representative, Contractor, Property Manager and Cx Manager to co-operate to complete inventory data sheets and provide assistance to PWGSC in full implementation of MMS identification system of components, equipment, sub-systems, systems.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.6
Section 01 91 31 Page 24 2011-05-25
1.26
CX SCHEDULES
.1
Prepare detailed Cx Schedule and submit to Departmental Representative for review and approval same time as project Construction Schedule. Include: .1 Milestones, testing, documentation, training and Cx activities of components, equipment, subsystems, systems and integrated systems, including: .1 Design criteria, design intents. .2 Pre-TAB review: 28 days after contract award, and before construction starts. .3 Cx agents' credentials: 60 days before start of Cx. .4 Cx procedures: 3 months after award of contract. .5 Cx Report format: 3 months after contract award. .6 Discussion of heating/cooling loads for Cx: 3 months before start-up. .7 Submission of list of measurement and balancing instrumentation calibration (within 60 days of testing period) with relevant certificates: 21 days before start of Cx. .8 Notification of intention to start TAB: 21 days before start of TAB. .9 TAB: after successful start-up, correction of deficiencies and verification of normal and safe operation. .10 Notification of intention to start Cx: 14 days before start of Cx. .11 Notification of intention to start Cx of integrated systems: after Cx of related systems is completed 14 days before start of integrated system Cx. .12 Identification of deferred Cx. .13 Implementation of training plans. .14 Cx of smoke management/control systems: after Cx of related systems is completed and 7 days before proposed date of Cx these systems. .15 Cx stair/elevator shaft pressurization systems: before issuance of occupancy certificate. .16 Cx reports: immediately upon successful completion of Cx. .17 Emergency evacuation exercises: after 80% occupancy. .2 Detailed training schedule to demonstrate no conflicts with testing, completion of project and hand-over to Departmental Representative and Property Manager.
Section 01 91 31 Page 25 2011-05-25
1.26 CX SCHEDULES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .3 Six (6) months in Cx schedule for verification of performance in all seasons and wear conditions. After approval, incorporate Cx Schedule into Construction Schedule. Departmental Representative, Contractor, Contractor's Cx agent, and consultant will monitor progress of Cx against this schedule.
.2 .3
1.27 CX SCHEDULE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
.1
Produce schedule of Cx activities in bar chart format to a scale that will ensure legibility. Bar chart to indicate: .1 Sequences of testing equipment and systems, interrelationship between tests, duration of tests and training periods. .2 Cx resources which will be committed to this project to ensure completion by prescribed dates. .3 Training Plan. .4 Cx Documentation Plan. Water/fire mains and related site fire hydrants: .1 Commission as soon as installation is complete, using procedures described in NFPA reference standards to provide protection for exterior envelope of new building during construction. New incoming water mains: .1 Commission when temporary heat is available. Fire and hose standpipe systems: .1 Temporary fire hose cabinets to be provided by Contractor. .2 Install and provide fire protection during construction, but to be commissioned after building has been closed in. .3 Test completed systems in accordance with NFPA 14. Wet pipe and dry pipe sprinkler systems: .1 Test completed systems in accordance with NFPA 13. Fire pumps, jockey pumps, transfer switches and controllers: .1 Test in accordance with NFPA 20.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 01 91 31 Page 26 2011-05-25
1.27 CX SCHEDULE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.6
(Cont'd) Verify jockey pumps have sufficient .2 capacity to prevent repeated starts of fire pumps. Integrated fire protection systems: .1 Upon completion of individual system tests, test integrated systems to verify that components work together as designed. .2 After fire alarm connections are completed and fire pumps and jockey pumps have been commissioned, conduct flow tests of sprinkler systems. Energy meters on steam, chilled water and electrical services: .1 Commission meters after energy-consuming systems have been commissioned to permit changes to ranges and adjustments to reflect actual requirements. Plumbing systems: .1 To be filled, pressure booster pumps "bumped" in a stand-alone mode and pre-start-up inspections completed. Then proceed with flushing, cleaning and disinfection processes. .2 Test plumbing and piping systems in conjunction with related water treatment systems, control systems. Laboratory/medical gases and services: .1 Distribution systems to be pressure tested and pre-start-up inspections completed. Then proceed with flushing and cleaning processes. .2 Followed by tests to verify proper connection of outlets and appropriate piping system in accordance with relevant Canadian Standards Association codes. HVAC systems: .1 Ductwork, piping and conduit systems to be concealed and tested and certified to specified standards before being concealed. This work is specified in relevant technical sections of Division 23. .2 HVAC systems to be initially started up, "bumped" in a stand-alone mode and pre-start-up inspections completed. .3 Start after dust-producing construction procedures have been completed and areas are dust-free. .4 Start HVAC to replace temporary heating systems after Departmental Representative's written approval.
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
Section 01 91 31 Page 27 2011-05-25
.11
HVAC systems:(Cont'd) Operate HVAC to permit TAB and ensure full .5 compliance with contract documents when weatherstripping, caulking and sealing of exterior envelope has been completed, and interior partitions and doors are installed and ceiling return plenums are in place. Clean-steam humidification systems: .1 Commission after relevant water treatment systems have been commissioned. Hydronic systems: .1 To be filled, pumps "bumped" in stand-alone mode and pre-start-up inspections completed. Then undertake cleaning and flushing processes. .2 Commission after exterior envelope has been completed and exterior has been caulked, but only after relevant water treatment systems have been commissioned. .3 Commission at same time as HVAC systems are being TAB'd. HVAC and related hydronic systems: .1 Test in conjunction with EMCS, and fire and smoke detection systems. Items which have a detrimental effect on operation and maintenance. To receive preliminary attention at this point. To be fully commissioned at same time as relevant equipment and systems. .1 Integrated systems: .1 Performance of HVAC, fire protection, EMCS and systems forming part of integrated systems to be verified after systems has been TAB'd to ensure compliance with prescribed requirements. .2 Vibration isolation and seismic control measures: .1 Test these measures at same time as connected system. .3 Equipment and systems subject to specified codes and standards or subject to approval of an authority having jurisdiction: .1 Commission equipment and systems in accordance with those requirements. .2 Where testing is required as part of a regulatory process, and where Cx procedures are fully developed, are appropriate to project, ensure tests as required by such codes are performed. Departmental Representative to witness tests as part of Quality Assurance role.
.12
.13
.14
.15
Section 01 91 31 Page 28 2011-05-25
.16
EMCS: Testing and Cx to be specified in Section .1 25 01 11, which defines conditions for acceptance. .2 Point-by-point and end-to-end testing to be carried out by installation Contractor, monitored by Departmental Representative, and verified as part of system verification. .3 Demonstration of operation of systems under operating conditions and over full operating range to take place prior to 30-day test period and to be witnessed by Departmental Representative. Includes simulated opposite-season tests. EMCS programming and operation to be verified after HVAC systems have been TAB'd and to include specified 30-day test period.
Full-scale emergency evacuation tests of entire facility: .1 To be carried out during early stages of Warranty Period using procedures and protocols developed during Cx phase. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): .1 Tests to be carried out where identified. Space environmental conditions: .1 Tests to be carried out where identified. To reduce VOC concentrations to acceptable levels: .1 Flow rates of outside air into HVAC systems to be adjusted as required during Cx, after occupancy and as necessary after occupancy. Final Cx activities: .1 Upon completion of Cx to satisfaction of Departmental Representative lock control devices in their final positions, indelibly mark settings and include in TAB and PV Reports.
.17
.18 .19 .20
.21
1.28 CX SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
.1
Systems to be tested as required by codes: .1 Where testing is required as part of a regulatory process and where Cx procedures are developed and are appropriate to project, perform tests as required by such codes. .2 Departmental Representative to witness these tests as part of Quality Assurance role.
Section 01 91 31 Page 29 2011-05-25
1.28 CX SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.2
Produce a schedule of Cx activities in a bar chart format to a scale that will ensure legibility. Bar chart to indicate: .1 Sequences of testing equipment and systems, interrelationship between tests, duration of tests and training periods. .2 Cx resources which will be committed to this project to ensure completion by prescribed dates. .3 Training plan. .4 Cx documentation plan.
Main distribution system: .1 Testing and Cx to be defined in construction specifications. .2 Contractor to conduct "megger" tests of feeders. .3 Cx to utilize services of an independent testing agency to perform a series of pre-energization and post-energization tests. Low voltage systems: .1 These include PA communications, low voltage lighting and data communications systems. Emergency power systems: .1 Testing and Cx of emergency generator, transfer switch and controllers to be included in construction specification. .2 Test transfer switches by simulating loss of normal power. .3 Verify power available at equipment requiring emergency power. Uninterruptible power systems: .1 Test these systems under load in accordance with procedures prescribed in construction specifications. Emergency lighting systems: .1 Perform tests by interrupting normal power. .2 Verify adequacy of coverage. Fire alarm systems: .1 Verify operation of these systems after aspects of life safety and security systems are complete. .2 Testing to be monitored by Departmental Representative and include complete verification in accordance with ULC requirements. .3 After receipt by Departmental Representative of Cx Report, Cx specialist to
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 01 91 31 Page 30 2011-05-25
1.28 CX SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.8
Fire alarm systems:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) demonstrate devices and zones to Cx Manager and Property Manager. Lightning protection systems. Load shedding systems. Cx requirements to be included in construction specifications.
.9 .10 .11
1.29
CX REPORTS
.1
Submit reports of tests, witnessed and certified by Departmental Representative to Departmental Representative who will verify reported results. Include completed and certified PV reports in properly formatted Cx Reports. Before reports are accepted, reported results to be subject to verification by Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
1.30 ACTIVITIES DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
.1
Cx activities must be completed before issuance of Interim Certificate, it is anticipated that certain Cx activities may be necessary during Warranty Period, including: .1 Fine tuning of HVAC systems. .2 Adjustment of ventilation rates to promote good indoor air quality and reduce deleterious effects of VOCs generated by off-gassing from construction materials and furnishings. .3 Full-scale emergency evacuation exercises.
1.31
TRAINING
.1
Refer to Section 01 79 00.
1.32 FINAL SETTINGS
.1
Upon completion of Cx to satisfaction of Departmental Representative lock control devices in their final positions, indelibly mark settings marked and include in Cx Reports.
Section 01 91 31 Page 31 2011-05-25
1.33 CX
PAYMENTS FOR
.1
A line item shall be provided in the progress draw breakdown identifying a suitably budget for the implementation of the Contractor's commissioning efforts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL (BMM)
Section 01 91 51 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
ACRONYMS
.1
Acronyms: .1 BMM - Building Management Manual. .2 Cx - Commissioning. .3 HVAC - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning. .4 PI - Product Information. .5 PV - Performance Verification. .6 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. .7 WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Standard letter size paper 216 mm x 279 mm. Methodology used to facilitate updating. Drawings, diagrams and schematics to be professionally developed. Electronic copy of data to be in a format accepted and approved by Departmental Representative.
1.3
APPROVALS
.1
Prior to commencement, co-ordinate requirements for preparation, submission and approval with Departmental Representative.
1.4 GENERAL INFORMATION
.1
Provide Departmental Representative the following for insertion into appropriate Part and Section of BMM: .1 Complete list of names, addresses, telephone and fax numbers of Contractor, sub-contractors that participated in delivery of project - as indicated in Section 1.2 of BMM. .2 Summary of architectural, structural, fire protection, mechanical and electrical systems installed and commissioned - as indicated in Section 1.4 of BMM. .1 Including sequence of operation as finalized after commissioning is complete as indicated in Section 2.0 of BMM. .3 Description of building operation under conditions of heightened security and emergencies as indicated in Section 2.0 of BMM.
Section 01 91 51 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 GENERAL INFORMATION (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) System, equipment and components .4 Maintenance Management System (MMS) identification - Section 2.1 of BMM. .5 Information on operation and maintenance of architectural systems and equipment installed and commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM. .6 Information on operation and maintenance of fire protection and life safety systems and equipment installed and commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM. .7 Information on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment installed and commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM. .8 Operating and maintenance manual - Section 3.2 of BMM. .9 Final commissioning plan as actually implemented. .10 Completed commissioning checklists. .11 Commissioning test procedures employed. .12 Completed Product Information (PI) and Performance Verification (PV) report forms, approved and accepted by Departmental Representative. .13 Commissioning reports.
1.5 CONTENTS OF OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
.1 .2
For detailed requirements refer to Section 01 78 00. Departmental Representative to review and approve format and organization within 12 weeks of award of contract. Include original manufactures brochures and written information on products and equipment installed on this project. Record and organize for easy access and retrieval of information contained in BMM. Include completed PI report forms, data and information from other sources as required. Inventory directory relating to information on installed systems, equipment and components. Approved project shop-drawings, product and maintenance data. Manufacturer's data and recommendations relating: manufacturing process, installation, commissioning, start-up, O&M, shutdown and training materials.
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8
Section 01 91 51 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 CONTENTS OF OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (Cont'd)
.9 .10 .11
Inventory and location of spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials.
Warranty information. Inspection certificates with expiration dates, which require on-going re-certification inspections. Maintenance program supporting information including: .1 Recommended maintenance procedures and schedule. .2 Information to removal and replacement of equipment including, required equipment, points of lift and means of entry and egress.
.12
1.6 LIFE SAFETY COMPLIANCE (LSC) MANUAL
.1 .2
Samples of LSC Manual will be available from Departmental Representative. Content of Manual: .1 All possible Emergency situations modes including: presence of fire and smoke, power failure, lose of water or pressure, chemical spills and refrigerant release. .2 Failure of elevators and escalators. .3 HVAC emergencies and fuel supply failures. .4 Intrusion and security breach. .5 Emergency provisions for natural disasters, bomb threats and other disruptive situations. .6 Dedicated emergency generators for high security projects, medical facilities and computer systems. .7 Emergency control procedures for fire, power and major equipment failure. .8 Emergency contacts and numbers. .9 Manual to be readily available and comprehensible to non-technical readers.
1.7 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR INSERTION INTO SUPPORTING APPENDICES
.1
Provide Departmental Representative supporting documentation relating to installed equipment and system, including: .1 General: .1 Finalized commissioning plan. .2 WHMIS information manual. .3 Approved "as-built" drawings and specifications. .4 Procedures used during commissioning. .5 Cross-Reference to specification sections.
Section 01 91 51 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.7 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR INSERTION INTO SUPPORTING APPENDICES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Architectural and structural: .2 Inspection certificates, construction .1 permits. Roof anchor log books. .2 .3 PV reports. .3 Fire prevention, suppression and protection: .1 Test reports. .2 Smoke test reports. .3 PV reports. .4 Mechanical: .1 Installation permits, inspection certificates. .2 Piping pressure test certificates. .3 Ducting leakage test reports. .4 TAB and PV reports. .5 Charts of valves and steam traps. .6 Copies of posted instructions. .5 Electrical: .1 Installation permits, inspection certificates. .2 TAB and PV reports. .3 Electrical work log book. .4 Charts and schedules. .5 Locations of cables and components. .6 Copies of posted instructions. Assist Departmental Representative with preparation of BMM.
.2
1.8
LANGUAGE
.1
English and French Language to be in separate binders.
1.9 IDENTIFICATION OF FACILITY
.1
When submitting information to Departmental Representative for incorporation into BMM, use following system for identification of documentation: .1 Facility. .2 Building. .3 Integrated systems. .4 Systems. .5 Sub-systems. .6 Components. .7 Control points for components.
Section 01 91 51 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.10 PRODUCTION OF DOCUMENTATION
.1
Use current technology for production of documentation. Emphasis on ease of accessibility at all times, maintain in up-to-date state, compatibility with user's requirements. Obtain Departmental Representative's approval before starting Work.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Section 02 41 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment (CCME). .1 CCME PN1326-2009, Environmental Code of Practice for Aboveground and Underground Storage Tank Systems Containing Petroleum and Allied Petroleum Products. Department of Justice Canada (Jus). .1 Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA), 1995, c. 37. .2 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA), c. 33. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS). .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Transport Canada (TC). .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA), c. 34.
.2
.3
.4
1.2
DEFINITIONS
.1 .2
Demolition: rapid destruction of building following removal of hazardous materials. Hazardous Materials: dangerous substances, dangerous goods, hazardous commodities and hazardous products, may include but not limited to: asbestos PCB's, CFC's, HCFC's poisons, corrosive agents, flammable substances, ammunition, explosives, radioactive substances, or other material that can endanger human health or well being or environment if handled improperly. Waste Audit (WA): detailed inventory of materials in building. Indicates quantities of reuse, recycling and landfill. .1 Involves quantifying by volume/weight amounts of materials and wastes generated during construction, demolition, deconstruction, or renovation project. .2 Indicates quantities of reuse, recycling and landfill. Waste Management Coordinator (WMC): contractor representative responsible for supervising waste management activities as well as coordinating related, required submittal and reporting requirements.
.3
.4
Section 02 41 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
.5
Waste Reduction Workplan (WRW): written report which addresses opportunities for reduction, reuse, or recycling of materials. WRW is based on information acquired from WA.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 81 01. Shop drawings. .1 Submit for approval drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of demolition work and supporting structures and underpinning, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. .2 Submit drawings stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. Hazardous Materials: provide description of Hazardous Materials and Notification of Filing with proper authorities prior to beginning of Work as required. Waste Reduction Workplan: prior to beginning of Work on site submit detailed Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and indicate: .1 Descriptions of and anticipated quantities in percentages of materials to be salvaged reused, recycled and landfilled. .2 Schedule of selective demolition. .3 Number and location of dumpsters. .4 Anticipated frequency of tippage. .5 Name and address of haulers, waste facilities, waste receiving organizations. Certificates: submit copies of certified weigh bills, bills of lading, receipts from authorized disposal sites and reuse and recycling facilities for material removed from site upon request of Departmental Representative. .1 Written authorization from Departmental Representative is required to deviate from haulers, facilities and receiving organizations listed in Waste Reduction Workplan.
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 02 41 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
Regulatory Requirements: ensure Work is performed in compliance with CEPA, CEAA, TDGA, and applicable Provincial/Territorial regulations. Site Meetings. .1 Convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this Section and on-site installations in accordance with Sections 01 31 19 and 01 32 16.07 to: .1 Verify project requirements. .2 Review installation and substrate conditions. .3 Co-ordination with other building subtrades. .4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. .2 Arrange for site visit with Departmental Representative to examine existing site conditions adjacent to demolition work, prior to start of Work. .3 Ensure key personnel, site supervisor subcontractor representatives, WMC attend project meetings. .4 Reporting Requirements: WMC to complete. .5 WMC must provide written report on status of waste diversion activity at each meeting. .6 Departmental Representative will provide written notification of change to meeting schedule established upon contract award 24 hours prior to scheduled meeting. Health and Safety. .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.2
.3
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 .2
Perform Work in accordance with Section 01 35 43. Storage and Protection. .1 Protect in accordance with Section 31 23 10. .2 Protect existing items designated to remain and items designated for salvage. In event of damage to such items, immediately replace or make repairs to approval of Departmental Representative and at no cost to Departmental Representative. .3 Remove and store materials to be salvaged, in manner to prevent damage. .4 Store and protect in accordance with requirements for maximum preservation of material.
Section 02 41 23 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) Handle salvaged materials as new .5 materials. Waste Management and Disposal. .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Divert excess materials from landfill to site approved by Departmental Representative. .3 Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers steel, metal and plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan. .4 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. .5 Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. .6 Label location of salvaged material's storage areas and provide barriers and security devices. .7 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely. .8 Source separate for recycling materials that cannot be salvaged for reuse including wood, metal, concrete and asphalt, and gypsum. .9 Remove materials that cannot be salvaged for reuse or recycling and dispose of in accordance with applicable codes at licensed facilities.
.3
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Site Environmental Requirements. .1 Perform work in accordance with Section 01 35 43. .2 Ensure that selective demolition work does not adversely affect adjacent watercourses, groundwater and wildlife, or contribute to excess air and noise pollution. .3 Do not dispose of waste of volatile materials including but not limited to, mineral spirits, oil, petroleum based lubricants, or toxic cleaning solutions into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers. .1 Ensure proper disposal procedures are maintained throughout the project. .4 Do not pump water containing suspended materials into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers or onto adjacent properties. .5 Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authorities as directed by Departmental Representative.
Section 02 41 23 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Protect trees, plants and foliage on site .6 and adjacent properties where indicated.
1.7
SCHEDULING
.1
Employ necessary means to meet project time lines without compromising specified minimum rates of material diversion. .1 Notify Departmental Representative in writing when unforeseen delays occur.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Leave machinery running only while in use, except where extreme temperatures prohibit shutting machinery down.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Inspect site with Departmental Representative and verify extent and location of items designated for removal, disposal, alternative disposal, recycling, salvage and items to remain. Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilities traversing site in operating condition. Notify and obtain approval of utility companies before starting demolition. Disconnect and Cap Designated Mechanical Services. .1 Natural Gas Supply Lines: contact utility company to arrange for removal as directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Sewer and Water Lines: remove in accordance with authority having jurisdiction as directed by Departmental Representative and securely plug to form watertight seal. .3 Other Underground Services: remove and dispose of as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3 .4
Section 02 41 23 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.2 REMOVAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTES
.1
Remove contaminated or dangerous materials defined by authorities having jurisdiction, relating to environmental protection, from site and dispose of in safe manner to minimize danger at site or during disposal.
3.3 REMOVAL OPERATIONS
.1 .2 .3
Remove items as indicated. Do not disturb items designated to remain in place. Removal of Pavements, Curbs and Gutters: .1 Square up adjacent surfaces to remain in place by saw cutting or other method approved by Departmental Representative. .2 Protect adjacent joints and load transfer devices. .3 Protect underlying and adjacent granular materials. Prevent contamination with base course aggregates, when removing asphalt pavement for subsequent incorporation into hot mix asphalt concrete paving, Excavate at least 300 mm below pipe invert, when removing pipes under existing or future pavement area. Stockpile topsoil for final grading and landscaping. .1 Provide erosion control and seeding if not immediately used. Disposal of Material. .1 Dispose of materials not designated for salvage or reuse on site at authorized facilities approved in Waste Reduction Workplan and as instructed by Departmental Representative. Backfill. .1 Backfill in areas as indicated and in accordance with Section 31 23 10.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
3.4
STOCKPILING
.1 .2
Label stockpiles, indicating material type and quantity. Designate appropriate security resources/measures to prevent vandalism, damage and theft.
Section 02 41 23 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.4 STOCKPILING (Cont'd)
.3
Locate stockpiled materials convenient for use in new construction to eliminate double handling wherever possible.
Stockpile materials designated for alternate disposal in location which facilitates removal from site and examination by potential end markets, and which does not impede disassembly, processing, or hauling procedures.
.4
3.5 REMOVAL FROM SITE
.1
Remove stockpiled material as directed by Departmental Representative, when it interferes with operations of project. Remove stockpiles of like materials by alternate disposal option once collection of materials is complete. Dispose of materials not designated for alternate disposal in accordance with applicable regulations.
.2
.3
3.6
RESTORATION
.1
Restore areas and existing works outside areas of demolition to conditions that existed prior to beginning of Work or to match adjacent work, as directed by Departmental Representative. Use soil treatments and procedures which are not harmful to health, are not injurious to plants, and do not endanger wildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.
.2
3.7
CLEANING
.1 .2
Remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean, upon completion of Work Use cleaning solutions and procedures which are not harmful to health, are not injurious to plants, and do not endanger wildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.
END
DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE
Section 02 42 92 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements. Section 01 74 20 - Construction/ Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA S350-M1980(R2003), Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures. National Fire Code of Canada (2005). Comply with National Building Code of Canada NBC 2010, Division B, Part 8, "Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition Sites", and Provincial requirements. Federal Legislation .1 Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA) 1992. .2 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA) 1999. .3 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA) 1992. .4 Occupational Health and Safety Act.
.2 .3
.4
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1
Deconstruction: the systematic dismantling of a structure to salvage materials for reuse. What cannot be reused is considered subsequently for recycling. The ultimate objective is to recover potentially valuable resources while diverting from landfill what has traditionally been a significant portion of the waste system. Demolition: rapid destruction of with or without prior removal of hazardous substances. Recyclable be pulled out from the resulting debris. a building designated/ materials may demolition
.2
.3
Salvage: removal of structural and nonstructural components from a building during a deconstruction project for the purpose of reuse. Reuse: the use of a building material in its original form and function (i.e. without drastic
.4
Section 02 42 92 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
Reuse:(Cont'd) alteration by melting, shredding, pulverizing, etc.). Recycling: the use of a building material which has been processed in some way for use in a form and function which is different from its original form and function. Designated and Regulated Substances: designated substances are substances that are known for their adverse effect on human health and the environment. These include but are not limited to asbestos, lead, mercury, arsenic, silicate, coke oven emissions, acrylonitrile, benzene, ethylene oxide, isocyanates, and vinyl chloride. Regulated substances include fuels, refrigeration and fire suppression fluids, and PCBs. Hazardous Materials: dangerous substances, chemicals and goods such as biological contaminants, poisons, corrosive agents, flammable substances, ammunition, explosives, radioactive substances, or any other material that, if handled improperly, can endanger human health or well being or the environment. Alternate Disposal: disposal at other than a landfill or an incineration plant. Alternate disposal includes salvage and delivery for reuse or delivery to an authorized facility for recycling. Departmental Representative: throughout this section, the term "Departmental Representative" shall refer to the on-site representative of the Project Management body.
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Contractor shall be specialized in performing the work of this section with documented experience in similar types of deconstruction projects. Contractor shall provide a qualified and competent supervisor with previous experience in deconstruction work who shall be present at all times during the deconstruction activities and who shall direct all work. Designate a person on site who would be responsible for worker and general public safety and who will maintain project site safety procedures and requirements and in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.2
Section 02 42 92 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
.3
Ensure workers and subcontractors employed on the project are trained and briefed on the job to carry out work in accordance with the appropriate deconstruction techniques.
.1
Conform to applicable codes and regulations for deconstruction of buildings, safety of adjacent structures, noise and dust control, removal of common and hazardous waste and disposal. Complete all deconstruction work according to the requirements of the Canadian Construction Safety Code, Provincial Labour and WSIB Workers Safety and Insurance Board Regulations and Waste Management regulations. Obtain required authorization, certificates and permits from authorities having jurisdiction. Acquire adequate insurance for potential liabilities related to material pickup from the project site, as applicable. Notify Departmental Representative and affected utility companies before starting work, and comply with their requirements. Do not close or obstruct safety exits, adjacent sidewalks, hydrants, parking or storage areas without prior approval of Departmental Representative. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials that were not previously documented. Only those resale/brokerage, storage, recycling, transfer and/or disposal facilities which comply with the provincial and municipal regulations and by-laws shall be used by the Contractor for the disposal of materials generated at the deconstruction project.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Salvage materials from the structure and site. Segregate unsalvageables for recycling to achieve maximum diversion of waste that otherwise would be destined for landfill disposal.
Section 02 42 92 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.7
SUBMITTALS
.1
Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of deconstruction work and supporting structures and underpinning. Submit plans stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. Submit a verified list of certified/ authorized equipment dismantlers, material haulers, receivers and/or end users of salvaged materials, recycling facilities, and waste disposal facilities. Submit copies of certified weigh bills, bills of lading, used building material receipts, from authorized disposal sites and reuse and recycling facilities for all material removed from site to Departmental Representative on a weekly basis. Written authorization from Departmental Representative is required to deviate from the haulers, facilities and receiving organizations. With regards to documentation of materials removal, include but not limited to the five items listed below. This information must be submitted to Departmental Representative in a tabulated format on a weekly basis or on specific time periods specified by Departmental Representative. .1 Description of materials. .2 Time and date of removal. .3 Weight, volume, or quantity of material. .4 Breakdown of reuse, recycling and landfill percentages or quantities. .5 End destination of materials. Workers, haulers and subcontractors shall possess applicable, current licenses, Certificates of Approval, and/or permits to remove, handle, transport and dispose of materials provincially, municipally, and/ or federally categorized as designated, hazardous or otherwise regulated substances. Upon written request, submit proof of compliance to Departmental Representative within 24 hours.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 02 42 92 Page 5 2011-05-25
.1
Ensure work is performed in compliance with all applicable federal legislation including CEPA, CEAA, TDGA, MVSA, and all applicable provincial regulations and municipal bylaws. Document work activities and produce evidence of compliance immediately upon request by Departmental Representative and/or respective regulatory body.
.2
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Contractor shall accept the site as it exists and will be responsible for all deconstruction work as required. Prior to start of work, arrange for a site visit together with Departmental Representative to examine existing exterior and interior site conditions and adjacent structures. Where applicable, the Contractor at his expense shall be responsible for taking pictures of any existing damage to adjacent structures and record same in writing to avoid any disputes at a later date. Where materials or conditions revealed appear to be other than those normally expected or indicated in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall immediately inform the Departmental Representative, should such variance of conditions or materials result in a contemplated change to the cost of the work. Should an alternate method of deconstruction or change of materials be appropriate, the Departmental Representative shall immediately give his decision before the work proceeds. .1 If material resembling spray or trowel applied asbestos or any other designated, or listed as hazardous substance be encountered in course of deconstruction, stop work, take preventative measures, and notify Departmental Representative immediately. Do not proceed until written instructions have been received. .2 Ensure compliance with the handling, transportation and disposal requirements of fuels, PCBs, halocarbons and other regulated substances that are likely to be encountered during removal, disassembly or dismantling of mechanical and electrical equipment. .3 Prior to dismantling and removal of equipment specified for salvage, clearly label all parts/components of mechanical to facilitate re-assembly, as applicable.
.2
.3
Section 02 42 92 Page 6 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) Appropriately label and package all .4 components and parts of mechanical and electrical materials specified for salvage to prevent damage or loss. Protection: .1 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walkways, paving, trees, landscaping, and/or adjacent ground grades. Provide bracing and/or shoring as required. Repair damage caused by deconstruction as directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Support affected structures and, if safety of structure being deconstructed or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, take preventative measures, cease operations and immediately notify Departmental Representative. .3 Prevent debris from blocking emergency exit routes, surface drainage system, elevators, mechanical and electrical systems which must remain in operation.
.4
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
.1
Do work in accordance with Section 01 35 43.
1.11
SCHEDULING
.1
Ensure project time lines are me without compromising specified minimum rates of material salvage, recovery or diversion. Notify Departmental Representative in writing of delays.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Employ equipment and techniques to maximize material salvage potential and segregate all recyclable materials. Equipment and heavy machinery used during course of demolition shall meet or exceed all applicable emission requirements, operate in compliance with EPA CFR 86.098-10, Emission Standards for 1998 and Later Model Year Otto-Cycle Heavy Duty Engines and Vehicles and EPA CFR 86.098-11, Emission Standards for 1998 and Later Model Year Diesel Heavy Duty Engines and Vehicles, and MVSA.
.2
Section 02 42 92 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.1 EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
.3
Leave equipment and machinery running only while in use, except where extreme cold temperatures prohibit shutting down.
Use water misting or water efficient wetting equipment/trucks/attachments for dust suppression. Demonstrate that all equipment and tools are being used in a manner which allows for the salvage of materials in best condition possible.
.4
.5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Locate and protect utility lines. Do not disrupt active or energized utilities traversing deconstruction area, designated to remain undisturbed. Post signs in visible locations and appropriate languages to alert workers, subcontractors, haulers, and public to the job site hazards, travel routes, processing and stockpiling of each material, material storage bin location and use.
.2
3.2
PROTECTION
.1
Carry out deconstruction of a designated portion of existing security fence, only after construction of the new maximum security living units facility has been completed, with all site work including new security fences. Coordinate commencement of work with Departmental Representative and Project Schedule. Notify The Departmental Representative minimum 48 hours before start of existing fence disassembly. Carry out work with minimum or no interference to public or private accesses. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. Ensure that deconstruction work does not adversely affect adjacent watercourses, groundwater and wildlife, or contribute to excess air and noise pollution. Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials such as: mineral spirits, oil, petroleum based lubricants, or toxic cleaning solutions into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers. Ensure
.2
.3
.4
Section 02 42 92 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.2 PROTECTION (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) proper disposal procedures are maintained throughout project. Do not pump water containing suspended materials into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers, or onto adjacent properties. Control runoff or disposal of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authorities. Protect trees, plants and foliage on site and adjacent properties where indicated. Prevent extraneous materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures during deconstruction activities. Cover or wet down dry materials and waste to prevent blowing dust and debris. Control dust and mud tracking on all temporary roads. Stop work immediately if adjacent installations or structures appear to be in danger. Notify Departmental Representative. Do not resume work until directed by Departmental Representative. Provide, install and maintain all necessary and/or legally required railings, guards and warning signs during execution of the work to fully protect all persons from loss, damage, death or injury. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the methods, equipment and/or techniques used during the deconstruction activities do not overload or undermine any structural members or jeopardize the overall safety of the operation. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to design, provide, install and maintain an adequate temporary shoring and/or bracing that may be required during the deconstruction activities. Protect existing structures, equipment and machinery which are not to be dismantled or salvaged. Protect from damage all property and site improvements in the immediate surroundings of the project area. Make good all damages to property and improvements including sidewalks, curbs, landscaped or paved areas and other finishes that may be damaged during execution of the deconstruction work.
.5
.6 .7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
Section 02 42 92 Page 9 2011-05-25
.14
Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage systems, exits, travel routes, mechanical and electrical systems that are to remain in operation.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to design, provide, install and maintain all necessary lighting and temporary fire protection requirements.
.15
3.3
DISASSEMBLY
.1
Materials removed from existing portion of security fence to be deconstructed are property of Contractor unless directed otherwise. The following materials removed from existing portion of security fence to be deconstructed are to be turned over to Departmental Representative and stored as directed: .1 All components of PIDS. .2 Hardware. .3 All other electrical and electronic equipment. Throughout the course of deconstruction, pay close attention to connections and material assemblies. Employ workmanship procedures which minimize damage to salvageable materials and equipment. Deconstruct in accordance with CSA S350 and all other applicable safety regulations, codes, guidelines and standards. Workers must utilize means of protection where necessary. Maintain structural integrity of structure at all times. Systematically remove all components of portion of existing security fence as indicated, including hardware and all electrical systems and equipment. Disassemble in sequence: components of PIDS and all other electrical equipment, hardware, concertina wires, wire mesh fabric, gates, rails and posts, and footings. Take all appropriate measures to ensure safety.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7
.8
.9
Section 02 42 92 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.3 DISASSEMBLY (Cont'd)
.10
Carefully and methodically separate and segregate materials into reusable, recycleable and waste streams.
At end of each day's work, leave work in safe and stable condition. Do not backfill excavations or below grade cavities until inspected by Departmental Representative. Refer to Section 31 23 10. Completely remove all footings and concrete slab and backfill the remaining cavity with imported soils that are free of chemical and aesthetic contamination and are readily compactable to at least 98% Standard Proctor Density. Apply a layer of about 300 mm to 600 mm of screened topsoil across the backfilled area and grade to match surrounding ground contours. The topsoil must be certified as free of chemical and aesthetic contamination and must not inhibit seed germination and growth of landscaping vegetation. Apply grass seed at time periods and with varieties and densities as directed by Departmental Representative.
.11 .12
.13
.14
.15
3.4
PROCESSING
.1
Designate location for processing of materials which eliminates double handling and provides adequate space to maintain efficient material flow. Separate and stock materials in manner which ensures best possible condition of salvaged materials. Keep processing area clean, organized and free of debris. Supply separate, clearly marked disposal bins and containers for all categories of materials. Do not remove waste bins from site until inspected and approved by Departmental Representative. Notify Departmental Representative prior to removal of any material bins from site. Separate and prepare processed materials into organized piles for proper handling and storage or transportation. Provide collection area for
.2
.3 .4
.5
Section 02 42 92 Page 11 2011-05-25
3.4 PROCESSING (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) materials processed, and designated for alternate disposal.
3.5 STORAGE AND STOCKPILING
.1
Store salvaged materials in designated secure areas and protect from the elements. Clearly label all stockpiles, indicating material type and quantity. Employ reasonable means necessary to protect salvaged materials from vandalism, theft, adverse weather or inadvertent damage by heavy machinery. Stockpile materials designated for off-site destinations in locations which facilitate removal from site and examination by potential end markets, and which does not impede disassembly, processing, or hauling procedures. Maximum permitted duration of material storage on site is between commencement and completion dates stipulated in the project contract documents.
.2
.3
.4
3.6 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL
.1
Load, transport salvaged material and unload at destination so that material is delivered in condition that is acceptable to the end user. Transport recyclable materials in appropriate containers and in accordance with applicable provincial/territorial and municipal requirements. Transport solid waste, contaminated materials and/or hazardous materials/waste in in accordance with TDGA and related provincial/territorial and municipal regulations and by-laws. Contaminated materials and waste must be transported by appropriately licensed/authorized haulers. Salvaged reusable materials, recyclables, waste, and contaminated or hazardous materials removed from the project site shall be transported by and delivered to appropriately licensed or authorized haulers, facilities and receiving organizations listed in waste reduction workplan. Do not deviate from haulers, facilities and receiving organizations listed in
.2
.3
.4
Section 02 42 92 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.6 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) waste reduction workplan without prior written authorization from Departmental Representative. Recyclable materials, solid waste, contaminated or hazardous materials removed from the site shall be disposed of at appropriately licensed or authorized facilities only in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Contractor shall provide legal evidence of appropriate disposal to the Departmental Representative. Individuals or organizations receiving salvaged reusable materials must for ever indemnify the Departmental Representative from all claims arising from handling, transportation, and use of the materials. Contractor is responsible to obtain such legal indemnification to the Departmental Representative's satisfaction.
.5
.6
3.7 CLEANING AND RESTORATION
.1 .2 .3
Keep site clean and organized throughout deconstruction activities. Upon completion of project, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean. Fires and burning of waste or materials is not permitted on-site and is strongly discouraged off-site. Do not bury material on-site unless the activity is authorized by the Departmental Representative in writing and the material is processed for use as fill and meets all applicable regulations and codes. Upon completion of project, reinstate all areas, parking surfaces, walkways, light standards, and other adjacent areas or structures affected by Work to condition which existed prior to commencement of Work or better, and /or to match condition of adjacent, undisturbed areas, as directed by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5
END
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Section 02 81 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Definitions: .1 Dangerous Goods: product, substance, or organism specifically listed or meets hazard criteria established in Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations. .2 Hazardous Material: product, substance, or organism used for its original purpose; and is either dangerous goods or material that will cause adverse impact to environment or adversely affect health of persons, animals, or plant life when released into the environment. .3 Hazardous Waste: hazardous material no longer used for its original purpose and that is intended for recycling, treatment or disposal. Reference Standards: .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act,1999 (CEPA 1999) .1 Export and Import of Hazardous Waste and Hazardous Recyclable Material Regulations (SOR/2005-149). .2 Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDG Act) 1992, (c. 34). .2 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations (T-19.01-SOR/2001-286). .3 Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). .4 National Research Council Canada Institute for Research in Construction (NRC-IRC) .1 National Fire Code of Canada-2005. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation XI. Source Specific Standards .1 SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2007, Architectural Coatings. .2 SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
.2
.3
1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for hazardous materials and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Section 02 81 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)
.2
Product Data:(Cont'd) Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS in .2 accordance with Sections 01 35 29.06 and 01 35 43 to Departmental Representative for each hazardous material required prior to bringing hazardous material on site. .3 Submit hazardous materials management plan to Departmental Representative that identifies hazardous materials, usage, location, personal protective equipment requirements, and disposal arrangements. Sustainable Design Submittals: .1 Construction Waste Management: .1 Submit project Waste Management Plan Waste Reduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvage requirements. .2 Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstrating that 95% of construction wastes were recycled or salvaged .2 Low-Emitting Materials: submit listing of adhesives and sealants and paints and coatings used in building, comply with VOC and chemical component limits or restrictions requirements.
.3
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Transport hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations, and applicable provincial regulations. .1 When exporting hazardous waste to another country, ensure compliance with Export and Import of Hazardous Waste and Hazardous Recyclable Materials Regulations. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Co-ordinate storage of hazardous materials with Departmental Representative and abide by internal requirements for labelling and storage of materials and wastes. .2 Store and handle hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with applicable federal and
.2
.3
.4
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Section 02 81 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
.4
Storage and Handling Requirements:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) provincial laws, regulations, codes, and guidelines. .3 Store and handle flammable and combustible materials in accordance with National Fire Code of Canada requirements. .4 Keep no more than 45 litres of flammable and combustible liquids such as gasoline, kerosene and naphtha for ready use. .1 Store flammable and combustible liquids in approved safety cans bearing the Underwriters' Laboratory of Canada or Factory Mutual seal of approval. .2 Storage of quantities of flammable and combustible liquids exceeding 45 litres for work purposes requires the written approval of the Departmental Representative. .5 Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids is prohibited within buildings. .6 Transfer flammable and combustible liquids away from open flames or heat-producing devices. .7 Solvents or cleaning agents must be non-flammable or have flash point above 38 degrees C. .8 Store flammable and combustible waste liquids for disposal in approved containers located in safe, ventilated area. Keep quantities to minimum. .9 Observe smoking regulations, smoking is prohibited in areas where hazardous materials are stored, used, or handled. .10 Storage requirements for quantities of hazardous materials and wastes in excess of 5 kg for solids, and 5 litres for liquids: .1 Store hazardous materials and wastes in closed and sealed containers. .2 Label containers of hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with WHMIS. .3 Store hazardous materials and wastes in containers compatible with that material or waste. .4 Segregate incompatible materials and wastes. .5 Ensure that different hazardous materials or hazardous wastes are stored in separate containers. .6 Store hazardous materials and wastes in secure storage area with controlled access. .7 Maintain clear egress from storage area.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Section 02 81 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
.4
Storage and Handling Requirements:(Cont'd) .10 (Cont'd) Store hazardous materials and wastes .8 in location that will prevent them from spilling into environment. .9 Have appropriate emergency spill response equipment available near storage area, including personal protective equipment. .10 Maintain inventory of hazardous materials and wastes, including product name, quantity, and date when storage began. .11 When hazardous waste is generated on site: .1 Co-ordinate transportation and disposal with Departmental Representative. .2 Comply with applicable federal, provincial and municipal laws and regulations for generators of hazardous waste. .3 Use licensed carrier authorized by provincial authorities to accept subject material. .4 Before shipping material obtain written notice from intended hazardous waste treatment or disposal facility it will accept material and it is licensed to accept this material. .5 Label containers with legible, visible safety marks as prescribed by federal and provincial regulations. .6 Only trained personnel handle, offer for transport, or transport dangerous goods. .7 Provide photocopy of shipping documents and waste manifests to Departmental Representative. .8 Track receipt of completed manifest from consignee after shipping dangerous goods. Provide photocopy of completed manifest to Departmental Representative. .9 Report discharge, emission, or escape of hazardous materials immediately to Departmental Representative and appropriate provincial authority. Take reasonable measures to control release. .12 Ensure personnel have been trained in accordance with Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) requirements.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Section 02 81 01 Page 5 2011-05-25
.4
Storage and Handling Requirements:(Cont'd) .10 (Cont'd) .13 Report spills or accidents immediately to Departmental Representative. Submit a written spill report to Departmental Representative within 24 hours of incident. Develop Waste Reduction Workplan related to Work of this Section and in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.5
.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Description: .1 Bring on site only quantities hazardous material required to perform Work. .2 Maintain MSDS in proximity to where materials are being used. Communicate this location to personnel who may have contact with hazardous materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day. Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .1 Dispose of hazardous waste materials in accordance with applicable federal and provincial acts, regulations, and guidelines. .2 Recycle hazardous wastes for which there is approved, cost effective recycling process available.
.2
.3
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Section 02 81 01 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.1 CLEANING (Cont'd)
.3
Waste Management:(Cont'd) .3 Send hazardous wastes to authorized hazardous waste disposal or treatment facilities. .4 Burning, diluting, or mixing hazardous wastes for purpose of disposal is prohibited. .5 Disposal of hazardous materials in waterways, storm or sanitary sewers, or in municipal solid waste landfills is prohibited. .6 Dispose of hazardous wastes in timely fashion in accordance with applicable provincial regulations. .7 Minimize generation of hazardous waste to maximum extent practicable. Take necessary precautions to avoid mixing clean and contaminated wastes. .8 Identify and evaluate recycling and reclamation options as alternatives to land disposal, such as: .1 Hazardous wastes recycled in manner constituting disposal. .2 Hazardous waste burned for energy recovery. .3 Lead-acid battery recycling. .4 Hazardous wastes with economically recoverable precious metals.
END
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Section 03 10 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
.1
No measurement will be made under this Section. Include costs in items of work for which concrete formwork and falsework is required.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1 .2
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI A208.1-09, Particleboard. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. .2 CSA O86-09, Engineering Design in Wood. .3 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .4 CSA O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood. .5 CSA O153-M1980(R2008), Poplar Plywood. .6 CSA O437 Series-93(R2006), Standards for OSB and Waferboard. .7 CSA S269.1-1975(R2003), Falsework for Construction Purposes. .8 CAN/CSA-S269.3-M92(R2008), Concrete Formwork. Council of Forest Industries of British Columbia (COFI) .1 COFI Exterior Plywood for Concrete Formwork.
.3
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings for formwork and falsework in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate method and schedule of construction, shoring, stripping and re-shoring procedures, materials, arrangement of joints, special architectural exposed finishes, ties, liners, and locations of temporary embedded parts. Comply with CSA S269.1, for falsework drawings. Comply with CAN/CSA-S269.3 for formwork drawings. Indicate formwork design data, such as permissible rate of concrete placement, and temperature of concrete, in forms. Indicate sequence of erection and removal of formwork/falsework as directed by Departmental Reresentative.
.3
.4
Section 03 10 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd)
.5
Each shop drawing submission shall bear stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.
1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and the Waste Reduction Workplan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children. Use sealers, form release and stripping agents that are non-toxic, biodegradable and have zero or low VOC's.
.2 .3 .4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Formwork materials: .1 For concrete without special architectural features, use wood and wood product formwork materials to CSA O121, CSA O86, CSA O437 Series, and CSA O153. .2 For concrete with special architectural features, use formwork materials to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Tubular column forms: round, spirally wound laminated fiber forms, internally treated with release material. Form ties: .1 For concrete not designated 'Architectural', use removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable length, free of devices leaving holes larger than 25 mm dia. in concrete surface. .2 For Architectural concrete, use snap ties complete with plastic cones and light grey concrete plugs. Form release agent: non-toxic, biodegradable, low VOC. Falsework materials: to CSA S269.1. Sealant: to Section 07 92 00.
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
Section 03 10 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)
.7 .8
Void form to section 03 30 11. Fillets for chamfered corners: hardwood type, 25 mm x 25 mm, maximum length possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
.1
Verify lines, levels and centres before proceeding with formwork/falsework and ensure dimensions agree with drawings. Obtain Departmental Reresentative's approval for use of earth forms framing openings not indicated on drawings. Hand trim sides and bottoms and remove loose earth from earth forms before placing concrete. Fabricate and erect falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1 and COFI Exterior Plywood for Concrete Formwork. Refer to architectural drawings for concrete members requiring architectural exposed finishes. Do not place shores and mud sills on frozen ground. Provide site drainage to prevent washout of soil supporting mud sills and shores. Fabricate and erect formwork in accordance with CAN/CSA-S269.3 to produce finished concrete conforming to shape, dimensions, locations and levels indicated within tolerances required by CSA A23.1/A23.2. Align form joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to minimum. Locate horizontal form joints for exposed columns 2400 mm above finished floor elevation. Use 25 mm chamfer strips on external corners. Form chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses, expansion and control joints as indicated. Construct forms for architectural concrete, and place ties as indicated and/or as directed. Joint pattern not necessarily based on using
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6 .7 .8
.9 .10 .11 .12 .13
Section 03 10 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION (Cont'd)
.13
(Cont'd) standard size panels or maximum permissible spacing of ties. Build in anchors, sleeves, and other inserts required to accommodate Work specified in other sections. Assure that all anchors and inserts will not protrude beyond surfaces designated to receive applied finishes, including painting. Clean formwork in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, before placing concrete. Winter Construction: .1 Remove ice and snow from within the forms. .2 The use of de-icing salts will not be permitted. .3 Unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within a heated enclosure, do not use water to clean out completed forms. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. Construct formwork to maintain the following maximum tolerances: .1 Deviation from horizontal and vertical lines: .1 6 mm in 3000 mm. .2 12 mm in 12000 mm. .2 Deviation of building dimensions indicated on drawings and position of columns, walls and partitions: 6 mm. .3 Deviation in cross sectional dimensions of columns or beams or in thickness of slabs and walls: plus or minus 6 mm. .4 In addition to tolerances specified, any exposed concrete surface which is to receive an applied finish must be level, flat and plumb (vertical) within a tolerance of 3 mm in 3000 mm.
.14
.15 .16
.17
3.2 REMOVAL AND RESHORING
.1
Leave formwork in place for following minimum periods of time after placing concrete. .1 4 days for walls and sides of beams. .2 7 days for columns. .3 21 days for beam soffits, slabs, decks and other structural members. .4 4 days for footings and abutments. Remove formwork when concrete has reached 75% of its design strength or minimum period noted above, whichever comes later, and replace immediately with adequate reshoring.
.2
Section 03 10 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.2 REMOVAL AND RESHORING (Cont'd)
.3
Provide all necessary reshoring of members where early removal of forms may be required or where members may be subjected to additional loads during construction as required.
Space reshoring in each principal direction at not more than 3000 mm apart. Re-use formwork and falsework subject to requirements of CSA A23.1/A23.2.
.4 .5
END
CONCRETE REINFORCING
Section 03 20 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Concrete Institute (ACI) .1 ACI SP-66-04, ACI Detailing Manual 2004. .1 ACI 315-99, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. .2 ACI 315R-04, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures. ASTM International .1 ASTM A82/A82M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. .2 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .3 ASTM A143/A143M-07, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. .4 ASTM A185/A185M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. .5 ASTM A775/A775M-07b, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. CSA International .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CSA A23.3-04, Design of Concrete Structures. .3 CSA G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .4 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .5 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .6 CSA W186-M1990(R2007), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction. Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada (RSIC) .1 RSIC-2004, Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice.
.2
.3
.4
Section 03 20 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Prepare reinforcement drawings in accordance with RSIC Manual of Standard Practice and ACI 315. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate placing of reinforcement and: .1 Bar bending details. .2 Lists. .3 Quantities of reinforcement. .4 Sizes, spacings, locations of reinforcement and mechanical splices if approved by Departmental Representative, with identifying code marks to permit correct placement without reference to structural drawings. .5 Indicate sizes, spacings and locations of chairs, spacers and hangers. .3 Detail lap lengths and bar development lengths to CSA A23.3, unless otherwise indicated.
.3
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 45 00 and as described in PART 2 - SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL. .1 Mill Test Report: upon request, provide Departmental Representative with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel, minimum 4 weeks prior to beginning reinforcing work. .2 Upon request submit in writing to Departmental Representative proposed source of reinforcement material to be supplied.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.2
.3
Section 03 20 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.4
Develop Waste Reduction Workplan related to Work of this Section and in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Substitute different size bars only if permitted in writing by Departmental Representative. Reinforcing steel: billet steel, Grade 300 for ties and stirrups, Grade 400 for all other bars, deformed bars to CSA G30.18, unless indicated otherwise. Reinforcing steel: weldable low alloy steel deformed bars to CSA G30.18. Cold-drawn annealed steel wire ties: to ASTM A82/A82M. Deformed steel wire for concrete reinforcement: to ASTM A82/A82M. Welded steel wire mesh: to ASTM A185/A185M. Provide in flat sheets only. Welded deformed steel wire mesh: to ASTM A82/A82M. Provide in flat sheets only. Epoxy Coating of non-prestressed reinforcement: to ASTM A775/A775M. Galvanizing of non-prestressed reinforcement: to ASTM A123/A123M, Coating Grade 85, minimum 2 zinc coating 600 g/m . .1 Protect galvanized reinforcing steel with chromate treatment to prevent reaction with Portland cement paste. .2 If chromate treatment is carried out immediately after galvanizing, soak steel in aqueous solution containing minimum 0.2% by weight sodium dichromate or 0.2% chromic acid. .1 Temperature of solution equal to or greater than 32 degrees and galvanized steels immersed for minimum 20 seconds. .3 If galvanized steels are at ambient temperature, add sulphuric acid as bonding agent at concentration of 0.5% to 1%. .1 In this case, no restriction applies to temperature of solution.
.2
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
Section 03 20 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.9
(Cont'd) .4 Chromate solution sold for this purpose may replace solution described above, provided it is of equivalent effectiveness. .1 Provide product description as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS. Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Mechanical splices: subject to approval of Departmental Representative. Plain round bars: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21.
.10 .11 .12
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, ACI 315 and Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada. Obtain Departmental Representative's written approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than those shown on placing drawings. Upon approval of Departmental Representative, weld reinforcement in accordance with CSA W186. Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified in accordance with bar bending details and lists. .1 Ship epoxy coated bars in accordance with ASTM A775A/A775M.
.2
.3 .4
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Upon request, provide Departmental Representative with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 4 weeks prior to beginning reinforcing work. Upon request inform Departmental Representative of proposed source of material to be supplied.
.2
Section 03 20 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Galvanizing to include chromate treatment. .1 Duration of treatment to be 1 hour per 25 mm of bar diameter. Conduct bending tests to verify galvanized bar fragility in accordance with ASTM A143/A143M.
.2
3.2
FIELD BENDING
.1
Do not field bend or field weld reinforcement except where indicated or authorized by Departmental Representative. When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying slow and steady pressure. Replace bars, which develop cracks or splits.
.2 .3
3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
.1 .2
Place reinforcing steel as indicated on placing drawings and in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2. Use plain round bars as slip dowels in concrete. Paint portion of dowel intended to move within hardened concrete with one coat of asphalt paint. When paint is dry, apply thick even film of mineral lubricating grease. Prior to placing concrete, obtain Departmental Representative's approval of reinforcing material and placement. Ensure cover to reinforcement is maintained during concrete pour. Protect epoxy coated portions of bars with covering during transportation and handling. Clear distance between adjacent bars and splices shall be not less than 1.4 times the largest bar diameter, not less than 1.4 times the largest aggregate, and not less than 30 mm. Reinforcing steel shall, where not otherwise shown on the structural drawings, be protected by concrete cover over the reinforcement as follows: .1 Where concrete is formed against earth, not less than 75 mm.
.3
.4 .5 .6
.7
Section 03 20 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT (Cont'd)
.7
(Cont'd) In girders, beams, and columns exposed to .2 the weather or in contact with soil, not less than 50 mm to principal reinforcement 35M or smaller, and not less than 40 mm to ties and stirrups. .3 In slabs and walls exposed to the ground or weather, not less than 30 mm for 20M and smaller bars. .4 In slabs not exposed to the ground or weather, not less than 25 mm for 20M and smaller bars. .5 In walls not exposed to the ground or weather, not less than 50 mm to principle reinforcement. .6 In beams, girders and columns not exposed to the ground or weather, not less than 50 mm to principal reinforcement 35M or smaller and not less than 40 mm to ties and stirrups. .7 Concrete covers shall be maintained within 5 mm of that required.
3.4
WELDING
.1
Do welding to meet requirements of CSA Wl86. Have welding performed by workmen qualified under CSA W47.1. Welding permitted only by written authority of the Departmental Representative.
3.5 REINFORCING FOR MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
.1
Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, reinforce miscellaneous concrete to one of the following: .1 Sections up to 100 mm thick: 10M @ 500 mm o.c. each way mid depth. .2 Sections up to 150 mm thick: 10M @ 300 mm o.c. each way mid depth. .3 Sections up to 200 mm thick: two layers of 10M @ 400 mm o.c. each way. .4 Thickened Edges: 4-15M cont. .5 Cylindrical Sections up to 400 mm dia: 4-15M cont. c/w 10M ties @ 300 mm o.c. .6 Cylindrical Sections up to 600 mm dia: 5-20M cont. c/w 10M ties @ 450 mm o.c.
3.6
FIELD TOUCH-UP
.1
Touch up damaged and cut ends of epoxy coated or galvanized reinforcing steel with compatible finish to provide continuous coating.
Section 03 20 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.7
CLEANING
.1
Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
END
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Section 03 30 11 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM C109/C109M-08, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens). .2 ASTM C260-10, Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. .3 ASTM C309-07, Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. .4 ASTM C332-09, Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete. .5 ASTM C494/C494M-10a, Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. .6 ASTM C827/C827M-10, Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures. .7 ASTM C939-10, Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced Aggregate Concrete. .8 ASTM D412-06ae2, Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension. .9 ASTM D624-00(2007), Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomer. .10 ASTM D1751-04(2008), Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). .11 ASTM D1752-04a(2008), Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing. .2 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound. .3 CAN/CGSB-25.20-95, Surface Sealer for Floors. .4 CAN/CGSB-37.2-M88, Emulsified Asphalt, Mineral Colloid Type, Unfilled, for Dampproofing and Waterproofing and for Roof Coatings. .5 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. .6 CGSB 81-GP-1M-77, Flooring, Conductive and Spark Resistant.
.2
Section 03 30 11 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/ Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CSA A23.3-04, Design of Concrete Structures. .3 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium. .4 CAN/CSA-B651-04, Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide testing and inspection results and reports for review by Departmental Representative and do not proceed without written approval when deviations from mix design or parameters are found.
1.3
CERTIFICATES
.1 .2
Submit certificates in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide certification that mix proportions selected will produce concrete of quality, yield and strength as specified in concrete mixes, and will comply with CSA A23.1/A23.2. Provide certification that plant, equipment, and materials to be used in concrete comply with requirements of CSA A23.1/A23.2.
.3
1.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING
.1
Concrete testing shall be carried out by an independent testing agency, acceptable to the Departmental Representative. Refer to Section 01 29 83. The testing agency shall be responsible for sampling, initial curing and transporting of test cylinders to the laboratory. Notify Departmental Representative and Testing Agency at least 24 hours prior to each concrete pour. Provide free access to all portions of work and cooperate with appointed agency. Concrete testing shall consist of three (3) test cylinders taken for every 50 cubic meters or less of each class of concrete placed each day. One (1) cylinder to be tested at 7 days,
.2
.3
.4 .5
Section 03 30 11 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) the remaining two (2) cylinders to be tested at 28 days. For concrete walks, curbs and gutters, three (3) concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 75 cubic metres or less of concrete placed each day. One (l) additional test cylinder shall be taken during cold weather concreting, and be cured on jobsite under same conditions of concrete it represents. One (l) slump test and one (1) air content test shall be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. Testing of concrete shall be performed in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2. Test results shall be issued to Departmental Representative, Contractor, structural engineer, and ready-mixed concrete supplier. Test reports are to be numbered consecutively beginning with number one, and identify the location of the concrete placement in the project. Required retesting will be paid for by the Contractor. The Departmental Representative may order additional testing any time even though the required tests indicate the strength requirements have been met. In this instance, the Departmental Representative will pay for those tests that meet the specified requirements and the Contractor shall pay for those that do not. Non destructive methods for testing concrete shall be according to CSA A23.1/A23.2.
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10
.11 .12
.13
Section 03 30 11 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Concrete: mix proportion method Alternative 1 to CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction. .1 Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Type GU with 15% fly ash replacement. Fly ash not permited in floor slabs with dry shake hardener. .2 Compressive strength: 35 MPa at 28 days for exterior concrete, 30 MPa at 28 days for all other concrete. Supplementary cementing materials: to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Cementitious hydraulic slag: to CAN/CSA A3000. Water: to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Aggregates: to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Coarse aggregates to be normal density. The fine aggregate for concrete slabs that are to be finished with dry shake hardener shall contain a maximum of 0.4% clay particles as determined by CSA Test A23.2 3A "Clay Lumps in Natural Aggregate". Test results shall be submitted to Departmental Representative for review. Air entraining admixture: to ASTM C260. Chemical admixtures: to ASTM C494. Departmental Representative to approve accelerating or set retarding admixtures during cold and hot weather placing. Shrinkage compensating grout: premixed compound consisting of non metallic aggregate, Portland cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. .1 Compressive strength: 40 MPa at 7 days. .2 Consistency: .1 Fluid: to ASTM C827. Time of efflux through flow cone (ASTM C939), under 30 s. .2 Flowable: to ASTM C827. Flow table, 5 drops in 3 s, (ASTM C109, applicable portion) 125 to 145%. .3 Plastic: to ASTM C827. Flow table, 5 drops in 3 s, (ASTM C109, applicable portions) 100 to 125%. .4 Dry pack to manufacturer's requirements. Non-premixed dry pack grout: composition of non-metallic aggregate Portland cement with
.2 .3 .4 .5
.6 .7
.8
.9
Section 03 30 11 Page 5 2011-05-25
.9
Non-premixed dry pack grout:(Cont'd) sufficient water for the mixture to retain its shape when made into a ball by hand and capable of developing compressive strength of 40 MPa at 7 days. Curing compound: to CSA A23.1/A23.2 and to ASTM C309, Type 1 chlorinated rubber. Premoulded joint filler: bituminous impregnated fiber board: to ASTM D1751. Vapour barrier: 0.152 mm thickness to CAN/CGSB-51.34. Vertical joint sealant: non-sag polyurethane sealant designed for use on vertical surfaces, to CAN/CGSB-19.13. Colour selection by Departmental Representative. Install strictly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Horizontal joint sealant: multi component chemically curing, self levelling, polyurethane joint sealant, to CAN/CGSB-19.24. Colour selection by Departmental Representative. Install strictly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Drilled concrete wedge anchors: Sized as per drawings. Minimum embedment length of all wedge anchors to be 150 mm unless noted otherwise. Drilled concrete inserts with bolt extension: Concrete inserts to be sized as detailed on drawings. Bolt extensions to be mild steel threaded extensions sized as detailed on drawings. Screen tube and epoxy anchors: Sizes specified on the drawings. Concrete topping less than 50 mm thick: use cement base/acrylic polymer compound capable of feathering. Concrete bonding agent, high polymer, polyvinyl acetate emulsion applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Concrete inserts: inserts sizes as indicated on drawings. Type EC-2F and EC-4F. Chemical hardener: Type 1, with non-metal based active ingredients.
.10 .11 .12 .13
.14
.15
.16
.17 .18
.19
.20 .21
Section 03 30 11 Page 6 2011-05-25
.22 .23
Concrete sealer: to CAN/CGSB-25.20, Type 2, water based, clear. Void form shall be one of the following: .1 System made de-composable cardboard slab and beam forms. .2 Compressible void filler system to be designed and installed to fail at a maximum net uplift pressure of 1.2 kPa when combined with concrete self weight alone. Void space shown on drawings is sized for cardboard void form. For compressible void filler increase depth of void to provide space for crushed material. Contractor to provide shop drawings sealed by a professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. Shop drawings to provide detailed information regarding slab uplift pressures.
2.2
MIXES
.1
Concrete to be proportioned according to the notes on the drawings for the Location and Class of Exposure indicated. Do not change concrete mix without prior approval of Departmental Representative. Should change be proposed, submit new mix design to Departmental Representative for review. Each load of ready mixed or transit mixed concrete delivered to the project site shall be accompanied by duplicate delivery slips providing the following information: .1 Name and location of batch plant. .2 Date and serial number of ticket. .3 Name of Contractor. .4 Specific designation of job (name and location). .5 Specific class of exposure in conformance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Table 1. .6 Amount of concrete in cubic metres. .7 Truck number, cumulative total, and/or load number. .8 Time loaded or time of first mixing of cement and aggregate. Space to be provided for the following information, which is to be registered by the producer's representative on at least two copies of the delivery ticket, after discharge has been completed: .1 The time that the load arrived on the project site. .2 The time that the discharge of load was started.
.2
.3
.4
Section 03 30 11 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.2 MIXES (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) .3 The time that the discharge of load was completed. Use of accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Departmental Representative. If approved, the use of admixture will not relax cold weather placement requirements. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by the Departmental Representative. Use plasticizers when required to place concrete of specified slump. Do not add water to the concrete mix on site. Concrete mix for exposed aggregate finish and sandblasted finish shall be designed as a low slump, gap graded mix with a maximum amount of screened and washed crushed coarse aggregate.
.5
.6
.7 .8 .9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Obtain Departmental Representative's approval before placing concrete. Provide 24 hours notice prior to placing of concrete. Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed during concrete placement. Maintain accurate records of poured concrete items to indicate date, location of pour, quality, air temperature and test samples taken. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete. Place steel dowels of deformed steel reinforcing bars and pack solidly with epoxy grout to anchor and hold dowels in positions as indicated. Do not place load upon new concrete until authorized by Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
.4
.5
Section 03 30 11 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.2 PLACING AND INSTALLATION
.1
Do concrete work in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2.
.2 .3
Build-in items supplied by other Sections. Sleeves and inserts. .1 No sleeves, ducts, pipes or other openings shall pass through joists, beams, column capitals or columns, except where indicated or approved by Departmental Representative. .2 Where approved by Departmental Representative, set sleeves, ties, pipe hangers and other inserts and openings as indicated or specified elsewhere. Sleeves and openings greater than 100 x 100 mm not indicated, must be approved by Departmental Representative. .3 Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate hardware. If inserts cannot be located as specified, obtain approval of modifications from Departmental Representative before placing of concrete. .4 Check locations and sizes of sleeves and openings shown on drawings. .5 Set special inserts for strength testing as indicated and as required by non destructive method of testing concrete. Provide 25 mm chamfer on exposed corners. Anchor bolts: .1 Set anchor bolts to templates under supervision of appropriate trade prior to placing concrete. .2 With approval of Departmental Representative, grout anchor bolts in preformed holes or holes drilled after concrete has set. Formed holes to be minimum 100 mm diameter. Drilled holes to manufacturers's recommendations. .3 Set bolts and fill holes with shrinkage compensating grout. Grout structural steel base plates in place. Grout under base plates and machinery using procedures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations which result in 100% contact over grouted area. Sawcut control joints 1/4 of floor slab thickness with 5 mm blade. When concrete has cured 7 days, prime joint and apply sealant to manufacturer's instructions.
.4 .5
.6
.7
Section 03 30 11 Page 9 2011-05-25
.8 (Cont'd)
Joint fillers. .1 Furnish filler for each joint in single piece for depth and width required for joint, unless otherwise authorized by Departmental Representative. When more than one piece is required for a joint, fasten abutting ends and hold securely to shape by stapling or other positive fastening. .2 Locate and form isolation, construction and expansion joints as indicated. Install joint filler.
Extend dowels into masonry. Install dovetail anchor slots to surfaces abutting masonry. Install waterstops at construction joints where indicated on drawings. Vapour Barrier. .1 Install vapour barrier under concrete slabs on grade inside building. .2 Lap vapour barrier minimum 150 mm at joints and seal. .3 Seal punctures in vapour barrier before placing concrete. Use patching material at least 150 mm larger than puncture and seal.
.9 .10 .11 .12
3.3 FLOOR TOLERANCES
.1
Maintain surface flatness with maximum variation of 5 mm in 3 metres, and absolute maximum of 6 mm. Surface flatness to be measured by the straightedge method according to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Maintain surface slope between reference points more than 3 m apart to 1:600 with absolute maximum of 30 mm over the total length of the structure.
.2
3.4 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
.1
When the air temperature is at or below 5 degrees C, or when there is a probability of it falling to that limit during the placing or curing period, cold weather requirements shall be applicable. Protection shall be provided for newly placed concrete by means of suitable enclosures, coverings and/or adequate insulation as indicated in CSA A23.1/A23.2, Clause 7.4.
.2
Section 03 30 11 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.4 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.3
Concrete shall not be placed on or against reinforcement, formwork, ground or any surface that is at a temperature less than 5C.
The temperature of the concrete at all surfaces shall be maintained at not less than 10C for a minimum of three days or for the time necessary to attain a minimum strength of 15 MPa. Means shall be provided to humidify the air within enclosures and to keep the concrete and formwork continuously moist if dry heat is used. At the end of the specified protection period the temperature of the concrete shall be reduced gradually to the temperature differential shown in CSA A23.l/A23.2, Table 21. Accelerator or so called anti-freeze compounds shall not be permitted unless otherwise approved in writing by the Departmental Representative. All protective coverings shall be kept clear of the concrete and form surfaces to permit free circulation of air and shall be maintained intact for at least 24 hours after artificial heat is discontinued.
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.5 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
.1
When the air temperature is at or above 27C or when there is a probability of its rising to 27C during the placing period (as forecast by the local official meteorological office) special effort shall be made to maintain the temperature of the concrete no more than that stipulated in CSA A23.1/A23.2, Table 14. Time of initial mixing to complete discharge shall not exceed one hour and fifteen minutes. In extremely hot weather, the formwork, reinforcement, and concreting equipment shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun, or cooled by fogging and evaporation.
.2 .3
3.6 PROTECTION FROM DRYING OF EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES
.1
When the rate of surface evaporation exceeds 0.5 kg/m2.hr take measures to reduce surface evaporation from concrete. When the rate of surface evaporation exceeds 0.1 kg/m2.hr erect windbreaks around the sides of the structural element.
.2
Section 03 30 11 Page 11 2011-05-25
3.6 PROTECTION FROM DRYING OF EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES (Cont'd)
.3
When the rate of surface evaporation exceeds 1.0 kg/m2.hr take one or more of the following measures: Dampen the subgrade prior to placing the .1 concrete. .2 Erect sunshades over the concrete during finishing operations. .3 Lower the concrete temperature. .4 Cover the concrete surface with white polyethylene sheeting between the various finishing operations. .5 Apply fog spray immediately after placement and before finishing. Care shall be taken to prevent accumulation of water that may reduce the quality of the cement paste. .6 Begin curing of the concrete immediately after trowelling, or .7 Place and finish at night.
The rate of evaporation shall be estimated from CSA A23.1/A23.2, Figure D1 of Annex D using measurements of relative humidity, concrete temperature, air temperature and wind velocity.
.4
3.7
CURING
.1 .2
Initial and final curing of all concrete surfaces to CSA A23.1/A23.3, Clause 7.4. The basic curing period shall be extended until the concrete achieves two-thirds of its specified 28 day compressive strength. Apply curing compound/ hardener/ sealer to all floors noted in room finish scheduled as required such. Install in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Slabs receiving epoxy finish shall be moist cured. All floors shall be kept continuously moist for a minimum of seven consecutive days after placement of the concrete. The water for curing shall be clean and free from any materials that will cause staining or discoloration of the concrete. A liquid, membrane forming, curing compound may be used under circumstances where the application of moisture is impracticable and where such compounds will not jeopardize the appearance of the concrete nor the bonding of future floor finishes.
.3
.4 .5
Section 03 30 11 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.8 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
.1
The location and detail of all construction joints not detailed on the structural drawings shall be approved by the Departmental Representative. Where fresh concrete is to be placed against concrete which has set or has partially set, the surface of the set or partially set concrete shall be roughened, cleaned of all laitance, and bonding agent applied prior to the placement of fresh concrete. Concrete placed in wall and column forms shall be struck off flush with the underside of the floor systems. Vertical construction joints in foundation walls shall be properly keyed and dowelled and constructed with an approved waterstop, properly anchored against displacement during the placement of the concrete and properly sealed at all of the intersections. Splices and intersections of waterstop shall be joined by heat fusion in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions. All construction joints exposed to traffic or required to be water tight, shall be routed and installed with an approved joint sealant.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
.1
Concrete not meeting the requirements of the Specifications and drawings shall be considered defective concrete. Concrete not conforming to the lines, details and grade specified herein or as shown on the drawings shall be modified or replaced at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative. Finished lines, dimensions and surfaces shall be correct and true within tolerances specified in Section 03 10 00. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and all honeycombing and other defects in critical areas of stress, shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative. Excessive honeycomb is when eraser end of a pencil fits into cavity.
.2
.3
Section 03 30 11 Page 13 2011-05-25
3.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE (Cont'd)
.4
Concrete of insufficient strength or improper consistency shall be, as required by the Departmental Representative, subject to one or more of the following: .1 Changes in mix proportions for the remainder of the work. .2 Cores drilled and tested from the areas in question as directed by the Departmental Representative and in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2. The test results shall be indicative of the in place concrete. .3 Load testing of the structural elements in accordance with CSA A23.3.
The changes in the mix proportions and the testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. Concrete failing to meet the strength requirements of this Specification shall be strengthened or replaced at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative.
.5 .6
3.10 PATCHING CONCRETE
.1
After the removal of the forms concrete surfaces may be subject to inspection by the Departmental Representative. All exposed metal form ties, nails, wires, shall be removed, fins broken off and all loose concrete removed. Form tie pockets shall be thoroughly wetted and patched with patching concrete followed by proper curing. Honeycombed and other defective surfaces shall be chipped away to a depth of not less than 25 mm with the edges perpendicular to the surface, thoroughly wetted and patched with patching concrete followed by proper curing. Patching concrete shall be thoroughly compacted into place and finished in such a manner as to match the adjoining concrete. The design mix of the patching concrete shall be approved by the Departmental Representative. Fill with grout and finish smooth all openings and holes provided to accommodate the various trades. Work after all pipes, conduits, ducts and such items have been placed.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 03 30 11 Page 14 2011-05-25
3.11
FOOTINGS
.1
All footings to be placed on undisturbed material. Any disturbed bearing material to be compacted to in situ density or replaced with lean mix concrete. Adequate precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent the soil at foundation level from drying or becoming wet from surface water prior to placement of concrete. The Contractor shall ensure that the soil below the foundation is not allowed to freeze, either before or after construction. Under no circumstances should concrete be placed on frozen soil. The base and the extent of the excavation shall be inspected by the geotechnical engineer and the Departmental Representative prior to the placing of the fill and concrete.
.2
.3
.4
3.12
VOID FORM
.1
Place polyethylene vapour barrier on prepared sub-base and cover with 50 mm compacted sand screed. Seal punctures and damaged areas before placing sand. Install void form on compacted sand screed and cover with 8 mm OSB. Install cardboard void form in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Contractor to ensure that void form decomposes after casting slab by introducing water through uniformly spaced soaker hoses placed below the slab. Do not allow subgrade to freeze after casting slab and prior to soaking void form. If this is not practical due to schedule, use GeoVoid. Install GeoVoid compressible void filler system in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure reinforcing is properly and securely placed. Place adjustable screeds at predetermined locations. Protect the ground from freezing during the curing period.
.2 .3
.4
.5 .6 .7
Section 03 30 11 Page 15 2011-05-25
3.12 VOID FORM (Cont'd)
.8
When constructing in cold weather ensure cardboard void decomposes immediately after the curing period.
3.13 UNDERFLOOR DUCTS
.1
Where underfloor ducts are indicated, pour 10 MPa concrete around duct work. Be careful to avoid damaging or displacing ducts. Do not allow ducts to float. Concrete to be in two pours with ducts securely enclosed into first pour.
3.14 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DIVISIONS
.1 .2
Provide concrete pads and miscellaneous concrete where and as indicated on Drawings. Insert bolts and sleeves and pack solidly with non shrink grout, in accordance with setting details and templates. Steel trowel top surfaces smooth. Tool edges.
.3
3.15 ANCHOR BOLTS AND WELDMENTS
.1
Set anchor bolts and weldments to the following tolerances: .1 Alignment: 3 mm of location, plumb and true. .2 Projection: 6 mm of elevations called for.
3.16 BASE PLATE GROUTING
.1
Mix and place grout as per manufacturer's instructions. Pack grout tightly under plates and leave no voids. Neatly finish edges.
3.17 WALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS
.1
Control Joints .1 Place control joints at 6 m intervals. Joints of curbs to coincide with joints in walks. When sidewalks abutt against building, provide a continuous joint filler. .2 Fit joints with filler of required profiles, set perpendicular to longitudinal axis of walks, curbs and gutters. Recess 12 mm below finished concrete surface. .3 Make 6 mm wide dummy joints at 1.5 m intervals, or as indicated on drawings. .4 Round all edges, including edges of dummy and control joints, with 12 mm radius edging tool.
Section 03 30 11 Page 16 2011-05-25
3.17 WALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Where paved surfaces are adjacent to .5 walks, concrete curbs and gutters are to be integral with walks. Make control joints of curbs coincide with walk joints. Provide a dummy joint at line between walks and curbs. Placing Concrete .1 Place concrete, screed and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish, free of open texturing and exposed aggregate. .2 Place to depths and profiles indicated on drawings. .3 Avoid working more mortar to surface than required. .4 Provide exposed surfaces of walks, with a light broom finish. .5 Ensure finished surfaces do not vary from true lines, levels or grade by more than 3 mm in 3 m when measured with a straight edge. .6 Construct all concrete walks, which are not detailed with a minimum longitudinal slope of 10 mm in 1 m, with a cross slope of 10 mm in 1 m.
.2
3.18 FLOOR HARDENER/ SEALER
.1 .2
Apply sealer in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove all dirt, grease, oil, previously applied curing compounds and deleterious materials prior to application by scrubbing, pressure washing, or light sandblasting as required. Apply minimum two (2) coats of sealer at recommended application rate for medium duty floors. First coat to be applied immediately after concrete sets if sealer is to be used as a curing compound. Apply final coat of sealer 24 to 48 hours prior to Substantial Performance.
.3
3.19 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES
.1
All formed surfaces receiving paint, vinyl, or other applied finish shall be final finished to remove all protrusions, ridges and other irregularities. All voids and pinholes are to be filled. Finished surface is to be smooth, straight and true, ready to receive architectural finish as noted. Other Finishes: Refer to Drawings and Room Finish Schedule for type and location of
.2
Section 03 30 11 Page 17 2011-05-25
3.19 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES (Cont'd)
.2
Other Finishes:(Cont'd) finishes. Conform to appropriate clauses of CSA A23.1/A23.2. Treat formed concrete surfaces in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Clause 7.7. Exposed faces of exterior foundation beams and walls not designated as sand blast finish or exposed concrete: Sand rubbed to CSA A23.1/A23.2 Clause 7.7.3.
.3
3.20
FINISHING
.1
Finish concrete in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2.
.2 .3
Formed surfaces exposed to view: sack rubbed finish in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2. Interior floor slabs to be left exposed or to receive epoxy, carpet, sheet vinyl or other covering requiring a smooth surface: initial finishing operations followed by final finishing comprising mechanical floating and steel trowelling in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Table 22 to produce hard, smooth, dense steel trowelled surface free from blemishes; finish classification Class D. Interior concrete to receive tile: wood float or broom finish, level and true to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2.4 m in walls and 3 mm in 3 m for floors and in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2 Table 22, finish classification Class C. All exposed interior surfaces requiring nonslip finish to be finished by swirl trowelling the surface after first trowelling according to to CSA A23.1/A23.2, Clause 7.5. Hardened floor finish: as specified in 3.19.3 immediately above in conjunction with 2 application of hardener applied at 2.44 kg/m . Equipment pads: smooth trowelled surface; in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Table 22, finish classification Class B. Pavements, walks, curbs and exposed site concrete: screed to plane surfaces and float using aluminum, magnesium, or wood floats in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Table 22, finish classification Class A. Round edges and provide joint spacings using standard tools.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 03 30 11 Page 18 2011-05-25
3.20 FINISHING (Cont'd)
.8
(Cont'd) Trowel smooth followed by lightly brushed non-slip finish to CAN/CSA-B651. Depressions in floors between high spots not greater than 5 mm below a 3 m straight edge and in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Clause 7.5.1.1 and Table 22, finish classification Class B.
.9
END
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
Section 03 45 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A775/A775M-07b, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. .3 ASTM C260-10, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. .4 ASTM D412-06ae2, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. .5 ASTM D2240-05(2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. .3 CAN/CGSB-25.20-95, Surface Sealers for Floors. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Ppractices for Concrete. .2 CSA A23.3-04(2007), Design of Concrete Structures. .3 CSA A23.4-09, Precast Concrete-Materials and Construction. .4 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004, A3005). .5 CSA G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .6 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .7 CAN/CSA-S6-06, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code. .8 CSA W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding. .9 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) (Metric Version).
.2
.3
Section 03 45 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
The Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual - March 1998(R2007).
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.
.5
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Design precast elements to CSA A23.3 and to resist handling, stockpiling, shipping and erection stresses. Design precast elements to carry loads specified by Departmental Reresentative or as indicated, in accordance with NBCC 2010, and other applicable codes. Design shall include resistance to creep, shrinkage and temperature effects, as well as wind and earthquake loads. Design connections/attachments of precast elements to load/forces specified by Departmental Representative. Connections shall be designed to withstand long-term corrosion for exposed elements. Submit 5 copies of detailed calculations and design drawings for typical precast elements and connections for Departmental Representative's review 2 weeks prior to manufacture.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Tolerance of precast elements to CSA A23.4.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit shop drawings to CSA A23.4 and CSA A23.3. Include the following items: .1 Design calculations for items designated by manufacturer. .2 Tables and bending diagrams of reinforcing steel. .3 Camber. .4 Finishing schedules. .5 Methods of handling and erection. .6 Openings, sleeves, inserts and related reinforcement. Including embedded handling hardware.
Section 03 45 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Each drawing submitted shall bear stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Produce, deliver and erect where directed by Departmental Reresentative on project site, full size exposed aggregate precast concrete panel incorporating required details and showing specified colour, finish and quality for Departmental Reresentative's approval prior to beginning full production.
.4 .5
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Precast concrete elements to be fabricated and erected by manufacturing plant certified by Canadian Standards Association in appropriate category according to CSA A23.4. Precast concrete manufacturer to be certified in accordance with CSA's certification procedures for precast concrete plants prior to submitting bid and to specifically verify as part of bid that plant is currently certified in appropriate category, Architectural. Only precast elements fabricated in such certified plants to be acceptable to Departmental Representative, and plant certification to be maintained for duration of fabrication, erection until warranty expires.
.2
.3
.1 .2 .3
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused concrete materials from landfill to local facility as approved by Departmental Reresentative. Unused paints, sealers, plasticizers, water-reducing agents and air-entraining agents
.4
.5
Section 03 45 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) must be disposed of at an official hazardous material collections site as approved by Departmental Reresentative. Unused paints, sealers, plasticizers, water-reducing agents and air-entraining agents must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.6
.7
1.7 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
.1
The Contractor hereby warrants that the precast elements will not spall or show visible evidence of cracking, except for normal hairline shrinkage cracks, in accordance with the 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC 13.3 of General Conditions but for the 12 months warranty period, which is extended to five (5) years. Units showing such defects will be replaced and made good together with all work of other trades damaged during removal of defective precast at no expense to the Departmental Representative. Confirm that the manufacturer of the sealant has carried out accelerated and normal weathering tests of the sealant in conjunction with the precast units for a period of five months and that there is no evidence of the sealant staining the precast units. Include with the guarantee on the precast units, a copy of the sealant manufacturer's letter to this effect as well as a guarantee of his material.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3
Cement: colouring material, aggregates, water, admixtures: to CSA A23.4 and CSA A23.1/A23.2. Exposed aggregate and special facing materials: to match selected finish sample. Use same brands and source of cement and aggregate for entire project to ensure uniformity of colouration and other mix characteristics.
Section 03 45 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10
Reinforcing steel: to Section 03 20 00, epoxy coated. Prestressing steel: to CAN/CSA-S6 and CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21. Forms: to CSA A23.4. Hardware and miscellaneous materials: to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Anchors and supports: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Type 350W, galvanized after fabrication. Welding materials: to CSA W48. Galvanizing: hot dip galvanizing with minimum 2 zinc coating Grade 85, 600g/m , to ASTM A123/A123M. Steel primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Epoxy coating: to ASTM A775/A775M. Air entrainment admixtures: to ASTM C260. Bearing pads: neoprene, 60 durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, and 17 MPa minimum tensile strength to ASTM D412, moulded to size or cut from moulded sheet. Shims: plastic. Zinc-rich primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Weephole tubes: purpose made plastic. Curing compound: not permitted without prior approval of Departmental Reresentative. Sealer: to CAN/CGSB-25.20.
.11 .12 .13 .14
.15 .16 .17 .18 .19
2.2
CONCRETE MIXES
.1
Proportion normal density concrete in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2 to give properties shown in concrete mix schedules below. Maximum water/cement ratio to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Colouring agent: if used, not exceeding 10% of cement weight and be inorganic.
.2 .3
Section 03 45 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.2 CONCRETE MIXES (Cont'd)
.4 .5
Do not use calcium chloride or products containing calcium chloride.

Maintain mix proportions, especially water content, as constant as possible.
2.3
GROUT MIXES
.1
Cement grout: as specified in Section 04 05 12.
2.4
FABRICATION
.1 .2
Manufacture units in accordance with CSA A23.4. Mark each precast unit to correspond to identification mark on shop drawings for location with date cast on part of unit which will not be exposed. Profiles to be as detailed on the drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Galvanize anchors and steel inserts after fabrication and touch up with zinc rich primer after welding. Precast concrete surrounds (detention window hollow metal frames), precast concrete sills: .1 Coordinate fabrication with Sections 08 50 50 and 05 50 01.
.3 .4
.5
2.5
FINISHES
.1 .2 .3
Finish and colour of precast units to match sample in Departmental Representative's office. Smooth finish: as cast using smooth form liners. Rubbed finish: .1 Rub exposed face surface of precast concrete panels with carborundum bricks and water until hollows, lines, form marks, and surplus materials have been removed. .2 Leave surface finish uniformly smooth. .3 Do not use mortar or grout in rubbing, other than cement paste drawn from green concrete by rubbing process. .4 Clean panels. Exposed aggregate finish: .1 Apply uniform coat of retardant to inside face of forms. .2 Expose coarse aggregate by washing and brushing away surface mortar.
.4
Section 03 45 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.5 FINISHES (Cont'd)
.4
Exposed aggregate finish:(Cont'd) .3 Expose aggregate to conform with approved sample which can be viewed at Departmental Representative's office. Exposed aggregate finish: .1 Hand place large facing aggregate on silica sand bed spread over form bottom. .2 Remove panels from forms after concrete hardens. .3 Expose aggregate by breaking away loose sand. Sandblasted finish: in order to expose aggregate face, sandblast surface to conform with approved sample which can be viewed at Departmental Representative's office. Smooth float or light broom finish back surface of precast units exposed on both sides. Protect smooth or exposed surfaces with 2 coats of sealer as approved by Departmental Representative.
.5
.6
.7 .8
.1
Provide Departmental Representative with certified copies of quality control tests related to this project as specified in CSA A23.4. Provide records from in-house quality control program based upon plant certification requirements to Departmental Representative for inspection and review. Upon request, provide Departmental Representative with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel supplied, showing physical and chemical analysis. Precast plants should keep complete records of supply source of concrete material, steel reinforcement, prestressing steel and provide to Departmental Representative for review upon request.
.2
.3
.4
Section 03 45 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Do precast concrete work in accordance with CSA A23.4 and CSA A23.3.
3.2 ERECTION GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Erect precast elements within allowable tolerances as specified. Non-cumulative erection tolerances in accordance with CSA A23.4. Set elevations and alignment between units to within allowable tolerances before connecting units. Bed units in mortar in accordance with Section 04 05 12. Grout underside of unit bearing plates with shrinkage compensating grout. Fasten precast panels in place as indicated on reviewed shop drawings. Do not weld or secure bearing plates at sliding joints. Set units dry, without mortar, attaining specified joint dimension with plastic shims. Clean field welds with wire brush and touch-up galvanized finish with zinc-rich primer. Remove shims and spacers from joints of non-load bearing panels after fastening but before sealant is applied.
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10
3.3 ERECTION EXPOSED AGGREGATE PRECAST PANELS
.1 .2 .3
Secure bolts with lockwashers or tack weld nut to bolt. Uniformly tighten bolted connections with torque indicated. Apply sealers and sealant to exposed aggregate precast panels to manufacturer's instructions unless specified otherwise.
Section 03 45 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Obtain approval of cleaning methods from Departmental Representative before cleaning soiled precast concrete surfaces.
3.5 CONCRETE MIX SCHEDULE
.1
Exposed Aggregate Precast Concrete Panels (Exterior Elevations): Cement Type GU Portland Cement Compressive Strength 35 MPa at 28 days Class of Exposure F-1 Air Content 4% to 6%
.2
Precast Concrete Surrounds (Detention Window Hollow Metal Frames): Cement Type GU Portland Cement Compressive Strength CSA A23.1, Table 2 Class of Exposure N Air Content CSA A23.1, Table 2
3.6 FINISH SCHEDULE
.1
Precast Concrete Surrounds - Interior: .1 Smooth finish; as cast using smooth steel form liners. Precast Concrete Surrounds, Sills - Exterior: Rubbed finish to precast surround of exterior detention windows: .1 Rub exposed face surface of precast concrete units with carborundum bricks and water until hollows, lines, form marks, and surplus materials have been removed. .2 Leave surface finish uniformly smooth. .3 Do not use mortar or grout in rubbing, other than cement paste drawn from green concrete by rubbing process. .4 Clean units. .5 Sandblast in order to expose aggregate, sandblast surface to conform with sample
.2
END
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MASONRY
Section 04 05 10 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A165 Series-04(R2009), Standards on Concrete Masonry Units. .2 CSA A179-04(R2009), Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry. .3 CSA A371-04(R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC) .1 Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot and Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
.2
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Pre-installation meetings: comply with Section 01 31 19. Conduct pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this Section and on-site installations to: .1 Verify project requirements, including mock-up requirements. .2 Verify substrate conditions. .3 Co-ordinate products, installation methods and techniques. .4 Sequence work of related sections. .5 Co-ordinate with other building subtrades. .6 Review manufacturer's installation instructions. .7 Review masonry cutting operations, methods and tools and determine worker safety and protection from dust during cutting operations. .8 Review warranty requirements. Sequencing: sequence with other work in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sequencing construction operations. Scheduling: schedule with other work in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06.
.2
.3
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and
Section 04 05 10 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)
.2
Product Data:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) include product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and colours. .2 Provide two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) - Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06. Samples: .1 Provide samples as follows: .1 Six of each type of unit specified. .2 Two of each type of masonry accessory and flashing specified. .3 Two of each type of reinforcement, tie and connector proposed for use. .4 A minimum of six for testing purposes. Submit samples tested to laboratories employing technicians certified/trained in procedures for testing masonry units. Drawings: .1 Provide detailed wall layout drawings indicating location of Steel Block units in masonry block walls as indicated on architectural drawings. Detail embed blocks and device blocks at locations to suit conventional masonry wall construction and block coursing. Advise Departmental Representative and Steel Block supplier of any conflicts or irregularities. .2 Provide shop drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. .3 Provide shop drawings detailing temporary bracing required, designed to resist wind pressure and lateral forces during installation.
.3
.4
1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
.1
Certificates: provide manufacturer's product certificates certifying materials comply with specified requirements. Test and Evaluation Reports: .1 Provide certified test reports in accordance with Section 01 29 83. .2 Test reports to certify compliance of masonry units and mortar ingredients with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .3 Provide data for masonry units, in addition to requirements set out in referenced
.2
Section 04 05 10 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)
.2
Test and Evaluation Reports:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) CSA and ASTM Standards, indicating initial rates of absorption. Installer Instructions: provide manufacturer's installation instructions, including storage, handling, safety and cleaning. Manufacturer's Reports: provide written reports prepared by manufacturer's on-site personnel to include: .1 Verification of compliance of work with Contract. .2 Site visit reports providing detailed review of installation of work, and installed work.
.3
.4
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide manufacturer's instructions for care, cleaning and maintenance of prefaced masonry units for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide manufacturer's instructions in accordance with Section 01 78 00 covering maintenance requirements and parts catalogue, with cuts and identifying numbers.
.1
Qualifications: .1 Manufacturer: capable of providing field service representation during construction and approving application method. .2 Installer: experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. .3 Masons: company or person specializing in masonry installations with 5 years documented experience with masonry work similar to this project. .1 Masons employed on this project must demonstrate ability to reproduce mock-up standards. Mock-ups: .1 Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .2 Construct mock-up panel of exterior masonry wall construction 1200 x 1800 mm showing
.2
Section 04 05 10 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd)
.2
Mock-ups:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) masonry colours and textures, use of reinforcement, ties, through-wall flashing, weep holes, jointing, coursing, mortar and workmanship. .3 Mock-up used: .1 To judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and material application. .4 Construct mock-up where directed by Departmental Representative. .5 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with work. .6 When accepted by Departmental Representative, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. Mock-up may remain as part of finished work. .7 Start work only upon receipt of written acceptance of mock-up by Departmental Representative.
1.8 COORDINATION OF RELATED TRADES AND STEEL BLOCK UNITS
.1
Pre-Installation Meetings: .1 Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, scope of work, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements for masonry block. .2 Arrange pre-installation meeting to review installation methods and requirements for the steel unit masonry (Steel Block) to confirm embed requirements and mounting device applications and locations. Confirm installation methods with Steel Block manufacturer for all steel unit masonry (Steel Block) installed by this section. .3 Notify supplier of the Steel Block units in advance of start-up meeting to confirm attendance by factory representative. Coordinate with related construction activities included in various sections of the specifications and Steel Block supplier to assure efficient and orderly installation of each Steel Block component. Coordinate with construction operations included under different sections that depend on each other to ensure that proper installation of related component requirements are met. Where the installation of one component depends on the installation of other components before
.2
.3
Section 04 05 10 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.8 COORDINATION OF RELATED TRADES AND STEEL BLOCK UNITS (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) or after its own installation, schedule activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. Sequence as required with electrical, mechanical, BSCS and detention equipment sub-contractors to maintain flow of work and project schedule requirements.
1.9
DRAWINGS
.1
Architectural Drawings are in part diagrammatic and are intended to convey the content of the Work required and, as such, indicate general and approximate location, arrangement and sizes of materials, elements, fixtures, equipment and outlets. Obtain more accurate information about locations, arrangement and sizes by studying, familiarizing with and correlating the Contract Documents, including coordination with the shop drawings, and becoming totally familiar with conditions and spaces affecting these matters before proceeding with the Work. Where job conditions require reasonable adjustments in the indicated locations and arrangements, make the necessary modifications at no additional cost to the Departmental Representative. Similarly, where existing conditions interfere with new installation and required location, include such relocation in the Work of this Contract. Install and arrange fixtures and equipment to suit conventional masonry construction and block coursing as much as possible. Coordinate with Steel Block supplier to assure installation complies with Contract Documents and Architectural Drawings.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1 .2
Deliver materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Storage and Handling Protection: .1 Keep materials dry until use. .2 Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by means of plank or timber skids.
.3
Section 04 05 10 Page 6 2011-05-25
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Unused metal materials are to be diverted from landfill to a metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Unused metal materials are to be diverted from landfill to a metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Unused or damaged masonry materials must be diverted from landfill to a local facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5
1.12 SITE CONDITIONS
.1 .2
Ambient Conditions: assemble and erect components when temperatures are above 4C. Weather Requirements: to CSA A371 to IMIAC Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot and Cold Weather Masonry Construction. Cold weather requirements: .1 To CSA A371 with following requirements. .1 Maintain temperature of mortar between 5C and 50C until batch is used or becomes stable. .2 Maintain ambient temperature of masonry work and it's constituent materials between 5C and 50C and protect site from windchill. .3 Maintain temperature of masonry above 0C for minimum of 7 days, after mortar is installed. .2 Hot weather requirements: .1 Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too rapidly, by means of waterproof, non-staining coverings. .2 Keep masonry dry using waterproof, non-staining coverings that extend over walls and down sides sufficient to protect walls from wind driven rain, until masonry work is completed and protected by flashings or other permanent construction. .3 Spray mortar surface at intervals and keep moist for maximum of three days after installation.
.3
Section 04 05 10 Page 7 2011-05-25
1.13
WARRANTY
.1
For Work in this Section 04 05 10 - Common Work Results for Masonry, 12 months warranty period is extended to 24 months 60 months.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
.1
Ensure manufacturer has minimum 5 years experience in manufacturing components similar to or exceeding requirements of project.
2.2
MATERIALS
.1
Masonry materials are specified elsewhere in Sections of Division 4 of the Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLERS
.1
Experienced and qualified masons to carry out erection, assembly and installation of masonry work.
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.
3.3
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine conditions, substrates and work to receive work of this Section. .1 Co-ordinate with Section 01 71 00. Examine openings to receive masonry units. Verify opening size, location, and that opening is square and plumb, and ready to receive work of this Section. .1 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. .2 Proceed with installation after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval from Departmental Representative.
.2
Section 04 05 10 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.3 EXAMINATION (Cont'd)
.3
Verification of Conditions: .1 Verify that: .1 Substrate conditions which have been previously installed under other sections or contracts, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to installation of masonry. .2 Field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. .3 Built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. .2 Commencing installation means acceptance of existing substrates.
3.4
PREPARATION
.1
Surface Preparation: prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Establish and protect lines, levels, and coursing. Protect adjacent materials from damage and disfiguration.
.2 .3
3.5
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Do masonry work in accordance with CSA A371 except where specified otherwise. Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment, respecting construction tolerances permitted by CSA A371. Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond above and below openings, with minimum of cutting. Coordinate and install concrete masonry units with steel masonry units. Coordinate locations of all steel unit masonry (Steel Block), including device blocks, with appropriate sub-contractors including electrical, mechanical, controls and detention equipment sub-contractors. Install Steel Block during the installation of adjacent masonry. Install with full mortar joints. Furrowing is not permitted. Remove excess mortar. Grout fill all Steel Block along with masonry block as required.
.3
.4 .5
.6
Section 04 05 10 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.5 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.7 .8
Clean steel unit masonry (Steel Block) of substances that may impair bond with mortar.
Clean mortar from faces of all steel unit masonry (Steel Block) upon completion of block installation.
3.6
CONSTRUCTION
.1
Exposed masonry: .1 Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units, in accordance with CSA A165, Clause 82.1, in exposed masonry and replace with undamaged units. Jointing: .1 Allow joints to set just enough to remove excess water, then rake joints uniformly to 6 mm depth and compress with square tool to provide smooth, compressed, raked joints of uniform depth where raked joints are indicated. .2 Strike flush joints concealed in walls and joints in walls to receive plaster, tile, insulation, or other applied material except paint or similar thin finish coating. Cutting: .1 Cut out for electrical switches, outlet boxes, and other recessed or built-in objects. .2 Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges. Building-In: .1 Build in items required to be built into masonry. .2 Prevent displacement of built-in items during construction. Check plumb, location and alignment frequently, as work progresses. .3 Brace door jambs to maintain plumb. Fill spaces between jambs and masonry with mortar. Support of loads: .1 Use 25 MPa concrete to Section 03 30 11 to all core fills for security purposes and where concrete fill is used in lieu of solid units. .2 Use grout to CSA A179 where grout is used in lieu of solid units. .3 Install building paper below voids to be filled with concrete; keep paper 25 mm back from faces of units. Provision for movement: .1 Leave 3 mm space below shelf angles.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 04 05 10 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.6 CONSTRUCTION (Cont'd)
.6
Provision for movement:(Cont'd) .2 Leave 6 mm space between top of non-load bearing walls and partitions and structural elements. Do not use wedges. .3 Built masonry to tie in with stabilizers, with provision for vertical movement. Loose steel lintels: .1 Install loose steel lintels. Centre over opening width. Control joints: .1 Construct continuous control joints as indicated. Expansion joints: .1 Build-in continuous expansion joints as indicated. Bull nose block: .1 Masonry bull nose block to conform to 50 mm radius on Steel Block.
.7
.8
.9
.10
3.7 SITE TOLERANCES
.1
Tolerances in notes to CSA A371, Clause 5.3 apply.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests, Inspection: .1 Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .2 Inspection and testing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. .3 Notify inspection agency minimum of 24 hours in advance of requirement for tests.
3.9
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Progress Cleaning: in accordance with related masonry sections. Final Cleaning: .1 Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. .2 Upon completion of installation and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
Section 04 05 10 Page 11 2011-05-25
3.10
PROTECTION
.1
Temporary Bracing: .1 Provide temporary bracing of masonry work during and after erection until permanent lateral support is in place. .2 Bracing approved by Departmental Representative. .3 Brace masonry walls as necessary to resist wind pressure and lateral forces during construction. Moisture Protection: .1 Keep masonry dry using waterproof, nonstaining coverings that extend over walls and down sides sufficient to protect walls from wind driven rain, until completed and protected by flashing or other permanent construction. .2 Cover completed and partially completed work not enclosed or sheltered with waterproof covering at end of each work day. Anchor securely in position. .3 Air Temperature Protection: protect completed masonry as recommended in 1.12 SITE CONDITIONS. Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect completed work from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings.
.2
.3
END
MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT
Section 04 05 12 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A179-04(R2009), Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.
.1
Product Data: .1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. .3 Provide two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) - Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06. Indicate VOC's mortar, grout, parging, colour additives and admixtures. Expressed as grams per litre (g/L). Samples: .1 Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two 20 mm x 100 mm size samples of each colour of mortar. Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.
.2
.3
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties, and in accordance with Section 04 05 10 supplemented as follows: .1 Submit laboratory test reports in accordance with Section 01 29 83. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.2
.3
Section 04 05 12 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Deliver, store and handles masonry mortar and grout materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00, supplemented as follows: .1 Deliver prepackaged, dry-blended mortar mix to project site in labelled plastic-lined bags each bearing name and address of manufacturer, production codes or batch numbers, and colour or formula numbers. .2 Maintain mortar, grout and packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, traffic and contamination by foreign materials.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard and packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Use same brands of materials and source of aggregate for entire project. Mortar and grout: CSA A179. Use aggregate passing 1.18 mm sieve where 6 mm thick joints are indicated. Colour: ground coloured natural aggregates or metallic oxide pigments. Mortar for exterior masonry above grade: .1 Loadbearing: type S based on Proportion specifications. .2 Non Loadbearing: type N based on Proportion specifications.
.6
Mortar for interior masonry. .1 Loadbearing: type S based on Proportion specifications. .2 Non Loadbearing: type N based on Proportion specifications.
Section 04 05 12 Page 3 2011-05-25
.7 (Cont'd)
Coloured mortar: use colouring admixture not exceeding 10% of cement content by mass, or integrally coloured masonry cement, to produce coloured mortar to match approved sample.
Non-Staining mortar: use non-staining masonry cement for cementitious portion of specified mortar type. Grout: to CSA A179, Table 3. Parging mortar: type N to CSA A179.
.8
.9 .10
2.2
MIXES
.1 .2
Colour and admixtures: mix grout to semi fluid consistency. Coloured mortars: incorporate colour and admixtures into mixes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .1 Use clean mixer for coloured mortar. Pointing mortar: prehydrate pointing mortar by mixing ingredients dry, then mix again adding just enough water to produce damp unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into ball. Allow to stand for not less than 1 hour nor more than 2 hours then remix with sufficient water to produce mortar of proper consistency for pointing.
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
CONSTRUCTION
.1 .2
Do masonry mortar and grout work in accordance with CSA A179 except where specified otherwise. Apply parging in uniform coating not less than total 10 mm thick.
Section 04 05 12 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
END
MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCING
Section 04 05 19 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM A82/A82M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. .2 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CAN/CSA-A179-04(R2009), Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry. .3 CAN/CSA-A370-04(R2009), Connectors for Masonry. .4 CAN/CSA-A371-04(R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings. .5 CSA G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .6 CSA S304.1-04, Design of Masonry Structures. .7 CSA W186-M1990(R2007), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction. National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010.
.2
.3
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets illustrating products to be incorporated into project for specified products. .2 Provide two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) - Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06. Shop Drawings: .1 Provide shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Provide shop drawings detailing bar bending details, lists and placing drawings.
.3
Section 04 05 19 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Shop Drawings:(Cont'd) On placing drawings, indicate sizes, .3 spacing, location and quantities of reinforcement and connectors. Manufacturer's Instructions: provide manufacturer's installation instructions.
.4
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with Section 04 05 10.
.2
.3
1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
.1
Make field measurements necessary to ensure proper fit of members.
.1
Deliver, store and handle masonry anchorage and reinforcing materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00, supplemented as follows: .1 Deliver reinforcement and connectors, identified in shop and placement drawings. Packaging Waste Management: .1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Section 04 05 19 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Bar reinforcement: Steel to CAN/CSA-A371 and CSA G30.18, Grade 400. Wire reinforcement: to CAN/CSA-A371 and ASTM A82/A82M, truss type. Connectors: to CAN/CSA-A370 and CSA S304.1. Corrosion protection: to CSA S304.1, galvanizing ASTM A123/A123M.
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2 and Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada. Fabricate connectors in accordance with CANCSA-A370. Obtain Departmental Representative's approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than shown on placing drawings. Upon approval of Departmental Representative, weld reinforcement in accordance with CSA W186. Ship reinforcement and connectors, clearly identified in accordance with drawings.
.2 .3
.4 .5
.1
Upon request, provide Departmental Representative with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcement steel and connectors, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 2.weeks prior to commencing reinforcement work Upon request inform Departmental Representative of proposed source of material to be supplied.
.2
Section 04 05 19 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Supply and install masonry connectors and reinforcement in accordance with CAN/CSA-A370, CAN/CSA-A371, CSA A23.1/A23.2 and CSA S304.1 unless indicated otherwise. Prior to placing mortar, obtain Departmental Representative's approval of placement of reinforcement and connectors. Supply and install additional reinforcement to masonry as indicated.
.2
.3
3.3 BONDING AND TYING
.1
Bond walls of two or more wythes using metal connectors in accordance with CSA S304.1, CAN/CSA-A371 and as indicated. Tie masonry veneer to backing in accordance with NBC 2010, CSA S304.1, CAN/CSA-A371 and as indicated.
.2
3.4 REINFORCED LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS
.1 .2 .3
Reinforce masonry beams, masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated. Place and grout reinforcement in accordance with CSA S304.1, CAN/CSA-A371, and CAN/CSA-A179. Support and position reinforcing bars in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371.
3.5
GROUTING
.1
Grout masonry in accordance with CSA S304.1, CAN/CSA-A371 and CAN/CSA-A179 and as indicated.
3.6
ANCHORS
.1
Supply and install metal anchors in accordance with CAN/CSA-A370 and CAN/CSA-A371, and as indicated.
Section 04 05 19 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.7 LATERAL SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE
.1
Supply and install lateral support and anchorage in accordance with CSA S304.1 and as indicated.
3.8 MOVEMENT JOINTS
.1
Reinforcement will not be continuous across movement joints unless otherwise indicated.
3.9
FIELD BENDING
.1
Do not field bend reinforcement and connectors except where indicated or authorized by Departmental Representative. When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying a slow and steady pressure. Replace bars and connectors which develop cracks or splits.
.2 .3
3.10 FIELD TOUCH-UP
.1
Touch up damaged and cut ends of epoxy coated or galvanized reinforcement steel and connectors with compatible finish to provide continuous coating.
3.11
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
END
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
Section 04 05 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM D2240-05(2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-A371-04(R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings. .2 CAN/CSA-ISO 14021-00(R2009), Environmental Labels and Declarations - Self Declared Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental Labelling).
.2
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Provide shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. Manufacturer's instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.3
.4
.1
Test reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.2
.3
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
Section 04 05 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
.1
Make field measurements necessary to ensure proper fit of members.
.1
Deliver, store and handle masonry accessories in accordance with, Section 01 61 00 supplemented as follows: .1 Keep fillers and adhesives dry, protected against dampness, and freezing. .2 Store packaged materials off ground and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Packaging Waste Management: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Control joint filler: purpose-made elastomer 40 durometer hardness to ASTM D2240 of size and shape indicated. Lap adhesive: recommended by masonry flashing manufacturer. Weep hole vents: purpose-made PVC, colour to match adjacent masonry. Mechanical fasteners: stainless steel, type and size as recommended by the tie manufacturer and of sufficient size and holding capacity to withstand all superimposed loading. Submit holding capacities of screws and evidence that the screws will support all superimposed loading, signed and sealed by a structural engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. Primer: bituminous primer, as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Metal Flashing to masonry construction: type and colour as specified in Section 07 62 00. .1 Through wall flashing: one type is to be used throughout the project.
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
Section 04 05 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install continuous control joint fillers in movement joints at locations indicated on drawings. Install weep hole vents in vertical joints immediately over flashings, in exterior wythes of cavity wall and masonry veneer wall construction, at maximum horizontal spacing of 600 mm on centre.
.2
3.3
CONSTRUCTION
.1 .2
Build in flashings in masonry in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371. Install flashings under exterior masonry bearing on foundation walls, slabs, shelf angles, and steel angles over openings. Install flashings under weep hole courses and as indicated. In cavity walls and veneered walls, carry flashings from front edge of masonry, under outer wythe, then up backing not less than 150 mm, and as follows: .1 For masonry backing embed flashing 25 mm in joint. .2 For concrete backing, insert flashing into reglets. Lap joints 150 mm and seal with adhesive.
.3
.4
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Upon completion remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Section 04 05 10 - Common Work Results for Masonry. Section 04 05 12 - Masonry Mortar and Grout. Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing. Section 04 05 23 - Masonry Accessories. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
CCMPA Canadian Concrete Masonry Producers Association Metric Technical Manual, September 2004. CAN/CSA-A165 Series-04(R2009) (CAN3-A165.1 Concrete Masonry Units) (CAN3-A165.2 Concrete Brick Units) (CAN3-A165.3 Prefaced Concrete Masonry Units Units). CAN/CSA-A371-04(R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings. CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel. CSA W47.1-09, Certification of companies for fusion welding of steel. CSA W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding (Developed in co operation with the Canadian Welding Bureau). CSA W59-03(R2008),Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). CAN/CGSB-1.40 97, Anti corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. CAN/CGSB-1.181 92, Ready Mixed, Organic Zinc Rich Coating. ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
.2
.3 .4
.5 .6
.7 .8 .9 .10
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit product data sheet for each item. Indicate VOC's mortar, grout, parging, colour additives and admixtures. Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Indicate VOC's for finishes, coatings, primers and paints. Shop Drawings .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, and accessories. Samples. .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 04 05 10. .2 Submit the following samples: .1 Two of each type of masonry unit specified. .2 Two of each type of masonry accessory specified. .3 One of each type of masonry reinforcement, tie and connector proposed for use. .4 A minimum of six for testing purposes. .3 Submit samples tested to laboratories employing technicians certified/trained in procedures for testing masonry units. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: .1 Conduct pre-installation meeting with masonry contractor to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. .2 Conduct pre-installation meeting to review installation methods and requirements for the
.2
.3
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Pre-installation Meetings:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) steel unit masonry (Steel Block) to confirm embed requirements mounting device applications and locations. Confirm installation methods for all steel unit masonry with related trade contractors' representatives including electrical, controls, mechanical and detention equipment contractors. .3 Notify the individual trade sub-contractor in advance of start-up meeting to confirm attendance by representative. .4 All steel unit masonry to be supplied by this section and installed according to Section 04 05 10. .5 Product shall be manufactured by a firm experienced in the design, production and coordination of steel unit masonry (Steel Block) assemblies and the integration of security, electronic electrical or mechanical devices that impact on this scope of work. .6 Manufacturer of steel unit masonry products to have successfully completed a minimum of 3 previous projects similar in size and complexity to this project. Provide qualification documentation to the Departmental Representative when requested. Manufacturer's production welders shall be qualified to weld material types, thicknesses, and joint types typical for steel block units of the type specified. Qualifications shall be substantiated by a copy of "Welders Certification" in accordance with CSA W47.1.
.4
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Storage and Protection: .1 Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or apply strippable plastic coating, before shipping to job site. .2 Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building. Provide instructions for removal of protective covering.
.2
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
Masonry materials as specified in Section 04 05 10. Steel sections and plates: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W. Welding materials: to CSA W59. Welding electrodes: to CSA W48. Bolts and anchor bolts: to ASTM A307. Masonry mortar and grout: refer to Section 04 05 12. Masonry anchorage and reinforcing: refer to Section 04 05 19. Masonry accessories: must be from the same steel unit masonry manufacturer.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY
.1
Concrete Masonry: lightweight aggregate block (normal weight to fire rated partitions) conforming to CSA A165 Series and all subsequent revisions. Use split faced block, split ledge block, and smooth faced concrete blocks and veneer of types and colours as indicated on the drawings, Metric modular size as indicated on the drawings. Concrete Block Colours to match the following: .1 CCI/CMS #244 BROWN. Designation: .1 Exposed units: hollow concrete blocks H/15/C/M; solid concrete blocks - S/15/C/M. .2 Unexposed units: hollow concrete blocks H/15/C/O; solid concrete block - S/15/C/O. .3 Fire rated units: Concrete block in rated assemblies - H/15/B/M. Method of curing: Autoclave or low pressure steam curing is acceptable, provided that masonry units comply with linear shrinkage and moisture content requirements of CSA A165 Series for type M units at time of delivery to site. Notwithstanding the foregoing, age all units before delivery to site as follows: .1 Autoclaved Units: minimum seven (7) days.
.2
.3
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY (Cont'd)
.3
Method of curing:(Cont'd) Low pressure steam Cured Units: minimum .2 twenty eight (28) days. Ensure all blocks are free from cracks, splits, laminations, or other defects which may impair the strength and durability. Ensure face of concrete masonry units are of uniform texture, free from spalled or broken edges. Blocks to 2 hour fire rated partitions must incorporate L120S, L220S or L230S aggregates and be acceptable to the Authority having jurisdiction. All other fire rated block walls must incorporate blocks acceptable for use in the fire rated assembly noted, and must be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Use special blocks for jambs, lintels, bond beams, sash blocks, base blocks and other special blocks as required. Provide single or double bullnosed blocks to all visible openings exterior corners, wall ends and at 250 mm thick or greater, block wall door jambs and other openings. Where ceramic tile occurs on block walls at corners, wall ends, openings and the like, use square corner blocks. Outside corner blocks to have same finish on exposed ends and on outside face. To off angle block wall corners, site form bullnosed corners to suit wall angles; site formed bullnoses are to match factory formed bullnoses.
.4
.5
.6
2.3
STEEL MASONRY
.1
All steel unit masonry (Steel Block) must be designed to suit the exact outside dimensions of metric masonry blocks. Horizontal steel embed block: 6 mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5 mm steel sheet welded to the face plates at both ends and center on full size blocks; dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Vertical steel embed block: 6 mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5 mm steel sheet welded to the face plates at both ends and center on full size blocks; dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Square end embed block: 6 mm cold rolled steel face plates with internal spacers or webs of 3.5 mm steel sheet welded to the faces plates at one end and center on full size blocks c/w 6 mm
.2
.3
.4
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.3 STEEL MASONRY (Cont'd)
.4
Square end embed block:(Cont'd) end cap welded to face plates at opposite end; dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Bull nose embed block: 6 mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5 mm steel sheet welded to the face plates at one end and center on full size blocks. Provide single or double bull nosed blocks to all visible openings exterior corners, wall ends and at 250 mm thick or greater, block wall door jambs and other openings. Outside corner blocks to have same finish on exposed ends and on outside face. Radius on bull nose Steel Block to be standard 50 mm radius. Masonry block to suit radius on Steel block. Coordinate dimensions and sizes with masonry contractor; dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Secure recessed toilet paper block: 6 mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5 mm steel sheet welded to the face plate. Coordinate dimensions and sizes with masonry contractor. Secure recessed soap dish steel plate with internal 3.5 mm steel sheet welded Coordinate dimensions and contractor. block: 6 mm stainless spacers or webs of to the face plate. sizes with masonry
.5
.6
.7
.8
Single and double-sided mechanical device block: 6 mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5 mm steel sheet welded to the face plates at both ends and center on full size blocks. Provide blocks for single-gang, 2-gang and 3-gang boxes. Coordinate dimensions and sizes for mechanical items including wall mounted thermostats, washer taps and drains, etc. dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Sprinkler head blocks: 6 mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5 mm steel sheet welded to the face plate. Provide pipe sleeve for sprinkler line securely welded to both faces of Steel Block. Coordinate diameter of pipe sleeve with mechanical contractor. Single and double-sided electrical outlet block: 6 mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5 mm steel sheet welded to the face plates at both ends and center on full size blocks. Provide blocks for
.9
.10
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
.10
(Cont'd) single-gang, 2-gang and 3-gang boxes. Coordinate dimensions and sizes for electrical items including plug-ins, light switches, data outlets, and fire alarm stations. CSA approved electrical boxes sized to suit the device must be securely welded to the inside face of the device blocks. Coordinate electrical box size and applications with electrical contractor to ensure compatibility with device. Steel Block dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Accurately laser cut openings in face plates to accept electrical boxes with minimal tolerances to prevent mortar seepage around boxes. Oversized cut outs must be caulked or sealed prior to installation. Single and double-sided security device block: 6 mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5 mm steel sheet welded to the face plate s at both ends and center on full size blocks. Provide blocks for single-gang, 2-gang and 3-gang boxes. Coordinate dimensions and sizes for secure items including call stations, card readers, intercoms and key switches. CSA approved electrical boxes sized to suit the device must be securely welded to the inside face of the device blocks. Coordinate electrical box size and applications with BSCS contractor to ensure compatibility with device. Steel Block dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Accurately laser cut openings in face plates to accept electrical boxes with minimal tolerances to prevent mortar seepage around boxes. Oversized cut outs must be caulked or sealed prior to installation. Fabrication .1 Perform welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise. .2 Assemble Steel Block units square, straight, and true to required sizes, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections. .3 Fit and shop assemble work, ready for installation. .4 Ensure exposed welds are continuous for length of each joint. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush. .5 Provide completed Steel Block units for building in by Section 04 05 10 in accordance with shop drawings and schedules. Finishes .1 Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40.
.11
.12
.13
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
.13
(Cont'd) .2 Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Shop Painting .1 Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of galvanized or concrete encased items. .2 Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 degrees C. .3 Clean surfaces to be field welded; do not paint.
.14
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION CONCRETE MASONRY
.1
Concrete block units. .1 Bond: running. .2 Coursing height: 200 mm for one block and one joint. .3 Jointing: concave where exposed or where paint or other finish coating is specified. Concrete block lintels. .1 Install reinforced concrete block lintels over openings in masonry where steel or reinforced concrete lintels are not indicated. .2 End bearing: not less than 200 mm as indicated on drawings. Lateral Support of Block Walls: .1 For lateral support of the top of masonry walls, provide 25 mm space to allow deflection of roof joist. As indicated on drawings. Steel angles to Section 05 50 01.
.2
.3
3.2 INSTALLATION STEEL MASONRY
.1
Manufacturer's instruction: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets. Erection .1 Provide completed Steel Block Units for building in by Section 04 05 10 in accordance with shop drawings and schedules. .2 Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections.
.2
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.2 INSTALLATION STEEL MASONRY (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) Provide suitable means of anchorage .3 acceptable to Departmental Representative such as dowels, anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles. .4 Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through which they pass. .5 Provide components for building by other sections in accordance with shop drawings and schedule. .6 Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates. .7 Touch up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection with primer. .8 Touch up galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer where burned by field welding. Installation .1 Installation of all Steel Block units to be completed by Section 04 05 10. Install steel unit masonry (Steel Block) at each architectural, mechanical, electrical and secure device in concrete block masonry walls. Install steel unit masonry to mount steel items including: .1 Steel furniture. .2 Miscellaneous steel items. .3 Steel observation ports. .4 Telephone screen. .5 Deal tray. .6 Sliding door systems. .7 Fire hose cabinets. .8 Recessed toilet paper holders .9 Clothes hook. .10 Sink counter. .11 Wall shelves. .12 TV shelves. .13 Appliance cover. .14 Stainless steel bench. .15 Secure access panels. .16 Detention grilles. .17 Computer workstations. .18 Refer to drawings for further clarifications. .2 Do masonry work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371 except where specified otherwise. .3 Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment. .4 Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond above and below openings, with minimum of cutting.
.3
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.2 INSTALLATION STEEL MASONRY (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) Clean steel unit masonry of substances .5 that may impair bond with mortar. .6 Install steel block during the installation of adjacent masonry. Install with full mortar joints. Furrowing is not permitted. Remove excess mortar.
3.3 SITE TOLERANCES
.1
Tolerances in notes to Clause 5.3 of CAN/CSA-A371 apply.
.1
Inspection and testing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by Departmental Representative.
3.5
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3
Remove excess mortar and smears. Scrub surfaces clean. Standard block: Allow mortar droppings on masonry to partially dry then remove by means of trowel, followed by rubbing lightly with small piece of block and finally by brushing. Point or replace defective mortar. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
.4 .5
END
STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS
Section 05 12 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A36/A36M-08, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. .2 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .3 ASTM A193/A193M-10a, Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. .4 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bots and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .5 ASTM A325-10, Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. .6 ASTM A325M-09, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric). .7 ASTM A490M-10, Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric). Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-85.10-99, Protective Coatings for Metals. Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC)/Canadian Paint Manufacturer's Association (CPMA). .1 CISC/CPMA 1-73b, Quick-Drying One-Coat Paint for Use on Structural Steel. .2 CISC/CPMA 2-75, Quick-Drying Primer for use on Structural Steel. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA S16-09, Design of Steel Structures, Including Update No.1 (2010). .3 CAN/CSA-S136-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. .4 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .5 CSA-W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding.
.2
.3
.4
Section 05 12 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) .6 CSA W55.3-08, Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings. .7 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) Metric. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) .1 SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3-00, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
.5
.1
Design details and connections in accordance with requirements of CSA S16 and CAN/CSA-S136 to resist forces, moments, shears and allow for movements indicated. Shear connections: .1 Select framed beam shear connections from an industry accepted publication such as "Handbook of the Canadian Institute of Steel Construction" when connection for shear only (standard connection) is required. .2 Select or design connections to support reaction from maximum uniformly distributed load that can be safely supported by beam in bending, provided no point loads act on beam, when shears are not indicated. Submit sketches and design calculations stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada for non standard connections.
.2
.3
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings including fabrication and erection documents and materials list in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Erection drawings: indicate details and information necessary for assembly and erection purposes including: .1 Description of methods. .2 Sequence of erection. .3 Type of equipment used in erection. .4 Temporary bracings. Ensure Fabricator drawings showing designed assemblies, components and connections are stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.
.2
.3
Section 05 12 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
Submit 5 copies of mill test reports 4 weeks prior to fabrication of structural steel. .1 Mill test reports to show chemical and physical properties and other details of steel to be incorporated in project. .2 Provide mill test reports certified by metallurgists qualified to practice in the Province of Ontario, Canada. Provide structural steel Fabricator's affidavit stating that materials and products used in fabrication conform to applicable material and products standards specified and indicated.
.2
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Structural steel: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21: .1 W Shapes: new material conforming to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W. .2 C Shapes: new material conforming to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W. Anchor bolts: to ASTM A36/A36M unless noted otherwise, minimum 30% recycled content. Bolts, nuts and washers: to ASTM A325. Welding materials: to CSA W59, and certified by Canadian Welding Bureau. Shop paint primer: to CISC/CPMA2 (75) SSPC SP 6 for exposed conditions. CISC/CPMA1 (73A) for all other locations, Ecologo certified.
.2 .3 .4 .5
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate structural steel in accordance with CSA S16 and CAN/CSA-S136 and in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.
Section 05 12 23 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.2 FABRICATION (Cont'd)
.2 .3
Continuously seal members by continuous welds where indicated. Grind smooth.

Provide holes in top and bottom flanges where required for attachment of wood nailers and moveable partitions.
2.3
SHOP PAINTING
.1
Clean, prepare surfaces and shop prime structural steel in accordance with specified CISC/CPM standard. Apply one coat of primer in shop to manufacturer's recommendations except: .1 Surfaces to be encased in concrete. .2 Surfaces and edges to be field welded. .3 Faying surfaces of friction-type connections. .4 Below grade surfaces in contact with soil. Apply paint under cover, on dry surfaces when surface and air temperatures are above 5 degrees C. Maintain dry condition and 5 degrees C minimum temperature until paint is thoroughly dry. Strip paint from bolts, nuts, sharp edges and corners before prime coat is dry.
.2
.3
.4 .5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Structural steel work: in accordance with CSA S16 and CAN/CSA-S136. Welding: in accordance with CSA W59. Companies to be certified under Division 01 or 2.1 of CSA W47.1 for fusion welding of steel structures and/or CSA W55.3 for resistance welding of structural components.
3.2
MARKING
.1
Mark materials in accordance with CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21. Do not use die stamping. If steel is to be left in unpainted condition, place marking at locations not visible from exterior after erection.
Section 05 12 23 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.2 MARKING (Cont'd)
.2
Match marking: shop mark bearing assemblies and splices for fit and match.
3.3
ERECTION
.1
Erect structural steel, as indicated and in accordance with CSA S16 and CAN/CSA-S136 and in accordance with reviewed erection drawings. Field cutting or altering structural members: to approval of Departmental Representative. Clean with mechanical brush and touch up shop primer to bolts, rivets, welds and burned or scratched surfaces at completion of erection. Continuously seal members by continuous welds where indicated. Grind smooth. Review metal deck support conditions and install 65 x 65 x 5 mm deck support angles where metal deck changes direction. Support deck angle with 65 x 65 x 5 mm stub columns @ maximum 2000 mm o.c.
.2 .3
.4 .5
.1
Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. Provide safe access and working areas for testing on site, as required by testing agency and as authorized by Departmental Representative. Submit test reports to Departmental Representative within 1 week of completion of inspection. Departmental Representative will pay costs of tests as specified in Section 01 29 83.
.2
.3
.4
3.5 MASONRY LEDGERS
.1
All masonry ledgers shall be erected with provision for full site adjustment. Position ledgers accurately to correct elevations and plan location and field weld in place prior to laying up masonry.
Section 05 12 23 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.6
TOLERANCES
.1
All masonry ledgers are to be erected straight, level and plumb with no discernible kinks, bends or sweep. All masonry support members are to be erected such that the masonry can be laid up in its correct location, fully supported, straight and plumb. All masonry support members exposed to view are to be erected to comply with the following tolerances: .1 Straight to within tolerance of 1 in 500 with maximum deviation of 3 mm from established location. .2 Level to within tolerance of 1 in 1000 with maximum deviation of 3 mm from established elevation. .3 Plumb to within tolerance of 1 in 500 with maximum deviation of 3 mm. .4 Splices between ledgers shall have the toe of the exposed flanges flush. The flanges and the webs are to be fully welded together at all splice locations and the exposed portions of all flanges are to be continuous with all welds ground smooth and flush. .5 Exposed portions of all ledgers are to be finished smooth ready for finish painting. All irregularities and surface defects are to be removed. Tolerance of all other structural steel shall be maintained strictly in accordance with CSA S16.
.2
.3
3.7
FIELD PAINTING
.1
Paint in accordance with Sections 09 91 13 and 09 91 23. .1 Touch up damaged surfaces and surfaces without shop coat with primer.
END
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
Section 05 21 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-85.10-99, Protective Coatings for Metals. Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC)/Canadian Paint Manufacturer's Association (CPMA) .1 CISC/CPMA 2-75-1975, Quick-Drying, Primer for Use on Structural Steel. CSA International .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA S16-09, Design of Steel Structures. .3 CSA S136-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. .4 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .5 CSA W55.3-08, Certificate of Companies for Resistance Welding of Steel and Aluminum. .6 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) Metric. The Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual - current edition.
.2
.3
.4
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for steel joist framing and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate on erection drawings, relevant details such as joist mark, depth, spacing, bridging lines, bearing, anchorage and details. .3 Indicate particulars, on shop drawings, relative to joist geometry, framed openings, splicing details, bearing and anchorage. Include
.3
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
Section 05 21 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Shop Drawings:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) member size, properties, specified and factored member loads, and stresses under various loadings, deflection and camber.
.1
Submit 5 copies of mill test reports at least 4 weeks prior to fabrication of steel joists and accessories. Reports to show: .1 Chemical and physical properties. .2 Other details of steel to be incorporated into work.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
.1 .2
Design steel joists and bridging to carry loads shown on drawings to CSA S16 and CSA S136. Ensure joists are manufactured to consider load effects due to fabrication, erection and handling. Limit roof joist deflection due to specified live load to maximum of span and deflection due to specified total load to maximum of span. Limit floor joist deflection due to specified live load to 1/360 of maximum span, and deflection due to specified total load to 1/240 maximum of span.
.3
.4
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
Section 05 21 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Open web steel joists: to CSA S16 and CSA S136. Structural steel: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21 and CSA S136. Welding materials: to CSA W59. Shop paint primer: to MPI - INT 5.1A, CISC/CPMA-1.
2.3
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate steel joists and accessories as indicated in accordance with CSA S16 and CSA S136. Weld in accordance with CSA W59. Provide diagonal and horizontal bridgings and anchorages as required.
.2 .3
2.4
SHOP PAINTING
.1 .2
Clean, prepare and shop prime surfaces of steel joists to CSA S16. Clean members of loose mill scale, rust, oil, dirt and other foreign matter. Prepare surfaces to SSPC SP1 brush blast. Apply one coat of CISC/CPMA-2 primer to steel surfaces to achieve dry film thickness of 0.080 mm maximum: Apply paint under cover, on dry surfaces when surface and air temperatures are above 5 degrees C. Maintain dry condition and 5 degrees C minimum temperature until paint is thoroughly dry. Strip paint bolts, nuts, sharp edges and corners before prime coat is dry.
.3
.4
.5 .6
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
Section 05 21 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other Sections are acceptable for steel joist framing installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative. .2 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. .3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Do structural steel work: to CSA S16. Do welding: in accordance with CSA W59. Ensure installers are certified to CSA W47.1 for fusion welding and CSA W55.3 for resistance welding.
3.3 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WORK
.1
Verify dimensions and condition of existing work; report discrepancies and potential problem areas to Departmental Representative for direction before commencing fabrication.
.1
Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. Testing laboratory will inspect representative joists for integrity, accuracy of fabrication and soundness of welds. Testing laboratory will also monitor test loading of joists used by manufacturer to verify design and check representative field connections. Departmental Representative will determine extent of and identify all inspections. Submit test report to Departmental Representative within 7 days after completion of inspection.
.2
.3
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
Section 05 21 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd)
.4
Departmental Representative will pay costs of tests as specified in Section 01 29 83.
3.5
ERECTION
.1
Erect steel joists and bridging as indicated to CSA S16, and in accordance with reviewed erection drawings. Complete installation of bridging and anchorages before placing construction loads on joists. Field cutting or altering joists or bridging that are not shown on shop drawings: to approval of Departmental Representative. Clean and touch up shop primer to bolts, welds, burned or scratched surfaces at completion of erection.
.2
.3
.4
3.6
FIELD PAINTING
.1 .2
Paint: in accordance with Section 09 91 23. Touch up all damaged surfaces and surfaces without shop coat with MPI - INT 5.1A, CISC/CPMA-1 in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
3.7
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day. Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at appropriate facility.
.2
.3
3.8
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
Section 05 21 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by steel joist framing installation.
END
STEEL DECKING
Section 05 31 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.79-1978(R2008), Cellular Metal and Cellular Concrete Floor Raceways and Fittings. .2 CSA S16-09, Design of Steel Structures. .3 CSA S136-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. .4 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .5 CSA W55.3-08, Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings. .6 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction, (Metal Arc Welding) Metric. Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI) .1 CSSBI 10M-08, Standard for Steel Roof Deck. .2 CSSBI 12M-08, Standard for Composite Steel Deck.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Design steel deck using limit states design in accordance with CSA S136, CSSBI 10M and CSSBI 12M. Steel deck and connections to steel framing to carry dead, live and other loads including lateral loads, diaphragm action, composite deck action, and uplift as indicated. Deflection under specified live load not to exceed 1/240 of span, except that when gypsum board ceilings are hung directly from deck, live load deflection not to exceed 1/360 of span.
.2
.3
STEEL DECKING
Section 05 31 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings erection and shoring drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit drawings stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. Submit design calculations if requested by Departmental Representative. Indicate deck plan, profile, dimensions, base steel thickness, metallic coating designation, connections to supports and spacings, projections, openings, reinforcement details and accessories. Indicate details of temporary shoring of steel deck, such as location, time and duration of placement and removal of shoring for concrete fill decks. Deck units to be 3 span continuous where possible; under no circumstances should deck be less than 2 span continuous except where detailed.
.3 .4
.5
.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Zinc-iron Alloy (ZF) coated steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M structural quality Grade 230, minimum 30% recycled content, 0.76 mm minimum base steel thickness. Decks to be painted: zinc-iron alloy coated decks suitable for finish painting. Zinc (Z) coated steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M structural quality Grade 230, minimum 30% recycled content, 0.76 mm minimum base steel thickness.
3 Acoustic insulation: fibrous glass 17.5 kg/m density profiled to suit deck flutes, Ecologo certified.
.2 .3
.4
.5 .6
Closures: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Cover plates, cell closures and flashings: steel sheet with minimum base steel thickness of 0.76 mm, minimum 30% recycled content. Metallic coating same as deck material.
STEEL DECKING
Section 05 31 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.7 .8
Primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ecologo certified.

Shear studs: to CSA W59.
2.2 TYPES OF DECKING
.1
Roof Decking: 900 mm wide sheets by 0.91 mm core thickness, galvanized to Z275 (G90) standard. .1 Acceptable material: : P-3615 and P-3615 Acoustic by CANAM, www.canam-steeljoist.ws; S-15 and S-15 Acoustic by Roll Form Group, www.rollformgroup.com, 1-800-223-6228; RD938 by VicWest, www.vicwest.com, 1-800-387-7135. Floor Decking: 900 mm wide sheets by 0.91 mm core thickness, galvanized to ZF075 (Wipe Coat) standard. .1 Acceptable material: P-3615 Composite by CANAM, www.canam-steeljoist.ws; S-l5-K by Roll Form Group, www.rollformgroup.com, 1-800-223-6228; HB938 by VicWest, www.vicwest.com, 1-800-387-7135. Acoustic closures: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Structural steel work: in accordance with CSA S136, CSSBI 10M and CSSBI 12M. Welding: in accordance with CSA W59, except where specified otherwise. Companies to be certified under Division 1 or 2.1 of CSA W47.1 for fusion welding of steel and/or CSA W55.3 for resistance welding.
3.2
ERECTION
.1
Erect steel deck as indicated and in accordance with CSA S136, CSSBI 10M and CSSBI 12M and in accordance with approved reviewed erection drawings. Butt ends: to 1.5 to 3 mm gap. Install steel cover plates. Lap ends: to 50 mm minimum.
.2 .3
STEEL DECKING
Section 05 31 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.2 ERECTION (Cont'd)
.4
Allow minimum 40 mm bearing when supported by structural steel and minimum 100 mm bearing when supported by masonry or concrete. Mechanical fasten male/female side laps at maximum 300 mm. Fasten deck to all supporting steel with 20 mm fusion welds at maximum 300 mm on centre. Immediately after deck is permanently secured in place, touch up metallic coated top surface with compatible primer where burned by welding. Prior to concrete placement, steel deck to be free of soil, debris, standing water, loose mil scale and other foreign matter. Temporary shoring, if required, to be designed to support construction loads, wet concrete and other construction equipment. Do not remove temporary shoring until concrete attains 75% of its specified 28 day compression strength. Place and support reinforcing steel as indicated.
.5 .6 .7
.8
.9
.10
3.3
CLOSURES
.1 .2
Install galvanized closures in accordance with approved details. Install acoustical closures in locations above walls and partitions in areas where partitions butt to decking.
3.4 OPENINGS AND AREAS OF CONCENTRATED LOADS
.1 .2
No reinforcement required for openings cut in deck which are smaller than 150 mm square. Reinforce openings 150 mm to 450 mm in size with 65 x 65 x 6 mm steel angles or as indicated on the drawings. Place angles perpendicular to flutes, extended minimum two flutes each side of openings and weld to deck. Reinforce openings over 450 mm in accordance with details indicated on drawings.
.3
STEEL DECKING
Section 05 31 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.5
CONNECTIONS
.1
Install connections in accordance with CSSBI recommendations as indicated.
END
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM): .1 ASTM A27/A27M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application. .2 ASTM A36/A36M-08, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. .3 ASTM A47/A47M-99(2009), Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. .4 ASTM A53/A53M-10, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. .5 ASTM A108-07, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. .6 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .7 ASTM A167-99(2009) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .8 ASTM A194/A194M-10a, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. .9 ASTM A283/A283M-03(2007), Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. .10 ASTM A307-10 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .11 ASTM A325M-09 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric). .12 ASTM A336/A336M-10a, Standard Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts. .13 ASTM A501-07, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. .14 ASTM A600-92a(2010), Standard Specification for Tool Steel High Speed. .15 ASTM A666-10, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. .16 ASTM F436M-10 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers (Metric). .17 ASTM F738M-02(2008), Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Metric Bolts, Screws, and Studs.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating .2 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA S16-09, Design of Steel Structures. .3 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). Federal Specifications: .1 FF-B-561D, Federal Specification: Bolts, (Screw), Lag (03 Aug 1993) (S/S By ASME/ANSI Standard B18.2.1 And ASME/ANSI Standard B18.18.1M). .2 FF-S-111D, (Notice 1), Federal Specification: Screw, Wood (04 Dec 2000) (No S/S Document). .3 FF-W-92B, Federal Specification Washer, Flat (Plain) (9 May 1974). National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010.
.3
.4
.5
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate VOC's for finishes, coatings, primers and paints. Shop Drawings .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Have shop drawings prepared by a structural engineer registered in the Province of Ontario for items required to be designed in accordance with Part 4.0 of the National Building Code (NBC). .3 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, and accessories. .4 Shop drawings shall show construction details of specialties, general arrangements, typical and special installation conditions, materials, connections, attachments, anchorage,
.2
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) location of exposed fastenings and interface with adjacent materials. Detention Furniture: .1 Within 30 days of Contract award, submit preliminary details and description of planning, materials, equipment and methods for approval by the Departmental Representative including the following: .1 Proposed materials and fabrication methods. .2 Samples of proposed materials and finishes. .3 Preliminary shop drawings. .4 Manufacturer's cut sheets and literature fully describing all manufactured products and materials. .5 Proposed methods of installation. .2 Following the Departmental Representative's review of the preliminary submission, make adjustments to shop drawings and samples as required by the Departmental Representative for review. .3 Completely detail items indicating materials, dimensions, methods of fixing, field jointing, attachment, size, thickness, gauges of metals, fasteners and finishes. .4 Submit samples of metal finishes, hardware and fabrication details to the Departmental Representative for review. .5 Manufacturer's catalogue literature may be submitted in lieu of shop drawings for equipment and hardware, provided installation is of a typical nature not requiring special details and approval has been obtained from the Departmental Representative to do so. .6 Submit copies of detailed procedures covering the care, cleaning and maintenance of stainless steel and painted fabrications for incorporation into operating and maintenance manuals specified under Section 01 78 00.
.3
.1
Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.2
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
.3
Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
Mock-ups: Provide mock-up of gun port as shown on drawings, and a mock-up of grille as shown on drawings. Mock-ups to be completely finished and installed. Detention Furniture: .1 Refer to Section 01 45 00. .2 Manufacturers: Companies specializing in fabricating detention furniture specified under this section with a minimum of 5 years experience for projects of similar size and complexity. Use fabricators capable of providing architectural quality work. Provide qualification documentation to the Departmental Representative when requested. .3 Installers: Skilled in the work assigned and having a minimum of 5 years proven experience in design and construction for projects of similar size and complexity. .4 Mock-ups: Construct mock-ups of each furniture item for review by the Departmental Representative prior to final fabrication.
.4
.5
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Storage and Protection: .1 Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or apply strippable plastic coating, before shipping to job site. .2 Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building. Provide instructions for removal of protective covering. Detention Manufactured Specialties and Detention Furniture: .1 Conform strictly to the manufacturer's printed instructions covering delivery storage and handling of specialities at the job site. .2 Handle specialties with care to prevent damage to specialties and building finishes during movement on site. Keep protective coverings in place until removal is necessary for installation or building is ready for final acceptance.
.2
.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 5 2011-05-25
.4
Detention Manufactured Specialties: Store specialties in a protected area away .1 from environmental and physical conditions that would damage or otherwise impair the performance of the products.
1.5
WARRANTY
.1
Upon completion of the work, submit the manufacturer's product warranties for incorporation into operation and maintenance manuals. Specific warranties will be noted under the schedule of specialties if required by the Departmental Representative, otherwise the standard manufacturer's warranties shall be submitted.
.2
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrene corrugated cardboard and packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Anchoring System - acceptable material: Hilti Hit system HY20 for masonry, and HY150 Max and for concrete. Bolts and Anchor Bolts: to ASTM A325M, type 1 medium carbon steel bolts, galvanized finish; ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 2H nuts, galvanized finish; ASTM F436M, type 1 washers; ASTM A307, detention fabrications. Detention Manufactured Specialties: .1 A schedule of miscellaneous manufactured specialties is specified following Part 3 Execution.
.2
.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 6 2011-05-25
.3
Detention Manufactured Specialties:(Cont'd) .2 Specialties shall be provided with all of the necessary anchorages, fastenings, trims, closures, shims, braces, setting compounds, isolation coatings and hardware required for a complete and finished installation. Detention Furniture: .1 General: .1 The selection of the appropriate metal and fabrication technique is left to the discretion of the fabricator to achieve the desired end result, subject to the review of the Departmental Representative. .2 Metals to be new and free from defects which may impair their strength, durability or appearance and be of the best commercial quality suitable for the intended use. Metals to possess structural properties to sustain safely the strains and stresses to which they will be subjected. Metals to be free of excessive rust, mill scale, pitting, seam marks, roughness and discolouration. Metals to possess properties necessary to achieve the desired finish. .2 Standards: .1 Steel plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A36/A36M. .2 Steel plates to be bent or cold formed: ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C. .3 Steel tubing, hot formed, welded or seamless: ASTM A501. .4 Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A36/A36M. .5 Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108, grade as selected by the fabricator. .6 Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336/A336M. .7 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, grade A. .3 Fasteners: .1 Bolts and nuts: Regular hexagon-head type to ASTM A307, Grade A. .2 High strength bolts: ASTM A325M bearing type. .3 Stainless steel bolts, nuts, screws and studs: ASTM F738M, Type 316. .4 Lag bolts: Square head type, meeting Fed Spec FF-B-561D. .5 Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, complying with Fed Spec FF-S-111D. .6 Wood Screws: Flat-headed carbon steel. .7 Plain washers: Round, carbon steel, complying with Fed Spec FF-W-92B.
.4
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 7 2011-05-25
.4
Detention Furniture:(Cont'd) .3 Fasteners:(Cont'd) .8 Concrete inserts: Threaded or wedge type, galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron to ASTM A47/A47M or cast steel to ASTM A27/A27M. .9 Quick bolts - acceptable material: Hilti. .10 Exposed fasteners shall match the finish in which they occur. .11 Security Fasteners: In accordance with Section 01 61 00. .12 Hardware: Heavy duty, stainless steel. .13 Spot weld fasteners (concrete screw anchors, bolts) to steel detention furniture and other detention items, following anchorage installation, according to manufacturer's recommendations, to ensure maximum level of tamper-proof installation. Drilled inserts - acceptable material: Hilti HSL. Extruded Aluminum Step Nosings with Abrasive Filler: the base shall consist of heat treated extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6. The abrasive filler shall consist of a mixture of aluminum oxide and silicon carbide granules in an epoxy matrix locked into the extruded channels of the base. The abrasive ribs shall project a minimum of 1.6 mm above the extruded channels of the base. Five (5) abrasive bands with 75 mm deep are to be provided for each nosing strip. Nosings shall terminate not more than 75 mm from ends of each step. Colour to contrast with adjacent floor surface and to be selected by the Departmental Representative from manufacturer's range. Anchor type to be continuous extruded anchor; "arrow shape". Strips to stop 100 mm short of each edge of stair tread. Fasteners (to stainless steel fabrications): to ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel, of size and capacity as indicated on the reviewed shop drawings and as required to withstand all super imposed loading and to conform with all code requirements. Use Torx and pin fasteners where exposed. Grout: non shrink, non metallic, flowable, 15 MPa at 24 hours.
.5 .6
.7
.8
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 8 2011-05-25
.9
Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): To CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, 350 W yield strength, Class C.

Isolation Coating: Alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy resin solution. Lateral Support of Block Walls: .1 For lateral support of the top of masonry walls, provide two 100 mm x 100 mm x 3 mm bent steel angles on each side of walls, screwed to the underside of the steel deck. Provide 25 mm space to allow deflection of roof joist. As indicated on drawings. Primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40 for interior locations, to CAN/CGSB-1.181 (zinc rich) to exterior locations. Security Fasteners (to all secure, inmate detention areas): use either concealed fasteners or tamper resistant Torx with pin fasteners where exposed, in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Security Screens: .1 Mesh: galvanized 38 #16 LT flattened expanded mesh. .2 Frame: 64 mm x 15 mm galvanized flat bar. Shear Connectors: Nelson stud or other preapproved product. Shop galvanizing: hot dip galvanizing with a 2 minimum zinc coating of Grade 85, 600 g/m , to ASTM A123/A123M. Silicone adhesive: as recommended by the stainless steel fabricator and compatible with all adjacent materials. Stainless steel: all stainless steel components to be Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 (brushed) finish, unless indicated otherwise. Stainless steel sheet: to ASTM A167, Type 304, No. 4 finish, 1.2 mm minimum thickness. Stainless Steel S-Shape Concrete Anchors acceptable material: spike model as manufactured by Rawl. Steel pipe: structural grade pipe, standard schedule 40 black pipe conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, grade B, continuous or electric
.10 .11
.12
.13
.14
.15 .16
.17
.18
.19 .20
.21
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 9 2011-05-25
.21
Steel pipe:(Cont'd) resistance welded; size as indicated on the drawings. Steel sections and plates: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W. Tungsten inserts: tungsten-type high-speed steel to ASTM A600. Strip siding and trim (for 2400 mm high solid fence): as per Section 07 46 13. Supply new materials, free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance, of best commercial quality for purposes specified. Where metal fabrications are exposed and painted, ensure that manufacturer's stamps are not visible. Welding electrodes: to CSA W48. Welding materials: to CSA W59. Welding Rods: of same analysis or high chromium nickel content than metal being welded.
.22 .23 .24 .25
.26 .27 .28
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate work square, true, straight and accurate to required size, with joints closely fitted and properly secured. Provide strict quality control over fabrication to assure fabrication and assembly for +/- 1.5 mm from location indicated in the contract documents. Where possible, fit and shop assemble work, ready for erection. Ensure exposed welds are continuous for length of each joint. .1 Welds shall be designed for flush smooth finish. .2 Minor imperfections will be allowed only where practical during primer application. .3 Defects which would be visible in the finished work shall be ground out, filled with welding material and ground flush prior to finishing. .4 Grind all welds smooth. Welds shall be neat, complete and free of voids, flush finish, not ground. Ease exposed edges to approximate 0.5 mm uniform radius.
.2 .3
.4
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 10 2011-05-25
.5
Provide holes required for other work secured to or passing through architecturally exposed steel.
Fabricate all miscellaneous metalwork shown and detailed in the drawings and listed in this section in the quantities required. Assemble built-up work in the shop and match-mark for correct field erection. Execute work in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. All copes, mitres and butt cuts in surfaces exposed to view shall be made with uniform gaps of 3.0 mm if detailed to be open joints or in uniform contact if detailed without gaps. Weld in such a manner as to avoid distortion, discolouration or damage to the members. Weld interior work continuously along the entire line of contact. Drill for countersunk screws if exposed to view unless otherwise shown or accepted by the Departmental Representative. Locate holes in structural members for connections or for other purposes so as not to cause appreciable reduction in the strength of members. Reinforce all work to suit the purpose for which it is intended and to withstand design loads. Fabricate work square, true, straight and accurate to detail with sharply, defined profiles. Fabricate curved work to smooth, uniform constant radii as detailed. Joints in materials shall be cut to form fine hairline joints flush with adjacent surfaces. Provide suitable temporary bracing as required to maintain alignment during shipment and erection. Use self tapping shake proof and tamper proof flat headed screws on items requiring assembly by screws or as indicated. Use tamper proof fasteners where indicated of type as indicated on the drawings.
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10 .11
.12
.13
.14
.15 .16 .17
.18
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 11 2011-05-25
.19 .20
Fabricate stainless steel items in accordance with the drawings and reviewed shop drawings.
Brake-form stainless steel to provide crisp, straight and true edges, and shaped to fit accurately. Use one length piece per location, with neatly and accurately formed corners. Use concealed fastening wherever possible. Where exposed fastening is required, all exposed mechanical fastenings shall be flush countersunk Torx with pin type screws or bolts unobtrusively located consistent with the design, except where specifically noted otherwise. Stainless steel surfaces to be free of oil canning, depressions, dents and other defects. Remove all sharp edges, burrs and the like.
.21 .22 .23
.24 .25
2.3
FINISHES
.1
Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing with zinc coating minimum Grade 85, 600 g/m2 to ASTM A123/A123M. Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181. For items to be finish painted, conform to Sections 09 91 13 and 09 91 23 for primer types.
.2 .3 .4
2.4 ISOLATION COATING
.1
Isolate aluminum from following components, by means of bituminous paint: .1 Dissimilar metals except stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area. .2 Concrete, mortar and masonry. .3 Wood.
2.5 SHOP PREPARATION FOR PAINTING
.1 .2
Clean metal of all loose mill scale, rust, oil, dirt and all other foreign matter. Clean interior metal to be painted in accordance with SSPCSP1 Solvent Cleaning
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 12 2011-05-25
2.5 SHOP PREPARATION FOR PAINTING (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) followed with SSPC SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Clean exterior metal to be painted in accordance with SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning followed with SSPC SP10 Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. Remove or repair sharp edges, burrs, weld spatter and other defects to steel members prior to application of primers.
.3
.4
2.6
SHOP PAINTING
.1
Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of galvanized or concrete encased items. For items to be finish painted, apply primers in accordance with Sections 09 91 13 and 09 91 23. Apply primer as specified under Sections 09 91 13 and 09 91 23, and in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Ensure that primer is appled within 8 hours of completion of surface preparations. Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 degrees C. Clean surfaces to be field welded; do not paint. If the correct primer is not applied by this section of the Work, this section is responsible for removal of the incorrect primer, re-conditioning the surface and applying the correct primer as specified, including removal and re-installation of the affected work as required. Primer applied to surfaces not properly prepared in accordance with specified SSPC preparations will be rejected by the Departmental Representative and shall be removed, brought up to the specified requirements and re-installed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Departmental Representative.
.2
.3 .4
.5
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 13 2011-05-25
2.7
ANGLE LINTELS
.1
Steel angles: galvanized, sizes indicated for openings. Provide 150 mm minimum bearing at ends. Weld or bolt back to back angles to profiles as indicated. Finish: painted after installation.
.2 .3
2.8
PIPE RAILINGS
.1
Steel pipe: 40 mm nominal outside diameter and 3 mm wall thickness, formed to shapes and sizes as indicated. Galvanize exterior pipe railings after fabrication.
.2
2.9
CHANNEL FRAMES
.1 .2
Fabricate frames from steel, sizes of channel and opening as indicated. Weld channels together to form continuous frame for jambs and head of openings, sizes as indicated. Finish: painted after installation.
.3
2.10 DETENTION FURNITURE
.1
Fabricate new steel detention furniture as detailed on the drawings using 6 mm thick bent plate, or as otherwise detailed. Weld sections together with continuous filet welds as detailed. Weld using 63 Hardcro 3.2 mm electrodes. Use Torx with pin, tamperproof fasteners wherever exposed fasteners occur.
.2
2.11 SECURITY BARS TO WINDOWS
.1 .2 .3
Fabricate security bars to window types W3 and W4 for exterior aluminum windows. Fabricate all other security grilles not included in Section 11 19 14. Install security bars and frames to windows and doors as detailed on the drawings and reviewed shop drawings.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 14 2011-05-25
2.12 STEEL BULKHEAD
.1
Fabricate steel sheet bulkhead as detailed on the drawings using 3 mm thick bent. Weld sections together with filet welds as detailed. Weld using 63 Hardcro 3.2 electrodes. Use Torx with pin tamperproof fasteners wherever exposed fasteners occur.
.2
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
.1
Fabricate and install wall mounted supports to millwork and counters as detailed on the drawings and elsewhere as indicated; coordinate with millwork and counters specified in Section 06 40 01. Fabricate and install security framing and brackets for the installation of the washer and dryer as detailed on the drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Fabricate and install all miscellaneous security framing and brackets as detailed on the drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Refer to structural drawings for miscellaneous metal items which are to be fabricated, supplied and installed under this section. Fabricate all other metal fabrication items or miscellaneous metal items required to complete the project.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.14 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATIONS
.1
Fabricate as detailed with thickness as shown on drawings for stainless steel pass through, counter tops and the like as detailed on drawings; shop brake formed and welded edges as indicated on drawings and reviewed shop drawings and to profiles shown. Fabricate all other stainless steel items indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings.
.2
2.15 REFINISHING WELD ZONES (STAINLESS STEEL)
.1
Refinish weld zones as follows to blend them in with No. 4 finish to stainless steel: .1 If the original machine polished lines are parallel to the line of the weld, dress down bead by grinding with a hard or soft wheel and then finish off by polishing with No.80 and No.120 grit on a made up wheel drive. Keep wheel
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 15 2011-05-25
2.15 REFINISHING WELD ZONES (STAINLESS STEEL) (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) in line with the run of the bead so that it cuts in lines will be kept parallel to those of the original machine polished finish. .2 Take care to bring the metal of the joint flush with that of the base metal in order to avoid residual ridges or grooves. Because a girt of any original size will leave lines that vary with the amount of use it has received, run separate forerunner samples before starting finish work. .3 If the machine polished lines are not parallel to the lines of the weld, conduct the final manual polishing in the direction of the machine polishing. If the original polish lines on the tow sides of the joint are not parallel to each other, run the polishing cut lines along the bead. .4 When manual polishing, back abrasive paper with wood block and guide by hand along the line of the weld joint.
2.16
STEEL GRILLES
.1
Following requirements apply to construction for exterior steel grilles to non-secure Gallery level exterior aluminum window; and interior steel grilles at gallery level observation ports as shown on Drawings A5.2 and A5.11. Rectangular filler bars where specified, to be 38 mm x 10 mm size, with configuration such that clear space between bars in at least one direction does not exceed 140 mm. Continuous deep-penetration arc weld all joints where bars meet. Remove splatter and grind smooth.
.2
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
.1 .2
Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise. Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections. Provide suitable means of anchorage acceptable to Departmental Representative such as dowels,
.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 16 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles. Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through which they pass. Provide components for building by other sections in accordance with shop drawings and schedule. Make field connections with bolts to CSA S16, or weld. Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates. Touch up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection with primer. Touch up galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer where burned by field welding. Detention Manufactured Specialties: .1 Specialties shall be installed and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. .2 Workers shall be skilled in the work assigned to them and familiar with installation procedures. .3 Install specialties to perform the function intended, adjust all operating components for smooth unrestricted operation. .4 Secure specialties permanently or as required to permit removal for maintenance.
.4
.5
.6 .7
.8
.9 .10
3.2 DETENTION FABRICATION SCHEDULE
.1
The following is a schedule of major items of work of this section. The work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following items. Submit engineered shop drawings for all items. Refer to drawings. .1 Deal Tray (as per details 5, 6 and 7 on Drawing A5.7). .2 Gunport (as per details 8 and 9 on Drawing A5.7). .3 Observation Port Security Grilles (Reference Drawing A5.11). .4 Computer Station (as per details 7, 8 and 9 on Drawing A4.5).
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 17 2011-05-25
3.3
PIPE RAILINGS
.1
Install pipe railings as indicated on drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Coordinate with Section 05 51 29.
3.4
CHANNEL FRAMES
.1
Install steel channel frames to openings as indicated.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
.1
Install all miscellaneous metal fabrications as indicated on the drawings and as required to complete the work and to withstand all superimposed loading. Install all stainless steel items as indicated on the drawings and reviewed shop drawings.
.2
3.6
CLEANING
.1 .2
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Remove all protective labels just prior to final acceptance and clean products using cleaners as recommended by the manufacturer. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
.3
END
METAL STAIRS AND LADDERS
Section 05 51 29 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute/National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (ANSI/NAAMM) .1 ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531-00, Metal Bar Grating Manual. ASTM International .1 ASTM A53/A53M-07, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .3 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .4 ASTM A325M-10, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength Metric. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. CSA International .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). National Association of Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM) .1 AMP 510-92, Metal Stairs Manual. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) .1 Systems and Specifications Manual, Volume 2, 2008 Edition.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 05 51 29 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate VOC's for finishes, coatings, primers and paints. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, and accessories. .3 Indicate construction details, sizes of steel sections and thickness of steel sheet. Construction Waste Management: .1 Submit project Waste Reduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvage requirements.
.3
.4
.1
Test Reports: submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certifications: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre installation Meetings: Conduct pre installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.2
.3
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.2
Section 05 51 29 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements: Store materials off ground, indoors, in .1 dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Store and protect materials from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Design metal stair, balustrade and landing construction and connections to NBC vertical and horizontal live load requirements. Detail and fabricate stairs to NAAMM Metal Stairs Manual.
.2
2.2
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Steel sections: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21 Grade 300W. Steel plate: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W. Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, standard weight, schedule 40 seamless black. Steel tubing: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W, sizes and dimensions as indicated. Metal bar grating: to ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531, steel, Type W-19-4, with checkered plate abrasive nosings. Welding materials: to CSA W59. Bolts: to ASTM A307. High strength bolts: to ASTM A325M.
.6 .7 .8
2.3
FABRICATION
.1 .2
Fabricate in accordance with NAAMM, Metal Stairs Manual. Weld connections where possible, otherwise bolt connections. Countersink exposed fastenings, cut off bolts flush with nuts. Make exposed
Section 05 51 29 Page 4 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) connections of same material, colour and finish as base material on which they occur. Accurately form connections with exposed faces flush. Make mitres and joints tight. Make risers of equal height. Grind or file exposed welds and steel sections smooth. Shop fabricate stairs in sections as large and complete as practicable.
.3
.4 .5
2.4 STEEL PAN STAIRS
.1 .2
Fabricate stairs with closed riser steel pan construction. Form treads and risers from 3 mm thick steel plate. Secure treads and risers to L 35 x 35 x 5 mm horizontal and vertical welded to stringers. Weld wire mesh of Section 03 20 00 to steel pan as indicated on drawings. Form wall stringers from MC 310 x 15.8. Form outer stringers from MC 310 x 15.8 with 5 mm thick plate fascia welded on. Provide clip angles for fastening of furring channels, where applied finish is indicated for underside of stairs and landings. Close ends of stringers where exposed.
.3 .4 .5
.6
2.5 PLATE/GRATING STAIRS
.1
Form treads from 6 mm thick steel plate to profile indicated, and secure to stringers with L 35 x 35 x 5 supports. Form landings from 6 mm thick steel plate, reinforced by L 55 x 55 x 6 spaced at 600 mm on centre. Form steel grating treads and landings from metal bar grating to profile indicated and secure to stringers and supports as indicated. Form landings of steel grating and reinforce as required. Form stringers from MC 310 x 15.8.
.2
.3
Section 05 51 29 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.6
SHIP LADDERS
.1
Form steel grating treads and landings from metal bar grating to profile indicated and secure to stringers and supports with 25 x 25 x 3 x 42 mm long clip angles; two on each side of tread. Form stringers from C230 x 22 steel channel.
.2
2.7 PIPE/TUBING BALUSTRADES
.1 .2 .3
Construct balusters and handrails from steel pipe. Cap and weld exposed ends of balusters and handrails. Terminate at abutting wall with end flange.
2.8
FINISHES
.1
Galvanizing: hot dip galvanizing with zinc coating 600 g/m2, Coating Grade 85, to ASTM A123/A123M. Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181.
.2 .3
2.9
SHOP PAINTING
.1 .2 .3 .4
Clean surfaces in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Manual Volume 2. Apply one coat of shop primer except interior surfaces of pans. Apply two coats of primer of different colours to parts inaccessible after final assembly. Use primer as prepared by manufacturer without thinning or adding admixtures. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease, do not paint when temperature is below 7 degrees C. Do not paint surfaces to be field welded.
.5
Section 05 51 29 Page 6 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF STAIRS
.1 .2
Install in accordance with NAAMM, Metal Stairs Manual. Install plumb and true in exact locations, using welded connections wherever possible to provide rigid structure. Provide anchor bolts, bolts and plates for connecting stairs to structure. Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates. Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise. Touch up shop primer to bolts, welds, and burned or scratched surfaces at completion of erection.
.3
.4 .5
3.2
CLEANING
.1
Perform cleaning as soon as possible after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
.2
3.3
PROTECTION
.1 .2
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by metal stairs and ladders installation.
END
RAILINGS AT ROOF AREAS
Section 05 52 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. British Standard BS 970 - Specification for wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes. General inspection and testing procedures and specific requirements for carbon, carbon manganese, alloy and stainless steels. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910.23 - Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA): 29 CFR 1926.502 - Fall Protection Systems Criteria and Practices.
.2
.3
.4
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for railings and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations, storage and handling requirements, installation instructions. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .1 Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Samples: .1 Submit for review and acceptance of each unit. .2 Samples will be returned for inclusion into work. .3 Submit 2, 150 mm long samples of rail. Submit 2 samples, of elbows, tees, brackets and bases.
.3
.4
Section 05 52 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
.5
Sustainable Design Submittals: Construction Waste Management: Submit .1 project Waste Reduction Workplan highlighting recycling and salvage requirements.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Store and protect railings from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
.4
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
.1
Field Measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication.
1.5
WARRANTY
.1
Warranty: Provide manufacture's two (2) year warranty.
Section 05 52 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
.1
Acceptable Material: SafetyRail 2000, by BlueWater Mfg. Inc., 4064 Peavey Rd., Chaska, MN 55318; Tel: 1-866-933-2935; 952-448-2935; email: request info (info@bluewater-mfg.com); www.bluewater-mfg.com.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
.1
Provide free-standing, non-penetrating guardrail system including railings, uprights, bases and fittings. System shall have top and mid rail in accordance with OSHA Standards 29 CFR 1910.23 (a)(2). Structural Load: 90.7 kg (200 lbs), minimum, in any direction to all components in accordance with OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.502. Height: 1067 mm (42"), minimum.
.2
.3
.4
2.3 PREFABRICATED METAL RAILINGS
.1 .2
Railings: 41 mm diameter hot rolled pickled electric weld tubing. Mounting Bases: Class 30 gray iron material cast with four receiver posts. Provide rubber pads on bottom of bases. Receiver posts to have a positive locking system into slots that allow rails to be mounted in any direction. Friction locking systems are not allowed. Receiver posts shall have drain holes. Accessories: provide accessories including: .1 Step-Rail: variable height railing enabling a continuous run of railings when the roof steps up or down. .2 Raised Mid-Rail: Railing to fit over duct work for continuous run of railing system. .3 Supports placed under ducting or conduit to continue run of railing system when rail section cannot be used. .4 Finishing Rail: D-shaped railing extension for ladder landings, length of rail section and D-loop as indicated on drawings, and/or required.
.3
.4
Section 05 52 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.3 PREFABRICATED METAL RAILINGS (Cont'd)
.4
Accessories:(Cont'd) Safety/Caution Signage: Cushioned foam .5 strip with self adhesive backing; UL-rated for indoor/outdoor use. .6 Roof Pads: Provide pads under each base to protect roof membrane, suitable for, and compatible with roof membrane. Fittings: Provide fittings required for a complete operational system that meets OSHA requirements. .1 Provide malleable iron or weldable cast steel fittings to suit application. .2 Hardware: Stainless steel set screws, in accordance with BS 970 Grade 420. Each set screw shall support axial load of 900 kg when tightened to torque of 40 Nm. Galvanizing: to ASTM A123/A123M, provide minimum Grade 85, 600 g/sqm galvanized coating. .1 Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SPCC 20 Type II Organic zinc rich. Shop Prefinishing: Factory finished powder coat paint. .1 Colour: safety yellow, or as selected by Departmental Representative from manufacturer's standard range.
.5
.6
.7
2.4
FABRICATION
.1 .2
Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for handrail installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative. .2 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. .3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and
Section 05 52 16 Page 5 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install railings as indicated on drawings. Install railings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install components plumb and level.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day. .2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at appropriate facility.
.2
3.5
PROTECTION
.1 .2 .3
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by railings installation.
END
CARPENTRY
Section 06 10 12 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International: .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA O86-09, Engineering Design in Wood. .2 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .3 CAN/CSA-O141-05, Softwood Lumber. .4 CSA O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood. .5 CAN/CSA-O325-07, Construction Sheathing. National Building Code of Canada, NBC 2010. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) .1 Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber 2005.
.2
.3 .4
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Shop drawings shall bear the stamp of a registered professional engineer, registered in the Province of Ontario. Shop drawings shall show complete details of connections, hangers, bracing, bearings, bearing blocks and roof overhangs. Lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board. Plywood, particleboard, OSB and wood based composite panels in accordance with CSA and ANSI standards.
.2
.3 .4
.1 .2
Lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board. Plywood, particleboard, OSB and wood based composite panels in accordance with CSA and ANSI standards.
CARPENTRY
Section 06 10 12 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Divert unused wood materials from landfill to recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of preservative treated wood through incineration. Do not dispose of preservative treated wood with materials destined for recycling or reuse. Dispose of unused wood preservative material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative.
.4 .5 .6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Lumber Material: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S4S, moisture content 19% or less in accordance with following standards: .1 CAN/CSA-O141. .2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks, curbs, fascia backing and sleepers: .1 S2S is acceptable for all work. .2 Board sizes: "Standard" or better grade. .3 Dimension sizes: "Standard" light framing or better grade. Douglas fir plywood: to CSA O121, urea formaldehyde free, alternative adhesive, standard construction. Canadian softwood plywood: to CSA O151, urea formaldehyde free, standard construction. Plywood, OSB and wood based composite panels: to CAN/CSA-O325. Fire retardant treated plywood: Douglas Fir to CSA O121, G1S, fire retardant treated, maximum flame spread 25, maximum smoke developed 25. Fire retardant treated wood: To CAN/ULC-S102-10, flame spread, fuel contributed
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
.7
CARPENTRY
Section 06 10 12 Page 3 2011-05-25
.7
Fire retardant treated wood:(Cont'd) and smoke developed ratings of 25 or less, pressure treated. Fasteners: to CSA O86. Bolts: 12.5 mm diameter unless indicated otherwise, complete with nuts and washers. Proprietary fasteners: toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screws and lead or inorganic fibre plugs, recommended for purpose by manufacturer.
.8 .9 .10
2.2
FINISHES
.1
Galvanizing: to ASTM A123/A123M, use galvanized fasteners for exterior work and pressure preservative treated lumber.
2.3 WOOD PRESERVATIVE
.1
Surface applied wood preservative: clear copper napthenate or 5% pentachlorophenol solution, water repellent preservative. Pentachlorophenol use is restricted to building components that are in ground contact and subject to decay or insect attack only. Where used, pentachlorophenol treated wood must be covered with two coats of an appropriate sealer. Structures built with wood treated with pentachlorophenol and inorganic arsenicals must not be used for storing food nor should the wood come in contact with drinking water.
.2
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1 .2
Treat surfaces of material with wood preservative, before installation. Apply preservative by dipping, or by brush to completely saturate and maintain wet film on surface for minimum 3 minute soak on lumber and one minute soak on plywood. Re treat surfaces exposed by cutting, trimming or boring with liberal brush application of preservative before installation.
.3
CARPENTRY
Section 06 10 12 Page 4 2011-05-25
.4
Treat material as indicated and as follows: .1 Wood fascia backing, curbs, nailers, sleepers on roof deck. .2 Wood furring on outside surface of exterior masonry and concrete walls. .3 Do not use pressure treated wood in direct contact with asphalt based materials such as air/vapour barrier (self adhered side), and roofing membranes.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Comply with requirements of NBC, supplemented by the following paragraphs. Install furring and blocking as required to space out and support casework, cabinets, wall and ceiling finishes, facings, fascia, soffit, siding and other work as required. Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600. Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing for frames and other work. Install wood fascia backing, nailers, curbs and other wood supports as required and secure using galvanized steel fasteners. Install wood backing, dressed, tapered and recessed slightly below top surface of roof insulation for roof hopper.
.3 .4
.5
.6
3.3
ERECTION
.1 .2
Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity. Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work.
3.4 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS
.1
Provide electrical equipment backboards for mounting electrical equipment as indicated. Use 19 mm thick plywood on 19 x 38 mm furring around spacing, perimeter and at maximum 300 mm intermediate. Apply intumescent paint specified in Section 09 91 00, prior to installation of electrical and telephone equipment.
END
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International: .1 ASTM A167-99(2009), Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .2 ASTM E1333-10, Standard Test Method for Determining Formaldehyde Concentrations in Air and Emission Rates From Wood Products Using a Large Chamber. .3 ASTM D2832-92(R2005), Standard Guide for Determining Volatile and Non-volatile Content of Paint and Related Coatings. .4 ASTM D5116-10, Standard Guide For Small Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions From Indoor Materials/Products. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) and Woodwork Institute (WI) .1 AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, AWS Edition 1-2009. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-11.3-M87, Hardboard. .2 CAN/CGSB-71.20-M88, Adhesive, Contact, Brushable. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA O112 Series-M1977(R2001), CSA Standards for Wood Adhesives (consists of O112.0-M, O112.1-M, O112.2-M, O112.3-M, O112.4-M, O112.5-M, O112.6-M, O112.7-M, O112.8-M). .2 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .3 CSA O153-M1980(R2008), Poplar Plywood. Environmental Choice Program (EPC) .1 ECP-44, Adhesives, current edition. .2 ECP-45, Sealants and Caulking Compounds, current edition. .3 ECP-76, Surface Coatings, current edition. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) .1 ISO 14040-2006, Environmental Management Life Cycle Assessment Principles and Framework. .2 ISO 14041-98, Environmental Management Life Cycle Assessment Goal and Scope Definition and Inventory Analysis.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 06 40 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.7
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) .1 NEMA LD3-2005, High-Pressure Decorative Laminates.
National Particleboard Association (NPA) .1 NPA A208.1-2009, Particleboard. National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) .1 Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress 1998. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) .1 Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, March 1, 2007.
.8 .9
.10
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and AWS Section 1. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for architectural woodwork and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit two copies of drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related details. .1 Scales: profiles full size, details half full size. .3 Indicate materials, thicknesses, finishes and hardware. .4 Indicate locations of service outlets in casework, typical and special installation conditions, and connections, attachments, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings. Samples: .1 Submit for review and acceptance of each unit. .2 Samples will be returned for inclusion into work. .3 Submit duplicate samples: sample size 300 x 300 mm samples of hardwood veneered plywood, plastic laminate, stainless steel and melamine and 300 mm long samples of hardwood edging, unless specified otherwise.
.3
.4
Section 06 40 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
.4
Samples:(Cont'd) Provide duplicate colour samples of .4 laminated plastic for colour selection. .5 Submit duplicate samples of laminated plastic joints, edging, cutouts and postformed profiles. Certifications: submit AWMAC GIS certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .1 Architectural woodwork shall be manufactured and/or installed to the current AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards and shall be subject to an inspection at the plant and/or site by an appointed AWMAC Certified Inspector. .2 Inspection costs shall be included in the bid price for this project. Contact your local AWMAC Chapter for details of inspection costs. .3 Shop drawings shall be submitted to the AWMAC Chapter office for review before work commences. .4 Work that does not meet the AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards, as specified, shall be replaced, reworked and/or refinished by the architectural woodwork contractor, to the approval of AWMAC, at no additional cost to the. Departmental Representative. .5 If the woodwork contractor is an AWMAC Manufacturer member in good standing, a two (2) year AWMAC Guarantee Certificate will be issued. .6 The AWMAC Guarantee shall cover replacing, reworking and/or refinishing any deficient architectural woodwork due to faulty workmanship or defective materials supplied by the woodwork contractor, which may appear during a two (2) year period following the date of issuance. .7 If the woodwork contractor is not an AWMAC Manufacturer member they shall provide the Departmental Representative with a two (2) year maintenance bond, in lieu of the AWMAC Guarantee Certificate, to the full value of the architectural woodwork contract.
.5
.1 .2
Lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board. Plywood, particleboard, OSB and wood based composite panels in accordance with CSA and ANSI standards.
Section 06 40 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
.3
Mock-ups: Construct mock ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Construct a complete full size mock-up of the "Nursing Station" on site and prior to the fabrication of the Nursing Station millwork. Construct using plywood for the Departmental Representative to determine layout of controls, electronics and accessories. Modify mock-up as directed by the Departmental Representative until the layout is approved by the Departmental Representative. The final approved mock-up will be used as a template for fabrication of the final Nursing Station. .2 Shop prepare one base cabinet unit, wall cabinet, counter top, complete with hardware and shop applied finishes, and install on project in designated location. .3 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with this work. .4 When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. Mock-up may remain as part of finished work.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling: .1 Deliver, handle, store and protect materials of this section in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .1 Protect millwork against dampness and damage during and after delivery. .2 Store millwork in ventilated areas, protected from extreme changes of temperature or humidity. .2 Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Softwood lumber: unless specified otherwise, S4S, moisture content 15% or less in accordance with following standards: .1 CAN/CSA-O141. .2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. .3 AWMAC Custom Grade, moisture content as specified. Machine stress rated lumber is acceptable for all purposes.
.2
Section 06 40 01 Page 5 2011-05-25
.3
Hardwood lumber: birch, moisture content 15% or less in accordance with following standards: .1 National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA). .2 AWMAC Custom Grade, moisture content as specified.
Douglas fir plywood (DFP): to CSA O121, standard construction. Canadian softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA O151, standard construction. Hardwood plywood: to AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS for use in Custom Grade work, white birch species to exposed sides, including all exposed faces of open shelving, natural birch to backside or semi-exposed (behind doors) surfaces, of thickness indicated, 19 mm thickness unless indicated otherwise, sheets sizes to suit and as indicated on the reviewed shop drawings, rotary cut face veneer of architectural grade. Use combination core plywood with a random waferboard inner core with Type II (interior) bond. Select veneers to provide book match. Stock hardwood veneered panels are not acceptable for this project. The veneer must be laid out for each area to provide a book match and as noted on the reviewed shop drawings and to match accepted sample installation. Substrate for plastic laminate (except counter tops) and hardwood veneer: Combination core plywood with a random waferboard inner core with Type II (interior) bond. Substrate for counter tops: veneer core plywood with Type 1 glue to all counter tops; 19 mm thick. Hardboard .1 To CAN/CGSB-11.3. .2 Manufactured such that formaldehyde emissions do not exceed 0.15 ppm (180 g/m3 ) when tested in accordance with ASTM E1333. .3 If manufactured using a wet process: .1 To be made by a process that does not release matter in the undiluted product plant effluent generating a BOD5 in excess of 50 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment. .2 To be made by a process that does not release TSS in excess of 60 mg/L to a
.4 .5 .6
.7
.8
.9
Section 06 40 01 Page 6 2011-05-25
.9
(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment. Contain at least 50% recycled materials.
.4 .10
Laminated plastic for flatwork: to NEMA LD3, Grade HGS, 1.2 mm nominal thickness; satin finish, see drawings for finish schedule. Bolts, nuts, washers, lags, pins, screws, nails and staples: of size and type to suit application. Where fasteners are exposed, use stainless steel screws with stainless steel or chrome cup washers, and space neatly and evenly to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative. Use tamper proof Torx type fasteners where indicated. Stainless Steel Counter tops: to ASTM A167; 1.21 mm thick (18 gauge) Type 304 stainless steel with #4 satin finish bonded to plywood core, complete with raised rim where indicated. Finished thickness to be 32 mm, complete with backsplashes, 20 mm thick. Solid Acrylic tops: homogeneous, thermoset polymer alloy, comprised of polyester and acrylic components and filled with aluminum trihydrate, 19 mm thick, of sizes noted on the drawings, use one piece per location; colour to be as selected by the Departmental Representative from the manufacturers extended range. Steel framing: as specified in Section 05 50 01. Sealant: refer to Section 07 92 00. Adhesives and glues: nationally recognized brands suitable for intended application, water resistant, with acceptable low level emissions as follows: .1 Total VOC concentration less than 0.5 mg/m3/hour. .2 Formaldehyde: must be less than 1 part per billion (1 PPB). .3 4 Phenycyclohexane (4 PCH): must be less than 1 part per billion (1 PPB).
.11
.12
.13
.14 .15 .16
Section 06 40 01 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
Casework. .1 Fabricate caseworks to AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS Custom Grade. .2 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds and rough bucks and sleepers. .1 Board sizes: "Standard" or better grade. .2 Dimension sizes: "Standard" light framing or better grade. .3 Case bodies (ends, divisions and bottoms), including mail slots: .1 Construct generally of solid vertical members of hardwood veneered combination core plywood to exposed and semi exposed locations, with intermediate web frames, and with web frames of continuous stretchers at front and back under counter tops. Dado web frames and fix shelves into vertical members of the case body. Glue members together and sand smooth. .4 Face Frames: .1 Minimum 19 mm in thickness, with members mortised and tenoned or doweled and glued, all joints tight and true. Fully glue face frames and nail to case bodies, with allowance made for scribing where required. .5 Backs: .1 Hardwood veneered combination core plywood to exposed and semi-exposed locations, as indicated on the drawings, rabbeted into exposed ends and securely attached to case bodies. Ensure joints in backs occur only at nailable divisions or exposed backs of partition. Fabricate island or peninsula cases of hardwood veneered combination core plywood as noted on the drawings, 19 mm minimum thickness. Construct counter or desk fronts similarly. .6 Drawers and Door Fronts: .1 19 mm hardwood veneered faced combination core plywood as indicated on the drawings. Press glue faces of plastic laminate faced doors to prevent warpage. Provide solid surface edging to all four edges. .7 Shelving: .1 Hardwood veneered combination core plywood. Provide shelves up to 914 mm in length of not less than 19 mm thickness. Provide shelves 914 mm to 1066 mm of not less than 25 mm thickness. No unsupported shelves over 1066 mm permitted.
Section 06 40 01 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Drawers: .8 .1 Dovetail or lock joint fronts and glued to sides, and dado backs into sides. Construct bottoms of at least 13 mm thick hardwood veneered combination core plywood, ploughed into fronts and sides and securely attached to backs. (Ensure tight fit, use glue blocks if necessary). Fabricate drawer fronts as noted above; sides and backs of 13 mm minimum thickness hardwood veneered combination core plywood. Ensure all exposed edges of inside drawers have hardwood edging to hardwood veneered plywood doors. Install metal extension side guides in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. Neatly fit for smooth operation. .9 Tops: .1 Provide 19 mm thick plywood counter tops and edges with solid surfacing nosings. Ensure that joint between plastic laminate and nosing is a hairline joint, and that the plastic laminate surface is flush with top edge of the nosing. .2 Provide stainless steel tops where indicated.
2.3
FABRICATION
.1
Set nails and countersink screws apply wood filler to indentations, sand smooth and leave ready to receive finish. Shop install cabinet hardware for doors, shelves and drawers. Recess shelf standards unless noted otherwise. Shelving to cabinetwork to be adjustable unless otherwise noted. Provide cut-outs for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures. Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings. Obtain governing dimensions before fabricating items which are to accommodate or abut appliances, equipment and other materials. Ensure adjacent parts of continuous laminate work match in colour and pattern.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
.7
Section 06 40 01 Page 9 2011-05-25
.8
Veneer laminated plastic to core material in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. Ensure core and laminate profiles coincide to provide continuous support and bond over entire surface. Use continuous lengths up to 3000 mm. Keep joints 600 mm from sink cut-outs.
Form shaped profiles and bends as indicated, using postforming grade laminate to laminate manufacturer's instructions. Use straight self edging laminate strip for flatwork to cover exposed edge of core material. Chamfer exposed edges uniformly at approximately 20 degrees. Do not mitre laminate edges. Install grommets to locations indicated, in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.9
.10
.11
2.4
FINISHING
.1
Refer to Section 09 91 23. All hardwood and hardwood veneer to be shop finished including clear finishes and stained finishes, using materials and application methods specified in Section 09 91 23.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Do architectural woodwork to AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, except where specified otherwise. Install prefinished millwork at locations shown on drawings. Position accurately, level, plumb straight. Fasten and anchor millwork securely. Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets. Use draw bolts in countertop joints. Scribe and cut as required to fit abutting walls and to fit properly into recesses and to accommodate piping, columns, fixtures, outlets or other projecting, intersecting or penetrating objects.
.2
.3
.4 .5
Section 06 40 01 Page 10 2011-05-25
.6
At junction of plastic laminate counter back splash and adjacent wall finish, apply small bead of sealant.
Apply water resistant building paper over wood framing members in contact with masonry or cementitious construction. Fit hardware accurately and securely in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Install steel legs to counter tops as detailed, so that they are level and will support all superimposed loading. Fasten to counter tops using security bolts. Site apply laminated plastic to units as indicated. Adhere laminated plastic over entire surface. Make corners with hairline joints. Use full sized laminate sheets. Make joints only where approved. Slightly bevel arises. For site application, offset joints in plastic laminate facing from joints in core. Coordinate installation of light fixtures to cabinet work and millwork with Division 26. Coordinate installation of mechanical and plumbing items in cabinetwork with Division 22. Contractor to install Departmental Representative supplied furniture, cabinets and millwork as indicated. Modify as required for install. Supply shims where needed. Cut holes for plumbing and electrical.
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11 .12
.13
3.2
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Clean millwork and cabinet work, inside cupboards and drawers and outside surfaces. Remove glue from surfaces.
3.3
PROTECTION
.1
Protect millwork and cabinet work from damage until final inspection.
END
BOARD INSULATION
Section 07 21 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA). .1 CSA B149.1-10, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code. .2 CSA B149.2-10, Propane Storage and Handling Code. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CGSB 71-GP-24M-AMEND.-1983, Adhesive, Flexible, for Bonding Cellular Polystyrene Insulation. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC). .1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Thermal Insulation, Polystrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings. .2 CAN/ULC-S704-11, Thermal Insulation Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate, Boards, Faced. .3 CAN/ULC-S604-M91, Standard for Factory-Built Type A Chimneys. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
.3
.4
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOC's insulation products and adhesives. Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.2
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project
.2
.3
BOARD INSULATION
Section 07 21 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Pre-Installation Meetings:(Cont'd) requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION
.1
Extruded polystyrene (XPS): to CAN/ULC-S701. .1 Type: 4. .2 Compressive strength: 240 kPa. .3 Thickness: 50 mm unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. .4 Edges: square. .5 To be used at all below grade locations where not exposed. Extruded polystyrene (XPS): to CAN/ULC-S701. .1 Type: 3. .2 Compressive strength: 138 kPa. .3 Thickness: 50 mm unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. .4 Edges: square. .5 To be used at all above grade locations other than cavity walls. Isocyanurate Insulation: rigid insulation board consisting of a polyisocyanurate foam core bonded chemically in the manufacturing process to glass fibre and other facings, aged RSI value of 1.06 per 25.4 mm thickness, thickness to be 50 mm unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Ensure that insulation is date stamped on date of manufacture and that the insulation is not installed until 3 months after it has been manufactured. To be used in all cavity walls. Insulation Perimeter Foundation Where exposed: conforming to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 4; 50 mm closed
.2
.3
.4
BOARD INSULATION
Section 07 21 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.1 INSULATION (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) cell, extruded polystyrene insulation board, pre-finished with a factory-applied 9 mm thick latex-modified concrete facing. Exposed height not to exceed 600 mm.
2.2
ADHESIVE
.1
Adhesive (for polystyrene): to CGSB 71-GP-24. .1 Type: 1. .2 Class: A. .3 Adhesive must not contain solvents and must be compatible with insulation.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
.1
Insulation clips: impale type, perforated 50 x 50 mm cold rolled carbon steel 0.8 mm thick, adhesive back, spindle of 2.5 mm diameter annealed steel, length to suit insulation, 25 mm diameter washers of self locking type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
WORKMANSHIP
.1 .2
Install insulation after building substrate materials are dry. Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces. Fit insulation tight around electrical boxes, plumbing and heating pipes and ducts, around exterior doors and windows and other protrusions. Keep insulation minimum 75 mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures, and minimum 50 mm from sidewalls of CAN/ULC-S604 type A chimneys and CSA B149.1 and CSA B149.2 type B and L vents. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt joints tightly, offset vertical joints. Use
.3
.4
.5
BOARD INSULATION
Section 07 21 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.2 WORKMANSHIP (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) only insulation boards free from chipped or broken edges. Use largest possible dimensions to reduce number of joints. Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications. Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected and approved by Departmental Representative.
.6 .7
3.3
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine substrates and immediately inform Departmental Representative in writing of defects. Prior to commencement of work ensure: .1 Substrates are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of snow, ice or frost, and clean of dust and debris.
.2
3.4 ABOVE GRADE INSTALLATION
.1
Where not otherwise mechanically fastened, secure all above grade and partially above grade insulation boards with fasteners, anchored to substrates capable of providing specified fastener pull out performance. Do not anchor to sheathing. Mechanically fasten insulation behind metal siding and at all other locations where insulation is installed between Z girt framing or other framing members. Mechanically fasten insulation behind masonry veneer. Install fasteners following fastener manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrate, drill bits, edge distance, installation methods, and ambient and substrate temperature conditions. To cavity wall locations, coordinate installation fastening with masonry ties specified in Section 04 05 19. Supplement masonry ties fastenings with mechanical fasteners to ensure that each board in held in place with minimum 4 fastener (masonry ties or combination of masonry ties and mechanical fasteners). To other exterior locations such as behind metal siding, install insulation over air/vapour barrier membrane and between framing members and securely fasten in place using screw on type
.2
.3
.4
BOARD INSULATION
Section 07 21 13 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.4 ABOVE GRADE INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) fasteners at 400 mm o.c. each way, and not less than 75 mm from all ends and edges. Install high density insulation to locations indicated.
.5
3.5 PERIMETER FOUNDATION INSULATION
.1
Secure minimum 50 mm thick polystyrene insulation or as indicated on drawings to perimeter of foundations by adhering it with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and specifications. Unless indicated otherwise, extend down to 1200 mm below grade. Stagger all vertical joints on insulation except free ends or line of expansion/control joints. Lay out insulation so that ends overlap minimum 100 mm and maximum of 150 mm over line of expansion/contraction joints. Leave overlapping ends of insulation unbonded over line of these joints, allowing insulation to move freely with foundation. Install board to prevent displacement. Protect insulation during backfill operations to prevent damage. Ensure complete coverage in insulation with backfill materials. Ensure that polystyrene can be covered reasonably promptly after installing it.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.6 CAVITY WALL INSTALLATION
.1
Install polyisocyanurate insulation to all cavity walls and elsewhere as indicated above grade. Install to thicknesses as indicated. Cut and fit insulation tightly around masonry veneer ties. Press insulation tightly in place so that it abuts the air/vapour membrane. Mechanically fasten insulation as specified above. At cavity walls, install PVC insulation supports and Vee ties over insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in Section 04 05 19.
.2 .3
.4 .5
BOARD INSULATION
Section 07 21 13 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.6 CAVITY WALL INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) Polyethylene insulation supports and Vee ties for masonry ties are specified in Section 04 05 19.
3.7 ROOF INSTALLATION
.1
3.8
CLEANING
.1
END
BLANKET INSULATION
Section 07 21 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM C665-06, Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. .2 ASTM C612-10, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA-B149.1-10, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code. .2 CAN/CSA-B149.2-05, Propane Storage and Handling Code. Environmental Choice Program (EPC). .1 CCD-016-97, Thermal Insulation. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC). .1 CAN/ULC-S604-91, Type A Chimneys. .2 CAN/ULC-S702-09, Standard for Mineral Fibre Insulation.
.2
.3 .4
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.2
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation
.2
.3
BLANKET INSULATION
Section 07 21 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Pre-installation Meetings:(Cont'd) instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION
.1
Unfaced Batt Insulation: friction fit preformed Type 1, fibrous glass conforming to 2 CAN/ULC-S702, density to be minimum 1.22 kg/m of wall surface to meet all Building Code requirements, formaldehyde free, thermal resistance (RSI) as indicated on the drawings. EcoLogo certified. Sound Attenuation/Fire Blanket, formaldehyde free: conforming to ASTM C665; thickness as indicated; EcoLogo certified. Use in all acoustic and fire rated partitions. Mineral or glass fibre insulation: rock wool or glass fibre, conforming to ASTM C612, approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction for use in walls having a fire rating, EcoLogo certified.
.2
.3
2.2
ACCESSORIES
.1 .2 .3
Staples: to suit application, as recommended by manufacturer. Adhesive: manufacturer's recommended adhesive, compatible with insulation and substrate Tape: as recommended by manufacturer.
BLANKET INSULATION
Section 07 21 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
.1
Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces. Fit insulation closely around electrical boxes, pipes, ducts, frames and other objects in or passing through insulation. Do not compress insulation to fit into spaces. Keep insulation minimum 75 mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures, and minimum 50 mm from sidewalls of CAN/ULC-S604 Type A chimneys and CAN/CGA-B149.1 and CAN/CGA-B149.2 Type B and L vents. Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected and approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3 .4
.5
3.3 INSTALLATION ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION
.1 .2
Install acoustic insulation to partitions as indicated on the drawings. Fill behind electrical outlets boxes and other openings with at least 150 mm lap around perimeter of opening, packed tight in layers (to approximately 50% of nominal thickness). Co operate with general, electrical and mechanical subcontractors to ensure that no back to back openings are formed, whether or not so indicated on the drawings. Openings must be offset at least one stud space. Thickness of sound insulation batts is to be either the full stud depth, with material placed after one wall face has been installed, adhered in place in stud construction using adhesive to hold the material in place to backside of gypsum board.
.3
.4
BLANKET INSULATION
Section 07 21 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.3 INSTALLATION ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION (Cont'd)
.5
Install acoustic insulation batts over tops of walls and elsewhere as indicated, extending minimum 600 mm on from the wall on both sides of walls. Ensure batts are in continuous close contact with each other. Cut and fit batts around hangers and other protrusions. Install fire safing batts over light fixtures and other heat emitting devices. Elsewhere, install acoustic insulation to 300 mm above highest adjacent ceiling.
Comply with manufacturer's directions.
.6
3.4 INSTALLATION FIRE SAFETY INSULATION
.1
Install fire insulation to locations as noted on the drawings, around hot penetrations through the roof and exterior envelope and elsewhere as required. Fire insulation to drywall construction and acoustic ceilings as specified under Sections 09 22 16 and 09 51 13 respectively. Where fire insulation is too be installed to exposed areas, install in a neat and tidy manner to the approval of the Departmental Representative. Install fire safing insulation between flutes of metal deck, above and below deck, to completely fill voids at heads of fire rated walls to underside of structure. Completely fill voids with fire insulation.
.2
.3
3.5
CLEANING
.1
END
SPRAYED INSULATION POLYURETHANE FOAM
Sect 07 21 29.03 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1 .2
Canadian Urethane Foam Contractors' Association Inc. (CUFCA) Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S101-07, Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .2 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. .3 CAN/ULC-S705.1-01, Standard for Thermal Insulation - Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Material Specification. .4 CAN/ULC-S705.2-05, Standard for Thermal Insulation - Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Application.
.3
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 81 01. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Test reports: submit certified test reports for insulation from approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Submit test reports in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 for fire endurance and CAN/ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics. .3 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures. .4 Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to manufacturer's written reports within 3 days of
.3
Sect 07 21 29.03 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Quality assurance submittals:(Cont'd) .4 Manufacturer's Field Reports:(Cont'd) review, verifying compliance of Work, as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
.1 .2
Applicators to conform to CUFCA Quality Assurance Program. Qualifications: .1 Installer: person specializing in sprayed insulation installations with 5 years documented experience, approved by manufacturer. .2 Manufacturer: company with minimum 5 years experience in producing of material used for work required for this project, with sufficient production capacity to produce and deliver required units without causing delay in work. Mock-up: .1 Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .2 Construct mock-up 3 m length minimum, of spray in place urethane foam insulation at roof/wall junctions including one inside corner and one outside corner. Mock-up may be part of finished work. .3 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with sprayed insulation work. Health and Safety Requirements: worker protection: .1 Protect workers as recommended by CAN/ULC-S705.2 and manufacturer's recommendations.
.3
.4
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Sect 07 21 29.03 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
.1 .2
Ventilate area in accordance with Section 01 51 00. Ventilate area to receive insulation by introducing fresh air and exhausting air continuously during and 24 hour after application to maintain non-toxic, unpolluted, safe working conditions. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray and noxious vapours from contaminating air beyond application area. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting of insulation materials. Apply insulation only when surfaces and ambient temperatures are within manufacturers' prescribed limits.
.3
.4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Insulation: spray polyurethane to CAN/ULC-S705.1. Foam-in-Place Insulation: one component rigid urethane foam, one of the following .1 Acceptable material: .1 "Versi-Tite" as manufactured by RHH Foam Systems Inc. .2 "Hilti Foam CF126". .3 "EnerFoam" as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company. .4 "Handi Foam" as manufactured by Fomo Products Inc. Primers: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for surface conditions.
.3
Sect 07 21 29.03 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION/ AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
Clean spaces which are to receive insulation, of dirt, dust, grease, loose material or other foreign matter which may inhibit adhesion.
.2
Provide sufficient ventilation during and until insulation has cured, to ensure safe working conditions. Introduce fresh air and exhaust air continuously during the 24 hour period after application to maintain non toxic, unpolluted, safe working conditions. Foam-in-place isulation: .1 Prior to application, slightly moisten surfaces to which foam in place insulation is being applied, to accelerate curing. .2 Temporarily brace door and window frames as may be required to prevent possible bowing of frames due to over expansion of the foam in place insulation. Take all precautions required to ensure that door frames are not bowed out, to restrict operation of operable doors.
.3
3.3
APPLICATION
.1
Apply insulation to clean surfaces in accordance with CAN/ULC-S705.2 and manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply sprayed on insulation in sufficient amount to completely seal joints between exterior walls and underside of roof decking, to produce a complete and continuous air seal. Spray ends of flutes of metal deck prior to erection or assembly of building envelope. Spray edges of metal decking after erection and assembly of building envelope. Apply sprayed on insulation in sufficient amount to completely seal joints between exterior envelope construction and penetrations through the exterior envelope, where the gap
.2
.3
.4
Sect 07 21 29.03 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.3 APPLICATION (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) between exterior envelope and penetration exceeds 38 mm. Install sprayed on insulation to produce a compete and continuous air seal around such penetrations through the exterior envelope. For all joints less than 38 mm in width, use foam-in-place insulation. Where foam-in-place insulation is used to maintain continuity of thermal barrier and air barrier, around door frames and other protrusions through the exterior envelope, ensure that the foam in place insulation is installed on the exterior side of the air barrier membrane.
.5
3.4 INSTALLATION FOAM-IN-PLACE INSULATION AROUND HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES, WINDOW FRAMES AND DETENTION FRAMES
.1
Fill exterior hollow metal door frames 75% full with foam-in-place insulation prior to installation of frames. Fill the remainder of the frame after installation, through the gap between the frame and the wall construction. Apply foam-in-place insulation around entire perimeter of new window frames to exterior side of the air/vapour barrier membrane, to maintain continuity of the thermal barrier.
.2
3.5 INSTALLATION AROUND PROTRUSIONS THROUGH AIR SEAL
.1
Install foam-in-place insulation around all protrusions through the existing exterior envelope, including mechanical and electrical protrusions and elsewhere as required to achieve and maintain continuity of air/vapour seal. To penetrations where the gap around protrusion exceeds 38 mm in width, use spray applied urethane insulation. Install spray applied urethane insulation to junctions of exterior roof and wall assemblies.
.2
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Sect 07 21 29.03 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.7
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Cut back excess foam-in-place insulation once cured, flush with surrounding surfaces, or recess back for application of sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
.3
END
AIR BARRIERS
Sect 07 27 00.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/ CGSB-19.13M-M87, Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric Chemical Curing. .2 CAN/ CGSB-19.24M-M90, Multi-Component, Chemical Curing Sealing Compound. .3 CGSB 19-GP-14M-84, Sealing Compound, One Component, Butyl-Polyisobutylene Polymer Base, Solvent Curing. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM): .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010. Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
.2
.3 .4
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Submit shop drawings in accordance with 01 33 00. Provide drawings of special joint conditions. Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures.
.3
.4
.1
Perform Work in accordance with Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for materials and installation. Perform Work in accordance with National Air Barrier Association Professional Contractor Quality Assurance Program and requirements for materials and installation.
.2
AIR BARRIERS
Sect 07 27 00.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Maintain one copy of documents on site.
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience with installation of air/vapour barrier systems. Completed installation must be approved by the material manufacturer. Applicator: Company who is currently licensed by National Air Barrier Association or certifying organization must maintain their license throughout the duration of the project.
.2
1.5
MOCK-UP
.1 .2
Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Construct typical exterior wall panel, complete with tie-in to new window and tie-in to existing adjacent air/vapour barrier and incorporating junction with roof system, illustrating materials interface and seals. Locate where directed by Departmental Representative. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with air/vapour barrier Work.
.3 .4 .5
1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
.1
Convene one week prior to commencing Work of this section.
1.7 DELIEVRY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 .2
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
AIR BARRIERS
Sect 07 27 00.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.7 DELIEVRY, STORAGE AND HANDLING (Cont'd)
.3
Avoid spillage. Immediately notify Departmental Representative if spillage occurs and start clean up procedures.
Clean spills and leave area as it was prior to spill.
.4
.1 .2 .3
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
1.9 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
Install solvent curing sealants and vapour release adhesive materials in open spaces with ventilation. Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by materials manufactures before, during and after installation.
.2 .3
1.10
SEQUENCING
.1
Sequence work to permit installation of materials in conjunction with related materials and seals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
.1
Sheet Seal: Self Adhesive bitumen laminated to high density polyethylene film, nominal total thickness of 1 mm. .1 Only one type is to be used throughout the project. Sheet Seal (Alternative): Thermofusable elastomeric bituminous membrane reinforced with a non woven polyester, nominal total thickness of 1 mm. .1 Only one type is to be used throughout the project.
.2
AIR BARRIERS
Sect 07 27 00.01 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS (Cont'd)
.3
Liquid Seal: Synthetic rubber, trowel applied, nominal total thickness of 2 mm.
2.2
SEALANTS
.1 .2 .3
Sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00. Rubber asphalt sealant: Conforming to CAN/CGSB-37.29. Primer: bituminous primer, as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
.1 .2
Thinner and cleaneR: as recommended by sheet material manufacturer. Sheet metal membrane support: Z275 designation galvanized sheet metal commercial quality conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, 0.91 mm (20 gauge) thickness. Sheet metal air/vapour barrier tie-ins to aluminum windows: as specified in Section 08 50 50. Battens: channels formed of 1.2 mm base metal thickness, Z275 designation galvanized sheet steel, commercial quality conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, 19 mm wide with 9.5 mm legs. Mechanical Fasteners: galvanized flat head screws, of type and size suitable for securing metal battens to substrate through air/vapour barrier and gypsum sheathing and into exterior wind bearing steel studs or into concrete or concrete block backup minimum 38 mm.
.3
.4
.5
2.4 FABRICATION SHEET METAL SUPPORTS
.1
Brake form sheet metal to permit installation using self tapping, self drilling screws or drilled anchors. Make provisions in air/vapour barrier design to accommodate movement resulting from thermal change and from structural deflection. Form 13 mm hem on sheet metal edges overlapped air/vapour barrier membrane, membrane flashing and waterproof membrane.
.2
.3
AIR BARRIERS
Sect 07 27 00.01 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.4 FABRICATION SHEET METAL SUPPORTS (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.4
Cut, fit trim and form metal air/vapour barrier supports as required to accommodate conflicting framing connections.
.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
.1 .2
Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept work of this section. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, sound, smooth, continuous and comply with air barrier manufacturer's requirements. Report unsatisfactory conditions to Departmental Representative in writing. Do not start work until deficiencies have been corrected. .1 Beginning of Work implies acceptance of conditions.
.3 .4
3.3
PREPARATION
.1 .2
Remove loose or foreign matter, which might impair adhesion of materials. Ensure all substrates are clean of oil or excess dust; masonry joints struck flush, and open joints filled; and concrete surfaces free of large voids, spalled areas or sharp protrusions. Ensure all substrates are free of surface moisture prior to application of self-adhesive membrane and primer. Ensure metal closures are free of sharp edges and burrs. Prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive and sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3
.4 .5
AIR BARRIERS
Sect 07 27 00.01 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.4 INSTALLATION METAL AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER BACK-UP
.1
Prior to installation, apply a heavy protective coating of alkali resistant bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer, to concealed surfaces of galvanized sheet steel, which come in direct contact with structural steel, dissimilar metals, concrete and masonry. Supply and install sheet metal membrane support to all locations where no other substrate occurs to support the membrane, including at all locations of through wall membrane flashing at cavities; coordinate with Section 04 20 00. Form return flanges or provide suitable angles, and fasten to adjacent substrates to prevent deflection movement. Overlap metal back-up with adjoining substrates and securely attach with fasteners appropriate for the substrate encountered. Where metal back up is used to span deflection joints or areas where movement is anticipated between dissimilar materials, fasten metal on one side only to allow for movement. Provide continuity of air/vapour barrier with adjacent air/vapour barrier systems. Gun apply a continuous 6 mm bead of sealant at all joints and junctions with adjacent construction. Liberally butter screws fastenings with sealant. Attach sheet metal membrane supports with screws at 300 mm o.c.
.2
.3
.4
3.5
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Prime the wall and other surfaces using primer recommended by membrane manufacturer. Before installing membrane to substrate in final position, allow the membrane to relax. Position membrane without stretching. Install self adhered membrane to manufacturer's directions. Apply a bead of sealant along edge of lower leaf of lap, if temperature or other conditions prevent satisfactory seal to the poly sheet surface. Apply heavy pressure to membrane at top and bottom terminations of each sheet, using the back of a utility knife, to assure positive adhesion at the edge. Apply pressure over entire area, using small roller.
.4
.5
AIR BARRIERS
Sect 07 27 00.01 Page 7 2011-05-25
.6 .7
All side laps to be minimum 65 mm and all end laps to be 150 mm minimum. Carefully plan the installation in advance to avoid excessive layering of the membrane at laps and change in direction bends that will compromise the proper installation of later materials and components. Offset laps so as not to thicken membrane. Completely adhere the entire membrane to the substrate after application of primer, and roll with a weighted roller, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Install membrane to achieve smooth wrinkle free surfaces, completely bonded to the substrate, without air entrapment. Ensure complete coverage of (and adhesion to) all substrates to receive air/vapour barrier membrane, including all wall protrusions. Ensure co operation of other trades to obtain continuity of the membrane. Notch at ties, and seal around ties with sealant. Apply membrane so the horizontal joints overlap with the upper sheet over the lower sheet, shingle style. Inspect membrane thoroughly before covering and immediately make any corrections or modifications required. Misaligned or inadequately lapped seams, punctures, fishmouths or other damage must be repaired with patch of membrane extending minimum 150 mm in all directions from edge of damaged area. Seal all edges of the patch with mastic. Slit fishmouths prior to repair with a membrane patch. Where membrane is not otherwise mechanically held in place, fasten membrane to the substrate with vertical battens spaced 600 mm maximum centres. Place additional battens adjacent to openings, edges, and corners. Fasten battens through the membrane to the substrate at 300 mm centres, with the legs facing out. Bend up ends of battens and file smooth so that thermal movement will not cause end of batten to dig into membrane. Use battens in lengths not exceeding 1200 mm, and leave 25 mm gaps between ends of battens on the same alignment.
.8
.9
.10 .11
.12
.13
.14
AIR BARRIERS
Sect 07 27 00.01 Page 8 2011-05-25
.15
Dress the membrane around corners. At all inside and outside corners, use 300 mm wide reinforcing piece of membrane strip, centred on corner, prior to installation of membrane. Cut, lap, and weld double return corners and other complicated changes of direction.
Repair or replace existing air/vapour barrier membrane where existing membrane has been damaged due demolition. Tie new air/vapour barrier membrane to existing overlapping minimum 150 mm or more as may be required to achieve a continuous air/vapour barrier. At perimeters, overlap roofing, waterproofing, etc., seal air/vapour barrier membrane to adjacent membranes, including roof vapour retarders. Overlap end joints minimum 100 mm and seal together to achieve a complete air seal. Ensure that a complete seal is obtained at overlap situations, and that the work is carried out in accordance with the agreements with other trades, made at the site meeting. Position lap seal over firm bearing. At junctions between windows and air/vapour barrier, mechanically fasten and continuously seal air/vapour barrier into frame as specified in Section 08 51 13, form a complete and continuous air/vapour seal between the windows and the air barrier. Coordinate with Section 08 51 13. At junctions between air/vapour barrier and hollow metal door frames and louvres, apply a 300 mm wide strip of membrane, sealed to the inside of the frame, prior to application of foam in place insulation. Do not remove release on unadhered portion of strip until the door frame is in place and the adjacent air/vapour barrier membrane is in place and ready to be sealed. Seal to adjacent membranes to achieve a continuous and complete air/vapour barrier. At all locations between different material, at edges of each floor slabs and other areas where deflection is anticipated and where concrete frame shrinkage, concrete block or framing shrinkage is anticipated, install air/vapour barrier with a small loop to accommodate minimum 25 mm deflection.
.16
.17
.18
.19 .20
.21
.22
AIR BARRIERS
Sect 07 27 00.01 Page 9 2011-05-25
.23
Inspect air/vapour barrier for continuity. Pay particular attention to change in direction bends, such as at windows head, sill and jamb intersections. Repair tears, punctures, rips, with pieces of membrane.
3.6
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
3.7 PROTECTION OF WORK
.1 .2 .3
Protect finished work in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Do not permit adjacent work to damage work of this section. Ensure finished work is protected from climatic conditions.
END
PREFORMED METAL SIDING
Section 07 46 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-93.4-92, Galvanized Steel and Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Siding Soffits and Fascia, Prefinished, Residential. .2 CGSB 93.5-92, Installation of Metal Residential Siding, Soffits and Fascia.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate VOC's for caulking materials during application and curing. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate dimensions, profiles, attachment methods, schedule of wall elevations, trim and closure pieces, soffits, metal furring, and related work. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate dimensions, profiles, attachment methods, schedule of wall elevations, trim and closure pieces, soffits, metal furring, and related work. Manufacturer's Instructios: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation
.2
.3
Section 07 46 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Pre-Installation Meetings:(Cont'd) instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.1
Divert used metal cut-offs from landfill by disposal into the on-site metals recycling bin removed for disposal at the nearest metal recycling facility. Divert reusable materials for reuse at nearest used building materials facility. Divert unused caulking, sealants, and adhesive materials from landfill through disposal at hazardous material depot. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and with Waste Reduction Workplan.
.2 .3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL CLADDING AND COMPONENTS
.1
Strip siding: to CAN/CGSB-93.4, vertical, Class plain. .1 Finish coating: Class F1S. .2 Colour: selected by Departmental Representative. .3 Gloss: medium. .4 Thickness: 0.61 mm base metal thickness. .5 Profile: as indicated on the Drawings.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
.1
Exposed trim: inside corners, outside corners, cap strip, drip cap, colour and gloss as cladding. Z bar furring: manufacturer's standard Z bars, minimum 1.2 mm base metal thickness or as otherwise required to withstand all superimposed loading, widths as indicated, with Z275 Zinc coating. Furring Channels: hat-shaped, from 0.840 mm core thickness hot dipped galvanized sheet steel 22 mm deep x 32 mm wide face. Angles and Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips and angles, thickness as required. All to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
.2
.3
.4
Section 07 46 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 ACCESSORIES (Cont'd)
.5
Closures: Metal or composition closures to manufacturer's standards. Composite closures of closed cell neoprene.
Board Insulation: as specified in Section 07 21 13. Sealants: sealant Type 1 as specified in 07 92 00.
.6 .7
2.3
FASTENERS
.1
Fasteners: Use manufacturer's recommended fasteners to meet the load requirements. All fasteners to be concealed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install cladding in accordance with CAN/CGSB-93.5, and manufacturer's written instructions. Install continuous starter strips, inside and outside corners and flashings as indicated. Install outside corners, fillers and closure strips with carefully formed and profiled work. Maintain joints in exterior cladding, true to line, tight fitting, hairline joints. Attach components in manner not restricting thermal movement. Seal junctions with adjoining work with sealant. Do work in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers. END
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
Section 07 52 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM C1396/C1396M-09a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. .2 ASTM D41/D41M-11, Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. .3 ASTM D312-00(2006), Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. .4 ASTM D2178-04, Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. .5 ASTM D6162-00a(2008), Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fibre Reinforcements. .6 ASTM D6163-00(2008), Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fibre Reinforcements. .7 ASTM D6164/D6164M-11, Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 37-GP-9Ma-83, Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing. .2 CGSB 37-GP-56M-AMEND.-85, Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for Roofing. .3 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound. .4 CAN/CGSB-51.33-M89, Vapour Barrier Sheet, Excluding Polyethylene, for Use in Building Construction. Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) .1 CRCA Roofing Specifications Manual-1997. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-A123.3-05(R2010), Asphalt Saturated Organic Roofing Felt. .2 CAN/CSA-A123.4-04(R2008), Asphalt for Constructing Built-Up Roof Coverings and Waterproofing Systems. .3 CAN/CSA-A231.1-06/A231.2-06, Precast Concrete Paving Slabs/ Precast Concrete Pavers, Includes Update No.1(2009).
.2
.3 .4
Section 07 52 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.5
Department of Justice Canada (Jus). .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA).
Factory Mutual (FM Global) .1 FM Approvals - Roofing Products. Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Transport Canada (TC). .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, recent edition (TDGA). Underwriters Laboratories' of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. .2 CAN/ULC-S704-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards, Faced.
.6 .7
.8
.9
.1
Compatibility between components of roofing system is essential. Provide written declaration to Departmental Representative stating that materials and components, as assembled in system, meet this requirement.
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide two copies of most recent technical roofing components data sheets describing materials' physical properties and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Provide two copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06, and indicate VOC content for: .1 Primers. .2 Asphalt. .3 Sealers. .4 Filter fabric. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Indicate plan of tapered insulation layout. Indicate slope, maximum and minimum
.3
Section 07 52 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) thicknesses, board size, layout, and numbering. Indicate flashing and control joint details.
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products of this section with minimum three years documented experience. Applicator: Minimum five years documented experience and approved by the membrane manufacturer for application of its products. Applicators shall have successfully completed the membrane manufacturer's applicator training program and the Canadian Roofing Contractors Association Torch Safety Training Program. Torch mechanics shall be registered with CRCA and shall present an CRCA training Certificate verifying competency prior to operating torching equipment at the work site. .1 Use only trained mechanics to apply all membranes. .2 Maintain a ratio of maximum three (3) non journeyman for each journeyman roofer. .3 Use only factory trained roofers for torch applying membrane stripping, cap sheet and cap sheet stripping.
.2
.3
.1 .2
Submit laboratory test reports in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Submit laboratory test reports certifying compliance of bitumens and roofing felts and membranes with specification requirements. Convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning waterproofing Work, with roofing contractor's representative and Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06 to: .1 Verify project requirements. .2 Review installation and substrate conditions. .3 Co-ordination with other building subtrades. .4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
.3
Section 07 52 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 HEALTH AND SAFETY
.1
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 .2
Provide and maintain dry, off ground weatherproof storage. Store rolls of felt and membrane in upright position. Store membrane rolls with selvage edge up. Remove only in quantities required for same day use. Place plywood runways over completed Work to enable movement of material and other traffic. Store sealants at +5 degrees C minimum. Store insulation protected from daylight and weather and deleterious materials. Handle roofing materials in accordance with manufacturer's written directives, to prevent damage or loss of performance.
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7
1.8
FIRE SAFETY
.1 .2
Comply with all CRCA torch safety procedures. Inform the Departmental Representative of unforeseen fire hazards and obtain instructions before proceeding or continuing with torch application. Keep suitable fire extinguishers within 10 metres of each torch in use and at kettles and tankers in use. Do not use torches near roof mounted air intakes, wall cladding, combustible building paper and combustible finishes. Take additional precautions against fire as needed to provide adequate fire safety. Maintain fire watch for 1 hour after each day's roofing operations cease, and during lunch breaks and coffee breaks. All fire watch duties to be performed by a qualified applicator who has the qualifications specified above. Use infrared gun to check for fire and combustion. Provide a checklist of all locations
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
Section 07 52 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.8 FIRE SAFETY (Cont'd)
.7
(Cont'd) where readings are taken, and what the reading are. Submit completed log to the Departmental Representative. Follow all other procedures regarding fire watch, as recommended by CRCA.
.8
.1 .2 .3
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard and packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal and Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. Clearly label location of salvaged material's storage areas and provide barriers and security devices. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Unused adhesive, sealant and asphalt materials must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. Dispose of unused adhesive, sealant and asphalt materials at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8 .9
.10
.11
Section 07 52 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
.12
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
.1
Ambient Conditions .1 Do not install roofing when temperature remains below -18C for torch application, or -10C, or to manufacturers' recommendations for mop application. .2 Minimum temperature for solvent-based adhesive is -5 degrees C. Install roofing on dry deck, free of snow and ice, use only dry materials and apply only during weather that will not introduce moisture into roofing system.
.2
1.11
WARRANTY
.1
Provide a CRCA Certificate of Assurance, issued jointly between CRCA and the Roofing Subcontractor and in the name of the Her Majesty the Queen in the Right of Canada, stating that the roofing system, including flashing, will remain weather tight for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of Interim Acceptance of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DECK COVERING
.1
Gypsum board sheathing: to ASTM C1396/C1396M, 12.7 mm thick.
2.2
DECK PRIMER
.1
Asphalt primer: to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma.
2.3 VAPOUR RETARDER
.1
Two-ply bituminous membrane consisting of: .1 No. 15 asphalt saturated organic roofing felts to CAN/CSA-A123.3. .2 Type 2 asphalt to CAN/CSA-A123.4. Provide equiviscous temperature (EVT), finished blowing temperature (FBT) and flash point (FP) temperature.
Section 07 52 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.4
MEMBRANE
.1
Base sheet except to plywood and wood substrates: to CGSB 37-GP-56M Amend., Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, 2.2 mm minimum thickness, 2 non-woven fibreglass reinforcement or 180 g/m non-woven polyester reinforcement. .1 Type 2, fully adhered. .2 Class C - plain surfaced. .3 Grade 1 - standard duty service. .4 Top and bottom surfaces: polyethylene/sanded. Cap sheet: to CGSB 37-GP-56M Amend., Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, minimum 3 mm thick excluding surfacing 2 thickness, prefabricated sheet, minimum 250 g/m non woven polyester reinforcement. .1 Type 1, fully adhered. .2 Class A - slate granule surfaced. .3 Grade 2 - heavy duty service. .4 Bottom surface: polyethylene. .5 Top surface slate granules, colour to be as selected by the Departmental Representative from the manufacturer's standard range. Base sheet Flashing: to CGSB 37-GP-56M Amend., Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, 3 mm to 3.2 mm thick, non- woven polyester or woven glass fibre scrim reinforcement. .1 Type 2, fully adhered. .2 Class C - plain surfaced. .3 Grade 2 - heavy duty service. .4 Top and bottom surfaces: polyethylene/polyethylene. Base sheet Flashing (to wood substrates): to CGSB 37-GP-56M Amend., Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, 2.8 mm to 3 mm, heavy duty non-woven polyester or woven glass fibre scrim reinforcement. .1 Type 2, self adhering adhered. .2 Class C - plain surfaced. .3 Grade 2 - heavy duty service. .4 Top and bottom surfaces: polyethylene/self adhering with release paper. Cap sheet flashing: same as cap sheet membrane specified in 2.4.2. Scupper2 pavers: aluminum faced SBS membrane, 250 g/m polyester reinforcing. Fireguard Tape: to meet CRCA requirements, 200 mm wide self adhesive fire stop membrane
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7
Section 07 52 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.4 MEMBRANE (Cont'd)
.7
Fireguard Tape:(Cont'd) tape composed of a glass fleece reinforcement and SBS modified bitumen. Fireguard is a safety precaution and must be installed prior to installation of base sheets or stripping plies; apply and bond at roof junctions by removing the release film.
2.5
ADHESIVE
.1
Adhesive for securing overlay board and insulation: asphalt extended vulcanized adhesive, two component unit, consisting of two liquids mixed on site to produce pourable adhesive.
2.6
OVERLAY BOARD
.1
Roof insulation overlay: asphalt impregnated rigid wood fibreboard, Type 1, roof board; 610 mm x 1220 mm board size, 2 layers 12.7 mm thick (25.4 mm total) with joints staggered over polyisocyanurate insulation and over sloped expanded polystyrene insulation, as required for a substrate to roof membrane.
2.7
BITUMEN
.1
Asphalt: to CAN/CSA-A123.4, Type 3.
2.8
INSULATION
.1
Isocyanurate insulation (to conventional roofs): conforming to CAN/ULC-S704, rigid roof insulation board consisting of a polyisocyanurate foam core bonded chemically in the manufacturing process to glass fibre and other facings which are compatible to roofing membrane, aged RSI value of 1.06 per 25.4 mm thickness; thickness as indicated. Install in two layers with one layer of 25 mm thick insulation and 1 layer of 38 mm thick insulation to achieve a total thickness of 62 mm. Ensure that insulation is date stamped on date of manufacture, and that the insulation is not installed until 3 months after it has been manufactured. Tapered rigid polystyrene insulation: conforming to CAN/ULC-S701, taper sloped to achieve roof backslopes as indicated, square edges, polystyrene board Type 1, Class B. Bead board, density approximately 16 kg/m3.
.2
Section 07 52 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.9
SEALERS
.1 .2
Surface conditioner: cutback asphalt to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma. Sealant: multi-component, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Type 2 non-sag, Class B non-glazing, or one component, elastomeric, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Ecologo certified. Sealant primer: type recommended by sealant manufacturer for applicable substrate.
.3
2.10
CARPENTRY
.1
2.11
CANT STRIPS
.1
Refer to Section 06 10 12 for carpentry in connection with roofing.
2.12
FASTENERS
.1 .2
Covering to steel deck: No. 10 flat head, self tapping, Type A or AB, cadmium plated screws. Insulation to deck: fasteners and plates must meet Factory Mutual 4470 Standard for wind uplift and corrosion resistance.
2.13 CURBS AND FLASHING PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Coordinate and provide all curb and flashing requirements from Mechanical and Electrical.
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
.1
Do examination, preparation and roofing Work in accordance with Roofing Manufacturer's Specification Manual, CRCA Roofing Specification Manual, and Provincial/Territorial Roofing Association Manual, particularly for fire safety precautions, and to FM and ULC guidelines. Do priming for asphalt roofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The interface of the walls and roof assemblies will be fitted with durable rigid material providing connection point for continuity of air barrier.
.2 .3
Section 07 52 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.1 WORKMANSHIP (Cont'd)
.4
Assembly, component and material connections will be made in consideration of appropriate design loads.
3.2 EXAMINATION OF ROOF DECKS
.1
Examine roof decks and immediately inform Departmental Representative in writing of defects. Prior to beginning of work ensure: .1 Decks are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of snow, ice or frost, and swept clean of dust and debris. .2 Curbs have been built. .3 Roof drains have been installed at proper elevations relative to finished roof surface. .4 Plywood and lumber nailer plates have been installed to deck, walls and parapets as indicated. Do not install roofing materials during rain or snowfall.
.2
.3
3.3 PROTECTION OF IN-PLACE CONDITIONS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Cover walls and adjacent work where materials hoisted or used. Use warning signs and barriers. Maintain in good order until completion of Work. Clean off drips and smears of bituminous material immediately. Dispose of rain water off roof and away from face of building until roof drains or hoppers installed and connected. Protect roof from traffic and damage. Comply with precautions deemed necessary by Departmental Representative. At end of each day's work or when stoppage occurs due to inclement weather, provide protection for completed Work and materials out of storage. Metal connectors and decking will be treated with rust proofing or galvanization.
.5
.6
.7
Section 07 52 00 Page 11 2011-05-25
3.4
DECK COVERING
.1 .2
Mechanically fasten gypsum sheathing to steel deck with screws spaced 400 mm o.c. each way. Place with long axis of each sheet transverse to steel deck ribs, with end joints staggered and fully supported on ribs.
3.5
FIREGUARD TAPE
.1
Install fireguard tape to all joints in sheathing, including gypsum board sheathing, and plywood sheathing at parapets, upstands and the like, at joints between walls, parapets and the like and roof insulation just prior to application of base sheet, and at all other locations as required by CRCA. Install over insulation and lapping up upstands, prior to application of base sheet membrane. Tape all joints between sheathing pieces, and joints between sheathing and blocking, curbing, wall and parapet junctions. Apply tape by folding length in half, remove release sheet and tightly fit into junctions. Install fireguard tape at all substrate openings, gaps, and voids to block flame from entering through these areas when torch applying membrane and in strict accordance with CRCA requirements. Apply tape to joints which would permit asphalt drippage.
.2
.3
.4
3.6 VAPOUR RETARDER
.1 .2
Embed two piles of felts organic in hot bitumen 2 spread at rate of 1 kg/m for organic asphalt. Provide minimum 50 mm sidelaps and 150 mm end laps; completely seal side and end laps with hot asphalt to provide a continuous and complete vapour retarder. Stagger laps of the base sheet and top sheet of vapour retarder 380 mm. Take care not to damage vapour retarder during insulation installation. Turn vapour retarder a minimum of 200 mm up walls and vertical surfaces.
.3 .4 .5
Section 07 52 00 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.6 VAPOUR RETARDER (Cont'd)
.6
Wrap vapour retarder around edges of roof insulation in strict accordance with CRCA recommendations.
Seal to adjacent materials and vapour retarders to form a complete and continuous. Vapour seal. Coordinate sealing of air/vapour barrier specified in Section 07 27 00.01 to work of this section. Ensure that air/vapour barrier overlaps roofing vapour retarder minimum 200 mm and is completely and continuously sealed to maintain a complete and continuous air/vapour seal. Coordinate and sequence work of air/vapour barrier specified in Section 07 27 00.01.
.7 .8
3.7 APPLYING INSULATION OVER VAPOUR RETARDER
.1
2 Apply a uniform 1.2 kg/m coat of hot asphalt to top of vapour retardant sheet and immediately embed tapered insulation boards to back slopes, and carefully bringing each board into moderately tight contact with adjacent boards. Place sheets with joints in line each way. Immediately walk in the boards in order to ensure they are set into the asphalt.
.2
Install sloped polystyrene insulation over vapour retarder to provide positive slopes to drains in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. Follow numbering of insulation boards corresponding to the manufacturer's shop drawing for location of boards. Apply hot asphalt to underside of flat polyisocyanurate insulation at the rate of 1.2 kg/m2 and place onto sloped polystyrene insulation board surface (mop and flop method). To locations where there is no sloped insulation, apply hot asphalt over the vapour retarder at the rate of 1.2 kg/m2 and embed the layer of 50 mm thick flat polyisocyanurate insulation. Place sheets with joints in line each way. Stagger joints of second layer with those of the first layer of taped polystyrene insulation. Immediately walk in the boards in order to ensure they are set into the asphalt. Ensure the insulation is embedded completely in the hot asphalt and that burn out of the insulation does not occur.
.3
.4
Section 07 52 00 Page 13 2011-05-25
3.7 APPLYING INSULATION OVER VAPOUR RETARDER (Cont'd)
.5
Ensure that asphalt has sufficiently cooled to ensure that insulation burn out does not occur, but not cooled to the point where adhesion will be adversely affected.
Take care to ensure that no voids occur between the vapour retarder and the underside of the insulation or between pieces of insulation. Trim insulation to provide plain butt joints adjacent the perimeter of the building, at cants, roof edges, parapets, curbs and where the insulation butts a vertical surface passing through the roof. Fill all joints between 10 mm and 19 mm wide with batt insulation; fill wider joints with isocyanurate insulation. Overlay insulation with a layer of fibreboard by applying hot asphalt at the rate of 1.5 kg/m2, to the underside and placed onto the insulation surface. Ensure that the temperature of the hot asphalt does not exceed 121C to prevent fibreboard from absorbing the asphalt or causing burnout of the insulation. Stagger joints of overlay with those of the insulation. Immediately walk in the boards in order to ensure they are set into the asphalt. Lay Fibreboard in parallel courses with the end joints staggered a minimum of 300 mm. Apply wood fibre board protection board, butt ends and edges tightly together ensuring complete coverage of insulation and providing a sound uniform surface for membrane application. Use the same care in installation as specified for insulation. Immediately "walk in" each layer of insulation and fibre board in order to ensure they are set into the asphalt. Cover insulation and fibre board with roofing membrane as soon as possible after installation. Do not allow the insulation and fibre board to become wet. Replace all wet insulation and fibre board with new dry insulation and fibre board.
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
Section 07 52 00 Page 14 2011-05-25
3.8 INSTALLATION ROOFING MEMBRANE GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Install two ply prefabricated and elastomeric bituminous membrane to roof surfaces. Provide a smooth applications, free of air pockets, wrinkles fishmouths, tears or bleedout. Seal around all protrusions through the roof membrane including in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to form a waterproof seal.
3.9 INSTALLATION BASE MEMBRANE
.1
Over the fibre board surface, apply hot bitumen 2 at the minimum rate of 2.15 kg/m with mop, and install membrane base sheet embedded immediately in the hot asphalt. Install base sheet in continuous hot asphalt at a temperature not lower than 200C nor higher than manufacturers maximum for correct adhesion. Side laps to be lapped no less than 65 mm and end laps to be no less than 150 mm and staggered. Stagger end laps minimum 1800 mm. Terminate base sheet at top of cant strip, or minimum 200 mm up vertical surfaces (200 mm higher than top of cant strip). Ensure the base membrane is fully bonded when installed. Ensure that the top surface of the base membrane is free of Type 3 asphalt on its surface, which is detrimental to the homogeneous bonding of the base membrane to stripping and cap sheet. Surface asphalt on the base membrane shall be considered a deficiency, when quantities are either excessive or demonstrate a lack of care and attention to prevent over mopping and the method of correction shall be to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative. Avoid tracking of asphalt on the surface of the membrane due to wheeled and manpower traffic, which would damage the membrane or place asphalt on the membrane surface. Do not adhere base sheet to cant strips. Obtain review of the base membrane by the roofing inspector prior to placement of any cap sheet.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8 .9
Section 07 52 00 Page 15 2011-05-25
3.10 INSTALLATION - BASE STRIPPING
.1
Apply torched on base stripping in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to all substrates except wood and plywood. Apply self adhered membrane stripping to all wood and plywood substrates. To wood surfaces: Before primer application, remove thin poly film on surface of base sheet with a light torch to prepare surface for overlap zone of self adhesive membrane. Apply base sheet flashing only once primer coat is dry. Install fireguard tape in strict accordance with CRCA requirements. Install base sheet flashing in metre widths and lapped 100 mm onto roof base sheet. Overlap side laps by 75 mm. Stagger side laps by at least 100 mm from base sheet overlaps on roof to avoid excessive layering. Continue length of membrane to run up and over the top of parapet or curb and down opposite vertical face. Partially remove release sheet from underside and adhere at vertical junction with membrane pressed tightly into angle changes. Continue to remove release sheet while smoothing membrane onto substrate and ensuring uniform contact. Use a roller over entire surface to complete application. Nail membrane to substrate with round top nails according to CRCA guidelines. Install membrane gussets at all inside and outside corners. Heat membrane surface and press gusset into place. Torch and trowel membrane edges on vertical and horizontal overlaps to complete waterproof seal.
.2
.3 .4 .5 .6
.7
.8
.9 .10
.11
3.11 INSTALLATION - CAP SHEET
.1
Install the cap sheet no later than seven (7) days from the date of installation of the base membrane. Do not leave any portion of the base membrane exposed without cap sheet for longer than the specified time.
Section 07 52 00 Page 16 2011-05-25
3.11 INSTALLATION - CAP SHEET (Cont'd)
.2
Prior to cap sheet application, have the manufacturers representative inspect and approve base sheet and base flashing application.
Lay rolls such that minimum end lapping is achieved, throughout the work. Use full rolls wherever possible to reduce to a minimum end laps. Over the membrane base sheet, fully torch the membrane cap sheet. Lap side joints 90 mm and end joints 150 mm. Stagger end joints and stagger joints between plies of membrane so that at no location will the distance between joints of the bottom ply and the top ply be minimum 300 mm. Stagger end laps no less than 1800 mm. Torch apply cap sheet in straight even rows, and in the same direction as the base membrane, using torches approved by the membrane manufacturer, and approved mechanics. Ensure that torch heat is sufficient to totally bond cap sheet to base membrane but not so hot as to excessively liquidize, melt, leach out or oxidize the bitumen. Extend cap sheet up to at least the top of the cant or as otherwise recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Ensure that the cap sheet selvage is fully covered by each adjacent cap sheet. Exposed selvage shall be considered a deficiency.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.12 CAP SHEET STRIPPING
.1 .2 .3
Upon completion of cap sheet install cap sheet stripping. Do not exceed 1 m width for stripping. Install one ply of stripping using a propane torch to the vertical surfaces, down the slope of the cant to bottom of vertical surface, and extending onto the flat of the roof a minimum of 125 mm from the bottom of the cant or vertical surface. Stagger joints of the flashing cap sheet and membrane cap sheet a minimum of 300 mm. Extend cap sheet stripping up vertical surfaces no less than 200 mm, and wrap over curbs, parapets, cant, roof edges, etc., and extend down a minimum of 125 mm from the bottom most
.4 .5
Section 07 52 00 Page 17 2011-05-25
3.12 CAP SHEET STRIPPING (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) portion of the lowest plate/edge/blocking/fascia detail unless indicated other wise. Lap side joints no less than 75 mm. At parapets, extend the flashing base sheet, across the top, flat portion of the parapet and extending 50 mm down the outside wall. Nail through the top of the completed flashings where indicated, using large head galvanized nails at 150 mm o.c. Locate nails not closer than 50 mm from the top edge of membrane flashings. Ensure the cap sheet stripping selvage is fully covered by each adjacent cap sheet stripping. Exposed selvage shall be considered a deficiency.
.6
.7
.8
3.13 INSTALLATION - ROOF DRAINS, VENTS & LEAD FLASHINGS
.1
Roof drains, vents and lead flashings shall be supplied, set in place and connected as part of the work specified under Mechanical Divisions. Ensure the drain outlet will not be above the general level of the completed roof membrane and will permit drainage of all water from the roof. Use 24 kg/sqm (2 mm thick) lead sheet for flashing roof drains. Prime top surface of flange or metal flashing and allow 24 hours to dry. Set flange or metal flashing in manufacturer's recommended adhesive and secure in place. Over flange or metal flashing, apply 1 m square of flashing base sheet (centered over drain or protrusion) and fully torch in place. Caulk between the plies and the clamping ring with flexible seal caulking. Apply a bead of flexible seal caulking between the membrane and the metal flashing to direct water away from the joint. Where applicable, under all scupper drains that drain to cap sheeted roof sections install one square metre aluminum faced veral fully torched to cap sheet. Under no circumstances use cold adhesive.
.2
.3 .4 .5 .6
.7 .8
.9
Section 07 52 00 Page 18 2011-05-25
3.14
WALKWAYS
.1
Install walkway concrete paving slabs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated. Install pavers, level on insulation pads, as indicated.
.2
.1
Inspections: .1 Inspection and testing of roofing application will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. .2 Departmental Representative will pay for tests as specified in Section 01 45 00. .3 Inspection and testing of roofing application will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative.
3.16
CLEANING
.1 .2
Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and complying with their instructions. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.
.3
END
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Aluminum Association (AA). .1 AA ASM-35-October 2000, Specifications for Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction, Section 5. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A167-99(2009), Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .2 ASTM A240/A240M-10b, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 ASTM A792/A792M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot Dip Process. .5 ASTM A924/A924M-10a, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. .6 ASTM B32-08, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. .7 ASTM B370-09, Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. .8 ASTM C1396/C1396M-09a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. .9 ASTM D523-08, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. .10 ASTM D822-01(2006), Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-37.5-M89, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement.(Withdrawn) .2 CAN/CGSB-37.29-M89, Rubber-Asphalt Sealing Compound.(Withdrawn) Department of Justice Canada (Jus). .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS). .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
.3
.4
.5
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.6
National Research Council Canada (NRC)/Institute for Research in Construction (IRC) - Canadian Construction Materials Centre (CCMC). .1 CCMC-2010, Registry of Product Evaluations.
Transport Canada (TC). .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992.
.7
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit proof of manufacturer's CCMC Listing and listing number to Departmental Representative. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence and cleaning procedures. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. WHMIS acceptable to Labour Canada, and Health and Welfare Canada. Submit product data sheets for insulation. Include: .1 Product characteristics. .2 Performance criteria. .3 Limitations. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate arrangements of sheets and joints, types and locations of fasteners and special shapes and relationship of panels to structural frame. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples of each sheet metal material.
.3 .4
.5
.6 .7
.8 .9
.1 .2
Submit mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Fabricate full size sample roofing panel using identical project materials and methods to include typical seam.
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Mock-up will be used: To judge workmanship, substrate .1 preparation, operation of equipment and material application.
Locate where directed. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with sheet metal flashing work. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this Work. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished Work.
.4 .5
.6
.1 .2 .3
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene and corrugated cardboard packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal, Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Unused paint, caulking, and sealing compound materials must be disposed of at an official hazardous material collections site as approved by Departmental Representative. Unused paint, caulking, and sealing compound materials must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in
.4
.5 .6
.7 .8
.9
.10
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.10
(Cont'd) other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
.1
Zinc coated steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M, commercial quality, with Z275 coating, prefinished as specified in 2.2, 0.61 mm minimum base metal thickness.
2.2 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET
.1
Prepainted, hot dipped galvanized Z275 designation cold formed steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M. Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A924/A924M, factory precoated with Baycoat 8000+ series or Vicwest Colorite HMP Series, colour to match existing on exposed surface and galvanized to Z275 on reverse side, conforming to test procedures of CSSBI Technical Bulletin No. 7, October 1979 (Pub. No. 40.7 79), 0.61 mm base metal thickness.
2.3
COMPONENTS
.1
Exterior sheet to roofing and fascias: site formed coated metal, to standing seam profile 406 mm wide sheets, standing seam, of 0.61 mm thickness base metal, one piece continuous panel length. Accessories: cap flashings, drip flashings, internal valley flashings, external ridge flashings, copings and closures, of same material and finish as roofing, brake-formed to shape. "Z" Girts: to ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33, 1.2 mm minimum base metal thickness, galvanized to ASTM A924/A924M with Z275 zinc coating, size to accommodate insulation thickness to bottom layer and to accommodate insulation thickness and 25 mm air space for top layer). Provide cross ventilation holes, minimum 25 mm diameter, at 300 mm o.c. along each Z girt, located between top flange and top of insulation. Provide drain ports at bottom of web at membrane level, at maximum 600 mm o.c.
.2
.3
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.3 COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
.4
Battens: 50 mm high continuous battens to cover standing seams, of same material as roofing, clipped in place for full length of roof sheet. Batten Clip fasteners: manufacturer's standard, finish to match panels. Hold Down Clip Assembly: to ASTM A653/A653M, galvanized to ASTM A924/A924M, galvanized, fixed and 2 part expanding clip to suit design requirements. Isocyanurate Insulation: rigid roof insulation board consisting of a polyisocyanurate foam core bonded chemically in the manufacturing process to glass fibre and other facings, aged RSI value of 1.06 per 25.4 mm thickness; thickness as indicated. Ensure that insulation is date stamp on date of manufacture, and that the insulation is not installed until 3 months after it has been manufactured. Gypsum roof deck sheathing: Gypsum board sheathing: to ASTM C1396/C1396M, 12.7 mm thick. Screws for gypsum board: cadmium plated steel, purpose made to meet load requirements. for metal deck thickness 0.91 mm and less, use 32 mm long, self tapping screws, hi-lo threads, deep recess bugle head and Phillips drive. Air/Vapour Barrier: as specified in Section 07 27 00.01. Fasteners for girts: carbon steel, case hardened and plated, purpose made for attachment to steel from 0.9 mm to 12.7 mm thickness plus thickness of gypsum board and waterproof underlayment. Hex head washer style, self drilling. Fasteners for galvanized sheet steel: carbon steel, case hardened and plated, purpose made for attachment to steel from 0.9 mm to 13 mm thickness. Self drilling, hex washer head style with integral sealing washer, finished to match panel colour.
.5 .6
.7
.8 .9
.10 .11
.12
2.4
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate aluminum sheet metal in accordance with AA ASM-35.
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
.2
Form individual pieces in 2400 mm maximum lengths. Make allowances for expansion at joints. Hem exposed edges on underside 12 mm, mitre and seal. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Apply minimum 0.2 mm dry film thickness coat of plastic cement to both faces of dissimilar metals in contact. Protect metals against oxidization by backpainting with isolation coating where indicated. Tin edges of copper sheets to be soldered for width of 40 mm both sides with solder.
.3 .4
.5
.6
.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION GYPSUM BOARD DECK SHEATHING
.1
Check that decking is clinched at seams and is anchored to supporting members as specified. Check that all openings cut in the deck are supported at the cut edges as specified. Trim sheets as required to ensure that edges terminate on centre lines of supporting upstanding flutes. (Note: metal deck "creeps" in width during shipping and installation, so frequent trimming of sheathing will be required). Butt edges tightly together. Attach to deck with screws at 200 mm o.c. along the edges of the sheet at a distance of not less than 25 mm from the sheet edges, and at 400 mm o.c. each way for the rest of the sheet for a total of 46 screws per sheet. Drive screws just flush with surface of board. Do not break paper at periphery of screw head. Use driver gun with automatic slip clutch and adjustable penetration stop which can be set at 1.6 mm intervals. Maximum operating speed not to exceed 2400 r/min. Cover entire metal deck with gypsum board sheathing.
.2
.3
.4
.5
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.1 APPLICATION GYPSUM BOARD DECK SHEATHING (Cont'd)
.6
Note: a number of factors must be considered in determining the placing of sheathing relative to span direction of metal deck. Configuration of roof and span of deck relative to slope of roof, plus other factors will influence the decision as to which direction the length of the sheathing will run. Whichever direction chosen, parallel or perpendicular to deck flutes, the laying must be done so that edges of all sheets terminate on upstanding flutes at end of days work in order that a satisfactory temporary water cut off can be installed. Cut off must prevent water or snow from entering the flutes.
3.2 APPLICATION AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER
.1 .2
Install membrane directly over gypsum sheathing. Apply membrane only in dry weather when the ambient temperature is 5C or higher. Cut the membrane into 3 to 5 metre lengths and re roll. Starting at the low point of the slope, install continuous horizontal lengths of membrane in shingle fashion. Peel back 300 to 600 mm of release paper, align membrane on the lower edge of the roof and place the first 300 to 600 mm. Pull the release paper under the membrane and continue to peel it from the membrane. Force membrane into firm contact with gypsum board and plywood decks to eliminate wrinkling and air entrapment. Overlap the leading edge of the previous roll at side or at end a minimum of 150 mm. Seal traverse end of each roll by heating with propane torch to melt the polyethylene and fuse the surface together. Ridge application: Cut membrane into 1.2 m to 1.8 m lengths. Peel the release paper and centre the sheet over the ridge. Drape and press the membrane into place, working from the centre of the valley or ridge outward in each direction. For valleys, apply the membrane starting at the low point and work upwards. Overlap all ends and edges a minimum of 150 mm. Ensure complete coverage of roof surfaces around all appurtenances. Seal all protrusions to ensure air/vapour and waterproof seal. Lap over other air/vapour barrier wall membranes with air/vapour barrier/waterproof membrane sheet of this section, and vapour retarder of roofing specified in Section 07 52 00, where applicable, minimum 200 mm and
.3
.4
.5
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.2 APPLICATION AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) seal in place. Ensure all different interfacing membranes are compatible. Seal membranes to each other to ensure continuity of moisture protection and air/vapour seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION GIRT AND INSULATION
.1
Install "Z" girts perpendicular to roof slope or siding seams with screws securing bottom legs through waterproofing membrane and gypsum board into upper flutes of steel deck. Space screws nominally at 600 mm o.c. maximum and liberally butter with butyl sealant. Space girts as indicated on the reviewed shop drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer to suit insulation size. Leave approximately 25 mm gap between ends of Z girts to allow for moisture to drain away. Ensure there are "Z" girts at all ends and edges and around openings to provide a solid framing for standing seam roofing. Install insulation over waterproofing membrane and between girts, leaving 25 mm space between top of insulation and underside of metal roofing. Butt insulation boards tight together to achieve a complete thermal barrier. Fill all joints over 6 mm with insulation. Cut insulation as required to fit around protrusions. Fill voids with batt insulation. Ensure space above insulation is vented to the exterior to meet all Building Code requirements.
.2
.3
.4
3.4 INSTALLATION ROOFING PANELS & BATTENS (FIELD ASSEMBLED)
.1
Install roofing with manufacturer's standard concealed hold down clip assembly panel fasteners at 600 mm o.c. along each standing seam into to leg of Z girts. Ensure fasteners will hold roofing in place to withstand all superimposed loading, including wind loads. Clip on exterior roof sheet. Form seams in direction of water flow and make water tight. Install roof sheets in one continuous length per location. Horizontal laps will not be acceptable. Install standing seam panels plumb, straight and true to adjacent work, using manufacturer's standard seam.
.2 .3
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.4 INSTALLATION ROOFING PANELS & BATTENS (FIELD ASSEMBLED) (Cont'd)
.4 .5
Ensure that seams line up with window mullions as indicated on the drawings. Where required, provide formed top closures by folding up portion of sheet to form a top closure, sealed to arrest direct weather penetration.
Provide alignment bars, brackets, clips, inserts, shims as required to securely and permanently fasten roofing system to building structure. Install batten clips to standing seams using one screw per clip. Install clips at minimum 900 mm o.c. along length of standing seam. Clip on battens; use one piece per location, end joints will not be acceptable. Flash roof penetrations with material matching roof panels, and make water tight. Install flashings at rake corner, eaves, ridges and where necessary to provide weather tightness and a finished appearance. Fabricate and install "knee joint" flashing at junction between standing seam roofing and standing seam siding as detailed, and to provide a waterproof installation. Provide formed flashings and closures, sealed to arrest direct weather penetration between panels and at abutting building surfaces. Ensure that the completed installation is free from noise, rattles, wind whistles, or noise due to thermal movement.
.6
.7
.8 .9 .10
.11
3.5 CONTROL/ EXPANSION JOINTS
.1
Construct expansion joints as indicated on the reviewed shop drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. Use cover sheets, of brake formed profile, of same material and finish as adjacent material. Use mechanical fasteners to secure sheet materials. Assemble and secure roof system to structural frame so stresses on sealants are within manufacturers' recommended limits.
.2 .3 .4
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.6
CLEANING
.1
Wash down exposed interior and exterior surfaces using solution of mild domestic detergent in warm water, applied with soft clean wiping cloths. Wipe interior surfaces clean as part of final clean up. Remove excess sealant with recommended solvent.
.2
END
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Section 07 62 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM D523-08, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. .3 ASTM D822-01(2006), Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) .1 Roofing Specifications Manual 1997. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing. .2 CAN/CGSB-51.32-M77, Sheathing, Membrane, Breather Type.
.2 .3
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature for sheet metal flashing systems materials, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples: .1 Submit duplicate 50 x 50 mm samples of each type of sheet metal material, finishes and colours.
.3 .4
Section 07 62 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
.1
Zinc coated steel sheet: minimum 24 gauge thickness, commercial quality to ASTM A653/A653M, with Z275 designation zinc coating.
2.2 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET
.1
Prefinished steel with factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride. .1 Colour selected by Departmental Representative from manufacturer's standard range. .2 Specular gloss: 30 units , in accordance with ASTM D523. .3 Coating thickness: not less than 22 micrometres. .4 Resistance to accelerated weathering for chalk rating of 8, colour fade 5 units or less and erosion rate less than 20% to ASTM D822 as follows: .1 Outdoor exposure period 2500 hours. .2 Humidity resistance exposure period 5000 hours.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
.1 .2
Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Sealant: one component, elastomeric, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.13, Ecologo certified. Colour to match precoated sheet steel. Underlay for metal flashing: dry sheathing to CAN/CGSB-51.32. Sealants: in accordance with Section 07 90 00, colour as selected by Departmental Representative. Cleats: of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50 mm wide. Thickness same as sheet metal being secured.
.3 .4
.5
Section 07 62 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.6
Fasteners: of same material as sheet metal, ring thread flat head roofing nails of length and thickness suitable for metal flashing application.
Washers: of same material as sheet metal, 1 mm thick with rubber packings. Touch-up paint: as recommended by prefinished material manufacturer. Flux: rosin, cut hydrochloric acid, or commercial preparation suitable for materials to be soldered.
.7 .8 .9
2.4
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work in accordance with applicable CRCA 'FL' series details and as indicated. Form pieces in 3000 mm maximum lengths. Make allowance for expansion at joints. Hem exposed edges on underside 12 mm. Mitre and seal corners with sealant. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Apply isolation coating to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar
.2 .3 .4
.5
2.5 METAL FLASHINGS
.1
Form flashings, copings and fascias to profiles indicated of 24 gauge thick prefinished steel.
2.6
PANS
.1
Form pans to receive roofing plastic from 0.61 mm thick galvanized steel sheet metal with minimum 75 mm upstand above finished roof and 100 mm continuous flanges with no open corners. Solder joints. Make pans minimum 50 mm wider than member passing through roof membrane.
2.7 REGLETS AND CAP FLASHINGS
.1
Form recessed and surface mounted reglets and metal cap flashing of 0.61 mm base metal thickness sheet metal to be built in masonry work for base flashings as detailed in accordance with CRCA FL series details. Provide
Section 07 62 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.7 REGLETS AND CAP FLASHINGS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) slotted fixing holes and steel/plastic washer fasteners.
2.8 EAVES TROUGHS AND DOWNPIPES
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Form eaves troughs and downpipes from 0.61 mm thick prefinished steel sheet metal. Sizes and profiles eaves troughs as indicated on the drawings. Downpipes to be 125 mm x 125 mm. Provide goosenecks, outlets, strainer baskets and necessary fastenings. Provide one 600 x 1200 mm purpose made precast concrete splash pad for each downpipe to the approval of the Departmental Representative.
2.9
SCUPPERS
.1 .2 .3
Form scuppers from 0.61 mm thick prefinished steel. Sizes and profiles to CRCA details. Provide necessary fastenings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install sheet metal work in accordance with CRCA FL series details. Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation. Provide underlay under sheet metal. Secure in place and lap joints 100 mm. Counterflash bituminous flashings at intersections of roof with vertical surfaces and curbs. Flash joints using S lock forming tight fit over hook strips, as detailed. Lock end joints and caulk with sealant. Install surface mounted reglets true and level, and caulk top of reglet with sealant.
.5 .6
Section 07 62 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
.7 .8
Insert metal flashing into reglets or under cap flashing to form weather tight junction.
Turn top edge of flashing into recessed reglet or mortar joint minimum of 25 mm. Lead wedge flashing securely into joint. Caulk flashing at reglet and cap flashing with sealant. Install pans, where shown around items projecting through roof membrane. Install metal flashing to other locations such as to masonry. Coordinate metal flashings to metal siding with Section 07 46 13 and standing seam metal roofing Section 07 61 00.
.9 .10 .11
3.2
SCUPPERS
.1
Install scuppers as indicated.
END
ROOF ANCHORS AND SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Section 07 72 69 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A500/A500M-10a, Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. .3 ASTM C1029-10, Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .3 CSA W55.3-08, Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings.
.2
.1
The fall protection system shall allow the two users to walk uninterrupted the entire length of the system and provide secure anchorage to arrest a fall by the user. All essential components shall be included as part of the above referenced system, though not specifically stated in the following specifications, so as to provide a complete and fully operational system. System to include fall arrest posts and anchorage to supporting structure. Coordinate details with structural steel supplier. Shock absorbing devices shall be incorporated to limit the load on fall arrest posts to no more than 22.7 kN (5000 pound-force).
.2
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit control submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide 2 (two) copies of manufacturer's product literature for manufactured materials and products.
Section 07 72 69 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Upon completion of project, provide Departmental Representative with Log Book for mandatory annual inspection.
Upon completion of project, provide Departmental Representative with roof plan showing layout of safety anchor system.
.4
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate component profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard welding symbols include net weld lengths. Each shop drawing shall bear a stamp of approval from a qualified professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario.
.3 .4
.1 .2
Submit design data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit Test Reports and substantiating engineering data and test results of previous tests by independent laboratory which purport to meet performance criteria, and other supportive data. Design structural support framing components and site inspect the installation under direct supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the Province of Ontario. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Co-ordinate the Work with installation of roofing assembly and sheet metal work.
.3
.4
.5
Section 07 72 69 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.6 WELDERS' QUALIFICATIONS
.1 .2 .3
Welders Certificates: furnish welders' qualifications to Departmental Representative. Welding qualifications to be in accordance with CSA W47.1. Employ qualified and licensed welders possessing certificates for each procedure to be performed from authority having jurisdiction. Each welder to possess identification symbol issued by authority having jurisdiction. Certification of companies for fusion welding of steel structures to be in accordance with CSA W47.1. Manufacturer Qualifications: company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
.4 .5
.6
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with Waste Reduction Workplan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.2
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
.1 .2
Prior to start of work verify existing site conditions. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Steel Sections and Plates: CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. Steel Rings: forged steel, ring thickness determined by imposed loads. Steel Cable (between post travel restraints): minimum 9 mm diameter, spiral wound multi-strand stainless steel aircraft cable.
Section 07 72 69 Page 4 2011-05-25
.5 .6 .7
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers for Stainless Steel: stainless steel, matte finish.
Gaskets Under Anchors: neoprene pads, compatible with roof membrane, cut to size. Welding Materials: CSA W47.1 for materials being welded.
2.2
MANUFACTURER
.1
Provide products based upon: .1 20 year warranty against leaks, condensation and defects in materials and/or manufacture, as applicable. .2 Ultimate load (structural rating) for up to 22.7 kN (5000 lbs) strength for anchors equipped with forged round eye. .3 Structural integrity backed by $7,000,000.00 liability insurance. .4 Injection molded urethane insulation to ASTM C1029, as applicable. .5 Air barrier flashing design using EPDM seals. .6 Maintenance free design. .7 Materials and size options, and thickness. .8 Treated flashing deck flange, as applicable. .9 Written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verify existing conditions, dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. For roofs employing tapered insulation systems, height adjustments may be necessary i.e. ensure centre line of cable anchor bracket is minimum 230 mm (9") above roof surface.
.2
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Supply and install steel items required to be attached to steel framing as clean uncoated metal, with setting templates to appropriate sections.
Section 07 72 69 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install travel restrain system in accordance with construction documents, shop drawings, manufacturer's recommendations. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. Field weld components as indicated on shop drawings. Perform field welding. Obtain approval from Departmental Representative prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. Thread aircraft cable through eye-lets at top of post, to linear roof coverage of post restraints; pressure crimp cable ends.
.2 .3
.4 .5
.6
.1
After the travel restraint system is installed and properly adjusted, the system manufacturer's approved authorized representative, and qualified professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario responsible for the shop drawings shall inspect the system and shall make all final adjustments for proper operation. Verify that all the units have been installed in accordance with specifications and details, and will function as intended. Submit copies of written reports in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
.3
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
.1
Protect finished Work from damage.
END
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED WORK
.1
Fire stopping and smoke seals within mechanical assemblies (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside cable trays) are specified in Divisions 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27 and 28 respectively.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM E814-10 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) .1 ANSI/UL 1479 Revision 5-08, Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S115-05, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems. National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1
Fire Stop Material: device intended to close off opening or penetration during fire or materials that fill openings in wall or floor assembly where penetration is by cables, cable trays, conduits, ducts and pipes and poke-through termination devices, including electrical outlet boxes along with their means of support through wall or floor openings. Single Component Fire Stop System: fire stop material that has Listed Systems Design and is used individually without use of high temperature insulation or other materials to create fire stop system. Multiple Component Fire Stop System: exact group of fire stop materials that are identified within Listed Systems Design to create on site fire stop system.
.2
.3
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
Continuity of Fire Separations: NBC 2010, Division B, Part 3, Subsection 3.1.8 and Article 3.1.9.1, and Part 9, Subsection 9.10.9: .1 Wall, partition or floor assemblies required to be a fire separation shall be: constructed as a continuous element; have a fire resistance rating; have openings protected by a closure; and have penetrations sealed by a firestop.
.1
Standards: Conforms to both temperature and flame ratings under ULC S115 and ULI 1479 and ASTM E814 and the National Building Code. Use material produced under the label service of an approved agency which has tested the material, or assemblies containing the material, in accordance with the specified test standards. All fire stopping material shall be from one manufacturer. Application of firestopping materials, systems of this Section shall be by a fully experienced, trained and approved applicator using proper equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Applicator must have a minimum of 5 years experience on comparable size projects. All fire stopping installation work for entire project shall be by a single contractor experienced in firestopping. Individual disciplines shall NOT fire stop their own work. The manufacturer(s) of the firestopping systems used for this project, must inspect the fire stopping work, and submit written reports and verifications/approval of the installation of their products and systems and the products are installed to the manufacturer's requirements to achieve the required fire ratings. Fire stop assembly labels shall be used to the maximum extent possible. These labels shall indicate cUL/ULC listing number, date of installation, installer name and fire stop product(s) used. For all non standard applications where no cUL/ULC tested systems exist, submit manufacturer's Engineering Judgement drawings. Required Engineering Judgments must be made by a qualified Fire Protection engineer, and must abide by the International Firestop Council
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.6
(Cont'd) (IFC) guidelines. All drawings must indicate the "Tested" cUL/ULC system upon which the judgement is based so as to assess the relevance of the judgement to some known performance. Engineering Judgements must include the project and Contractor name, and must be acceptable to the Departmental Representative and the Authority Having Jurisdiction, prior to installation.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples showing actual firestop material proposed for project. Submit a complete firestopping and smokeseal schedule within fourteen (14) days of award of Contract to the Departmental Representative for review. Schedule is to include complete details, cut sheets, system descriptions and location of each proposed firestopping & smokeseal application. Alter schedule as recommended by the Departmental Representative and resubmit as required.
1.6
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit shop drawings to show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation. Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.
1.7
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit manufacturer's product data for materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions are sufficient for identification at job site. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Deliver materials to the site in undamaged condition and in original unopened containers, marked to indicate brand name, manufacturer, ULC markings. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials indoors, in dry location, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115. .1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN/ULC-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended. .2 Fire stop system rating: FT. Service penetration assemblies: certified by ULC in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No.40 U19. Service penetration firestop components: certified by ULC in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No.40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No.40 U19.15 under the Label Service of ULC. Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly in accordance with NBC. Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables: elastomeric seal.
.2
.3
.4 .5
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
.6
Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal.
Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use. Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances. Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.
.7 .8
.9
.10 PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free. Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions. Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation. Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.
.2
.3 .4
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC certification and manufacturer's instructions.
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
.2
Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.
Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to neat finish. Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
.3
.4 .5
3.4
INSPECTION
.1
Notify Departmental Representative when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies.
3.5
SCHEDULE
.1
Fire stop and smoke seal at: .1 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum board partitions and walls. .2 Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions. .3 Intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions. .4 Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls. .5 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs. .6 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations. .7 Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations. 2 .8 Rigid ducts: greater than 129 cm : fire stopping to consist of bead of fire stopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.
3.6
CLEAN UP
.1 .2
Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application. Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials. END
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM C920-11, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .2 ASTM D695-10, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing. .2 CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90, One-Component Acrylic Emulsion Base Sealing Compound. .3 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multi-component, Chemical Curing Sealing Compound. Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA). General Services Administration (GSA) - Federal Specifications (FS) .1 FS-SS-S-200-E(2)1993, Sealants, Joint, Two-Component, Jet-Blast-Resistant, Cold Applied, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Transport Canada (TC) .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA).
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Manufacturer's product to describe. .1 Caulking compound. .2 Primers. .3 Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different sealants are in contact with each other. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate samples of each type of material and colour.
.3 .4
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.5 .6
Cured samples of exposed sealants for each color where required to match adjacent material.
Submit manufacturer's instructions in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Instructions to include installation instructions for each product used.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/MOCK-UP
.1 .2
Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Construct mock-up to show location, size, shape and depth of joints complete with back-up material, primer, caulking and sealant. Mock-up will be used: .1 To judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and material application. Locate where directed. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with sealant work. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this Work. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished Work.
.3
.4 .5
.6
.1 .2
Deliver, handle, store and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer's seals and labels, intact. Protect from freezing, moisture, water and contact with ground or floor.
.1 .2 .3
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. Unused sealant material must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. Divert unused joint sealing material from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Empty plastic joint sealer containers are not recyclable. Do not dispose of empty containers with plastic materials destined for recycling. Fold up metal banding, flatten, and place in designated area for recycling.
.4 .5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
.1
Maintain air temperature range of 4C to 27C in areas to receive sealants, 24 hours before, during application, and until sealants have cured. .1 Should it become necessary to apply sealants at temperatures below or above this range, advise the Departmental Representative and consult sealant manufacturer and follow the latter's recommendations. Examine substrate materials, joint voids, and note temperature/humidity conditions. Report unacceptable conditions to the Departmental Representative. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions. Joint-Width Conditions: .1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
.2
.3 .4
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
.5
Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint .1 sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
Protect all work against damage and disfigurations and work of other trades against soiling and damage arising out of this work. Upon completion, replace and repair all defective work.
.6
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and regarding labelling and provision of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) acceptable to Labour Canada. Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative humidity, and substrate moisture content for application and curing of sealants including special conditions governing use. Product may cause chemical burns on skin if not washed out within 5 minutes or in the eyes if not washed out immediately with water for a period of five minutes. .1 Goggles, gloves and other suitable safety equipment should be used. .2 Over time and over exposure can cause a skin reaction to occur. .3 See manufactures Data Sheet before using. Ventilate area of work as directed by Departmental Representative by use of approved portable supply and exhaust fans.
.2
.3
.4
1.8
COMPATIBILITY
.1 .2
Ensure that all materials used are compatible. Declaration of Materials Compatibility: Submit written declaration stating that sealant materials are compatible with adjacent materials and substrates and are acceptable to the sealant manufacturer. Include a list of materials, suppliers and manufacturers.
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.9
GUARANTEE
.1
For the installation of security sealant, 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC 3.13 of General Conditions is extended to 60 months as described below. Provide a written guarantee stating that all sealant and caulking work is guaranteed against leakage, cracking and deterioration, shrinkage, loss of cohesion, loss of adhesion, staining of adjacent surfaces, integral staining or failure to provide intended seal; for a period of five (5) years from date of Substantial Performance of the contract and that any defects will be replaced including related materials at no cost to the Departmental Representative. Provide manufacturers guarantee, that its products are of the quality represented in its product literature and package markings and, when applied in accordance with its current specifications and application instructions, will perform as stated in its product literature. Include this scope provision within the scope of the Performance Bond.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS
.1
Sealants and caulking compounds must: .1 Meet or exceed all applicable governmental and industrial safety and performance standards; and .2 Be manufactured and transported in such a manner that all steps of the process, including the disposal of waste products arising there from, will meet the requirements of all applicable governmental acts, by laws and regulations including, for facilities located in Canada, the fisheries Act and the Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA). Sealant and caulking compounds must not be formulated or manufactured with: aromatic solvents, fibrous talc or asbestos, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, barium or their compounds, except barium sulfate. Sealant and caulking compounds must not contain a total of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) in excess of 5% by weight as calculated from
.2
.3
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) records of the amounts of constituents used to make the product. Sealant and caulking compounds must be accompanied by detailed instructions for proper application so as to minimize health concerns and maximize performance, and information describing proper disposal methods. Caulking that emits strong odours, contains toxic chemicals or is not certified as mould resistant shall not be used in air handling units. When low toxicity caulks are not possible, confine usage to areas which offgas to the exterior, are contained behind air barriers, or are applied several months before occupancy to maximize off gas time. In the selection of the products and materials of this section preference will be given to those with the following characteristics: Water based, water clean up, non flammable, low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content, manufactured without compounds which contribute to ozone depletion in the upper atmosphere, manufactured without compounds which contribute to smog in the lower atmosphere, does not contain methylene chloride, does not contain chlorinated hydrocarbons. The manufacturing process must adhere to Lifecycle Assessment Standards as per ISO 14040/14041 LCA Standards. Sealants acceptable for use on this project must be listed on CGSB Qualified Products List issued by CGSB Qualification Board for Joint Sealants. Where sealants are qualified with primers use only these primers.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
2.2 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
.1
Sealant Type 1: one component silicone sealant to CAN/CGSB-19.13, Type 2, ClasS 25, shore A hardness of 25 to 30, non-sag, neutral curing. Sealant Type 2: one component paintable acrylic latex, to CAN/CGSB-19.17. Sealant Type 3 (horizontal joint sealant): multi component, chemical curing, self leveling, polyurethane sealant, conforming to
.2 .3
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.2 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) CAN/CGSB-19.24, Type 1, Class B, and U.S Federal Specification TT S 00227E, and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. Sealant Type 4: Security Type Sealant: Epoxy sealant Type 4, two-component "pick proof", solvent-free, moisture-insensitive, high-modulus, high-strength, fire retardant, elastic-type epoxy with not less than 5% movement capability; to ASTM D695. Colour to match adjacent substrate or as selected by the Departmental Representative. To the following properties: Physical Properties Colour Viscosity Specific Gravity Part A 10,000 CPS 1.3 Part B 200 CPS 9.7 Part A & B colour to match substrate 7,000 CPS 1.2
.4
.5
Sealant Type 5: one component, mildew resistant, silicone rubber sealant, conforming to ASTM C920. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer for applicable substrate materials. Primer: Non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer. Joint Filler: Round closed cell, non-staining, non-absorbent foam, extruded polyethylene shore hardness 20, tensile strength 138 to 207 KPa oversized 30 to 50%. For backup to large joints, cavities or voids, use fibreglass wool. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive polyethylene tape, not bondable to sealant.
.6
.7 .8
.9
2.3 SEALANT SELECTION
.1
Perimeters of exterior openings where frames meet exterior facade of building (ie. masonry veneer, metal siding, parging, around exterior windows and doors or other exterior materials) and to all other exterior joints including around new openings or penetrations through the existing exterior envelope: Sealant Type 1.
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.3 SEALANT SELECTION (Cont'd)
.2
Seal interior perimeters of exterior openings as detailed on drawings: Sealant Type 4 to inmate areas, Sealant Type 2 elsewhere.
Interior control and expansion joints in floor surfaces: Sealant Type 4 to all interior locations except Administration Area. Use Sealant Type 3 in Administration Area. Perimeters of interior frames, as detailed and itemized: Sealant Type 4 to inmate areas, Sealant Type 2 elsewhere. Between different materials at interior locations, such as between gypsum board and concrete or concrete block: Sealant Type 4 to inmate areas, Sealant Type 2 elsewhere. Sealant to wet areas: Sealant Type 4 to inmate areas, Sealant Type 5 elsewhere.
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.4
JOINT CLEANER
.1
Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer. Primer: as recommended by manufacturer.
3.1
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed Work of other trades from staining or contamination.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
.1
Surface Cleaning: Clean all surfaces required to be caulked, removing all loose particles, dust, oil, wax, protective coatings, mould release agents, and the like, using brush, solvents, or acid etching methods. .1 Concrete: Must be sound, free of grease, laitance, etc. Concrete must be dry. .2 Steel: Remove rust, old paints, etc. Solvent cleaners to remove oil, etc. .3 Wood: Must be dry and free of paint, oil, etc. .4 Plastics: Consult sealant manufacturer for written instructions. Primer Application: Prior to application of primer where required, test primers for possible
.2
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION (Cont'd)
.2
Primer Application:(Cont'd) yellowing, discolouration, and dirt pick-up when applied over face of porous substrates. Following testing apply primers to joints following manufacturer's recommendations. When tests indicate discolouration, dirt pick-up and the like on surfaces, take special precautions when applying, by masking surfaces not required to be primed. Ensure that the sealant manufacturer's representative reviews site conditions, joint design and installers qualifications. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the Departmental Representative. Ensure that sealants are compatible with adjoining materials. Ensure that the sealant manufacturer's representative checks container labels, random inspect preparation of substrate materials and random test installed work.
.3 .4
.5
.6
3.3
PRIMING
.1 .2
Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking. Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately prior to caulking.
3.4 BACKUP MATERIAL
.1
Use foam bead as specified, to limit depth of sealant and to act as bond breaker at back of joint (adhesion is not required at back of joint). Where depth of joint does not permit the use of foam bead, apply paper masking tape to the back of the joint to act as bond breaker. Apply bond breaker to manufacturer's instructions. Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30% compression.
.2
.3 .4
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.5
MIXING
.1
Mix materials in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
3.6
APPLICATION
.1
Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's directions, using a pressure air gun with proper size nozzle. Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. Superficial pointing with skin bead is not acceptable. Apply security sealant to all interior joints between dissimilar materials and elsewhere as required or indicated on the drawings. The only interior areas not requiring security sealants are at the Administration Area. Joints should be filled to approximately 2/3 full and let set for approximately 4 hours, then fill the remainder. The level of epoxy should be just above the surface. Passing a propane torch over the surface an hour after application will break any bubbles. Excess epoxy can be cut off with a scraper the next day. Cold Temperature: Apply only when temperatures are above 0C. Provide bond breaker between security sealant and glass. Remove excess bond breaker exposed after sealant has cured. Provide bond breaker at radiant heat ceiling panel. Remove excess bond breaker exposed after sealant has cured. Joint Design: Fill all spaces that are deeper than width of joint, with approved backup material. Ensure that the backup material fills the joint out to a dimension that is equal to the width of the joint, but in no case less than half the width of the joint. Sealant Application: Gun apply sealants through a nozzle opening of such shape and diameter that the full bead of sealant is gunned into the joint, filling the joint completely; to the approval of the Departmental Representative. A superficial or skin bead in joints will not be acceptable. Tool all beads immediately after application to ensure firm, full contact with the inner faces
.2
.3
.4 .5
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 11 2011-05-25
.10
(Cont'd) of the joint. Strike off excess material with tooling stick or knife. Upon completion ensure caulking surfaces are smooth, even, free from ridges, wrinkles, air pockets, and embedded foreign matter. Joint Finishes: Finish joints in flush surfaces; fill joints full in internal angles, except as otherwise detailed. Use wet tool as required. Avoid the use of face fillet (or angle bead) joints. CONCAVE OR CONVEX JOINTS WILL BE REJECTED. Where sharp, exact bead lines are desired, use masking tape. When taping, avoid touching cleaned and primed areas to which sealant is to be applied. Remove masking tape immediately after bead is placed and tooled, to avoid damage to developing surface skin. Completely fill void with compound into which they are installed. Remove excess immediately following installation. Do not provide security sealant to light switch plates, electrical plug plates and sprinkler heads. Curing. .1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. .2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
3.7
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3 .4
Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave Work neat and clean. Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses. Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant. Claning - security sealant: .1 Promptly as work proceeds remove all excess material or smears from surfaces beyond joint or surface to be caulked, using solvents as recommended by the manufacturer's representative. If sealant or caulking has set up, employ mechanical removal.
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00 Page 12 2011-05-25
.4
Claning - security sealant:(Cont'd) .2 During application, maintain areas of work in clean condition daily removing from the premises and site all rubbish and surplus material. .3 Clean immediately soiled non porous materials. .4 On porous surfaces, remove any excess sealant as recommended by manufacturer. .5 Sealant manufacturer recommends that equipment must be cleaned after use with sealant manufacturer's solvent. Cured material can only be removed by burning.
END
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Section 08 11 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM E330-02(2010), Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. .2 CGSB 41-GP-19Ma-84, Rigid Vinyl Extrusions for Windows and Doors. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers' Association (CSDMA) .1 CSDMA, Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 2000. .2 CSDMA, Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Doors, 2009. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 80-10, Standard for Fire Doors and. Other Opening Protectives. .2 NFPA 252-08, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S104-10, Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .2 CAN/ULC-S105-09, Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by CAN/ULC-S104. .3 CAN/ULC-S704-03, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards, Faced.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 08 11 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Design Requirements: .1 Steel fire rated doors and frames: labelled and listed by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN/ULC-S104 for ratings specified or indicated. .2 Provide fire labeled frame products for those openings requiring fire protection ratings, as scheduled. Test products in strict conformance with CAN/ULC-S104, NFPA 252 and list by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection service and construct as detailed in Follow Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide product data: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate each type of door, material, steel core thicknesses, mortises, reinforcements, location of exposed fasteners, openings, glazed louvred, arrangement of hardware and fire rating and finishes. .3 Indicate each type frame material, core thickness, reinforcements, glazing stops, location of anchors and exposed fastenings and reinforcing, fire rating finishes. .4 Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and door schedule. .5 Submit test and engineering data, and installation instructions. Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type of door. .2 Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type of frame. Show butt cutout, glazing stops.
.4
Section 08 11 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1 .2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Hot dipped galvanized steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75, minimum base steel thickness in accordance with CSDMA Table 1 Thickness for Component Parts. Reinforcement: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, coating designation to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75.
.2
2.2 DOOR CORE MATERIALS
.1
Honeycomb construction: .1 Structural small cell, 24.5 mm maximum kraft paper 'honeycomb', weight: 36.3 kg per 3 ream minimum, density 16.5 kg/m minimum sanded to required thickness. Temperature rise rated (TRR): core composition to limit temperature rise on unexposed side of door to 250C at 60 minutes. Core to be tested as part of a complete door assembly, in accordance with CAN/ULC-S104 or NFPA 252, covering Standard Method of Tests of Door Assemblies and listed by nationally recognized testing agency having factory inspection service.
.2
2.3
ADHESIVES
.1
Honeycomb cores and steel components: heat resistant, spray grade, resin reinforced neoprene/rubber (polychloroprene) based, low viscosity, contact cement. Lock-seam doors: fire resistant, resin reinforced polychloroprene, high viscosity, sealant/adhesive.
.2
Section 08 11 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.4
PRIMER
.1
Touch-up prime CAN/CGSB-1.181.
2.5
PAINT
.1
Field paint steel doors and frames in accordance with Section 09 91 23. Provide final finish free of scratches or other blemishes.
2.6
ACCESSORIES
.1 .2
Door silencers: single stud rubber/neoprene type. Interior top and bottom caps: rigid polyvinylchloride extrusion conforming to CGSB 41-GP-19Ma. Fabricate glazing stops as formed channel, minimum 16 mm height, accurately fitted, butted at corners and fastened to frame sections with counter-sunk oval head sheet metal screws. Metallic paste filler: to manufacturer's standard. Fire labels: metal rivited. Sealant: as specified in Section 07 92 00. Glazing: as specified in Section 08 80 50. Make provisions for glazing as indicated and provide necessary glazing stops. .1 Provide removable stainless steel glazing beads for use with glazing tapes and compounds and secured with countersunk stainless steel screws. .2 Design exterior glazing stops to be tamperproof.
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8
2.7 FRAMES FABRICATION GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4
Fabricate frames in accordance with CSDMA specifications. Fabricate frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as indicated. Interior frames: 1.6 mm welded type construction. Blank, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortised, templated hardware, and electronic hardware using templates provided by finish
Section 08 11 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.7 FRAMES FABRICATION GENERAL (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) hardware supplier. Reinforce frames for surface mounted hardware. Protect mortised cutouts with steel guard boxes. Prepare frame for door silencers, 3 for single door, 2 at head for double door. Manufacturer's nameplates on frames and screens are not permitted. Conceal fastenings except where exposed fastenings are indicated. Provide factory-applied touch up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication.
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9
2.8 FRAME ANCHORAGE
.1 .2
Provide appropriate anchorage to floor and wall construction. Locate each wall anchor immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on hinge jamb and directly opposite on strike jamb. Provide 2 anchors for rebate opening heights up to 1520 mm and 1 additional anchor for each additional 760 mm of height or fraction thereof. Locate anchors for frames in existing openings not more than 150 mm from top and bottom of each jambs and intermediate at 660 mm on centre maximum.
.3
.4
2.9 FRAMES: WELDED TYPE
.1 .2 .3
Welding in accordance with CSA W59. Accurately mitre or mechanically joint frame product and securely weld on inside of profile. Cope accurately and securely weld butt joints of mullions, transom bars, centre rails and sills. Grind welded joints and corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste and sand to uniform smooth finish. Securely attach floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile.
.4
.5
Section 08 11 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.9 FRAMES: WELDED TYPE (Cont'd)
.6
Weld in 2 temporary jamb spreaders per frame to maintain proper alignment during shipment.
2.10 DOOR FABRICATION GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Doors: swing type, flush, with provision for glass and/or louvre openings as indicated. Interior doors: honeycomb construction. Fabricate doors with longitudinal edges welded. Seams: grind welded joints to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish. Doors: manufacturers' proprietary construction, tested and/or engineered as part of a fully operable assembly, including door, frame, gasketting and hardware in accordance with ASTM E330. Blank, reinforce, drill doors and tap for mortised, templated hardware and electronic hardware. Factory prepare holes 12.7 mm diameter and larger except mounting and through-bolt holes, on site, at time of hardware installation. Reinforce doors where required, for surface mounted hardware. Provide flush steel top caps to exterior doors. Provide inverted, recessed, spot welded channels to top and bottom of interior doors. Provide factory-applied touch-up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication. Provide fire labelled doors for those openings requiring fire protection ratings, as scheduled. Test such products in conformance with CAN/ULC-S104 and list by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection service and construct as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers. Manufacturer's nameplates on doors are not permitted.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 08 11 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.11 HOLLOW STEEL CONSTRUCTION
.1 .2
Form face sheets for interior doors from 1.6 mm sheet steel. Reinforce doors with vertical stiffeners, securely welded to face sheets at 150 mm on centre maximum. Fill voids between stiffeners of interior doors with honeycomb or temperature rise rated core.
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL
.1
Install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80 except where specified otherwise. Install doors and frames to CSDMA Installation Guide.
.2
3.3 FRAME INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood spreader at third points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for openings over 1200 mm wide. Remove temporary spreaders after frames are built-in. Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames. Caulk perimeter of frames between frame and adjacent material.
.4
.5
Section 08 11 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.4 DOOR INSTALLATION
.1
Install doors and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions and Section 08 71 00. Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and finished floor and thresholds as follows. .1 Hinge side: 1.0 mm. .2 Latchside and head: 1.5 mm. .3 Finished floor, top of carpet noncombustible sill and thresholds: 13 mm. Adjust operable parts for correct function.
.2
.3
3.5
FINISH REPAIRS
.1 .2
Touch up with primer finishes damaged during installation. Fill exposed frame anchors and surfaces with imperfections with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish.
3.6
GLAZING
.1
Install glazing for doors and frames in accordance with Section 08 80 50.
END
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 12, 11 19 13, 11 19 14 and 11 19 15. Refer to Section 11 19 13, Item 1.9 - Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor (DEC).
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): .1 ASTM A627-03, Standard Test Methods for Tool-Resisting Steel Bars, Flats, and Shapes for Detention and Correctional Facilities. .2 ASTM A653/653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .3 ASTM A924/A924M-10a Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process .4 ASTM F1592-05, Standard Test Methods for Detention Hollow Metal Vision Systems. .5 ASTM F1915-05, Standard Test Methods for Glazing for Detention Facilities. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. .2 CAN/CGSB-85.10-99, Protective Coatings for Metals. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) International .1 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440-08, NAFS North American Fenestration Standard/ Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .2 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1-09, Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440-08, NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .3 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09/A440.3-09, Energy Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration Systems/User Guide to CSA A440.2-09, Energy Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration Systems. .4 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/ Structural Quality Steel.
.2
.3
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) .5 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .6 CSA W55.3-08, Certification of Companies for Resistance Welding of Steel and Aluminum. .7 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC). .1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Thermal Insulation, Polystrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings.
.4
1.3
DESCRIPTION
.1
The Detention Exterior Windows shall be a three part composite unit consisting of an interior detention grade component (Window Guard), an exterior commercial grade aluminum glazed component and a pre-cast concrete surround for those units placed into concrete block exterior walls. .1 Interior Detention Grade Component (Window Guard): shall consist of 2.0 mm pressed steel perimeter frame, hollow structural steel mullions and transoms, tungsten carbide resistant security inserts, perforated plate c/w detention grade vent actuator and anchors, as described here in and shall be supplied directly to the site. .2 Exterior Aluminum and Glazing Components: Refer to Sections 07 92 00, 08 50 50 and 08 80 50 specifications on all extruded curtain wall aluminum sections, glazing, gaskets, pressure plates, sealants, fasteners and thermal break materials. .3 Pre-cast Concrete Surrounds: Refer to Section 03 45 00 for specifications on pre-cast concrete surround for all Detention Exterior Windows placed into Concrete block exterior walls.
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
The work as set forth in these drawings and specifications shall be executed only by the manufacturer having proven satisfactory performance in the manufacture of detention type windows and possessing adequate equipment and skilled personnel to detail, fabricate and erect the work of theses Documents as specified and shown. Qualification of welders: .1 Welding of load supporting components shall be performed by companies certified by
.2
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
.2
Qualification of welders:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) Canadian Welding Bureau in accordance with CSA W47.1. Workmanship Standards .1 Resistance welding to CSA W55.3. .2 Fusion welding to CSA W59.
.3
.1
Weather Resistance .1 Windows shall conform to the Load, Air Infiltration and Water resistance tests as set out in CSA A440. .2 Work of this Section shall meet or exceed the requirements of CSA A440S1 and current Building Code wherever applicable. Tamper Resistance .1 The Interior Detention Grade Component described in article 1.3.1.1 shall resist cutting by tungsten carbide rod saw as per test criteria described in 1.7.3.
.2
1.6 PERFORMANCE/ DESIGN CRITERIA FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA
.1
Windows shall have strength adequacy for post disaster, fail secure containment of inmates. Therefore windows shall meet 1.5 times the specified wind load without fracture of the product or excessive permanent deformation in accordance with CSA A440S1 clause 4.2.3 Note (2). Windows shall meet Correctional Service Canada level 3 (D3) providing extended resistance to attack in the form of rodsaw resistant steels and tempered glass. .1 Tool resisting steel bars shall be spaced maximum 115 mm apart. The center two bars on each window shall be 115 mm apart. Pass ASTM F1915: .1 Table 1 Impact test criteria: large blunt and sharp impactors, Security Grade 1. .2 Table 2 Impact test criteria: torch and small blunt impactor, Security Grade 1. Pass ASTM F1592: .1 Table 1 Impact Series for Frame and Glazing/Panel Impact Testing Multi Light Frame, Grade 1.
.2
.3
.4
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 PERFORMANCE/ DESIGN CRITERIA FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA (Cont'd)
.5
Windows: fabricated for reglazing from exterior.
1.7
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Clearly indicate, by large scale details, all perimeter conditions of construction, core metal thickness, mullion details, all components of the assembly, anchorage, sealing techniques, tolerances of openings, elevations, all materials as required to completely describe all conditions for detention exterior windows on this project. The contract documents do not purport to be shop drawings, but merely show the general window configuration, construction and shape of members and extrusion desired. Deviations from the details shown may only be permitted to meet manufacturing limitations and techniques and are subject to prior review and approval by the Departmental Representative.
.3
.4
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrene corrugated cardboard and packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.9 SAMPLES AND TESTING
.1
Within 45 days upon award of the contract, submit a full size sample of window type W1. The sample shall be complete as if ready for installation, finish painted with all glazing installed. The sample shall be crated and shipped prepaid both ways by the contractor from the place of manufacture to the testing laboratory chosen by the Departmental Representative. The Contractor is required to send a representative of the manufacturer/ supplier to the Laboratories, prior to testing, to explain and demonstrate the unit, to representatives of the Departmental Representative. Testing will determine conformance to performance requirements stated in 1.5. and 1.6. above. The Departmental Representative will appoint and pay for services of testing agency, should this service be required. Cutting test for tungsten resistant inserts to comply with ASTM A627 Test method. .1 6.2.3 Test Method. The testing laboratory shall be responsible for determining that all rod saws used for testing comply with the specifications for tungsten carbide rod saws, which areas follows: 2.1 mm diameter, standard grit, 304 mm approximate length. .2 6.2.3.2 - The test shall be conducted on a 150 by 150 mm gravity - feed, power hacksaw machine under the following conditions: .1 Rod saw tension: 890 N (200 lbf) .2 Static gravity feed pressure(ctr. of stroke): 116 N +/- 4 N (26 lbf +/- 1 lbf). .3 Dynamic feed pressure: 93-165 N (21-37l bs.). .4 Maximum lift on return stroke: 0 mm. .5 Speed: 60 Strokes/Min. .6 Length of stroke: 152 mm. .7 Cutting fluid: none. .3 6.2.3.3 - The cutting resistance of the specimen bar shall be determined by placing it firmly in a vice underneath the rod saw in a power hacksaw and causing 18,000 cutting cycles of the rod saw to be made on the bar at one point. The point at which the cutting test is conducted shall be more than 51 mm from either end of the specimen bar and not closer than 12.7 mm to the midpoint of the specimen bar. The direction of the cut shall be perpendicular to the axis of the bar. .4 6.2.3.4 - To assure uniform cutting action with no significant variations as a result of unusual rod saw wear in any of the 18,000
.2
.3
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.9 SAMPLES AND TESTING (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) cycles, a new rod saw shall be used for every 300 cutting cycles. .5 6.2.3.5 - One cutting cycle of the power hacksaw shall be a complete forward motion and return motion of the saw to the position from which the cycle began. .6 Security Inserts must meet or exceed the following: Appendix X1.2 Minimum Acceptable Performance Characteristics for Composite Tool Resisting Steel: .1 Grade No.: 1. .2 Steel Type: Composite tool resisting steel. .3 Dimensions: 13 mm x 32 mm. .4 Rod Saws used: 72. .5 Cutting Time: 6 hours. .7 No window frames are to be supplied to the project until the sample has been tested and approved by the Departmental Representative. .8 Within 30 days upon award of contract, provide testing documentation that complies with ASTM A627 in a format that is satisfactory to Departmental Representative.
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
.1
Schedule delivery of components to pre-cast concrete plant and site to coincide with installation of this work.
1.11 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide the Departmental Representative with written maintenance instructions for the care, cleaning glazing, and servicing of windows.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 7 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Sheet steel: 2.0 mm, commercial quality steel cold rolled to ASTM A653/653M; zinc coated to ASTM A924/A924M. Steel sections and plates: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, zinc coated to ASTM A924/A924M. Anchors: Nelson studs. Bar stock: 15 M 400 MPA. Zinc rich paint: to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Security bars inside steel tube transom and mullions shall be composite tool resisting steel that is a composite of tungsten carbide or other hard surfacing material for cutting resistance and 36 mm x 12.5 mm steel bar to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21. Tool resistant surfaces to be minimum 6 mm deposit thickness continuous along length of both edges on mullion sections and on inside surface on perimeter sections. Consistency of hard-surfacing materials shall be 30% x 16 mesh minimum and 70% x 8 mesh maximum. The overall consistency of the treated surface must be 80% hard-surfaced materials and 20% base welding materials. Hardness rating shall not be less than Carbide 70-74RC/ 57RC Matrix. Security bars to extend a minimum of 25 mm past face of frame or connecting transom, and are to be welded in place. Welding materials CSA W59. Security Fastening Devices: button head or countersink flat-head, torx with pin stainless steel Type 316 with cadmium coating (to locations where exposed to inmates). Metallic paste filler: Two component automotive body filler, applied non-sag to vertical surfaces. Rigid insulation blocks: extruded polystyrene, conforming to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 2.
.2
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7
.8 .9
.10
.11
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 8 2011-05-25
.12
Fasteners: Stainless steel Type 316 with cadmium coating, finished to match adjacent material (only to locations where not exposed to inmates). Foam in place insulation. Primer: touch-up primer to CAN/CGSB-1.181.
.13 .14
2.2
PAINT
.1
Field in accordance with Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting. Provided final finish shall be free of scratches or other blemishes.
2.3 SURFACE PREPARATION OF HOLLOW STEEL SECTIONS
.1 .2 .3
Thoroughly clean and suitably treat steel prior to delivery. Grind smooth sharp projections. Remove loose mill scale, rust, oil grease, dirt and other foreign matter by sandblasting to SSPC-SP10.
2.4 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PRIMING
.1 .2
Prepare zinc coated sheet steel for priming. Prime paint all hollow metal surfaces other than back faces which are to be cast into pre-cast concrete or cast into reinforced concrete walls ready to receive enamel paint by others. Fill all surface depressions and butted joints with metallic paste filler and sand to uniform smooth finish. Re-prime where metallic paste filler and sanding occur. Provide isolation coating to all surfaces in contact with concrete or grout. Sandblast finish to precast exterior window sills: light sandblast finish in order to expose aggregate face.
.3
.4 .5 .6
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.5 FABRICATION FOR WINDOW TYPE W1, W1A AND W2
.1
Fabricate all frames, using 2.0 mm sheet steel, in accordance with details and reviewed shop drawings, fully straight and square, free of twist, warp and distortion shall not exceed 0.1% of the distance of the straight plane from which measured. Fabricate all frames ready to receive aluminum sections for Window Type W1 and W1A and aluminum sections and ventilation component for Window Type W2 specified in Section 08 51 13, and as detailed on drawings. The window frames shall be so assembled as to ensure neat construction and secure well-fitted joints. Frame member corner joints shall be made by argon shielded arc welds, continuous across the joints. Corner joints of frame perimeter shall be mitered and continuously shop welded on frame side which will be concealed from view after frames are installed. Keep exposed welds to a minimum and where such welds are necessary they shall be ground flush with surface of frame. Upon completion of all welding work, remove all weld slag and spatter, grind flush all excess welds and fill remaining depressions with automotive resin body filler and grind smooth to result in smooth flush frame assembly, where exposed to view. Reinforce head, jamb and sill of all frame members, across throat side with 2.0 mm thick x 38 mm wide steel straps at 300 mm o.c., welded to frame returns. Furnish all frames c/w steel tube transoms and mullions. Extend steel tube transom and mullion minimum 10 mm into jamb frames either side and continuously weld full circumference of tube to inside of frames. Place security bar in steel tube transom tight to inside face of tube and weld to each end of steel tube. Shop prime all frames, loose stops and security bars after fabrication and prior to shipping. Main steel unexposed surfaces shall be painted with one coat to bituminous paint. Steel flat bars, brackets, angle etc., shall be shop or field painted (after welding) with two (2) coats of bituminous paint. Apply continuous rigid insulation strips to throat side of frames, in locations detailed to allow glazing screw penetration in concrete
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6 .7
.8
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.5 FABRICATION FOR WINDOW TYPE W1, W1A AND W2 (Cont'd)
.8
(Cont'd) filled jamb and head sections. Apply insulation strips with continuous bed of waterproof permanent adhesive compatible with substrate and insulation material. Apply injectable foam into all mullion sections to prevent seepage of concrete into mullions during the cast in place process and to allow for glazing screw penetration. Window Type W1 & W1A - Operable Vents (Ventrow) are to be supplied and installed on site by Section 08 51 13. Prior to site installation, Section 08 51 13 to supply Ventrow unit to Section 08 50 50 for sub-assembly. Section 08 50 50 is responsible for the supply and installation of the stainless steel perforated plate to the Ventrow units. Fabricate perforated plate from 3 mm thick Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish. Perforated plate to be brake formed to suit Ventrow dimensions and to accommodate actuator clearances. Perforated plate must be notched to accept the Ventrow retainer clips and punched to accept the actuator knob. Attach stainless steel plate to Ventrow with 5/32" dia. stainless steel rivets at 150 mm on center around the perimeter of the stainless steel plate as detailed. Refer to Section 08 51 13 for Operable Vent (Ventrow) details. Section 08 50 50 is responsible for the supply and installation of the detention grade aluminum knob and stainless steel actuator required to operate the Ventrow unit. Knob actuator to be solid aluminum, machined to suit the actuator and the stainless steel perforated plate. The actuator mechanism must be manufactured from high grade stainless steel to prevent rust. Actuator operation must be continuous turn, bi-directional and must rotate freely in a clockwise and counter clockwise direction without dead stop at any point in the travel. Rotating the knob 180 degrees in either direction must open or close the vent depending on the orientation of the vent at the beginning of the cycle. The knob and actuator must be securely mounted to the stainless steel perforated plate and must be geometrically located to allow free and continuous operation of the Ventrow unit.
.9
.10
.11
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.6 WINDOW TYPE AND CLASSIFICATION
.1
Fixed windows: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1, Performance Class CW, Performance Grade PG2160 (CW45), Product Type FW to the following performance levels. .1 Air tightness level: fixed, minimum air 2 leakage resistance of 0.2 L/(s.m ). .2 Design pressure-positive: 2160 Pa. .3 Maximum Deflection at Design Pressure: 1/175. .4 Minimum structural test pressure: 3240 Pa. .5 Minimum water penetration resistance test pressure: 330 Pa. .6 Condensation resistance: I65.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Co-ordinate and co-operate with all forces doing work in connection with work of this Section to permit proper execution of the work, including the work described in Sections 03 45 00, 08 51 13 & 08 80 50. Provide instructions and information in writing outlining the requirements necessary for surfaces, materials or inserts prepared and /or supplied which affect this work. Where anchors, inserts, reglets and accessories affect this work provide assistance and install such items where necessary.
.2
.3
3.2 SITE MEASUREMENT
.1
Ensure that close liaison with pre-cast concrete manufacturer; cast in place concrete contractor, masonry contractor are maintained to ensure that close tolerances are adhered to between the window units and the window openings.
3.3 INSTALLATION BY OTHERS (REFER TO SECTIONS 085113 AND 088050)
.1
Install detention exterior windows complete with all components, plumb square and true to line, free from warp, twist or superimposed loads, installed to achieve a weather tight installation, and to maintain air seals. Installation of aluminum window components by Section 08 51 13.
.2
WINDOWS
Section 08 50 50 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.3 INSTALLATION BY OTHERS (REFER TO SECTIONS 085113 AND 088050) (Cont'd)
.3
Installation of glazing components by Section 08 80 50.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Remove all excess and/or foreign matter from finished surfaces. Leave work in a first class new condition free from all contamination, scratches, stains, marks and excess caulking. The contractor is to receive from the window manufacturer printed instructions designating the proper methods and material to be used in cleaning the work of this Section.
END
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) International .1 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440-08, NAFS North American Fenestration Standard/ Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .2 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1-09, Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440-08, NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .3 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09/A440.3-09, Energy Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration Systems/User Guide to CSA A440.2-09, Energy Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration Systems. .4 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .5 CAN/CSA-S157-05/S157.1-05, Strength Design in Aluminum / Commentary on CSA S157-05, Strength Design in Aluminum. .6 CSA W59.2-M1991 (R2008), Welded Aluminum Construction. Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units (Rev. 1992), by Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada (IGMAC). Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40 97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) .1 AAMA 506-08, Voluntary Specifications for Impact and Cycle Testing of Fenestration Products.
.2
.3
.4
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate materials and details in full size scale for head, jamb and sill, profiles of components, interior and exterior trim, junction between combination units elevations of unit, anchorage details, location of isolation coating, description of related components and
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) exposed finishes fasteners, and caulking. Indicate location of manufacturer's nameplates.
1.3
SAMPLE
.1 .2
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit two samples 100 x 100 mm in size illustrating prefinished aluminum surface, glazing materials illustrating edge and corner.
.1
Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind, acting normal to plane of system as calculated in accordance with NBC, for the area, as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with NBC. Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass L/175; with full recovery of glazing materials. Provide system to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals: .1 Movement within system. .2 Movement between system and perimeter framing components. .3 Dynamic loading and release of loads. .4 Deflection of structural support framing. .5 Shortening of building concrete structural columns. .6 Creep of concrete structural members. .7 Aluminum Window system must not exceed air infiltration or exfiltration of more than 3.05 x 10-4 m3/s/m2 of Aluminum Window surface area at 300 Pa pressure difference. Vapour seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 25 mm sp, 22C, 40% RH: No failure. Ensure that no water infiltrates into the building under 20% of design wind load up to a maximum pressure of 720 Pa for Aluminum Window. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.8
Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
Ensure no vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system occur.
.9
1.5
DESIGN DATA
.1 .2
Submit design data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, calculations, dimensional limitations, special installation requirements.
1.6
TEST REPORT
.1
Submit test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, certifying compliance with specifications, for: .1 Windows classifications. .2 Anodized or Enamelled finish, weathering characteristics. .3 Air tightness level. .4 Specified DRWP. .5 Specified wind load-positive. .6 Specified snow load. .7 Design pressure-positive. .8 Design pressure-negative. .9 Specified wind load-negative. .10 Condensation resistance. .11 Insulating glass units. .12 Operating force.
1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
.1
Convene one week before starting work of this section.
.1 .2 .3
Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Handle work of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
.1 .2
Do not install sealants when ambient and surface temperature is less than 5C. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.
1.10
SEQUENCING
.1
Coordinate work of this section with installation of air/vapour barrier placement, foam-in place insulation, flashing placement and components or materials.
1.11
WARRANTY
.1
For the work of this Section 08 51 13 the 12 month warranty period prescribed in General Conditions GC3.13 is extended to three years. For insulating glass units the 12 month warranty period prescribed in General Conditions GC3.13 is extended to five years.
.2
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for windows for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE/ DESIGN CRITERIA FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA
.1
Windows shall have strength adequacy for post disaster, fail secure containment of inmates. Therefore windows shall meet 1.5 times the specified wind load without fracture of the product or excessive permanent deformation in accordance with CSA-A440S1-09 clause 4.2.3 Note (2). Windows shall meet Correctional Service Canada level 3 (D3) providing extended resistance to attack in the form of rodsaw resistant steels and tempered glass. .1 Tool resisting steel bars shall be spaced maximum 115 mm apart. The center two bars on each window shall be 115 mm apart. Pass ASTM F1915: .1 Table 1 Impact test criteria: large blunt and sharp impactors, Security Grade 1. .2 Table 2 Impact test criteria: torch and small blunt impactor, Security Grade 1. Pass ASTM F1592: .1 Table 1 Impact Series for Frame and Glazing/Panel Impact Testing Multi Light Frame, Grade 1. Windows: fabricated for reglazing from exterior.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.2
MATERIALS
.1
Supply materials, free from defects which impair strength and durability, or mar the exposed surface appearance, and of best commercial quality for purpose specified. Thickness of extrusions: as required by manufacturer's standard sections. Alloy: Tubular extruded aluminum system, alloy AA6063 T54 with a wall thickness of not less than 2.3 mm. Provide all aluminum sections with an exposed aluminum finished in a anodic oxide treatment to obtain an Architectural Class 1 Anodic Colour Coating in accordance with Aluminum Association Specification AA M12C22A42/44. Colour to be as selected by the Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
.4
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 6 2011-05-25
.5
Thermal separator: low thermal conductivity inert polymerized material or soft PVC, of quality and size to meet design requirements, compressed to seal between main sections and pressure plates.
Provide aluminum or 300 series stainless steel or 400 series cadmium plated screws, rivets and fastenings. Aluminum Window: thermally broken, flush glazed, 65 mm wide face, Aluminum Window section as detailed on the drawings, complete with 76 mm wide by 19 mm deep by 3 mm thick caps to window types W1, W1A, W2, W3 and W4 using manufacturer's standard components; matching stops and pressure plate of sufficient size and strength to provide adequate bite on glass; drainage holes, deflector plates and internal flashings to accommodate internal weep drainage system; internal mullion baffles to eliminate "stack effect" air movement within internal spaces. Window type W4 Operable Window to be thermally broken; operable (side-hinged open-in casement); cast white bronze cam locks; extruded aluminium butt hinge with stainless steel pins (2 per window), using manufacturer's standard components. Veneer system framing (applied to steel detention window frames): Curtain wall veneer system as detailed. Operable Vents - Acceptable material: Kawneer 512 Ventrow with operating mechanism to be coordinated with Section 08 51 13. Section 08 51 13 to provide and install custom made interior 3 mm thick brake formed Type 304 stainless steel perforated plate with No. 4 finish; c/w knurled knob to operate Ventrow. Rivet to Operable Vent with 3 mm dia. stainless steel rivets at 150 mm o.c. around the perimeter as detailed. Refer to Section 08 51 13. Aluminum Flashing: 2.1 mm thick minimum pre-finished aluminum flashing to match aluminum framing. Glazing Seals (mechanically keyed in gasket): extruded black, closed cell or dense elastomer of durometer appropriate to function. Roll in gasket to apply correct pressure on glass.
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 7 2011-05-25
.13
Anti Rotational Channels: aluminum channels, minimum 2.1 mm wall thickness, of size to suit glazing rabbet to Aluminum Window framing, one length piece per location.
Setting Blocks and Spacers: type recommended by the manufacturers of a durometer range of 80 to 90 on setting blocks and 40 to 50 on spacers. Sealants: sealant Type 1 refer to Section 07 92 00. To interior side, use security sealant Type 4 as specified in Section 07 92 00. Screws for securing aluminum members to structure: stainless steel, of a size and shape to withstand all stress and superimposed loads. Steel reinforcements and anchor plates: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W, galvanized after fabrication. Steel primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Bituminous paint: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Air/Vapour Barrier: as specified in Section 07 27 00.01. Foamed Air Seal: as specified in Section 07 21 29.03.
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18 .19 .20 .21
2.3
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate system components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Install anchors. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view. Coordinate fabrication of windows of this section, with detention window frames specified in Section 08 51 13. Coordinate installation of curtain wall veneer attached to steel framing specified in Section 08 51 13.
.2 .3 .4 .5
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 8 2011-05-25
.6 .7 .8 .9 .10
Prepare system components to receive operable vents.

Reinforce framing members for external imposed loads. Visible manufacturer's identification labels not permitted. Face dimensions detailed are maximum permissible sizes. Units square and true with maximum tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 mm for units with a diagonal measurement of 1800 mm or less and plus or minus 3 mm for units with a diagonal measurement over 1800 mm. Form insulated aluminum panels to profiles indicated composed of 1.2 mm thick sheet aluminum faces laminated to 25 mm thick insulation. Form flashing to profiles indicated. Build in structural deflection allowance to prevent transfer of structural load to windows. Build thermal expansion allowance to withstand 85C temperature difference without stressing sealants. Exterior fixed windows: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1, Performance Class CW, Performance Grade PG2160 (CW45), Product Type FW to the following performance levels. .1 Air tightness level: fixed, minimum air 2 leakage resistance of 0.2 L/(s.m ). .2 Design pressure-positive: 2160 Pa. .3 Maximum Deflection at Design Pressure: 1/175. .4 Minimum structural test pressure: 3240 Pa. .5 Minimum water penetration resistance test pressure: 330 Pa. .6 Condensation resistance: I65. Exterior casement windows: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1, Performance Class CW, Performance Grade PG2160 (CW45),
.11
.12 .13 .14
.15
.16
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 9 2011-05-25
.16
Exterior casement windows:(Cont'd) Product Type C, to the following performance levels. .1 Air Tightness/ Minimum Air Leakage 2 Resistance: A3/ 0.5 L/s.m . .2 Minimum Design Pressure: 2160 Pa. .3 Maximum Deflection at Design Pressure: 1/175. .4 Minimum (test and design) Structural Pressure: 3240 Pa. .5 Minimum (test and design) Water Pressure: 330 Pa. .6 Air Tightness/ Minimum Air Leakage Resistance: A3/ 0.5 L/s.m2. .7 Condensation resistance: I65. .8 Insect screens. .9 Operating force: 230 N to open, 200 N to maintain operation to Table 4.
.1
Manufacturer qualifications: company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. Installer qualifications: company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. Design structural support framing components to CAN/CSA-S157 under direct supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the Province of Ontario. All shop drawings to be signed and sealed by the structural engineer. Perform welding Work in accordance with CSA W59.2.
.2
.3
.4
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 10 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1 .2
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. Verify wall openings and adjoining air barrier and vapour retarder materials are ready to receive work of this section.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/ I.S.2/A440, AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1 andCAN/CSA-A440.4-07. Install Aluminum Window system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. Clean weld surfaces; apply protective primer to field welds and adjacent surfaces. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Install all flashings and break shapes as detailed. Do not bridge the thermal break between the interior and exterior sections of the frames with a metal which will destroy the thermal separation provided. Assess each component for appearance and colour and consider any variations when arranging components for assembly. Abrupt variations in appearance and colour will not be permitted. Install aluminum curtain wall veneer framing to window Type 2 attached to steel detention framing as detailed. Coordinate with Section 08 51 13. Around perimeter of windows, install a continuous anti rotational channel into rabbet to prevent rotation of pressure plate when tightened down, and to facilitate clamping in of air/vapour barrier membrane. Mechanically fasten
.2 .3
.4
.5 .6 .7
.8
.9
.10
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 11 2011-05-25
.10
(Cont'd) in place at 300 mm o.c. as indicated, after membrane has been installed and channel has been fitted into place. Coordinate with Section 07 27 00.01. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria. Refer to Section 07 92 00.
.11
.12
3.3 SITE TOLERANCES
.1
Install Work to the following tolerances: .1 Do not exceed 3 mm in 3 metres of length deviation from true vertical and horizontal position in any member nor exceed 6 mm deviation in total run in any line. .2 Do not exceed 1.5 mm maximum offset from true alignment at joints between abutting members in line end to end. .3 Maximum sealant space between aluminum window and adjacent construction: 13 mm.
.1
Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.
3.5 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
.1
Aluminum windows product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their Products. Monitor and report installation procedures, unacceptable conditions.
.2
3.6
CLEANING
.1 .2
Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
.3
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.7
PROTECTION
.1
Protect finished Work from damage.
END
CABINET AND MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
Section 08 70 05 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) .1 ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2003, Cabinet Hardware. .2 ANSI/BHMA A156.11-2004, Cabinet Locks. .3 ANSI/BHMA A156.16-2008, Auxiliary Hardware. .4 ANSI/BHMA A156.18-2006, Materials and Finishes. .5 ANSI/BHMA A156.20-2006, Strap and Tee Hinges and Hasps.
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Hardware List: .1 Submit contract hardware list in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, finish and other pertinent information. Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data, parts list, and manufacturer's instructions for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.2
Section 08 70 05 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: .1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Package items of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location. Storage and Protection: .1 Store cabinet hardware in locked, clean and dry area.
.2
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic and packaging material in appropriate on site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HARDWARE ITEMS
.1
Use one manufacturer's product for all similar items.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE
.1
Hinges: concealed, screw mounted, 110 opening. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Blum Clip and Inserta hinge, 75M355-180 and Mounting Plate 175H710-180 (in Richelieu Hardware Catalogue). .2 Hafele, 329.17.507 and Mounting Plate 329.66.602. .3 Salice C2P6A99 and Mounting Plate BAR3P09. Pulls: 100 mm, brushed chrome `D' pulls.
.2
Section 08 70 05 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE (Cont'd)
.3
Locks (to all doors and drawers): cam locks, counter clockwise unlocking, 180, 2 key pulls to be provided, 19 mm diameter. .1 Acceptable material: .1 High security cam locks, BEST cylinders, no substitutions.
Hanging File Hardware. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Metafile AV1. .2 Hafele 422.73.300 & 422.74.900. .3 Schenk 49101, 49000 & 49001. Drawer slides: side mounted, full extension, 400 mm long, 45 kg capacity per pair. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Accuride 3832A. .2 Repon 3032-16. .3 KV 8405-16. Shelf Supports: adjustable shelf standards to ANSI/BHMA-A156.9, recessed, chrome full height c/w chrome clips. Cord grommets: friction fit, PVC grommet and cap.
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.3
FASTENINGS
.1
Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware. Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware. Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass. Use security fasteners at all locations.
.2 .3 .4
2.4
KEYING
.1
Padlocks and cabinet locks to be master keyed as directed. Submit keying schedule for approval. Provide keys in duplicate for every lock in this Contract. Provide three masterkeys for each MK or GMK group.
.2 .3
Section 08 70 05 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.4 KEYING (Cont'd)
.4 .5
Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders.

BEST cylinders to be used. No substitutions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to project design requirements. Install key control cabinet and establish key control set-up.
.2
3.3
ADJUSTING
.1 .2 .3
Adjust cabinet hardware for optimum, smooth operating condition. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. Adjust cabinet door hardware to ensure tight fit at contact points with frames.
3.4
CLEANING
.1 .2
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Clean hardware with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner, and polish hardware in accordance with manufacture's instructions. Remove protective material from hardware items where present. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
.3 .4
END
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. Section 11 19 12 - Detention Hardware. Electrical Division - Electrical 120 VAC wiring for magnetic strikes, electric releases, electric locks, and magnetic locks.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers' Association (CSDMA). .1 CSDMA Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction): standard hardware location dimensions. American National Standards Institute/ Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. .1 ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2006, Butts and Hinges. .2 ANSI/BHMA A156.2-2003, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. .3 ANSI/BHMA A156.3-2008, Exit Devices. .4 ANSI/BHMA A156.4-2008, Door Controls (Closers). .5 ANSI/BHMA A156.5-2010, Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. .6 ANSI/BHMA A156.6-2010, Architectural Door Trim. .7 ANSI/BHMA A156.8-2010, Door Controls Overhead Holders. .8 ANSI/BHMA A156.13-2005, Mortise Locks and Latches. .9 ANSI/BHMA A156.15-2006, Closer/Holder Release Device. .10 ANSI/BHMA A156.16-2008, Auxiliary Hardware. .11 ANSI/BHMA A156.18-2006, Materials and Finishes. .12 ANSI/BHMA A156.19-2007, Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors. .13 ANSI/BHMA A156.21-2009, American National Standard for Thresholds. .14 ANSI/BHMA A156.31-2007, American National Standard for Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). .1 ASTM F1577-2005, Standard Test Methods for Detention Locks for Swinging Doors.
.2
.3
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number, brand name and number, finish and hardware package number. .3 After approval samples will be returned for incorporation in the Work. Hardware List: .1 Submit contract hardware list prepared by certified architectural hardware consultant, and in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, size, finish and other pertinent information. Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout Submittals .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for door closers, locksets, door holders, electrified hardware and fire exit hardware for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. .2 Conduct briefing of maintenance staff regarding proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Regulatory Requirements: hardware for doors in fire separations and exit doors shall be certified by a Canadian Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada. Certificates: provide product manufacturer certificates certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.2
.3
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 EXTENDED WARRANTY
.1
For the work of this Section 08 71 00, warranty periods shall be ten (10) years for door closers, and two (2) years for the remaining hardware.
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: .1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location. Storage and Protection: .1 Store finishing hardware in locked, clean and dry area.
.2
1.7 WASTE DISPOSAL AND MANAGEMENT
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.2 .3
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Supply two sets of wrenches for door closers locksets and fire exit hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HARDWARE ITEMS
.1
Use one manufacturer's products only for similar items.
2.2
DOOR HARDWARE
.1
Locks and latches: .1 Bored locks and latches: to ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1. .2 All locks and latches to be BEST/Stanley 93K Series to match Facility standards. .3 All to be provided with 16D lever trim and rose. .4 Normal strikes: box type. Lip projection not beyond jamb. .5 Cylinders: keyed into existing keying system as directed. .6 Finished to 626 (C26D). .7 Functions: .1 L1 = F01 Passage .2 L2 = F22 Privacy .3 L3 = F07 Storeroom .4 L4 = F04 Office .5 L5 = Classroom .6 L6 = F14 Storeroom, double cylinder .7 L7 = F18 Deadlock .8 L8 = F15 Hotel Bathroom .9 L9 = F13 Dormitory Dual Axis Builders Hardware Key Cylinders - BC: .1 Interchangeable, heavy security, six-pin tumbler mortise cylinder of dual axis design with independent secondary sidebar pin locking mechanism; meeting ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 Security and UL 437 standard for drill and pick resistance. .2 Tumbler and sidebar assemblies: Stainless steel, hardened stainless steel or nickel silver alloy .3 Body: Brass alloy. .4 Cylinder size: Manufacturer's standard as required to accommodate installation. .5 Keys: Hardware manufacturer's standard, designed to fit dual-axis builders cylinders. .6 Acceptable materials: BEST 1E72 + 1E74. .7 Refer to Section 11 19 12 hardware groups for additional cylinder requirements.
.2
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.2 DOOR HARDWARE (Cont'd)
.3
Electric Strikes: to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1 standards with size, type, function and finishes to match those specified in the hardware groups. .1 All electric strikes to be UL, CUL rated for fire. All to be set as "Fail Secure". .2 Equip all strikes with dual monitoring wire in parallel format to report status of latchbolt and locking cam. .3 All strikes to be provided with Type 304 stainless steel housing faceplates. .4 Electric strike types: .1 ES1: E59311 Rim mounted strike for rim exit devices. .2 ES2: E59321 Mortise mounted strike for mortise locks or exit devices having no deadbolt. .3 ES3: E59381 Mortise mounted strike in inactive leaf of pair of doors for mortise locks or exit devices having no deadbolt. Butts and hinges: .1 Butts and hinges: to ANSI/BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, designated by letter A and numeral identifiers, followed by size and finish, listed in Hardware Schedule. .2 Provide all hinges with hospital tips, concealed bearings and non-removable stainless steel pins. .3 Hinges: .1 H1: A5112 Standard Weight .2 H2: A5111 Heavy Weight .3 H3: A8112 Standard Weight .4 H4: A8111 Heavy Weight Exit devices: to ANSI/BHMA A156.3, type and function as specified and scheduled, Grade 1, modern design, finished to 630. .1 Exit device types and accessories: .1 ED1: Type 1, Figure 4, Function 01, Rim Exit Only Alarm Device. .2 ED2: Type 3, Figure 4, Function 03, Mortise Night Latch Alarm Device, 24 VDC hardwired, c/w appropriate hardware power supply. .3 ED3: Type 3, Figure 6, Function 05, Mortise Locking Thumbpiece. .4 ED4: Type 3, Figure 6, Function 15, Mortise Non-Locking Thumbpiece. .5 ED5: Type 22, Locking removable mullion to suit locking devices. .6 ED6: Type 8, Figure 12, Function 12, Concealed V/R exit device with outside cylinder control. .7 ED7: Type 27, Self-latching auto flushbolts.
.4
.5
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
.5
Exit devices:(Cont'd) .2 Provide delayed egress devices where scheduled, complete with power supplies PS to meet ULC and NBC requirements. .3 Provide labelled devices on rated openings. .4 Provide non-rated devices with cylinder dogging. .5 Provide keyed-function devices with cylinders to match other cylinders. Door Closers and Accessories: .1 Door controls (closers): to ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, and UL10C and UBC for positive pressure fire tests. All closer bodies shall have adjustable spring power, for size ranges 1 through 6, designated by letter C and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule, finished to 652. .2 All surface mounted closers fully reversible, non-handed. Bodies of heavy duty, one piece cast iron construction with full rack and pinion features. .3 All "IH" and "SH" series closers to be supplied with "Security Package" features including advanced backcheck, extra heavy duty arms/tracks and Torx-Plus (6 lobe) security fasteners. .4 Closer covers metal, finished to match arms as detailed in the hardware groups .5 Refer to "BH" and "IH" hardware groups and Door Schedule remarks column for closer types, features and mounting instructions. .6 Closer types: .1 C1 = C02011 .2 C2 = C02021 .3 C3 = C02231 .4 C4 = C02211 .5 C5 = C02021 x PT4G .6 C6 = C02041 .7 C7 = C05031 (IH) concealed detention grade closers .7 All door closers to be provided by one manufacturer. Door Controls: Overhead holders/stops to ANSI/BHMA A156.8, designated by letter C and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule, finished to 626 or 630. .1 Overhead holder types: .1 OH1: C01511, Overhead concealed holder, heavy duty. .2 OH2: C01541, Overhead concealed stop, heavy duty.
.6
.7
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
.7
Door Controls:(Cont'd) .1 Overhead holder types:(Cont'd) .3 OH3: C02511, Overhead surface holder, heavy duty. .4 OH4: C02541, Overhead surface stop, heavy duty. Door Operators: .1 To ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standards with sizes, arms, functions and finishes to suit those specified in hardware group. .2 Operators to operate with 120 VAC power and be actuated at the door by means of push type wall or jamb switch as detailed. .3 Operator width from jamb to jamb of the frame. Finish in clear anodized aluminum, finish designation AA A31. .4 Wall actuator switches 152 mm diameter stainless steel units with Barrier Free symbol engraved. Exterior switches c/w gaskets. .5 Jamb actuator switches, where acceptable, sized to suit pressed steel and/or aluminum frame jambs with full contact moving plate, stainless steel with Barrier Free symbol engraved. .6 Provide units with an electronic interface package when used in conjunction with electronic locking products. .7 Door operator types: .1 AO1: Top jamb push side mounted. .2 AO2: Top jamb pull side mounted. Release Device: to ANSI/BHMA A156.15 standards with types, functions and finishes to suit those specified in hardware groups. .1 Provide with armature and magnet projection to suit. Integrate into Fire Alarm system. .2 Release types: .1 RD1: = C00011 (voltage as required). Architectural door trim: to ANSI/BHMA A156.6, designated by letter J and numeral identifiers as listed below, stainless steel Type 304. Where applied to labeled doors provide labeled products. .1 Door protection plates, KP: kick plate type J102, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel finished to 630. .2 Push plates, PP: type J301, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, B4E edges, size to suit door as scheduled, finished to 630. .3 Mop plates, MP: kick plate type J103, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, finished to 630.
.8
.9
.10
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
.10
Architectural door trim:(Cont'd) .4 Bumper plates, BP: kick plate type J101, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, finished to 630. .5 Push/pull units: size, type and finishes to match those specified in hardware groups. Surface mounted, raised hand grasp design with drilled, countersunk holes in flanges for fasteners. .1 Material and finish: Cast bronze, satin chrome finish 626, or satin stainless steel 630. .2 Exposed fastener heads shall be of finish matching hardware. .3 Door pulls and pushbars: .1 DP1: as specified in Section 11 19 12. .2 DP2: Type J401 x 610 mm long x 32 mm diameter, concealed mounting. .3 DP3: Type J407 x 305 mm long pull x 25 mm diameter. Backplate to be 394 mm high x 38 mm wide x 3 mm thick and drilled to accept pull bolts. .4 DP4: Type J501, horizontal push with concealed mounting bar, sized to suit door width x 32 mm diameter. Auxiliary hardware: to ANSI/BHMA A156.16, designated by letter L and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule and as listed below, finished as specified. .1 Door silencer, RS: push-in type to suit pressed steel frames with 3 mm thick contact pads of rubber or neoprene. .2 Head and Foot Bolt: .1 Manual operation only. Operate by special spanner type key. .2 Case to be malleable iron 137 mm high x 70 mm wide x 38 mm thick. .3 Coverplates 5 mm thick steel. .4 Bolt 25 mm diameter with standard 10 mm projection and 19 mm throw. .5 Fasteners, three 10 mm diameter flat head security screws. .6 Finish: steel primed for paint. .7 Bolt types: .1 HFB1: specified in Section 11 19 12. .2 HFB2: Flush bolts for BH and IH groups, Type L04251. .3 HFB3: Dustproof strike for BH and IH groups, Type L04021. .3 Door Stops: .1 Door stop types: .1 DS1: L52141, low dome floor stop.
.11
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
.11
Auxiliary hardware:(Cont'd) .3 Door Stops:(Cont'd) .2 DS2: L52161, high dome floor stop. .3 DS3: L52251, concealed mount, concave wall stop. .4 DS4: L52011, wall mounted base stop. .4 Coat Hook: Security type with single pole hook that snaps down for safety if excessively loaded. Hook to be an integral part of backplate, approximately 100 x 100 x 20 mm, with hook projection of 30 mm. Attach to wall or door by means of Torx-Plus fasteners on face of coat hook.
.12
Thresholds: to ANSI/BHMA A156.21, 125 mm wide x full width of door opening x 6 mm high, minimum 3 mm thickness extruded aluminum mill finish, serrated surface. Furnish with stainless steel flathead Torx 6-lobe fasteners. .1 Threshold types: .1 TH1: J32120. .2 TH2: J32130. Weatherstripping: .1 Fire and Smoke performance: .1 Fire: Tested in accordance with UL 10B or NFPA 252; UL classified as gasketing material for use in fire doors. .2 Smoke: Meeting requirements of NFPA 105 when tested in accordance with UL 1784 or ASTM E283. .2 Head and jamb seal: to ANSI/BHMA A156.22 standards with size, type and finish to match those specified in hardware groups. .3 Self-adhering Gaskets: Pressure sensitive self-adhesive type silicone compression bulb gasketing; dark bronze or black colour. .4 Bulb Seal with Retainer: Silicone type seal insert in extruded aluminum retainer housing designed for hardware mounting on top. .5 Brush Seal: Minimum 15 mm height nylon brush gasketing insert in extruded aluminum retainer housing designed for mounting to door or frame. .6 Door bottom seal: Minimum 25 mm height nylon brush gasketing insert in extruded aluminum retainer housing designed for surface mounting to bottom edge face of door. .7 Finishes: clear anodized or mill finish. .8 Weatherstrip and door sweep types: .1 WS1: R0Y154, smoke seal. .2 WS2: R3D165, head and jamb gasketing.
.13
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
.13
Weatherstripping:(Cont'd) .8 (Cont'd) .3 WS3: R3A435, door sweep with silicone bulb seal. .4 WS4: R3E326, concealed auto door bottom with silicone bulb seal.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
.1
Padlocks, PL: to ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 Security and UL 437 standard for drill and pick resistance. Heavy duty , high security padlock with removable cylinder plug. .1 Body: Case hardened stainless steel. .2 Shackle: Minimum 11 mm diameter, rustproof, case hardened steel. .3 Cylinder plug: Removable six-pin tumbler type with independent secondary sidebar pin locking mechanism of same design as specified for dual-axis Builders Hardware cylinders. .4 Same manufacturer and keyway as supplied Builders Hardware cylinders.
2.4
NUMBER PLATE
.1
Provide each door with engraved lamacoid number plate 38 mm high x length to suit, engraved with door number shown on drawings. Letter height 25 mm. Secure number plate to access side of door, in top-most corner on latch side with Torx-Plus security screws, or as directed.
.2
2.5
FASTENINGS
.1
Use only fasteners provided by manufacturer. Failure to comply may void warranties and applicable licensed labels. Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware. Use security "Torx-Plus" (6-lobe) fasteners. Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware. Where pull is scheduled on one side of door and push plate on other side, supply fastening devices, and install so pull can be secured through door from reverse side. Install push plate to cover fasteners. Supply flush pulls
.2
.3 .4
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.5 FASTENINGS (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) with machine screws for attaching as specified above. Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.
.5
2.6
KEYING
.1
Lay out keying system for the building in consultation with Departmental Representative. Keying system shall include keying alike, keying differently, keying in groups, master keying and grand-master keying locks as required. All non-mogul cylinders to be construction keyed for duration of project construction. Prepare and submit keying chart and related explanatory data to the Departmental Representative for approval. Do not commence lock work until written confirmation of keying arrangements is received from Departmental Representative. The Departmental Representative shall enter into a "Contract" with the dual-axis builders cylinder manufacturer. Said "Contract" shall be separate from the Contractor's scope of work. The "Contract" is for the sole purpose of establishing and maintaining the security of the keying system as it relates to this Facility for key and keyway control. It shall in no way involve or establish any monetary considerations for the Facility, Contractor or manufacturer. Supply following keys: .1 3 grand-master keys .2 3 master keys per group .3 2 change keys for each lock .4 10 construction keys Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders. Provide construction cores. Provide all permanent cores and keys to Departmental Representative. Forward grand-master, master, change keyes and mogul cylinder keyes to Departmental Representative by registered mail or bonded courier with covering letter.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 12 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COORDINATION
.1
This Section supplier to install all hardware and doors for "BH" hardware groups specified herein. Co-ordinate installation with allied trades such as architectural woodwork, metal doors and frames, partition suppliers and installers. Supply cylinders for locks provided under other Sections.
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets. Furnish metal door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware. Furnish manufacturers' instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.
.2
.3
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction) prepared by Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association. Where door stop contacts door pulls, mount stop to strike bottom of pull. Install key control cabinet. Remove construction cores when directed by Departmental Representative; install permanent cores and check operation of locks.
.2 .3 .4
3.4
ADJUSTING
.1
Provide services of competent mechanic to inspect installation of hardware furnished under this Section and to supervise all adjustments (by the trade responsible for fixing) which are necessary to leave hardware in perfect working order.
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 13 2011-05-25
3.4 ADJUSTING (Cont'd)
.2
Adjust door hardware, operators, closures and controls for optimum, smooth operating condition, safety and for weather tight closure.
Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts. Adjust door hardware to provide tight fit at contact points with frames.
.3 .4
3.5
CLEANING
.1 .2
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Clean hardware with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner, and polish hardware in accordance with manufacture's instructions. Remove protective material from hardware items where present. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
.3 .4
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Keying System Setup and Cabinet: .1 Set up key control system with file key tags, duplicate key tags, numerical index, alphabetical index and key change index, label shields, control book and key receipt cards. .2 Place file keys and duplicate keys in key cabinet on their respective hooks. .3 Lock key cabinet and turn over key to Departmental Representative. Maintenance Staff Briefing: .1 Brief maintenance staff regarding: .1 Proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance of projects complete hardware. .2 Description, use, handling, and storage of keys. .3 .3 Use, applicatn and storage of wrenches for door closers, locksets and fire exit hardware. Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication requirements.
.2
.3
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 14 2011-05-25
3.7 HARDWARE GROUPS
.1
Indicated hardware groups are for one door or one pair of doors only. Provide this quantity for each door or pair of doors as scheduled. Group B1 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D 1 - lock set L5 x C26D 1 - door stop DS2 x C26D Group B2 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D 1 - lock set L5 x C26D 1 - door stop DS2 x C26D Group B3 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D 1 - lock set L3 x C26D 1 - closer (concealed), C7, Alum. Group B4 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x C26D 1 - lock set L3 x C26D 1 - closer (concealed) C7, Alum. 1 - door stop DS2 x C26D Group B5 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x C26D 1 - privacy set L2 x C26D 1 - door stop DS4 x C26D Group B6 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D 1 - lock set L3 x C26D 1 - closer (concealed) C7, Alum. 1 - astragal, integral with door 2 - flush bolts L04251, top and bottom of door x C26D 1 - overhead door stop OH3 x C26D Group B7 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D 1 - lock set L3 x C26D 1 - closer (concealed) C7, Alum. 1 - door stop DS2 x C26D Group B8 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x C26D 1 - passage set L1 x C26D 1 - closer (concealed) C7, Alum. 1 - door stop DS2 x C26D Group B9 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x C26D 1 - passage set L1 x C26D 1 - door stop DS2 x C26D Group B10 1 - padlock, BE 21B 7 22 Group B11 1 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x C26D 1 - passage set L1 x C26D 1 - weatherstrip WS2, 4 sides x C26D 1 - door stop DS3 x C26D Group B12 4 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x C26D 1 - passage set L1 x C26D 1 - closer (surface) C1, Alum. 1 - astragal, 50 mm flat bar, Alum. 1 - coordinator 1 - constant latching flush bolt to engage when active door closes 2 - magnetic hold open devices, wall mounted (Refer to Division 26, Electrical for hook-up)
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11 .12
.13
DOOR HARDWARE
Section 08 71 00 Page 15 2011-05-25
3.7 HARDWARE GROUPS (Cont'd)
.14
Group B13 1-1/2 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x C26D 1 - passage set L1 x C26D 1 - weatherstrip WS2, Alum. 1 - threshold TH1, Alum. 1 - auto door bottom WS4, Alum. 1 - door stop DS2 x C26D
Group B14 1 pair - hinges H3, 114 x 101 x C26D 1 - passage set L1 x C26D 1 - door stop DS2 x C26D
.15
END
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International .1 ASTM C542-05, Standard Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets. .2 ASTM D790-10, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. .3 ASTM D1003-07e1, Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance of Plastics. .4 ASTM D1929-96(R2008)e1, Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics. .5 ASTM D2240-05(2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. .6 ASTM E84-10, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .7 ASTM E330-02(2010), Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .8 ASTM F1233-08, Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass. .2 CAN/CGSB-12.2-M91, Flat, Clear Sheet Glass. .3 CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, Flat, Clear Float Glass. .4 CAN/CGSB-12.4-M91, Heat Absorbing Glass. .5 CAN/CGSB-12.6-M91, Transparent (One-Way) Mirrors. .6 CAN/CGSB-12.8-97, Insulating Glass Units. .7 CAN/CGSB-12.8-97 (Amendment), Insulating Glass Units. .8 CAN/CGSB-12.9-M91, Spandrel Glass. .9 CAN/CGSB-12.10-M76, Glass, Light and Heat Reflecting. .10 CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90, Wired Safety Glass. .11 CAN/CGSB-12.12-M90, Plastic Safety Glazing Sheets. .12 CAN/CGSB-12.13-M91, Patterned Glass. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09/A440.3-09, Energy Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration Systems/User Guide to CSA A440.2-09, Energy
.2
.3
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration Systems. .2 CSA Certification Program for Windows and Doors 2000. Environmental Choice Program (ECP) .1 CCD-045-95(R2005), Sealants and Caulking Compounds. Flat Glass Manufacturers Association (FGMA). .1 FGMA Glazing Manual - 1997. Laminators Safety Glass Association (LSGA). .1 LSGA Laminated Glass Design Guide 2000.
.4
.5 .6
.1
Performance Requirements: .1 Provide continuity of building enclosure vapour and air barrier using glass and glazing materials as follow: .1 Utilize inner light of multiple light sealed units for continuity of air and vapour seal. .2 Size glass to withstand wind loads, dead loads and positive and negative live loads as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. .3 Limit glass deflection to flexural limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials.
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate VOC's for glazing materials during application and curing. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit duplicate 300 mm size square samples of each type of glass.
.2
.3
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50 Page 3 2011-05-25
.4
Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation .1 instructions.

Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data including cleaning instructions for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.5
.1
Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .1 Provide testing and analysis of glass under provisions of Section 01 45 00. .2 Provide shop inspection and testing for glass. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store materials off ground, indoors in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Store and protect glazing from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.2
.3
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50 Page 4 2011-05-25
.1
Ambient Requirements: .1 Install glazing when ambient temperature is 10 degrees C minimum. Maintain ventilated environment for 24 hours after application. .2 Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert metal cut offs from landfill by disposal into on site metal recycling bin. Divert uninstalled materials for reuse at nearest used building materials facility or similar type facility. Divert unused caulking and sealant materials from landfill through disposal at special wastes depot. Unused or damaged glazing materials are not recyclable and must not be diverted to municipal recycling programs. Remove form site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic and packaging material in appropriate on site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.4
.5
.6 .7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FLAT GLASS
.1
Safety glass (Glass type A1): to CAN/CGSB-12.1, transparent, 6 mm thick. .1 Type 2 - fully tempered. .2 Class B - float. .3 Category 11. Safety glass (Glass type A2): to CAN/CGSB-12.1, Tinted one-way mirrored, 6 mm thick. .1 Type 2 - fully tempered. .2 Class B - float. .3 Category 11.
.2
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.1 MATERIALS FLAT GLASS (Cont'd)
.3
Wired glass (Glass type B1): to CAN/CGSB-12.11, 6 mm thick. .1 Type 1 - polished both sides (transparent). .2 Wire mesh styles 3 - Square.
Security Glazing (Glass Type K1): 19 mm (nominal) thick laminated unit, consisting of one lite of 3.16 mm chemically strengthened tempered glass, with 1.27 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite of 9.48 mm polycarbonate core, 1.27 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite 3.16 mm chemically strengthened tempered glass. Forced entry level 2, Ballistic Level A. .1 Acceptable material: Globe Amerada Architectural Glass, product 2116; No Substitution. Security Glazing (Glass type K2): 25 mm (nominal) thick laminated unit, consisting of one lite of 3.16 mm chemically strengthened tempered glass, with 1.27 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite of 3.16 mm polycarbonate core, 0.64 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite of 6.4 mm polycarbonate core, 0.64 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite of 3.16 mm polycarbonate core, 1.27 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite 3.16 mm chemically strengthened tempered glass. Forced entry level 4, Ballistic Level A. .1 Acceptable material: Globe Amerada Architectural Glass, product 2114; No Substitution.
.4
.5
2.2 MATERIAL SEALED INSULATING GLASS
.1
Insulating glass units (Glass Type H1): to CAN/CGSB-12.8, double unit, 25 mm overall thickness. .1 Glass (inner and outer lites): Glass type T1, 6 mm transparent tempered glass. .2 Inter cavity space thickness: 12 mm between inner and outer lites with low conductivity spacers. .3 Inert gas fill: argon.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
.1
Glazing Tape: 100% solids, ribbon form extruded polyisobutylene butyl type, 10 to 15 durometer hardness, paper release, colour to match adjacent surfaces, size to suit opening. Gaskets to aluminum windows: as specified in Section 08 51 13.
.2
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50 Page 6 2011-05-25
.3
Setting Blocks: Neoprene: 70 to 90 durometer Shore "A" hardness, 100 mm long x 9.5 mm thick x 6 mm high.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene: 50 durometer hardness, 75 mm x 2.4 mm thick x 6 mm high. Glazing Points, and wire spring clips: corrosion resistant, manufacturer's standard. Security Sealant: refer to Section 07 92 00.
.4 .5 .6 PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.
3.2
EXAMINATION
.1 .2
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.
3.3
PREPARATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. Use Security Sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 complete with bond breaker to all interior glazing installations where sealant is exposed.
3.4 INSTALLATION: TO EXTERIOR SECURITY DOORS
.1
Use Security Sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 complete with bond breaker to all interior glazing installations where sealant is exposed.
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.4 INSTALLATION: TO EXTERIOR SECURITY DOORS (Cont'd)
.2
Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing light. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with sealant.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. Apply continuous heal bead of sealant to maintain complete and continuous air barrier. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. Trim protruding tape edge.
.3 .4
.5 .6
.7
3.5 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR ALUMINUM WINDOWS
.1
Lock strip gasket method: .1 Unpack and lay out gaskets on flat warm area to permit recovery of shape. .2 Install gaskets under compression from corners inward. Seal corner junctions between gaskets with a black type 1 sealant specified in Section 07 92 00. .3 Drain infiltrated moisture to exterior through drain holes in sill. .4 Install locking strip and gasket assembly to manufacturer's instructions.
3.6 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) TO HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND WINDOWS, DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES
.1
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above sight line. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of light or unit. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. Knife trim protruding tape.
.2 .3
.4 .5
.6
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.7
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Remove traces of primer, caulking. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. Remove labels after work is complete. Clean glass using approved non-abrasive cleaner in accordance with manufacture's instructions. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
3.8
PROTECTION
.1 .2
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction. After installation, mark each light with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste. .1 Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by glazing installation.
.3
END
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International .1 ASTM C840-08,Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. .2 ASTM C1280-09, Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board. .3 ASTM C1288-99(2010), Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior Substrate Sheets. .4 ASTM C1396/C1396M-09a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
.1
Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit 300 mm long samples of corner and casing beads.
.1
Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing manufacturers brand name and identification. Store materials inside, level, under cover. Keep dry. Protect from weather, other elements and damage from construction operations and other causes. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal accessories and trim from being bent or damaged.
.2
.3
.1
Maintain temperature minimum 10 degrees C, maximum 21 degrees C for 48 hours prior to and during application of gypsum boards and joint treatment, and for at least 48 hours after completion of joint treatment.
.2 .3
Apply board and joint treatment to dry, frost free surfaces. Ventilation: ventilate building spaces as required to remove excess moisture that would
Section 09 21 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 AMBIENT CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
.3
Ventilation:(Cont'd) prevent drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application.
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard and packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused gypsum from landfill to gypsum recycling facility for disposal approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused wood materials from landfill to recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused paint and caulking material from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused paint and caulking materials into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 09 21 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: conforming to ASTM C1396/C1396M, 15.9 mm in thickness, Type X where required, abuse resistant gypsum board consisting of fire resistant, dimensionally stable gypsum core formed between a face layer of heavy, smooth, abuse resistant paper, and a back layer of heavy liner paper. .1 Acceptable materials: .1 ToughRock Abuse Resistant gypsum board by Georgia Pacific, www.gp.com, 1-800-225-6119 .2 Abuse Resistant gypsum board by CGC Sheetrock, www.cgcinc.com, 1-800-387-2690. .3 Abuse Resistant gypsum board by BPB Prorock, www.certainteed.com, 1-800-233-8990. Gypsum Board furring channels: as specified in Section 09 22 16. Cement board: 12.7 mm thick expanded shale, light weight concrete core with fiberglass mesh reinforcement on both surfaces with high density Portland cement both sides, 1829 mm long x 914 mm wide. Acceptable materials: .1 Wonderboard by Custom Building Products, www.custombuildingproducts.com, 1-800-272-8786. .2 Durock by CGC,www.cgcinc.com, 1-800-387-2690.
.2 .3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
.1 .2 .3
Do application and finishing of gypsum board to ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise. Do application of gypsum sheathing to ASTM C1280. Erect hangers and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings to ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise. Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture. Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200.
.4
.5
Section 09 21 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
.6
Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures, diffusers, grilles.
3.2
APPLICATION
.1
Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, sound attenuation, electrical and mechanical work are approved. Apply single and double layer gypsum board to metal furring or framing using screw fasteners. Maximum spacing of screws 300 mm o/c. Install gypsum board to fire rated assemblies, including new infills in existing fire rated assemblies, to maintain continuity of the fire ratings to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction. Apply 12 mm diameter bead of acoustic sealant continuously around periphery of each face of partitioning to seal gypsum board/structure junction where partitions abut fixed building components. Seal full perimeter of cut outs around electrical boxes, ducts, in partitions where perimeter sealed with acoustic sealant.
.2
.3
.4
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure at 150 mm o/c using contact adhesive for full length. Install casing beads around perimeter of suspended ceilings. Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing junction and where indicated. Seal joints with sealant. Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and casing beads abutting metal window and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break. Construct control joints of preformed units set in gypsum board facing and supported independently on both sides of joint.
.2 .3
.4
.5
Section 09 21 16 Page 5 2011-05-25
.6 .7
Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints.
Locate control joints at changes in substrate construction and at approximate 10 m spacing on long corridor runs. Install control joints straight and true. Install expansion joint straight and true. Splice corners and intersections together and secure to each member with 3 screws. Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out onto panel faces. Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces. Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is completed. Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board. Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and ready for surface finish. Apply one coat of white primer sealer over surface to be textured. When dry apply textured finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Mix joint compound slightly thinner than for joint taping. Apply thin coat to entire surface using trowel or drywall broad knife to fill surface texture differences, variations or tool marks. Allow skim coat to dry completely. Remove ridges by light sanding or wiping with damp cloth.
.8 .9 .10 .11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17 .18
.19 .20
Section 09 21 16 Page 6 2011-05-25
.21
Patch and make good existing gypsum board surfaces which are affected by work of this Contract.
END
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Section 09 22 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM C645-09a, Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. .2 ASTM C840-08, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. .3 ASTM C919 08, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. Environmental Choice Program (ECP). .1 CCD-047a-98, Paints - Surface Coatings. .2 CCD-048-98, Surface Coatings - Recycled Water-borne.
.2
.3
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.2
.3
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
Section 09 22 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.5
Divert unused gypsum materials from landfill to recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Non-load bearing channel stud framing: to ASTM C645,stud size as noted on the drawings, roll formed from 0.53 mm thickness hot dipped galvanized steel sheet, for screw attachment of gypsum board. Knock-out service holes at 460 mm centres. Use minimum 0.840 mm base metal thickness studs to door jambs. Floor and ceiling tracks: to ASTM C645, in widths to suit stud sizes,flanges for floor tracks not less than 32 mm high. Flanges for top track 50 mm. Base metal thickness is to match stud thickness as noted above. Channel retainer for double track at head of partitions: 0.53 mm metal core thickness hot dipped galvanized; fabricated just wide enough to accept top track; in as long lengths as practical. Gypsum board furring channels: hat shaped,from 0.51 mm core thickness hot dipped galvanized sheet steel 22 mm deep x 32 mm wide face. Face knurled. Metal channel stiffener: 38 mm x 12 mm size, 1.4 mm thick cold rolled steel, coated with rust inhibitive coating. Bracing and carrying channels: except as noted otherwise 38 mm x 12 mm x 1.4 mm, with protective paint coating. Where appropriate, light gauge metal framing members may be used in lieu of channels. Tie wire: galvanized soft annealed 1.6 mm diameter. Hangers: galvanized mild steel, 6 mm diameter. Anchors for suspended ceilings hung from concrete elements: drilled type with eye bolt, with safe working load not exceeding 25% of manufacturer's stated average test loads.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7 .8 .9
Section 09 22 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
.10 .11 .12 .13
Girt framing: 0.53 mm core thickness, "Z" girts of width to accommodate insulation thickness. Sheet metal liner: 1.2 mm thick galvanized sheet metal. Acoustical sealant: to ASTM C919-08. Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant 3 mm thick foam strip, 12 mm wide, with self sticking adhesive on one face, lengths as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
.1 .2 .3
Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling and secure at 600 mm on centre maximum. Install damp proof course under stud shoe tracks of partitions on slabs on grade. Place studs vertically at 400 mm on centre and not more than 50 mm from abutting walls, and at each side of openings and corners. Position studs in tracks at floor and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to manufacturer's instructions. Erect metal studding to tolerance of 1:1000. Floor and overhead tracks: .1 For partitions extending to underside of structure anchor the galvanized sheet metal channel retaining the top track (for deflection control) to underside of structure using drilled screw on fasteners at 600 mm o/c to concrete structure. Install top track on two beads of acoustical sealant. Form the upper track 1.6 mm wider to nest with the lower. Screw studs to the lower track, near the bottom edge of the flange. DO NOT SCREW STUDS OR TOP CHANNEL THROUGH TO RETAINING CHANNEL. Co-ordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. When erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned. Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections.
.4 .5
.6
.7
Section 09 22 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
.8
Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider than stud centres specified. Secure studs together, 50 mm apart using column clips or other approved means of fastening placed alongside frame anchor clips.
Install heavy gauge single jamb studs at openings. Erect track at head of door/window openings and sills of sidelight/window openings to accommodate intermediate studs. Secure track to studs at each end, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install intermediate studs above and below openings in same manner and spacing as wall studs. Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides. Extend framing into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers. Provide 40 mm stud or furring channel secured between studs for attachment of fixtures behind lavatory basins, toilet and bathroom accessories, and other fixtures including grab bars and towel rails, attached to steel stud partitions. Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other boxes. Extend partitions to ceiling height except where noted otherwise on drawings. Install metal liner to all walls where indicated and as directed by the Departmental Representative. Allow for 25 mm live load deflection on all stud walls which terminate at underside of beams and structural slabs to avoid transmission of structural loads to studs. Install continuous insulating strips to isolate studs from un-insulated surfaces. Install two continuous beads of acoustical sealant under studs and tracks around perimeter of sound control partitions.
.9 .10
.11
.12
.13 .14 .15
.16
.17 .18
Section 09 22 16 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS
.1
Install suspension system where required for gypsum board ceilings, at height(s) indicated on drawings. Erect after above ceiling work is complete. Co ordinate the location of hangers with other work. Install suspension system independent of walls, columns and above ceiling work. Securely anchor hangers to structural members or embed in structural slab. Anchor hangers into angled side of metal deck flutes. Space hangers in accordance with ASTM C840. Install hangers plumb and true to line and vertical. Hangers installed at an angle to the ceiling will not be accepted. Where hangers are visible, evenly and neatly space hangers. Install suspension system in a manner capable of supporting all superimposed loads, with maximum permissible deflection of 1/360 of span and maximum surface deviation of 3 mm in 3 m. Ensure layout of hangers and carrying channels are located to accommodate fittings and equipment to be placed after installation of ceilings. Install main carrying channels at 1200 mm o/c from hangers at 1200 mm o/c along each carrying channel. Weld studs to carrying channels as indicated on the drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Locate runners at interruptions and changes in directions. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels to span the required distance. Install hangers plumb and not pressed against ducts, pipes or conduits. Splayed hangers are not acceptable. Arrange hangers to cause as little interference as possible to ducts and piping. Form hangers tightly and sharply around main runner channels to prevent movement or rotation of the channel within the loop. Securely saddle tie channel to hanger and return loop leg of hanger to the hanger with two strands of tie wire. Do not make kinks or bends in hangers as a means of levelling main runner channels.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 09 22 16 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS (Cont'd)
.11
Install furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at 400 mm on centre, and not more than 50 mm from perimeter walls. Rigidly secure to carrying channels. Lap splices 200 mm and secure together 25 mm from each end of splice.
Ensure furring member ends and sides are not in contact with walls. Provide additional furring members where required. Provide double (side by side) furring to enable control joints to be no more than 15 m apart, each way. Support light fixtures larger than 1200 mm x 1200 mm by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system, which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 600 mm past each end of openings. Laterally brace entire suspension system. Install metal liner panels to all ceilings where indicated and as directed by the Departmental Representative. Install metal access panels where indicated on drawings. Rigidly secure in place. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical.
.12
.13
.14
.15 .16
.17
3.3
CLEANING
.1
END
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units. Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33. .2 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
.3
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 02 81 01. Submit duplicate full size samples of each type acoustical units.
.1
Fire-resistance rated floor/ceiling and roof/ceiling assembly: certified by a Canadian Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada.
1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 .2 .3
Protect on site stored or installed absorptive material from moisture damage. Store extra materials required for maintenance, where directed by Departmental Representative. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. .3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene and corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan (WMP).
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING (Cont'd)
.3
Waste Management and Disposal:(Cont'd) Separate for reuse and recycling and place .4 in designated containers Steel, Metal and Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan. .5 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers in accordance with Section 01 35 43. .6 Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. .7 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely in accordance with Section 01 35 43. .8 Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.1 .2
Permit wet work to dry before commencement of installation. Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15C and humidity of 20-40% before and during installation. Store materials in work area 48 hours prior to installation.
.3
1.6
EXTRA MATERIAL
.1 .2
Provide extra materials of acoustic units in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide acoustical units amounting to 2% of gross ceiling area for each pattern and type required for project. Extra materials to be from same production run as installed materials. Clearly identify each type of acoustic unit, including colour and texture. Deliver to Departmental Representative, upon completion of the work of this section.
.3 .4 .5
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: Mineral fibre panels conforming to CAN/CGSB 92.1, and as follows: .1 Pattern: non directional fissured .2 Flame spread classification: 25 or less .3 Size: 600 mm x 1200 mm .4 Thickness: 16 mm .5 Edges: square edges for regular T bar grid installation .6 Colour: white .7 NRC: 0.55. .8 Light Reflectance: 0.80 minimum .9 CAC: 35 Hold down clips: purpose made clips to secure tile to suspension system, approved for use in fire-rated systems.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been inspected by Departmental Representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install acoustical panels and tiles in ceiling suspension system.
3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK
.1 .2
Co-ordinate with Section 09 53 00.01. Co-ordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light fixtures, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling components.
END
ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION
Sect 09 53 00.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM C635/C635M-07, Standard Specifications for the Manufacture, Performance and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. .2 ASTM C636/C636M-08, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
.1
Maximum deflection: 1/360th of span to ASTM C635/C635M deflection test.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit reflected ceiling plans for special grid patterns as indicated. .2 Indicate lay-out, insert and hanger spacing and fastening details, splicing method for main and cross runners, location of access splines, change in level details, access door dimensions, and locations and acoustical unit support at ceiling fixture lateral bracing and accessories. Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit one representative model of each type ceiling suspension system. .2 Ceiling system to show basic construction and assembly, treatment at walls, recessed fixtures, splicing, interlocking, finishes, acoustical unit installation.
.3
.1
Fire-resistance rated suspension system: certified by a Canadian Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada.
Sect 09 53 00.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section01 74 20.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3
Heavy duty system to ASTM C635/C635M. Basic materials for suspension system: commercial quality cold rolled steel. Exposed tee bar grid components: shop painted satin sheen white. Components die cut. Main tee with double web, rectangular bulb and 25 mm rolled cap on exposed face. Cross tee with rectangular bulb; web extended to form positive interlock with main tee webs; lower flange extended and offset to provide flush intersection. Hanger wire: galvanized soft annealed steel wire: .1 3.6 mm diameter for access tile ceilings. Hanger inserts: purpose made. Accessories: splices, clips, wire ties, retainers and wall moulding flush, to complement suspension system components, as recommended by system manufacturer.
.4
.5 .6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Installation: in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M except where specified otherwise. Install suspension system to manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Sect 09 53 00.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been inspected by Departmental Representative.
Secure hangers to overhead structure using attachment methods as indicated acceptable to Departmental Representative. Install hangers spaced at maximum 1200 mm centres and within 150 mm from ends of main tees. Lay outsystem according to reflected ceiling plan. Ensure suspension system is co-ordinated with location of related components. Install wall moulding to provide correct ceiling height. Completed suspension system to support super-imposed loads, such as lighting fixtures diffusers grilles, speakers and cubicle curtains (see Section 10 21 24)as applicable. Support at light fixturesanddiffusers with additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture. Attach cross member to main runner to provide rigid assembly. Frame at openings for light fixtures, air diffusers, speakers and at changes in ceiling heights. Finished ceiling system to be square with adjoining walls and level within 1:1000.
.4
.5
.6 .7 .8 .9
.10
.11 .12
.13
3.3
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section01 74 11. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.
END
RESILIENT TILE AND SHEET FLOORING
Section 09 65 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM F1303-04(2009), Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering With Backing. .2 ASTM F1344 10, Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S102.2 10, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Coverings, and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies. Treasury Board of Canada Secretariat .1 Chapter 3-6, Fire Protection Standard for Correctional Institutions, Article 3.6 "Interior Finish Materials". Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
.3
.4
1.2
SUBMITALS
.1 .2 .3
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample pieces of sheet material, 300 mm long base, nosing, feature strips, treads, edge strips. .2 Submit duplicate tile in size specified, 300 mm long base, edge strips. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data for resilient flooring for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.4
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
Section 09 65 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
Waste Management and Disposal: Separate waste materials for reuse and .1 recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.1
Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at flooring installation area above 20 degrees for 48 hours before, during and 48 hours after installation.
.1
Provide extra materials of resilient sheet flooring and adhesives in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide maintenance materials of resilient tile flooring, base and adhesive in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide 3 m2 of each colour, pattern and type flooring material required for project for maintenance use. Extra materials to be one piece and from the same production run as installed materials. Identify each roll of sheet flooring,container of floor tile and each container of adhesive. Deliver to Departmental Representative, upon completion of the work of this section. Unload and store where directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Vinyl composition tile (VCT): to ASTM F1066, Composition 1, non-asbestos, Class 2, through pattern tile, 3.2 mm thick, 305 x 305 mm size, colours and patterns as indicated in Finish Schedule. Finish: .1 Factory prefinished.
.2
Section 09 65 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Resilient base:continuous, top set, complete with premoulded end stops and external corners for coved base only: .1 Type: rubber. .2 Style: straight and cove. .3 Thickness: 3.17 mm. .4 Height: 101.6 mm. .5 Lengths: cut lengths minimum 2400 mm. .6 Colour: selected by Departmental Representative.
Resilient stair tread: rubber, 30 mm vertical face, square nose, full tread deep, 5 mm thick, colours and patterns as selected by Departmental Representative. Resilient stair riser: top set rubber, 3.2 mm thick, full riser height, colours and patterns as selected by Departmental Representative. Sheet rubber flooring: conforming to ASTM F1344, overall thickness minimum 3.0 mm, width 1.4 m, weldable seams, colour and texture to match resilient stair treads. Primers and adhesives: waterproof, of types recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific material on applicable substrate, above, on or below grade. Resin welding rod: type recommended by flooring manufacturer. Subfloor filler and leveller: white premix latex requiring water only to produce cementitious paste as recommended by flooring manufacturer for use with their product. Metal edge strips: .1 Aluminum extruded, smooth, mill finish stainless steel with lip to extend under floor finish, shoulder flush with top of adjacent floor finish. External corner protectors: stainless steel, type recommended by flooring manufacturer. Edging to floor penetrations: stainless steel, type recommended by flooring manufacturer. Sealer and wax: type recommended by resilient flooring material manufacturer for material type and location.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8 .9
.10
.11 .12 .13
Section 09 65 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.14 .15
Flame spread rating must meet TB Chapter 3-6 FPSCI Article 3.6. To CAN/ULC S102.2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
.1
Ensure concrete floors are clean and dry by using test methods recommended by flooring manufacturer.
3.3
PREPARATION
.1
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with sub-floor filler. Clean floor and apply filler; trowel and float to leave smooth, flat hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler cured and dry. Prime concrete slab to resilient flooring manufacturer's printed instructions.
.2
.3
3.4 APPLICATION: FLOORING
.1
Provide a high ventilation rate, with maximum outside air, during installation, and for 48 to 72 hours after installation. If possible, vent directly to the outside. Do not let contaminated air recirculate through a district or whole building air distribution system. Maintain extra ventilation for at least one month following building occupation. Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place. Lay sheet flooring with seams parallel to building lines to produce a minimum number of seams. Border widths minimum 1/3 width of full material.
.2
.3
Section 09 65 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.4 APPLICATION: FLOORING (Cont'd)
.4
Double cut sheet joints and continuously seal according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
Lay tile flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. Border tiles minimum half tile width. Install flooring to square grid pattern with all joints aligned with pattern grain alternating to produce basket weave pattern. As installation progresses and after installation roll flooring in two (2) directions with 45 kg minimum roller to ensure full adhesion. Cut flooring and tile and fit neatly around fixed objects. Install feature strips and floor markings where indicated. Fit joints tightly. Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. Continue flooring over areas which will be under built in furniture. Continue flooring through areas to receive movable type partitions without interrupting floor pattern. Terminate flooring at centreline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar. Install metal edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.
.5
.6
.7
.8 .9 .10 .11 .12
.13
.14
3.5 APPLICATION STAIRS
.1 .2
Finish stair risers and install prior to tread material. Install stair treads and stair risers one piece for full width of stair. Adhere over entire surface and fit accurately.
Section 09 65 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.6 APPLICATION BASE
.1
Lay out base to keep number of joints at minimum. Base joints at maximum length available or at internal or premoulded corners. Clean substrate and prime with one coat of adhesive. Apply adhesive to back of base. Set base against wall and floor surfaces tightly by using 3 kg hand roller. Install straight and level to variation of 1:1000. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. Use premoulded end pieces at flush door frames. Cope internal corners. Use premoulded corner units for right angle external corners. Use formed straight base material for external corners of other angles, minimum 300 mm each leg. Wrap around toeless base at external corners. Use toeless type base where floor finish will be carpet, coved type elsewhere. Install toeless type base before installation of carpet on floors. Heat weld base in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6
.7
.8 .9 .10
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.8
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage. Clean, seal and wax floor and base surface to flooring manufacturer's printed instructions.
Section 09 65 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.9
PROTECTION
.1 .2
Protect new floors from time of final set of adhesive until final inspection. Prohibit traffic on floor for 48 hours after installation.
END
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Contract Carpet Manual, and the Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials (1992), The Carpet and Rug Institute and The Canadian Carpet Institute, (613)232-7183. .1 CRI 104 02, Standard Installation of Commercial Carpet. .2 IAQ Carpet Testing Program. Floor Covering Specification Manual (1988), National Floor Covering Association, c/o Floor Covering Institute of Ontario, 25 Clairville Drive, Rexdale, Ontario, M9W 5Z7, (416)675-4332. .1 Floor Covering Specification Manual 1998. Colorfastness to Light, AATCC 16-2004, AATCC, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, 27709, U.S.A. AATCC 23-2010, Colorfastness to Burn Gas Fumes. AATCC 129-2010, Colorfastness to Ozone in the Atmosphere Under High Humidities. ASTM D2661 08, Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D3936-05, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Delamination of the Secondary Backing of Pile Yarn Floor Covering. ASTM D5252-05, Standard Practice for the Operation of the Hexapod Drum Tester. ASTM D5417-05, Standard Practice for Operation of the Vettermann Drum Tester. CAN/CGSB-4.2-No.27.6-M91, Nov. 2004, Textile Test Methods - Flame Resistance - Methenamine Tablet Test for Textile Floor Coverings. CAN/CGSB-4.2 No.77.1-94/ISO 4919:1978, Jun. 2000, Textile Test Methods - Carpets Determination of Tuft Withdrawal Force. CAN/CGSB-25.20-95, Surface Sealer Floors. CAN/CGSB-4.129-93 AMEND.-1997, Carpet for Commercial Use.
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
.7
.8 .9 .10
.11
.12 .13
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.14 .15
CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Materials.

CAN/ULC-S102.2-10, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Covering and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies. CRI 104-2002, Standard Installation of Commercial Carpet. IAQ Carpet Testing Program.
.16 .17
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Submit control submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit verification to demonstrate compliance with CAN/ULC-S102 and CAN/ULC-S102.2. Submit proof that carpet has been tested and passed the Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Carpet Testing Program requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) and the Canadian Carpet Institute (CCI). Submit report verifying that tuft bind meets requirements of CAN/CGSB-4.129 Amend. when tested to CAN/CGSB-4.2 No.77.1. Submit report outlining proposed dust control measures. Submit carpet schedule using same room designations indicated on drawings. Submit carpet manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Submit certification and description of carpet recycling process.
.4
.5 .6 .7
.8
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit product data sheet for each carpet, undercushion, adhesive, carpet protection and subfloor patching compound.
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.3 PRODUCT DATA (Cont'd)
.3
Submit WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets acceptable to Labour Canada and Health Canada for carpet adhesive and seam adhesive. Indicate VOC content.
Submit data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns, colours, and methods of installation.
.4
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2 .3
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate locations and lengths of seams for carpeted areas. Indicate nap direction, open edges, special patterns, and other details required by Departmental Representative to clarify work. Submit drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required as well as direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings to Departmental Representative for review prior to installation of carpet.
.4
1.5
SAMPLES
.1 .2
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 675 x 900 mm pieces of each type carpet specified, duplicate 225 x 225 mm pieces for each colour selected, 150 mm lengths of carpet gripper and binder bars, base, divider strips.
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Submit maintenance data: Include maintenance procedures, recommendations for maintenance materials and equipment, and suggested schedule for cleaning. Schedule of carpet reclamation activities indicating following: .1 Detailed sequence of removal work.
.2
.3
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) Inventory of items to be removed and .2 reclaimed. .3 Proposed packing and transportation measures. Reclamation agencies' records indicating receipt and disposition of use carpet. Certification: Reclamation Agency to verify in writing that used carpet was removed and recycled in accordance with carpet manufacturers' reclamation program. .1 Record off site removal of debris and materials and provide following information regarding removed materials. .1 Time and date of removal. .2 Type of material. .3 Weight and quantity of materials. .4 Final destination of materials.
.4 .5
.1
Prequalification: compliance with Department of Consumers and Corporate Affairs regulations under "Hazardous Products Act", Part II of the Schedule, tested to CAN/CGSB-4.2 No.27.6. Indoor Air Quality: compliance with CRI/CCI Green Label Indoor Air Quality Program, CRI/CCI IAQ requirements for maximum total volatile chemicals released into air. Label each carpet product with CRI/CCI IAQ label.
.2
.1
Label packaged materials. For carpet tile products indicate nominal dimensions of tile and indicate installation direction. Store packaged materials in original containers or wrapping with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Store carpeting and accessories at location as directed by Departmental Representative. Store carpet and adhesive at minimum temperature of 18C and relative humidity of maximum 65% for minimum of 48 hours before installation. Prevent damage to materials during handling and storage. Keep materials under cover and free from dampness.
.2
.3
.4
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 5 2011-05-25
.5
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 48 hours prior to installation.
Modular carpet: store on pallet form as supplied by Manufacturer. Do not stack pallets.
.6
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Vacuum used carpet before removal. Maintain posession of removed used carpet.
.4 .5
.1
Moisture: Ensure substrate is within moisture limits and alkalinity limits prescribed by manufacturer. Prepare moisture testing and provide report to Departmental Representative. Temperature: Maintain ambient temperature of not less than 18C from 48 hours before installation to at least 48 hours after completion of work. Relative Humidity: Maintain relative humidity between 10 and 65% RH for 48 hours before, during and 48 hours after installation. Safety: Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials. Ventilation: .1 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00. Provide fans with HEPA filters. .2 Provide continuous ventilation during and after carpet application. Run ventilation system 24 hours per day during installation; provide continuous ventilation for 7 days after completion of carpet installation.
.2
.3
.4
.5
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.6
Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete.
1.11
QUALIFICATION
.1
Flooring subcontractor/ installer requirements: .1 Specialty subcontractor normally engaged in this type of work, with prior experience in installation of these types of materials. .2 Certified by carpet manufacturer prior to bid submission. .3 Must not subcontract labour without written approval of Departmental Representative. Be responsible for proper product installation, including floor testing and preparation as specified and in accordance with carpet manufacturers written instructions.
.2
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide extra materials of carpet, carpet base, and adhesives in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide 6 sqm. of each colour, pattern and type of carpeting. Provide in one continuous full width roll. Extra materials to be from same production run as installed materials. Identify each package of carpet and each container of adhesive. Deliver to Departmental Representative and store where directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3 .4 .5
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 7 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
.1
Certified to the Carpet and Rug Institute and the Canadian Carpet Institute IAQ requirements.
2.2 BROADLOOM CARPET
.1 .2 .3
Patterns and colours from manufacturer's standard range. Carpet dimensions: roll width 3660 mm 1%. Carpet: to CAN/CGSB-4.129 Amend. and as follows: .1 Certified for flammability to Health Canada regulations under "Hazardous Products (Carpet) Regulations", Part II of the Schedule. .2 Maximum flame spread rating 300, maximum smoke developed classification 500, when tested to CAN/ULC-S102.2. .3 Certified to the Carpet and Rug Institute and the Canadian Carpet Institute's IAQ requirements. .4 Performance rating: to ASTM D5252 or ASTM D5417. Construction: tufted. Pile Surface Appearance: .1 Level loop: non-textured. Pile fibre: to CAN/CGSB-4.129 Amend.. .1 Nylon: BCF. .1 Type: Nylon 6. Yarn Ply: 2 ply. Pile Height minimum: 8 mm. Kilotex rating minimum: 7.45. Yarn Dye Method: solution dyed. Colourization: multiple colour tones. Colourfastness to light: to AATCC 16. Colourfastness to Atmospheric Fading: to AATCC 129 and AATCC 23. Tufted Carpet backing to CAN/CGSB-4.129 Amend.
.4 .5 .6
.7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.2 BROADLOOM CARPET (Cont'd)
.14
(Cont'd) Primary backing: .1 .1 Polypropylene: Loop Pile Carpet: 100% woven or spunbonded polypropylene at a minimum weight of 109 g/m2. .2 Woven carpet backing: to CAN/CGSB-4.129 Amend. .1 100% moisture resistant warp, filling and stuffer yarns. .3 Secondary and unitary backings: to CAN/CGSB-4.129 Amend. Colour Fastness to Atmospheric Fading: to AATCC 129 and AATCC 23. Tuft Lock: to CAN/CGSB-4.129 Amend., minimum acceptable 4.52 kilograms for loop pile product. Lamination Strength of Secondary Backing: to ASTM D3936, minimum acceptable peel strength of 7.4 kg/25 mm. Tear Strength: to ASTM D2661, minimum acceptable tear strength in both length and width to be: .1 11.3 kg for carpets to be installed by glue down installation.
.15 .16 .17
.18
2.3
ACCESSORIES
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Base: as specified in Section 09 65 00. Seaming tape: types recommended by carpet manufacturer for purpose intended. Seaming sealer adhesive: type recommended by carpet manufacturer for purpose intended. Edge strips: polished aluminum to suit installation. Adhesive: .1 Multi purpose adhesive type: recommended by carpet manufacturer for direct glue down installation. .2 Pressure sensitive type: recommended by carpet manufacturer for direct glue down installation of modular carpet or speciality backed carpets. Carpet protection: non staining heavy duty kraft paper. Concrete floor sealer: to CAN/CGSB-25.20, Type 1.
.6 .7
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.3 ACCESSORIES (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.8
Subfloor patching compound: Portland cement base filler, mix with latex and water to form a cementitious paste.
3.1 SUB-FLOOR TREATMENT
.1
Concrete shall be inspected to determine special care required to make it a suitable foundation for carpet. Cracks 3 mm wide or protrusions over 0.8 mm will be filled and levelled with appropriate and compatible polymer fortified patching compound. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendations for patch thickness. Large patch areas are to primed with a compatible primer. Concrete substrates shall be cured, clean and dry. Concrete substrates shall be free of paint, dirt, grease, oil, curing or parting agents, and other contaminates, including sealers, that may interfere with the bonding of the adhesive. Wherever a powdery or porous concrete surface is encountered, a primer compatible with the adhesive shall be used to provide a suitable surface for glue down installation.
.2 .3 .4 .5
.6
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Prepare floor surfaces in accordance with CRI 104 Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. Pre-condition carpeting following manufacturer's printed instructions.
.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install all carpet using the direct glue down method. Install carpeting using minimum of pieces. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and in accordance with Carpet and Rug Institute Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet, CRI 104.
CARPETING
Section 09 68 01 Page 10 2011-05-25
.4 .5
Install carpet after finishing work is completed.

Finish installation to present smooth wearing surface free from conspicuous seams, burring and other faults. Use material from same dye lot. Ensure colour, pattern and texture match within any one visual area. Maintain constant pile direction. Adhesive seams and cross joints. Seam edges must be sealed. Fit neatly around architectural, mechanical, electrical and telephone outlets, and furniture fitments, around perimeter of rooms into recesses, and around projections. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. Install carpet smooth and free of bubbles, puckers, and other defects.
.6
.7 .8
.9
.10
3.4 DIRECT GLUE DOWN CARPET
.1
Apply adhesive and install carpeting in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, by direct glue down method.
3.5
SEAMS
.1
Seal edges of cutouts with latex or binding method as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Visibility of carpet seams and joints to acceptable industry standards.
.2
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
.1
Vacuum carpets clean immediately after completion of installation. Protect traffic areas. Prohibit traffic on carpet for a period of 24 hours until adhesive is cured. Install carpet protection to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
END
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT
Section 09 80 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units
1.2
SAMPLES
.1 .2
Provide submittals accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.3
MOCK-UPS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Construct one representative mock-up of each type acoustical wall treatment system.
2 Construct mock-up 10 m minimum to indicate method of assembly, installation and fixing.
Construct mock-up where directed. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with work. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. Mock-up may not remain as part of the finished work.
.6
.1 .2 .3
Commence installation after building enclosed and dust generating activities are completed. Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation. Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15C and relative humidity of 20-40% prior to, during and after installation.
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT
Section 09 80 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Dispose of unused paint and adhesive material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.3
.4
.5 .6
1.7
EXTRA MATERIAL
.1
Provide extra materials of acoustic ceiling units, acoustic metal wall panels and adhesive in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide acoustical ceiling units for maintenance use amounting to 2% of gross wall area for each pattern and type required for project. Provide acoustic metal wall panels for maintenance use amounting to 2% of gross wall area for each pattern and type required for project. Provide sufficient adhesive to install extra material provided. Extra materials to be from same production run as installed materials. Clearly identify each package of acoustic ceiling units and acoustic metal wall panels
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT
Section 09 80 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.7 EXTRA MATERIAL (Cont'd)
.6
(Cont'd) including colour and type, and each container of adhesive. Deliver to Departmental Representative, upon completion of the work of this section. Store where directed by Departmental Representative.
.7 .8
1.8
DESIGN
.1
Acoustic: sound absorption characteristics of panels shall be maximized in the 250 and 500 Hz bands. Panels shall have a minimum NRC of 0.80 unless noted otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Acoustic units: to CAN/CGSB-92.1. Acoustical construction products must: .1 Not require being labelled as poisonous, corrosive, flammable or explosive under the Consumer Chemical and Container Regulations of the Hazardous Products Act. .2 Be accompanied by detailed instructions for proper handling and installation so as to minimize health concerns. .3 The manufacturing process must adhere to Lifecycle Assessment Standards as per CAN/CSA-ISO 14040. Acoustic Ceiling Panels (AP1): beveled edge 4 sides, size 600 mm wide x 1200 mm long and 25 mm thick; mass of 7.96 kg/m2 cellular wood fibre set with inorganic binders; resistant to dry rot; NRC range 0.35 - 0.45 meeting the following characteristics: .1 Flame Spread <25 .2 Fuel Contribution <15 .3 Smoke Developed 0 Acoustic Ceiling Panel (AP1) Adhesive: extra strength type as recommended by acoustic unit manufacturer. Note: temporarily mechanically fasten ceiling panels until Adhesive has fully set. Remove fasteners after full set. Acoustic Ceiling Panel (AP1) Staples, Nails and Screws: non-corrosive finish, type recommended by acoustic unit manufacturer.
.3
.4
.5
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT
Section 09 80 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.6
Fasteners: security fasteners to match ceiling colour.
.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Ensure substrate surface is straight to tolerance of plus or minus 3 mm over 3000 mm. Install acoustic units to clean, dry and firm substrate. Install acoustic units plumb and aligned. Arrange units symmetrical on each wallas indicated. Cut units to be at least 50% of unit width. Scribe acoustic units to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tight. Install to +/-1.6 mm in width and length in tolerance.
.4 .5
3.3
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3
Keep acoustic installation and all components clean. Remove blemishes immediately. Clean panel surfaces of dust, dirt or other contaminants. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean.
END
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) .1 Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer Products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings). Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) The Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual February 2004. National Fire Code of Canada.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory experience. When requested, provide a list of last three comparable jobs including, job name and location, specifying authority, and project manager. Qualified journeymen who have a "Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency" shall be engaged in painting work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work under the direct supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade regulations. Conform to latest MPI requirements for exterior painting work including preparation and priming. Materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents, etc.) shall be in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual "Approved Product" listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used. Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, etc. shall be the highest quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI Painting Specification Manual and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required. Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove conformance with noted MPI requirements when requested by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
.7
Standard of Acceptance: Walls: No defects visible from a distance .1 of 1000 mm at 90 to surface. .2 Soffits: No defects visible from floor at 45 to surface when viewed using final lighting source. .3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface area.
.1
Environmental Performance Requirements: .1 Provide paint products meeting MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E2 ratings based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels.
1.4
SCHEDULING
.1
Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Departmental Representative for approval. Submit schedule minimum of 48 hours in advance of proposed operations. Obtain written authorization from Departmental Representative for changes in work schedule. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about building.
.2 .3
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 81 01. Upon completion, submit records of products used. List products in relation to finish system and include the following: .1 Product name, type and use. .2 Manufacturer's product number. .3 Colour numbers. .4 MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating. .5 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.3
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
.4
Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit duplicate 200 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint and special finish with specified paint or coating in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards submitted on the following substrate materials: .1 3 mm plate steel for finishes over metal surfaces. .2 13 mm birch plywood for finishes over wood surfaces. .3 50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete masonry surfaces. .4 13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth surfaces. .5 10 mm cedar hardboard for finishes over wood surfaces. .2 When approved, samples shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site. .3 Submit full range of available colours where colour availability is restricted.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
.1 .2
Provide mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. When requested by the Consultant or Paint Inspection Agency, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item (in each colour scheme) to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing selected colours, gloss/sheen, textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on site work.
1.7
MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials: .1 Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Submit one one litre can of each type and colour of finish coating. Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish system. Deliver to Departmental Representative and store where directed.
.2
.3
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00, supplemented as follows: .1 Deliver and store materials in original containers, sealed, with labels intact. .2 Labels: to indicate: .1 Manufacturer's name and address. .2 Type of paint or coating. .3 Compliance with applicable standard. .4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule. .3 Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site. .4 Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage. .5 Observe manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling. .6 Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices. .7 Store materials and equipment in well ventilated area with temperature range 7 degrees C to 30 degrees C. .8 Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by manufacturer. .9 Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to approval of Departmental Representative . After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition to approval of Departmental Representative. .10 Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use. .11 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials. .12 Fire Safety Requirements: .1 Provide one 9 kg Type ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area. .2 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from site on a daily basis. .3 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners,
.2
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 5 2011-05-25
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) solvents, etc.) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Information on these controls can be obtained from Provincial Ministries of Environment and Regional levels of Government. .3 Material which cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner. .4 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste. .5 To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to: .1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. .2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal. .3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. .4 Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations. .5 Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available). .6 Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. .7 Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials: Deliver to or arrange collection by employees, individuals, or organizations for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing. .8 Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.
.1
Heating, Ventilation and Lighting: .1 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00. .2 Do not perform painting work unless adequate and continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 6 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) above 10 degrees C for 24 hours before, during and after paint application until paint has cured sufficiently. .3 Where required, provide continuous ventilation for seven days after completion of application of paint. .4 Coordinate use of existing ventilation system with Departmental Representative and ensure its operation during and after application of paint as required. .5 Provide temporary ventilating and heating equipment where permanent facilities are not available or supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from existing system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements. .6 Perform no painting work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux is provided on surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided by General Contractor. Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels: .1 Unless specifically pre-approved by specifying body, Paint Inspection Agency and, applied product manufacturer, perform no painting work when: .1 Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10 degrees C. .2 Substrate temperature is over 32 degrees C unless paint is specifically formulated for application at high temperatures. .3 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI or paint manufacturer's prescribed limits. .4 Relative humidity is above 85% or when dew point is less than 3 degrees C variance between air/surface temperature. .5 Rain or snow are forecast to occur before paint has thoroughly cured or when it is foggy, misty, raining or snowing at site. .2 Perform no painting work when maximum moisture content of substrate exceeds: .1 12% for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block). .2 15% for wood. .3 12% for plaster and gypsum board. .3 Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except
.2
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 7 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test". .4 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required. Surface and Environmental Conditions: .1 Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface. .2 Apply paint to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits noted herein. .3 Apply paint when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured. .4 Apply paint finishes when conditions forecast for entire period of application fall within manufacturer's recommendations. .5 Do not apply paint when: .1 Temperature is expected to drop below 10 degrees C before paint has thoroughly cured. .2 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI or paint manufacturer's limits. .3 Surface to be painted is wet, damp or frosted. .6 Provide and maintain cover when paint must be applied in damp or cold weather. Heat substrates and surrounding air to comply with temperature and humidity conditions specified by manufacturer. Protect until paint is dry or until weather conditions are suitable. .7 Schedule painting operations such that surfaces exposed to direct, intense sunlight are scheduled for completion during early morning. .8 Remove paint from areas which have been exposed to freezing, excess humidity, rain, snow or condensation. Prepare surface again and repaint. .9 Paint occupied facilities in accordance with approved schedule only. Schedule operations to approval of Departmental Representative such that painted surfaces will have dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are affected.
.3
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 8 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Paint materials listed in latest edition of MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project. Paint materials for paint systems: to be products of single manufacturer. Only qualified products with E2 "Environmentally Friendly" ratings are acceptable for use on this project. Paints, coatings, adhesives, solvents, cleaners, lubricants, and other fluids, to be as follows: .1 Be water-based .2 Be non-flammable .3 Be manufactured without compounds which contribute to ozone depletion in upper atmosphere. .4 Be manufactured without compounds which contribute to smog in the lower atmosphere. .5 Do not contain methylene chloride, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toxic metal pigments. .6 Have a recycled content including post consumer or post industrial waste. Water borne surface coatings must be manufactured and transported in a manner that steps of processes, including disposal of waste products arising there from, will meet requirements of applicable governmental acts, by laws and regulations including, for facilities located in Canada, Fisheries Act and Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA). Water borne surface coatings must not be formulated or manufactured with aromatic solvents, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavelant chromium or their compounds. Water borne surface coatings and recycled water borne surface coatings must have flash point of 61.0 degrees C or greater. Both water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings must be made by a process that does not release: .1 Matter in undiluted production plant effluent generating a 'Biochemical Oxygen Demand' (BOD) in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 9 2011-05-25
.8
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment. .2 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in undiluted production plant effluent in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment. Water-borne paints and stains, recycled water-borne surface coatings and water borne varnishes must meet a minimum "Environmentally Friendly" E2 rating. Recycled water-borne surface coatings must contain 50% post-consumer material by volume. Recycled water-borne surface coatings must not contain: .1 Lead in excess of 600.0 ppm weight/weight total solids. .2 Mercury in excess of 50.0 ppm weight/weight total product. .3 Cadmium in excess of 1.0 ppm weight/weight total product. .4 Hexavelant chromium in excess of 3.0 ppm weight/weight total product. .5 Organochlorines or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBS) in excess of 1.0 ppm weight/weight total product. The following must be performed on each batch of consolidated post-consumer material before surface coating is reformulated and canned. These tests must be performed at a laboratory or facility which has been accredited by the Standards Council of Canada. .1 Lead, cadmium and chromium are to be determined using ICP-AES (Inductively Coupled Plasma - Atomic Emission Spectroscopy) technique no. 6010 as defined in EPA SW-846. .2 Mercury is to be determined by Cold Vapour Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy using Technique no. 7471 as defined in EPA SW-846. .3 Organochlorines and PCBs are to be determined by Gas Chromatography using Technique no. 8081 as defined in EPA SW-846.
.9
.10 .11
.12
2.2
COLOURS
.1
Refer to Finish Schedule for preliminary colour scheme. Departmental Representative will confirm Colours selection of colours from manufacturer's full range of colours.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.2 COLOURS (Cont'd)
.2
Where specific products are available in a restricted range of colours, selection will be based on the limited range.
Second coat in a three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top coat to show visible difference between coats.
.3
2.3 MIXING AND TINTING
.1
Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of painting materials is allowed only with Departmental Representative's written permission. Mix paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water based paints. Thin paint for spraying according in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Departmental Representative. Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS
.1
Paint gloss: defined as sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with following values: Gloss Level Category/ G1 - matte finish G2 - velvet finish G3 - eggshell finish Units @ 60 Degrees/ 0 to 5 0 to 10 10 to 25 Units @ 85 Degrees/ max. 10 10 to 35 10 to 35
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS (Cont'd)
.1
Paint gloss:(Cont'd)
Gloss Level Units @ 60 Units @ 85 ___________________________________________ Category/ Degrees/ Degrees/ G4 - satin 20 to 35 min. 35 finish G5 35 to 70 semi-gloss finish G6 - gloss 70 to 85 finish G7 - high > 85 gloss finish .2 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces shall be as specified herein.
2.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS
.1
Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: .1 EXT 5.1B - Waterborne light industrial coating (over inorganic zinc); G5 gloss level. Galvanized Metal: not chromate passivated .1 EXT 5.3G - Waterborne light industrial coating; G5 Gloss level.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
.1
Exterior painting and decorating work shall be inspected by a Paint Inspection Agency (inspector) acceptable to the specifying authority and local Painting Contractor's Association. Painting contractor shall notify the Paint Inspection Agency a minimum of one week prior to commencement of work and provide a copy of project painting specification, plans and elevation drawings (including pertinent details) as well as a Finish Schedule. Exterior surfaces requiring painting shall be inspected by the Paint Inspection Agency who
.2
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 12 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) shall notify Departmental Representative in writing of defects or problems, prior to commencing painting work, or after prime coat shows defects in substrate. Where "special" painting, coating or decorating system applications (i.e. elastomeric coatings) or non MPI listed products or systems are to be used, paint or coating manufacturer shall provide as part of work, certification of surfaces and conditions for specific paint or coating system application as well as on site supervision, inspection and approval of their paint or coating system application as required at no additional cost to Departmental Representative.
.3
3.3
PREPARATION
.1
Perform preparation and operations for exterior painting in accordance with MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual except where specified otherwise. Apply paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer's written application instructions. Clean and prepare exterior surfaces in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual requirements. Refer to the MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as follows: .1 Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by brushing, wiping with dry, clean cloths or compressed air. .2 Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent (and bleach where applicable) and clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants. .3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from surface. .4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly. .5 Prepare surfaces for water based painting, water based cleaners should be used in place of organic solvents. .6 Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses. .7 Many water based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. However, minimize the use of kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water based paints. Clean metal surfaces to be repainted by removing rust, dirt, oil, grease and foreign
.2 .3
.4
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 13 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) substances in accordance with MPI requirements. Remove such contaminates from surfaces, pockets and corners to be repainted by brushing with clean brushes, blowing with clean dry compressed air, or brushing/vacuum cleaning as required. Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs. Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified in applicable section. Major touch up including cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets, nuts, washers, bolts, and damaged or defective paint and rusted areas, shall be by supplier of fabricated material. Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Departmental Representative. Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm.
.5
.6
.7 .8
3.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS
.1
Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of surfaces to be painted. Report to Departmental Representative damages, defects, unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work. Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using a properly calibrated electronic moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test" and report findings to Departmental Representative. Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended by manufacturer.
.2
3.5
PROTECTION
.1
Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures from paint spatters, markings and other damage by suitable non staining covers or masking. If damaged, clean and restore such
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 14 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) surfaces as directed by Departmental Representative. Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames. Protect factory finished products and equipment. Protect building occupants in and about the building. Removal of light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, and other surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings shall be done prior to undertaking painting operations by General Contractor. Items shall be securely stored and re installed after painting is completed by General Contractor. Move and cover exterior furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out painting operations. Replace as painting operations progress. As painting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs in pedestrian and vehicle traffic areas to approval of Departmental Representative.
.2 .3 .4 .5
.6
.7
3.6
APPLICATION
.1
Method of application to be as approved by Departmental Representative. Apply paint by brush roller air sprayer airless sprayer. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise. Brush and Roller Application: .1 Apply paint in a uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for application. .2 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners. .3 Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush, daubers or sheepskins. .4 Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces shall be free of roller tracking and heavy stipple unless approved by Departmental Representative. .5 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.
.2
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 15 2011-05-25
.3
Spray Application: .1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of properly atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges. .2 Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary. .3 Apply paint in a uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern. .4 Brush out immediately runs and sags. .5 Use brushes to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are not adequately painted by spray.
Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers when no other method is practical in places of difficult access and only when specifically authorized by Departmental Representative. Apply coats of paint as continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied. Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer. Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects. Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces, including such surfaces as projecting ledges. Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces.
.4
.5
.6
.7 .8
.9
3.7 MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
.1
Unless otherwise specified, paint exterior exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment with colour and finish to match adjacent surfaces, except as noted otherwise. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment. Do not paint over nameplates.
.2
.3
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 16 2011-05-25
3.7 MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
.4 .5
Paint fire protection piping red. Paint steel electrical light standards. Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation equipment.
.1
Inspection: .1 Field inspection of exterior painting operations to be carried out by independent inspection firm as designated by Departmental Representative. .2 Advise Departmental Representative when each surface and applied coating is ready for inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved. .3 Co-operate with inspection firm and provide access to areas of work. Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
3.9
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Remove paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
3.10
RESTORATION
.1 .2 .3
Clean and re-install all hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations. Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease. Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent. Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of Departmental Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint.
.4
EXTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 13 Page 17 2011-05-25
3.10 RESTORATION (Cont'd)
.5
Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition as approved by Departmental Representative.
END
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). .1 EPA Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer Products, Method 24 - 1995, (for Surface Coatings). Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS). .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual, 2004. National Fire Code of Canada - 2005.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Qualifications: .1 Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory experience. When requested, provide a list of last three comparable jobs including, job name and location, specifying authority, and project manager. .2 Journeymen: qualified journeymen who have "Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency" engaged in painting work. .3 Apprentices: working under direct supervision of qualified trades person in accordance with trade regulations. Mock-Ups: .1 Provide mock up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .2 When requested by Departmental Representative, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item (in each colour scheme) to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing selected colours, gloss/sheen, textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on site work.
.2
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3 SCHEDULING OF WORK
.1
Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Departmental Representative for approval. Submit schedule minimum of 48 hours in advance of proposed operations. Obtain written authorization from Departmental Representative for any changes in work schedule. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants.
.2 .3
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit product data and instructions for each paint and coating product to be used. .2 Submit WHMIS MSDS. Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 81 01 Hazardous Materials. .3 Upon completion, submit records of products used. List products in relation to finish system and include the following: .1 Product name, type and use. .2 Manufacturer's product number. .3 Colour numbers. .4 MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating. .5 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Samples: .1 Submit full range colour sample chips to indicate where colour availability is restricted. .2 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint, stain, clear coating, special finish with specified paint or coating in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards submitted on the following substrate materials: .1 3 mm plate steel for finishes over metal surfaces. .2 13 mm birch plywood for finishes over wood surfaces. .3 50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete or concrete masonry surfaces .4 13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth surfaces. .5 10 mm hardboard for finishes over wood surfaces. .3 When approved, sample panels shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate
.3
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Samples:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) on site surface with one of each sample retained on site.
1.5
MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials: .1 Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .2 Submit one one litre can of each type and colour of finish coating. Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish system. .3 Deliver to Contractor and store where directed.
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
.1 .2
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Labels shall clearly indicate: .1 Manufacturer's name and address. .2 Type of paint or coating. .3 Compliance with applicable standard. .4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule. Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site. Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage. Observe manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling. Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices. Store materials and equipment in a well ventilated area with temperature range 7C to 30C. Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by manufacturer. Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to approval of Departmental Representative. After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition to approval of Departmental Representative.
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7
.8
.9
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE (Cont'd)
.10 .11
Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use.
Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials. Fire Safety Requirements: .1 Provide one 9 kg Type ABC fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area. .2 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from site on a daily basis. .3 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. .3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene and corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan (WMP). .4 Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal and Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan (WMP). .5 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. .6 Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. .7 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely. .8 Unused paint and coating materials must be disposed of at official hazardous material collections site as approved by Departmental Representative. .9 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, and solvents) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Information on these controls can be obtained from Provincial Ministries of Environment and Regional levels of Government. .10 Material which cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner.
.12
.13
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE (Cont'd)
.13
Waste Management and Disposal:(Cont'd) .11 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste. .12 To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into ground follow these procedures: .1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. .2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal. .3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. .4 Dispose of contaminants in approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations. .5 Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available). .13 Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. .14 Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials. Deliver to or arrange collection by employees, individuals or organizations for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Heating, Ventilation and Lighting: .1 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00. .2 Perform no painting work unless adequate and continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above 10C for 24 hours before, during and after paint application until paint has cured sufficiently. .3 Where required, provide continuous ventilation for seven days after completion of application of paint. .4 Provide temporary ventilating and heating equipment where permanent facilities are not available or supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from existing system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements. .5 Perform no painting work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux is provided on surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 6 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) facilities shall be provided by General Contractor. Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels: .1 Unless specifically pre-approved by the specifying body, Paint Inspection Agency and the applied product manufacturer, perform no painting work when: .1 Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10C. .2 Substrate temperature is over 32C unless paint is specifically formulated for application at high temperatures. .3 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI or paint manufacturer's prescribed limits. .4 The relative humidity is above 85% or when the dew point is less than 3C variance between the air/surface temperature. .5 Rain or snow are forecast to occur before paint has thoroughly cured or when it is foggy, misty, raining or snowing at site. .2 Perform no painting work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate exceeds: .1 12% for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block). .2 15% for wood. .3 12% for plaster and gypsum board. .3 Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test". .4 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required. Surface and Environmental Conditions: .1 Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface. .2 Apply paint only to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits noted herein. .3 Apply paint only when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured.
.2
.3
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 7 2011-05-25
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.4
Additional Interior Application Requirements: Apply paint finishes only when temperature .1 at location of installation can be satisfactorily maintained within manufacturer's recommendations.
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Paint materials listed in the MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project. Paint materials for paint systems shall be products of a single manufacturer. Only qualified products with E2 "Environmentally Friendly" rating are acceptable for use on this project. Conform to latest MPI requirements for interior painting work including preparation and priming. Materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents, etc.) in accordance with MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual "Approved Product" listing. Linseed oil, shellac, and turpentine: highest quality product from approved manufacturer listed in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, compatible with other coating materials as required. Provide paint products meeting MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E2 rating based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels. Use MPI listed materials having minimum E2 rating where indoor air quality (odour) requirements exist. Paints, coatings, adhesives, solvents, cleaners, lubricants, and other fluids, shall: .1 be water-based .2 be non-flammable .3 be manufactured without compounds which contribute to ozone depletion in the upper atmosphere. .4 be manufactured without compounds which contribute to smog in the lower atmosphere. .5 do not contain methylene chloride, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toxic metal pigments.
.2 .3
.4 .5
.6
.7
.8
.9
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 8 2011-05-25
.10
Water-borne surface coatings must be manufactured and transported in a manner that steps of process, including disposal of waste products arising therefrom, will meet requirements of applicable governmental acts, by-laws and regulations including, for facilities located in Canada, Fisheries Act and Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA).
Formulate and manufacture coatings with no aromatic formaldehyde, halogenated lead, cadmium, hexavalent compounds. water-borne surface solvents, solvents, mercury, chromium or their
.11
.12
Flash point: 61.0 degrees C or greater for water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings. Ensure manufacture and process of both water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings does not release: .1 Matter in undiluted production plant effluent generating 'Biochemical Oxygen Demand' (BOD) in excess of 15 mg/L to natural watercourse or sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment. .2 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in undiluted production plant effluent in excess of 15 mg/L to natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment. Water borne paints and stains, recycled water borne surface coatings and water borne varnishes to meet minimum "Environmentally Friendly" E2 rating. Recycled water borne surface coatings to contain 50% post consumer material by volume. Recycled water borne surface coatings must not contain: .1 Lead in excess of 600.0 ppm weight/weight total solids. .2 Mercury in excess of 50.0 ppm weight/weight total product .3 Cadmium in excess of 1.0 ppm weight/weight total product. .4 Hexavelant chromium in excess of 3.0 ppm weight/weight total product. .5 Organochlorines or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBS) in excess of 1.0 ppm weight/weight total product.
.13
.14
.15 .16
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.2
COLOURS
.1
Refer to Finish Schedule for preliminary colour scheme. Departmental Representative will confirm Colours selection of colours from manufacturer's full range of colours. Where specific products are available in a restricted range of colours, selection will be based on the limited range. Second coat in a three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top coat to show visible difference between coats
.2
.3
2.3 MIXING AND TINTING
.1
Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of painting materials is allowed only with Departmental Representative's written permission. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints. Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Departmental Representative. Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS
.1
Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following values:
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd)
Gloss Level Category G1 - matte finish G2 - velvet finish G3 - eggshell finish G4 - satin finish G5 semi-gloss finish G6 - gloss finish G7 - high gloss finish .2
Units @ 60 0 to 5 0 to 10 10 to 25 20 to 35 35 to 70 70 to 85 > 85
Units @ 85 max. 10 10 to 35 10 to 35 min. 35
Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces shall be as specified herein.
2.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS
.1
Concrete Vertical Surfaces: including horizontal soffits .1 INT 3.1L - Waterborne light industrial, G5 coating. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: floors and stairs .1 INT 3.2B - Alkyd floor enamel, gloss finish. Concrete Masonry Units: smooth and split face block and brick .1 INT 4.2K - Waterborne light industrial, G5 gloss level. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: columns, beams, joists, etc. .1 INT 5.1B - Waterborne light industrial, G5 gloss level. Galvanized Metal: doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, etc. .1 INT 5.3B - Waterborne light industrial coating, G5 gloss level.
.2
.3
.4
.5
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.6
Dressed Lumber: including doors, door and window frames, casings, mouldings, etc. .1 INT 6.3P - Waterborne light industrial coating, G5 gloss level.
Wood Casework: cabinetwork, etc. .1 INT 6.4E - Clear Polyurethane varnish finish, G5 gloss level. Gypsum Board: gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type material", etc., and textured finishes. .1 INT 9.2L - Waterborne light industrial coating, G3 gloss level. Canvas and Cotton Coverings: .1 INT 10.1A - Latex finish, G5 gloss level.
.7
.8
.9
.1
Perform following tests on each batch of consolidated post-consumer material before surface coating is reformulated and canned. Testing by laboratory or facility which has been accredited by Standards Council of Canada. .1 Lead, cadmium and chromium are to be determined using ICP-AES (Inductively Coupled Plasma - Atomic Emission Spectroscopy) technique no. 6010 as defined in EPA SW-846. .2 Mercury is to be determined by Cold Vapour Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy using Technique no. 7471 as defined in EPA SW-846. .3 Organochlorines and PCBs are to be determined by Gas Chromatography using Technique no. 8081 as defined in EPA SW-846.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.
3.2
GENERAL
.1
Perform preparation and operations for interior painting in accordance with MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual except where specified otherwise. Apply paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer's written application instructions.
.2
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.3
EXAMINATION
.1
Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of surfaces to be painted. Report to Departmental Representative damages, defects, unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work. Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using a properly calibrated electronic moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test" and report findings to Departmental Representative. Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended by manufacturer. Maximum moisture content as follows: .1 Gypsum Board: 12%. .2 Concrete: 12%. .3 Concrete Block: 12%. .4 Wood: 15%.
.2
.3
3.4
PREPARATION
.1
Protection: .1 Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures from paint spatters, markings and other damage by suitable non staining covers or masking. If damaged, clean and restore such surfaces as directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames. .3 Protect factory finished products and equipment. .4 Protect building occupants in and about the building. Surface Preparation: .1 Removal of electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, bath accessories and other surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings shall be done prior to undertaking any painting operations by General Contractor. Items shall be securely stored and re installed after painting is completed by General Contractor. .2 Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out painting operations. Replace as painting operations progress. .3 Place "WET PAINT" signs in occupied areas as painting operations progress. Signs to approval of Departmental Representative.
.2
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 13 2011-05-25
.3
Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as follows: .1 Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming, wiping with dry, clean cloths or compressed air. .2 Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and bleach where applicable and clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants. .3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from surface. .4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly. .5 Prepare surfaces for water-based painting, water-based cleaners should be used in place of organic solvents. .6 Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses. .7 Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. However, minimize the use of kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water-based paints.
Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs. Where possible, prime surfaces of new wood surfaces before installation. Use same primers as specified for exposed surfaces. .1 Apply vinyl sealer to MPI #36 over knots, pitch, sap and resinous areas. .2 Apply wood filler to nail holes and cracks. .3 Tint filler to match stains for stained woodwork. Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm. Clean metal surfaces to be painted by removing rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with MPI requirements. Remove traces of blast products from surfaces, pockets and corners to be painted by brushing with clean
.4
.5
.6
.7
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 14 2011-05-25
.7
(Cont'd) brushes, blowing with clean dry compressed air, or vacuum cleaning. Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified in applicable section. Major touch-up including cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets, nuts, washers, bolts, and damaged or defective paint and rusted areas, shall be by supplier of fabricated material. Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Departmental Representative.
.8
.9
3.5
APPLICATION
.1
Method of application to be as approved by Departmental Representative. Apply paint by brush, roller, or airless sprayer. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise. Brush and Roller Application: .1 Apply paint in a uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for application. .2 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners. .3 Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush, daubers or sheepskins. .4 Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces shall be free of roller tracking and heavy stipple. .5 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint. Spray application: .1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of properly atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges. .2 Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary. .3 Apply paint in uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern. Back roll first coat application. .4 Brush out immediately all runs and sags.
.2
.3
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 15 2011-05-25
.3
Spray application:(Cont'd) .5 Use brushes to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are not adequately painted by spray. Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers only when no other method is practical in places of difficult access. Apply coats of paint as a continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied. Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer. Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects. Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces, including such surfaces as tops of interior cupboards and cabinets and projecting ledges. Finish inside of cupboards and cabinets as specified for outside surfaces. Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms. Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces.
.4
.5
.6
.7 .8
.9 .10 .11
3.6 MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
.1
Paint finished area exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment with colour and finish to match adjacent surfaces, except as indicated. Boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms: paint exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment. Other unfinished areas: leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment.
.2
.3
.4
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 16 2011-05-25
3.6 MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
.5 .6 .7
Do not paint over nameplates. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.

Paint inside of ductwork where visible behind grilles, registers and diffusers with primer and one coat of matt black paint. Paint fire protection piping red. Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel. Paint natural gas piping yellow. Paint both sides and edges of backboards for telephone and electrical equipment before installation. Leave equipment in original finish except for touch up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items. Do not paint interior transformers and substation equipment.
.8 .9 .10 .11
.12
.1
Field inspection of painting operations to be carried out be independent inspection firm as designated by Departmental Representative. Advise Departmental Representative when surfaces and applied coating is ready for inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved. Co-operate with inspection firm and provide access to areas of work. Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove conformance with noted MPI requirements when requested by Departmental Representative. Standard of Acceptance: .1 Walls: No defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90 to surface. .2 Ceilings: No defects visible from floor at 45 to surface when viewed using final lighting source. .3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface area.
.2
.3 .4
.5
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23 Page 17 2011-05-25
3.8
RESTORATION
.1 .2 .3
Clean and re-install all hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations. Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease. Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent. Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of Departmental Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint. Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition as approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5
END
INTUMESCENT PAINTING
Section 09 96 46 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1 .2
ULC: List of Equipment and Materials (current edition). CAN/ULC-S101-07, Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials. CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.
.3
.1
Intumescent fireproofing system to provide a fire resistance rating to electrical equipment plywood back panels as indicated on the Drawings to the satisfaction of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures.
1.4
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit two (2) 300 mm x 300 mm samples of each colour and type of coating. Include on the backside of samples, project name, date, material identification, colour identification, and provision for the Departmental Representative's acceptance. Submit product data indicating product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. Submit copies test reports of fireproofing application to substrate materials required. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions to requirements Section 01 33 00.
.3
.4 .5
Section 09 96 46 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5
MOCK-UPS
.1 .2
Apply coating of each finish to one column for review from the Departmental Representative. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with coating work. Refer to Section 01 45 00 for other requirements regarding mock-up.
.3
.1
Applicator: use only manufacturer's approved, licensed and supervised applicator, with a minimum 5 years documented experience, employing skilled labourers. Product: Manufactured under ULC follow up program. Provide each container or package bearing ULC label.
.2
.1 .2
Conform to National Building Code for fire resistance rating as noted on the drawings. Submit certification of acceptability of fireproofing materials to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and to the Departmental Representative.
1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
Deliver and store materials undamaged, in original containers, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Store materials in a dry location, off ground, protected from the elements, maintain a minimum temperature of 5C. Discard materials which have come into contact with contaminants.
.2
.3
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
.1
Do not apply sprayed intumescent paint when temperature of substrate and surrounding air is below 5C. Maintain a minimum surface temperature of 5C 24 hours before, during and after application or until cured, adequate controlled ventilation bright, uniform lighting and clean surface.
.2
Section 09 96 46 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
.3
Provide adequate ventilation or isolation measures to protect against toxic fumes during application and for a minimum of 24 hours after application.
Relative humidity must not exceed 75% throughout the total period of application and drying for the intumescent paint nor 65% throughout the application and drying of the protection decorative finish coat. Ensure surfaces to receive coating are clean, sound, non dusting, free from grease, oil, tar, asphaltic materials, stains or efflorescence. Report all unsatisfactory surfaces and conditions in writing to the Departmental Representative and General Contractor prior to start of work. Starting work of this section implies acceptance of conditions.
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.10
PROTECTION
.1
Provide adequate protection of materials and work of this section from damage by weather and other trades. Protect work of other trades from damage resulting from work of this section. Make good all damage to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative at no extra cost to the Departmental Representative. Mask all surrounding surfaces to provide neat, clean, true juncture lines with no spray on adjacent surfaces. Cover all adjacent surfaces as required.
.2
1.11 DATA
MAINTENANCE
.1
Provide maintenance data for coatings for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
.1
Sequence work in conjunction with the Project Schedule and with the General Contractor.
Section 09 96 46 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Intumescent Paint: Water borne type coating listed by Underwriters Laboratories and bearing ULC label on each container. Acceptable material: .1 A/D Firefilm as manufactured by A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc., www.adfire.com, 800.263.4087. .2 Spray Film as manufactured by Cafco, www.isolatek.com, 800.691.9600. .3 Nullifire S607 as manufactured by Carboline, www.carboline.com, 800.848.4645. Protective Decorative Finish: Chlorinated Rubber Coating such and as approved by the intumescent paint manufacturer.
.2
2.2
MIXING
.1
Thoroughly mix coatings according to manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine surfaces to receive work of this section and report defects which may affect the Work of this section. Confirm compatibility of surfaces to receive fireproofing materials. Beginning of work implies acceptance of existing conditions.
.2 .3
3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
.1
Clean substrate free of dust, dirt, grease or other foreign matter which would impair bond of intumescent paint. Mask surrounding surfaces to provide neat, clean juncture lines. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray. Work penetrating substrate to be completed before installing coating.
.2 .3 .4
Section 09 96 46 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.3
APPLICATION
.1
Apply intumescent paint in accordance with manufacturer's printed specifications and recommendations, using equipment as recommended by the manufacturer. Apply intumescent paint in sufficient thickness to achieve rating with as many passes as necessary to cover substrate. Apply intumescent paint to produce a uniformly textured surface which is as smooth as possible, uniform in sheen, colour and finish, free from marks, dirt, particles, runs, crawls, curling, holes, airpockets and other defects. Apply intumescent paint and protective decorative finish by spray, brush or roller. Apply protective decorative finish in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
.3
.4 .5
3.4
PATCHING
.1
Patch and repair intumescent paint surfaces damaged by this or any other trade. Cost of repairs to be borne by trade responsible for damage, as assessed by the General Contractor.
3.5
CLEAN-UP
.1
Promptly as work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from premises all masking tape, rubbish and surplus materials resulting from work of this Section. Clean all surface splattered or marked with droppings during application of intumescent paint. Leave all surfaces clean and free from marks; all to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative.
.2
END
EPOXY COATING FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
Section 09 96 57 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.186-1996, High Performance Glazed Coating System, Interior. CAN/ULC-S102, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics.
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures.
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 81 01. WHMIS MSDS acceptable to Labour Canada and Health and Welfare Canada for high build glazed coatings. Indicate VOC content.
1.4
SAMPLES
.1 .2
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 400 x 200 mm samples of each colour and finish and decorative effects, coating; one applied to porous concrete block and one applied to cement board.
.1
Provide maintenance data for coatings for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.6
MOCK-UPS
.1 .2
Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Apply coating of each finish and decorative effect to 10 sqm area of surface to be treated including partial ceiling and wall and the transition between the two.
Section 09 96 57 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.6 MOCK-UPS (Cont'd)
.3
Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with coating work.
When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. Mock-up may remain as part of finished work.
.4
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
.1 .2
Deliver and store materials in manner to prevent damage. Ensure materials remain in original wrapping and containers until used.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal, paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused coating material from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused coating materials into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.4
.5
.1
Safety: .1 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of materials. .2 Ensure no open flame heating devices are used. .3 Discourage occupancy of treated space until volatile materials are no longer being emitted and there is no odour. .4 Provide adequate respiratory protection to exposed individuals.
Section 09 96 57 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.2
Ventilation: Provide ventilation continuously during .1 and after coating application. Run system 24 hours per day during application; provide continuous ventilation for 7 days after completion of application. .2 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00.
Temperature: .1 Do not apply emulsion systems unless uniform minimum 10C air temperature at installation area for 24 hours prior to and after application. .2 Maintain minimum temperature 10C within area of installation until final acceptance of building.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Epoxy wall and ceiling coating: Solvent based, two component thermo-setting, 100% epoxy coating meeting the following requirements: Test Method ASTM E96-95 CGSB 1-GP-71 Fade-ometer Requirement 0.3 metric perms. max. No colour change chalking or film defects, after 48 hours Less than 17 g lost over masonry backing Flame Spread Rating (FRS) Less than 25 Smoke Developed Class Less than 50 No effect on film after 5000 cycles Unaffected as measured by difference in reflectance
Property Water vapour transmission Colour fastness
Fire resistance
ASTM D1360-90a Cabinet method CAN/ULC S102 CAN/ULC S102 ASTM D2486-96 Gardner Scrubbability Machine Exposure to Gamma rays of 35 roentgen intensity per hour at distance of 1625 mm
Flame Spread Smoke Developed Class Scrubbability
Radiation resistance
Section 09 96 57 Page 4 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) from Cobalt 60 cell
Toxicity
Evaluated by Canadian Department of Agriculture 50 cycles on masonry backing. Each cycle 8 hours at 70/C 16 hours at 23/C ASTM D522-93a Mandrel Test CGSB 1-GP-71, Method 147.1 Gardner Impact Test ASTM D1308-87
Approved non-toxic
Heat & cold cycling
No cracking, loss of adhesion, or other film defects Passing 3 mm bend without cracking or peeling Passing 11 J without cracking Not affected by common acids, hydroxides, salts and household cleaning agents
Flexibility
Impact resistance
Stain resistance
.2 .3 .4
Primer: as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Fibreglass cloth: as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Colour: as selected by the Departmental Representative from the manufacturer's standard range.
2.2
MIXES
.1
Mix coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Section 09 96 57 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating material manufacturer's instructions ready to receive epoxy finish; which will require a trowel patch mortar or sand filled epoxy to eliminate bug holes and fill indents, and a block primer to concrete block surfaces by this Section. Mask surrounding surfaces to provide neat, clean juncture lines. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray. Fill voids and joints to Glass Fibre Reinforced Cement Boards using sand filled epoxy as recommended by the manufacturer.
.2 .3 .4
3.2 APPLICATION TO WALLS
.1
Apply epoxy laminating resin at rate recommended by the manufacturer (approximately 3.5 sqm/L) to suit existing conditions, using a roller, brush or trowel. Ensure surfaces are completely coated. Cover epoxy laminating resin immediately with fibreglass cloth and remove air pockets from surface with squeegee, plastic trowel or laminating roller. Ensure that no voids remain at surface. Immediately apply a second coat of epoxy laminating resin at the rate of 3 sqm/L. After laminate has cured for approximately 16 hours, sand and remove any irregularities. Apply epoxy coating over the cured laminate in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, to produce smooth surface, uniform in sheen, colour and finish, free from marks, dirt, particles, runs, crawls, curling, holes, air pockets and other defects. Total dry film thickness of epoxy coating over the laminate to be 0.2 mm.
.2
.3 .4 .5
Section 09 96 57 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.3 APPLICATION TO CEILING
.1
Apply epoxy system to ceilings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to a minimum 0.635 mm dry film thickness. Apply prime coat at a rate of 3.6 sqm/L. Spray apply texture coat finish. Spray apply glaze coat. Matched finish work to approved samples, maintain uniform in thickness, sheen, colour, texture and free from defect detrimental to appearance or performance.
.2 .3 .4 .5
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Clean surfaces to coating manufacturer's printed instructions.
END
EPOXY FLOORING
Section 09 96 58 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM D638-10: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. .2 ASTM D1044-08, Resistance of Transparent Plastic to Surface Abrasion. .3 ASTM E84-10b, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .4 ASTM D1308-02(2007), Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. .5 ASTM D570-98(2010)e1, Water Absorption of Plastics. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 1-GP-71 METH 147.1 Methods of Testing Paints and Pigments Impact Resistance. Treasury Board of Canada Secretariat (TBS): .1 Treasury Board, Fire Protection Standard April 1, 2010 www.tbs-sct.gc.ca/pol/doc-eng.aspx ?id=17316&section=text. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S102.2 10, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Coverings, and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies.
.2
.3
.4
1.2 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS
.1 .2
Submit product data sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 81 01. WHMIS MSDS acceptable to Labour Canada and Health and Welfare Canada for epoxy flooring. Indicate VOC content.
1.3
SAMPLES
.1 .2 .3
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample of epoxy flooring applied to Concrete. Submit sample of textured shower floor system.
EPOXY FLOORING
Section 09 96 58 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate layout, jointing and design.
1.5
TEST REPORTS
.1 .2
Submit test reports in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Test reports verifying epoxy flooring applied to substrate as constructed on this project will meet or exceed requirements of this Specification.
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for epoxy flooring for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.7
MOCK-UP
.1 .2
Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Before commencing application, prepare subfloor 2 and apply sample epoxy flooring to a 5 m area where directed by the Departmental Representative. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with epoxy flooring work. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. The accepted mock-up may remain as part of finished work.
.3
.4
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal, paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
EPOXY FLOORING
Section 09 96 58 Page 3 2011-05-25
.4
Divert unused coating material from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative.
Do not dispose of unused coating materials into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.5
.1
Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at aggregate wall coating installation area above 10C for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation Maximum moisture content of substrate: less than 4%. Temperature: minimum temperature of substrate 5C. Minimum temperature of air during and for 48 hours after coating is applied 15C. Alkali: Ensure negative alkalinity of substrate before application of coating Ventilation: .1 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00. .2 Provide continuous ventilation during and after coating application to control dangerous vapour build-up, odours and fumes. Post and enforce "No smoking or open flame" signs until flooring has cured. Eliminate all spark producing devices (furnaces, all pilot lights, spark-producing switches etc.) in or near the work area. Provide uniform and sufficient lighting in areas of installation. Do not begin flooring installation until all other work which would cause damage, dirt dust or interruption of normal installation pace has been completed.
.2 .3
.4 .5
.6
.7 .8
1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING
.1
Deliver and store materials undamaged, in original containers, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Designate a room for storage of flooring materials and equipment. Keep room neat and
.2
EPOXY FLOORING
Section 09 96 58 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) clean at all times, under lock and key, and surrounding surfaces protected from damage. Keep material temperatures at 16C minimum.
1.11
PROTECTION
.1
Mask and protect adjacent surfaces and materials from damage. Make good any damage so caused, to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative. Keep all traffic out of all areas receiving flooring until it has been completed and cured. Apply temporary protection until floor is fully cured.
.2 .3
1.12
WARRANTY
.1
For Work of this Section 09 96 58, 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC 3.13 of General Conditions is extended to 24 months.
1.13
QUALIFICATION
.1
Apply epoxy flooring using a manufacturer approved applicators, experienced in the application of this type of flooring material Apply epoxy flooring in accordance with the most recent installation instructions of the manufacturer.
.2
EPOXY FLOORING
Section 09 96 58 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Epoxy floor: Thermo-setting 100% epoxy coating with matrix, coloured filler and top coat meeting the following requirements: Test Method ASTM D1044-94 10 000 cycles using CS17 wheels with 1 kg load After 7 days water immersion ACI Committee 403 Bulletin 5943 CGSB 1-GP-71, Method 120.1 Fade-o-meter ASTM E84-96a 1.3 mm max./ Self extinguishing CGSB 1-GP-71 Method 147.1 Gardner Impact Test 17 J ASTM D1308-87(1993) Requirement 0.04 gm loss max
Property Abrasion resistance Bond strength
2275 kPa to concrete
Colour fastness Flammability Impact resistance Resistance to acid hydroxides, salts & cleaning agents. Tensile strength Toxicity Water absorption
11.0 NBS units Extent of burning No cracking, chipping or delamination. Unaffected by common household cleaning agents, hydroxides and salts. 7 MPa Approved non-toxic 0.45% max.
ASTM D638-M96 Can. Dept. of Agriculture ASTM D570-95 24 hour immersion .1
Colour as selected by the Departmental Representative from the manufacturer's standard range. Flame spread rating must meet Treasury Board, Fire Protection Standard. To CAN/ULC-S102.2-10.
.2 .3
2.2 ELASTOMERIC COATING TO SHOWER FLOORS
.1
Elastomeric Coating to shower floors and bases: below epoxy flooring specified in 2.1.1 of this section, install 100% solids elastomeric urethane. Submit sample of textured shower floor system to Departmental Representative for approval. Colour as per Finish Schedule.
EPOXY FLOORING
Section 09 96 58 Page 6 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
.1 .2 .3
Ensure concrete floors conform to manufacturer's requirements. Ensure that items penetrating coating are placed before application of coating. Ensure that all surfaces are clean and dry.
.1 .2
Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out and dusting. Ensure surfaces are clean, sound and dry; in all cases requiring some form of preparation. Prepare substrates in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Effectively remove concrete laitance by steel shot blasting, grit blasting or method approved by manufacturer. Prefill surface irregularities, holes, joints and cracks in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean substrate of matter which would affect bond of applied coating. Prepare concrete floors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Before commencement of application of flooring, ensure that concrete floors are acceptable in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Commencement of work implies acceptance of surfaces and working conditions.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.3 APPLICATION/ EPOXY FLOORING
.1
Ensure that floors have been prepared in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to application of epoxy flooring. Reinforce joints and cracks greater than 1 mm and less than 3 mm to manufacturer's standards. Apply prime coat onto substrate using brush, roller or squeegee, at a uniform coverage without ponding.
.2 .3
EPOXY FLOORING
Section 09 96 58 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.3 APPLICATION/ EPOXY FLOORING (Cont'd)
.4
Once the prime coat is tack free, apply the wear coat using a squeegee or roller and back roll to achieve a uniform, even coverage.
If the time between coats exceeds 48 hours at 22C, abrade the surface and wipe clean with a solvent dampened cloth. To shower floors and bases, install 100% solids elastomeric polyurethane waterproof membrane, to a thickness of 30 mils, in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Install epoxy flooring over the elastomeric polyurethane waterproof membrane. Apply flooring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to a uniform thickness, with uniform smooth texture and colour throughout, to match accepted sample and accepted mock-up. To shower areas, apply slip resistant top coat in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Finish flooring uniformly, free from surface imperfections, and to match the approved sample and mock-up. Cove epoxy flooring up all adjacent walls, minimum 200 mm to form base to flooring. Top of base to be level, true, and even. Allow proper cure time for each installation procedure.
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
3.4
CLEAN-UP
.1
Upon completion of work of this section clean area up of debris, remove flooring material from adjacent surfaces where splattered and leave area in clean, tidy condition acceptable to the Departmental Representative.
END
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES CHALKBOARDS, WHITEBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
Section 10 11 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Aluminum Association (AA). .1 DAF 45-03, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. Porcelain Enamel Institute (PEI). .1 PEI 501 Porcelain Enamel.
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate VOC'S: .1 For caulking materials during application. .2 For adhesives. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate location, type, size, panel arrangement, backing, hardware, anchor or mounting details, frame or trim and accessories. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample of each type whiteboard and 300 mm long sample of each type trim. Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Manufacturers' Field Reports: submit copies of manufacturers field reports. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. .2 Affix maintenance instruction labels to chalkboards.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
Section 10 11 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.2
.3
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic packaging material in appropriate on site for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Laminating adhesive: to manufacturer's standard. Joint reinforcement: concealed mechanical jointing system to provide straight, rigid, continuously supported, tight butt, flush joints at surface. Anchor clips, brackets and fasteners: concealed type recommended by manufacturer. Facings: .1 Steel sheet: 0.61 mm thickness, commercial quality to ASTM A526, pre cleaned and treated to ensure maximum adhesion of an acid resistant type A (for Whiteboard) porcelain enamel. Core: .1 Sound absorbing core material 11 mm thick.
.3 .4
.5
Section 10 11 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.6
Backing: .1 28 gauge steel sheet.
2.2
COMPONENTS
.1 .2
Extruded aluminum: aluminum Association alloy AA6063 T5. Minimum 1.5 mm thick. Trim: perimeter trim or frame, bottom rail with integral chalk trough and end closures, of manufacturer's standard sections appropriate for installation conditions.
2.3
FABRICATION
.1 .2
Fabricate whiteboard panels to sizes indicated. Factory laminate whiteboards, consisting of facing sheet, with core and backing sheet. Adhesive in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Make finished panels flat and rigid and fit with joint reinforcement. Fit joints between abutting whiteboard panels with joint reinforcement except where covering trim is required. Install trim on panels in factory. Make mitres and joints to hair line fit, free of rough edges. Use concealed brackets to reinforce and hold joints tight and flush. No exposed fasteners permitted. Overlap trim 6 mm onto panels. Factory fit assemblies too large for shipment to site in one piece, disassemble for delivery and site assembly.
.3 .4
.5
.6 .7
2.4
FINISHES
.1
Writing surfaces: .1 Porcelain enamel: to Porcelain Enamel Institute Standards PEI 501 regards durability, smoothness of texture, colour continuity. Gloss factor of 6-8 as measured by 45 degree glossmeter. .2 Surface finish for erasable markers and suitable for use as a projection screen: white colour.
Section 10 11 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install whiteboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, parallel to floor with uniform vertical surface, plumb and level, to provide rigid, secure writing surface. Mechanical attachment: .1 To concrete or solid masonry use lag screw and expansion bolts or screws and fibre plugs as appropriate for stresses involved. .2 To hollow masonry use toggle bolts or equivalent. .3 To wood or sheet metal use screws. Secure into framing members in stud walls.
.2
.1
Have manufacturer of products supplied under this Section review Work involved in handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning of its products, and submit written reports in acceptable format to verify compliance of Work with Contract. Manufacturer's field services: provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
3.4
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3 .4
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Clean surfaces after installation using manufacturer's recommended cleaning procedures. Clean aluminum with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers. END
MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES & RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
Section 10 28 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A167-99(2009), Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate size and description of components, base material, surface finish inside and out, hardware and locks, attachment devices, description of rough in frame, building in details of anchors for grab bars. Indicate size and description of components, base material, surface finish inside and out, hardware and locks, attachment devices, description of rough in frame, building in details of anchors for grab bars.
.3
1.3 SAMPLES AND SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples to be returned for inclusion into work. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for appliances to be supplied, for review prior to shipment, in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit warranties, registration cards, installation instructions and operative instructions for each appliance supplied.
.4
Section 10 28 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITALS
.1
Provide maintenance data for toilet and bath accessories for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide special tools required for accessing, assembly/disassembly or removal for toilet and bath accessories in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01 78 00. Deliver special tools to Departmental Representative.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Sheet steel: to ASTM A653/A653M with ZF001 designation zinc coating. Stainless steel sheet metal: to ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304, with No. 4 finish unless noted otherwise. Fasteners: concealed screws and bolts hot dip galvanized, exposed fasteners to match face of unit. Expansion shields fibre, lead or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and its intended use. Use Torx with pin fasteners. Front Load Washer: 120 volt, 60 cycle, 15 amps, separately fused; 3 wire, grounded circuit, 3/4 hp motor; permanently lubricated motor and transmission with built in thermal overload protection, self leveling rear feet, adjustable front feet, 2.84 ft2 stainless steel wash tub, choice of 6 wash/rinse cycles, complete with optional automatic supply injection, 1000 rpm final spin, stop action lid, switch, size to be 683 mm wide x 752 mm deep x 1054 mm high; commercial quality washer, colour to be white. Model FTZ90 as manufactured by Huebsch or equivalent.
.3
.4
Section 10 28 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.5
Front Load Dryer: 120/240 volt, 60 cycle, 30 amp, 3 wire grounded circuit required separately fused. Four way exhaust venting, 1/3 hp permanently lubricated motor, 6 cycle settings, minimum 5350W output, secured metal mesh lint filter, full width door, size to be 683 mm wide x 752 mm deep x 1054 mm high; push to start button; commercial quality dryer, colour to be white. Model FEZ17 as manufactured by Huebsch or equivalent.
2.2 SECURE ACCESSORIES
.1
Secure Folding Shower Seat (S1): Compact Rectangular Phenolic Fold-up Shower Seat shall have all metal parts fabricated of 18-8 alloy Type 304 stainless steel. Seat frame and support legs shall be 25 mm dia. and 32 mm square x 1.2 mm gauge with 4.8 mm thick mounting flanges and 1.5 mm gauge guide bracket/arm support. All exposed surfaces shall have No 4 satin finish. Structural assembly shall be of welded construction and all exposed edges and corners shall be radiused and/or deburred. Seat shall be 8mm thick solid phenolic with ivory color top and bottom surfaces and shall have black edges. Support arm shall fold up when in retracted position to provide low profile against wall. No extra fittings shall be required to retain seat in storage position. Guide bracket shall control seat lowering into operating position. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 American Specialties 8203, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000, .2 Bobrick B-5191, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555 Secure Vandal Resistant Mirror (S2): with rounded corners; front mounted. Formed with one piece formed alloy 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 No. 18 gauge with No. 8 polish. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 American Specialties Inc. 107, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000. .2 Bobrick B-942, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .3 Acorn Penal-Ware 1817, www.acorneng.com, 800.488.8999. Recessed Toilet Paper Holder (S3): front-mounting, with square bezel, shall hold one standard roll and shall be fabricated of
.2
.3
Section 10 28 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.2 SECURE ACCESSORIES (Cont'd)
.3
Recessed Toilet Paper Holder (S3):(Cont'd) alloy 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 No. 14 gauge. Use security fasteners. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 Acorn Penal-Ware 1840-FA, www.acorneng.com, 800.488.8999. .2 American Specialties Inc., www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000. .3 Bobrick B-985, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. Secure Coat Hook (S5): Maximum Security Clothes hook with snap down feature for safety if excessively loaded: Type 304 stainless steel, secured from the front. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 Acorn Penal-Ware 1829, www.acorneng.com, 800.488.8999. .2 American Specialties Inc. 123, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000. .3 Bobrick B-983, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. Wall Cap and Grab Rail (S6 & S7): custom fabricated from minimum 2.5 mm thick Type 304 stainless steel sheet, as detailed on the drawings. Refer to Section 05 50 01. Access Panel (S8):18-8 stainless steel, Type 304, 18 gauge with satin finish; 25 mm stainless steel flange. Key operated cylinder lock (master keyed); 600 mm x 600 mm. Provide quantities and locate as required by mechanical services. Coordinate with mechanical, masonry and gypsum board assemblies. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 J.L. Industries Inc. Model SP Security Panels, www.activarcpg.com/jl-industries, 800.554.6077. .2 Acudor SD-6000, www.acudor.ca, 888.388.3611.
.4
.5
.6
2.3 NON-SECURE ACCESSORIES
.1
Semi-Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (N1): fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304, No. 22 gauge. Towel dispenser shall have a capacity of 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. The waste receptacle shall have a capacity of 12 gal. and be equipped with interior hooks and a vinyl liner. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 American Specialties Inc. www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000.
Section 10 28 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.3 NON-SECURE ACCESSORIES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .1 Acceptable Materials:(Cont'd) .2 Bobrick B-3942, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .3 Bradley, www.bradleycorp.com, 800.272.3539. Surface Mounted Waste Receptacle (N2): fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304, No. 22 gauge. Back and bottom are one piece, 26 gauge. All welded construction. Equipped with interior hooks and a vinyl liner. Capacity of 6.4 gal. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 Bobrick B-279, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .2 American Specialties 0828, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000. .3 Bradley 357, www.bradleycorp.com, 800.272.3539. Surface Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser, Controlled (N3). .1 Only requiring you to touch your personal towel, thereby reducing the chance for cross-contamination from touching commonly used surfaces such as levers or buttons which makes it ideal for food preparation and healthcare environments. .2 With each pull of the slightly exposed towel, the dispenser is to cut a pre-measured 280 mm towel for maximum usage control. .3 High capacity dispenser accommodating up to a 243 metres long roll with a 100 mm stub roll to optimize dispenser capacity. .4 Side-hinged door for ease when opening and loading the dispenser. .5 Surface-mounted: .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 Baywest 86500 Silhouette OptiServ Hands-Free. .2 Kimberly-Clark In-Sight* Sanitouch* Hard Roll Towel Dispenser, www.kimberly-clark.com, 888.525.8388. .3 Bobrick B-2860, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .4 Tork Matic Hand Towel Roll Dispenser, colour by Departmental Representative from manufacturer's standard offering. www.torkusa.com, 866.722.8675.
.2
.3
Section 10 28 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
.4
Surface Mounted Soap Dispenser (N4): fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 and shall have a capacity of 1.18L. Bobrick B-2112. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 Bobrick B-2112,www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555.
Mirror (N5): one piece channel frame, 13 mm x 13 mm x 13 mm, with bright polished finished and mitred corners; No. 1 quality 6 mm tempered glass mirror electrolytically copper plated, guaranteed against silver spoilage for 10 years. Mirror edges and back protected by shock absorbing material. Back to be galvanized steel. Secured by concealed wall hangers. 460 mm x 910 mm size. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 American Specialties Inc. 0620 18"W x 36"H, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000. .2 Bobrick Model B-165 1836, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .3 Bradley 781-1836, www.bradleycorp.com, 800.272.3539. Tilt Mirror (N6): 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 with satin finish frame, tapers from 100 mm depth at top to 25 mm depth at bottom; galvanized steel back and inner liner stiffener frame is one piece welded construction; no. 1 quality 6 mm tempered glass mirror electrolytically copper plated, guaranteed against silver spoilage for 10 years. Mirror edges and back protected by shock absorbing material. Back to be galvanized steel. Secured by concealed wall hangers. Size to be 460 mm x 910 mm. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 American Specialties Inc. 0535 18"W x 36"H, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000. .2 Bobrick Model B-293 1836, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .3 Bradley 740-1836,www.bradleycorp.com, 800.272.3539. Clothes Hook (N7): 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 with satin finish all welded construction. .1 American Specialties 8425, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000. .2 Bobrick B-233, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .3 Bradley 917, www.bradleycorp.com, 800.272.3539.
.5
.6
.7
Section 10 28 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
.8
Grab Bar (N8 & N9): 32 mm Diameter, stainless steel with peened gripping surface, concealed mounting, 914 mm long. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 American Specialties Inc. 3100 Series, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000. .2 Bobrick B-5806.99, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .3 Bradley 832-2, www.bradleycorp.com, 800.272.3539. .4 Frost 1001, www.frostproductsltd.com, 905.332.5700. Toilet Roll Holder (N10): Double roll model, surface mounted, bright polished chrome finish, heave duty brake springs for controlled delivery. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 American Specialties Inc. 0715, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000 .2 Bobrick B-265, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .3 Bradley 522, www.bradleycorp.com, 800.272.3539. .4 Frost 150, www.frostproductsltd.com, 905.332.5700. Surface Mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal (N11): 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 with satin finish, all welded construction having a capacity of 4.6 L. Door shall be secure with full length piano hinge: .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 Bobrick B-254, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. Recessed Sanitary Napkin Disposal (N12): 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 with satin finish, all welded construction having a capacity of 4.6 L. Door shall be secure with full length piano hinge. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 Bobrick B-353 www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. Surface Mounted Mop and Broom Holder (N13): mounting base constructed of 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 with satin finish. Mop and broom holders to be spring loaded rubber cams with plated steel retainers 914 mm long with 4 holders: .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 American Specialties 8215-4, www.americanspecialties.com, 914.476.9000
.9
.10
.11
.12
Section 10 28 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
.12
(Cont'd) .1 Acceptable Materials:(Cont'd) .2 Bobrick B-223 x 36, www.bobrick.com, 877.423.6555. .3 Bradley 9954,www.bradleycorp.com, 800.272.3539. .4 Frost 1114, www.frostproductslts.com, 905.332.5700. Access Panel (N14):18-8 stainless steel, Type 304, 18 gauge with satin finish; 25 mm stainless steel flange. Key operated cylinder lock (master keyed); 600 mm x 600 mm. Provide quantities and locate as required by mechanical services. Coordinate with mechanical, masonry and gypsum board assemblies. .1 Acceptable Materials: .1 J.L. Industries Inc., www.activarcpg.com/jl-industries, 800.554.6077. .2 Acudor, www.acudor.ca, 888.388.3611. .3 Wilkinson Company Inc.
.13
2.4
FABRICATION
.1
Weld and grind joints of fabricated components flush and smooth. Use mechanical fasteners only where approved. Wherever possible form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. Hot dip galvanize concealed ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices to ASTM A123/A123M. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. Deliver inserts and rough in frames to job site at appropriate time for building in. Provide templates, details and instructions for building in anchors and inserts. Provide steel anchor plates and components for installation on studding and building framing.
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6
.7 .8
.9
Section 10 28 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install and secure accessories rigidly in place as follows: .1 Gypsum Board: use toggle bolts drilled into cell/wall cavity. .2 Masonry: Stainless Steel S-Shape Concrete Anchors: 10 mm Spike model as manufactured by Rawl or preapproved. Use tamper proof screws/bolts for fasteners. Install continuous bead of security sealant around edges of secure accessory and wall surface. Locate accessories as indicated. Install appliances in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions, plugged in and operational, connect washers to plumbing. Install in accordance with the drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Securely fasten/anchor in place as directed by the Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
.4 .5
.6
END
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This section is to be combined with Sections 08 50 50, 11 19 13, 11 19 14 and 32 31 14. Refer to Section 11 19 13 - Detention Doors and Frames - Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor (DEC). This section describes the base building Detention Quality Hardware, Detention Equipment and related Finish Hardware. Limits and scope of work under these sections shall be defined in these specifications and correspondingly shown on the drawings.
.2
.3
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Furnish all labour and materials for the supply and installation of detention hardware capable of supporting operations to the parameters as defined herein. Be responsible for the complete supply and execution of all components including related commercial hardware specified within this section. Include the supply, installation and termination of all cabling and pneumatic tubing within frame assemblies and from door devices to remote junction boxes, as may be applicable to form a complete operating pneumatic system for devices specified within this section. Include the supply and installation of all Pneumatic Head End Equipment and terminations of all pneumatic lines at main and sub-manifolds, head end pneumatic equipment, pneumatic control valves and the Remote Manual Emergency Release System (RMERS). Electrical subcontractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires (cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractor) and pneumatic tubing (supplied by Section 11 19 12 DEC subcontractor) in conduit and wire trays provided by Electrical subcontractor (Division 26). Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted. Coordinate control cabling, low voltage wires and pneumatic tubing in conduit, raceways and cable trays with Section 11 19 12 DEC
.2
.3
.4
.5
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 SUMMARY (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) subcontractor and Electrical subcontractor (Division 26).
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Reference Standards: .1 ANSI - American National Standards Institute. .2 BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. .3 CSA - Canadian Standards Association. .4 ULC - Underwriters Laboratories Canada. .5 NFPA-80 Fire Doors and Windows. .6 NFPA-101 Life Safety Codes. .7 NBC - National Building Code. .8 CEC - Canadian Electrical Code. .9 ASTM - American Standards Testing Methods. .10 ANSI/NAAMM HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association(HMMA)Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). All References to the latest edition.
.2
1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
.1
Use only ULC or ULI listed and labelled hardware.
1.5
HARDWARE LIST
.1 .2
Submit hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Clearly indicate hardware proposed including make, model, material, function, finish and all other pertinent information. Headings shall include room designations, door numbers, door size and material, frame material, handing, fire resistance rating, degree of opening, and original hardware group. Each opening shall have its own item number and only door and hardware assemblies which are identical in every detail may be grouped together regardless of the original hardware group. Original hardware group provides the intent, but may not include all of the detailed items to complete the hardware assembly. It is the responsibility of this Section to ensure the hardware assembly complies with the intent of the original hardware group A schedule of mounting heights shall be included with shop
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 HARDWARE LIST (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) drawings. Provide separate schedules for secure and non-secure (Builders Type) doors. Each opening shall have its own item number and only door and hardware assemblies which are identical in every detail may be grouped together. Product description shall be complete in every detail as recommended by the manufacturer under ordering procedures including sizes and fasteners. Shop drawings not submitted in accordance with contract documents will be rejected outright. Be responsible for any costs incurred due to delays as a result of submittals not in accordance with contract documents.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR
.1
A single Detention Equipment Contractor (DEC) having met all the requirements listed hereafter and having been approved by the Departmental Representative will assume control and accountability for furnishing, installing and interfacing all Detention Hardware and Equipment as specified herein. The DEC shall have a minimum of ten (10) years documented experience furnishing detention hardware and shall be registered in the Province of Ontario, with adequate equipment, maintenance and advisory facilities in the location of the project to fulfill contract obligations. The DEC shall have in there employ a full time superintendent who will be directly responsible for the supervision and coordination of work in this section. The Superintendent shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience in the supervision of all phases of detention hardware installation. Superintendent shall have worked on at least two (2) detention facility projects of similar character and magnitude as required for the specified work. The DEC shall provide a written statement outlining superintendents experience and contact references, and if requested shall provide a demonstration of said qualifications to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative prior to commencing work. The DEC shall provide proof of factory certification from the detention hardware manufacturer for the appointed superintendent. Any changes to the approved superintendent shall require written approval of the Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR (Cont'd)
.5
Hardware shall be installed by qualified factory authorized and trained trades people regularly engaged in the installation of detention hardware. Installers shall have a minimum of ten (10) years documented experience in the installation of detention hardware of the type required for this project. The DEC shall provide a written statement outlining installers experience and contact references and, if requested shall provide a demonstration of said qualifications to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative prior to commencing work. Any changes to the approved installation crews shall require written approval of the Departmental Representative.
Hardware shall comply with the current issue of codes and standards as listed in References.
.6
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUFACTURERS
.1
The DEC must provide detention locks and equipment from manufacturing firms, who at present have products with not less than ten (10) successful years of field experience and shall now be actively engaged in the design and manufacture of detention locks and detention equipment of the type required for this project. The manufacturer shall provide a list of at least five (5) projects (two of which have been in operation for at least three years), for which similar products are in operation. For each facility list the name and location of the facility, the owner's representative and contact numbers. Submit lock manufacturers' certified test reports from a nationally recognized testing firm acceptable to the Departmental Representative, that indicates that all locks and sliding door devices have successfully passed the standard test methods defined in ASTM F1450-05 Security Grade 1, 2 & 3 and ASTM F1592-05 Security Grade 1, 2 & 3. Manufacturer's factory representative must be present to sign off and verify the detention door and hardware system during the final commissioning process.
.2
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.8 SAMPLES AND MODELS
.1
Submit one full size sample of each type hardware specified, in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number and type, brand name and number, finish and building location installation. Submit one full scale working model of cell door locking device complete with cell door and frame, to fully demonstrate every detail of its operation. Pay all costs relative to submitting and removing samples and models.
.2
.3
.4
1.9 SHOP DRAWING, PRODUCT DATA AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
.1 .2 .3
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Clearly indicate all information required for proper preparation and application of hardware. Submit shop drawings for each type locking device to show fabrication, layout, setting and erection details. Submit wiring diagrams and service requirements for electrically and electro-pneumatically operated hardware and equipment device types and locations, wiring schematics, conduit requirement and layout, template information, and cable allocations from junction boxes to devices and door/ frame assemblies and service requirements. Furnish door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware.
.4
.5
1.10 MAINTENANCE DATA AND INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide maintenance data, parts list and manufacturer's instructions for each type of lock, cremone bolt set, door closer, door holder, electric deadbolt, and locking device for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Brief maintenance staff regarding proper care of hardware and locking devices, such as lubrication, adjustments, cleaning, and general instructions.
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 6 2011-05-25
.1 .2
Supply two spanner tools for each size spanner screw on job, both manual and power driven. Supply two sets of wrenches for each type of do or closer.
1.12 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
.1 .2
Store all hardware and locking devices in locked, clean and dry area. Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location. Maintain inventory list with hardware schedule.
.3
1.13 ENGINEERING AND TECHNICAL SUPERVISION
.1
Provide qualified engineering and technical supervision commencing at date contract is awarded and continuing until Final Certificate of Completion is issued. Qualified supervisor will have been actively engaged in prison security hardware business for not less than five years. Upon completion of work, and prior to issuance of Final Certificate of Completion, the DEC shall ensure that a factory representative from the detention hardware manufacturer will be present through the final commissioning process and sign off the entire locking and pneumatic system to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
1.14 SEQUNECING AND COORDINATION
.1
Confer with various sections of work and refer to detail drawings prior to ordering hardware to ensure that they will conform to and fit actual conditions on site. Refer to door schedule for correct sizing of hardware. Co-ordinate hardware components with all affected door and frame manufacturers to ensure correct door and frame preparation. Inform and coordinate with manufacturers where conduit may be required within their respective assemblies and provide all required templates and physical samples of each hardware item for door and frame preparation to Section 11 19 13, 11 19 14, and 32 31 14.
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 7 2011-05-25
1.14 SEQUNECING AND COORDINATION (Cont'd)
.3
Coordinate final conduit system design and electrical service allocations with Electrical subcontractor (Division 26). Complete system riser diagrams indicating location of all conduit runs, wire trays, and electrical riser rooms for the door control system shall be prepared by Electrical subcontractor (Division 26). These riser diagrams shall be reviewed by the Division 11 subcontractor for correctness with respect to layout, functionality and logistics. Based on these drawings the Division 11 DEC subcontractor will provide riser drawings all pneumatic supply lines, indicate locations of all pneumatic equipment and coordinate continuity of the entire electro-pneumatic supply system layout with The Electrical subcontractor (Division 26); prior to commencement of work on site.
Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractor shall provide electrical schematic drawings clearly indicating all conductors, monitors, power circuits, field wiring diagrams and lock pigtail configuration schematics to the Division 11 DEC subcontractor for review; prior to commencement of work on site. No deviations, modifications or changes from the information contained in these drawings, wiring diagrams and pneumatic line and equipment layout drawings shall be allowed without prior written approval from the Departmental Representative. Immediately advise the Departmental Representative of any modifications required to ensure proper functionality of the pneumatic locks. Provide schematic documentation support as required and coordinate all electronic hardware with Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 door control system subcontractor to ensure the correct interface between door devices and door control system(s). Review and confirm all locking functions and lock status monitoring requirements with the Departmental Representative prior to ordering hardware. Substantial corrosion resistant pull strings to be installed in all conduits by The Electrical subcontractor (Division 26).
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 8 2011-05-25
1.14 SEQUNECING AND COORDINATION (Cont'd)
.9
The Division 11 DEC contractor is responsible for the complete coordination and layout of the pneumatic distribution system and equipment as it relates to Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Adherence to the approved shop drawings and equipment layout design by all related trades is the responsibility of this section. Confirm all sill details and correct site specific threshold application.
.10
1.15
WARRANTY
.1
For door closers of this Section, provide manufacturers 10 year warranty against defects in design, workmanship, materials and finishes.
1.16
COMMISSIONING
.1 .2
Coordinate with Sections 01 91 00 and 01 91 31. Commissioning and verification of Pneumatic Locking System: .1 The pneumatic locking system is to be commissioned and verified by an independent manufacturer's representative to ensure the system is installed and operating to the requirements of the specifications. .2 Submit a commissioning verification report completed by the lock manufacturer's representative upon completion of testing and verification. Commissioning and verification to include: .1 All head end equipment and systems in the Communications Room. .2 All pneumatic sliding door devices and all pneumatic swing doors. .3 The complete Remote Manual Emergency Release System. Review and confirm that all detention doors and locking hardware have been installed within factory required tolerances. Notify Departmental Representative of any and all discrepancies and concerns
.3
.4
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 9 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HARDWARE ITEMS
.1 .2
Use one manufacturer's products only for all similar items. Provide the following conventional hardware to detention areas: .1 Door Closer: Refer to Section 08 71 00. .2 Weather-stripping: Refer to Section 08 71 00. .3 Threshold: Refer to Section 08 71 00. .4 Automatic Door Bottoms: Refer to Section 08 71 00.
2.2 FASTENING DEVICES
.1
Provide security screws, security nuts, rivets, spanner screws or other equally secure approved devices for affixing various hardware items. Use only rivets, security screws, or security nuts at locations where maximum security against removal is required. Use spanner screws only at locations where security against removal is not as important, and where it is necessary to remove and repair items from time to time. Security screws and nuts to have an extra head which twists off when screw or nut is fully secured, leaving main head without holes or slots for insertion of tool for removal. Spanner screws to be tamper resistant Torx with pin requiring special spanner tool to remove screws. Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking. Standard screws not acceptable. Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass. Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7 .8 .9
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.3
KEYING
.1
Prepare keying schedule in consultation with Departmental Representative. Keying system to include keying alike in groups,and in relationship to existing alike groups and keying differently. Submit schedule for approval prior to ordering hardware. Master keying not allowed. Construction key cores are permitted for construction purposes. Construction cores are to be replaced with permanent cores and keyed to match the Institution's key coding requirements. Provide keys in triplicate for each key-code. Stamp key-code numbers on keys, prison lock cases, and institutional lock cylinders. Stamp year of issue on prison keys. Deliver keys via bonded courier or registered mail to person and place designated by Departmental Representative. Certify that lock manufacturer maintains a register listing all key-codes issued to this project to ensure that replacement keys may be ordered by key-code number only in future, and that locks added in future will not accidentally duplicate existing codes. Assign key-code numbers which identify the institution, plus the particular key-code within the institution. Key-code numbers which directly relate to the actual physical cuts on the keys, not allowed.
.2 .3
.4 .5
.6
.7
.8
.9
2.4
HINGES
.1
Type 1A2: .1 Style, full surface, three-knuckle type, with special steel wing on leaf for holding food pass door at 90. .2 Size, 76 mm high x 102 mm minimum wide. .3 Hinge leaves, 10 mm thick malleable iron or steel. .4 Hinge pin, 11 mm minimum diameter knurled and hardened steel (non-removable). .5 Fasteners, four 10 mm diameter flat head security screws. .6 Finish, CP. .7 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 630FP,www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.4 HINGES (Cont'd)
.1
Type 1A2:(Cont'd) .7 Acceptable Materials:(Cont'd) .2 Folger Adam No. 3FP, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No. 203FP, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Type 1A3: .1 Style, full surface, half surface or gap type, three-knuckle type. .2 Size, 127 mm high x 121 mm minimum wide (width may vary). .3 Hinge leaves, 10 mm minimum thickness drop forged mild steel. .4 Bearings, two needle thrust and two needle radial bearings or twelve 6 mm diameter balls per hinge. .5 Hinge pin, 11 mm minimum diameter knurled and hardened steel (non-removable). .6 Fasteners, six 11 mm minimum diameter flat head security screws. .7 Finish, CP or Galvanized. .8 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 605,www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No. 5, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No. 205, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Type 1B3: .1 Style, full mortise or half mortise, three-knuckle type (cast stainless steel). .2 Size, 114 mm high x 114 mm minimum wide. .3 Hinge leaves, 5 mm minimum thickness investment-cast stainless steel with 12 mm diameter x 13 mm long studs on each leaf. .4 Ball bearings, 10 mm diameter stainless steel. .5 Ball races, hardened tool steel. .6 Hinge pin, stainless steel tubing (non-removable fully concealed with hospital tips and permanently lubricated). .7 Fasteners, eight No. 12 flat head stainless steel security screws. .8 Finish, 630. .9 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 640 FMCS, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No. 41/2 FM-1CS, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No. 604FMCS, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231.
.2
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 12 2011-05-25
2.5 KEY OPERATED LOCKS
.1
Following features are common to all locks Type 3A: .1 All have five lever tumblers of "spring temper" hard brass, each tumbler 3 mm thick and actuated by phosphor bronze spring. .2 All have key cylinders of polished alloy bronze having hardness and tensile strength equal to mild steel. Each cylinder grooved to match and guide similar grooves in key. .3 All operate by key type 14A1. Type 3A6 (combination spring and deadlock): .1 Case and cover malleable iron and steel, size 114 mm high x 210 mm wide x 38 mm thick. .2 Lockbolt solid steel 51 mm x 19 mm in size with two hardened steel inserts 6 mm diameter inserted into blind holes from inside of lock. .3 Bolt throw 19 mm. .4 Keyed: one side(K1S)or two sides(K2S). .5 Finish: bright zinc plated .6 Fasteners, four 10 mm diameter flat head spanner security machine screws. .7 When door closes, bevel bolt latches only. It is retractable by half turn of key. Full turn of key in opposite direction securely deadlocks bevel bolt. Type 3A9 (deadlock): .1 Case and cover drop forged steel, size 95 mm x 140 mm wide x 38 mm thick. .2 Bolt throw 19 mm. .3 Finish: Galvanized. .4 Keyed: one side(K1S)or two sides(K2S). .5 Fasteners: four 10 mm diameter flat head spanner security machine screws. .6 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 5080, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.80, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.1080, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Following feature is common to all locks Type 3B: .1 Key cylinders "Mogul" type with 51 mm barrel diameter containing six pin stainless steel engaging tumblers and key. Type 3B6 (food pass spring latch): .1 Case and cover: high strength allow and steel, size 70 mm high x 102 mm wide x 32 mm thick. .2 CK bolt: stainless steel with 11.1 mm throw.
.2
.3
.4
.5
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 13 2011-05-25
2.5 KEY OPERATED LOCKS (Cont'd)
.5
Type 3B6 (food pass spring latch):(Cont'd) .3 Lock bolt size: 25.4 mm x 11.1 mm. .4 Finish: Bright Zinc Plated. .5 Keyed: one side only. .6 Fasteners: four 8 mm diameter flat head security machine screws (twist-off head type). .7 Mogul key cylinder. .8 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 5017M, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.17M, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.1017M, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Type 3B7 (Institutional Mortis Lock): designed for medium security applications where lever or knob operation required: .1 Function: Series 400 meeting ASTM F1577-05. .2 Impact Test Level: Deadbolt and deadbolt latch bolt functions meeting Level 1 (600 impacts), ASTM F1577-05. .3 Impact Test Level: Latch bolt functions only meeting Level 3 (200 impacts), ASTM F1577-05. .4 Case and Cover: 2.5 mm heavy duty wrought steel, zinc dichromate plated .5 ANSI Strike: universal stainless steel with C32D finish. .6 Faceplate: 1.6 mm stainless steel. .7 Latch bolt: stainless steel 19 mm one piece, anti-friction latch bolt. Meeting all dimensional keep tabs specifications of ANSI/BHMA A156.13-2005. .8 Deadbolt Actuation: stainless steel. .9 Lever Handle: solid stainless steel. .10 Safety knob: solid stainless steel (inside room). .11 Key cylinder: Mogul. .12 Latch bolt throw: 19 mm .13 Fasteners: security spanner machine screws. .14 High security tapered cylinder collar. .15 High security rose. .16 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 90477 x L/SK, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.125-4-03, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.10577, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231.
.6
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 14 2011-05-25
2.6 STRIKES FOR KEY OPERATED PRISON LOCKS
.1
Type 4A1 (with dust box): .1 Material, 5 mm mild steel. .2 Fasteners, four 6 mm diameter flat head security screws. .3 Include steel box on reverse side to protect against mortar and dust. .4 Finish CP or Galvanized. .5 Design to include round-edged lip when strike used in conjunction with springbolt lock. .6 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 690-4DB, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.4, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.6070C, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Type 4A2 (with micro-switch on dust box): .1 Materials, 5 mm mild steel. .2 Fasteners, four 6 mm diameter flat head security screws. .3 Finish CP or Galvanized. .4 Design to include round-edged lip when strike used in conjunction with spring bolt lock. .5 Include one single pole double throw switch on each, positioned so as to be actuated by locking action of lockbolt. .6 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 690-4BL, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.4BL, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.6070CL, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Type 4A3 (for fence posts on chain link fences): .1 Material, 6 mm mild steel, formed into channel shape to suit fence post. .2 Fasteners, three 10 mm diameter hex head bolts and matching hex nuts for bolting through fence post. .3 Finish, galvanized. .4 Height, same as matching lock mounting box.
.2
.3
2.7 LOCK MOUNTINGS FOR KEY OPERATED PRISON LOCKS
.1
Type 5A1 (for flush mounting prison locks in detention doors)hollow metal: .1 Material, single 5 mm flat mild steel plate, size variable so suit lock. .2 Fasteners, eight 6 mm diameter flat head Tamper Resistant Torx with pin security screws.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 15 2011-05-25
2.7 LOCK MOUNTINGS FOR KEY OPERATED PRISON LOCKS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Include one type 11A1 escutcheon on each. .3 Finish CP. .4 .5 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq HM,www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam HM, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.HM, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. For exterior doors, lock mountings are to have same features as type 5A1 inclusive, plus the following: .1 Ferrous materials to be galvanized. .2 Include 1 type 11A2 cylinder shield on each instead of escutcheon, on exterior. .3 Type number in Hardware Schedule to be: .1 5A5 instead of 5A1.
.2
2.8 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS
.1
Following features are common to all type 7A electro-mechanical locks: .1 All have five lever tumblers of "spring temper" hard brass, each tumbler 3 mm thick and actuated by phospor bronze spring. .2 All have key cylinders of polished alloy bronze having hardness and tensile strength equal to mild steel. Each cylinder grooved to match and guide similar grooves in key. .3 All operate by key type 14B, when key operation desired. .4 All have steel cases 5 mm thick. .5 All operate on 24 VDC (standard), 120 VAC or 220 VAC (optional). Type 7A1 (for exterior swinging chain link fence gate requiring emergency egress function): .1 Lock case: not to exceed 254 mm high x 127 mm wide x 51 mm deep; all steel construction with galvanized finish. .2 Electric operation: electro-mechanical. .3 Unlock electrically: by push button at Unit Control. .4 Deadbolt retracts and remains retracted until door is closed. .5 Mogul key cylinder complete with cylinder extension to allow for manual mechanical unlocking of the lock by key at the opening, both sides for Airteq 9724 Series lock. .6 Alternative: Paracentric key to allow for manual mechanical unlocking of the lock by key at the opening, both sides. DEC contractor responsible to modify frame to allow lock pocket
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 16 2011-05-25
2.8 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .6 Alternative:(Cont'd) for keying both sides, extra width for door frame to accommodate wider lock and all engineering and consultant costs to revise rough opening dimensions for wider frame opening; for Folger Adam 50E Series lock and Southern Steel 1050E Series lock. .7 Fail secure, unlocks when energized. .8 Security Level: ASTM F1577-05 Grade 1. .9 Dead bolt: 50 mm x 17 mm precision machined alloy steel hardened to RC 60 .10 Corrosion-resistant working parts. .11 Indication Switch (A): A lock status switch monitors the deadbolt and its deadlock condition. .12 Motor 2 phase, bi-polar, brushless linear actuator: 36 watt max. at 24 VDC, 1.5 Amps. .13 Electrical Connector: Quick connect with colour coded wiring harness. .14 Junction Box: 100 mm high x 203 mm wide x 89 mm deep welded to bottom of lock case; 7 gauge steel construction with galvanized finish. .15 Lock cover plate: 405 mm high x 203 mm wide x 7 gauge steel construction with galvanized finish. Torx with Pin security fasteners as shown on drawings .16 Finish: Galvanized. .17 Keyed: two sides (K2S). .18 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 9724, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam 50E, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.1050E, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Acceptable Manufacturers: .1 Except as otherwise specified herein, the equipment and materials of this section shall be components fabricated by one single manufacturer. The following manufacturers are pre-qualified to supply the products specified under this Section. .1 Airteq Systems (AT), Montgomery, AL. www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam Security Inc. (FA), Lamont, IL. www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel Company (SSCO), San Antonio, TX. www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .4 Note: Prequalification is not acceptance of manufacturers standard products. Prequalification is only approval
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 17 2011-05-25
.3
Acceptable Manufacturers:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .4 Note:(Cont'd) to supply products meeting all specifications herein. .2 Following features are common to all Type 7 electro-mechanical locks for all individual swinging gates, complete with integral electronic components. .1 Function: .1 Normal Operation: .1 When electrical power is applied to the stepper motor, the latch bolt shall retract. The bolt shall remain retracted as long as power is applied. .2 When power is removed, the latch bolt shall extend, locking the door if closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .2 Electronic Key Operation (KS): .1 Each lock shall be equipped with an electronic key switch .2 Rotating the key one quarter turn shall automatically retract the lock bolt electro-mechanically. Removing the key shall extend the bolt, locking the door if closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .3 Manual Operation: .1 Each lock shall have a local manual key override lock / unlock feature. Keyed two sides (K2S). .2 Rotating the key shall mechanically retract the latch bolt. Removing the key shall extend the bolt, locking the door if closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .2 Components: .1 Mechanical: .1 Lock shall operate as a fail-secure slam-lock. Unlocks when energized. .2 Lock body shall be made of steel. .3 Lock shall be supplied with a security ring to protect the key cylinder. The security ring will be supplied unpainted for
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 18 2011-05-25
.3
Acceptable Manufacturers:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .2 Components:(Cont'd) installation in the metal frame by the frame manufacturer. .4 Cylinder extensions shall be provided for locks keyed 2 sides or keyed stop side. Electrical: .1 The motor shall be a 2 phase, bi-polar, brushless linear actuator. Power consumption - 36 watt, 24 VDC, 1.5 AMP. .2 Lock shall be provided with a lock status switch to provide interlocking capabilities. .3 Switches shall be of the snap acting mechanical type, UL recognized and rated at 5 amps. .4 Lock shall be factory wired to a Molex plug disconnect. .5 Lock status switch shall provide for deadlock indication.
.2
2.9 ELECTROPNEUMATIC LOCKS
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers: .1 Except as otherwise specified herein, the equipment and materials of this section shall be components fabricated by one single manufacturer. The following manufacturers are pre-qualified to supply the products specified under this Section. .1 Airteq Systems (AT), Montgomery, AL. www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam Security Inc. (FA), Lamont, IL. www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel Company (SSCO), San Antonio, TX. www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .4 Note: Prequalification is not acceptance of manufacturers standard products. Prequalification is only approval to supply products meeting all specifications herein. .2 Following features are common to all Type 7C electro-pneumatic locks for all individual swinging doors, complete with integral electronic and pneumatic components. .1 Function: .1 Normal Operation: .1 When electrical power is applied to the solenoid valve,
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 19 2011-05-25
2.9 ELECTROPNEUMATIC LOCKS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .1 Function:(Cont'd) the latch bolt shall retract. The bolt shall remain retracted as long as power is applied. .2 When power is removed, the latch bolt shall extend, locking the door if closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .2 Electronic Key Operation(KS): .1 Each lock shall be equipped with an electronic key switch .2 Rotating the key one quarter turn shall automatically retract the lock bolt electro-pneumatically. Removing the key shall extend the bolt, locking the door closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .3 Manual Operation: .1 Each lock shall have a local manual key override lock/ unlock feature. Keyed two sides (K2S), keyed one side (K1S). .2 Rotating the key shall mechanically retract the latchbolt. Removing the key shall extend the bolt, locking the door closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. Components: .1 Mechanical: .1 Lock shall operate when supplied with air between 40 PSIG minimum and 125 PSIG maximum. .2 Lock shall operate as a fail-secure slam-lock. Unlocks when energized. .3 Lock body shall be made of steel. .4 Lock shall be factory plumbed with a quick connect air fitting. .5 Lock shall be supplied with a security ring to protect the key cylinder. The security ring will be supplied unpainted for installation in the hollow metal frame by the hollow metal manufacturer.
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 20 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .2 Components:(Cont'd) .6 Cylinder extensions shall be provided for locks keyed 2 sides or keyed stop side. .2 Electrical: .1 Solenoid valve shall be 1.5 watt, VDC, continuous rated by valve manufacturer. .2 Lock shall be provided with a lock status switch to provide interlocking capabilities. .3 Switches shall be of the snap acting mechanical type, UL recognized and rated at 5 amps. .4 Lock shall be factory wired to a Molex plug disconnect. .5 Lock status switch shall provide for deadlock indication. .3 Special Features: Where specified in the lock types, security hardware groups or door schedule, the following features shall be provided: .1 Remote Latch Holdback Feature (RLHB): Latch bolt is retracted by the push of a button at the control panel and remains electrically retracted until the button is pushed a second time. Latch bolt extends when power is removed, regardless of the door position. Note: This is an electronic control function and must be coordinated with the locking control system. NOT USED. .2 Key Operated Latch Holdback Feature (KLHB): Latch bolt is retracted locally by key and remains mechanically retracted until relocked with the key. NOT USED .3 Emergency Latch Holdback Feature (ELHB): Latch bolt is retracted by remote electronic control and remains mechanically retracted until relocked locally by key. NOT USED. .4 UL10B: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (US): electronically controlled single point lock for use on swing fire rated doors having a rating up to and including 3 hours. .5 Key Cylinder Extension (KCE): Recommended for locks keyed on stop side or keyed two sides.
.2
Type 7C1: Maximum security remote controlled pneumatic operated lock for individual swing doors that complies with the standard test
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 21 2011-05-25
.2
Type 7C1:(Cont'd) methods defined in ASTM F1577-05, Security Grade 1, 2. A 178 mm frame mounted slam-lock with automatic dead locking. .1 The lock shall automatically deadlock when the door is slam-locked in the manual mode, even in the event of a total loss of air and / or electric power .2 Latch bolt shall be 51 mm x 19 mm alloy steel cast hardened Rockwell C60 to depth of 0.8 mm and shall have a 25 mm throw and 60,000 pound shear strength .3 Lock shall have a mechanical roller-bolt deadlock door actuator and shall automatically deadlock when it is closed. .4 Finish: Bright Zinc and stainless steel parts .5 Mogul key cylinder complete with cylinder extension to allow for manual mechanical unlocking of the lock by key at the opening, both sides for Airteq 9700 Series lock. .6 Alternative: Paracentric key to allow for manual mechanical unlocking of the lock by key at the opening, both sides. DEC contractor responsible to modify frame to allow lock pocket for keying both sides, extra width for door frame to accommodate wider lock and all engineering and consultant costs to revise rough opening dimensions for wider frame opening; for Folger Adam 50P Series lock and Southern Steel 1051P Series lock. .7 Keyed: one side (K1S) or two sides (K2S). .8 Optional Features to be provided: KS, KCE for doors keyed both sides .9 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 9700, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.50P SERIES, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.1051P, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Type 7C2: Medium security remote controlled pneumatic operated lock for individual swing doors that complies with the standard test methods defined in ASTM F1577-05, Security Grade (2). A 50 mm frame mounted slam-lock with automatic dead locking. .1 The lock shall automatically deadlock when the door is slam-locked in the manual mode, even in the event of a total loss of air and / or electric power. .2 Latchbolt shall be 50 mm x 19 mm alloy steel cast hardened Rockwell C 60 to a depth of
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 22 2011-05-25
.3
Type 7C2:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) 0.8 mm and shall have a 19 mm throw and 20,000 pound shear strength. .3 Lock shall have a mechanical roller-bolt deadlock door actuator and shall automatically deadlock when it is closed. .4 Finish: Bright Zinc and stainless steel parts. .5 Lock shall be supplied with Cylinder(s) to match the Institution's existing cylinders. .6 Strike/Keeper: 3 mm case hardened 1018 cold rolled steel, nickel plated with spanner screws. .7 Keyed: one side (K1S) or two sides (K2S). .8 Optional Features to be provided: KS. .9 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 9400, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.NS400P, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.10300P, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231.
2.10 DOOR POSITION INDICATOR SWITCHES
.1
Type 8B1 (mortised magnetic model): .1 Size 124 mm x 32 mm x 25 mm. .2 Switch unit to contain single pole double throw switch and mount flush in door frame. .3 Magnetic unit to mount flush in top channel of door. .4 Door position indicators shall be concealed flush mounted multi-biased switches mounted on an ANSI mounting plate. Switches shall have co-planar operation requiring the magnet pack to be in the same narrow read angle as the switch module and shall incorporate an integral normally open tamper switch. Switches shall have capability for remote electronic testing of each switch operation. .5 Door position indicators shall be furnished with female AMP or MOLEX type connector. Lead extension shall be furnished with matching male AMP or MOLEX type connector. Testing and replacement must be accomplished independently without removing lock assembly. Door position indication and bolt position indication from lock assembly shall run separately to the junction box. Both switches will provide separate outputs to the door control system. Lead extension to provide 450 mm of slack for each after reaching lock and/or junction box.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 23 2011-05-25
2.10 DOOR POSITION INDICATOR SWITCHES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Door position indicator switches shall be .6 flush mounted in frame header at 150 mm on center line in from lock jamb. Corresponding magnet shall be flush mounted in top of door to matching location of switch. Confirm that templating conflicts do not arise from other mortised hardware items such as concealed overhead stops. Ensure magnet capacity will provide constant and uninterrupted closing of the switch when activated. .7 Finish: C32D .8 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq DPS 6200, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No. ASSW-105A, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.200MRS, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231.
2.11 ESCUTCHEONS, CYLINDER SHIELDS, PULL HANDLES, FOOT BOLT RECEPTACLES
.1
Escutcheon Type 11A1: .1 Material, 3 mm thick stainless steel, C32D finish. .2 Outside diameter 76 mm. .3 Fasteners, two 6 mm diameter oval Tamper Resistant Torx with pin. .4 Single wing. .5 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 601, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.1, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.218, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Cylinder Shield Type 11A2: .1 Material, 3 mm thick stainless steel. .2 Outside diameter 76 mm. .3 Fasteners, two 6 mm diameter oval Tamper Resistant Torx with pin. .4 Double wing. .5 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 682, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.2CS, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.219, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Flush Pull Type 11A4: .1 Material, manganese bronze. .2 Dimensions, 107 mm x 102 mm x 3 mm. .3 Pocket setback 25 mm.
.2
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 24 2011-05-25
2.11 ESCUTCHEONS, CYLINDER SHIELDS, PULL HANDLES, FOOT BOLT RECEPTACLES (Cont'd)
.3
Flush Pull Type 11A4:(Cont'd) .4 Fasteners, four 6 mm oval head Tamper Resistant Torx with pin screws. Finish C26D. .5 .6 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 614, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.4, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.214, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Door Pull Type 11A5: .1 Material, manganese bronze. .2 Overall length 219 mm. .3 Hand hold 133 mm long. .4 Clearance between grip and door, 38 mm. .5 Fasteners, two 10 mm oval head Tamper Resistant Torx with pin. .6 Finish C26D. .7 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 612, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.2, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.212, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. Foot Bolt Receptacle Type 11A7. .1 Material: non-hazardous black silicone elastomer, 80 durometer. .2 Dimensions: 90 mm projection x 51 mm diameter. .3 Fastener: threaded and grooved steel mounting shank 19 mm diameter and embedded at least half the length of the bumper. Mounting shank shall extend 65 mm beyond the bumper bottom for embedding into concrete filled masonry or concrete. Either wall or floor mounted. .4 Flanged for casting into floor. .5 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 650, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968.
.4
.5
2.12
KEYS
.1
Type 14A1: .1 Paracentric type not less than 114 mm in length. Blade to be 22 mm wide x 4 mm thick, with overlapping paracentric grooves to match similar grooves in lock cylinders. .2 Key bow to be rectangular or oval shape, to properly fit hand, 57 mm x 35 mm in size,
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 25 2011-05-25
2.12 KEYS (Cont'd)
.1
Type 14A1:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) separated from blade by 13 mm x 38 mm shank to provide clearance for hand. .3 Material, alloy bronze having tensile strength not less than Brinnell 150. .4 Factory stamp assigned key-code number on each key. Type 14B1: .1 Mogul type not less than 80.3 mm in length. Blade to be 14 mm wide x 3 mm thick with linear grooves to match keyway in mogul cylinder. .2 Key bow to be rectangular shape to properly fit hand, 25 mm x 38 mm. in size, separated from blade by 6.9 mm x 22.37 mm shoulder to provide clearance for hand. .3 Material: Investment cast silicone bronze alloy. .4 Factory stamp assigned key-code number on each key.
.2
2.13 LOCKING DEVICES
.1
Type 16B1: .1 A maximum security remote operated, two point rear locking pneumatic locking device for sliding cell doors that complies with the standard test methods for detention sliding door locking device assembly defined in ASTM F1643-05, Security Grade 1, 2. This mechanism to be installed on all sliding cell doors. .2 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 8220 Airglide, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.2B.3P, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.8050L, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Function: .1 Normal Operation: .1 When the door is locked closed, activation of the "open" switch shall cause the lock mechanism to release and the door to move to the fully open position and automatically deadlock. .2 When the door is locked open, activation of "closed" switch shall cause the lock mechanism to release and the door to move to the fully closed position and automatically deadlock.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 26 2011-05-25
2.13 LOCKING DEVICES (Cont'd)
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .3 Function:(Cont'd) .1 Normal Operation:(Cont'd) .3 Locking devices shall be capable of being controlled individually and in groups. .4 Operator shall be capable of opening or closing the door at a speed of 300 mm per second. Door speed shall be independently adjustable at each door. .5 Door shall decelerate as it reaches the full open or full closed position and not "bang" or bounce when reaching the full open or full close position. .6 Operating force shall be factory set at 40 pounds. However, this shall be adjustable from 20 to 40 pounds. The operating force shall be set independently adjustable at each door. .7 Device shall provide for sufficient resistance to prevent freewheeling of the door in the event of total loss of air supply/and or electric power. .8 If an obstruction is placed in the path of the door, the door shall resume movement in the selected direction. The operator must be capable of being stalled indefinitely without harming the device. .9 Operator shall be capable of "instantly" stopping the door or reversing the direction of the door travel at any point and immediately resuming the pre-set travel speed of the door. .10 Whenever a door is stopped in any intermediate position, it shall be possible to manually move the door to the full open or full closed position and the door will automatically deadlock. .11 Mechanisms that hold the lock bar in place with air, spring or gravity pressure will not be accepted. .4 Manual Operation: .1 In the event of a total loss of air supply and/or electric power, individual doors may be released manually at the door with a tool inserted through a security access in the housing cover. With the lock mechanism released, moving the door manually to the full open or full closed
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 27 2011-05-25
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .4 Manual Operation:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) position shall cause the door to be automatically locked. .2 Manual operation of any door shall not interfere with the normal operation of other doors. .5 Components: .1 Mechanical Components: .1 Non-fire-rated doors shall be equipped with Delrin POM concave arcuate rollers and shall run on 25 mm diameter alloy steel track; engaging surface to provide for smooth quiet operation. Door rollers shall be self-lubricating, incorporating sealed lifetime lubricated bearings. .2 Fire-rated doors (if required) shall have steel concave arcuate rollers and shall run on 25 mm diameter alloy steel track; engaging surface to provide for smooth quiet operation. Door rollers shall be self-lubricating, incorporating sealed lifetime lubricated bearings. .3 Roller axels shall be constructed of 8620 alloy cold drawn steel with a hardness of 58-62 Rockwell C. Roller/axel assembly shall provide for up/down and in/out adjustment of door. .4 Roller track shall be constructed of a single solid piece of 25 mm diameter 1018 cold drawn steel. .5 Door shall lock at the top and bottom in both the open and closed positions. .6 The vertical lock bar shall be mechanically connected to the lock mechanism at all times. .7 The locking mechanism shall include an automatic mechanical deadlock feature. Mechanisms that hold the lock bar in place with air pressure, spring pressure or gravity pressure will not be accepted. .8 Vertical locking column to be formed out of 10 ga steel or equivalent tubing. .9 Top and bottom door guides must be designed to limit side motion of door to plus or minus. 76 mm or less to significantly reduce rattle induced noises.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 28 2011-05-25
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .5 Components:(Cont'd) .1 Mechanical Components:(Cont'd) .10 Bottom door guide shall have replaceable wear pads to provide for smooth silent operation. .2 Electrical Components: .1 All devices shall be factory wired to a multi pin connector located within the housing above the door. .2 All switches necessary for the function of the device and for door status indication shall be U.L. recognized. .3 All limit switches shall be rated 5 amps. .4 All solenoid valves shall be rated by the manufacturer for continuous operation. .5 Control of the door shall require no more than three wires from the controls. .6 Position indication of the lock and door shall require no more than three wires from the controls. .7 Device shall be supplied with status switches to provide indication and interlocking capabilities. .8 Status switches shall provide the following indications. .1 Deadlocked, closed. .2 Deadlocked, open. .3 Housing: .1 Housing covers to be constructed of 3.5 mm steel plate and shall be secured with security screws. .2 Housing cover to be of one piece construction, securely enclosing the top, front and bottom of the door operator. .3 The door hanger slot shall be securely baffled in both the door open and door closed positions. .4 To reduce the possibility of hidden contraband, there shall be no exposed flat surfaces on the housing or in the door hanger slot. .5 The rear of the housing shall be constructed of 4.8 mm steel plate. .6 The housing shall protrude from the wall surface a maximum of 150 mm. The housing shall extend a maximum of 300 mm above the door opening. .7 In cases where device housings are not continuous, ends shall be
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 29 2011-05-25
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .5 Components:(Cont'd) .3 Housing:(Cont'd) neatly Closed and welded with 3.5 mm steel plate. .8 Hinged housing cover (HHC) feature provides for hinged covers on all individual devices; secured in place with security fasteners. Features: .1 Where specified in the security hardware groups or door schedule the following features shall be provided. .2 Door skirt feature (DS) decreases standard 75 mm door undercut to 9 mm. .3 One hour ULC fire rating for sliding doors, where indicated in the Door Schedule .4 Cell Door Skirt feature (CDS): to be constructed with 6 mm perforated steel plate with 6 mm diameter offset holes .5 Cuffing Mode Operation (CMO). .1 When the door is locked closed, activation of the "CMO" switch shall cause the lock mechanism to release and the door to move 127 mm and automatically deadlock in the partial open position. With the door in this position the inmate will extend his arms through the opening at which time cuffs will be applied by the corrections officer. .2 Once the inmate is secure and with the door locked in the partial open position, activation of the "Open" switch shall cause the lock mechanism to release and the door to move to the fully open position and automatically deadlock open. .3 When the door is locked open, activation of the "CMO" switch will cause the lock mechanism to release, and the door to return to the 127 mm partial open position and automatically deadlock. With the inmate inside the Cell and with the door in the this position the inmate will extend his arms through the opening at which time
.4
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 30 2011-05-25
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .5 Components:(Cont'd) .4 Features:(Cont'd) the cuffs will be removed by the corrections officer. .4 Once the inmate is secure inside the Cell and with the door deadlocked in the partial open position, activation of the "close" switch shall cause the lock mechanism to release and the door to move to the fully closed position and automatically deadlock. .5 The Door Control System shall be capable of activating this function at the discretion of the operator. The normal daily operation of the sliding cell door shall be as described in article 2.13.2.1. .6 The entire CMO sequencing is to be coordinated with Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Controls subcontractor. The Controls subcontractor must provide an individual adjustable time delay relay for each sliding cell door to ensure consistent and accurate operation for each stage of the CMO function. Remote Manual Emergency Release(RMERS): .1 Remote Manual Emergency Release System to be provided for all sliding cell doors. .2 Provide compressed air emergency release tank (s) and valve assembly to emergency unlock cell door, in defined groups (see control panel schedule), in the event of total loss of air and/or electrical power. .3 The emergency release tank(s) and valve assembly shall be installed in a lockable cabinet where directed by the Departmental Representative. The cabinet shall be clearly labeled "Emergency Release System." .4 The emergency release system shall be totally manual in operation. Once the system has been activated, the doors shall unlock and remain unlocked until the system is deactivated. Once unlocked, doors may then be manually moved to the open position.
.6
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 31 2011-05-25
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) .5 Check valves shall be installed on the supply lines at each tank to prevent air from leaking out of the tank when not being supplied from the air compressor(s). .6 Air lines serving each group of devices from the emergency release system shall be run in the same raceway/conduit as the normal air lanes. .7 Air tubing for the emergency release system shall be a minimum of 6 mm outside diameter, and shall be properly labeled ("Emergency") at each device, and manifold. .8 Colour coded air tubing may be used in place of labeled tubing. Type 16B2: .1 A maximum security remote operated, two point rear locking pneumatic locking device for sliding Corridor doors and Barrier Grille Doors that complies with the standard test methods for detention sliding door locking device assembly defined in ASTM F1643-05, Security Grade 1, 2. The mechanism to be installed on all sliding Corridor doors and sliding Barrier grille doors. .1 Function, Features, Components, and Remote Manual Emergency Release System to be the same as listed for Type 16B1. .2 Provide lock column with hip-high key release feature with a high security mogul key cylinder provides for local manual and/or electro-pneumatically activate all sliding corridor and sliding grille barrier doors. This operation shall duplicate the open/close functions of the security control panel. Key release shall be located approximately 1020 mm above finished floor. Keyed two sides (K2). Required at all corridor sliding doors. .3 Acceptable Materials: .1 Airteq 8250 Airglide, www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam No.D2B.3P, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel No.8065L, www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231.
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 32 2011-05-25
2.14 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM, FOR PNEUMATIC LOCKS AND LOCKING DEVICES
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers: Except as otherwise specified herein, the equipment and materials of this section shall be components fabricated by one single manufacturer. The following manufacturers are pre qualified to supply the products specified under this section. .1 Airteq Systems (AT), Montgomery, AL. www.airteqsystems.com, 800.633.1968. .2 Folger Adam Security Inc. (FA), Lamont, IL. www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .3 Southern Steel Company (SSCO), San Antonio, TX. www.southernfolger.com, 210.533.1231. .4 Note: Prequalification is not acceptance of manufacturers standard products. Prequalification is only approval to supply products meeting all specifications herein. Compressed Air System and Components Specific system components shall be adequately sized by the supplier in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and the specifications contained herein .1 Air Compressor: Compressor shall consist of, but not be limited to, compressors, motors, V-belt driven that are totally enclosed with an O.S.H.A. approved belt guard, and A.S.M.E. Coded and National Board approved air receiver(s). .1 Furnish complete two 220/208 VAC single phase electric motor-driven tank mounted air compressors. .2 Compressor shall be sized so that the system has the ability to meet all air requirements under normal operation and not exceed a maximum 40% duty cycle. Compressor shall be sized to provide sufficient air to provide at a minimum, the following number of operations: .1 Cells and Other (not listed) Devices: 20 operations per 24 hour period. .2 Medium Use Corridor Device: 150 operations per 24 hour period (90% of all Corridor doors shall be considered medium use); not applicable to this project. .3 High Use Corridor Device: 300 operations per 24 hour period. (At a minimum, all Corridor doors shall be considered high use.) .3 Compressor recovery time shall be no more than fifteen (15) minutes. .4 The air system shall have the ability to provide a minimum air pressure of 125 PSIG (+/- 10%).
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 33 2011-05-25
2.14 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM, FOR PNEUMATIC LOCKS AND LOCKING DEVICES (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .1 Air Compressor:(Cont'd) For oil bath reciprocating .5 compressors, the volume shall be based on a regulated line pressure of 125 PSIG. .6 System shall be provided with starters, solenoid unloaders and pressure switches. All associated wiring, conduit, disconnect switches, hangers, etc. shall be provided by the electrical connector. .7 Provide vibration isolators in accordance with compressor manufacturers specifications. .8 Exhaust silencers/mufflers shall be provided. .9 Provide a low pressure indicator with common, Normally Open and Normally Closed dry contacts for remote monitoring. .2 Alternating Compressor Controller: Provide an automatic lead-lag alternating compressor controller system for the entire facility. .1 Under normal conditions, the controller shall alternately operate compressors. If the lead compressor is out of service or fails to start, the standby compressor shall start. If the lead compressor starts but fails to satisfy demand, the controller shall operate both compressors simultaneously until demand is satisfied. .2 The alternating compressor controller shall consist of, but not be limited to, across the line starters, motor circuit protectors, timers, counters, relays, pressure sensing switches and transformers with all necessary interconnection wiring. .3 The controller shall be enclosed within a NEMA 1 enclosure of applicable size to meet the N.E.C. code requirements. The enclosure shall be wall mounted adjacent to the compressors. Mounting of the compressor controller on the compressor receivers shall not be permitted. .4 Disconnects for each compressor shall be placed prior to the alternating panel. .3 Compressed Air Dryer: .1 Provide a minimum of one air dryer. .2 Dryer shall be sized for normal institutional operation (see Section C1.b) as opposed to airflow associated with all swing locks and sliding door devices operating simultaneously. .3 Provide refrigerant type compressed air dryer
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 34 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .3 Compressed Air Dryer:(Cont'd) Dryer shall be able to provide a .4 maximum pressure dew point of 1.7 degrees C (35 degrees F). .5 Include all necessary mounting brackets and/ or stand for dryer .6 Provide valve bypass air lines around the dryer to allow for routine servicing without system shutdown. .4 Compressed Air Filtration: .1 Air supplied to the devices shall have been processed through filtering, cooling and drying equipment and as a minimum, shall meet the following: .1 Solid particulate matter shall be filtered to 5.0 micron or less. .2 Solid oil particles shall be filtered to 3.0 micron of less. .3 At a minimum 99.97% of oil and water aerosols shall be removed. .4 The air must be free of water vapour to a pressure dew point of 1.6 degrees C. .2 On the refrigerant dryer units, provide pre-filters, with water separators in line between air head end receivers and the refrigerant dryer that has a valved bypass and an equal pre-filter with water separator. .3 Provide a particulate filter, coalescing filter and regulator in-line between refrigerant dryer and air distribution lines. The filters and regulator shall have a valved bypass with equal filtration and regulation. .4 All water separating and coalescing filters shall be equipped with automatic drains. .5 Provide corrosion resisting fittings of aluminum, copper, brass, stainless steel and/or Teflon lined stainless steel hoses from the first filter through to the distribution manifold. Black pipe or cast iron fittings will NOT be acceptable. .5 Compressed Air Receiver/Storage Tanks: .1 Receiver(s) and compressed air storage tank(s) shall be sized so that if the power fails at the beginning of the compressor input, the combined stored air will allow the locking devices to operate a minimum of one (1) cycle (secure Closed to secure Open) within fifteen (15) minutes of failure to a minimum allowed pressure of 60
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 35 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) PSIG door device to operate twice when no input from the compressor is available. .2 Provide high pressure relief valves on all receivers and storage tanks .3 Provide air pressure gauges on all receivers and storage tanks. .4 Provide automatic drains on all receivers and storage tanks upstream the dryer. .5 Provide manual drains on all receivers and storage tanks down stream of the dryer. .6 Provide particle filters near the outlet ports of all storage tanks downstream from the air dryer. .7 In-line particle filters with water separators shall be provided between air receivers, storage tanks, and the refrigerant air dryer. .8 In-line particle filters with water separators and coalescing filters shall be provided between air compressor(s) and the air dryer. .9 All water separating and coalescing filters shall be equipped with automatic drains, and service bypass lines. .10 Pressure regulators shall be provided to reduce line pressure to a maximum of 125 PSIG. .11 Pipe all automatic drains to the nearest floor drain. .6 Compressed Air Distribution System: .1 Air piping shall be sized to permit normal operation of locking devices, including group release, without dropping below 60 PSIG line pressure at the locking device. Air tubing shall be sized to permit group release at Cell at the sliding door lock devices, without dropping below 40 PSIG line pressure device for more than five (5) seconds. Air pressure to any individual component, beyond compressor/dryer/filtration system, shall not exceed 125 PSIG at 21 degrees C. .2 Air distribution piping shall be Nylon 11 tubing with a temperature range of -16 to 94 degrees C, and a working pressure of at least 200 ,PSIG at 24 degrees C. Working pressure shall be defined at 25% of burst pressure .3 Nylon tubing for Section 11 19 12 shall be run with the low voltage device
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 36 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) wires in conduit, raceways or cable trays. Low voltage wire and pneumatic tubing shall be pulled in the same conduit raceway by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Nylon tubing must be run continuously from pneumatic lock to manifold in BSCS Room, or other designated location where pneumatic manifolds will be installed. Splices or tees shall NOT be permitted. Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractor is responsible for pulling the nylon tubing. .4 All conduit is to be run concealed in occupied spaces. Conceal conduit in all other spaces wherever possible. Where exposed, tubing is to be securely fastened at regular intervals and run in a neat workmanlike manner. .5 Tubing shall be tagged at all valves and manifolds. Tags shall indicate door number. Valves shall be tagged to correspond with the valve numbers indicated on the approved shop drawings and the normal operating positions shall be indicated. .6 The Electrical subcontractor (Division 26) shall provide the DEC and Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractors with line drawings indicating layout of conduit runs for all low voltage Electro-pneumatic devices prior to pulling wire and tubing. All pull box locations and conduit size must be clearly indicated on the drawings. The Electrical subcontractor (Division 26) line drawings must be approved by the Departmental Representative and Division 11 subcontractor prior to lines being pulled. .7 All conduit shall be sized to suit the number of conductors and the airline. Minimum conduit size for all dead end runs (i.e. from pull box to single device) shall be 19 mm diameter. Minimum conduit size for all home runs i.e. from BSCS room or designated location where manifolds are installed, to single device) shall be 19 mm in diameter. .8 Pull 90's or LB connectors (90 degree L fittings with Back Openings) shall NOT be permitted in conduit where pneumatic lines are run. Splices to Conduit will only be allowed on straight sections, angle
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 37 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) .8 (Cont'd) connectors of any degree shall NOT be allowed in conduit where pneumatic lines are run. .9 The minimum bending radius in conduit must not be less than 6 times the diameter of pneumatic tube size. .10 The minimum pull box size for single device runs shall not be less than 150 mm x 150 mm. Where multiple lines converge in a common pull box; the box must be sized to allow the air lines and conductor runs be pulled through the box without kinking, splicing, or damaging the airlines. .11 All distribution manifolds shall be aluminum, brass or stainless steel and must be supplied by the detention hardware manufacturer. Manifolds must be engineered to suit the pneumatic system and sized to correspond with the requirements of the pneumatic locking device. Manifolds must be equipped with a shut off valves at the intake port and at each individual distribution port. Manifolds must be housed in individual lockable steel cabinets as follows: One (1) Conversion Manifold, one (1) Distribution Manifold/Cabinet for all pneumatic sliding barrier doors, one (1) Distribution Manifold/Cabinet for all pneumatic sliding cell doors and one (1) Distribution Manifold/Cabinet for all pneumatic swing doors. .12 All air lines shall be purged before final connections are made to the end-of-line devices. .13 Provide quick connect air fittings at all pneumatic devices. Provide auto shut off quick connect to field pneumatic tubing at all pneumatic swing door locks to prevent air flow loss when device is disconnected. .7 Compressor shall be located in a well ventilated room; free of dust, moisture, and other air-borne contaminants. Maximum ambient temperature in which the compressor and motor must operate in is 40 degrees Celsius. .8 Compressors and Refrigerant Dryers must be mounted on concrete housekeeping pad; minimum 100 mm above finished floor.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 38 2011-05-25
2.15 TERMINATION BOXES
.1
Termination boxes shall be supplied and installed by Section 11 19 13 to provide a termination point in the door frame which allows a clear demarcation point between the Door Control System subcontractor's and Detention Hardware subcontractor's respective scopes of work. Confirm location of termination boxes with Section 11 19 13. .1 Termination boxes for all large body locks (Type 7C1) is also the lock box and shall be located in the pressed steel frame. .2 Termination boxes for narrow jamb locks (7C2) shall be located in the 100 mm head at the top of the lock jamb.
2.16 WIRE AND CABLE
.1
Cabling shall be supplied, installed and terminated from door devices. All wiring for systems to be PVC insulated, multi-conductor as required. All wiring for systems shall be installed in conduit or wire trays. Conduit from lock box to junction box a door position indicator switch box within the frame shall be supplied and installed by Section 11 19 13. Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractor will terminate all field side wiring to field side of lock with pigtails supplied by lock manufacturer; allowing field side leads to extend 450 mm beyond termination or lock boxes. Wiring for lock power circuits shall be #14 AWG. Wiring for door position indicators and locked status indicators shall be #18 AWG. Selection of type of cable shall be at discretion of system installer but the system, when complete, must perform to the complete satisfaction of the Departmental Representative, and must be free from all interference from cross-talk, hum, switch and relay noise. All serviceable devices such as locks and door position indicators shall have connection terminated with AMP or MOLEX type connectors provided by the hardware supplier. All connections on the controls side of the lock pigtail shall be secure and shall be terminated by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Refer to Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 documents for specifications on wire connection details.
.2
.3
.4
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 39 2011-05-25
2.16 WIRE AND CABLE (Cont'd)
.5
The BSCS subcontractor shall terminate cabling, within swing door frames, from field wiring to all Molex pigtail connectors provided by the detention hardware manufacturer. The BSCS subcontractor shall terminate all field wiring, within the sliding door housings, to terminal strips provided by detention hardware manufacturer. The BSCS subcontractor shall terminate controls end of all cabling for lock control output and monitoring status inputs.
2.17 EXTRA DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE STOCK
.1
Provide the following extra stock: .1 Eight (8) Hinges Airteq 604 FMCS .2 Two (2) Locks Airteq 9700 x K2S x KS x LH .3 Two (2) Locks Airteq 9700 x K2S x KS x RH .4 Four (4) Locks Airteq 5017M K1S .5 Four (4) Cylinders Airteq Mogul(Food pass locks) .6 Four (4) Dr Pos Ind. Airteq 6200 Door Position Switch .7 One (1) Lock Tester Airteq ULV24 -24V Multi-Tester .8 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 82004601Assy. Door Cylinder Valve .9 Four (4) Parts Assembly Airteq 821016 Inside Guide Bracket .10 Four (4) Parts Assembly Airteq 821017 Outside Guide Bracket .11 One (1) Parts Assembly Airteq 820751 ASSY. Lock Cylinder Valve .12 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 820748XX Assy. Air Cylinder .13 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 82009801 Assy. Roller Guide .14 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 820107 Lock Bar Slide Bearing .15 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 10000401 Grommet .16 Ten (10) Parts Assembly Airteq 10003402 Screws 10-32 x " .17 Ten (10) Parts Assembly Airteq 10003401 Screws 3/8-16 x 1" .18 Six (6) Parts Assembly Airteq 10006402 Screws 10-24 x _" .19 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 10002501 Shoulder Screws 5/16 x 3/8" x -20 .20 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 10002503 Shoulder Screws 3/8 x 1 1/2" x 5/16 -18 .21 Eight (8) Parts Assembly Airteq 820090 Speed Reducing Switch .22 Eight (8) Parts Assembly Airteq 82008803 Limit Switch
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 40 2011-05-25
2.17 EXTRA DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE STOCK (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .23 Eight (8) Parts Assembly Airteq 82008804 Limit Switch .24 Two (2) Locks Airteq 9400 LH .25 Two (2) Locks Airteq 9400 RH .26 Two (2) Locks Airteq 5066 LH .27 Two (2) Locks Airteq 5066 RH
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXECUTION
.1
Trade cooperation for execution will require this subcontractor to coordinate with electrical, door, hardware, detention door and frame suppliers, and any other trades who may have field devices operating to the demands of the system. System application and field device connection for this contract will be the responsibility of one contract to a commissioned sign off by the Departmental Representative.
3.2
INSPECTION
.1
Inspect surfaces and conditions on site prior to commencing work. Commencement of work assumes acceptance of site conditions. Verify that all conduit, back boxes, junction boxes, device boxes, and terminal panels have been installed where required prior to commencing work.
.2
3.3 FIELD TEST FOR COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
.1
To confirm the integrity of the pneumatic distribution system the DEC must perform detailed pneumatic line pressure tests for the entire pneumatic lock distribution system. Notify Departmental Representative a minimum of (5) days prior to when pressure tests are to be performed so a Representative can be present to confirm line pressures at the start and completion of the test. These tests are to be completed prior to the installation of any pneumatic hardware. All head end pneumatic equipment must be operational including compressors, dryers and filters.
.2 .3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 41 2011-05-25
3.3 FIELD TEST FOR COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (Cont'd)
.4
All pneumatic distribution equipment must be connected including the conversion manifold and all distribution manifolds.
All pneumatic tubing must be connected to the appropriate manifolds and capped with compression fittings at the device end. Minimum duration for static load pressure test is 12 hours. Maximum allowable pressure loss is 5 pounds in 12 hour period. Re-pull any damaged lines and replace any defective or damaged connections the head end equipment and re-test as required to ensure line pressures are maintained as required. A complete set of documented test results is to be provided to the Departmental Representative upon completion of tests.
.5
.6 .7 .8
.9
3.4
INSTALLATION
.1
Electrical subcontractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires (cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractor) and pneumatic tubing (supplied by Section 11 19 12 DEC subcontractor) in conduit and wire trays provided by Electrical subcontractor (Division 26). Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted. Coordinate control cabling, low voltage wires and pneumatic tubing in conduit, raceways and cable trays with Section 11 19 12 DEC subcontractor and Electrical subcontractor (Division 26). All serviceable devices such as locks and door position indicators shall have connection terminated with AMP or MOLEX type connectors provided by the hardware supplier. All connections on the controls side of the lock pigtail shall be secure and shall be terminated by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractor. Install hardware in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers installation instructions.
.2
.3
.4
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 42 2011-05-25
.5
All electrical at each door assembly shall be installed by this section and terminated to the junction box, where door control systems will be tied in by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Door position indicators and lock status indicators shall be terminated at the junction box.
All wiring for system from the junction boxes to the door devices shall be supplied, installed, and terminated by this Section. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. All wiring shall be terminated with Molex ends and neatly installed, laced tagged where required. Supply opposite Molex ends to Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractor. All system related equipment shall be installed by factory authorized and trained personnel. Template and install O/H stops and holders to the required degree of opening to protect exposed trim from contacting other surfaces. If shimming is necessary, use only approved corrosive resistant metal shims. Organic materials are not acceptable Install hardware to the following heights unless noted otherwise on the shop drawings or manufacturers installation instructions. .1 Push plate - 1150 mm bottom of frame to center line of push plate. .2 Door pull - 1070 mm bottom of frame to center line of door pull. .3 Door knob or lever - 1020 mm bottom of frame to center line of door knob / lever. .4 Deadlock - 1220 mm bottom of frame to center line of deadlock strike plate. .5 Electro-pneumatic locks - 1040 mm bottom of frame to center line of Key cylinder.
.6
.7
.8 .9
.10
.11
3.5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION
.1 .2
Provide lock testing unit to installers for field testing of locks. Prior to final inspection, verify that all hardware has been installed according to the approved hardware schedule and manufacturer's instructions, and ensure correct operation.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 43 2011-05-25
3.5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION (Cont'd)
.3
Test all electrical hardware and monitoring devices to ensure correct operation and outputs. Provide a list to the contractor that all devices have been tested and are operational.
Remote Manual Emergency Release System (RMERS) to be included as part of the commissioning process to confirm status indication changes with BSCS system.
.4
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
.1
Adjust all hardware as required to ensure correct operation. Make final adjustment to door closers after HVAC system has been balanced. Be responsible for protective treatment and other precautions required to ensure that hardware components will be without damage until completion of the project. Clean and polish all hardware and replace any item that is scratched, marred, or damaged. If paint is to be removed from an exposed finish, use only cleaning solutions that will not remove the protective coatings.
.2
3.7 LEGEND OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN HARDWARE SCHEDULE
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15
C4 - satin brass C10 - satin bronze C15 - satin nickel C26D - satin chromium plated C28 - satin anodized aluminium C32D - satin stainless steel CP - prime painted Alum - aluminium lacquer Galv - galvanized BZP - Bright Zinc Plated K1S - keyed one side K2S - keyed two sides LS - lead shields SCS - security screws (with twist-off heads) SPS - Spanner screws(Torx with Pin)
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 44 2011-05-25
3.7 LEGEND OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN HARDWARE SCHEDULE (Cont'd)
.16 .17 .18 .19 .20 .21 .22 .23 .24
TB - through bolts HHC - Hinged Housing Cover

CMO - Cuffing Mode Operation DS - Door Skirt CDS - Cell Door Skirt KS - Key Switch KCE - Key Cylinder Extension RMERS - Remote Manual Emergency Release System HHKR - Hip-High Key Release
3.8
KEY CABINET
.1 .2
Key Cabinet System: 1 (one) required, locate as directed by the Departmental Representative. Cabinet and components shall be manufactured by Telkee, Inc., or equal. Cabinet shall have a maximum security push button lock manufactured by Simplex, or equal. System shall include complete set-up instructions, with three way cross index system and dual tag system, and instructions to the Departmental Representative on proper use of the system. Cabinet to be sized to accommodate one complete set of keys provided by this Section and builders hardware keys supplied under Section 08 71 00.
3.9 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
.1
All hardware for doors designated on Door and Frame Schedule as "Security" types and with Hardware Groups with "S" designations are the responsibility of this Section.
3.10 SECURITY HARDWARE GROUPS
.1
GROUP: S1 (Exterior Swing Door - Main Entrance). .1 2 pair - Hinges, Type 1B3, C32D. .2 1 - Electro-Pneum. Lock, Type 7C1 x KS x K2S, BZF & C32D. .3 2 - Cylinder, Mogul, C4. .4 3 - Mogul Keys, Type 14B1, Bronze. .5 1 - Cylinder, Extension, C4. .6 1 - Door Position Switch, Type 8B1, C32D. .7 2 - Pulls, Type 11A5, C26D.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 45 2011-05-25
3.10 SECURITY HARDWARE GROUPS (Cont'd)
.1
GROUP:(Cont'd) 1 - Door Closer (concealed), LCN 2210, .8 Alum. .9 1 - Protection Plate, 1.6 mm thick x 1200 high x DW (-40), C32D. .10 1 set - Weather-strip, K.N. Crowder W-32V, Alum. .11 1 - Threshold, K.N. Crowder CT-46, Alum. .12 1 - Automatic Door Bottom, K.N. Crowder CT-54, Alum. .13 1 - Door Stop, Type 11A7, Black. GROUP: S2 (Exterior Swing Door). .1 2 pair - Hinges, Type 1B3, C32D. .2 1 - Electro-Pneum. Lock, Type 7C1 x KS x K2S, BZF & C32D. .3 2 - Cylinder, Mogul, C4. .4 3 - Mogul Keys, Type 14B1, Bronze. .5 1 - Cylinder, Extension, C4. .6 1 - Door Position Switch, Type 8B1, C32D. .7 2 - Pulls, Type 11A5, C26D. .8 1 - Door Closer (concealed), LCN 2210, Alum. .9 1 set - Weather-strip, K.N. Crowder W-32V, Alum. .10 1 - Threshold, K.N. Crowder CT-46, Alum. .11 1 - Automatic Door Bottom, K.N. Crowder CT-54, Alum. .12 1 - Door Stop, Type 11A7, Black. GROUP: S3 (Interior Swing Door - Entry Sally Port). .1 2 pair - Hinges, Type 1B3, C32D. .2 1 - Electro-Pneum. Lock, Type 7C1 x KS x K2S, BZF & C32D. .3 2 - Cylinder, Mogul, C4. .4 3 - Mogul Keys, Type 14B1, Bronze. .5 1 - Cylinder, Extension, C4. .6 1 - Door Position Switch, Type 8B1, C32D. .7 2 - Pulls, Type 11A5, C26D. .8 1 - Door Closer (concealed), LCN 2210, Alum. .9 1 - Protection Plate - 1.6 mm thick x 1200 high x DW (-40), C32D. .10 1 - Door Stop, Type 11A7, Black. GROUP: S4 (Interior Swing Door - Entry Sally Port). .1 2 pair - Hinges, Type 1B3, C32D. .2 1 - Electro-Pneum. Lock, Type 7C1 x KS x K2S, BZF & C32D. .3 2 - Cylinder, Mogul, C4. .4 3 - Mogul Keys, Type 14B1, Bronze. .5 1 - Cylinder, Extension, C4. .6 1 - Door Position Switch, Type 8B1, C32D.
.2
.3
.4
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 46 2011-05-25
.4
GROUP:(Cont'd) 2 - Pulls, Type 11A5, C26D. .7 .8 1 - Door Closer (concealed), LCN 2210, Alum. .9 1 - Door Stop, Type 11A7, Black. GROUP: S5 (Interior Swing Door - Janitor/ Storage Rm.). .1 12 pair - Hinges, Type 1B3, C32D. .2 1 - Spring and Deadlock, Type 3A6 x K2S, CP. .3 3 - Para-centric Keys, Type 14A1. .4 1 - Lock Mounting, Type 5A1, CP. .5 2 - Escutcheon, Type 11A1-SW, C32D. .6 2 - Pulls, Type 11A5, C26D. .7 1 - Door Closer (concealed), LCN 2210, Alum. .8 1 - Door Stop, Type 11A7, Black. GROUP: S6 (Interior Swing Door - Mech. Chase). .1 12 pair - Hinges, Type 1B3, C32D. .2 1 - Deadlock, Type 3A9 x K1S, COP. .3 3 - Para-centric Keys, Type 14A1. .4 1 - Lock Mounting, Type 5A1, CP. .5 1 - Escutcheon, Type 11A1-DW, C32D. .6 1 - Flush Pull, Type 11A5, C26D. .7 1 - Door Stop, Type 11A7, Black. .8 1 - Strike, Type 4A1, CP. GROUP: S7 (Interior Swing Door - Inmate Washrooms). .1 12 pair - Hinges, Type 1B3, C32D. .2 1 - Mortise Lockset, Type 3B7, C32D. .3 1 - Cylinder, Mogul, C26D. .4 1 - Mogul Keys, 14B1, Bronze. .5 1 - Strike, Type 4A1, C26D. .6 1 - Door Stop, Type 11A7, Black. GROUP: S8 (Sliding Cell Door). .1 1 -Locking Device, Type 16B1 x HHC x CDS x CMO x RMERS 3, C32D. .2 1 - Flush Pull, Type 11A4, C26D. .3 1 pair -Hinges, Type 1A2, CP. .4 1 - Spring Latch, Type3B6, BZP. .5 1 - Cylinder, Mogul, C4. .6 3 - Mogul Keys, 14B1, Bronze. GROUP: .1 1 HHKR x .2 1 .3 2 .4 3 S9 (Sliding Corridor Doors). -Locking Device, Type 16B2 x HHC x DS x K2S x RMERS, CP. -Door Pull, 11A5, C26D. - Cylinders, Mogul(in lock column), C4. - Mogul Keys, 14B1, Bronze.
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
GROUP: S10 (Sliding Barrier Grille Doors).
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 12 Page 47 2011-05-25
.10
GROUP:(Cont'd) 1 -Locking Device, Type 16B2 x HHC x HHKR .1 x K2S x RMERS , CP. .2 1 -Door Pull, 11A5, C26D. .3 2 - Cylinders, Mogul(in lock column), C4. .4 3 - Mogul Keys, 14B, Bronze. GROUP: S11 (Swing Gate - Sally Port Gate). .1 1 pair - Hinges, Type 1A3, Galv. .2 1 - Electro-Mech. Lock, Type 7A1 x A x K2S, Galv. .3 3 - Mogul Keys, Type 14B1, Bronze. .4 2 - Door Pulls, Type 11A5, C26D. .5 1 - Door Position Switch, Type 8B1, C32D. GROUP: S12 (Swing Gate in Hollow Metal Frame Shower Rooms). .1 12 pair - Hinges, Type 1B3, C32D. .2 1 - Electro-Pneum. Lock, Type 7C2 x KS x K1S, BZF & C32D. .3 1 - Builders Cylinder,To match Institution's existing, C4. .4 3 -Builders Keys, To match existing. .5 1 - Door Position Switch, Type 8B1, C32D. .6 2 - Pulls, Type 11A5, C26D. .7 1 - Door Closer (concealed), LCN 2210, Alum. .8 1 - Door Stop, Type 11A7, Black.
.11
.12
END
DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES
Section 11 19 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 12, 11 19 14, 32 31 14 and 08 50 50. Refer to 1.9 - Detention Doors and Frames, Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor (DEC). This Section describes detention quality steel doors and frames. Detention quality steel doors and frames are identified on the Door and Frame Schedule as "Detention Type". Details and drawings provided by Departmental Representative indicate general overall intent and principals of design and function for project detention doors and drames. This Section is responsible for final design of detention doors and frames that will meet testing, mock-up and warranty requirements within overall constraints of project. Indicate final design information on shop drawings for review by Departmental Representative. In particular detailing detention doors and frames to adjacent construction to ensure compatibility with project conditions.
.2 .3
.4
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
.1
ASTM Standards: .1 ASTM A1008/A1008M-10 CS Type B cold-rolled steel or hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel conforming to ASTM A1011/A1011M-10 CS Type B. Steel shall be free of scale, pitting, coil breaks, buckles, waves or other surface blemishes or defects. .2 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc-coated applied by the HotDip Process. Coating designation A60 (ZF180) or G60 (Z180). .3 ASTM A666-A10, Type 304 Stainless Steel. .4 ASTM F1450-05, Standard Test Methods for Hollow Metal Swinging Door Assemblies for Detention Facilities. .5 ASTM F1592-05, Standard Test Methods for Detention Hollow Metal Vision Systems. CGSB Standards: .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer.
.2
Section 11 19 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES (Cont'd)
.2
CGSB Standards:(Cont'd) CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed, Organic .2 Zinc Rich Coating. CSA Standards: .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). ULC Standards: .1 CAN/ULC-S702-09, Standard for Thermal Insulation Mineral Fibre for Buildings. .2 CAN/ULC-S104-10, Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .3 CAN/ULC-S105-09, Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by CAN/ULC-S104. CSDFMA Standards: Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufactures; Association, (CSDFMA) Canadian Manufacturing Specification for Steel Door and Frames, 2009. ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 863-04, Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; (NAAMM) Guide Specifications for Detention Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, dated January 2004 and ASTM F1450. NFPA 80-2010, Fire Doors and Windows.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TEST REPORTS
.1
Fabricate detention doors and frames to meet following performance requirements, as established by ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 863 and ASTM F1450. .1 Static load test .2 Rack test .3 Impact load test .4 Removable glazing stop test Submit test reports from independent testing laboratory-certifying compliance with performance criteria of ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 863 and ASTM F1450 for static load, rack, impact load and removable glazing stop tests. The following outlines the testing procedures, but is not to be construed as complete in all respects to the performance criteria.
.2
Section 11 19 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TEST REPORTS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .1 Static and Rack Tests:(Cont'd) .1 Static Load Test:(Cont'd) maximum deflection at centre span under full load shall be recorded, and shall not exceed 14.73 mm. After release of load the deformation shall not exceed 2.55 mm. .2 Rack Test: Door shall be held in stationary cantilevered position not more than 150 mm from the top, support the lower corner on the hinge edge by a stand whose door contact surface is not more than 150 mm x 150 mm square. Apply test load, as per Table 1 for grade of door, in a downward direction to the unsupported corner. .1 The hydraulic ram shall exert test load on top of unsupported corner with it's center line 76 mm from bottom of the door and 76 mm from the lock edge. The maximum corner deflection at full load shall not exceed 90 mm and there shall be no failure of any welds, nor buckling of channel or stiffeners throughout the door structure. After removal of load, the permanent corner deflection shall be recorded and shall not exceed 36 mm. .2 Permanently mark and date both the test doors and retain at the manufacturer's plant for one year after date of project completion. .3 Impact Load Test: Construct door assembly including: wall, door, frame, wall anchors, lock, hinges and other hardware as specified for the doors. Rigidly mount in vertical position, so that the door and locking hardware are operable. .1 Construct a pendulum ram system capable of delivering consistent impacts of 271.2J so that impacts may be delivered to the lock, hinge and glazing panel assemblies. The striking nose of the ram shall be C1010 or C1020 low carbon steel and the striking surface area shall be 2 25.8 cm . Position the ram so that the door swings away from the ram, while hanging at rest, just touching the target area. .2 With the door closed and locked, conduct the tests at 271.2J of energy with each impact as per locations and number of impacts shown in Table 1.
Section 11 19 13 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TEST REPORTS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .1 Static and Rack Tests:(Cont'd) .3 Impact Load Test:(Cont'd) .3 The door shall remain closed and locked throughout the testing procedure, and the assembly shall not be damaged to the extent that forcible egress can be obtained. After testing is completed the door shall be capable of being unlocked and operated to provide egress. .4 Impact Series for Frame and Glazing/ Panel Impact Test for Multi-light Frame and Sidelight Frame shall be in accordance to ASTM F1592. Grade of Impact Test to conform to Grade of adjacent Doors unless stated otherwise in Door & Frame Schedule or Specifications. .5 Notify Departmental Representative sufficiently in advance of tests to allow for assignment of supervisory personnel. Fire rated doors and frames: labeled and listed by and organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN/ULC-S104 for rating specified. Submit performance and fire resistance testing data prior to fabrication. Failure to provide required testing data or submission of misrepresented testing data would result in disqualification. In the event of disqualification substitute an acceptable alternate manufacturer/ subcontractor, at no additional cost to Departmental Representative. The Departmental Representative reserves the right to appoint a technical advisor to monitor all aspects of detention doors and frames.
.3
.4
.5
1.4
SAMPLES
.1 .2
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit one 450 mm x 300 mm corner section of each type of door with hinge mortise and reinforcement showing internal construction. Include with glazing stops applied in one corner to show corner joint. Submit one full sized sample of frame showing welded construction, hinge mortise and reinforcement, mortar guard boxes for lock and door position switch, conduits junction box and
.3
Section 11 19 13 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.4 SAMPLES (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) sample of glazing stop applied in one corner to show corner joint.
1.5
MOCK-UPS
.1 .2
Prepare in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Supply and install a full size mock-up for the following doors: Three doors to be selected by Departmental Representative, complete with glazing and all operating hardware as applicable for Departmental Representative's review. Provide installed door, frame, hinges, lock, glazing, door position switch, etc. in masonry opening directed by Departmental Representative. Co-ordinate electrical hook-ups to miniature portable control panel as provided by Electrical subcontractor (Division 26) and Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractor. Coordinate pneumatic air line hook-ups to a portable compressed air source. Mock-up door and controls to be indicative of final installation in every aspect with all functions and indication signals operable for inspection prior to the manufacture of detention mock-up door and hardware will be subject to site testing as required by Departmental Representative. Notify Departmental Representative at least 7 calendar days in advance for review of mock-ups. Mock-ups will be reviewed by Departmental Representative to verify conformance with specified requirements, workmanship and appearance. Make changes to mock-ups that may be required by Departmental Representative. Mock-ups may be used as part of work provided it meets Departmental Representative's approval. Approved mock-up will establish a minimum acceptable standard for remaining work.
.3 .4
.5 .6
1.6
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate each type of door, materials, steel core material thickness, mortises, reinforcements, locations of exposed fasteners, opening for glass, arrangement of hardware and fire ratings.
Section 11 19 13 Page 7 2011-05-25
.3
Indicate each type of frame, materials, weld types and spacing, steel core material thickness, reinforcements, glazing stops, location of anchors and exposed fastenings, finishes, hardware sets and fire ratings.
Show fabrication and installation drawings where applicable. Reference doors and frames to Door and Frame Schedule provided by Departmental Representative. Indicate provisions to accommodate conduit and connection boxes with in frames.
.4 .5
.6
.1 .2 .3
.4
.5
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE OF DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR
.1
Manufacture doors and frames using an established company experienced in design and production of custom detention security door and frame assemblies together with integration of security hardware and glazing preparations, as they impact upon the scope of work. Have lock manufacturer's representative visit door and frame fabricating facility and: .1 review lock and strike preparations and reinforcements; .2 review lock and strike installation methods; .3 provide technical assistance as required to ensure proper lock and strike installations.
.2
Section 11 19 13 Page 8 2011-05-25
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE OF DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR (Cont'd)
.3
Provide the following documentation prior to contract award to substantiate door and frame fabricator qualifications. Failure to provide required information or submission of misrepresented information will result in disqualification. .1 Evidence of ten (10) years prior experience with manufacture and installation of equipment similar to this project .2 List of employees in supervisory capacity stating respective area of responsibility and experience .3 List of five (5) jobs completed in size and construction similar to this project, built with in last five (5) years. Include job name, contact person with telephone number and contract amount .4 List five (5) jobs comparable in size, which have been in operation for over five (5) years. Include job name, contact person with telephone number and contact amount .5 Name of pneumatic lock supplier proposed for use on this project. Submit evidence that supplier is current manufacturer distributor where not dealing direct with manufacturer's plant. .6 Letter of intent to commission each security door installed in accordance with Field Quality Control.
1.9 CO-ORDINATION AND SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBIITY OF DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR
.1
Co-ordinate work of this section with work of Electrical subcontractor (Division 26)and Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 subcontractor for complete integration of electrical systems, door control systems, and authorities having jurisdiction. Perform work of this section under one subcontractor who will be held responsible for supply and installation of all work of this section including installation of detention hardware specified under Section 11 19 12 and co-ordination of all other work specified under Related Sections as required for completion of work. .1 Include also under same subcontractor fabrication and installation of Detention Sliding Grille Doors and Barriers in Section 11 19 14, and Detention Exterior Swing Gates in Section 32 31 14; with related detention hardware specified under Section 11 19 12. .2 Include all costs attributed to any change in lock supplier, which would involve changes in
.2
Section 11 19 13 Page 9 2011-05-25
1.9 CO-ORDINATION AND SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBIITY OF DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) sizes of doors and frames at no additional charge to Departmental Representative.
.3
Be responsible for accurate building -in door frames in concrete block walls to tolerances required to ensure correct fit of doors and proper operation of hardware.
.1
Submit documentation for incorporation into maintenance manuals specified under Section 01 78 00. Documentation to include: .1 Full identification of hardware including part numbers, manufacturer and source of supply. .2 Recommended spare parts lists to stock for maintenance purposes. .3 Complete operational, adjustment, maintenance and repair procedures. .4 Name, address and telephone number of Subcontractor installing work. Provide maintenance material in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide four (4) sets of drivers and other required tools for each size of security fastener installed, two (2) for hand drivers, and two (2) for drill mount. Include full identification, exploded diagrams and cross reference numbering for spares. Manufacturer's factory representative must be present to sign off and verify the detention door and hardware system during the final commissioning process.
.2
.3 .4
.5 .6
1.11
WARRANTY
.1 .2
Provide a warranty of 3 years for all labour and materials in this Section. Warrant in writing doors and frames against failure and defects in material, weld, fasteners, anchors and workmanship.
Section 11 19 13 Page 10 2011-05-25
1.12
SCHDULES
.1
Refer to drawings for Door and Frame Schedules indicating door numbers, types, sizes frame types, sheet core thickness, finishes, and label requirements for fire-rated doors and frames, where applicable. Doors listed in Schedules are nominal size only. Fabricator shall make necessary allowance for all clearances. All core thickness dimensions are nominal dimensions. Frames which, upon delivery exhibit rust, distortion or surface irregularities due to improper fabrication or handling will be rejected and shall be replaced at no increase in Contract Price.
.2
.3 .4
1.13
DELIVERY
.1
Deliver hollow metal doors to site, sorted as to Building Wing in which they are to be installed. Label or identify doors as to their location of installation to avoid errors. Ensure manufacturer delivers removable glass stops, and security screws for glass stops, and turns over to Contractor for installation. Sort glass stops as to building wing in which they are to be installed, and identify their location of installation.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Face sheet steel: Commercial grade steel to ASTM A568/A568M, Class 1, hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M - commercial quality, coating designation to ASTM A924/A924M, ZF075, commercially known as "Colourbond", "Satincoat", or "Galvanneal". For doors in exterior walls, use coating designation Z275 (fully galvanized) finish. Steel shapes, plates and bars: Structural quality to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, type 230G or 260W; free of scale, pitting and other surface blemishes. Accessories: Floor anchors, channel spreaders, tee anchors, wall stud anchors, zinc coated to ASTM A366M, coating designation ZF075 corrugate
.2
.3
Section 11 19 13 Page 11 2011-05-25
.3
Accessories:(Cont'd) tee anchors for masonry bond, drill stud anchors to wire tie to studs, lag bolts, shields and bushing for existing or concrete openings. Guard Boxes: ZF075 coating designation zinc finish, 1.6 mm core thickness steel unless noted otherwise. Door insulation: rock wool or rigid fiberglass for sound deadening and fire insulation to CAN/ULC-S702, minimum 24 kg/m density. Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Zinc primer: Zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Filler: Polyester type automotive body spot filler compound. Door Bumpers: grey neoprene/rubber type; pop rivet to door frame with aluminum rivets. Mask bumpers for painting. Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Note: apply to all pressed steel frames in concrete block or concrete. Grout fill: to be 25 MPa concrete by the masonry Sections.
.4
.5
.6 .7 .8 .9
.10
.11
2.2 FASTENING DEVICES
.1
Provide security screws, security nuts, rivets, spanner screws or other equally secure approved devices for affixing various components. Use only rivets, security screws, or security nuts at locations where maximum security against removal is required. Use spanner screws only at locations where security against removal is not as important and where it is necessary to remove and repair items from time to time. Security screws and nuts to have an extra head which twists off when screw or nut is fully secured, leaving main head without holes or slots for insertion of tool for removal. Security Spanner screws to be torx with pin requiring a special spanner tool to remove screws.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 11 19 13 Page 12 2011-05-25
2.2 FASTENING DEVICES (Cont'd)
.6
Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking.
Standard screws not acceptable.
.7
2.3 HOLLOW METAL DETENTION DOORS
.1
Fabrication of Detention Hollow Metal Doors: .1 Fabrication of Detention Hollow Metal Doors to meet requirements of this Section. .2 Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with Underwriters requirements and as may be required by NFPA 80. Install label on butt edge of door. .3 Fabricate doors with flush faces and provisions for glass openings as indicated on Door and Frame Schedule. .4 Fabricate doors square and free of distortion and twists. Accurately form and fit components and sections, to close fitting tolerances. Form edge bends true, straight and of minimum radius for metal thickness of sheet steel used. .5 Install special pockets, brackets and back-up plates required for door mounted manual locks. Confirm requirements with hardware manufacturer. Detention side of doors are to be finished flush and have minimum 4.5 mm thick structural quality steel back-up plates to protect locks. Brackets are to firmly support lock cases on both faces, preventing them from moving in event of impact attack. Design pockets so that removal of locks are impossible when lock bolts are extended. .6 Use one full sheet of sheet steel per door face, formed accurately at longitudinal edges to wrap around each strike and hinge edge. Arrange sheets to overlap each other at strike and hinges edges. Continuous weld face sheets together along exposed lap edges, grind, fill sand smooth and flush to requirements stated under Finishing. Components for Detention Hollow Metal Doors: .1 Refer to drawings for Door and Frame Schedule indicating location of Detention Hollow Metal Doors. Detention doors are all security doors receiving door face sheets of 2.0 mm or 2.5 mm core thickness meeting ASTM F1450 appropriate Grade No. to locations noted in Door and Frame Schedule. .2 All doors shall be custom made, of the types and sizes shown on the approved shop drawings, and shall be prepared for hardware as
.2
Section 11 19 13 Page 13 2011-05-25
2.3 HOLLOW METAL DETENTION DOORS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) per the final approved shop drawings, and shall be prepared for hardware as per the final approved hardware schedule. Door edge reinforcements and internal reinforcements: either commercial quality sheet steel or structural quality steel designed to meet requirements specified in Article 1.3 Performance Requirements and Test Reports, but shall not be less than the following: .1 Door thickness shall be either 45 mm or 50 mm; to locations as noted in the Door and Frame Schedule. All doors shall be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from warpage or buckle. Edge bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius for the thickness of metal used. .2 Face sheets shall be stiffened by continuous full height double hat channel design; spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These stiffeners shall be 1.6 mm minimum thickness. Flat at sheets are to be resistance spot welded at 75 mm o.c. horizontally and 75 mm o.c. vertically. .3 Alternatively face sheets shall be stiffened by continuous full height true truss design with triangular form, of shape which cannot be altered without changing the length of the sides; spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These stiffeners shall be 0.5 mm minimum thickness. Flat apexes to be resistance spot welded at 75 mm o.c. horizontally and 75 mm o.c. vertically. .4 Fill all voids between each flute of reinforcement with door insulation. .5 The vertical edges shall be reinforced by a continuous steel channel, not less than 3.5 mm, extending the full length of the door. The top and bottom edges shall be closed with a continuous channel, also not less than 3.5 mm, welded to both face sheets not less than 75 mm o.c. The 3.5 mm end channels shall be continuously welded to vertical reinforcing channel at all 4 corners producing a fully welded perimeter reinforcing channel. .6 The top end channel shall be fitted with a flush closing channel of not less than 1.6 mm. The flush closing channel shall be welded in place at the corners and at the centre. Installation of closer channel using screws, security or
Section 11 19 13 Page 14 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) otherwise, shall be deemed unacceptable. The end channel and flush closer channel shall be installed such that they are permanent and non-removable. Provide weep holes in exterior door bottom channel. .7 Provide preparation for door position switch. .8 Bevel vertical door strike edges 3 mm in 50 mm, unless required otherwise by security or hardware design. .9 Lock bolt pockets: 9.5 mm steel plate recessed and fully welded to door edge, complete with holes for lock bolt and 1.2 mm steel bolt pocket fully welded to steel plate. Steel plate to have screw holes tapped ready to receive strike plate and security screws supplied by lock manufacturer. .10 Provide drilled and tapped holes for all hardware according to template furnished by hardware suppliers. Hardware Reinforcements: Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for all templated hardware in accordance with the final approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Indicate clearly on shop drawings exact location of internal hardware reinforcing within hollow metal door to ensure proper alignment of surface mounted hardware. Minimum core thickness for hardware reinforcements shall be as follows: .1 For mortised butts: minimum 5 mm thick plates of width to match door thickness and length to suit butts. Provide additional 5 mm thickness steel channel at top hinge welded to plate inside edge channel. .2 For recessed pulls: minimum 3.5 mm thick plates. .3 For surface mounted security pulls: minimum 10 mm thick plates. .4 For lock fronts, closures and stays: minimum 3 mm thick plates. .5 For all other surface applied hardware: 3 mm thick plates. .6 For glass openings: 3.5 mm channel with corners fully welded to form a continuous perimeter channel frame. Glass Moldings and stops: where specified, doors shall be provided with steel moldings to secure glazing by others in accordance with
.3
.4
Section 11 19 13 Page 15 2011-05-25
.4
Glass Moldings and stops:(Cont'd) glass sizes and thickness specified in Section 08 80 50. .1 Fixed glass molding shall be no less than 3.5 mm, and shall be spot-welded to door face sheets at 100 mm o.c. minimum. .2 Removable glass stops shall be pressed steel angles not less then 3.5 mm. Stops shall be tight fitting at the corner joints, and secured with 6 mm 20 button-head, self-tapping spanner screws located 150 mm o.c. maximum. .3 Where glass thickness dictates, 3.5 mm, off set surface-mounted glass stop shall be used. The corners shall be tight fitting and the glass stop shall be secured to the face of the door using 6 mm 20 button-head, self-tapping spanner security screws spaced 150 mm maximum. With the fasteners located not more than 50 mm from each end of each stop. .4 Orient glass stops on secure side of doors. Confirm secure side with Departmental Representative. Verify glass thickness with Departmental Representative prior to fabrication.
2.4 FABRICATION OF DETENTION PRESSED STEEL FRAMES
.1
Refer to drawings for Door and Frame Schedule indicating location of Detention Pressed Steel, for doors and glass Frames. Frames brake-formed from commercial quality sheet steel of with 2.0 mm or 2.5 mm core thickness meeting ASTM F1592 Grade No. to locations noted in Door and Frame Schedule, and Window Schedule. Fabricate frames as welded units. Fabricate frames in accordance with details and approved shop drawings. Provide 100 mm wide head section to all door frames unless stated otherwise. Fabricate frames to underwriter's requirements and provide Underwriter's labels to frames noted in Door and Frame Schedule requiring ULC label. Fabricate frames square and free of distortion and twists. Accurately form and fit components and sections, to close fitting tolerances. Form edge bends true, straight and of minimum radius for thickness of sheet steel used.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
Section 11 19 13 Page 16 2011-05-25
2.4 FABRICATION OF DETENTION PRESSED STEEL FRAMES (Cont'd)
.7
Form frames with corner joints having all contact edges closed tight with faces mitred and stops either butted or mitred.
Continuous weld all corner joints. Use of gussets or splices at corner joints is not acceptable. Grind welded joints smooth, to a uniform finish, flush with adjacent surfaces. Fill, sand smooth and flush to requirement stated under Finishing. Form stops in door openings minimum 16 mm deep. Form stops in glass openings minimum 31 mm deep for all K series glass, 25 mm for all other glass types. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames for template hardware, in accordance with templates provided by hardware supplier. Reinforce frames for surface mounted hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface mounted hardware will be performed by others on site. Minimum steel metal thickness for hardware reinforcements. To top hinge, provide additional 35 x 40 x 5 angle x 250 mm long welded to plate reinforcement. Fully weld reinforcement steel to frame. .1 Mortise Hinges: 6.3 mm x full width of jamb x 250 mm in length. .2 Surface Hinges: 10 mm x 35 mm x 250 mm in length. .3 Strike reinforcements: 9 mm. .4 Closer reinforcements: 5 mm. .5 Flush bolt reinforcements: 5 mm. .6 Reinforcements for surface applied hardware 5 mm. Protect mortised cut-outs for frame mounted pneumatic door locks, intercoms, card readers and door position switches with leak proof steel guard boxes, and conduits with compression fittings which shall be grout tight. Form lock guard boxes using minimum 2.5 mm metal thickness sheet steel, welded in place. Form all other guard boxes using minimum 1.6 mm metal thickness sheet steel, welded in place. Provide steel mortar boxes enclosures for strike, latch and bolt cutouts on all frames. All frames with weather-stripping shall have continuous mortar guard at the point of
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
Section 11 19 13 Page 17 2011-05-25
.15
(Cont'd) installation. Screw holes to be field located by installer. Weld on to door frame security rings, or any items required and supplied by Detention Hardware manufacturer to provide a complete installation of their devices. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections designated for splicing in the field by others. Where splicing is necessary, angle splices shall be installed at the corners of the profile, and shall extend at least 100 mm on either side of the joint. Splicing angles shall be the same core thickness as frame. Frames for multiple openings shall have mullion members which, after fabrication, are closed tubular shapes conforming to profile shown on drawings, and having no visible seams of joints. All joints between faces of abutted members shall be welded and finished smooth. All joints between stops of abutted members shall be welded along the depth of the stop and shall be left neat and uniform in appearance. Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware specified in Section 11 19 12. Include installation of fully enclosed back boxes suitable for EMT conduit termination welded to back of frames at all device locations. Provide fully enclosed termination back box in header, located at top of lock jamb. Back box shall be large enough to house door position switch and to allow for termination points for field wires and lock harness. Termination back box to be constructed with 1.6 mm core thickness formed sheet steel full width of frame, with 2.5 mm steel reinforcing strip around perimeter of access opening, drilled and taped for four (4) 8-32 CSFHMS spanner screws. Termination back box to be inset 13 mm in from frame returns. Termination back box to be fully welded all sides to frame. Termination back box will house the termination point for the VDC harness from the lock, door position switch and the field side wiring. All wiring in the termination box will be connected with multi-pin molex connectors. The pneumatic tube will pass through the termination box into the lock back box located directly below. Termination back box and lock back box to be connected with 19 mm conduit, installed by frame supplier. Frame
.16
.17
.18
.19
Section 11 19 13 Page 18 2011-05-25
.19
(Cont'd) supplier to provide an additional 19 mm conduit raceway within frame throat connecting underside of termination back box to top of lock back box for exterior pneumatic locks, as power supply to lock heater, and status wiring and 24 VDC power line must be in separate conduit. Top of termination back box to have compression fittings for 19 mm conduit supplied by others. Lock back box to be constructed with 2.5 mm core thickness formed sheet steel fully welded to frame, with 5.0 mm steel reinforcing around perimeter of access opening, drilled and taped to receive flat head spanner machine screws for lock cover plate, with 5 mm thick back-up plate for field attachment of lock. All device back boxes are to be sealed and made grout tight at the hollow metal manufacturing plant during frame fabrication. Electrical conduit supplied by others: Provide knockouts to top of termination back box and to bottom of lock back box for one 19 mm conduit. Protect tapings for hinges, surfaces mounted hardware, weatherstripping and fasteners for glass stops from grout/ mortar fill with strips of polystyrene type 2 filler pad. Adhere insulation strips in place using heat resistant, epoxy resin based, low viscosity, contact cement. Supply and install rigid polystyrene insulation strips to inside of exterior face of exterior hollow metal frames. Use insulation strips of minimum 50 mm thickness and secure in place in the factory using adhesive. Supply and install 6 mm thick steel plate welded to inside of frame at rabbet for glazing to allow drilling and taping for glass stop screws. Adhere 12 mm polystyrene strips to 6 mm steel plate with heat resistant, epoxy resin based, low viscosity, contact cement, in order to keep fasteners free of grout. Removable Glazing Stops: shall be pressed steel angles not less than 3.5 mm core thickness. Stops shall be tight fitting at the corner joints, and secured in place with 6 mm hardened tamperproof self-tapping button-head spanner machine screws spaced 150 mm o.c. maximum. Stops shall be installed on the most secure (non-prisoner) side of the frame. Confirm secure
.20
.21
.22
.23
.24
.25
Section 11 19 13 Page 19 2011-05-25
.25
Removable Glazing Stops:(Cont'd) side with Departmental Representative prior to fabrication. The frame underneath the glazing stops and the inside of the glazing stop shall be treated for maximum paint adhesion and painted with a rust inhibitive primer prior to installation in the frame. Verify glass thickness before drilling and tapping for glass stops. Glass stops to be match drilled and held in place by two temporary Phillips head screws. Mortar guards will be provided at each hole. The screw holes in the removable stops will be 2 mm larger than the diameter of the screw to allow for adjustment. Screw head will be of sufficient size to conceal the hole in the removable stop. Form floor anchors using minimum 3.5 mm thick x 75 mm steel angle. Form anchors with 2 holes for fastening in place. Fasten anchors inside jambs with minimum 4 spot welds per anchor. Where required, provide adjustable floor anchors with no less than 50 mm height adjustment. Supply fasteners and concrete inserts. Jamb anchors: Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with adjustable jamb anchors of the yoke and strap type made from the same gauge steel as frame. Straps shall be no less than 50 mm x 250 mm in size, corrugated and/or perforated. Provide number of anchors on each jamb as follows: .1 Borrowed light frames: 2 anchors plus 1 for each 400 mm or fraction thereof over 900 mm, spaced at 400 mm maximum between anchors. .2 Door frames: place frame anchors at 400 mm o.c. along each jamb for door openings up to and including 900 mm width. Place frame anchors at 200 mm o.c. along each jamb and head for door openings over 900 mm wide. Termination box, 130 mm x 65 mm access cover plates, shall be flush mounted and shall be the same core thickness as the frame and fastened with a minimum of 4 - No. 8-32 flat head spanner machine screws, but not to exceed 150 mm o.c. unless shown otherwise on drawings. Access cover plate to be centred horizontally in head of frame. Lock cover plates shall be surface mounted and shall have a core thickness no less than 3.0 mm
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
Section 11 19 13 Page 20 2011-05-25
.31
(Cont'd) with all edges and corners eased, and fastened with a minimum of four (4) 6 mm diameter hardened flat head spanner machine screws, but not to exceed 150 mm o.c. unless shown otherwise on drawings. Prepare each door opening for door bumpers, 3 for single door openings and 2 for double door openings. Provide mortar guards to all bumpers, or shop install door bumpers to prevent holes from filling with grout. Painting subcontractor is to ensure bumpers have been masked off prior to painting. Lock back box for Lock Type 7C2 to be constructed with 3.0 mm core thickness formed sheet steel fully welded to frame (in order to increase impact test at lock). Lock back box to be sealed and made grout tight at the hollow metal manufacturing plant during frame fabrication. Provide all boxes and conduits required to accommodate wiring in frames where electric limit switches are specified. Weld in 2 temporary jamb spreaders at bottom of each door frame opening, to maintain alignment during shipment. For each sliding door, provide continuous full height, at a minimum, 2.5 mm thick steel vertical receiving channel for door to close against. Provide adjustable rubber bumpers on each (unless the bumpers are provided as part of Type 16B1 and Type 16B2 Locking Device Package).
.32
.33
.34
.35
.36
.37
2.5 CLEARENCES AND TOLERANCES FOR DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES
.1
Maintain edge clearances as follows: .1 Between doors and frames, at head and jambs: 3 mm. .2 At door sills where no threshold is used: 6 mm maximum above finished floor. .3 At door sills where threshold is used: 19 mm maximum above finished floor. Maintain fabrication tolerances within following limits: .1 Width, measured between rabbets at head: nominal opening width: +1.6mm,-0.8 mm.
.2
Section 11 19 13 Page 21 2011-05-25
2.5 CLEARENCES AND TOLERANCES FOR DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) Height (total length of jamb rabbet): .2 nominal opening height +/- 1.2 mm. Cross sectional profile dimensions: .3 .1 Face: +/- 0.8 mm .2 Stop: +/- 0.8 mm .3 Rabbet: +/- 0.4 mm .4 Depth: +/- 0.8 mm .5 Throat: +/-1.6 mm .4 Hardware cutout dimensions: Template dimensions +0.4 mm,-0 mm .5 Hardware location: +/-0.8 mm Doors: .1 Width: +/- 1.2 mm .2 Height: +/- 1.2 mm .3 Thickness: +/- 1.6 mm Hardware cutout dimensions: template dimensions +0.4mm,-0 mm. .1 Hardware location: +/- 0.8 mm
.3
.4
2.6
ACCESSORIES
.1
Provide accessory components for hollow metal detention doors and panels as detailed, including: food pass units as per Details 2 and 3 on Drawing A5.7 & drug dispensary pass-thru as per Detail 47 on Drawing A5.8.
2.7 FINISHING OF DOORS AND WINDOWS
.1
After fabrication, remove welding slag and splatter, grind smooth all sharp edges and welds, fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and sand all tool marks and surface imperfections and dress to a uniform smooth finish so that all welded joints will not be invisible under painted gloss finish. Prime paint steel and ferrous metal with one coat shop coat primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up welded, grinds and damaged galvanized and zinc-coated surfaces using zinc primer. Apply isolation coating to full interior surface of frames scheduled to receive grout fill.
.2
.3 .4
Section 11 19 13 Page 22 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
DEC to protect all hardware devices from work of other trades for the entire duration of the project. Install fire labeled doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80. Set frames plumb, elevation. Set in distortion of 1.6 plumb measured on square, level and at correct place with maximum diagonal mm and maximum 1.0 mm out of face of frame.
.2 .3
.4
Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Secure base anchors at each jamb to slab with fasteners to maintain alignment while frames are built in. Brace frames rigidly in position while building in. Remove temporary steel shipping jamb spreaders. Install wood spreaders at third points of frame rebate height to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for opening exceeding 1200 mm in width. Remove wood spreaders after frames have been built-in. Make allowances for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames. Install doors, panels, accessory components and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions. Install hardware to requirements specified in Section 08 71 11, and Section 11 19 12. Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function. Shop install silencers to prevent holes from filling with grout. Painting subcontractor is to remove silencers prior to painting and hand over to installer for reinstallation after painting is completed. Co-ordinate grouting of frames, installation of anchors, installation of conduit and services. Co-ordinate grouting of all frames solid to adjacent construction. .1 In masonry walls ensure that frames are grouted solid at head and full length of jambs.
.5
.6 .7
.8 .9
.10
Section 11 19 13 Page 23 2011-05-25
.10
(Cont'd) .2 In concrete walls, ensure that frames are grouted solid at head and jambs. Through-bolt frames to concrete with approved type expansion bolts placed in rotary-drilled holes through sleeved spacers behind stops. Provide on bolt, each 200 mm maximum, from top and bottom of jamb and additional bolts at 600 mm o.c., maximum, between top and bottom bolts, in each jamb. Countersink and fill bolt heads flush with face of stops. Setting and bracing of frames in masonry construction to be performed by this Section 11 19 13 to ensure accurate placement during building-in. Building-in and grouting of set/ braced frames to be done by masonry erector. Touch up hollow metal work with shop primer, where prime painted surfaces have become scratched or abraded during handling and installation and leave ready for Finish Painting. The Detention Door Manufacturer shall be employed as subcontractor to hang and adjust all doors equipped with Type 16B locking devices including mechanical installation of the following Type 16B locking device components: .1 Mechanism housings at each door complete. .2 Vertical locking columns complete. .3 Bottom door guide assemblies complete. .4 Mechanism housings connecting rows of cell doors to mechanical control cabinets. .5 Mechanical control cabinets. .6 Rubber bumpers in sliding door receiving channels.
.11
.12
.13
3.2 TOOLS FOR MAINTENANCE
.1
Two fastening tools for each type of fastener shall be delivered to the Departmental Representative at Substantial Performance.
.1
Contractor's commissioning verification will be required for installation of doors, frames, hardware and associated detention equipment for each scheduled door. Co-operate with Departmental Representative allowing access to work for proper review, inspections and verifications.
.2
Section 11 19 13 Page 24 2011-05-25
.3
Fulfill following as scope of mandatory commissioning and documentation for each and every door and frame. .1 Check following on delivery to site .1 Conformance to shop drawings, and specifications. .2 Metal thickness (gauge) of steel, warpage, welding and cutouts. .3 Material (submit applicable lab tests). .4 Construction of doors (sample door for testing as required. .5 Preparation for associated hardware/ detention equipment. .6 Size and location of reinforcements and anchors. .2 Check following when frame are built-in: .1 Alignment. .2 Dimensions of openings before and after grouting. .3 Check following after doors have been installed. .1 Alignment. .2 Tolerances. .3 Rough-in templates and alignment of all detention equipment. .4 Check following after hardware/ detention equipment had been installed. .1 Function. .2 Cylinder/lock assembly. .3 Peripherals (DPIS, etc.). .5 Submit three (3) copies of commissioning results to Departmental Representative upon completion of tests and prior to inspection of Substantial Performance of the Work. .6 Be present and provide required resources during verification and commissioning of door control system specified in Sections 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Arrange for equipment suppliers and installers to be present to demonstrate, guide and instruct operators and maintenance personal on operation and maintenance of doors and of frames together with locking devices, indicators and over-ride features, in accordance with Division 01 Commissioning requirements; Sections 01 91 00, 01 91 31, 01 91 51. Attend this demonstration.
.2
END
DETENTION GRILLE DOORS AND BARRIERS
Section 11 19 14 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 12; 11 19 13; 32 31 14 and 08 50 50. Refer to Section 11 19 13 - Detention Doors and Frames, Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor. Details and Drawings provided by Departmental Representative indicate general overall intent and principals of design and function for project Detention Grille Doors and Barriers. This Section is responsible for final Design of Detention Detention Grille Doors and Barriers that will meet testing, mock-up and warranty requirements within overall constraints of project. Indicate final design information on Shop Drawings for review by Departmental Representative. In particular detailing, Detention Detention Grille Doors and Barriers to adjacent construction to ensure compatibility with project conditions.
.2
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM): .1 ASTM A53/A53M-10, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Steamless. .2 ASTM A108-07, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. .3 ASTM A283/A283M-03(2007), Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. .4 ASTM A336/A336M-10a, Standard Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts. .5 ASTM A501-07, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. .6 ASTM A1008/A1008M-11, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer.
.2
Section 11 19 14 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International): .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .3 CSA S16-09, Design of Steel Structures, Includes Update No. 1 (2010). .4 CSA W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding (Developed in co operation with the Canadian Welding Bureau. .5 CSA W59-03(R2008),Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)(Imperial Version).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate VOC's. .1 For finishes, coatings, primers and paints. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, and accessories. Clearly indicate each type of grille door, barrier and frame, material, reinforcements, location of anchors, exposed fastenings, finishes, and arrangement of hardware. Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and in Door and Frame Schedule.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.2
Section 11 19 14 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Pre installation Meetings: Conduct pre installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
Manufacturer's factory representative must be present to sign off and verify the detention door and hardware system during the final commissioning process.
.4
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: .1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Storage and Protection: .1 Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or apply strippable plastic coating, before shipping to job site. .2 Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building. Provide instructions for removal of protective covering.
.2
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrene corrugated cardboard and packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
Section 11 19 14 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
Sheet steel: commercial quality cold-rolled to ASTM A1008/A1008M with Class 1 finish. Steel plate, shapes, bars: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, type 230G or 260W. Steel plates to be bent or cold formed: ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C. Steel tubing, hot formed, welded, or seamless: ASTM A501. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108, grade as selected by the fabricator. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336/A336M. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade A. Shop paint primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Fastening devices: .1 Provide security screws, security nuts, rivets, security spanner screws or other equally secure approved devices for affixing various components. .2 Use only rivets, security screws, or security nuts at locations where maximum security against removal is required. .3 Use spanner screws only at locations where security against removal is not as important and where it is necessary to remove and repair items from time to time. .4 Security screws and nuts to have an extra head which twists off when screw or nut is fully secured, leaving main head without holes or slots for insertion of tool for removal. .5 Security spanner screws to be Torx with Pin requiring a special spanner tool for removal. .6 Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking. .7 Standard screws not acceptable.
Section 11 19 14 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.2 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES
.1
To be provided under Section 11 19 13.
2.3 STEEL DETENTION GRILLES
.1
Following requirements apply to construction barriers, observation port grille barriers and exterior grille barriers to non-secure exterior aluminum windows.
.2 .3
Construct grilles with steel plate and bar material except where specified otherwise. Perimeter framing bars to be rectangular 50 x 10 mm size. Intermediate framing bars to be rectangular and of same size and material. Intermediate framing bars not to exceed 510 mm centre to centre. Grid grille framing bars not to exceed 250 mm centre to centre in both directions Rectangular decorative filler bars where specified, to be minimum 50 x 10 mm size, with configuration such that clear space between bars in at least one direction does not exceed 140 mm. Continuous deep-penetration arc weld all joints where rectangular bars meet. Remove splatter and grind smooth. Round filler bars, where specified, to be 22 mm diameter, and to pass through both intermediate and perimeter rectangular framing bars. Continuous deep-penetration arc weld round bars to perimeter bars. Tack weld each round bar to each intermediate bar. Dress all welds. Clear space between bars not to exceed 140 mm. Prepare for all specified hardware. Provide all holes and reinforcements required for proper attachment and operation of same. Provide all boxes and conduits required to accommodate wiring where electric locks, locking devices, or limit switches are specified.
.4 .5 .6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 11 19 14 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.4
GRILLE DOORS
.1 .2
Fabricate steel detention grille doors as detailed. Construct doors with a perimeter member of 51 x 51 x 6.4 mm hollow structural section (HSS); mitre all corners, fully weld in accordance with CSA W59 using welders holding current certification under CSA W47.1. Continuous deep-penetration arc weld at all joints. Grind smooth all welds. Grid type grille to be installed inside HSS perimeter using 38 x 10 mm rectangular bars at 250 mm centre to centre in the vertical direction and 235 mm centre to centre in the horizontal direction, fully weld all intersections and grind smooth. Ensure maximum clearance at front edge between swing door when closed, and adjacent frame, does not exceed 5 mm. Grille doors greater than 2100 mm in height to receive an additional 51 x 51 x 6.4 mm HSS member fully welded to perimeter members at mid-height. Swing grille doors to be prepared to receive mortise hinges, door position magnet in top of grille door, recessed track for door closure, and recessed strike plate for lock Type 7C2. Sliding grille doors greater than 2100 mm in height to receive a 19 mm dia. x 19 mm deep stud welded to front edge of grille door 150 mm above bottom of door. 22 mm receiving hole to be provided in lock column to receive this stud. This assembly is provided to ensure greater lateral stability of large grille doors in the closed position. Provide all hardware preparations necessary to suit hardware groups designated for each grille door.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.5 FIXED GRILLE BARRIERS
.1 .2
Fabricate steel detention fixed grille barriers as detailed. An individual section of fixed barrier must not exceed 1830 mm in width. Where grille barriers are required to be wider than this, weld two or more sections together. Welds to be 50 mm long, spaced 200 mm centre to centre and dressed.
Section 11 19 14 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.5 FIXED GRILLE BARRIERS (Cont'd)
.3
Where steel frames or imbeds are specified in walls, affix barriers by welding or bolting. Welding if used, to be deep-penetration arc welding, each weld 50 mm long, spaced 200 mm centre to centre. Bolts, if used, to be 10 mm diameter, flat head security type, spaced 200 mm centre to centre.
Where steel frames or imbeds are not specified in walls, affix barriers by bolting, with bolts 10 mm diameter, flat head security type, spaced 200 mm centre to centre. Each bolt to be engaged with lead masonry expansion shield embedded in wall. Provide angle floor clip 76 x 76 x 10 mm at foot of each vertical perimeter or door framing bar. Affix clip to floor with 10 mm diameter flat head security bolt engaged with lead expansion shield embedded in floor. For each sliding door, provide continuous full height vertical receiving channel for door to close against. Minimum 2.5 mm thick formed steel. Provide two adjustable rubber bumpers on each (unless the bumpers are provided as part of Type 16B Locking Device package). For each swinging door, provide a continuous full height stop bar for door to close against, if a hollow metal door frame is not provided. Minimum material 25 mm x 6 mm.
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.6
FINISHES
.1 .2
Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Apply one coat of paint primer to steel and ferrous metal with exception of stainless steel and those zinc-coated or galvanized. Clean, prepare surfaces and apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3
2.7
SHOP PAINTING
.1
Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of galvanized or concrete encased items. Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 degrees C.
.2
Section 11 19 14 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.7 SHOP PAINTING (Cont'd)
.3
Clean surfaces to be field welded; do not paint.
2.8 ISOLATION COATING
.1
Isolate aluminum from following components, by means of bituminous paint: .1 Dissimilar metals except stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area. .2 Concrete, mortar and masonry. .3 Wood.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
.1 .2
Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise. Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal and vertical wood spreaders as necessary to maintain frame alignment. Remove temporary steel and wood spreaders after frames are built-in. Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through which they pass. Provide components for building by other sections in accordance with shop drawings and schedule. Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates. Touch up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection with primer. Touch up galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer where burned by field welding.
.3 .4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Section 11 19 14 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.2 DOOR AND BARRIER INSTALLATION
.1
Install detention grille doors and barriers and hardware in accordance with templates and manufacturer's instructions. Adjust operable parts for correct function. Co-operate with engineering supervisor provided by Detention Hardware supplier to ensure proper installation, adjustment, and operation of hardware. The Detention Equipment subcontractor shall be responsible to hang and adjust all doors equipped with Type 16B locking devices including mechanical installation of the following Type 16B locking device components: .1 Mechanism housing at each door complete. .2 Vertical locking columns complete. .3 Bottom door guide assemblies complete. .4 Remote manual emergency release system cabinet. .5 Rubber bumpers in sliding door receiving channels.
.2 .3
.4
3.3
CLEANING
.1 .2
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
END
Section 11 19 15 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 12, 11 19 13, 11 19 14, 08 51 13 and 08 50 50. Refer to Section 11 19 13 - Detention Doors and Frames, Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor (DEC).
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). .1 ASTM A627-03, Standard Test Methods for Tool-Resisting Steel Bars, Flats, and Shapes for Detention and Correctional Facilities. .2 ASTM A653/653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .3 ASTM A924/A924M-10a Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. .2 CAN/CGSB-85.10-99, Protective Coatings for Metals. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). .1 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .2 CSA W55.3-08, Certification of companies for resistance welding of steel and aluminum. .3 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). .4 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440-08, NAFS North American Fenestration Standard/ Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .5 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1-09, Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440-08, NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .6 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
.2
.3
Section 11 19 15 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
DESCRIPTION
.1
The Detention Exterior Windows shall be a three part composite unit consisting of an interior detention grade component (Window Guard), an exterior commercial grade aluminum glazed component and a pre-cast concrete surround for those units placed into concrete block exterior walls. .1 Interior Detention Grade Component (Window Guard): shall consist of 2.0 mm pressed steel perimeter frame, hollow structural steel mullions and transoms, tungsten carbide resistant security inserts, perforated plate c/w detention grade vent actuator and anchors, as described here in and shall be supplied directly to the site. .2 Exterior Aluminum and Glazing Components: Refer to Sections 07 92 00, 08 51 13 and 08 80 50 specifications on all extruded curtain wall aluminum sections, glazing, gaskets, pressure plates, sealants, fasteners and thermal break materials. .3 Pre-cast Concrete Surrounds: Refer to Section 03 45 00 for specifications on pre-cast concrete surround for all Detention Exterior Windows placed into Concrete block exterior walls.
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
The work as set forth in these drawings and specifications shall be executed only by the manufacturer having proven satisfactory performance in the manufacture of detention type windows and possessing adequate equipment and skilled personnel to detail, fabricate and erect the work of theses Documents as specified and shown. Qualification of welders: .1 Welding of load supporting components shall be performed by companies certified by Canadian Welding Bureau in accordance with CSA W47.1. Workmanship Standards: .1 Resistance welding: to CSA W55.2. .2 Fusion Welding: to CSA W59.
.2
.3
.1
Weather Resistance: .1 Windows shall conform to the Load, Air Infiltration and Water resistance tests as set out in CSA A440.
Section 11 19 15 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) Work of this Section shall meet or exceed .2 the requirements of CSA A440 and current Building Code wherever applicable. Tamper Resistance: .1 The Interior Detention Grade Component described in article 1.3.1.1 shall resist cutting by tungsten carbide rod saw as per test criteria described in 1.7.3.
.2
1.6
SHOP DRAWING
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Clearly indicate, by large scale details, all perimeter conditions of construction, core metal thickness, mullion details, all components of the assembly, anchorage, sealing techniques, tolerances of openings, elevations, all materials as required to completely describe all conditions for detention exterior windows on this project. The contract documents do not purport to be shop drawings, but merely show the general window configuration, construction and shape of members and extrusion desired. Deviations from the details shown may only be permitted to meet manufacturing limitations and techniques and are subject to prior review and approval by the Departmental Representative.
.3
.4
.1 .2 .3
.4
.5
Section 11 19 15 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.8 SAMPLES AND TESTING
.1
Within 45 days upon award of the contract, submit a full size sample of window type W1. The sample shall be complete as if ready for installation, finish painted with all glazing installed. The sample shall be crated and shipped prepaid both ways by the contractor from the place of manufacture to the testing laboratory chosen by the Departmental Representative. The Contractor is required to send a representative of the manufacturer/supplier to the Laboratories, prior to testing, to explain and demonstrate the unit, to representatives of the Departmental Representative. Testing will determine conformance to performance requirements stated in 1.5.1 and 1.5.2 above. The Departmental Representative will appoint and pay for services of testing agency, should this service be required. Cutting test for tungsten resistant inserts to comply with ASTM A627 Test method. .1 6.2.3 Test Method. The testing laboratory shall be responsible for determining that all rod saws used for testing comply with the specifications for tungsten carbide rod saws, which areas follows: 2.1 mm diameter, standard grit, 304 mm approximate length. .2 6.2.3.2 The test shall be conducted on a 150 by 150 mm gravity-feed, power hacksaw machine under the following conditions: .1 Rod saw tension: 890 N (200 lbf). .2 Static gravity feed pressure (ctr. of stroke): 116 N +/-4 N (26 lbf +/- 1 lbf). .3 Dynamic feed pressure: 93-165N (21-37lbs.). .4 Maximum lift on return stroke: 0 mm. .5 Speed: 60 Strokes/Min. .6 Length of stroke: 152 mm. .7 Cutting fluid - None. .3 6.2.3.3 The cutting resistance of the specimen bar shall be determined by placing it firmly in a vice underneath the rod saw in a power hacksaw and causing 18000 cutting cycles of the rod saw to be made on the bar at one point. The point at which the cutting test is conducted shall be more than 51 mm from either end of the specimen bar and not closer than 12.7 mm to the midpoint of the specimen bar. The direction of the cut shall be perpendicular to the axis of the bar. .4 6.2.3.4 To assure uniform cutting action with no significant variations as a result of unusual rod saw wear in any of the 18000 cycles,
.2
.3
Section 11 19 15 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.8 SAMPLES AND TESTING (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) a new rod saw shall be used for every 300 cutting cycles. .5 6.2.3.5 One cutting cycle of the power hacksaw shall be a complete forward motion and return motion of the saw to the position from which the cycle began. .6 Security Inserts must meet or exceed the following: .1 Appendix X1.2 Minimum Acceptable Performance Characteristics for Composite Tool Resisting Steel. .1 Grade No. 1. .2 Steel Type Composite T.R. Steel. .3 Dimensions: 13 mm x 32 mm. .4 Rod Saws used: 72. .5 Cutting Time: 6 hours. .7 No window frames are to be supplied to the project until the sample has been tested and approved by the Departmental Representative. .8 Within 30 days upon award of contract, provide testing documentation that complies with ASTM A627 in a format that is satisfactory to Departmental Representative.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
.1
Schedule delivery of components to pre-cast concrete plant and site to coincide with installation of this work.
1.10 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide the Departmental Representative with written maintenance instructions for the care, cleaning glazing, and servicing of windows.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Sheet steel: 2.0 mm, commercial quality steel cold rolled to ASTM A653/653M; zinc coated to ASTM A924/A924M, coating designation. CGSB Standards: .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ready-Mixed, Organic Zinc Rich Coating. .3 Steel sections and plates: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21 zinc coated to ASTM A924/A924M.
.2
Section 11 19 15 Page 6 2011-05-25
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7
Anchors: Nelson studs.

Bar stock: 15 M 400 MPa. Zinc rich paint: to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Security bars inside steel tube transom and mullions shall be composite tool resisting steel that is a composite of tungsten carbide or other hard surfacing material for cutting resistance and 36 mm x 12.5 mm steel bar to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21. Tool resistant surfaces to be minimum 6 mm deposit thickness continuous along length of both edges on mullion sections and on inside surface on perimeter sections. Consistency of hard-surfacing materials shall be 30% x 16 mesh minimum and 70% x 8 mesh maximum. The overall consistency of the treated surface must be 80% hard-surfaced materials and 20% base welding materials. Hardness rating shall not be less than Carbide 70-74RC/ 57RC Matrix. Security bars to extend a minimum of 25 mm past face of frame or connecting transom, and are to be welded in place. Welding materials to CSA W59. Security Fastening Devices: button head or countersink flat-head, torx with pin stainless steel Type 316 with cadmium coating (to locations where exposed to inmates). Metallic paste filler: Two component automotive body filler, applied non-sag to vertical surfaces. Rigid insulation blocks: extruded polystyrene, conforming to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 2. Fasteners: Stainless steel Type 316 with cadmium coating, finished to match adjacent material (only to locations where not exposed to inmates). Foam in place insulation.
.8 .9
.10
.11 .12
.13
2.2
PRIMER
.1
Touch up prime CAN/CGSB-1.181.
Section 11 19 15 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.3
PAINT
.1
Field in accordance with Section 09 91 23. Provided final finish shall be free of scratches or other blemishes.
2.4 SURFACE PREPARATION OF HOLLOW STEEL SECTIONS
.1 .2 .3
Thoroughly clean and suitably treat steel prior to delivery. Grind smooth sharp projections. Remove loose mill scale, rust, oil grease, dirt and other foreign matter by sandblasting to SSPC-SP10.
2.5 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PRIMING
.1 .2
Prepare zinc coated sheet steel for priming. Prime paint all hollow metal surfaces other than back faces which are to be cast into pre-cast concrete or cast into reinforced concrete walls ready to receive enamel paint by others. Fill all surface depressions and butted joints with metallic paste filler and sand to uniform smooth finish. Re-prime where metallic paste filler and sanding occur. Provide isolation coating to all surfaces in contact with concrete or grout. Sandblast finish to precast exterior window sills: light sandblast finish in order to expose aggregate face.
.3
.4 .5 .6
2.6 FABRICATION FOR WINDOW TYPE W1A AND W2
.1
Fabricate all frames, using 2.0 mm sheet steel, in accordance with details and reviewed shop drawings, fully straight and square, free of twist, warp and distortion shall not exceed 0.1% of the distance of the straight plane from which measured. Fabricate all frames ready to receive aluminum sections for Window Type W1 and W1A and aluminum sections and ventilation component for Window Type W2 specified in Section 08 51 13, and as detailed on drawings. The window frames shall be so assembled as to ensure neat construction and secure well-fitted joints. Frame member corner joints shall be made
.2
Section 11 19 15 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.6 FABRICATION FOR WINDOW TYPE W1A AND W2 (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) by argon shielded arc welds, continuous across the joints. Corner joints of frame perimeter shall be mitered and continuously shop welded on frame side which will be concealed from view after frames are installed. Keep exposed welds to a minimum and where such welds are necessary they shall be ground flush with surface of frame. Upon completion of all welding work, remove all weld slag and spatter, grind flush all excess welds and fill remaining depressions with automotive resin body filler and grind smooth to result in smooth flush frame assembly, where exposed to view. Reinforce head, jamb and sill of all frame members, across throat side with 2.0 mm thick x 38 mm wide steel straps at 300 mm o.c., welded to frame returns. Furnish all frames c/w steel tube transoms and mullions. Extend steel tube transom and mullion minimum 10 mm into jamb frames either side and continuously weld full circumference of tube to inside of frames. Place security bar in steel tube transom tight to inside face of tube and weld to each end of steel tube. Shop prime all frames, loose stops and security bars after fabrication and prior to shipping. Main steel unexposed surfaces shall be painted with one coat to bituminous paint. Steel flat bars, brackets, angle etc., shall be shop or field painted (after welding) with two (2)coats of bituminous paint. Apply continuous rigid insulation strips to throat side of frames, in locations detailed to allow glazing screw penetration in concrete filled jamb and head sections. Apply insulation strips with continuous bed of waterproof permanent adhesive compatible with substrate and insulation material. Apply injectable foam into all mullion sections to prevent seepage of concrete into mullions during the cast in place process and to allow for glazing screw penetration. Window Type W1 & W1A - Operable Vents (Ventrow) are to be supplied and installed on site by Section 08 51 13. Prior to site installation, Section 08 51 13 to supply Ventrow unit to
.3
.4
.5
.6 .7
.8
.9
Section 11 19 15 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.6 FABRICATION FOR WINDOW TYPE W1A AND W2 (Cont'd)
.9
(Cont'd) Section 08 50 50 subcontractor for sub-assembly. Section 08 50 50 subcontractor is responsible for the supply and installation of the stainless steel perforated plate to the Ventrow units. Fabricate perforated plate from 3 mm thick Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish. Perforated plate to be brake formed to suit Ventrow dimensions and to accommodate actuator clearances. Perforated plate must be notched to accept the Ventrow retainer clips and punched to accept the actuator knob. Attach stainless steel plate to Ventrow with 5/32" dia. stainless steel rivets at 150 mm on center around the perimeter of the stainless steel plate as detailed. Refer to Section 08 51 13 for Operable Vent (Ventrow) details. Section 08 50 50 subcontractor is responsible for the supply and installation of the detention grade aluminum knob and stainless steel actuator required to operate the Ventrow unit. Knob actuator to be solid aluminum, machined to suit the actuator and the stainless steel perforated plate. The actuator mechanism must be manufactured from high grade stainless steel to prevent rust. Actuator operation must be continuous turn, bi-directional and must rotate freely in a clockwise and counter clockwise direction without dead stop at any point in the travel. Rotating the knob 180 degrees in either direction must open or close the vent depending on the orientation of the vent at the beginning of the cycle. The knob and actuator must be securely mounted to the stainless steel perforated plate and must be geometrically located to allow free and continuous operation of the Ventrow unit.
.10
.11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Co-ordinate and co-operate with all forces doing work in connection with work of this Section to permit proper execution of the work, including the work described in Sections 03 45 00, 08 51 13 & 08 80 50. Provide instructions and information in writing outlining the requirements necessary for surfaces, materials or inserts prepared and /or supplied which affect this work.
.2
Section 11 19 15 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.1 CO-ORDINATION (Cont'd)
.3
Where anchors, inserts, reglets and accessories affect this work provide assistance and install such items where necessary.
3.2 SITE MEASUREMENTS
.1
Ensure that close liaison with pre-cast concrete manufacturer; cast in place concrete contractor, masonry contractor are maintained to ensure that close tolerances are adhered to between the window units and the window openings.
3.3 INSTALLATION BY OTHERS (REFER TO SECTION 08 51 13 AND 08 80 50
.1
Install detention exterior windows complete with all components, plumb square and true to line, free from warp, twist or superimposed loads, installed to achieve a weather tight installation, and to maintain air seals. Installation of aluminum window components by Section 08 51 13. Installation of glazing components by Section 08 80 50.
.2 .3
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Remove all excess and/ or foreign matter from finished surfaces. Leave work in a first class new condition free from all contamination, scratches, stains, marks and excess caulking. The contractor is to receive from the window manufacturer printed instructions designating the proper methods and material to be used in cleaning the work of this Section.
END
ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
Section 12 48 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
.1
Comply with requirements of CAN/CSA-B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment. Design load: 9.5 kPa.
.2
1.2 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS
.1
Submit product data sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings of each item specified, in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.4
SAMPLES
.1
Submit 100 x 100 mm sample of each type of entrance grill.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
.1 .2
Depth of the grille: minimum 38 mm (1-1/2"), and as indicated on drawings. Frame: extruded aluminium to Aluminium Association Designation AA 6063-T6, clear anodized finish. Provide anchors for building-in of perimeter frame into concrete slab. Tread rails: extruded aluminium to Aluminium Association Designation AA 6063-T6, mill finish. Support rails: extruded aluminium to Aluminium Association Designation AA 6063-T6, mill finish, complete with continuous flexible vinyl cushions. Tread: extruded aluminium with corrugated vinyl insert, colour as selected by Departmental Representative from manufacturer's standard range. Fasteners: stainless steel, anti-vibrational.
.3 .4
.5
.6
Section 12 48 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.1 MATERIAL (Cont'd)
.7
Primer and isolation coating: bituminous paint, acid and alkali resistant to CAN/CGSB-1.105-M91, Type 1 or 2, Ecologo certified.
Sealing compound: high solids, polymer modified sealing compound, asphalt type to CAN/CGSB-37.29-M89, Ecologo certified, recommended as caulking or bedding compound.
.8
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate work square, true, straight, level and free of distortion with joints closely fitted and properly secured. Provide adequate reinforcing and anchorage. Fabricate mats and frames in largest practical sized units to suit conditions. Where mat area exceeds manufacturer's recommeded maximum mat size, provide sectioning as determined by manufacturer. Isolate dissimilar metals and metal to concrete or masonry with 2 coats of bituminous paint. Ream drill holes and leave exposed edges and surfaces clean and smooth. Include lead anchors and stainless steel fastenings necessary to anchor work. Provide frame around entire perimeter and in locations indicated.
.2 .3
.4 .5 .6 .7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Supply components and instructions for recesses and items built into work of other sections. Vacuum clean floor recesses prior to installing entrance mats. Inspect surface over which work is to be installed for irregularities detrimental to the application and performance of the work. Apply primer or isolation coating to aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry. Mitre aluminum mat frame corners.
.4 .5
Section 12 48 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
.6 .7 .8
Set mat frames in continuous bead of sealing compound.

Install matting with slip resistant rib surface perpendicular to traffic flow. Install items plumb, straight and level to a tolerance of 1:500 in accordance with manufacturers written instuctions.
END
Public Works and Government Services Canada Architectural and Engineering Services Ontario Region
Kingston, Ontario Correctional Service Canada COLLINS BAY INSTITUTION 1455 Bath Road
COLLINS BAY INSTITUTION BUILDING CBB11

PWGSC Project No. R.043791.001
SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 2 of 2 MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, CIVIL
Issued for Bid 2011-05-25
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 1 2011-05-25
Section VOLUME 1 OF 2
Title
Pages
Division 01 - General Requirements 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES 01 29 83 PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 32 16.06 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM) 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA SECURITY REQUIREMENT 01 35 29.06 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 42 13 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 52 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01 56 00 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 01 61 00 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 71 00 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 74 11 CLEANING 01 74 20 CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 91 31 COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN 01 91 51 BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL (BMM) Division 02 - Existing Conditions 02 41 23 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 02 81 01 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Division 03 - Concrete 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 30 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Division 04 - Masonry 04 05 10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MASONRY 04 05 12 MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 19 MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCING 04 05 23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY Division 05 - Metals 05 12 23 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS
4 1 2 2 3 14 7 11 6 6 3 11 4 4 5 3 6 3 3 3 6 2 8 3 4 33 5 8 6 5 7 18 9 12 4 5 4 11 7
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 2 2011-05-25
05 05 05 05
21 31 50 51
00 00 01 29
STEEL STEEL METAL METAL
JOIST FRAMING DECKING FABRICATIONS STAIRS AND LADDERS
6 5 18 6 4 11 6 4 6 10 4 19 11 6 6 7 12 8 12 12 5 9 9 6 7 3 4 7 12 4 18 18 5 6 8
Division 06 - Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 12 CARPENTRY 06 40 01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 21 13 BOARD INSULATION 07 21 16 BLANKET INSULATION 07 21 29.03 SPRAYED INSULATION - POLYURETHANE FOAM 07 27 00.01 AIR BARRIERS 07 46 13 PREFORMED METAL SIDING 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 72 69 ROOF ANCHORS AND SAFETY RESTRAINTS 07 84 00 FIRE STOPPING 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Division 08 - Openings 08 11 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 50 50 WINDOWS 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 70 05 CABINET AND MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE 08 71 11 FINISH HARDWARE 08 80 50 GLAZING Division 09 - Finishes 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 53 00.01 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION 09 65 00 RESILIENT TILE AND SHEET FLOORING 09 68 01 CARPETING AND CARPET TILE 09 80 00 ACOUSTIC TREATMENT 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 96 46 INTUMESCENT PAINTING 09 96 57 EPOXY COATING FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS 09 96 58 EPOXY FLOORING
Division 10 - Specialties 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES CHALKBOARDS, WHITEBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS 5 10 28 00 MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES & RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 10 Division 11 - Equipment 11 19 12 DETENTION HARDWARE 11 19 13 DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES 11 19 14 DETENTION GRILLE DOORS AND BARRIERS 49 28 10
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 3 2011-05-25
11 19 15 VOLUME 2 OF 2
11
Division 21 - Fire Suppression 21 12 01 STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY 21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Division 22 - Plumbing 22 10 10 PLUMBING PUMPS 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 13 17 DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - CAST IRON AND COPPER 22 30 05 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 42 01 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 22 42 03 COMMERCIAL WASHROOM FIXTURES 22 42 16 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS 22 42 20 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS AND BATHTUBS 22 47 00 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
11 16 4 9 4 5 10 6 4 4 4
Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 03 01 USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DURING CONSTRUCTION 2 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS - MECHANICAL 30 23 05 05 INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK 6 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 4 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 3 23 05 17 PIPE WELDING 5 23 05 19.01 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS 3 23 05 23.01 VALVES - BRONZE 5 23 05 23.02 VALVES - CAST IRON 5 23 05 23.05 BUTTERFLY VALVES 4 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 9 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 6 23 05 53.01 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 8 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 9 23 05 94 PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS 4 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 7 23 07 15 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING 10 23 08 02 CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS 4 23 11 23 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 5 23 21 13.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: COPPER 7 23 21 13.02 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: STEEL 5 23 21 14 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 5 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS 5 23 23 00 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT 5 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS 6 23 31 13.01 METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA 8 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 5 23 33 14 DAMPERS - BALANCING 2 23 33 15 DAMPERS - OPERATING 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 4 2011-05-25
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
33 33 33 34 36 37 37 41 51 52 72 73 81 82 83 84
16 46 53 00 00 13 20 00 00 00 00 10 23 39 00 13
DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE FLEXIBLE DUCTS ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING HVAC FANS AIR TERMINAL UNITS DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES LOUVRES, INTAKES AND VENTS PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS HEATING BOILERS AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT AIR HANDLING - BUILT-UP COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT HEATERS RADIANT HEATING UNITS HUIMIDIFIERS
4 4 3 5 3 4 3 4 3 6 3 13 7 4 5 3 5 3 7 3 4 3 5 18 3 8 16 12 4 2 5 4 3 2 3 5 3 4 2 5 2 2 4 4 8 4 1 4
Division 25 - Integrated Automation 25 01 11 EMCS START-UP, VERIFICATION AND COMMISSIONING 25 01 12 EMCS TRAINING 25 05 01 EMCS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 25 05 02 EMCS SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS 25 05 03 EMCS PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 25 05 54 EMCS IDENTIFICATION 25 08 20 EMCS WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE 25 10 00 EMCS EQUIPMENT/ PRODUCTS 25 10 01 EMCS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) 25 30 02 EMCS FIELD INSTALLATION 25 90 01 EMCS SITE REQUIREMENTS, APPLICATIONS AND SYSTEMS SEQUENCES OF OPERATION Division 26 - Electrical 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 03 ARC FLASH ELECTRICAL COORDINATION AND STUDIES 26 05 20 WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0 - 1000 V 26 05 21 WIRES AND CABLES (0 - 1000 V) 26 05 28 GROUNDING - SECONDARY 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 31 SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS 26 05 32 OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 34 CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43.01 INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS 26 05 80 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS 26 05 81 MOTORS: 0.746 TO 149 KW 26 09 23.01 METERING AND SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS 26 09 23.02 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - PHOTOELECTRIC 26 09 23.03 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - INCANDESCENT DIMMING 26 09 23.04 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - FLUORESCENT DIMMING 26 09 24 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT - LOW VOLTAGE 26 12 16.01 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY 26 24 05 SPRINKLER PROOF EQUIPMENT 26 24 16.01 PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 5 2011-05-25
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
24 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 33 43 50 52 53
19 26 30 16.02 20 23 01 03 10 23 53 13 00 00 00
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES WIRING DEVICES SNOW MELTING CABLE MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS - CLASS 'A' DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON-FUSED CONTACTORS CONTROL DEVICES MOTOR STARTERS TO 600 V ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS STATIC TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS LIGHTING EMERGENCY LIGHTING EXIT LIGHTS
6 4 3 2 2 2 2 4 5 10 24 10 8 3 4 4 2 2 7 2 4 9 7 5 2 21 9 19 23 20 20
Division 27 - Communications 27 05 14 COMMUNICATION CABLES INSIDE BUILDINGS 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 10 05 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 13 13 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 27 41 16 TELEVISION SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 27 51 23 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security 28 08 01 COMMISSIONING FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 28 13 01 PATHWAYS FOR GUARD TOUR SYSTEM 28 13 27 SECURITY DOOR SUPERVISION 28 13 27 FIGURES 1 TO 9 28 13 29 EMERGENCY INMATE CELL CALL 28 16 02 PORTABLE PERSONAL ALARM SYSTEM 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS DETAIL E101 E102 E103 E104 E105 E106 E107 E108 E109 E110 E111 E112 E113 E114 E115 E116 E117 SHEETS TYPE 'AA' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'BB' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'BA' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'CC' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'DD' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'EE' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'F4' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'GG' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'H4' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'H8' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'JJ' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'KK' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'LL' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'C' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE '1' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE '2' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE '3' LIGHTING FIXTURE
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section 00 01 11 Page 6 2011-05-25
E118 E119 E120 E121 E122 E123 E124
TYPE '4' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE '5' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'A' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'R' LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE 'X' LIGHTING FIXTURE CELL CALL/CANCELLATION DETAIL SMOKE DETECTOR GUARD 3 10 4 2 2 4 10 6 6 4 4 13 5 4
Division 31 - Earthwork 31 22 13 ROUGH BOARDING 31 23 10 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 63 23 BORED CONCRETE PILES Division 32 - Exterior Improvements 32 11 20 GRANULAR BASE 32 11 24 GRANULAR SUB-BASE 32 12 17 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 32 31 14 STEEL CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 32 91 19.13 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING 32 92 19.16 HYDRAULIC SEEDING Division 33 - Utilities 33 01 30 MAINTENANCE HOLE REPAIRS 33 05 14 MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS 33 11 17 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 34 02 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCEMAINS 33 44 01 STORM SEWERS
END
STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY
Section 21 12 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 10-2010, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. .2 NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .3 NFPA 14-2010, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. National Building Code of Canada 2010. National Fire Code of Canada 2010.
.2 .3
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Submit complete plans to Authority of Jurisdiction for review and approval before commencement of work. .3 Indicate grooved joint couplings and fittings on drawings. Samples: .1 Submit the following samples: .1 Firehose nozzles. .2 Section of hose. Test reports: .1 Submit certified test reports for standpipe and hose assembly from approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Manufacturers' Instructions: .1 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 21 12 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.7
Field Quality Control Submittals: Manufacturer's Field Reports: .1 manufacturer's field reports specified.
.1
Provide maintenance data for standpipe and hose system for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1
Qualifications: .1 Installer: company or person specializing in standpipe and hose assembly. Supply grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, grooving tools and specialties from a single manufacturer. Use date stamped castings for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, for quality assurance and traceability.
.2
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: .1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials indoors in dry location. .2 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
.4
Section 21 12 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Design system to NFPA 14 and following parameters: .1 Combined with sprinkler systems: hydraulic. .2 The water supply shall be sufficient to provide a flow, measured at each of the two hydraulically most remote 38 mm diameter hose connections; .1 of not less than 380 L/min., .2 at pressure of not less than 450 kPa, and .3 of not less than 190 L/min. from each of the two outlets simultaneously. .3 The water supply shall be sufficient to provide a flow, measured at each of the two hydraulically most remote 65 mm diameter hose connections: .1 of not less than 1,890 L/min., .2 of a pressure of not less than 450 kPa, and .3 of not less than 945 L/min from each of the two outlets simultaneously.
2.2 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES
.1
Pipe: .1 Ferrous: to NFPA 14. .2 Minimum Sch. 40 for screwed piping and Sch. 10 for roll grooved piping. Fittings and joints to NFPA 14: .1 Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved. .1 Grooved joints designed with two ductile iron housing segments, pressure responsive gasket, and zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for rigidity and visual pad-to-pad offset contact. Valves: .1 ULC listed for fire protection service. .2 Up to NPS 2: bronze, screwed ends, grooved, OS&Y gate. .3 NPS 2 1/2 and over: cast iron, flanged or roll grooved ends, indicating butterfly valve. .4 Check valves: spring actuated swing type, composition disc or seal.
.2
.3
Section 21 12 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.2 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES (Cont'd)
.4 .5 .6 .7
Pipe hangers: ULC listed for fire protection services. .1

Drain valve: NPS 1, complete with hose end, cap and chain. Inspector's test connections: NPS 1 gate valve. Combined sprinkler and standpipe system shall be rated at 1034 kPa.
2.3 AUXILLIARY SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
.1 .2
General: to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service. Valves: .1 Mechanically attached to valve body, with N.O. and N.C. contacts and supervisory capability. .2 Plug in type are NOT acceptable.
2.4 SECURE CABINETS
.1
To NFPA 14 and ULC listed: Fully recessed type with trim for mounting in finished wall, constructed of 4.8 mm thick steel, 180 opening door of 4.8 mm thick steel with hinge same side as water supply. Tub to be one-piece welded construction c/w mounting holes for attachment to wall. Cabinets to maintain fire resistive rating of construction in which they occur. Cabinet door: metal steel panel without glass. Hinges - heavy duty full length fully concealed piano hinge with 180 swing welded to door and tub. 38 mm x 38 mm x 5 mm steel hasp for high security padlock. Tub shall be large enough to accommodate NPS 1-1/4 angle valve, hose reel, fire hose nozzle and spanner, fire extinguisher, NPS 2-1/2 fire department valve, and NPS 1-1/2 valve. Cabinets to have 8 anchor points. Maximum fire hose cabinet size shall be as follows: 864 mm wide x 864 mm high x 381 mm deep maximum.
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6
.7 .8
Section 21 12 01 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.4 SECURE CABINETS (Cont'd)
.9
Swinging hose reel: Non-automatic hose reel suitable for hard .1 rubber hose, 180 swing, designed so hose can be removed from reel when water is flowing.
Fire hose and nozzle: .1 Hose: ULC listed, 25 mm nominal diameter, 30 m long hard rubber hose, non-collapsible type. .2 Nozzle: ULC listed, 25 mm nominal diameter, forged brass adjustable combination fog-straight stream with shut-off.
.10
2.5 STANDARD FIRE HOSE CABINETS
.1 .2
Provide and install fire hose cabinets where shown to be installed in non-inmate areas. Cabinets shall be recessed or surface mount style with 1.2 mm thick baked enamel protected steel tubs. 1.9 mm thick baked enamel corrosion protected steel door and frame with full length, semi-concealed piano hinge and full panel of 6 mm polished wired glass. Cabinet shall be minimum 750 mm x 750 mm x 150 mm and have capacity for 30 m racked hose, hose valve and 4.5 kg fire extinguisher. Provide 30 m of ULC-listed 38 mm diameter synthetic polyester filament jacketed, polyurethane lined hose with hose ends, rack, water stop and angle valve with hydrovent mounted in cabinet. Provide 38 mm diameter ULC-listed forged brass combination fog nozzle.
.3
.4
2.6 FIRE HOSE ISOLATION SOLENOID VALVE
.1
Provide and install at locations shown, solenoid isolation valve arrangement to shut off water flow to selected fire hose installation. Solenoid isolation valve arrangement shall be acceptable to Federal Fire Commissioner. Submit details of products and system to Federal Fire Commissioner for approval prior to ordering components. Solenoid isolation valve arrangement operation shall be coordinated with BSCS contractor and EMCS contractor prior to selection to ensure compatibility with systems.
.2
.3
Section 21 12 01 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.6 FIRE HOSE ISOLATION SOLENOID VALVE (Cont'd)
.4
Valve shall be single chamber, hydraulically operated globe valve of single seated construction with replaceable stainless steel seat ring and reversible, resilient inner valve disc with fully supported diaphragm operator. The main valve shall be N.O. (normally open), operated by a solenoid pilot valve rated for 24 VAC to close main valve when solenoid is energized. Valve shall have manual override.
2.7
ANGLE VALVES
.1
ULC listed for fire service. NPS 1-1/2 cast or forged brass complete with hand wheel, cap and chain, open or drip connections, or hydrolator valve. Cap to be part of ULC listing for valve. Where water pressure exceeds 690 kPa, provide ULC listed pressure reducing device. Provide adapter for connection of 25 mm hose.
.2
2.8 FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE
.1
ULC listed, NPS 2-1/2 forged or cast brass angle valve: with thread compatible with local fire department, complete with handwheel, cap and chain. Cap to be part of ULC listing for valve.
2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
.1
As specified in Section 21 13 13.
2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
90 mm diameter, to Section 23 05 19.01.
2.11
FINISHES
.1 .2
In finished areas, chrome plate valves, nozzles, fittings. Cabinets. .1 Tub: prime coated. .2 Door and frame: prime coated.
Section 21 12 01 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.12 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
.1 .2
Extinguishers shall be ULC listed and labelled. Water pressurized, stored pressure type, squeeze-grip operated of stainless steel construction, ULC labeled, 9.1 L size. Provide one extinguisher in each secure fire hose cabinet. Multi-purpose stored pressure rechargeable dry chemical ABC powder type with heavy duty steel cylinder, positive on/off operation, waterproof stainless steel gauge, hose and shut-off nozzle, ULC labeled for A, B and C class protection. Size 4.5 kg. Provide one extinguisher in each standard fire hose cabinet and where indicated. Aluminum cylinder stored pressure rechargeable carbon dioxide type with hose and shut-off nozzle, ULC labelled for B and C class protection. Sizes as indicated. Provide where indicated. Provide all wall brackets and mount extinguishers 1 to 1.5 m above floor. Identify extinguishers in accordance with recommendations of NFPA 10 and CAN/ULC-S508-02. Attach bilingual tag or label to extinguishers, indicating month and year of installation. Provide space for service dates.
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7
2.13 EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
.1
Flush type or semi-recessed type as indicated, constructed of 1.6 mm thick steel, 180 opening door of 2.5 mm thick steel with latching device. Cabinet to maintain fire resistive rating of construction in which they occur. Cabinet door: with metal panel. Finish: .1 Tub: prime coated. .2 Door and frame: prime coated.
.2 .3 .4
2.14 EXTINGUISHER BRACKETS
.1
Medium duty aviation bracket with strap and clamp.
Section 21 12 01 Page 8 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 14. Install pipework in accordance with Section 23 05 05, supplemented as specified. Run inspectors test connections to sight glass. Install drain pipes and valves to drain parts of systems and so arranged that any one standpipe riser can be drained without shutting down any other parts of systems. Install 90 mm diameter pressure gauge in accordance with Section 23 05 19.01 at top of risers and in accordance with NFPA 14. The source of the water supply shall be reliable and capable of providing the required supply for not less than 30 minutes. Water supply for standpipe system: .1 Class I Systems: .1 Receive water supply sufficient to provide 1892.50 lpm and 946.25 lpm for each additional standpipe. .2 Total supply not to exceed 9462.5 lpm. .3 Supply system: capable of maintaining residual pressure of 690 kPa at each topmost outlet with 1892.50 lpm flowing from most remote standpipe and 946.25 lpm flowing from each additional standpipe up to maximum of 9462.5 lpm. .2 Class II Systems: .1 Receive water supply sufficient to provide minimum of 378.50 lpm. .2 System: capable of maintaining residual pressure of 414 kPa at topmost outlet with 378.50 lpm flowing. .3 Class III Systems: .1 Receive water supply from source sufficient to provide 1892.50 lpm for single standpipe and 946.25 lpm for each additional standpipe. .2 Total supply not to exceed 9462.5 lpm. .3 System: capable of maintaining residual pressure of 690 kPa at each top most outlet with 1892.50 lpm flowing from most remote standpipe and 946.25 lpm
.5
.6
.7
Section 21 12 01 Page 9 2011-05-25
.7
Water supply for standpipe system:(Cont'd) .3 Class III Systems:(Cont'd) flowing from each additional standpipe up to maximum of 9462.5 lpm flowing.
3.2
SITE TEST
.1
General: .1 In accordance with NFPA 14, supplemented as specified. .2 In accordance with Section 01 91 00. Testing witnessed by Federal Fire Commissioner and Departmental Representative. Disposal of water used in flushing and testing: .1 Discuss appropriate measures with Departmental Representative. Timing: .1 Connect fire hoses when flushing out and pressure tests have been completed. .2 Charge system with water when there is no possibility of freeze-up. .3 Perform tests after pressure booster pumps have been tested. Co-ordination: .1 Co-ordinate tests with performance verification of: .1 Standpipe and hose systems specified in this section. .2 Fire alarm systems specified Section 28 31 00. .3 Wet pipe sprinkler systems specified Section 21 13 13. Procedures: .1 Verify that system is complete prior to start-up and testing procedures. .2 Verify that ULC labels are visible. .3 Fill system with water for pressure. Record water supply pressure. .4 Pressure test piping system as required by authority having jurisdiction. .5 Start up fire pumps and jockey pumps. .6 Verify flow switches are operational. .7 Verify valves in system are visible and monitored. .8 Flushing: fill with water, let stand at operating pressure for 1 week. Drain risers separately, then drain main.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
Section 21 12 01 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.2 SITE TEST (Cont'd)
.6
Procedures:(Cont'd) .9 Flush buried mains and lead-in connections before making connection to indoor sprinkler system. .10 Perform flow tests as required by: .1 Authority having jurisdiction. .2 Applicable NFPA standards such as 13, 14, 20, 1273. .3 National Building Code. .4 National Fire Code. .11 Record incoming pressure to building for 10 days prior to activating system. .12 Adjust pressure switches. Sundry checks: .1 Verify that properly sized pressure restricting discs are installed where required. Coverage Verification: .1 Open each cabinet and pull hose to extremes of coverage. Verify that all areas within coverage zone can be reached without undue stress on hose. Schedule testing to be performed with Federal Fire Commissioner. Solenoid Operation Test: .1 Operate each fire hose isolation solenoid valve to verify its correct function. .2 Test shall be performed after solenoid is connected to final operation screen and shall be performed with full water pressure. Take appropriate measures to control discharge of water. Schedule testing to be performed with Federal Fire Commissioner. .3 Submit written verification report once complete. Submit written verification report once complete. Identification: .1 Verify devices are properly labelled, identifying area served, etc. Report: .1 Refer to Section 01 91 00, reports supplemented as specified. .2 In addition to reports required by NFPA 14, include the following: .1 Copy of schematic and valve schedule. Posted Instructions: .1 Prepare schematic, mount behind glare-free glass and install where directed.
.7
.8
.9
.10 .11
.12
.13
Section 21 12 01 Page 11 2011-05-25
3.2 SITE TEST (Cont'd)
.13
Posted Instructions:(Cont'd) .2 Prepare valve schedule, mount behind glare-free glass and install where directed. Training: .1 Refer to Section 01 91 00. Documentation: .1 Provide written certification to Departmental Representative that system was installed, flushed and tested in accordance with appropriate codes, approved plans and calculations. .2 Certificate to include: .1 Contractors name. .2 Contractors address. .3 Contractors license number. .4 List of approved materials and devices installed. .5 Description of system test conducted. .6 Dates of flushing and testing. .7 Certification that connections welding conform to acceptable standards. .8 Certification that system is complete and in service. .9 Approved signage has been provided and attached as appropriate. .10 Hose threads of system and test connections match those of responding fire department.
.14 .15
3.3
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Section 21 13 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .2 NFPA 14-2010, Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems. .3 NFPA 20-2010, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection. .4 NFPA 24-2010, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. .5 NFPA 25-2011, Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S543-09-AM1, Standard for Internal Lug Quick-Connect Couplings for Fire Hose, Includes Amendment 1.
.2
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Submit complete plans to Authority of Jurisdiction for review and approval before commencement of work. .3 Indicate: .1 Materials. .2 Finishes. .3 Method of anchorage .4 Number of anchors. .5 Supports. .6 Reinforcement. .7 Assembly details. .8 Accessories. Samples:
.3
.4
Section 21 13 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
Samples:(Cont'd) Submit samples of following: .1 Each type of sprinkler head. .1 .2 Signs. Manufacturers' Instructions: .1 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.
.5
.1
Provide operation, maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 in accordance with NFPA 20. Manufacturer's Catalog Data, including specific model, type, and size for: .1 Pipe and fittings. .2 Alarm valves. .3 Valves, including gate, check, and globe. .4 Water motor alarms. .5 Sprinkler heads. .6 Pipe hangers and supports. .7 Pressure or flow switch. .8 Fire department connections. .9 Excess pressure pump. .10 Mechanical couplings. Drawings: .1 Sprinkler heads and piping system layout. .1 Prepare 760 mm by 1050 mm detail working drawings of system layout in accordance with NFPA 13, "Working Drawings (Plans)". .2 Show data essential for proper installation of each system. .3 Show details, plan view, elevations, and sections of systems supply and piping. .4 Show piping schematic of systems supply, devices, valves, pipe, and fittings. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams. .2 Electrical wiring diagrams. Design Data: .1 Calculations of sprinkler system design. .2 Indicate type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for not less than 18 months. Field Test Reports: .1 Preliminary tests on piping system.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 21 13 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
.6
Records: As-built drawings of each system. .1 .1 After completion, but before final acceptance, submit complete set of as-built drawings of each system for record purposes. .2 Submit 760 mm by 1050 mm drawings on reproducible Mylar film with title block similar to full size contract drawings.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: .1 Provide detailed hydraulic calculations including summary sheet, and Contractors Material and Test Certificate for aboveground and underground piping and other documentation for incorporation into manual in accordance with NFPA 13.
.7
.1
Qualifications: .1 Installer: company or person specializing in wet sprinkler systems. Supply grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, grooving tools and specialties from a single manufacturer. Use date stamped castings for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, for quality assurance and traceability.
.2
.1
Extra Materials: .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .2 Provide spare sprinklers and tools in accordance with NFPA 13. For secure area sprinkler heads only: increase quantities of spare heads to minimum of 30 of each type.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: .1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials indoors in dry location. .2 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature
.2
.3
Section 21 13 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
.3
Storage and Protection:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Design system in accordance with NFPA 13 using following parameters: .1 All areas shall be designed for hazard coverage indicated with design area and associated densities. .2 Pipe size and layout: .1 Hydraulic design. .2 Sprinkler head layout to NFPA 13 or as directed by authorities having jurisdiction and with sprinkler head centred in at least one (1) direction of ceiling tile (where applicable). .3 The hydraulic design shall be sized to accommodate the higher and most remote zones. .4 Allow for additional sprinkler heads and pipe distribution to suit all existing interferences. .5 When sidewall sprinklers listed for light hazard occupancies are used, pipe sizing and spacing shall be according to ordinary hazard rules. .3 Water supply: .1 Base design on NFPA 13 and obtain water supply for appropriate fire hydrants from municipality. Conduct flow and pressure test of water supply in vicinity of project to verify municipal data and to obtain criteria for basis of design. Adjust water test values to allow for peak period water usage. Hydraulic calculations shall commence at water main connection at source. Provide as part of hydraulic calculation submission, fire hydrant flow test data and deduct 10% as safety factor based on available pressure value. .4 Zoning: .1 System zoning as indicated.
Section 21 13 13 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .4 Zoning:(Cont'd) .2 Provide supervised isolating valve and flow switch for each zone and as indicated. .5 Minimum operating pressure for institutional horizontal sidewall sprinkler-heads shall be 207 kPa to provide maximum horizontal spray discharge. Include with each system materials, accessories, and equipment inside and outside building to provide each system complete and ready for use. Design and provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ducts, and other construction and equipment in accordance with detailed shop drawings. Locate sprinkler heads in consistent pattern with ceiling grid, lights, and air supply diffusers. Devices and equipment for fire protection service: ULC approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems. Spacing of sprinkler heads not to exceed that permitted by NFPA 13 for hazard occupancies of areas served.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
.1
Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for connections. .1 Make changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing pipe fittings; bushings will not be permitted. Perform welding in shop; field welding will be permitted. Conceal piping in areas with suspended ceiling.
.2 .3
2.3 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES
.1
Pipe: .1 Ferrous: to NFPA 13. All pipes shall be Schedule 40 wall thickness. Fittings and joints to NFPA 13: .1 Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved. .1 Grooved joints designed with two ductile iron housing segments, pressure
.2
Section 21 13 13 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.3 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES (Cont'd)
.2
Fittings and joints to NFPA 13:(Cont'd) .1 Ferrous:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) responsive gasket, and zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for rigidity and visual pad-to-pad offset contact. .2 Provide welded or threaded fittings into which sprinkler heads, sprinkler head riser nipples, or drop nipples are threaded. .3 Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings and fittings which use steel gripping devices to bite into pipe when pressure is applied will not be permitted. .4 Rubber gasketted grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings are permitted in pipe sizes 32 mm and larger. .5 Fittings: ULC approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems. .6 Ensure fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets are supplied by same manufacturer. .7 Side outlet tees using rubber gasketted fittings are not permitted. Valves: .1 ULC listed for fire protection service. .2 Gate valves: open by counterclockwise rotation. .3 Up to NPS 2: bronze, screwed ends, OS&Y rising stem gate valve. .4 NPS 2 1/2 and over: cast iron, flanged or roll grooved ends, OS&Y rising stem gate or indicating butterfly type. .5 Check valves: swing type as above. .6 Ball drip check valve. Pipe hangers: .1 ULC listed for fire protection services. Sprinkler and standpipe system shall be rated at 1380 kPa.
.3
.4 .5
2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS
.1 .2 .3
Provide sprinklers of current manufacture as indicated in this section. Sprinklers shall be ULC listed and labelled. Provide minimum 13 mm nominal diameter discharge orifice.
Section 21 13 13 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.5 UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD
.1
Upright bronze, for hazard coverage as indicated, 5.6 K factor, corrosion resistant coating, chrome finish, fusible link type; 68C rated, 13 mm orifice.
2.6 CONCEALED SPRINKLER HEAD
.1
Fully concealed pendant, quick response for hazard coverage as indicated, 5.6 K factor, enclosed escutcheon, separate two-piece design of mounting cup and coverplate, internal threaded closure, and 68C rated, 13 mm adjustment, chrome finish, glass bulb type and polished chrome finish cover.
2.7 HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL INSTITUTIONAL SPRINKLER HEAD
.1
13 mm dia. orifice automatic quick response sprinkler with deflector and conical escutcheon. Flush style arrangements. The institutional sprinkler head shall be designed to breakaway under an applied load of not more than 50 kg. The sprinkler shall utilize a meltaway fusible alloy solder principle of operation. The sprinkler and conical escutcheon shall be chrome plated. The conical escutcheon assembly shall be firmly attached to the sprinkler body with tamper resistant fasteners. Sprinkler shall be complete with heavy duty retaining flange which connects to sprinkler pipe and prevents sprinkler movement.
.2
.3 .4
.5
2.8 PENDANT INSTITUTIONAL SPRINKLER HEAD
.1 .2
13 mm dia. orifice automatic sprinkler with conical escutcheon. Flush style arrangement. The institutional sprinkler head shall be designed to breakaway under an applied load of not more than 50 kg. The sprinkler shall utilize a meltaway fusible alloy solder principle of operation. The sprinkler and conical escutcheon shall be chrome plated. The conical escutcheon assembly shall be firmly attached to the sprinkler body with tamper resistant fasteners.
.3 .4
Section 21 13 13 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.8 PENDANT INSTITUTIONAL SPRINKLER HEAD (Cont'd)
.5
Sprinklers shall be complete with heavy duty retaining flange which connects to sprinkler pipe and prevents sprinkler movement.
2.9 SPRINKLER GUARDS
.1 .2
For protection of sprinkler heads. Rugged welded wire and sheet steel construction capable of withstanding heavy impacts.
2.10 ALARM CHECK VALVE
.1 .2
Alarm check valve to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service. Provide alarm check valve system, c/w check valve, cut groove inlet & outlet, drain, alarm line strainer, pressure switch, two (2) water gauges, water motor alarm, wet pipe alarm valve, main drain valve, alarm test valve, excess pressure pump (as specified this Section) and main drain. Provide valve complete with internal components that are replaceable without removing the valve from the installed position.
.3
2.11 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
.1 .2 .3
General: to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service. Die-cast enclosure over, die-cast base, all part corrosion resistant finish, paint finish. Valves: .1 Mechanically attached to valve body, with normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability. .2 Cover tamper activated by cover removal. .3 Two sets of SPDT contacts, 15.0 Amps @ 125/250 VAC, 2.5 Amps @ 30 VDC resistive. .4 Plug-in type are NOT acceptable. Flow switch type: .1 With normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability. .2 0.63 l/s Minimum flow rate. .3 Cover tamper activated by cover removal. .4 Two sets of SPDT contacts, 15.0 Amps @ 125/250 VAC, 2.0 Amps @ 30 VDC resistive.
.4
Section 21 13 13 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.11 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES (Cont'd)
.4
Flow switch type:(Cont'd) Mechanical retard, adjustable from 10-90 .5 seconds. Zero time delay where indicated. Pressure alarm switch: .1 With normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability. .2 On-off differential 6.9 kPa minimum. .3 Visible pressure indication: 206-1338 kPa. .4 Adjustable range: 172-1207 kPa. .5 Maximum operating pressure: 1207 kPa. .6 SPDT for use with normally open or normally closed circuits, 250 VAC 15 A HP, 125 VAC 15 A 1/8 HP, 250 VDC 0.2 A, 125 VAC 0.4 A, 30 VDC 2.0 A. .7 Die-cast aluminum cover with enamel red paint finish, zinc plated steel base.
.5
2.12 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Provide connections approximately 1.5 m above finish grade, location as indicated. To NFPA 13, NFPA 14 and CAN/ULC-S543 listed, Siamese type. Polished chrome plated recessed type c/w threaded metal caps and chains. Thread specifications: compatible with local fire department. Install a 90-degree elbow with drain connection at the low-point near each fire department connection to allow for system drainage to prevent freezing. "STANDPIPE" and "SPRINKLER" identification plate.
.6
2.13 EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP
.1
Pump: Double acting displacement type, open cylinder design, direct drive, ULC listed, complete with relief valve. Pump and motor unit: .1 Approved for automatic wet pipe fire extinguishing sprinkler systems; complete with pilot light, high pressure switch, and low pressure switch. .2 EEMAC Class B squirrel cage induction 1725 rpm, continuous duty, drip proof, ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 50 degrees C, 0.25 kW, 120/1/60.
.2
Section 21 13 13 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.13 EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP (Cont'd)
.2 .3
Pump and motor unit:(Cont'd) .3 Capacity: 7.6 L/min. Provide electrical power supply connections for pump and pilot light at supply side of building service panel. Electrical wiring by Division 28. Provide breaker with locked lever for each connection. Pump shall operate manually. Shut-off valve and strainer on pump inlet. Relief valve, check valve and shut-off valve on discharge connections.
.4 .5 .6
2.14 PRESSURE GAUGES
.1 .2
ULC listed and to Section 23 05 19.01. Maximum limit of not less than twice normal working pressure at point where installed.
2.15 BURIED WATER PIPING SYSTEM
.1
Pipe and Fittings: .1 Provide outside-coated, cement-mortar lined, ductile-iron pipe, and fittings, in accordance with NFPA 24, for piping under building and outside of building walls. .2 Anchor joints in accordance with NFPA 24. .3 Provide concrete thrust block at elbow where pipe turns up toward the floor, and restrain pipe riser with steel rods from elbow to flange above floor. .4 Minimum pipe size: 150 mm. .5 Minimum depth of cover: 1.0 metre at finish grade. .6 Piping beyond 1.5 metre outside of building walls: provided under Section 33 11 17. Ductile Iron Pipes: .1 Class 52, Cement-mortar lined. Fittings for Ductile Cast Iron Pipes: .1 Mechanical joints, or flanged c/w rubber gaskets. .2 Fittings: painted with tar epoxy resin paint. Exterior Coating for Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings in accordance with local practices and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
.2 .3
.4
Section 21 13 13 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.15 BURIED WATER PIPING SYSTEM (Cont'd)
.5
Bolt and Nut for Flange: Galvanized Hexagon Head bolts and Hexagon .1 nuts with washers, to ASTM A307-10, heavy series.
Valves: .1 In accordance with NFPA 24. .2 Gate valves: ULC listed and opened by counterclockwise rotation.
.6
2.16
PIPE SLEEVES
.1 .2 .3
Provide pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls, floors, and roofs. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, floors, and roofs. Provide 25 mm minimum clearance between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole. .1 Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. .2 Seal space at both ends of sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to firm but pliable mass. .3 In fire walls and fire floors, seal both ends of pipe sleeves or core-drilled holes with ULC listed fill, void, or cavity material. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: .1 Provide cast-iron sleeves. Sleeves in Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: .1 Schedule 40 steel pipe.
.4
.5
.6
2.17 ESCUTCHEON PLATES
.1
Provide one piece type metal plates for piping passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide polished chrome in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.
.2 .3
Section 21 13 13 Page 12 2011-05-25
2.18 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION
.1
Locate inspector's test connection at hydraulically most remote part of each system, provide test connections approximately 3 m above floor for each sprinkler system or portion of each sprinkler system equipped with alarm device. Provide test connection piping to location where discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without property damage. Provide discharge orifice of same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice.
.2
.3
2.19
SIGNS
.1 .2
Attach properly lettered and approved metal signs to each valve and alarm device to NFPA 13. Permanently fix hydraulic design data nameplates to riser of each system.
2.20 SPARE PARTS CABINET
.1
Provide metal cabinet with extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler head wrench adjacent to each alarm valve. Number and types of extra sprinkler heads as specified in NFPA 13. Turn over spare heads in excess of those stored in cabinet to Owner. Record turnover with transmittal.
.2
2.21
ANTIFREEZE
.1
Antifreeze loops to NFPA 13, locations as indicated.
2.22 PRE-ACTION SYSTEM
.1 .2
Pre-action shall be ULC Listed, single interlock electric actuated with deluge valve. Coordinate installation requirements with Electrical division for electric pre-action signal.
2.23 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
.1
Double check valve hazard. Unit shall check valves, test valves and grooved be ULC listed.
assembly for moderate have 2 internally loaded cocks, butterfly isolation end connections. Unit shall
Section 21 13 13 Page 13 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install, inspect and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 25. Test station to be piped to test drain riser. Install and test equipment to manufacturers' standards. Coordinate sprinkler head locations with reflected ceiling plans, plumbing, structural, electrical, HVAC plans and existing building systems. Coordinate sprinkler branch line runs with structural steel, plumbing, electrical and HVAC plans. .1 Drawings show where mains and branch runs may be installed. Fill voids around openings through floors and walls for fire protection piping with approved fire stopping and smoke seal. Install excess pressure pump across alarm valve in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. After completion of sprinkler system, the sprinkler contractor shall furnish a written statement or certificate as per NFPA and to the effect that the work covered by the contract has been completed in accordance with approved tender documents. Provide copies of all test certificates. Locate spare parts cabinets as per direction of Departmental Representative. Where institutional sidewall sprinkler heads are installed in masonry construction, coordinate installation with masonry trade. Sidewall heads shall be installed in steel block sections as specified in Section 04 20 00.
.5
.6
.7 .8
.9 .10
3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION
.1
Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang piping from plaster ceilings.
Section 21 13 13 Page 14 2011-05-25
3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.2
Keep interior and ends of new piping and existing piping thoroughly cleaned of water and foreign matter.
Keep piping systems clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress, securely close open ends of piping to prevent entry of water and foreign matter. Inspect piping before placing into position. Provide guards on sprinkler heads in all mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, service spaces/closets, janitor closets, recycling/garbage rooms, storage areas and below staircases in circulation areas.
.3
.4 .5
3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
.1
Coordinate with electrical Divisions 26 and 28 the electrical requirement for equipment supplied in this division. Provide fire alarm system under Section 28 31 00. Provide control and fire alarm wiring, including connections to fire alarm systems, in accordance with National Electrical Code. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit.
.2 .3
.4
3.4
DISINFECTION
.1 .2
Disinfect new piping and existing piping. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from systems with clean water until maximum residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 part per million or residual chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from piping, analyzed by certified laboratory, and submit results prior to piping being placed into service.
.3
.4
Section 21 13 13 Page 15 2011-05-25
3.5
FIELD PAINTING
.1
.1
Site Test, Inspection: .1 Perform test to determine compliance with specified requirements in presence of Departmental Representative and Federal Fire Commissioner. .2 Test, inspect, and approve piping before covering or concealing. .3 Preliminary Tests: .1 Hydrostatically test each system at 300 kPa in excess of nominal working pressure but at not less than 1.4 MPa for a 2 hour period with no leakage or reduction in pressure under supervision of Federal Fire Commissioner. .2 Flush piping with potable water in accordance with NFPA 13. .3 Piping above suspended ceilings: tested, inspected, and approved before installation of ceilings. .4 Test alarms and other devices. .5 Test water flow alarms by flowing water through inspector's test connection. When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit signed and dated certificate in accordance with NFPA 13. .6 Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions to test operation of backflow preventer. .4 Formal Tests and Inspections: .1 Do not submit request for formal test and inspection until preliminary test and corrections are completed and approved. .2 Submit written request for formal inspection at least 15 days prior to inspection date. .3 Repeat required tests as directed. .4 Correct defects and make additional tests until systems comply with contract requirements. .5 Furnish appliances, equipment, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for tests. .6 Authority of Jurisdiction, will witness formal tests and approve systems before they are accepted.
Section 21 13 13 Page 16 2011-05-25
3.7
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
PLUMBING PUMPS
Section 22 10 10 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Related Sections: .1 Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning - General Requirements.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet for fixtures and equipment. Shop Drawings. .1 Submit shop drawings to indicate: .1 Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries. Identify whether factory or field assembled. .2 Wiring and schematic diagrams. .3 Dimensions and recommended installation. .4 Pump performance and efficiency curves. Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00, include: .1 Manufacturers name, type, model year, capacity and serial number. .2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance. .3 Recommended spare parts list with names and addresses.
.3
.4 .5
.1
Health and Safety: .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
PLUMBING PUMPS
Section 22 10 10 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
2.1 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS
.1 .2
Capacity: as indicated. Construction: closed-coupled, in-line centrifugal, 100% lead-free, all bronze construction, ceramic or stainless steel shaft, stainless steel or bronze shaft sleeve, ceramic bearings. 1034 kPa maximum working pressure and 105 degrees C continuous service. Motor: 1/12 hp, drip-proof, with thermal overload protection, 3-speed operation. Supports: provide as recommended by manufacturer. Equip each pump with circuit balancing valve as indicated on drawings.
.3 .4 .5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Make piping and electrical connections to pump and motor assembly and controls as indicated. Ensure pump and motor assembly do not support piping.
.1
Site Tests/Inspection: .1 Check power supply. .2 Check starter protective devices. Start-up, check for proper and safe operation. Check settings and operation of hand-off-auto selector switch, operating, safety and limit controls, audible and visual alarms, over-temperature and other protective devices. Adjust flow from water-cooled bearings. Adjust impeller shaft stuffing boxes, packing glands.
.2 .3
.4 .5
PLUMBING PUMPS
Section 22 10 10 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.3
START-UP
.1
General: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00, supplemented as specified herein. .2 Procedures: .1 Check power supply. .2 Check starter O/L heater sizes. .3 Start pumps, check impeller rotation. .4 Check for safe and proper operation. .5 Check settings, operation of operating, limit, safety controls, over-temperature, audible/visual alarms, other protective devices. .6 Test operation of hand-on-auto switch. .7 Test operation of alternator. .8 Adjust leakage through water-cooled bearings. .9 Adjust shaft stuffing boxes. .10 Adjust leakage flow rate from pump shaft stuffing boxes to manufacturer's recommendations. .11 Run-in pumps for 12 continuous hours. .12 Check installation, operation of mechanical seals. Adjust as necessary. .13 Adjust alignment of piping and conduit to ensure full flexibility. .14 Eliminate causes of cavitation, flashing, air entrainment. .15 Measure pressure drop across strainer when clean and with flow rates as finally set. .16 Replace seals if pump used to degrease system or if pump used for temporary heat.
3.4
REPORTS
.1 .2
In accordance with Section 01 91 00: reports, supplemented as specified. Include: .1 PV results on approved PV Report Forms. .2 Product Information report forms. .3 Pump performance curves (family of curves) with final point of actual performance.
3.5
TRAINING
.1
In accordance with Section 01 91 00, supplemented as specified.
END
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Section 22 11 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers International (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B16.15-2006, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250. .2 ANSI/ASME B16.18-2001(R2005), Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.22-2001(R2005), Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .4 ANSI/ASME B16.24-2006, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500. ASTM International Inc. (ASTM) .1 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. .2 ASTM B88M-05, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric). American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association (ANSI/AWWA) .1 ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4-08, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings, Includes Erratum (2010). .2 ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-08, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water. .3 ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-07, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Pressure Pipe and Fittings. .4 ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51-09, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B242-05, Groove- and Shoulder-Type Mechanical Pipe Couplings. Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999, c. 33 (CEPA). Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS). .1 MSS SP-67-2002a, Butterfly Valves.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 22 11 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
.7
(Cont'd) .2 MSS SP-70-2006, Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .3 MSS SP-71-2005, Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .4 MSS SP-80-2008, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. National Research Council (NRC)/Institute for Research in Construction .1 NRCC 47668, National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC) - 2010. Transport Canada (TC) .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992, c. 34 (TDGA). Ontario Plumbing Code, 2006.
.8
.9
.10
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for insulation and adhesives, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.3
.1
Packaging Waste Management: .1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations.
.2 .3
Section 22 11 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING
.1
Domestic hot, cold, tempered and recirculation systems, within building. .1 Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M. .2 Buried or embedded: copper tube, soft annealed, type K: to ASTM B88M, in long lengths and with no buried joints. Service water pipe: ductile iron cement mortar lined. .1 Ductile iron: ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. .2 Cement mortar lining for ductile iron pipe: to ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.
.2
2.2
FITTINGS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 150 and 300: to ANSI/ASME B16.24. Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125 and 250: to ANSI/ASME B16.15. Cast copper, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.18. Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.22. NPS 3 and larger: mechanical joints or flanged, to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10.
2.3
JOINTS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Rubber gaskets, latex-free: to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series. Solder: 95/5 tin copper alloy. Teflon tape: for threaded joints. Dielectric connections between dissimilar metals: use bronze or brass valve or fittings. For hangers, use tape or copper clamps with copper pipes.
Section 22 11 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.4 SWING CHECK VALVES
.1
NPS 2 and under, soldered: .1 To MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat as specified Section 23 05 23.01. NPS 2 and under, screwed: .1 To MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat as specified Section 23 05 23.01. NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged: .1 To MSS SP-71, Class 125, 860 kPa, cast iron body, flat flange faces, renewable seat, bronze disc, bolted cap specified Section 23 05 23.02.
.2
.3
2.5
BALL VALVES
.1
NPS 2 and under, screwed: .1 Class 150. .2 Bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE adjustable packing, brass gland and PTFE seat, steel lever handle as specified Section 23 05 23.01. NPS 2 and under, soldered: .1 To ANSI/ASME B16.18, Class 150. .2 Bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE adjustable packing, brass gland and PTFE seat, steel lever handle, with NPT to copper adaptors as specified Section 23 05 23.01.
.2
2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES
.1
NPS 2-1/2 and over, lug: .1 To MSS SP-67, Class 150. .2 Cast iron body, ductile iron or bronze disc, stainless steel stem, replaceable EPDM liner and nylon coated ductile iron seat, as specified Section 23 05 23.02.
2.7 CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES
.1 .2
Sizes: calibrated balancing valves, as specified. NPS-2 and under: .1 General: .1 Y style globe valve, designed to provide precise flow measurement and control, with valved ports for connection to differential pressure meter.
Section 22 11 16 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.7 CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES (Cont'd)
.2
NPS-2 and under:(Cont'd) Accuracy: .2 .1 Readout to be within plus or minus 2% of actual flow at design flow rate. .3 Pressure die-cast dezincification resistant copper alloy construction, Teflon disc, screw-in bonnet. .1 Flow control: At least four (4) full turns of handwheel with digital handwheel and tamperproof concealed mechanical memory. .4 Insulation: .1 Use prefabricated shipping packaging of 5.4 R polyurethane as insulation. .5 Drain connection: .1 NPS 3/4 valved and capped, suitable for hose socket. .2 Incorporated into valve body or provided as separate item.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with NPC, Ontario Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction. Install pipe work in accordance with Section 23 05 05, supplemented as specified herein. Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install CWS piping below and away from HWS and HWC and other hot piping so as to maintain temperature of cold water as low as possible. Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. Buried tubing: .1 Lay in well compacted washed sand in accordance with AWWA Class B bedding. Where existing ground below bedding is unstable, install pipe on continuous concrete support. .2 Bend tubing without crimping or constriction. Minimize use of fittings. .3 Apply one layer of protective coating to all buried ductile iron piping and fittings.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
Section 22 11 16 Page 6 2011-05-25
.7
Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve headroom and space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls.
Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and assemble without binding. Where piping enters building, provide support and seal against ingress of moisture to approval of authority having jurisdiction.
.8
.9
3.2
VALVES
.1 .2
Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves. Balance recirculation system using circuit balancing valves. Mark settings and record on as-built drawings on completion.
3.3
PRESSURE TESTS
.1 .2
Conform to requirements of Section 23 05 00. Test pressure: greater of 1-1/2 times maximum system operating pressure or 860 kPa.
3.4 FLUSHING AND CLEANING
.1
Flush entire system for 8 h. Ensure outlets flushed for 2 h. Let stand for 24 h, then draw one sample off longest run. Submit to testing laboratory to verify that system is clean to Provincial potable water guidelines. Let system flush for additional 2 h, then draw off another sample for testing.
3.5 PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS
.1 .2 .3
Systems to be complete, prior to flushing, testing and start-up. Verify that system can be completely drained. Ensure that air chambers, expansion compensators are installed properly.
3.6
DISINFECTION
.1
Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction and approval of Departmental Representative. Coordinate with Section 33 11 17.
.2
Section 22 11 16 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.6 DISINFECTION (Cont'd)
.3
Upon completion, provide laboratory test reports on water quality for Departmental Representative approval.
3.7
START-UP
.1
Timing: Start up after: .1 Pressure tests have been completed. .2 Disinfection procedures have been completed. .3 Certificate of static completion has been issued. .4 Water treatment systems operational. Provide continuous supervision during start-up. Start-up procedures: .1 Establish circulation and ensure that air is eliminated. .2 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer, flashing and/or cavitation. .3 Bring HWS storage tank up to design temperature slowly. .4 Monitor piping HWS and HWC piping systems for freedom of movement, pipe expansion as designed. .5 Check control, limit, safety devices for normal and safe operation. Rectify start-up deficiencies.
.2 .3
.4
3.8 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
.1
Scheduling: .1 Verify system performance after pressure and leakage tests and disinfection are completed, and Certificate of Completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction. Procedures: .1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet Design Criteria. .2 TAB HWC in accordance with Section 23 05 93. .3 Adjust pressure regulating valves while withdrawal is maximum and inlet pressure is minimum. .4 Sterilize HWS and HWC systems for Legionella control. .5 Verify performance of temperature controls. .6 Verify compliance with safety and health requirements.
.2
Section 22 11 16 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.8 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (Cont'd)
.2
Procedures:(Cont'd) Check for proper operation of water hammer .7 arrestors. Run one outlet for 10 seconds, then shut of water immediately. If water hammer occurs, replace water hammer arrestor or re-charge air chambers. Repeat for outlets and flush valves. .8 Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards, and ensure no residuals remain as result of flushing or cleaning. Reports: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00, using report forms as specified. .2 Include certificate of water flow and pressure tests conducted on incoming water service, demonstrating adequacy of flow and pressure.
.3
3.9 OPERATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Co-ordinate operation and maintenance requirements including, cleaning and maintenance of specified materials and products with Section 23 05 00.
3.10
CLEANING
.1 .2
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
END
DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - CAST IRON AND COPPER
Section 22 13 17 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM B32-08, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. .2 ASTM B306-09, Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). .3 ASTM C564-09a, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC) (CSA International). .1 CSA B67-1972(R1996), Lead Service Pipe, Waste Pipe, Traps, Bends and Accessories. .2 CSA B70-06, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Fittings and Means of Joining, Includes Update No. 3 (2008). .3 CSA B125.3-05, Plumbing Fittings. Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES) .1 Standard GS-36-00, Commercial Adhesives. National Plumbing Code, 2010. Ontario Plumbing Code, 2006.
.2
.3 .4 .5
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for adhesives, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.1 .2
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.3
Section 22 13 17 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
.1
Above ground sanitary, storm and vent Type DWV to: ASTM B306. .1 Fittings. .1 Cast brass: to CSA B125.3. .2 Wrought copper: to CSA B125.3. .2 Solder: lead free, tin-copper alloy 95:5, type TA, to ASTM B32.
2.2 CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS
.1
Buried sanitary and storm minimum NPS 2, to: CSA B70, with heavy bitumous protective coating. .1 Joints: .1 Mechanical joints: .1 Provide hubless soil pipe couplings designated as Heavyweight, constructed of extra wide 4 to 6 band corrugated type 304 stainless steel bands, with heavy duty worm drive clamps. .2 Flanged gasket to be made of neoprene rubber, meeting ASTM C564. .3 Tightened to 9.0 N-m torque. Above ground sanitary, storm and vent: to CSA B70. .1 Mechanical Joints: .1 Provide hubless soil pipe couplings designated as Heavyweight, constructed of extra wide 4 to 6 band corrugated type 304 stainless steel bands, with heavy duty worm drive clamps. .2 Flanged gasket to be made of neoprene rubber, meeting ASTM C564. .3 Tightened to 9.0 N-m torque.
.2
Section 22 13 17 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
In accordance with Section 23 05 05. Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code, Ontario Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction. Install buried pipe on 150 mm bed of compacted clean washed sand, shaped to accommodate hubs and fittings, to line and grade as indicated. Backfill with 150 mm of clean washed sand to 300 mm above pipe. Install above ground piping parallel and close to walls and ceilings to conserve headroom and space, and to grade as indicated. Support of piping to be in accordance with OBC. Spacing of supports shall not exceed loading for structural systems. Review with core slab manufacturer maximum loadings and increase spacings where required to meet maximum loadings. Copper piping shall not be used on any urinal drainage.
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.2
TESTING
.1 .2 .3
Pressure test buried systems in accordance with OBC before backfilling. Hydraulically test to verify grades and freedom from obstructions. Perform all testing as required by authority having jurisdiction.
3.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
.1
Cleanouts: .1 Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctly located. .2 Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal. .3 Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as the next cleanout, at least. Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.
.2
Section 22 13 17 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (Cont'd)
.3
Storm water drainage: Verify domes are secure. .1 .2 Verify provisions for movement of roof system.
Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected to system and effectively vented. Affix applicable label (storm, sanitary, vent, pump discharge etc.) c/w directional arrows every floor or 4.5 m (whichever is less). Refer to Section 23 05 53.01.
.4 .5
3.4
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Section 22 30 05 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B51-09, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code. Includes Update No. 1 (2009). .2 CSA B149.1-10, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code, Includes Update No. 1 (2010). .3 CSA ANSI Z21.10.3a-2007/CSA 4.3-2007, Gas Water Heaters - Volume III - Storage Water Heaters, with Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu Per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 (I-P), Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings (ANSI Approved; IESNA Co-Sponsored).
.2
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for domestic water heater, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Indicate: .1 Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries, identifying factory and field assembled.
.3
.1
Provide maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
Section 22 30 05 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
.3
1.5
WARRANTY
.1
For the Work of this Section 22 30 05, 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC3.13 of General Conditions is extended to: three (3) years for domestic hot water heater tank, combustion chamber and flue; five (5) years for domestic hot water storage tank.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HIGH EFFICIENCY GAS
.1
Water tanks shall be seamless glass lined and fully insulated to levels exceeding ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1. Combustion process shall be fully condensing with thermal efficiency in excess of 95%. Power burner designed for turbulent flame inside submerged combustion chamber. Water heater shall be certified for horizontal, vertical and direct vent sealed construction through PVC pipe up to 24 m in length. Electronic microprocessor controls for ignition and temperature setpoint. Digital display panel showing operating mode, user settings and error messages.
.2 .3 .4
.5
2.2 TRIM AND INSTRUMENTATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Drain valve: NPS 1 with hose end. Thermometer: to Section 23 05 19.01. Pressure gauge: to Section 23 05 19.01. Thermowell filled with conductive paste for control valve temperature sensor.
Section 22 30 05 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 TRIM AND INSTRUMENTATION (Cont'd)
.5
ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve sized for full capacity of heater, having discharge terminating over floor drain and visible to operators.
Magnesium anodes adequate for 20 years of operation and located for easy replacement. Provide in-line neutralizer for condensate drain.
.6 .7
2.3 DOMESTIC HOT WATER STORAGE
.1
Storage tank shall be glass lined of capacity noted on drawings. Tank shall have threaded openings as shown on drawing. Provide minimum of two spare openings, plugged for future use. Interior of tank shall be glass-lined with alkaline borosilicate composition, fused to the steel inner tank by firing at 870C. Glass coating shall be continuous over the entire inner surface of the tank. Outer jacket shall have a baked enamel finish over a banderized undercoat. Unit shall be insulated to meet ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1 requirements. Cathodic protection shall be provided. Tank shall have a working pressure of 1034 kPa.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and authority having jurisdiction. Pipe pressure reliefs and condensate drains to funnel floor drain. Install natural gas fired domestic water heaters in accordance with CSA B149.1. Provide direct venting of combustion air piping. Size of combustion air ducting shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Thermally insulate combustion air duct to the requirements of Section 23 07 15. Install vent connection from boiler as per manufacturer's directions. Vent type and size as required for category of gas appliance and type of burner.
.2 .3 .4
.5
Section 22 30 05 Page 4 2011-05-25
.6
Install and wire all low voltage wiring between hot water heaters and external devices such as power venter. All line voltage interconnecting wiring shall be provided by Division 26. Coordinate with Division 26 line voltage interconnecting wiring requirements.
.1
Manufacturer's factory trained, certified representative to start up DHW heaters and provide written confirmation that the hot water system is installed properly and operating correctly. Commissioning and training shall be in accordance with Section 01 91 00.
.2
3.3
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Section 22 42 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Related Sections: .1 Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM). .1 ASTM A126-04(2009), Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. .2 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. American Water Works Association (AWWA). .1 ANSI/AWWA C700-09, AWWA Standard for Cold-Water Meters -- Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case, Includes Erratum. .2 ANSI/AWWA C701-07, Cold-Water Meters, Turbine Type, for Customer Service. .3 ANSI/AWWA C702-10, Cold-Water Meters-Compound Type. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA B64 Series-07, Backflow Preventers and Vacuum Breakers (Consists of B64.0, B64.1.1, B64.1.2, B64.1.3, B64.2, B64.2.1, B64.2.1.1, B64.2.2, B64.3, B64.3.1, B64.4, B64.4.1, B64.5, B64.5.1, B64.6, B64.6.1, B64.7, B64.8 and B64.9), Includes Update No. 1 (2008). .2 CSA B79-08, Commercial and Residential Drains and Cleanouts. .3 CSA B356-10, Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Supply Systems. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS). .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI). .1 PDI-WH201-10, Water Hammer Arresters Standard. Ontario Plumbing Code, 2006. National Plumbing Code, 2010.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6 .7
Section 22 42 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet for fixtures and equipment. .2 Indicate dimensions, construction details and materials for specified items. .3 Submit WHMIS MSDS. Indicate VOC's for adhesive and solvents during application and curing. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings to indicate materials, finishes, method of anchorage, number of anchors, dimensions construction and assembly details and accessories for specified items. Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00, include: .1 Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name, type, model, year and capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance. .3 Recommended spare parts list.
.3
.4 .5
.1
.1
Section 22 42 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FLOOR DRAINS
.1 .2
Floor drains and trench drains: to CSA B79. Type FD-1: secure duty; cast iron body round, adjustable head, heavy duty nickel bronze strainer with maximum 6 mm square openings and secure type fasteners, integral seepage pan, clamping collar and plugged trap primer tapping. Fasteners to be stainless steel Torx with pin style. Type FD-2: general duty; cast iron body, heavy duty nickel bronze strainer, integral seepage pan, clamping collar and plugged trap primer tapping. Type FD-3: secure duty; cast iron body, angle strainer, bottom outlet body with heavy duty stainless steel strainer and secure type fasteners, integral seepage pan, clamping collar and plugged trap primer tapping. Fasteners to be stainless steel Torx with pin style. Type FFD-1: general duty funnel floor drain; cast iron body, nickel bronze adjustable strainer head and grate with 80 mm x 200 mm oval funnel. Body complete with plugged trap primer tapping.
.3
.4
.5
2.2
ROOF DRAINS
.1
Type RD-1: standard roof drain with cast iron deep sump body, underdeck clamp, adjustable top deck extension flange, membrane clamp with galvanized metal dome secured with vandal proof fasteners.
2.3
CLEANOUTS
.1
Access covers: .1 Floor access: round cast iron body and frame with adjustable secured heavy duty nickel bronze top and: .1 Plugs: bolted bronze with neoprene gasket. .2 Cover for all floor types: nickel bronze heavy duty round 12 mm thick scoriated cover, gasket, vandal-proof screws. Fasteners to be stainless steel Torx with pin style.
Section 22 42 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
.1
Stainless steel, heavy duty bellows type, bottom pipe threads with nesting bellows contained in stainless steel casing with sufficient volume to dissipate kinetic energy from water shock. Approved by PDI to Standard WH201.
2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
.1
All backflow prevention device installations shall conform to the requirements of CAN/CSA B64 Series. Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA): .1 DCVA shall consist of two internally loaded check valves, two isolation valves and one y-strainer. .1 NPS 3 and under: quarter turn isolation ball valves. .2 NPS 4 and above: OS&Y gate isolation valves with flanged end connections. .2 Unit shall be constructed with bronze body, stainless steel springs and fasteners with replaceable resilient rubber seats and top mounted test cocks. .3 Provide top access for maintenance and repair. .4 Maximum working pressure: 1207 kPa. .5 Temperature range: 1C - 82C. Reduced Pressure Principle (RP): .1 RP shall consist of two independently acting, internally loaded check valves separated by reduced pressure zone with differential pressure relief valve. Unit shall be complete with two ball type isolation valves and one y-strainer. .2 Unit shall be constructed with bronze body, stainless steel springs and fasteners with replaceable resilient rubber seats with test cocks in easily accessible locations. .3 Provide top access for maintenance and repair. .4 Maximum working pressure: 1207 kPa. .5 Temperature range: 1C - 82C. .6 Include accessory air gap drain funnel to collect relief valve discharge. Complete with mounting hardware and f-npt drain outlet connection.
.2
.3
Section 22 42 01 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.6 THERMAL EXPANSION TANKS
.1
Steel pressure tank with baked on epoxy coating, butyl diaphragm. Pre-charged, adjustable in field. Approved for potable water service. Tank capacity: 50.0 L. Expansion capacity: 33.4 L.
.2 .3
2.7 HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS
.1
Bronze construction complete with integral back flow preventer, hose thread spout, replaceable composition disc, and chrome plated in finished areas.
2.8
WATER METERS
.1
Provide and install in water lines meters sized and located as shown on drawings and noted herein. Meters 38mm and larger to be inline turbine style complete with strainer (integral where available), flanged ends, magnetic drive, E.C.R. 3 register and touchpad (m at 10 m3). Material shall be bronze with thermoplastic rotor and stainless steel trim. Provide bronze meter flange set. Provide three-valve bypass around meter. Provide minimum 5 pipe diameters upstream of meter and minimum 2 pipe diameters downstream of meter of fitting-free straight pipe. Meters to comply with latest revision of ANSI/AWWA standard. Installation to meet all recommendations of manufacturer.
.2
.3
.4 .5
2.9 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS
.1
Pressure drop activated brass trap seal primer. Complete with view holes and removable filter screen. Operating pressure range 138 kPa to 861 kPa. Primer to open to water flow on 20 kPa water pressure drop. Connect each primer with ball type isolation valve and air gap discharge fitting on outlet.
Section 22 42 01 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.10 ROOF FLASHINGS
.1
Coordinate roof flashing requirements with Division 07.
2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES
.1
Thermostatic mixing valve shall be of bronze construction with stainless steel flow control components. Removable cartridge with strainer, stainless steel piston, liquid filled thermal motor with bellows mounted out of water complete with inlet check stops. Mixing valve shall be provided as an assembly complete with volume control shut-off valve, bimetal mixed water temperature gauge with 75 mm diameter face, brass pipe, fittings, unions with wall mounting bracket, all factory assembled and tested. Control range 29C to 49C, minimum temperature differential adjustable to within 5.6C of inlet temperature. Maximum working pressure of 860 kPa. Minimum flow rate of 1.9 litre/minute, maximum of 143.8 litres/minute with 69 kPa pressure drop. Valve to fail safe on loss of flow to reduced water supply.
.2
.3
.4
2.12 WATER MAKE-UP ASSEMBLY
.1
Complete gauge on valve to pressure outlet.
with backflow preventer, pressure inlet and outlet, pressure reducing CSA B356, pressure relief valve on low side and gate valves on inlet and
2.13
STRAINERS
.1 .2 .3
860 kPa, Y type with 20 mesh, monel, bronze or stainless steel removable screen. NPS 2 and under, bronze body, screwed ends, with brass cap. NPS 2-1/2 and over, cast iron body, flanged ends, with bolted cap.
Section 22 42 01 Page 7 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code of Canada, Ontario Plumbing Code, and local authority having jurisdiction. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
.2
3.2
CLEANOUTS
.1
Install cleanouts at base of soil and waste stacks, and rainwater leaders, at locations required by code, and as indicated. Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor. Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4. Cleanouts installed in y-chases shall be set above flood level of adjacent water closets.
.2 .3 .4
3.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
.1
Install on branch supplies to fixtures or group of fixtures in washrooms, laundry areas, showers, janitor rooms, kitchenettes and where indicated.
3.4 HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS
.1
Install at bottom of risers, at low points to drain systems, and as indicated.
3.5 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS
.1 .2
Install for floor drains and elsewhere, as indicated. Install on cold water supply to nearest frequently used plumbing fixture, in concealed space, to approval of Departmental Representative. Install minimum 10 mm soft copper tubing to floor drain. Connect trap primer lines for floor drains in mechanical rooms to automatic trap primer header assembly.
.3 .4
Section 22 42 01 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.6
WATER METERS
.1 .2
Install water meter in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install water meter at location indicated.
3.7 WATER MAKE-UP ASSEMBLY
.1 .2
Install on valved bypass. Pipe discharge from relief valve to nearest floor drain.
3.8 BACK FLOW PREVENTERS
.1
Install in accordance with CSA B64 Series, where indicated and elsewhere as required by code. Pipe discharge to terminate over nearest drain or service sink. Provide backflow prevention on the following equipment/systems: EQUIPMENT .1 Hot Water Heating System .2 Humidifier .3 Incoming Potable Water Service .4 Incoming Fire Protection Water Service TYPE RP DCVA DCVA DCVA
.2 .3
3.9
STRAINERS
.1
Install with sufficient room to remove basket.
3.10
START-UP
.1
General: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00: General Requirements, supplemented as specified herein. Timing: start-up only after: .1 Pressure tests have been completed. .2 Disinfection procedures have been completed. .3 Certificate of static completion has been issued. .4 Water treatment systems operational. Provide continuous supervision during start-up.
.2
.3
Section 22 42 01 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.11 TESTING AND ADJUSTING
.1
General: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00: General Requirements, supplemented as specified. Timing: .1 After start-up deficiencies rectified. .2 After certificate of completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction. Application tolerances: .1 Pressure at fixtures: +/- 70 kPa. .2 Flow rate at fixtures: +/- 20%. Adjustments: .1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet design criteria. .2 Make adjustments while flow rate or withdrawal is (1) maximum and (2) 25% of maximum and while pressure is (1) maximum and (2) minimum. Floor drains: .1 Verify operation of trap seal primer. .2 Prime, using trap primer. Adjust flow rate to suit site conditions. .3 Check operations of flushing features. .4 Check security, accessibility, removeability of strainer. .5 Clean out baskets. Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: .1 Test tightness, accessibility for O&M of cover and of valve. .2 Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions to test operation of vacuum breakers, backflow preventers. .3 Verify visibility of discharge from open ports. Roof drains: .1 Check location at low points in roof. .2 Check security, removeability of dome. .3 Clean out sumps. .4 Verify provisions for movement of roof systems. Access doors: .1 Verify size and location relative to items to be accessed. Cleanouts: .1 Verify covers are gas-tight, secure, yet readily removable.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Section 22 42 01 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.11 TESTING AND ADJUSTING (Cont'd)
.10
Water hammer arrestors: Verify proper installation of correct type .1 of water hammer arrestor.
Hose bibbs, sediment faucets: .1 Adjust flow. Water meters: .1 Verify meter reading and accuracy. Commissioning Reports: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00. Training: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00. .2 Demonstrate full compliance with Design Criteria.
.11 .12 .13 .14
3.12 ROOF FLASHINGS
.1
Coordinate installation with Division 07.
END
COMMERCIAL WASHROOM FIXTURES
Section 22 42 03 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA B45 Series-02(R2008), Plumbing Fixtures (Consists of B45.0-02, B45.1-02, B45.2-02, B45.3-02, B45.4-02, B45.5-02, B45.6-02, B45.7-02, B45.8-02 and B45.9-02), Includes Updates No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4 (2007). .2 CSA B125.3-05, Plumbing Fittings. .3 CSA B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment, Includes Update No.1 (2007). Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES) .1 Standard GS-36-00, Adhesives for Commercial Use.
.2
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for washroom fixtures, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Indicate fixtures and trim: .1 Dimensions, construction details, roughing-in dimensions. .2 Factory-set water consumption per flush at recommended pressure. .3 For water closets: minimum pressure required for flushing.
.3
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for washroom fixtures, for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance. .3 List of recommended spare parts.
.2
Section 22 42 03 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series. Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CSA B125.3. Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated. Number, locations: Architectural drawings to govern. Fixtures in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Lavatory Basins .1 L-1: secure type, barrier free, wall-hung. .1 Basin: ADA compliant lavatory with oval bowl fabricated from 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be seamless welded with all exposed surfaces polished to satin finish. Ledge to have self-draining soap dish with formed ridges for air circulation. Cabinet interior to be sound-deadened with fire-resistant material. Fixture shall be furnished with necessary concealed fasteners for proper high security installation. .2 Faucet: air control pneumatically operated ADA compliant pushbutton valve conforming to NSF61, Section 9 lead free requirements. Control shall be provided for cold water and tempered hot water.
Section 22 42 03 Page 3 2011-05-25
.7
(Cont'd) L-1A: secure type, barrier free, wall-hung .2 w/access. .1 As specified for L-1 except with front access panel attached with secure fasteners. .3 L-2: standard type, wall-hung. .1 Basin: White vitreous china, D-shaped bowl with front overflow, self-draining deck area with contoured back and side splash shields, wall hanger, faucet holes on 102 mm centers. .2 Two handle centreset faucet to have 102 mm centers chrome plated cast brass body, open grid strainer, vandal resistant 8.4 l/min flow control aerator, 70 mm lever blade handles and 32 mm chrome plated cast body adjustable p-trap w/ cleanout. .4 L-3: standard type, barrier free, wall-hung. .1 Basin: White vitreous china, D-shaped bowl with front overflow, self-draining deck area with contoured back and side splash shields, wall hanger, faucet holes on 102 mm centers. .2 Two handle centreset faucet to have 102 mm centers chrome plated cast brass body, offset open grid strainer, vandal resistant 8.4 l/min flow control aerator, 70 mm lever blade handles and 32 mm chrome plated cast body adjustable p-trap w/ cleanout. Water Closets: .1 W-1: secure type, combination water closet and basin. .1 457 mm wide lavatory / water closet combination, suicide resistant with hemispherical cabinet fabricated from 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be seamless welded and exposed surfaces shall be satin finished. D-shaped lavatory bowl. Fixture shall have air control pneumatically operated pushbutton valves requiring less than 5 pound to activate. Toilet bowl housing shaped to prohibit attachment of objects. Water closet shall be concealed blowout jet type with elongated bowl, self-draining flushing rim and integral contoured seat with high polish finish. Water closet trap shall pass a 54 mm diameter ball and shall be fully enclosed. Cabinet interior shall be sound deadened with fire resistant material. Fixture shall withstand loading
.8
Section 22 42 03 Page 4 2011-05-25
.8
Water Closets:(Cont'd) .1 W-1:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) of 1360 kg. without permanent damage. Fixture shall be furnished with necessary fasteners for proper installation. Provide control for cold water and tempered hot water, metered water flow, paper holder, flush valve (13.25 lpf) and secure wall sleeve. .2 W-2: secure type, barrier free. .1 Blowout jet water closet 450 mm high fabricated from 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be seamless welded with exposed surfaces satin finished except seat area which shall have high polish finish. Elongated bowl with self draining flush rim. Trap shall pass a 54 mm diameter ball and be fully enclosed. Fixture shall withstand loading of 2260 kg without permanent damage. Flush valve (13.25 lpf) integral with unit. Fixture shall be furnished with necessary concealed fasteners for proper high security installation and secure wall sleeve. .3 W-3: standard type, floor mount. .1 Bowl: Floor mounted, bottom outlet, vitreous china, elongated rim, siphon jet whirlpool flush action. Fully glazed, 50 mm ball pass internal trapway, 305 mm x 254 mm water surface, 13.25 lpf, 38 mm top spud connection, colour matched bolt caps. .2 Flush valve: Exposed, polished chrome plated, vandal resistant cover screw, renewable seat, non hold open handle, vacuum breaker. 25 mm water inlet, 28 mm diameter tube cover. Water flush volume set for specified bowl requirements. .3 Seat: Elongated, heavy duty solid plastic open front less cover (white), with reinforced stainless steel check hinge, posts, washers and nuts. Seat sized to fit specified bowl. .4 W-4: standard type, barrier free, floor mount. .1 Bowl: Floor mounted, bottom outlet, vitreous china, elongated rim, siphon jet, 407 mm high for barrier free use. Fully glazed, 50 mm ball pass internal trapway, 229 mm x 203 mm water surface, maximum 6 lpf, 38 mm top spud connection, colour matched bolt caps. .2 Flush valve: Exposed, polished chrome plated, vandal resistant cover screw, renewable seat, non hold open handle,
Section 22 42 03 Page 5 2011-05-25
.8
Water Closets:(Cont'd) .4 W-4:(Cont'd) .2 Flush valve:(Cont'd) vacuum breaker. 25 mm water inlet, 38 mm diameter tube cover. ADA compliant. Centre cover bumper. Water flush volume set for specified bowl requirements. .3 Seat: Elongated, heavy duty solid plastic open front with cover (white), with reinforced stainless steel check hinge, posts, washers and nuts. Seat sized to fit specified bowl. Fixture Piping: .1 Water supplies: .1 Secure areas: fully concealed, rigid copper supply pipes with screw driver stops. Where supply is located in Y-chase, use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Non-Secure areas: chrome plated flexible copper supply pipes with screw driver stops and chrome escutcheons. Where supply is located in a concealed area use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Waste: .1 Secure areas: fully concealed, brass p-trap with cleanout on each fixture not having integral trap or cleanout. .2 Non-Secure areas: chrome plated brass p-trap with cleanout with chrome escutcheon. Chair carriers: .1 Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems for wall-mounted water closets. .2 Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems for wall-mounted lavatories on stud wall partitions. .3 Factory manufactured wall-supported carrier systems for wall-mounted lavatories on concrete block walls.
.9
.10
Section 22 42 03 Page 6 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Mounting heights: .1 Standard: to manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified. .2 Wall-hung fixtures: measured from finished floor. .3 Barrier free: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC or CSA B651.
3.2
ADJUSTING
.1 .2
Conform to water conservation requirements specified this section. Adjustments: .1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates. .2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures. .3 Adjust flush valves to suit actual site conditions. Checks: .1 Water closets: flushing action. .2 Aerators: operation, cleanliness. .3 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation under all conditions. .4 Review all secure fixtures to confirm no exposed non-secure fasteners or gaps or open seams. Thermostatic controls: .1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.
.3
.4
3.3
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS
Section 22 42 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA B45 Series-02(R2008), Plumbing Fixtures (Consists of B45.0-02, B45.1-02, B45.2-02, B45.3-02, B45.4-02, B45.5-02, B45.6-02, B45.7-02, B45.8-02 and B45.9-02), Includes Updates No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4 (2007). .2 CSA B125.3-05, Plumbing Fittings. .3 CSA B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment, Includes Update No.1 (2007).
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for fixtures, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.1 .2
Provide maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance. .3 List of recommended spare parts.
.1 .2
.3
Section 22 42 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series. Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CSA B125.3. Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated. Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern. Fixtures to be product of one manufacturer. Trim to be product of one manufacturer. Sinks: .1 S-1: secure type, floor mounted service sink. .1 Sink: 16 gauge, type 316 stainless steel, welded seams polished smooth to satin finish. Radius coved bowl corners. Undercoated to reduce condensation and resonance. Bowl: 546 mm x 546 mm x 254 mm deep. Sink complete with 305 mm high backsplash on two sides. 50 mm waste fitting with grid strainer. .2 Faucet: two handles wall mount sink faucet, 203 mm centers, heavy-duty cast brass with rough chrome plating and top braced rigid spout with body mounted angle vacuum breaker with hose thread outlet, 70 mm lever blade handles. .2 S-2: standard type, floor mounted service sink. .1 Sink: floor mounted, precast terrazzo with integral drain with strainer, 610 mm x 610 mm x 254 mm deep with stainless steel cap on all sides. Cast brass drain with s.s. strainer, 75 diameter outlet. .2 Faucet: two handled wall mount sink faucet, 203 mm centers, heavy duty cast brass with polished chrome finish and top braced rigid spout with body mounted angle vacuum breaker with hose thread outlet, 70 mm lever blade handles. .3 S-3: secure type, single compartment. .1 Sink: Refer to Architectural drawings for sink detail. Sink will be supplied with 38 mm waste tail piece and secure grid strainer. This contractor shall connect to
Section 22 42 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
.7
Sinks:(Cont'd) .3 S-3:(Cont'd) .1 Sink:(Cont'd) tailpiece with drain. Coordinate details of faucet holes in fabricated sink. .2 Faucet: Air controlled pushbutton tempered and cold valves using atmospheric pressure air for control, metering non-hold open faucet valves with timing adjustable from 5 to 60 seconds. Spout to be secure deckmount style. Air control valves and metering devices shall be located in secure compartment below sink. (Refer to Architectural Drawings). Provide brackets as required to firmly mount components. .4 S-4: standard type, single compartment, ledge back. .1 Sink: 20 gauge, type 302, 18-8 stainless steel. Self rimming. Exposed surfaces satin finished. Underside fully sound dampened and undercoated. Bowl size 430 mm (wide) x 300 mm (front/back) x 200 mm (deep). Sink complete with 89 mm crumb cup strainer. .2 Faucet: Two handle deckmount faucet to have 203 mm centers, chrome plated cast brass body, chrome plated stainless steel coverplate, brass spout and trim with vandal resistant screws. 203 mm wallform swing spout, 8.4 1/min vandal resistant flow control aerator and 70 mm lever blade handles. Fixture Piping: .1 Water supplies: .1 Secure areas: fully concealed, rigid copper supply pipes with screw driver stops. Where supply is located in Y-chase, use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Non-Secure areas: chrome plated flexible copper supply pipes with screw driver stops and chrome escutcheons. Where supply is located in a concealed area use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Waste: .1 Secure areas: fully concealed, brass p-trap with cleanout on each fixture not having integral trap or cleanout. .2 Non-Secure areas: chrome plated brass p-trap with cleanout with chrome escutcheon.
.8
Section 22 42 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Mounting heights: .1 Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified. .2 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC or CSA B651.
3.2
ADJUSTING
.1 .2
Conform to water conservation requirements specified this section. Adjustments: .1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates. .2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures. Checks: .1 Aerators: operation, cleanliness. .2 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation under all conditions. .3 Review all secure fixtures to confirm no exposed non-secure fasteners or gaps or open seams. Thermostatic controls: .1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.
.3
.4
3.3
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
COMMERCIAL SHOWERS AND BATHTUBS
Section 22 42 20 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA B45 Series-02(R2008), Plumbing Fixtures (Consists of B45.0-02, B45.1-02, B45.2-02, B45.3-02, B45.4-02, B45.5-02, B45.6-02, B45.7-02, B45.8-02 and B45.9-02), Includes Updates No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4 (2007). .2 CSA B125.3-05, Plumbing Fittings. .3 CSA B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment, Includes Update No. 1 (2007).
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for fixtures, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.1
Provide maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into manuals specified in Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance. .3 List of recommended spare parts.
.2
.1 .2
.3
Section 22 42 20 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 Series. Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CSA B125.3. Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated. Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern. Fixtures in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Showers: .1 SH-1: secure type, front access, wall type. .1 Fabricated from 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel with all welded seams, polished to satin finish. Trim to be chrome plated brass or stainless steel. Single shower valve shall be air controlled, metering, non-hold open type. Recessed soap dish. Mounting frame included with fasteners for high security installation. .2 SH-2: secure type, barrier free, front access, wall type. .1 ADA compliant, fabricated from 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel with all welded seams, polished to satin finish. Trim to be chrome plated brass or stainless steel. Fixture shall be furnished with fixed shower head, had shower with vacuum breaker, quick disconnect and recessed soap dish. Shower shall be provided with single ADA compliant valve, air controlled, metering, non-hold open type. Mounting frame included with fasteners for high security installation. Emergency Drench Shower: .1 Emergency shower: 270 mm diameter stainless steel shower head with shroud operated through 25 mm diameter chrome plated brass stay open ball valve with stainless steel pull rod and triangular handle. Unit shall deliver 1.26 l/s flow at 206 kPa water supply pressure.
.8
Section 22 42 20 Page 3 2011-05-25
.8
Emergency Drench Shower:(Cont'd) Tempering valve: Factory assembled and .2 tested emergency fixture thermostatic mixing valve constructed of bronze body and cap with replaceable corrosion resistant components, including stainless steel piston and liner and liquid filled thermostat. Provide dial thermometer, integral strainer / check stops, range adjustment, built-in cold water bypass and positive shutoff of hot supply when cold supply is lost. Fixture Piping: .1 Water supplies: .1 Secure areas: fully concealed, rigid copper supply pipes with screw driver stops. Where supply is located in Y-chase, use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Non-Secure areas: chrome plated flexible copper supply pipes with screw driver stops and chrome escutcheons. Where supply is located in a concealed area use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Waste: .1 Secure areas: fully concealed, brass p-trap with cleanout on each fixture not having integral trap or cleanout. .2 Non-Secure areas: chrome plated brass p-trap with cleanout with chrome escutcheon.
.9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Mounting heights: .1 Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified. .2 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC or CSA B651.
3.2
ADJUSTING
.1 .2
Conform to water conservation requirements specified this section. Adjustments: .1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates. .2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures.
Section 22 42 20 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.2 ADJUSTING (Cont'd)
.3
Checks: .1 Aerators: operation, cleanliness. .2 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation under all conditions. .3 Review all secure fixtures to confirm no exposed non-secure fasteners or gaps or open seams.
Thermostatic controls: .1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.
.4
3.3
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
Section 22 47 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) .1 ARI 1010-02, Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA B45 Series-02(R2008), Plumbing Fixtures (Consists of B45.0-02, B45.1-02, B45.2-02, B45.3-02, B45.4-02, B45.5-02, B45.6-02, B45.7-02, B45.8-02 and B45.9-02), Includes Updates No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4 (2007). .2 CSA B125.3-05, Plumbing Fittings. .3 CSA B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment, Includes Update No. 1 (2007).
.2
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for fountains and coolers, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Indicate, for all fixtures: .1 Dimensions, construction details, roughing-in dimensions.
.3
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into manuals specified in Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance. .3 List of recommended spare parts.
.2
Section 22 47 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, paddling, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series. Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CSA B125.3. Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated. Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern. Fixtures in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Drinking Fountains: .1 DF-1: secure type, wall mount, remote chiller. .1 Drinking fountain: ADA compliant fixture shall be fabricated from 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Fixture shall be seamless welded with welds ground smooth and exposed surfaces polished to satin finish. Air control, single temperature valve, removable secure access door, penal bubbler and secure wall sleeve. Water ways shall meet requirements of NSF 61, Section 9-1997 lead free. .2 Remote chiller: Compressor shall be hermetically sealed operating with refrigerant R-134a. Unit to be fully insulated with stainless steel reservoir tank. Temperature adjustable. Unit shall deliver 5 litre per hour of 10C water at 32C ambient with 27C inlet water temperature. Electrical: 115V, 1.7FLA.
Section 22 47 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.7
Drinking Fountains:(Cont'd) DF-2: standard type, wall mount, integral .2 chiller. .1 Drinking fountain: ADA compliant fixture shall be fabricated from stainless steel with all welds ground smooth and exposed surfaces polished to satin finish. Unit shall have removable drain strainer, separate valve and stream regulator. Waterways shall meet requirements of NSF61. Compressor shall be hermetically sealed operating with refrigerant R-134a. Unit shall deliver 30 litres per hour of 10C water at 32C ambient with 27C inlet water temperature. Electrical: 115V, 4.0 FLA. 2 Water filter: Cartridge style housing manufactured from FDA CFR-21 compliant material with clear housing built in shut-off valve to allow cartridge removal without water shut-off. Cartridge complete with 5 micron filter capable of 30 litres per minute flow at 57 kPa (clean) pressure drop. Provide five (5) spare filter cartridges. Fixture Piping: .1 Water supplies: .1 Secure areas: fully concealed, rigid copper supply pipes with screw driver stops. Where supply is located in Y-chase, use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Non-Secure areas: chrome plated flexible copper supply pipes with screw driver stops and chrome escutcheons. Where supply is located in a concealed area use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Waste: .1 Secure areas: fully concealed, brass p-trap with cleanout on each fixture not having integral trap or cleanout. .2 Non-Secure areas: chrome plated brass p-trap with cleanout with chrome escutcheon. Chair carriers: .1 Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems for all wall-mounted fixtures.
.8
.9
Section 22 47 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Mounting heights: .1 Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified. .2 Wall-hung fixtures: as indicated, measured from finished floor. .3 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC or CSA B651. Drinking fountains and water coolers: .1 In accordance with ARI 1010.
.2
3.2
ADJUSTING
.1 .2
Conform to water conservation requirements specified this Section. Adjustments: .1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates. .2 Adjust water cooler, drinking fountain flow stream to ensure no spillage. Checks: .1 Refrigerated water coolers: operation, temperature settings. Thermostatic controls: .1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.
.3
.4
3.3
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DURING CONSTRUCTION
Section 23 03 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.
1.2
USE OF SYSTEMS
.1
Use of new and existing permanent heating and ventilating systems for supplying temporary heat or ventilation is permitted only under the following conditions:. .1 Entire system is complete, pressure tested, cleaned, flushed out. .2 Specified water treatment system has been commissioned, water treatment is being continuously monitored. .3 Building has been closed in, areas to be heated/ventilated are clean and will not thereafter be subjected to dust-producing processes. .4 There is no possibility of damage from any cause. .5 Supply ventilation systems are protected by 60% filters, which shall be inspected daily, changed every week or more frequently as required. .6 Return systems have approved filters over all openings, inlets, outlets. .7 All systems will be: .1 operated as per manufacturer's recommendations or instructions. .2 operated by Contractor. .3 monitored continuously by Contractor. .8 Warranties and guarantees are not thereby relaxed. .9 Regular preventive and all other manufacturers recommended maintenance routines are performed by Contractor at his own expense and under supervision of Departmental Representative. .10 Before static completion, entire system to be refurbished, cleaned internally and externally, restored to "as- new" condition, filters in air systems replaced. Filters referred to herein are over and above those specified elsewhere in this specification. Exhaust systems are not included in any approvals for temporary heating ventilation.
.2 .3
USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DURING CONSTRUCTION
Section 23 03 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
COMMON WORK RESULTS MECHANICAL
Section 23 05 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
1.2
GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
This section covers items common to all sections of Division 21, 22 and 23. Obtain and pay for all required permits and approvals. It is the intent of the specification that there be one prime contractor for all of the Division 21, 22 and 23 work. The prime mechanical contractor shall be responsible for all Division 21, 22 and 23 subtrades. The prime mechanical contractor shall be responsible for overall co-ordination and commissioning of systems. The prime mechanical contractor shall be identified at the start of construction.
1.3
EQUIPMENT LIST
.1
Complete list of equipment and materials to be used on this project and forming part of bid documents by adding manufacturer's name, model number and details of materials, and submit for approval. Submit for approval at time of bid within 48 hours within 10 days after award of contract.
.2
1.4
TRIAL USAGE
.1
Departmental Representative may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing. Protect work against loss or damage until accepted by Departmental Representative. Obtain written permission from the Departmental Representative to use permanent equipment and systems, prior to acceptance by the Departmental Representative, including testing.
.2 .3
Section 23 05 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 TRIAL USAGE (Cont'd)
.4
Departmental Representative may use equipment and systems for test purposes or for continuity of operation prior to acceptance.
Protect equipment and system openings from dirt, dust and other foreign materials during temporary usage. Supply labour, material and instruments required for testing. Clean and renew equipment and systems, used prior to acceptance, to their original new state and full working condition. Guarantee period and commencement date shall not be affected by temporary usage. Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems: .1 HVAC Systems: .1 Ventilation Systems: .1 Air handling units. .2 HRVs. .3 Fan coil units. .4 Emergency mode ventilation. .2 Cooling Systems: .1 DX cooling systems. .3 Heating Systems: .1 Boiler. .2 Pumps. .3 Radiant heating. .4 Unit Heaters. .4 Smoke/heat exhaust systems. .5 Range air flow isolation. .2 Plumbing Systems: .1 Water heating systems. .2 Secure fixture operators. .3 Electronic fixture supplies. .4 Water tempering systems. .5 Solenoid piping isolation. .6 Secure water closet drain systems. .7 Backflow prevention. .3 Fire Protection Systems: .1 Secure fire hose systems. .2 Range isolation valve system. .4 Controls Systems: .1 EMCS building HVAC control and monitoring system. .2 BSCS/EMCS interface.
.5
.6 .7
.8 .9
Section 23 05 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 PROTECTION OF OPENINGS
.1
Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to system.
1.6
PAINTING
.1 .2
To Section 09 91 23. Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to ferrous supports and site fabricated work. Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original. Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up. Finish painting will be provided under. Architectural section. Hangers, supports and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals shall be given at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint before shipment to job site. Touch-up damaged surfaces of all mechanical equipment and materials, to the satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Use primer or enamel to match original. Do not paint over nameplates.
.3 .4
.5 .6
.7
1.7
SPARE PARTS
.1
Furnish spare parts in accordance with Section 01 78 00 as follows: .1 One set of packing for each pump. .2 One casing joint gasket for each size pump. .3 One set of belts for each piece of machinery. .4 One glass for each gauge glass. .5 One filter cartridge or set of filter media for each filter or filter bank in addition to final operating set.
1.8
SPECIAL TOOLS
.1
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers and in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
Section 23 05 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.8 SPECIAL TOOLS (Cont'd)
.2
Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of grease and grease fittings.
1.9 DEMONSTRATION AND OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance. Where specified elsewhere in Mechanical Divisions, manufacturers to provide demonstrations and instructions. Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, audio visual aids, etc. as part of instruction materials. Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections. Where deemed necessary, Departmental Representative may record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Operation and maintenance manual to be approved by, and final copies deposited with, Departmental Representative before final inspection. Operation data to include: .1 Control schematics for each system including environmental controls. .2 Description of each system and its controls. .3 Description of operation of each system at various loads together with reset schedules and seasonal variances. .4 Operation instruction for each system and each component. .5 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure. .6 Valves schedule and flow diagram. .7 Colour coding chart.
.2
.3
Section 23 05 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
.4
Maintenance data shall include: Servicing, maintenance, operation and .1 trouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment. .2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time.
Performance data to include: .1 Equipment manufacturer's performance data sheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete. .2 Equipment performance verification test results. .3 Special performance data as specified elsewhere. .4 Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 05 93. Approvals: .1 Submit 2 copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Departmental Representative for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless so directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Departmental Representative. Additional data: .1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual when need for same becomes apparent during demonstrations and instructions specified above.
.5
.6
.7
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Shop drawings and product data shall show: .1 Mounting arrangements. .2 Operating and maintenance clearances. (eg. access door swing spaces.) Make, model and nameplate data for each piece of equipment. Size and capacity of each piece of equipment. Electrical characteristics. Shop drawings and product data shall be accompanied by: .1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts.
.3 .4 .5 .6
Section 23 05 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
.6
(Cont'd) Acoustical sound power data, where .2 applicable. .3 Points of operation on performance curves. .4 Manufacturer to certify as to current model production. .5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes. In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00: use MCAC "Shop Drawing Submittal Title Sheet". Identify section and paragraph number. Shop drawings shall be submitted by specification section. Do not combine more than one section into one submission. Shop drawings shall indicate clearly the materials and/or equipment actually being supplied, all details of construction, accurate dimensions, capacity, operating characteristics and performance. Each shop drawing shall give the identifying number of the specific pump, fan, etc. for which it was prepared (e.g. fan F-7). Each shop drawing for non-catalogue items shall be prepared specifically for this project. Shop drawings and brochures for catalogue items shall be marked clearly to show the items being supplied. Each shop drawing or catalogue sheet shall be stamped and signed by the contractor to indicate that he has checked the drawing for conformance with all requirements of the drawings and specifications, that he has co-ordinated this equipment with other equipment to which it is attached and/or connected and that he has verified all dimensions to ensure the proper installation of equipment within the available space and without interference with the work of other trades. Ensure that electrical co-ordination is complete before submitting drawings for review. Installation of any equipment shall not start until after final review of shop drawings by the Departmental Representative has been obtained. When requested, shop drawings shall be supplemented by data explaining the theory of operation - for example: as variable speed motor control - the Departmental Representative may
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
Section 23 05 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
.13
(Cont'd) also request that this information be added to the maintenance and operating manual. Provide a lead sheet with the project name, issue date, issue number, specification section number, title of section and with space for shop drawing review stamps for the Contractor and Departmental Representative. The Contractor shall make notations with respect to the following aspects and any other deviations from the contract documents: .1 Deviation from specified performance, electrical requirements and equipment specified. .2 Changes in dimensions from equipment indicated or specified, including confirmation that equipment will fit into space allotted. Contractor shall provide written notation how deviations are being addressed and what co-ordination with other affected trades has been or will be undertaken. Departmental Representative's review of shop drawings is for general conformance only, and does not relieve the contractor from meeting all aspects of specification. The contractor is solely responsible for the completeness, correctness, and all information presented on shop drawings. There shall be no additional cost to Owner for failure of the contractor to complete a thorough review of shop drawings for compliance. The contractor shall not assume consultant has performed a thorough review and the contractor shall be ultimately responsible for completeness of shop drawings and the equipment conformance with specifications. One (1) copy of each shop drawing must be included in the operation and maintenance manual. Any equipment data, requested calculations, written certifications or other similar information specified or shown on the Drawings shall be included with shop drawing submittals. Shop drawings shall be submitted in order of delivery requirements, ie, all items that have long delivery times, or any item that is to be installed first, must be submitted first. The Contractor shall allow for consultant shop drawing review times in their schedule.
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
Section 23 05 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
1.12
CLEANING
.1
In preparation for final acceptance, clean and refurbish all equipment and leave in operating condition including replacement of all filters in all air and piping systems. Clean interior and exterior of all new systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork and air handling units. Upon completion remove temporary protection. Remove stains and smudges form paint work. Wash and polish plumbing fixtures. Replace broken, damaged or scratched fixtures.
.2
.3
.4
1.13 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS
.1
Provide co-ordination drawings for review by Departmental Representative prior to installation of conduit, piping, ductwork, etc. as specified in Division 21, 22 and 23. Three (3) copies of such drawings shall be submitted for review, of which one (1) will be retained by the Departmental Representative. Co-ordination drawings, OR fabrication drawings are required in all cases where in the Departmental Representative's opinion, interference between the various trades render such drawings necessary. Co-ordination and installation drawings will consist of dimensioned and scaled drawings showing locations of apparatus, ducts, piping, valves and all other accessories with all necessary sections and details. The drawings will be complete with dimensions of piping and conduits, locations of sleeves, openings, supports and anchors as well as all pertinent information concerning structural architectural and electrical works. Drawings will be produced utilizing a computer aided drafting system on existing building component drawings. Collaborate fully with all other Trades in order to determine the location of their respective work, thus avoiding any possible interference. Installation drawings shall be required: .1 For the location of sleeves, openings and holes to be provided in walls, floors, beams, and columns.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 23 05 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
1.13 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS (Cont'd)
.6
(Cont'd) For the anchors. .2 .3 For all work pertaining to automatic sprinklers and fire protection. .4 For all ventilation work. .5 For all supports in ventilation shafts. .6 For all mechanical work in equipment rooms, shafts, main and secondary electrical rooms. .7 For all mechanical rooms where space is limited. .8 Also wherever Departmental Representative deems necessary. .9 For all automatic sprinkler work, the co-ordination drawings will be the responsibility of the sprinkler contractor. The design of the structural framing of the mechanical equipment and major pipe run supports has been based on assumed loadings supplied during the design phase. Well ahead of the construction of the affected areas, prepare and submit drawings for review to the Departmental Representative showing the layout and weights of all finally selected mechanical equipment including details of concrete pads, concentrated pipe loads and point reactions of the equipment onto the structure. Structural design has been based on equipment listed by model number. Alternate equipment shall not exceed weight and dimensions of equipment listed without prior approval of Departmental Representative. If alternate equipment is not approved by Departmental Representative, Contractor shall supply equipment listed at no additional cost to Project. If alternate equipment is selected, Contractor shall provide all structural revisions necessary and pay all cost including engineering. Pump capacities, control valve sizing, etc., have been based on equipment specified. Upon submission of shop drawings, contractor shall review with Departmental Representative all design and equipment changes and where required to accommodate design or equipment changes contractor shall engineer and revise equipment capacities as required. There shall be no extra cost to Project for changes to equipment to accommodate changes discussed above. No installations shall proceed until this co-ordination has been completed.
.7
.8
Section 23 05 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
1.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
.1
Site records: .1 Departmental Representative will provide 1 set of reproducible mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each phase of the work. Mark there on all changes as work progresses and as changes occur. This shall include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring. .2 On a weekly basis, transfer information to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show all work as actually installed. .3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service. .4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection at all times. As-built drawings: .1 Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB), finalize production of as-built drawings. .2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (date). .3 Submit to Departmental Representative for approval and make corrections as directed. .4 TAB to be performed using as-built drawings. .5 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
.2
.3
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Do not dispose of unused paint material into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.3 .4
Section 23 05 00 Page 11 2011-05-25
1.16
HALOCARBONS
.1
Comply with Federal Halocarbon Regulations 2003 under the Canadian Environmental Protection Act 1999, EPAM and PWGSC Ontario Region Halocarbon Information Sheet dated March 2010.
1.17
MOCK-UP
.1
Provide mock-up (prior to installation commencing) of one cell utility chase (Y-chase). Actual chase to be mocked-up will be selected by Departmental Representative from Gallery Floor level. Mock-up shall be full size representing actual dimensions of chase interior including actual size components representing duct, pipe, fixtures and other items located inside chase. Actual product need not be used but mock-up dimensions must represent true installed sizes including insulation of all components incorporated. Mock-up of chase walls may be done using standard 20 mm plywood with external support as necessary. Coordinate with Electrical Divisions for incorporation of electrical components in mock-up. After completion of mock-up, Departmental Representative will review. Make revisions required by review. After acceptance by Departmental Representative, chase mock-up will be stored at site and used for reference during construction of actual installations.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.18 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATIONS
.1 .2
Unions or flanges: provide for ease of maintenance and disassembly. Space for servicing, disassembly and removal of equipment and components: provide as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated. Install equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel to or perpendicular to building lines. Provide new materials and equipment of proven design, quality and of current models with published ratings for which replacement parts are readily available. Materials and equipment
.3
.4
Section 23 05 00 Page 12 2011-05-25
1.18 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATIONS (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) must be free from blemishes, oxidation, damage, etc. The following definitions shall apply to all sections and drawings of Division 21, 22 and 23. .1 "CONCEALED" - mechanical services and equipment in hung ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred spaces. .2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein (eg. mechanical rooms). .3 "PROVIDE" - will mean supply, installation and connection. Uniformity: .1 Use product of one manufacturer unless otherwise specified, for equipment or material of the same type of classification. .2 Installation: .1 Unless otherwise specified, follow manufacturer's recommendations for safety, adequate access for inspection, maintenance and repairs. .2 Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly with minimum disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems without interference with building structure or other equipment. .3 Lubrication: .1 Provide accessible lubricating means for bearings, including permanent lubrication "Lifetime" bearings. Provide and install all necessary vibration control components. All fasteners used in inmate accessible areas shall be tamperproof (eg. Torx Plus security screws). Equipment drains: pipe to floor drains or funnel floor drains. Provide and install all backflow preventors necessary to protect the potable water system.
.5
.6
.7 .8
.9 .10
1.19 ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES
.1
Provide, locate and set all anchor bolts and fastening devices and equipment.
Section 23 05 00 Page 13 2011-05-25
1.20
ELECTRICAL
.1 .2
Electrical work to conform to Divisions 26, 27 and 28 including the following. Provide all controls, disconnects, magnetic starters, transformers, relays, wiring and panels for all motors and devices for packaged equipment as indicated in various specification sections. Electrical equipment shall bear CSA labels and/or ULC approvals to comply with local power utility's requirements. Conform to the requirements of the Canadian Electrical Code, National Building Code, local, municipal and provincial authorities. Control panels to be complete with barriered numbered terminal strip for interconnecting of conductors between master control panel and remote control panel and associated equipment. Controls .1 All power and control wiring, relays, transformers and wiring related to motorized dampers, thermostats, controllers, sensors, control panels, control devices, valves, pressure and limit switches, etc., which are related to control systems to be provided by Division 23, unless specifically indicated otherwise. .2 All wiring to be run in conduit. .3 Control wiring to be copper conductor type RW 90 (XLPE); minimum #14 AWG for power circuits and minimum #18 AWG for control only. .4 Conduit to be E.M.T. minimum 20 mm complete with compression couplings. Provide ground conductor in all conduit runs. .5 Use liquid tight flexible conduit for final connection to motorized dampers and vibrating equipment. Ensure that electrical contractor has provided for auxiliary contacts for the building control systems. Coordinate wiring point terminations for the EMCS with Division 25.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.21
MOTORS
.1 .2
Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified. If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of any equipment,
Section 23 05 00 Page 14 2011-05-25
1.21 MOTORS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) install motor approved by Departmental Representative for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur until specified motor is installed. Motors under 373 W ( HP): speed as indicated, continuous duty, built-in overload protection, resilient mount, single phase, 120 V, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Motors 373 W ( HP) and larger: EEMAC Class B, squirrel cage induction, speed as indicated, continuous duty, drip proof, ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 40C, 3 phase, 575 V, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Motor controllers and all electrical wiring unless otherwise shown shall be provided under Electrical Division. Electrical items integrated with the mechanical systems (motorized valve, motorized dampers, temperature, and pressure devices, etc.) are provided by Division 25. Factory installed wiring and equipment in packaged units to be compatible with external control power; and connecting terminals shall be clearly identified. Polyphase motors shall be squirrel cage induction of CEMA Design B for fans and pumps. Where motor type, power, speed or other essential data are not specified, obtain this information from the manufacturer of the equipment and have it approved before ordering motors. CEMA standards shall be taken as minimum requirements for motor design and performance. All motors shall be CEMA open-drip-proof unless specified otherwise. All motors shall be specially selected for quiet operation and high efficiency and compatible with variable speed drives (where applicable). Motors shall be rated for continuous duty and full load. The maximum rise in temperature shall not exceed 40C for open-drip-proof and 55C for totally enclosed.
.3
.4
.5
.6 .7
.8 .9 .10
.11
Section 23 05 00 Page 15 2011-05-25
1.21 MOTORS (Cont'd)
.12
Motors shall be capable of withstanding momentary overloads of 50% without injurious overheating.
Motors for bases with Motors for base plate belt drive shall have adjustable set screws to maintain belt tensions. direct drive shall be dowelled at at two points.
.13
.14
Motor shall have legible nameplates giving manufacturer's name, shop number, watts, rpm, current characteristics. Motor enclosures: suitable for service and location specified in project. Obtain information from manufacture and have it approved before ordering. Terminal box: coordinate dimensions and locations with Electrical Work. Locate box clear of motor ventilation opening. All motors 18.75 kW (25 HP) and above shall be supplied with integral thermistor protection.
.15
.16
.17
1.22
BELT DRIVES
.1 .2
Fit reinforced belts in sheave matched to drive. Multiple belts to be matched sets. Use cast iron or steel sheaves secured to shafts with removable keys unless otherwise specified. For motors under 7.5 kW (10 HP): standard adjustable pitch drive sheaves, having plus or minus 10% range. Use mid-position of range for specified r/min. For motors 7.5 kW (10 HP)and over: sheave with split tapered bushing and keyway having fixed pitch unless specifically required for item concerned. Provide sheave of correct size to suit balancing. Minimum drive rating: 1.5 times nameplate rating on motor. Keep overhung loads within manufacturer's design requirements on prime mover shafts. Motor slide rail adjustment plates to allow for centre line adjustment. Provide one complete set of spare belts for every drive supplied under this Contract.
.3
.4
.5
.6 .7
Section 23 05 00 Page 16 2011-05-25
1.23
GUARDS
.1 .2
Provide guards for unprotected drives. Guards for belt drives: .1 Expanded metal screen welded to steel frame. .2 Minimum 1.3 mm thick sheet metal tops and bottoms. .3 40 mm dia. holes on both shaft centres for insertion of tachometer. .4 Removable for servicing. Provide means to permit lubrication and use of test instruments with guards in place. Install belt guards to allow movement of motors for adjusting belt tension. Guard for flexible coupling: .1 "U" shaped, minimum 1.5 mm thick galvanized mild steel. .2 Securely fasten in place. .3 Removable for servicing. Unprotected fan inlets or outlets: .1 Wire or expanded metal screen, galvanized, 20 mm mesh. .2 Net free area of guard: not less than 80% of fan openings. .3 Securely fasten in place. .4 Removable for servicing. Guards to meet safety requirements of Provincial Ministry of Labour and local authorities have jurisdiction.
.3 .4 .5
.6
.7
1.24 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
.1
Equipment supports supplied by equipment manufacturer: specified elsewhere in Div. 21, 22 and 23. Equipment supports not supplied by equipment manufacturer: fabricate from structural grade steel meeting requirements of Div. 05. Submit structural calculations with shop drawings. Mount base mounted equipment on chamfered edge housekeeping pads, minimum of 100 mm high and 50 mm larger than equipment dimensions all around. Housekeeping pads shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. Provide all necessary mechanical equipment vibration control, specified or recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
.2
.3
.4
Section 23 05 00 Page 17 2011-05-25
1.25
SLEEVES
.1
Pipe sleeves: at points where pipes pass through masonry, concrete or fire rated assemblies and as indicated. Schedule 40 steel pipe. Cast iron sleeves or steel sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at midpoint: .1 Through foundation walls. .2 Where sleeve extends above finished floor. Sizes: minimum 6 mm clearance all around, between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation. Terminate sleeves flush with surface of concrete and masonry walls, concrete floors on grade and 25 mm above other floors. For equipment room floors, terminate 100 mm above floor and provide concrete curb. Fill voids around pipes: .1 Caulk between sleeve and pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic. .2 Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, provide space for firestopping. Where pipes/ducts pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity. .3 Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve. .4 Fill future-use sleeves with lime plaster or other easily removable filler. .5 Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint to CAN/CGSB-1.181-99. Sleeves are to be furnished and set under this division. Coordinate and provide supervision during all concrete pouring operations. Make disposable wood sleeves for rectangular ducts passing through concrete block or poured concrete floors or walls. Sleeves for round ducts to be preformed black iron with reinforcing braces or capped to maintain shape and with mounting lugs. Where ducts pass through equipment room floors, provide 100 mm high concrete curb around duct allowing adequate space for fire damper sleeve and room for expansion. Concrete curbs shall be by Division 23.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 23 05 00 Page 18 2011-05-25
1.25 SLEEVES (Cont'd)
.9
Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeves of sufficent diameter to permit free movement of the pipe. Where pipe or ducts are insulated, make sleeve of sufficient diameter to pass pipe insulation. Check floor and wall construction and finish to determine proper lengths or sleeves for various locations; make actual length to suit the following: to match the thickness of the finished surface of the slab or partition for wet areas to extend 50 mm above finished surface (i.e.: mechanical/electrical service areas, washrooms, pipe chases, etc.).
All sleeves shall have all voids filled between metal sleeve material and pipe, conduit or duct passing through. The procedure for sleeve caulking shall be as follows: .1 For insulated ducts and pipes passing through sleeves, the space between the insulation and sleeve shall be caulked and each side sealed with a non-hardening mastic. .2 Non-insulated pipes and ducts shall be caulked as above. This Division shall prepare sleeving drawings indicating the size and locations of openings required in concrete floor slabs, roof slab/decks and walls for piping, ductwork, and equipment. In case of failure to provide information in time (ie. before the concrete is poured) any extras incurred shall be at the expense of this Division.
.10
.11
1.26 PREPARATION FOR FIRESTOPPING
.1 .2
Refer to Section 07 84 00. Firestopping material and installation within annular space between pipes, ducts, insulation and adjacent fire separation. Uninsulated unheated pipes not subject to movement: no special preparation. Uninsulated heated pipes subject to movement: wrap with non-combustible smooth material to permit pipe to move without damaging firestopping material. Insulated pipes and ducts: ensure integrity of insulation and vapour barrier at fire separation.
.3 .4
.5
Section 23 05 00 Page 19 2011-05-25
1.27
ESCUTCHEONS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
On pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors and ceilings in finished areas. Chrome or nickel plated brass or Type 302 stainless steel, one piece type with set screws. Outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve. Inside diameter to fit around finished pipe. Do not use split-type escutcheon plates. Secure to pipe on finished surfaces but not insulation.
1.28
TESTS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Give 72 hours written notice of date for tests. Insulate or conceal work only after testing and approval by Departmental Representative. Conduct tests in presence of Departmental Representative. Bear costs including retesting and making good. Piping: .1 General: maintain test pressure without loss for 4 h unless otherwise specified. .2 Hydraulically test steam and hydronic piping systems at 1-1/2 times system operating pressure or minimum 862 kPa, whichever is greater. .3 Test drainage, waste and vent piping to Ontario Building Code and authorities having jurisdiction. .4 Test domestic hot, cold and recirculation water piping at 1-1/2 times system operating pressure or minimum 862 kPa, whichever is greater. .5 Test fire systems in accordance with NFPA and authorities having jurisdiction and as specified elsewhere. Test natural gas systems to CSA B149.1-10 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Equipment: test as specified in relevant sections. Prior to tests, isolate all equipment or other parts which are not designed to withstand test pressures or test medium.
.6 .7 .8
Section 23 05 00 Page 20 2011-05-25
1.28 TESTS (Cont'd)
.9 .10 .11
Provide written confirmation for each test conducted.

Provide any equipment required to conduct tests. Test water shall be potable water and should be from a municipal system that treats water with chlorination or some other appropriate means to kill bacteria.
1.29
ACCESS DOORS
.1
Supply access doors to concealed mechanical equipment for operating, inspecting, adjusting and servicing. Flush mounted 600 mm x 600 mm for body entry and 300 mm x 300 mm for hand entry unless otherwise noted. Doors to open 180, have rounded safety corners, concealed hinges, screwdriver latches and anchor straps. Access doors located in inmate accessible areas shall be security type c/w Torx Plus security screwdriver latches. Material: .1 Special areas such as tiled or marble surfaces: use stainless steel with brushed satin or polished finish as directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Remaining areas: use prime coated steel. Installation: .1 Locate so that concealed items are accessible. .2 Locate so that hand or body entry as applicable is achieved. .3 Installation by General Contractor. Fire rated access panels: 16 ga. mounting frame, 20 gauge sandwich type insulated self-closing door with concealed hinge, 50 mm thickness of fire rated insulation in door, self-latching ring pull latch, primer coated, 1 hour rating. Access doors located in inmate accessible areas shall be security type c/w Torx Plus security screwdriver latches. Access doors must maintain fire rating if installed in a fire rated assembly. Refer to Architectural Drawings for location of fire rated walls and ceilings.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 23 05 00 Page 21 2011-05-25
1.29 ACCESS DOORS (Cont'd)
.7
Furnish and locate access doors for concealed valves, traps, strainers, cleanouts, balancing and fire dampers, air vents and other parts requiring accessibility for service and maintenance.
1.30 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
.1
General: .1 To be compatible with and to suit pressure rating of piping system. .2 Where pipes of dissimilar metals are joined. .3 Coupling type shall be as follows unless otherwise noted in specific Sections. Pipes NPS 2 and under: isolating unions. Pipes NPS 2-1/2 and over: isolating flanges.
.2 .3
1.31
DRAIN VALVES
.1 .2
Locate at low points and at section isolating valves unless otherwise specified. Minimum NPS 3/4 unless otherwise specified: bronze, with hose end male thread and complete with cap and chain.
1.32 CUTTING, PATCHING & MAKING GOOD
.1 .2
All cutting and patching shall be by Division 01. Division 21, 22 and 23 shall advise the trade responsible for cutting, in advance of the time required, of the location and extent of cutting required, and any other pertinent information. Division 21, 22 and 23 shall advise the trade responsible for patching and finishing of any pertinent information, such as clearance requirements around equipment. Costs arising to correct work due to failure to provide co-ordination information on time, incorrect sizes or locations or other pertinent information, shall not be extra to the Owner.
.3
.4
Section 23 05 00 Page 22 2011-05-25
1.33 MECHANICAL SYSTEM SHUTDOWN
.1
Comply with Institution's shutdown procedures.
1.34 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND INFORMATION
.1
Material and equipment shall be brought into the building in such assemblies and sizes as to enter into the spaces where they are to be located and to be small enough to be hoisted into the building without difficulty. Any cutting, patching, etc. involved in getting large assemblies into place shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Coordinate with Division 01. Immediately inform the Departmental Representative in writing, of all discrepancies, errors, omissions, contradictions and ambiguities. The necessary Addendum or bulletin will be issued to all Bidders. Include a complete cross-checking of Drawing and Specifications for sizes and quantities to correspond correctly. Oral, telephone or E-mail instructions are not valid. Bring obvious discrepancies or omissions to the attention of the Departmental Representative during the Tender Period. Questions may be presented by bidders up to time of tender closing. Questions presented near this time may not be answered.
.2
1.35
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Locate distribution systems, equipment and materials to provide minimum interference and maximum useable space. Where interference occurs, Departmental Representative shall approve relocation of equipment and materials. This contractor shall notify other Subcontractors who are concerned, of all openings, foundation work, hangers, inserts, anchors, or other provisions necessary in their work for the installation of this work and he shall furnish all information and necessary materials in ample time so that proper provisions can be made for same, and shall supply and correctly and accurately place all inserts sleeves, anchors, etc. Where anchors are required to be drilled and placed, this Division shall be responsible for their supply and installation. Pipe hangers and
.2
.3
.4
Section 23 05 00 Page 23 2011-05-25
1.35 CO-ORDINATION (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) supports listed in Section 23 05 29 shall be provided by Division 23.
1.36 REQUIREMENTS OF INSPECTION DEPARTMENTS
.1
All work shall be installed in accordance with all laws and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction in each case, particularly all affected departments of the Municipality and Province. Electrical equipment supplied must conform to the regulations of CSA and the local utility. Anything necessary to make the work comply with these requirements shall be provided by this contractor without additional cost to the Owners if reasonably could have been foreseen when tendering. The Contractor shall prepare drawings in addition to Engineer's drawings as may be required by various Inspection Departments having jurisdiction, and obtain their approval before proceeding with the work. In the event that the Inspection Department's request deviations from the Engineer's layout, contractor shall consult the Departmental Representative before proceeding with same. Provide all inspection certificates prior to request for substantial completion. Include copy of inspection certificates in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
.2
.3
.4
1.37
DRAWINGS
.1
The drawings shall be considered to show the general character and scope of the work and not the exact details of the installation. The installation shall be complete with all accessories required for a complete and operative installation. The drawings show the approximate location for the special apparatus and the materials throughout the building. The arrangement shown on the drawings is more or less diagrammatic and as such approximated only, and may be altered, as approved by the Departmental Representative, to meet the requirements of the apparatus, etc., and of the building. Each Subcontractor shall be held responsible for all measurements for his work throughout, and he shall arrange his piping, wiring and apparatus to conform to the Architectural and Structural details in a
.2
Section 23 05 00 Page 24 2011-05-25
1.37 DRAWINGS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) satisfactory manner and shall cooperate with other contractors to ensure that work shall meet all requirements of diverse Contracts. The contractor is particularly cautioned that small scale Departmental Representative's plans must be supplemented by his own detail drawings where necessary for proper coordination of the work. Items shown on the drawings but not specified or specified but not shown shall be included. Items obviously required to provide a complete working system, but not specified nor shown shall be included. In order to show more clearly the arrangement of the work, plans and sections do not show every valve, thermometer, pressure gauge or other system accessory. Refer to the Mechanical Standards details and to the specifications to determine the requirements. Certain details indicated on the drawings are general in nature and specific labelled detail references to each and every occurrence of use are not indicated, however, such details shall be applicable to every occurrence on the drawings. All piping and ductwork in finished areas shall be concealed in ceiling spaces and shafts or chased into walls. No exposed piping or ductwork shall be installed in such areas unless specifically reviewed by the Departmental Representative. No piping shall be concealed in outside walls. Vent pipes, exhaust hoods or other mechanical equipment mounted on roof, or housing for such equipment, shall n ot be closer to the edge of roof than 1.8 m (6'-0"), unless specifically reviewed by the Departmental Representative. Changes and modifications necessary to ensure co-ordination and to avoid interference and conflicts with other trades, shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. Leave areas clear of piping and ducts where space is indicated reserved for future equipment, and equipment for other trades.
.3
.4 .5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
Section 23 05 00 Page 25 2011-05-25
1.37 DRAWINGS (Cont'd)
.12
Adequate space and provisions shall be left for removal of coils and servicing of equipment, with minimum inconvenience to the operation of systems.
Where equipment is shown to be 'roughed-in only' obtain accurate information from the Departmental Representative before proceeding with the work. Before fabricating ductwork or piping for installation, make certain that such items can be installed as shown on the drawings without interfering with the structure or the work of all other trades. Any problems that cannot be solved in agreement with the other trades affected, shall be submitted for decision. If ductwork or piping is prefabricated prior to the investigation and reaching for a solution to possible interference problems, necessary changes in such prefabricated items shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. Off-sets in piping and ductwork may not be indicated in all cases, but are to be included in the contract as required. The location and size of existing services shown on the Drawings are based on the best available information. The actual location, and size, of existing services shall be verified in the field before work is commenced. Refer to 'Co-ordination Drawings' for additional requirements.
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
1.38 HOISTING AND RIGGING
.1
In accordance with the construction schedule provide and arrange for transportation, of all equipment and materials to site, and for the rigging, hoisting, storing and setting in place of equipment.
1.39 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKERS
.1
Perform the work in a neat and careful manner so that items are installed, and will remain, plumb, square and straight. Items not so installed will be rejected and redone at no extra cost to the Owner. When required either by the specifications or manufacturers instructions, have manufacturer or
.2
Section 23 05 00 Page 26 2011-05-25
1.39 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKERS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) his accredited agent or the supplier supervise the work. Provide qualified tradespeople to perform all the work. Tradespeople to have a minimum of 3 years of similar experience. Provide a on site supervisor to supervise the work of Division 21, 22 and 23. When requested of the Departmental Representative, provide documentation demonstrating experience of tradespeople and supervisor. If tradesperson or supervisor does not have adequate experience of qualifications remove from site and provide suitable replacement. Site supervisor to have minimum of 10 years of experience with demonstrated supervisory experience on similar sized projects. Provide resume of site supervisor to Departmental Representative prior to start of project. Departmental Representative has the right to reject or remove at any time any worker or site supervisor if in his opinion the individual does not possess the required experience or qualifications. When a personnel has been removed or rejected provide suitable replacement. No horseplay will be tolerated on site at any time. The contractor shall be responsible for putting an immediate end to all horseplay.
.3
.4
1.40
GUARANTEE
.1
This contractor shall guarantee all material and workmanship used in the work to be in strict accordance with the specifications, of best quality and type obtainable to give first-class construction and proper and efficient operation, and free from any defects. Any such defects which may appear in any of the work within one year after written acceptance of this work shall be repaired and replaced by this contractor without additional expense to the Owner. Where such defects occur, this contractor shall be held responsible for all costs incurred in making the defective work good. This shall not obsolete any longer warranties on specific items of equipment. All injuries to adjacent work particularly plaster, wood finishes or other materials, or damage to other equipment, caused by such defects of this contractor's work or by subsequent replacement and repairs, shall be
.2 .3
Section 23 05 00 Page 27 2011-05-25
1.40 GUARANTEE (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) made good at the expense of this contractor. All repair work shall be done by trades responsible for the original work.
1.41 REVIEW/ TAKEOVER PROCEDURES
.1 .2
Conform to Division 01. Substantial performance will not be considered until the following items have been completed to the Departmental Representative's satisfaction. .1 All systems are complete and operation. .2 All systems have been commissioned and successfully past testing over the entire range of their operating capacities under automatic control. (Note: seasonal or environmental conditions resulting in the delay of some testing will be accommodated by issuance of conditional certificate). .3 Commissioning and testing reports. .4 Air balancing reports. .5 "As-built" and/or record drawings. .6 Operations and Maintenance Manuals. .7 The Owner, operating and maintenance personnel have received training on all systems and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Section 23 05 05 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
.1
.1 .2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
.1 .2 .3
In accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise indicated. Use valves and either unions or flanges for isolation and ease of maintenance and assembly. Use double swing joints when equipment mounted on vibration isolation and when piping subject to movement.
Section 23 05 05 Page 2 2011-05-25
3.2
CLEARANCES
.1
Provide clearance around systems, equipment and components for observation of operation, inspection, servicing, maintenance and as recommended by manufacturer. Provide space for disassembly, removal of equipment and components as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated (whichever is greater) without interrupting operation of other system, equipment, components.
.2
3.3
DRAINS
.1 .2
Install piping with grade in direction of flow except as indicated. Install drain valve at low points in piping systems, at equipment and at section isolating valves. Pipe each drain valve discharge separately to above floor drain. Discharge to be visible. Drain valves: NPS 3/4 gate or globe valves unless indicated otherwise, with hose end male thread, cap and chain.
.3 .4
3.4
AIR VENTS
.1 .2 .3
Install manual air vents at high points in piping systems. Install isolating valve at each automatic air valve. Install drain piping to approved location and terminate where discharge is visible.
3.5 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
.1 .2 .3 .4
General: compatible with system, to suit pressure rating of system. Locations: where dissimilar metals are joined. NPS 2 and under: isolating unions or bronze valves. Over NPS 2: isolating flanges.
Section 23 05 05 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.6 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Screwed fittings jointed with Teflon tape. Protect openings against entry of foreign material. Install to isolate equipment and allow removal without interrupting operation of other equipment or systems. Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards. Install exposed piping, equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Install concealed pipework to minimize furring space, maximize headroom, conserve space. Slope piping, except where indicated, in direction of flow for positive drainage and venting. Install, except where indicated, to permit separate thermal insulation of each pipe. Group piping wherever possible and as indicated. Ream pipes, remove scale and other foreign material before assembly. Use eccentric reducers at pipe size changes to ensure positive drainage and venting. Provide for thermal expansion as indicated. Valves: .1 Install in accessible locations. .2 Remove interior parts before soldering. .3 Install with stems above horizontal position unless otherwise indicated. .4 Valves accessible for maintenance without removing adjacent piping. .5 Install globe valves in bypass around control valves. .6 Use gate or ball valves at branch take-offs for isolating purposes except where otherwise specified. .7 Install butterfly valves between weld neck flanges to ensure full compression of liner. .8 Install ball valves for glycol service. .9 Use chain operators on valves NPS 2-1/2 and larger where installed more than 2400 mm above floor in Mechanical Rooms.
.4 .5
.6 .7
.8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13
Section 23 05 05 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.6 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.14
Check Valves: Install swing check valves in horizontal .1 lines on discharge of pumps and elsewhere as indicated.
3.7
SLEEVES
.1
General: install where pipes pass through masonry, concrete structures, fire rated assemblies, and elsewhere as indicated. Material: schedule 40 black steel pipe. Construction: foundation walls and where sleeves extend above finished floors to have annular fins continuously welded on at mid-point. Sizes: 6 mm minimum clearance between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation. Installation: .1 Concrete, masonry walls, concrete floors on grade: terminate flush with finished surface. .2 Other floors: terminate 25 mm above finished floor. .3 Before installation, paint exposed exterior surfaces with heavy application of zinc-rich paint to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Sealing: .1 Foundation walls and below grade floors: fire retardant, waterproof non-hardening mastic. .2 Elsewhere: Provide space for firestopping. Maintain fire rating integrity. .3 Sleeves installed for future use: fill with lime plaster or other easily removable filler. .4 Ensure no contact between copper pipe or tube and sleeve.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
3.8
ESCUTCHEONS
.1
Install on pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in finished areas. Construction: one piece type with set screws. Chrome or nickel plated brass or type 302 stainless steel. Sizes: outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve. Inside diameter to fit around pipe or outside of insulation if so provided.
.2
.3
Section 23 05 05 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.9 PREPARATION FOR FIRE STOPPING
.1
Material and installation within annular space between pipes, ducts, insulation and adjacent fire separation to Section 07 84 00. Uninsulated unheated pipes not subject to movement: No special preparation. Uninsulated heated pipes subject to movement: wrap with non-combustible smooth material to permit pipe movement without damaging fires topping material or installation. Insulated pipes and ducts: ensure integrity of insulation and vapour barriers.
.2 .3
.4
3.10 FLUSHING OUT OF PIPING SYSTEMS
.1 .2
Flush system in accordance with Section 23 08 02. Before start-up, clean interior of piping systems in accordance with requirements of Section 01 74 11 supplemented as specified in relevant mechanical sections. Preparatory to acceptance, clean and refurbish equipment and leave in operating condition, including replacement of filters in piping systems.
.3
3.11 PRESSURE TESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPEWORK
.1 .2
Advise Departmental Representative 48 hours minimum prior to performance of pressure tests. Pipework: test as specified in relevant sections of heating, ventilating and air conditioning work. Maintain specified test pressure without loss for 4 hours minimum unless specified for longer period of time in relevant mechanical sections. Prior to tests, isolate equipment and other parts which are not designed to withstand test pressure or media. Conduct tests in presence of Departmental Representative. Pay costs for repairs or replacement, retesting, and making good. Departmental Representative to determine whether repair or replacement is appropriate.
.3
.4
.5 .6
Section 23 05 05 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.11 PRESSURE TESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPEWORK (Cont'd)
.7
Insulate or conceal work only after approval and certification of tests by Departmental Representative.
3.12 EXISTING SYSTEMS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Connect into existing piping systems at times approved by Departmental Representative. Request written approval 10 days minimum, prior to commencement of work. Be responsible for damage to existing plant by this work. Ensure daily clean-up of existing areas.
3.13
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Section 23 05 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 (I-P), Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings, (ANSI Approved; IESNA Co-Sponsored). Electrical Equipment Manufacturers' Advisory Council (EEMAC)
.2
1.2 SECTIONS INCLUDES
.1
Electrical work to conform to Electrical Divisions including the following: .1 Supplier and installer responsibility is indicated in Motor, Control and Equipment Schedule on electrical drawings and related mechanical responsibility is indicated on Mechanical Equipment Schedule on mechanical drawings. .2 Control wiring and conduit is specified in Division 26 except for conduit, wiring and connections below 50 V which are related to control systems specified in Division 25. Refer to Division 26 for quality of materials and workmanship.
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
Provide maintenance data for motors, drives and guards for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 33 00.
.1
Section 23 05 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
Motors to be high efficiency, in accordance with local Hydro company standards and the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1.
2.2
MOTORS
.1 .2
Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified. If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of equipment, install motor approved by Departmental Representative for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur until specified motor is installed. Motors under 559 W (3/4 HP) : speed as indicated, premium efficiency continuous duty, TEFC, ball bearings or cylindrical roller bearings, built in overload protection, resilient mount, single phase, 115 V, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Motors 559 W (3/4 HP) and larger: EEMAC Class B, squirrel cage induction, speed as indicated, premium efficiency continuous duty, TEFC, ball bearings or cylindrical roller bearings, maximum temperature rise 40C, 3 phase, 575 V, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Motors designated for service with variable speed drive equipment shall be compatible with that service. Motors shall be inverter wound with service factor of 1.15. Motors shall be suitable for continuous duty in ambient temperatures from -25C to +40C at altitude of installation. Nominal efficiency and minimum guaranteed efficiency to be stamped on nameplate of each motor. Bearings to provide L-10 life at 40,000 hours with external load per NEMA MG 1 to 14.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 23 05 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3 TEMPORARY MOTORS
.1
If delivery of specified motor will delay completion or commissioning work, install motor approved by Departmental Representative for temporary use. Work will only be accepted when specified motor is installed.
2.4
BELT DRIVES
.1 .2
Fit reinforced belts in sheave matched to drive. Multiple belts to be matched sets. Use cast iron or steel sheaves secured to shafts with removable keys unless otherwise specified. For motors under 7.5 kW (10 HP): standard adjustable pitch drive sheaves, having plus or minus 10% range. Use mid-position of range for specified r/min. For motors 7.5 kW (10 HP) split tapered bushing and pitch unless specifically concerned. Provide sheave suit balancing. and over: sheave with keyway having fixed required for item of correct size to
.3
.4
.5 .6
Correct size of sheave to be determined during commissioning. Minimum drive rating: 1.5 times nameplate rating on motor. Keep overhung loads within manufacturer's design requirements on prime mover shafts. Motor slide rail adjustment plates to allow for centre line adjustment. Supply one set of spare belts for each set installed in accordance with Section 23 05 00.
.7 .8
2.5
DRIVE GUARDS
.1 .2
Provide guards for unprotected drives. Guards for belt drives; .1 Expanded metal screen welded to steel frame. .2 Minimum 1.2 mm thick sheet metal tops and bottoms. .3 38 mm dia. holes on both shaft centres for insertion of tachometer. .4 Removable for servicing. Provide means to permit lubrication and use of test instruments with guards in place.
.3
Section 23 05 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.5 DRIVE GUARDS (Cont'd)
.4 .5
Install belt guards to allow movement of motors for adjusting belt tension.
Guard for flexible coupling: .1 "U" shaped, minimum 1.6 mm thick galvanized mild steel. .2 Securely fasten in place. .3 Removable for servicing. Unprotected fan inlets or outlets: .1 Wire or expanded metal screen, galvanized, 19 mm mesh. .2 Net free area of guard: not less than 80% of fan openings. .3 Securely fasten in place. .4 Removable for servicing.
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Fasten securely in place. Make removable for servicing, easily returned into, and positively in position.
END
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
Section 23 05 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM A53/A53M-10, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A105/A105M-10a, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications.
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for fixtures, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .1 Manufacturer, model number, line contents, pressure and temperature rating. .2 Movement handled, axial, lateral, angular and the amounts of each. .3 Nominal size and dimensions including details of construction and assembly.
.1
Provide maintenance and operation data in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .1 Data to include: .1 Servicing requirements, including special requirements, stuffing box packing, lubrication and recommended procedures.
.1 .2
.3
Section 23 05 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION
.1 .2
Application: to suit motion. Minimum length in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to suit offset as indicated. Inner hose: stainless steel corrugated. Braided wire mesh stainless steel outer jacket. Diameter and type of end connection: as indicated or as per manufacturer's recommendations. Operating conditions: .1 To match system requirements.
.3 .4 .5
.6
2.2 ANCHORS AND GUIDES
.1
Anchors: .1 Provide as indicated. .2 Concrete: to Section 03 30 11. .3 Reinforcement: to Section 03 20 00. Alignment guides: .1 Provide as recommended by manufacturer. .2 To accommodate specified thickness of insulation. .3 Vapour barriers, jackets to remain uninterrupted.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install expansion joints with cold setting, as indicated and as instructed by Departmental Representative. Make record of cold settings. Install expansion joints and flexible connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install pipe anchors and guides as indicated. Anchors to withstand 150% of axial thrust. Do welding in accordance with section 23 05 17.
.2
.3 .4
Section 23 05 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.2 PIPE CLEANING AND START-UP
.1
In accordance with Section 23 08 02.
3.3
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
PIPE WELDING
Section 23 05 17 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B31.1-2010, Power Piping. .2 ANSI/ASME B31.3-2010, Process Piping. .3 ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code-2010: .1 BPVC 2010 Section I: Power Boilers. .2 BPVC 2010 Section V: Nondestructive Examination. .3 BPVC 2010 Section IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications. American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association (ANSI/AWWA) .1 ANSI/AWWA C206-11, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. American Welding Society (AWS) .1 ANSI/AWS C1.1M/C1.1:2000(R2006), Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding. .2 ANSI/AWS Z49.1:2005, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Process. .3 AWS WI:2000, Welding Inspection Handbook. .4 AWS B3.0-1941, Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA W47.2-11, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum. .2 CSA W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding. .3 CSA B51-09, Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Code. Includes Update No. 1 (2009). .4 CSA W117.2-06, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes. .5 CSA W178.1-08, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations. .6 CSA W178.2-08, Certification of Welding Inspectors.
.2
.3
.4
.1
PIPE WELDING
Section 23 05 17 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Qualifications: .1 Welders: .1 Welding qualifications in accordance with CSA B51 and T.S.S.A. .2 Use qualified and licensed welders possessing certificate for each procedure performed from authority having jurisdiction. .3 Submit welder's qualifications to Departmental Representative. .4 Each welder to possess identification symbol issued by authority having jurisdiction. .5 Certification of companies for fusion welding of aluminum in accordance with CSA W47.2. .2 Inspectors: .1 Inspectors qualified to CSA W178.2. .3 Certifications: .1 Registration of welding procedures in accordance with CSA B51 and T.S.S.A. .2 Copy of welding procedures available for inspection. .3 Safety in welding, cutting and allied processes in accordance with CSA W117.2.
.1 .2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRODES
.1
Electrodes: in accordance with CSA W48 Series.
PIPE WELDING
Section 23 05 17 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 QUALITY OF WORK
.1
Welding: in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.3, ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sections I and IX and ANSI/AWWA C206, using procedures conforming to AWS B3.0, ANSI/AWS C1.1M/C1.1, special procedures specified elsewhere in Mechanical Divisions, and applicable requirements of provincial authority having jurisdiction.
3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
.1 .2
Identify each weld with welder's identification symbol. Backing rings: .1 Where used, fit to minimize gaps between ring and pipe bore. .2 Do not install at orifice flanges. Fittings: .1 NPS 2 and smaller: install welding type sockets. .2 Branch connections: install welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings.
.3
3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Review weld quality requirements and defect limits of applicable codes and standards with Departmental Representative before work is started. Formulate "Inspection and Test Plan" in co-operation with Departmental Representative. Do not conceal welds until they have been inspected, tested and approved by inspector. Provide for inspector to visually inspect welds during early stages of welding procedures in accordance with Welding Inspection Handbook. Repair or replace defects as required by codes and as specified.
.2 .3 .4
PIPE WELDING
Section 23 05 17 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.4 SPECIALIST EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS
.1
General: .1 Perform examinations and tests by specialist qualified to CSA W178.1 and CSA W178.2 and approved by Departmental Representative. .2 To ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section V, CSA B51 and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. .3 As required by T.S.S.A. .4 Inspect and test 10% of welds in accordance with "Inspection and Test Plan" by non-destructive visual examination and full gamma ray radiographic (hereinafter referred to as "radiography") tests. Hydrostatically test welds to ANSI/ASME B31.3 and T.S.S.A. Visual examinations: include entire circumference of weld externally and wherever possible internally. Failure of visual examinations: .1 Upon failure of welds by visual examination, perform additional testing as directed by Departmental Representative of total of up to 10% of welds, selected at random by Departmental Representative by radiographic tests. Full radiographic tests for piping systems. .1 Spot radiography: .1 Conduct spot radiographic tests of up to 10% of welds, selected at random by Departmental Representative from welds which would be most difficult to repair in event of failure after system is operational. .2 Radiographic film: .1 Identify each radiographic film with date, location, name of welder, and submit to Departmental Representative. Replace film if rejected because of poor quality. .3 Interpretation of radiographic films: .1 By qualified radiographer. .4 Failure of radiographic tests: .1 Extend tests to welds by welder responsible when those welds fails tests.
.2 .3
.4
.5
PIPE WELDING
Section 23 05 17 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.5 DEFECTS CAUSING REJECTION
.1
As described in ANSI/ASME B31.3 and ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code.
3.6 REPAIR OF WELDS WHICH FAILED TESTS
.1
Re-inspect and re-test repaired or re-worked welds at Contractor's expense.
3.7
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS
Sect 23 05 19.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
.1
Materials and installation for thermometers and pressure gauges in piping systems.
.1
Section 23 05 53.01 - Mechanical Identification.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). .1 ANSI/ASME B40.100-2005, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments. .2 ANSI/ASME B40.200-2008, Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote Reading. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB 14.4-M88, Thermometers, Liquid-in-Glass, Self-Indicating, Commercial/Industrial Type. .2 CAN/CGSB 14.5-M88, Thermometers, Bimetallic, Self-Indicating, Commercial/Industrial Type.
.2
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit shop drawings and product data. Submit manufacturer's product data for following items: .1 Thermometers. .2 Pressure gauges. .3 Stop cocks. .4 Syphons. .5 Wells. .6 Pressure snubbers.
1.5 HEALTH AND SAFETY
.1
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
Sect 23 05 19.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
2.1
GENERAL
.1 .2
Design point to be at mid point of scale or range. Ranges: suitable for operating range of system.
2.2 DIRECT READING THERMOMETERS
.1
Industrial, variable angle type, liquid filled, 225 mm scale length: to CAN/CGSB-14.4.
2.3 REMOTE READING THERMOMETERS
.1
100 mm diameter inert gas filled activated dial type: to CAN/CGSB-14.5, accuracy within one scale division, brass movement, stainless steel capillary, stainless steel spiral armour, stainless steel bulb and polished brass or stainless steel case for wall mounting.
2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS
.1 .2
Copper pipe: copper or bronze. Steel pipe: brass or stainless steel.
2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
112 mm, dial type: to ANSI/ASME B40.100, Grade 2A, stainless steel bourdon tube having 0.5% accuracy full scale unless otherwise specified. Provide: .1 Snubber for pulsating operation. .2 Diaphragm assembly for corrosive service. .3 Gasketted pressure relief back with solid front. .4 Bronze stop cock. .5 Oil filled for high vibration applications.
.2
Sect 23 05 19.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Install so they can be easily read from floor or platform. If this cannot be accomplished, install remote reading units. Install between equipment and first fitting or valve.
.2
3.2
THERMOMETERS
.1 .2
Install in wells on piping. Provide heat conductive material inside well. Install in locations as indicated and on inlet and outlet of: .1 Water heating and cooling coils. .2 Water boilers. .3 DHW tanks. .4 Heat exchangers. Install wells for balancing purposes, elsewhere as required to achieve proper readings. Use extensions where thermometers are installed through insulation.
.3 .4
3.3 PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
Install in following locations: .1 Suction and discharge of pumps. .2 Upstream and downstream of PRV's. .3 Upstream and downstream of control valves. .4 Inlet and outlet of coils. .5 Outlet of boilers. .6 In other locations as indicated. Install gauge cocks for balancing purposes, elsewhere as required to achieve proper readings. Use extensions where pressure gauges are installed through insulation.
.2
.3
3.4
NAMEPLATES
.1
Install engraved lamicoid nameplates as specified in Section 23 05 53.01, identifying medium.
END
VALVES - BRONZE
Sect 23 05 23.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983(R2006), Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). .2 ANSI/ASME B16.18-2001(R2005), Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. ASTM International .1 ASTM A276-10, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. .2 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. .3 ASTM B283/B283M-11a, Standard Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy Die Forgings (Hot-Pressed). .4 ASTM B505/B505M-10, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings. .5 ASTM B16/B16M-10, Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS) .1 MSS SP-25-2008, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions. .2 MSS SP-80-2008, Bronze Gate Globe, Angle and Check Valves. .3 MSS SP-110-2010, Ball Valves, Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.
.2
.3
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets for equipment and systems and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit data for valves specified in this Section.
.3
VALVES - BRONZE
Sect 23 05 23.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1
Extra Materials/Spare Parts: .1 Furnish following spare parts: .1 Valve seats: one for every 10 valves each size, minimum 1. .2 Discs: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1. .3 Stem packing: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1. .4 Valve handles: 2 of each size. .5 Gaskets for flanges: one for every 10 flanged joints. .2 Tools: .1 Furnish special tools for maintenance of systems and equipment.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: .1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Valves: .1 Except for specialty valves, to be single manufacturer. .2 Products to have CRN registration numbers. End Connections: .1 Connection into adjacent piping/tubing: .1 Steel pipe systems: screwed ends to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. .2 Copper tube systems: solder ends or threaded ends to ANSI/ASME B16.18.
.2
VALVES - BRONZE
Sect 23 05 23.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Lockshield Keys: .1 Where lockshield valves are specified, provide 10 keys of each size: malleable iron cadmium plated.
Gate Valves: .1 NPS 2 and under, bronze, solid wedge disc: .1 Standard specification: MSS SP-80. .2 Bonnet: with hex. shoulders. .3 Connections: with hex. shoulders. .4 Inspection and pressure testing: to MSS SP-80. Tests to be hydrostatic. .5 Packing: high grade non-asbestos packing. .6 Handwheel: non-ferrous. Nut: bronze to ASTM B62. .7 Body: with long disc guides, screwed bonnet with stem retaining nut. Globe Valves: .1 Requirements common to globe valves, unless specified otherwise: .1 Standard specification: MSS SP-80. .2 Bonnet: union with hexagonal shoulders. .3 Connections: screwed with hexagonal shoulders. .4 Pressure testing: to MSS SP-80. Tests to be hydrostatic. .5 Stuffing box: threaded to bonnet with gland follower, packing nut, high grade non-asbestos packing. .6 Handwheel: non-ferrous. .7 Handwheel Nut: bronze to ASTM B62. .2 NPS 2 and under, plug disc, Class 150, screwed ends: .1 Body and bonnet: union bonnet. .2 Disc and seat ring: tapered plug type with disc stem ring of AISI S420 stainless steel to ASTM A276, loosely secured to stem. .3 Operator: handwheel. .3 Angle valve, NPS 2 and under, composition disc, Class 150: .1 Body and bonnet: union bonnet. .2 Disc and seat: renewable rotating PTFE disc in slip-on easily removable disc holder having integral guides, regrindable bronze seat, loosely secured to stem. .3 Operator: lockshield. Check Valves: .1 NPS 2 and under, bronze swing type, bronze disc: .2 Standard specification: MSS SP-80.
.4
.5
.6
VALVES - BRONZE
Sect 23 05 23.01 Page 4 2011-05-25
.6
Check Valves:(Cont'd) .3 Connections: with hex. shoulders. .4 Body: Y-pattern with integral seat at 45, screw-in cap with hex head. .5 Disc and seat: renewable rotating disc, two-piece hinge disc construction; seat: regrindable. Ball Valves: .1 NPS 2 and under: .1 Body and cap: cast high tensile bronze to ASTM B62 or brass to ASTM B16/B16M. .2 Stem: tamperproof ball drive. .3 Stem packing nut: external to body. .4 Ball and seat: stainless steel solid full port ball and teflon seats. .5 Stem seal: PTFE with external packing nut. .6 Operator: removable lever handle. Circuit Balancing Valves: .1 Sizes: calibrated balancing valves, as specified. .2 NPS-2 and under: .1 General: .1 Y style globe valve, designed to provide precise flow measurement and control, with valved ports for connection to differential pressure meter. .2 Accuracy: .1 Readout to be within plus or minus 2% of actual flow at design flow rate. .3 Pressure die-cast dezincification resistant copper alloy construction, Teflon disc, screw-in bonnet. .1 Flow control: At least four (4) full turns of handwheel with digital handwheel and tamperproof concealed mechanical memory. .4 Insulation: .1 Use prefabricated shipping packaging of 5.4 R polyurethane as insulation. .5 Drain connection: .1 NPS 3/4 valved and capped, suitable for hose socket. .2 Incorporated into valve body or provided as separate item.
.7
.8
VALVES - BRONZE
Sect 23 05 23.01 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem above horizontal. Remove internal parts before soldering or brazing. Install all valves such that adequate clearance is provided to allow for obstruction free operation. Install valves at all branch take-offs and to isolate each piece of equipment, and as indicated. For all threaded valves provide one screwed union beside each valve to allow easy replacement of valve. Install all valves as per manufacturers' instructions.
.4
.5
.6
3.2
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
VALVES - CAST IRON
Sect 23 05 23.02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1 .2
Section Includes: .1 Valves, gate and check. Related Sections: .1 Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements. .2 Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). .1 ANSI/ASME B16.1-2010, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125 and 250. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM). .1 ASTM A49-01(2006), Specification for Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Joint Bars, Microalloyed Joint Bars, and Forged Carbon Steel Compromise Joint Bars. .2 ASTM A126-04(2009), Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. .3 ASTM B61-08, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. .4 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. .5 ASTM B85/B85M-10, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings. .6 ASTM B209-07, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS). .1 MSS SP-70-2006, Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .2 MSS SP-71-2005, Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .3 MSS SP-82-1992, Valve Pressure Testing Methods.
.2
.3
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
VALVES - CAST IRON
Sect 23 05 23.02 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
Product Data: .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit data for valves specified in this section.
Closeout Submittals: .1 Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.3
.1
1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND DISPOSAL
.1 .2 .3
Waste Management and Disposal: Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
1.6
MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials/Spare Parts: .1 Furnish following spare parts: .1 Valve seats: one for every 10 valves each size, minimum 1. .2 Discs: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1. .3 Stem packing: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1. .4 Valve handles: 2 of each size. .5 Gaskets for flanges: one for every 10 flanged joints. .2 Tools: .1 Furnish special tools for maintenance of systems and equipment.
VALVES - CAST IRON
Sect 23 05 23.02 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
.1
Valves: .1 Except for specialty valves, to be of single manufacturer. Standard specifications: .1 Gate valves: MSS SP-70. .2 Globe valves: MSS SP-85. .3 Check valves: MSS SP-71. Requirements common to valves, unless specified otherwise: .1 Body, bonnet: cast iron to ASTM B209 Class B. .2 Connections: flanged ends plain face to ANSI/ASME B16.1. .3 Inspection and pressure testing: to MSS SP-82. .4 Bonnet gasket: non-asbestos. .5 Stem: to have precision-machined Acme or 60 degrees V threads, top screwed for handwheel nut. .6 Stuffing box: non-galling two-piece ball-jointed packing gland, gland bolts and nuts. .7 Gland packing: non-asbestos. .8 Handwheel: Die-cast aluminum alloy to ASTM B85/B85M or malleable iron to ASTM A49. Nut of bronze to ASTM B62. .9 Identification tag: with catalogue number, size, other pertinent data. All products to have CRN registration numbers.
.2
.3
.4
2.2
GATE VALVES
.1
NPS 2 - 8, cast iron, bronze iron trim, solid wedge disc: .1 Body and multiple-bolted bonnet: with bosses in body and bonnet for taps and drains, full length disc guides designed to ensure correct re-assembly. .2 Disc: solid offset taper wedge, bronze to ASTM B62 up to and including NPS 3, bronze rings rolled into cast iron disc on other sizes, secured to bronze stem to ASTM B62. .3 Seat rings: renewable bronze to ASTM B62, screwed into body. .4 Stem: bronze to ASTM B62.
VALVES - CAST IRON
Sect 23 05 23.02 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.3 UNDERWRITERS APPROVED GATE VALVE
.1
NPS 2 1/2 - 14, OS&Y: .1 Approvals: UL and FM approved for fire service. .2 UL and FM Label: on valve yoke. .3 Body, Bonnet: cast iron to ASTM A126 Class B. Wall thicknesses to ANSI/ASME B16.1 and ULC ORD-C262. .4 Bonnet bushing, yoke sleeve: bronze, to FM requirements. .5 Packing gland: bronze. .6 Stem: manganese bronze. Diameter to ULC ORD-C262. .7 Stuffing box dimensions, gland bolt diameter: to ULC ORD-C262. .8 Bosses for bypass valve, drain: on NPS 4 and over. .9 Disc: solid taper wedge. Up to NPS 3: bronze. NPS 4 and over: cast iron with bronze disc rings. .10 Disc seat ring: self-aligning, Milwood undercut on NPS 3 - 12. .11 Pressure rating: .1 NPS 2-1/2 - 12: 1.7 MPa CWP. .2 NPS 14: 1.2 MPa CWP. .12 Operator: handwheel.
2.4 VALVE OPERATORS
.1
Install valve operators as follows: .1 Handwheel: on valves except as specified. .2 Handwheel with chain operators: on valves installed more than 2400 mm above floor in mechanical equipment rooms.
2.5
CHECK VALVES
.1
NPS 2 and over: .1 Body and bolted cover: with tapped and plugged opening on each side for hinge pin. .1 Up to NPS 16: cast iron to ASTM A126 Class B. .2 Disc: Rotating for extended life. .1 Up to NPS 6: bronze to ASTM B62. .2 NPS 8 and over: bronze-faced cast iron. .3 Seat rings: renewable bronze to ASTM B62 screwed into body. .4 Hinge pin, bushings: renewable bronze to ASTM B62.
VALVES - CAST IRON
Sect 23 05 23.02 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem above horizontal. Handwheel with chain operators are to be installed on all valves more than 2400 mm above floor in mechanical rooms. Install all valves such that adequate clearance is provided to allow for obstruction free operation. Install valves at all branch take-offs and to isolate each piece of equipment, and as indicated. Install all valves as per manufacturers' recommendations.
.3
.4
.5
END
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Sect 23 05 23.05 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). .1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983(R2006), Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). .2 ANSI/ASME B16.1-2010, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125 and 250. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.5-2009, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. .4 ANSI/ASME B16.11-2009, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. .5 ANSI/ASME B16.25-2007, Buttwelding Ends. .6 ANSI/ASME B16.34-2009, Valves Flanged, Threaded and Welding End, Includes Supplement (2010). American Petroleum Institute (API). .1 API Std 609-2009, Butterfly Valves: Double-flanged, Lug- and Wafer-Type, Seventh Edition. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A126-04(2009), Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. .2 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS). .1 MSS SP-67-2002a, Butterfly Valves.
.2
.3
.4
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Closeout Submittals: .1 Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.3
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Sect 23 05 23.05 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND DISPOSAL
.1
Waste Management and Disposal: Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BUTTERFLY VALVES - RESILIENT SEAT - 200 PSIG
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Except to specialty valves, to be of single manufacturer. To be suitable for dead-end service. CRN registration number required for products. Sizes: Lug type: NPS 2 to 10. Pressure rating for tight shut-off at temperatures up to maximum for seat material. .1 NPS 2 - 10: 1380 kPa. Minimum seat temperature ratings to 120C. Application: on-off operation. Full lug body. Operators: .1 NPS 2 - 6: Handles capable of locking in any of ten (10) positions - 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Handle and release trigger - ductile iron. Return spring and hinge pin: carbon steel. Latch plate and mounting hardware: cadmium plated carbon steel. Standard coating: black laquer. Designed to comply with MSS SP-67 and API Std 609. Compatible with ANSI Class 125/Class 150 flanges.
.6 .7 .8 .9
.10 .11
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Sect 23 05 23.05 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.1 BUTTERFLY VALVES - RESILIENT SEAT - 200 PSIG (Cont'd)
.12
Construction: Body cast iron. .1 Disc: ductile iron. .2 .3 Seat: EPDM. .4 Shaft: 416 stainless steel. .5 Taper pin: 316 SS. .6 Key: carbon steel. .7 O-Ring: Buna-N. .8 Bushings: Teflon.
2.2 MOUNTING FLANGES PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Class 125 cast iron to ANSI/ASME B16.1 or Class 150 steel to ANSI/ASME B16.5 pipe flanges.
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Valve and mating flange preparation. .1 Inspect adjacent pipeline, remove rust, scale, welding slag, other foreign material. .2 Ensure that valve seats and pipe flange faces are free of dirt or surface irregularities which may disrupt flange seating and cause external leakage. .3 Install butterfly valves with disc in almost closed position. .4 Inspect valve disc seating surfaces and waterway and eliminate dirt or foreign material.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
.1 .2
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not use gaskets between pipe flanges and valves unless instructed otherwise by valve manufacturer. Verify suitability of valve for application by inspection of identification tag. Mount actuator on to valve prior to installation. Handle valve with care so as to prevent damage to disc and seat faces. Valves in horizontal pipe lines should be installed with stem in horizontal position to minimize liner and seal wear.
.3 .4 .5 .6
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Sect 23 05 23.05 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.2 INSTALLATION OF VALVES (Cont'd)
.7
Ensure that valves are centered between bolts before bolts are tightened and then opened and closed to ensure unobstructed disc movement. If interference occurs due, for example to pipe wall thickness, taper bore adjacent piping to remove interference.
END
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Section 23 05 29 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1 .2
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B31.1-10, Power Piping. ASTM International .1 ASTM A125-1996(2007), Standard Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated. .2 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. .3 ASTM A563-07a, Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry (MSS) .1 MSS SP-58-2009, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application and Installation. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.3
.4
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets for hangers and supports and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada for fabricated custom structural assemblies. .2 Submit shop drawings for: .1 Bases, hangers and supports. .2 Connections to equipment and structure. .3 Structural assemblies. Manufacturers' Instructions: .1 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.
.3
.4
Section 23 05 29 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: .1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Design Requirements: .1 Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer's recommendations utilizing manufacturer's regular production components, parts and assemblies. .2 Base maximum load ratings on allowable stresses prescribed by ANSI/ASME B31.1 or MSS SP-58. .3 Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmit excessive quantities of heat to building structure. .4 Design hangers and supports to support systems under conditions of operation, allow free expansion and contraction, prevent excessive stresses from being introduced into pipework or connected equipment. .5 Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning. Amount of adjustment in accordance with MSS SP-58.
2.2
GENERAL
.1 .2
Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with MSS SP-58 and ANSI/ASME B31.1. Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or erection purposes.
Section 23 05 29 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3
PIPE HANGERS
.1
Finishes: .1 Pipe hangers and supports: galvanized after manufacture. .2 Use electro-plating galvanizing process. .3 Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping are epoxy coated. Upper attachment structural: suspension from lower flange of I-Beam: .1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: malleable iron C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip. .1 Rod: 9 mm UL listed. .2 Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 or greater, all hot piping: malleable iron beam clamp, eye rod, jaws and extension with carbon steel retaining clip, tie rod, nuts and washers, UL listed, to MSS SP-58. Upper attachment structural: suspension from upper flange of I-Beam: .1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: ductile iron top-of-beam C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip, UL listed, to MSS SP-58. .2 Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 or greater, all hot piping: malleable iron top-of-beam jaw-clamp with hooked rod, spring washer, plain washer and nut, UL listed. Upper attachment to concrete: .1 Ceiling: carbon steel welded eye rod, clevis plate, clevis pin and cotters with weldless forged steel eye nut. Ensure eye 6 mm minimum greater than rod diameter. .2 Concrete inserts: wedge shaped body with knockout protector plate UL listed, to MSS SP-58. Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP-58: .1 Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only. .2 Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipework is anticipated. .3 Do not use 22 mm or 28 mm rod. Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP-58: .1 Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel black. .2 Attachments for copper piping: copper plated black steel. .3 Use insulation shields for hot pipework .4 Oversize pipe hangers and supports for hot pipework.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 23 05 29 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.3 PIPE HANGERS (Cont'd)
.7
Adjustable clevis: material to MSS SP-58, UL listed, clevis bolt with nipple spacer and vertical adjustment nuts above and below clevis. .1 Ensure "U" has hole in bottom for rivetting to insulation shields. Yoke style pipe roll: carbon steel yoke, rod and nuts with cast iron roll, to MSS SP-58. U-bolts: carbon steel to MSS SP-58 with 2 nuts at each end to ASTM A563. .1 Finishes for steel pipework: black. .2 Finishes for copper, glass, brass or aluminum pipework: black, with formed portion plastic coated. Pipe rollers: cast iron roll and roll stand with carbon steel rod to MSS SP-58.
.8 .9
.10
2.4
RISER CLAMPS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Steel or cast iron pipe: galvanized carbon steel to MSS SP-58, type 42, UL listed. Copper pipe: carbon steel copper plated to MSS SP-58, type 42. Bolts: to ASTM A307. Nuts: to ASTM A563.
2.5 INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS
.1
Insulated cold piping: .1 64 kg/m3 density insulation plus insulation protection shield to: MSS SP-58, galvanized sheet carbon steel. Length designed for maximum 3 m span. Insulated hot piping: .1 Curved plate 300 mm long, with edges turned up, welded-in centre plate for pipe sizes NPS 12 and over, carbon steel to comply with MSS SP-58.
.2
2.6 CONSTANT SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS
.1
Springs: alloy steel to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-5% spring rate tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with Certified Mill Test Report (CMTR). Load adjustability: 10% minimum adjustability each side of calibrated load. Adjustment without
.2
Section 23 05 29 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.6 CONSTANT SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS (Cont'd)
.2
Load adjustability:(Cont'd) special tools. Adjustments not to affect travel capabilities. Provide upper and lower factory set travel stops. Provide load adjustment scale for field adjustments. Total travel to be actual travel + 20%. Difference between total travel and actual travel 25 mm minimum. Individually calibrated scales on each side of support calibrated prior to shipment, complete with calibration record.
.3 .4 .5
.6
2.7 VARIABLE SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS
.1
Vertical movement: 13 mm minimum, 50 mm maximum, use single spring pre-compressed variable spring hangers. Vertical movement greater than 50 mm: use double spring pre-compressed variable spring hanger with 2 springs in series in single casing. Variable spring hanger complete with factory calibrated travel stops. Provide certificate of calibration for each hanger. Steel alloy springs: to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-5% spring rate tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with CMTR.
.2
.3
.4
2.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
.1
Fabricate equipment supports not provided by equipment manufacturer from structural grade steel meeting requirements of Section 05 12 23. Submit calculations with shop drawings.
2.9 EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES
.1
Provide templates to ensure accurate location of anchor bolts.
Section 23 05 29 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.10 PADS
HOUSE-KEEPING
.1
Provide 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads for base-mounted equipment; size pads 50 mm larger than equipment; chamfer pad edges. Concrete: to Section 03 30 11.
.2
2.11 OTHER EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
.1 .2
From structural grade steel meeting requirements of Section 05 12 23. Submit structural calculations with shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with: .1 Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Vibration Control Devices: .1 Install on piping systems at pumps, boilers and as indicated elsewhere. Clamps on riser piping: .1 Support independent of connected horizontal pipework using riser clamps and riser clamp lugs welded to riser. .2 Bolt-tightening torques to industry standards. .3 Steel pipes: install below coupling or shear lugs welded to pipe. .4 Cast iron pipes: install below joint. Clevis plates: .1 Attach to concrete with 4 minimum concrete inserts, one at each corner. Provide supplementary structural steelwork where structural bearings do not exist or where concrete inserts are not in correct locations. Use approved constant support type hangers where: .1 Vertical movement of pipework is 13 mm or more, .2 Transfer of load to adjacent hangers or connected equipment is not permitted. Use variable support spring hangers where: .1 Transfer of load to adjacent piping or to connected equipment is not critical.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 23 05 29 Page 7 2011-05-25
.7
(Cont'd) .2 Variation in supporting effect does not exceed 25% of total load.
3.2
HANGER SPACING
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Plumbing piping: to Ontario Plumbing Code and authority having jurisdiction. Fire protection: to applicable fire code. Gas piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.8 m. Copper piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.5 m. Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below for steel, but not less than one hanger at joints. Table listings for straight runs without concentrated loads and where full linear movement is not required. Within 300 mm of each elbow. Maximum Pipe Size : NPS up to 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6 8 10 12 Maximum Spacing Steel 2.4 m 3.0 m 3.0 m 3.7 m 3.7 m 3.7 m 3.7 m 4.3 m 4.3 m 4.3 m 4.9 m 4.9 m Maximum Spacing Copper 1.8 m 2.4 m 2.4 m 3.0 m 3.0 m 3.3 m 3.6 m
.6
.7
Pipework greater than NPS 12: to MSS SP-58.
3.3 HANGER INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions. Adjust hangers to equalize load. Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members.
Section 23 05 29 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.4 HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT
.1
Angularity of rod hanger resulting from horizontal movement of pipework from cold to hot position not to exceed 4 degrees from vertical. Where horizontal pipe movement is less than 13 mm, offset pipe hanger and support so that rod hanger is vertical in the hot position.
.2
3.5 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
.1
Adjust hangers and supports: .1 Ensure that rod is vertical under operating conditions. .2 Equalize loads. Adjustable clevis: .1 Tighten hanger load nut securely to ensure proper hanger performance. .2 Tighten upper nut after adjustment. C-clamps: .1 Follow manufacturer's recommended written instructions and torque values when tightening C-clamps to bottom flange of beam. Beam clamps: .1 Hammer jaw firmly against underside of beam.
.2
.3
.4
3.6
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Section 23 05 48 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 03 30 11 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC.
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide separate shop drawings for each isolated system complete with performance and product data.
.1
2.1
GENERAL
.1
Size and shape of bases type and performance of vibration isolation to be as indicated.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC PADS
.1
Type EP1 - neoprene waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 50 durometer; maximum loading 350 kPa. Type EP2 - rubber waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 30 durometer natural rubber; maximum loading 415 kPa. Type EP3 - neoprene-steel-neoprene; 9 mm minimum thick neoprene bonded to 1.71 mm steel plate; 50 durometer neoprene, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers; maximum loading 350 kPa. Type EP4 - rubber-steel-rubber; 9 mm minimum thick rubber bonded, to 1.71 mm steel plate; 30 durometer natural rubber, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers; maximum loading 415 kPa.
.2
.3
.4
Section 23 05 48 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.3 ELASTOMERIC MOUNTS
.1
Type M1 - colour coded; neoprene in shear; maximum durometer of 60; threaded insert and two bolt-down holes; ribbed top and bottom surfaces.
2.4
SPRINGS
.1
Design stable springs so that ratio of lateral to axial stiffness is equal to or greater than 1.2 times the ratio of static deflection to working height. Select for 50% travel beyond rated load. Units to be complete with levelling devices. Ratio of height when loaded to diameter of spring to be between 0.8 to 1.0. Cadmium plate for all installations. Colour code springs.
.2 .3 .4
2.5
SPRING MOUNT
.1 .2
Zinc or cadmium plated hardware; housings coated with rust resistant paint. Type M2 - stable open spring: support on bonded 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad. Type M3 - stable open spring: 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad, bonded under isolator and on isolator top plate; levelling bolt for rigidly mounting to equipment. Type M4 - restrained stable open spring: supported on bonded 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad; built-in resilient limit stops, removable spacer plates. Type M5 - enclosed spring mounts with snubbers for isolation up to 950 kg maximum. Performance: to suit application.
.3
.4
.5 .6
2.6
HANGERS
.1
Colour coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers. Arrange to permit hanger box or rod to move through a 30 arc without metal to metal contact.
Section 23 05 48 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.6 HANGERS (Cont'd)
.2
Type H1 - neoprene - in-shear, moulded with rod isolation bushing which passes through hanger box.
Type H2 - stable spring, elastomeric washer, cup with moulded isolation bushing which passes through hanger box. Type H3 - stable spring, elastomeric element, cup with moulded isolation bushing which passes through hanger box. Type H4 - stable spring, elastomeric element with precompression washer and nut with deflection indicator. Performance: to suit application.
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.7 ACOUSTIC BARRIERS FOR ANCHORS AND GUIDES
.1
Acoustic barriers: between pipe and support, consisting of 25 mm minimum thick heavy duty duck and neoprene isolation material.
2.8 HORIZONTAL THRUST RESTRAINT
.1
Spring and elastomeric element housed in box frame; assembly complete with rods and angle brackets for equipment and ductwork attachment; provision for adjustment to limit maximum start and stop movement to 9 mm. Arrange restraints symmetrically on either side of unit and attach at centerline of thrust.
.2
2.9
INERTIA BASE
.1
Type B3 - Full depth perimeter structural or formed channels, frames: welded in place reinforcing rods running in both directions; spring mounted, carried by gussetted height-saving brackets welded to frame; and clear housekeeping pads by 50 mm minimum. Pump bases: "T" shaped, where applicable, to provide support for elbows. Concrete: to Section 03 30 11.
.2 .3
Section 23 05 48 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE
.1
Schedule: Type of Isolator H1 H3/HTR H3 Deflection mm 6 25 13 Remarks External External External External
Equipment In-Line transfer & exhaust fan Return/exhaust In-line pumps Base mounted pumps
150 mm 25 inertia pads & springs1,2 1Base mounted pump shall be mounted on inertia pads and concrete housekeeping pads. 2Depth of inertia pad shall be sized based on size of assembly.
.2
Rotating equipment internal to the following equipment shall have isolation provided by the unit manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Applications Handbook (2003), Chapter 47, Table 42.
END
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Sect 23 05 53.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA B149.1-10, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code, Includes Update No. 1 (2010). Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB 1.60-97, Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. .2 CAN/CGSB 24.3-92, Identification of Piping Systems. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 10-2010, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. .2 NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .3 NFPA 14-2010, Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems.
.2
.3
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Product Data. Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product data to include paint colour chips, other products specified in this section. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Samples to include nameplates, labels, tags, lists of proposed legends.
.1 .2
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Health and Safety: .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Sect 23 05 53.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (Cont'd)
.2
Waste Management and Disposal: Construction/Demolition Waste Management .1 and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Do not dispose of unused paint coating material into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
.1
Metal or plastic laminate nameplate mechanically fastened to each piece of equipment by manufacturer. Lettering and numbers raised or recessed. Information to include, as appropriate: .1 Equipment: manufacturer's name, model, size, serial number, capacity. .2 Motor: voltage, Hz, phase, power factor, duty, frame size.
.2 .3
2.2 SYSTEM NAMEPLATES
.1
Colours: .1 Hazardous: red letters, white background. .2 Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by applicable codes). Construction: .1 3 mm thick laminated plastic or white anodized aluminum, matte finish, with square corners, letters accurately aligned and machine engraved into core. Sizes: .1 Conform to following table: Size # mm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sizes (mm) 10 13 13 20 20 20 25 25 x x x x x x x x 50 75 75 100 100 200 125 125 No. of Lines 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 Height of Letters (mm) 3 5 3 8 5 8 12 8
.2
.3
Sect 23 05 53.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 SYSTEM NAMEPLATES (Cont'd)
.3
Sizes:(Cont'd) .1 Conform to following table:(Cont'd) No. of Height of Lines Letters ______________________________________________ (mm) 9 35 x 200 1 20 .2 Use maximum of 25 letters/numbers per line. Size # mm Sizes (mm)
.4
Locations: .1 Terminal cabinets, control panels: use size #5. .2 Equipment in Mechanical Rooms: use size #9. Identification for PWGSC Preventive Maintenance Support System (PMSS): .1 Use arrangement of Main identifier, Source identifier, Destination identifier. .2 Equipment in Mechanical Room: .1 Main identifier: size #9. .2 Source and Destination identifiers: size #6. .3 Terminal cabinets, control panels: size #5. .3 Equipment elsewhere: sizes as appropriate.
.5
2.3 EXISTING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
.1
Where existing identification system does not cover for new work, use identification system specified this section. Before starting work, obtain written approval of identification system from Departmental Representative.
.2
2.4 PIPING SYSTEMS GOVERNED BY CODES
.1
Identification: .1 Natural gas: to CSA B149.1 and authority having jurisdiction. .2 Sprinklers: to NFPA 13. .3 Standpipe and hose systems: to NFPA 14. .4 Fire hose cabinets: to NFPA 14. .5 Fire extinguishers: to NFPA 10.
Sect 23 05 53.01 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.5 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
.1
Identify contents by background colour marking, pictogram (as necessary), legend; direction of flow by arrows. To CAN/CGSB-24.3 except where specified otherwise. Pictograms: .1 Where required: Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regulations. Legend: .1 Block capitals to sizes and colours listed in CAN/CGSB-24.3. Arrows showing direction of flow: .1 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation less than 75 mm: 100 mm long x 50 mm high. .2 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation 75 mm and greater: 150 mm long x 50 mm high. .3 Use double-headed arrows where flow is reversible. Extent of background colour marking: .1 To full circumference of pipe or insulation. .2 Length to accommodate pictogram, full length of legend and arrows. Materials for background colour marking, legend, arrows: .1 Pipes and tubing 20 mm and smaller: waterproof and heat-resistant pressure sensitive plastic marker tags. .2 Other pipes: pressure sensitive plastic-coated cloth vinyl with protective overcoating, waterproof contact adhesive undercoating, suitable for ambient of 100% RH and continuous operating temperature of 150 degrees C and intermittent temperature of 200 degrees C. Colours and Legends: .1 Where not listed, obtain direction from Departmental Representative. .2 Colours for legends, arrows: to following table: Background colour: Yellow Green Red Legend, arrows: BLACK WHITE WHITE
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.3 Background colour marking and legends for piping systems:
Sect 23 05 53.01 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.5 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS (Cont'd) Contents
.7
Colours and Legends:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) Background colour marking Green Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Green Green Green Green Green Green Yellow Yellow Yellow to Codes to Codes Red Red Legend CITY WATER HEATING SUPPLY HEATING RETURN MAKE-UP WTR BLR. FEED WTR L.P. STEAM DOM. HW SUPPLY DOM. HW CIRC DOM. CWS STORM SAN SAN. VENT REF. SUCTION REF. LIQUID REF. HOT GAS FIRE PROT. WTR SPRINKLERS
City water Hot water heating supply Hot water heating return Make-up water Boiler feed water Steam - low pressure Domestic hot water supply Dom. HWS recirculation Domestic cold water supply Storm water Sanitary Plumbing vent Refrigeration suction Refrigeration liquid Refrigeration hot gas Natural gas Gas regulator vents Fire protection water Sprinklers
2.6 IDENTIFICATION DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
.1 .2
50 mm high stencilled letters and directional arrows 150 mm long x 50 mm high. Colours: back, or co-ordinated with base colour to ensure strong contrast.
2.7 VALVES, CONTROLLERS
.1 .2
Brass tags with 12 mm stamped identification data filled with black paint. Include flow diagrams for each system, of approved size, showing charts and schedules with identification of each tagged item, valve type, service, function, normal position, location of tagged item.
2.8 CONTROLS COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls, sensors with system nameplates specified in this section. Inscriptions to include function and (where appropriate) fail-safe position.
.2
Sect 23 05 53.01 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.9
LANGUAGE
.1
Identification in English.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TIMING
.1
Provide identification only after painting specified Section 09 91 23 has been completed.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Perform work in accordance with CAN/CGSB-24.3 except as specified otherwise. Provide ULC and/or CSA registration plates as required by respective agency. Identify systems, equipment to conform to PWGSC PMSS.
3.3
NAMEPLATES
.1
Locations: .1 In conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading and identification from operating floor. Standoffs: .1 Provide for nameplates on hot and/or insulated surfaces. Protection: .1 Do not paint, insulate or cover.
.2
.3
3.4 LOCATION OF IDENTIFICATION ON PIPING AND DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
.1
On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, equipment rooms, galleries, tunnels: at not more than 17 m intervals and more frequently if required to ensure that at least one is visible from any one viewpoint in operating areas and walking aisles. Adjacent to each change in direction. At least once in each small room through which piping or ductwork passes. On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow. On both sides of separations such as walls, floors, partitions.
.2 .3 .4 .5
Sect 23 05 53.01 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.4 LOCATION OF IDENTIFICATION ON PIPING AND DUCTWORK SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.6
Where system is installed in pipe chases, ceiling spaces, galleries, confined spaces, at entry and exit points, and at access openings.
At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run. At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled valves, and dampers. Where this is not possible, place identification as close as possible, preferably on upstream side. Identification easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and from access points. .1 Position of identification approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight, considering operating positions, lighting conditions, risk of physical damage or injury and reduced visibility over time due to dust and dirt.
.7 .8
.9
3.5 VALVES, CONTROLLERS
.1
Valves and operating controllers, except at plumbing fixtures, radiation, or where in plain sight of equipment they serve: Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks. Install one copy of flow diagrams, valve schedules mounted in frame behind non-glare glass where directed by Departmental Representative. Provide one copy (reduced in size if required) in each operating and maintenance manual. Number valves in each system consecutively.
.2
.3
3.6
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Section 23 05 93 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
.1
TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and to do other work as specified in this section. Standard: TAB to be most stringent of TAB standards of AABC, NEBB, SMACNA and ASHRAE. Do TAB of all systems, equipment, components, controls specified in Division 23. TAB shall be performed by an independent TAB agency engaged by the contractor.
.2 .3 .4
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL
.1
Names of personnel it is proposed to perform TAB to be submitted to and approved by Departmental Representative within 90 days of award of contract. Provide documentation confirming qualifications, successful experience.
.2
1.3
PURPOSE OF TAB
.1
Test to verify proper and safe operation, determine actual point of performance, evaluate qualitative and quantitative performance of equipment, systems and controls at design, average and low loads using actual or simulated loads. Adjust and regulate equipment and systems so as to meet specified performance requirements and to achieve specified interaction with other related systems under normal and emergency loads and operating conditions. Balance systems and equipment to regulate flow rates to match load requirements over full operating ranges.
.2
.3
1.4
EXCEPTIONS
.1
TAB of systems and equipment regulated by codes, standards to be to satisfaction of authority having jurisdiction.
Section 23 05 93 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Schedule time required for TAB (including repairs, re-testing) into project construction and completion schedule so as to ensure completion before acceptance of project. Do TAB of each system independently and subsequently, where interlocked with other systems, in unison with those systems. Co-ordinate TAB with controls, mechanical and electrical contractors.
.2
.3
1.6
PRE-TAB REVIEW
.1
Review contract documents before project construction is started and confirm in writing to Departmental Representative adequacy of provisions for TAB and other aspects of design and installation pertinent to success of TAB. Review specified standards and report to Departmental Representative in writing all proposed procedures which vary from standard. During construction, co-ordinate location and installation of TAB devices, equipment, accessories, measurement ports and fittings.
.2
.3
1.7
START-UP
.1
Follow start-up procedures as recommended by equipment manufacturer unless specified otherwise. Follow special start-up procedures specified elsewhere in Divisions 22 and 23.
.2
1.8 OPERATION OF SYSTEMS DURING TAB
.1
Operate systems for length of time required for TAB and as required by Departmental Representative for verification of TAB reports.
1.9
START OF TAB
.1 .2 .3
Notify Departmental Representative 7 days prior to start of TAB. Start TAB when building is essentially completed, including: Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, other construction affecting TAB.
Section 23 05 93 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.9 START OF TAB (Cont'd)
.4 .5 .6 .7
Application of weatherstripping, sealing, caulking complete.

All pressure, leakage, other tests specified elsewhere in Divisions 22 and 23. All provisions for TAB installed and operational. Start-up, verification for proper, normal and safe operation of mechanical and associated electrical and control systems affecting TAB including but not limited to: .1 Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment. .2 Air systems: .1 Filters in place, clean. .2 Duct systems clean. .3 Ducts, air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified tolerances. .4 Correct fan rotation. .5 Fire, smoke, volume control dampers installed and open. .6 Coil fins combed, clean. .7 Access doors, installed, closed. .8 Outlets installed, volume control dampers open. .3 Liquid systems: .1 Flushed, filled, vented. .2 Correct pump rotation. .3 Strainers in place, baskets clean. .4 Isolating and balancing valves installed, open. .5 Calibrated balancing valves installed, at factory settings. .6 Chemical treatment systems complete, operational.
1.10 APPLICATION TOLERANCES
.1
Do TAB to following tolerances of design values: .1 Hydronic systems: plus or minus 10%. .2 All other HVAC systems: plus or minus 5%.
1.11 ACCURACY TOLERANCES
.1
Measured values to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values.
Section 23 05 93 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.12
INSTRUMENTS
.1
Prior to TAB, submit to Departmental Representative list of instruments to be used together with serial numbers. Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent of referenced standard for either applicable system or HVAC system. Calibrate within 3 months of TAB. Provide certificate of calibration to Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
1.13
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit, prior to commencement of TAB: .1 Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB if different from referenced standard.
1.14 PRELIMINARY TAB REPORT
.1
Submit for checking and approval of Departmental Representative, prior to submission of formal TAB report, sample of rough TAB sheets. Include: .1 Details of instruments used. .2 Details of TAB procedures employed. .3 Calculations procedures. .4 Summaries.
1.15
TAB REPORT
.1 .2
Format to be in accordance with referenced standard. TAB report to show results in SI units and to include: .1 Project record drawings. .2 System schematics. Submit 6 copies of TAB Report to Departmental Representative for verification and approval, in English in D-ring binders, complete with index tabs.
.3
1.16
VERIFICATION
.1 .2 .3
Reported results subject to verification by Departmental Representative. Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 30% of reported results. Number and location of verified results to be at discretion of Departmental Representative.
Section 23 05 93 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.16 VERIFICATION (Cont'd)
.4
Bear costs to repeat TAB as required to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.
1.17
SETTINGS
.1
After TAB is completed to satisfaction of Departmental Representative, replace drive guards, close access doors, lock devices in set positions, ensure sensors are at required settings. Permanently mark settings to allow restoration at any time during life of facility. Markings not to be eradicated or covered in any way.
.2
1.18 TAB
COMPLETION OF
.1
TAB to be considered complete when final TAB Report received and approved by Departmental Representative.
1.19
SYSTEMS
.1 .2
Quality assurance: Perform TAB under direction of supervisor qualified by AABC. Air Systems: Include both specified and measured data. .1 Air Handling Equipment: .1 Maximum air flow volume. .2 Fan total pressure. .3 Motor volts, amps and power. .4 Minimum outside air volume. .5 Fan rotational speed. .6 Fan Power, calculate fan efficiency. .7 Inlet and outlet dry bulb, wet bulb and dewpoint temperatures. .8 Equipment static pressure profile. .9 Noise. .10 Vibration. .2 Duct Air Quantities - Mains and Branches: .1 Duct size. .2 Number of pressure/velocity readings per traverse. .3 Sum of velocity measurements. .4 Average velocity. .5 Duct air flow volume. .6 Barometric pressure and duct air temperature. .3 Air Outlets: .1 Outlet location and designation. .2 Manufacturers catalogue identification and type. .3 Air outlet flow factors. Use 1.0 when flow hood is used.
Section 23 05 93 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.19 SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.2
Air Systems:(Cont'd) .3 Air Outlets:(Cont'd) .4 Air flow volumes. .5 Deflector vane or diffuser cone settings. Hydronic Systems: Include both specified and measured data. .1 Pumps: .1 Discharge and suction pressures, at design flow and no flow. .2 Fluid flow rate. Calculate from pump curves if metering not provided. .3 Motor volts, amps, power. .4 RPM. .5 Noise. .6 Vibration. .2 Piping Systems: .1 Supply and return of each primary loop. .2 Supply and return of each secondary loop. .3 Domestic hot water recirculation. .3 Heating Equipment: .1 Equipment type, location and designation. .2 Fluid used. Identify fluid used (ie. water, % water/ethylene glycol mixes, etc.). .3 Fluid flow rate. .4 Fluid Specific Heat, at mean temperature. .5 Fluid Specific Gravity, at mean temperature. .6 Fluid entering and leaving temperatures and pressures. .7 Heat transfer rate. .4 Air Heating and Cooling Coils: .1 Coil type and identification, location and designation. .2 Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb temperatures. .3 Air static pressure drop. .4 Air flow volume. .5 Barometric pressure. .6 Air side heat transfer rate. .7 Fluid used. Identify fluid used (ie. refrigerant, etc.) .8 Fluid flow rate. .9 Fluid Specific Heat, at mean temperature. .10 Fluid Specific Gravity, at mean temperature. .11 Fluid entering and leaving temperatures and pressures.
.3
Section 23 05 93 Page 7 2011-05-25
1.19 SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.3
Hydronic Systems:(Cont'd) .4 Air Heating and Cooling Coils:(Cont'd) .12 Fluid side heat transfer rate. .5 Unit and Cabinet Heater: .1 Start unit and check for noise or vibration. .2 Check unit performance for each fan speed: .1 Air flow and temperature rise. .2 Water temperature drop.
1.20 DOMESTIC HWC SYSTEMS
.1 .2
Meet requirements as specified for hydronic systems. Locations of equipment measurements: To include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: Inlet and outlet of heaters, tank, pump, circulator, at controllers, controlled device. Locations of systems measurements to include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: main, main branch, branch, sub-branch.
.3
1.21
OTHER SYSTEMS
.1
Plumbing systems: .1 TAB procedures: .1 Flush valves: adjust to suit project pressure conditions.
1.22 OTHER TAB REQUIREMENTS
.1
General requirements applicable to work specified this paragraph: .1 Qualifications of TAB personnel: as for air systems specified this section. .2 Quality assurance: as for air systems specified this section. Building pressure conditions: .1 Adjust HVAC systems, equipment, controls to ensure specified pressure conditions at all times. Living Unit Air Flow Control: .1 Test operation and record flow of all possible conditions for Living Unit airflow control including: .1 exhaust only from each area (6 total). .2 supply only to each area (6 total).
.2
.3
Section 23 05 93 Page 8 2011-05-25
1.22 OTHER TAB REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.3
Living Unit Air Flow Control:(Cont'd) Record central system effect during each .2 situation. .3 Record effect on other systems during each situation. Smoke management systems: .1 Test for proper operation of all fire dampers, installed as component parts of air systems specified Division 23. .2 At each fire damper location, remove fusible link, allow shutter to close without intervention. Record results on TAB report. At completion of test, restore each shutter to open position and reinstall link. Report non-closing dampers to Mechanical Contractor and Departmental Representative.
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END
PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS
Section 23 05 94 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
.1
Ducts over 5 m in length, forming part of a supply, return or exhaust ductwork system directly or indirectly connected to air handling equipment to be pressure tested for leaks.
1.2
TIMING
.1 .2 .3
Ducts to be tested before installation of insulation or any other form of concealments. Test after seals have cured. Test when ambient temperature will not affect effectiveness of seals, gaskets, etc.
1.3
EXCLUSIONS
.1
Flexible connections to air terminal control boxes.
1.4
REFERENCES
.1
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
1.5 TEST PROCEDURES
.1 .2 .3
Maximum lengths of ducts to be tested to be consistent with capacity of test equipment. Section of duct to be tested to include: .1 Fittings, branch ducts, tap-ins. Repeat tests until specified pressures are attained. Bear costs for repairs and repetition to tests. Base partial system leakage calculations on Reference Standard. Seal leaks that can be heard or felt, regardless of their contribution to total leakage.
.4 .5
1.6
TESTING AGENCY
.1
Installing Contractor.
Section 23 05 94 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.7
VERIFICATION
.1 .2 .3
Departmental Representative to witness tests and to verify reported results. To be certified by the same TAB agency performing TAB on this project. Provide testing schedule to Departmental Representative 3 days in advance of test. Departmental Representative may authorize un-witnessed testing.
1.8 TEST INSTRUMENTS
.1 .2
Testing agency to provide instruments for tests. Test apparatus to include: .1 Fan capable of producing required static pressure. .2 Duct section with calibrated orifice plate mounted and accurately located pressure taps. .3 Flow measuring instrument compatible with the orifice plate. .4 Calibration curves for orifice plates used. .5 Flexible duct for connecting to ductwork under test. Test apparatus to be accurate to within +/-3% of flow rate and pressure. Submit details of test instruments to be used to Departmental Representative at least three months before anticipated start date. Test instruments to be calibrated and certificate of calibration deposited with Departmental Representative no more than 28 days before start of tests. Instruments to be re-calibrated every six months thereafter.
.3 .4
.5
.6
1.9 SYSTEM LEAKAGE TOLERANCES
.1
System leakage tolerances specified herein are stated as a percentage of total flow rate handled by the system. Therefore, when testing sections of ductwork this acceptable leakage shall be pro-rated to entire system. Leakage for sections of duct systems shall not exceed the total allowable leakage.
Section 23 05 94 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.9 SYSTEM LEAKAGE TOLERANCES (Cont'd)
.2
Leakage tests on following systems not to exceed specified leakage rates. .1 Small duct systems up to 250 Pa: Leakage 2%. .2 Large low pressure duct systems up to 500 Pa: Leakage 2%.
Evaluation of test results to use surface area of duct and pressure in duct as basic parameters.
.3
1.10
REPORT FORMS
.1
Submit proposed report form and test report format to Departmental Representative for approval at least three months before proposed date of first series of tests. Do not start tests until approval received in writing from Departmental Representative.
1.11 PRESSURE TEST REPORTS
.1
Prepare report of results and submit to Departmental Representative within 24 hours of completion of tests. Include: .1 Schematic of entire system. .2 Schematic of section under test showing test site. .3 Required and achieved static pressures. .4 Orifice differential pressure at test sites. .5 Permissible and actual leakage flow rate (L/s) for test sites. .6 Witnessed certification of results. Include test reports in final TAB report.
.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Section 23 05 94 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Definitions: .1 For purposes of this section: .1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in suspended ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces. .2 "EXPOSED" - means "not concealed" as previously defined. .3 Insulation systems - insulation material, fasteners, jackets, and other accessories. .2 TIAC Codes: .1 CRD: Code Round Ductwork, .2 CRF: Code Rectangular Finish. Reference Standards: .1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 (I-P), Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings, (ANSI Approved; IESNA Co-Sponsored). .2 ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM B209M-07, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric). .2 ASTM C335/C335M-10e1, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Pipe Insulation. .3 ASTM C411-05, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation. .4 ASTM C449-07, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. .5 ASTM C547-07e1, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. .6 ASTM C553-08, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. .7 ASTM C612-10, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. .8 ASTM C795-08, Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel. .9 ASTM C921-10, Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
.2
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
Reference Standards:(Cont'd) .3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-89, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation. .4 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES) .1 Standard GS-36-00, Adhesives for Commercial Use. .5 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): National Insulation Standards (2005). .6 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. .2 CAN/ULC S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for duct insulation, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .1 Description of equipment giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year and capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance. .3 Recommended spare parts list. Samples: .1 Submit for approval: complete assembly of each type of insulation system, insulation, coating, and adhesive proposed. .2 Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board. .3 Affix typewritten label beneath sample indicating service. Manufacturers' Instructions: .1 Provide manufacture's written duct insulation jointing recommendations. and special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures.
.3
.4
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
Qualifications: .1 Installer: specialist in performing work of this section, and have at least 3 years successful experience in this size and type of project, qualified to standards of TIAC.
.1 .2
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address and ULC markings. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING
.1
To CAN/ULC S102: .1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25. .2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
2.2
INSULATION
.1 .2
Mineral fibre: as specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool. Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335/C335M. TIAC Code C-1: Rigid mineral fibre board to ASTM C612, with factory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (as scheduled in PART 3 of this Section). TIAC Code C-2: Mineral fibre blanket to ASTM C553 faced with factory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (as scheduled in PART 3 of this section). .1 Mineral fibre: to ASTM C553. .2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma. .3 Maximum "k" factor: to ASTM C553.
.3
.4
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.3
JACKETS
.1
Canvas: .1 220 gm/m2 cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921. Lagging adhesive: compatible with insulation.
.2
2.4
ACCESSORIES
.1
Vapour retarder lap adhesive: .1 Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation. Indoor Vapour Retarder Finish: .1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation. Insulating Cement: hydraulic setting on mineral wool, to ASTM C449. ULC Listed Canvas Jacket: .1 220 gm/m2 cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921 untreated. Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, reinforced, 75 mm wide minimum. Contact adhesive: quick-setting. Canvas adhesive: washable. Banding: 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel. Facing: 25 mm galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation. Fasteners: 4 mm diameter pins with 35 mm square clips, length to suit thickness of insulation.
.2
.3 .4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
.1 .2
Pressure test ductwork systems complete, witness and certify. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, free from foreign material.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as indicated. Use 2 layers with staggered joints when required nominal thickness exceeds 75 mm. Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes. .1 Ensure hangers, and supports are outside vapour retarder jacket. Hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29. .1 Apply high compressive strength insulation where insulation may be compressed by weight of ductwork. Mechanical fastenings: .1 On rectangular ducts, use 100% coverage of insulating cement and weld pins at not more than 200 mm centres, but not less than 2 rows per side and bottom. .2 For round ducts provide row of pins and mechanical fasteners on top of duct. Pins to be spaced at maximum 200 mm centres. Apply vapour barrier tape on vapour barrier seam and over top of mechanical fasteners. Use stand-offs for duct mounted control accessories, including balancing and control dampers. Apply 1 mm thick galvanized sheet metal corners (nosings) to ductwork in mechanical rooms and exterior ducting.
.5
.6
.7
.8
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE Rectangular cold and dual temperature supply air ducts Round cold and dual temperature supply air ducts Rectangular warm air ducts Round warm air ducts Supply, return and exhaust ducts exposed in space being served Outside air ducts to mixing plenum Mixing plenums Exhaust duct between dampers and louvres Acoustically lined ducts
.1
Insulation types and thicknesses: conform to following table: Vapour Retarder Thickness (mm) yes 50
TIAC Code C-1
C-2
yes
50
C-1 C-1
no no
25 25 none
C-1
yes
50
C-1 C-1
yes no
50 50
none .2 Exposed round ducts 600 mm and larger, smaller sizes where subject to abuse: .1 Use TIAC code C-1 insulation, scored to suit diameter of duct. .1 Finishes: conform to following table: TIAC Code Rectangular none CRF/1 CRF/2 Round none CRD/2 CRD/3
Indoor, concealed Indoor, exposed within mechanical room Indoor, exposed elsewhere
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.4
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Section 23 07 15 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 Thermal insulation for piping and piping accessories in commercial type applications.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 (I-P), Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings (ANSI Approved; IESNA Co-Sponsored). American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM B209M-07, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric). .2 ASTM C335/C335M-10e1, Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Pipe Insulation. .3 ASTM C411-05, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation. .4 ASTM C449-07, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. .5 ASTM C533-09, Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. .6 ASTM C547-07e1, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. .7 ASTM C795-08, Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel. .8 ASTM C921-10, Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-89, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation. .2 CAN/CGSB 51.53-95, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Jacketing Sheet, for Insulated Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts. Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA), 1992, c. 37.
.2
.3
.4
Section 23 07 15 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) .2 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33. .3 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Manufacturer's Trade Associations .1 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): Mechanical Insulation Best Practice Guide(Revised 2005). Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. .2 CAN/ULC S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. .3 CAN/ULC S702-09, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings. .4 ULC S702.2-10, Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings, Part 2: Application Guidelines.
.5
.6
.7
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1
For purposes of this section: .1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services in suspended ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces. .2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as specified. TIAC ss: .1 CRF: Code Rectangular Finish. .2 CPF: Code Piping Finish.
.2
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.
Section 23 07 15 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit for approval: complete assembly of each type of insulation system, insulation, coating, and adhesive proposed. Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board. Affix label beneath sample indicating service. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.4
.5
.1
Installer: specialist in performing work of this Section, and have at least 3 years successful experience in this size and type of project, qualified to standards of TIAC. Health and Safety: .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.2
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Storage and Protection: .1 Protect from weather, construction traffic. .2 Protect against damage. .3 Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
Section 23 07 15 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING
.1
In accordance with CAN/ULC S102. .1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25. .2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
2.2
INSULATION
.1 .2
Mineral fibre specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool. Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24 degrees C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335/C335M. TIAC Code A-1: rigid moulded mineral fibre without factory applied vapour retarder jacket. .1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC S702, ASTM C547. .2 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/ULC S702. TIAC Code A-3: rigid moulded mineral fibre with factory applied vapour retarder jacket. .1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC S702, ASTM C547. .2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma. .3 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/ULC S702, ASTM C547. TIAC Code C-2: mineral fibre blanket faced with factory applied vapour retarder jacket (as scheduled in PART 3 of this section). .1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC S702, ASTM C547. .2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma. .3 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/ULC S702, ASTM C547. TIAC Code A-6: flexible unicellular tubular elastomer., .1 Insulation: with vapour retarder jacket. .2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma. .3 Certified by manufacturer: free of potential stress corrosion cracking corrodants. .4 Maximum "k" factor: 0.27.
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.3 INSULATION SECUREMENT
.1 .2 .3
Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, reinforced, 50 mm wide minimum. Contact adhesive: quick setting. Canvas adhesive: washable.
Section 23 07 15 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.3 INSULATION SECUREMENT (Cont'd)
.4
Bands: stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick.
2.4
CEMENT
.1
Thermal insulating and finishing cement: .1 Hydraulic setting on mineral wool, to ASTM C449.
2.5 VAPOUR RETARDER LAP ADHESIVE
.1
Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.
2.6 INDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH
.1
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
2.7 OUTDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH
.1 .2
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation. Reinforcing fabric: fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m2.
2.8
JACKETS
.1
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): .1 One-piece moulded type and sheet to CAN/CGSB-51.53 with pre-formed shapes as required. .2 Colours: white. .3 Minimum service temperatures: -20 degrees C. .4 Maximum service temperature: 65 degrees C. .5 Moisture vapour transmission: 0.02 perm. .6 Thickness: 0.75 mm. .7 Fastenings: .1 Use solvent weld adhesive compatible with insulation to seal laps and joints. .2 Tacks. .8 Special requirements: .1 Outdoor: UV rated material at least 0.75 mm thick. Canvas: .1 220 gm/m2 cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921.
.2
Section 23 07 15 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.8 JACKETS (Cont'd)
.2
Canvas:(Cont'd) .2 Lagging adhesive: compatible with insulation. Aluminum: .1 To ASTM B209M. .2 Thickness: 0.50 mm sheet. .3 Finish: stucco embossed. .4 Joining: longitudinal and circumferential slip joints with 50 mm laps. .5 Fittings: 0.5 mm thick die-shaped fitting covers with factory-attached protective liner. .6 Metal jacket banding and mechanical seals: stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick at 300 mm spacing. Stainless steel: .1 Type: 304, 316. .2 Thickness: 0.25 mm. .3 Finish: stucco embossed. .4 Joining: longitudinal and circumferential slip joints with 50 mm laps. .5 Fittings: 0.5 mm thick die-shaped fitting covers with factory-attached protective liner. .6 Metal jacket banding and mechanical seals: stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick at 300 mm spacing.
.3
.4
2.9 WEATHERPROOF CAULKING FOR JACKETS INSTALLED OUTDOORS PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Caulking to: Section 07 92 00.
3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT
.1
Pressure testing of piping systems and adjacent equipment to be complete, witnessed and certified. Surfaces clean, dry, free from foreign material.
.2
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and this specification.
Section 23 07 15 Page 7 2011-05-25
.3 .4
Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal wall thickness exceeds 75 mm.
Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes. .1 Install hangers, supports outside vapour retarder jacket. Supports, Hangers: .1 Apply high compressive strength insulation, suitable for service, at oversized saddles and shoes where insulation saddles have not been provided.
.5
3.3 REMOVABLE, PRE-FABRICATED, INSULATION AND ENCLOSURES
.1
Application: at expansion joints, valves, primary flow measuring elements, flanges and unions at equipment. Design: to permit movement of expansion joint and to permit periodic removal and replacement damage to adjacent insulation. Insulation: .1 Insulation, fastenings and finishes: same as system.
.2
.3
3.4 INSTALLATION OF ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
.1 .2
Insulation to remain dry. Overlaps to manufacturers instructions. Ensure tight joints. Provide vapour retarder as recommended by manufacturer.
3.5 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES
.1 .2
Includes valves, valve bonnets, strainers, flanges and fittings unless otherwise specified. TIAC Code: A-1. .1 Securements: SS bands at 300 mm on centre. .2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. .3 Installation: TIAC Code 1501-H. TIAC Code: A-3. .1 Securements: SS bands at 300 mm on centre. .2 Seals: VR lap seal adhesive, VR lagging adhesive. .3 Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-C.
.3
Section 23 07 15 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.5 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES (Cont'd)
.4
TIAC Code: A-6. Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging .1 adhesive.

TIAC Code: C-2 with vapour retarder jacket. .1 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. .2 Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-C. TIAC Code: A-2. .1 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. .2 Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-H. Thickness of insulation as listed in following table. .1 Run-outs to individual units and equipment not exceeding 4000 mm long. .2 Do not insulate exposed runouts to plumbing fixtures, chrome plated piping, valves, fittings. Pipe sizes (NPS) and insulation thickness (mm) Run out to 1 50 38 25 25 25 25 1 1/4 to 2 65 38 25 25 25 25 2 1/2 to 4 75 38 25 38 25 25 5 to 6 90 38 38 38 25 25 8 & over 90 38 38 38 25 25
.5
.6
.7
Applic ation
Temp degree s C
TIAC code
Steam
up to 175
A- 1 A- 1 A- 1 A- 1 A- 3 C- 2
38 25 25 25 25 25
Glycol 60 Heating 94 Glycol up to Heating 59 Domest ic HWS Domest ic CWS Domest ic CWS with vapour retard er Domest ic TW and TWR(4)
A-1
25
25
25
25
25
25
Section 23 07 15 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.5 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES (Cont'd) Refrig erant hot gasl iquid sucti on Refrig erant hot gasl iquid sucti on RWL and RWP(1) Sanit ary Vent(2) Coolin g Coil cond. drain system 4 - 13
.7
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd)
A- 6
25
25
25
25
25
25
below 4
A- 6
25
25
38
38
38
38
C- 2
25
25
25
25
25
25
A-3
25
25
C- 2
25
25
25
25
25
25
Natural Gas(3) Note 1: Insulate interior rain water piping systems for a distance of 3 m along piping from each roof drain location. Insulation shall run along all connected pipe regardless of flow direction. Insulate roof drain body and all mounting hardware to full thickness coverage, seal to underside of roofdeck. Note 2: Insulate sanitary sewer vent piping from cold air terminus continuously through cold interior building areas and to 2 m into warm building area. Note 3: Coat all natural gas piping penetrating exterior wall or roof for 2 m into building with 2 heavy coats of brush on vapour retardent mastic. Permeance value less than 0.05, flame spread less than 20. Note 4: Where piping serves shower fixtures and is located within adjacent block wall, revise insulation code to A-6 (unicellular elastomer) of same thickness specified.
Section 23 07 15 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.5 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES (Cont'd)
.8
Finishes: Exposed indoors: PVC jacket. .1 Exposed in mechanical rooms: aluminum or .2 PVC jacket. .3 Exposed in cell area Y-chases: aluminum. .4 Concealed, indoors: canvas on valves, fittings. No further finish. .5 Use vapour retarder jacket on TIAC code A-3 insulation compatible with insulation. .6 Outdoors: water-proof SS jacket. .7 Finish attachments: SS bands, at 150 mm on centre. Seals: closed. .8 Installation: to appropriate TIAC code CRF/1 through CPF/5.
3.6
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS
Section 23 08 02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal. Section 23 25 00 - HVAC Water Treatment Systems. Section 23 05 93 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials .1 ASTM E202-10, Standard Test Methods for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and Propylene Glycols.
.1
2.1 CLEANING SOLUTIONS
.1
As recommended by Institution agents to a minimum as follows: .1 Tri-sodium phosphate: 0.40 kg per 100 L water in system. .2 Sodium carbonate: 0.40 kg per 100 L water in system. .3 Low-foaming detergent: 0.01 kg per 100 L water in system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING HYDRONIC AND STEAM SYSTEMS
.1
Timing .1 Systems to be operational, hydrostatically tested and with safety devices functional, before cleaning is carried out. Cleaning Agency: .1 Retain qualified water treatment specialist to perform system cleaning.
.2
Section 23 08 02 Page 2 2011-05-25
3.1 CLEANING HYDRONIC AND STEAM SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.3
Install instrumentation such as flow meters, orifice plates, pitot tubes, flow metering valves only after cleaning is certified as complete by water treatment specialist.
Cleaning procedures: .1 Provide detailed report outlining proposed cleaning procedures at least 4 weeks prior to proposed starting date. Report to include: .1 Cleaning procedures, flow rates, elapsed time. .2 Chemicals and concentrations to be used. .3 Inhibitors and concentrations. .4 Specific requirements for completion of work. .5 Special precautions for protecting piping system materials and components. .6 Complete analysis of water to be used to ensure water will not damage systems or equipment. Conditions at time of cleaning of systems .1 Systems to be free from construction debris, dirt and other foreign material. .2 Control valves to be operational, fully open to ensure that terminal units can be cleaned properly. .3 Strainers to be clean prior to initial fill. .4 Install temporary filters on pumps not equipped with permanent filters. .5 Install pressure gauges on strainers to detect plugging. Report on Completion of Cleaning .1 When cleaning is completed, submit report, complete with certificate of compliance with specifications of cleaning component supplier. Hydronic Systems: .1 Fill system with water, ensure air is vented from system. .2 Fill expansion tanks 1/3 to 1/2 full, charge system with compressed air to at least 35 kPa (does not apply to diaphragm type expansion tanks). .3 Use water metre to record volume of water in system to +/- 0.5%. .4 Add chemicals under direct supervision of chemical treatment supplier. .5 Closed loop systems: circulate system cleaner at 60C for at least 36 h. Drain as quickly as possible. Refill with water and
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 23 08 02 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.1 CLEANING HYDRONIC AND STEAM SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.7
Hydronic Systems:(Cont'd) .5 Closed loop systems:(Cont'd) inhibitors. Test concentrations and adjust to recommended levels. .6 Flush velocity in system mains and branches so as to ensure removal of debris. System pumps may be used for circulating cleaning solution provided that velocities are adequate. .7 Add chemical solution to system. .8 Establish circulation, raise temperature slowly to maximum design 82C minimum. Circulate for 12 h, ensuring flow in all circuits. Remove heat, continue to circulate until temperature is below 38C. Drain as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water. Circulate for 6 h at design temperature. Drain and repeat procedures specified above. Flush through low point drains in system. Refill with clean water adding to sodium sulphite (test for residual sulphite). .9 Glycol Systems: .1 In addition to procedures specified above perform procedures specified herein. .2 Test to prove concentration will prevent freezing to minus 25C Test inhibitor strength and include in procedural report. Refer to ASTM E202.
3.2 START-UP OF HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1
After cleaning is completed and system is filled: .1 Establish circulation and expansion tank level, set pressure controls. .2 Ensure air is removed. .3 Check pumps to be free from air, debris, possibility of cavitation when system is at design temperature. .4 Dismantle system pumps used for cleaning, inspect, replace worn parts, install new gaskets and new set of seals. .5 Clean out strainers repeatedly until system is clean. .6 Commission water treatment systems as specified in Section 23 25 00. .7 Check water level in expansion tank with cold water with circulating pumps OFF and again with pumps ON. .8 Repeat with water at design temperature. .9 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer, flashing, cavitation. Eliminate water hammer and other noises. .10 Bring system up to design temperature and pressure slowly over a 48 hour period.
Section 23 08 02 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.2 START-UP OF HYDRONIC SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .11 Perform TAB as specified in Section 23 05 93. .12 Adjust pipe supports, hangers, springs as necessary. .13 Monitor pipe movement, performance of expansion joints, loops, guides, anchors. .14 Re-tighten bolts, etc. using torque wrench, to compensate for heat-caused relaxation. Repeat several times during commissioning. .15 Check operation of drain valves. .16 Adjust valve stem packings as systems settle down. .17 Fully open all balancing valves (except those that are factory-set). .18 Check operation of over-temperature protection devices on circulating pumps. .19 Adjust alignment of piping at pumps to ensure flexibility, adequacy of pipe movement, absence of noise or vibration transmission.
END
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
Section 23 11 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-Up of Mechanical Piping Systems. Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B16.5-2009, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. .2 ANSI/ASME B16.18-2001(R2005), Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.21-2011, Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. .4 ANSI/ASME B16.22-2001(R2005), Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .5 ANSI/ASME B18.2.1-2010, Square, Hex, Heavy Hex and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws (Inch Series). American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A47/A47M-99(R2009), Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. .2 ASTM A53/A53M-10, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. .3 ASTM B32-08, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. .4 ASTM B75M-99(R2005), Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube (Metric). Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .2 CSA B149.1-10, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code, Includes Update No. 1 (2010). .3 CSA B137.4-09, Polyethylene (PE) Piping Systems for Gas Services. .4 CSA Z662-07, Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems.
.2
.3
Section 23 11 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate on manufacturers catalogue literature following: valves.
.1
.1
2.1
PIPE
.1
Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, seamless as follows: .1 NPS 1/2 to 2, screwed. .2 NPS 2-1/2 and over, plain end. Buried plastic pipe: tubing shall comply with CSA B137.4. Plastic piping shall be complete with tracing wire.
.2
2.2 JOINTING MATERIAL
.1 .2 .3
Screwed fittings: pulverized lead paste. Welded fittings: to CSA W47.1. Flange gaskets: to ANSI/ASME B16.21, non-metallic flat.
2.3
FITTINGS
.1
Steel pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded: .1 Malleable iron: screwed, banded, Class 150. .2 Welding: butt-welding fittings. .3 Unions: malleable iron, brass to iron, ground seat, to ASTM A47/A47M. .4 Bolts and nuts: to ANSI/ASME B18.2.1. .5 Nipples: schedule 40, to ASTM A53/A53M. .6 Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.5.
Section 23 11 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3 FITTINGS (Cont'd)
.2
Plastic pipe fittings shall comply with CSA Standard B137.4, "Polyethylene Piping Systems for Gas Service".
2.4
VALVES
.1
CSA B149.1 approved, lubricated plug or ball type.
2.5 PRESSURE REDUCING REGULATORS
.1
Self-operating spring loaded with NPT or plain end connection (as applicable), cast iron body, aluminum seat ring and cage, nitrile valve disc and o-ring, stainless steel stem and stem sleeve, steel diaphragm plate, and rain proof vent. Operating range and capacities: as indicated. Venting capacity of reducing valve to be suitable to vent valve with valve failing in full open position and suitable to reduce downstream pressure to a level sufficient to protect equipment.
.2 .3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install in accordance with Section 23 05 05, supplemented as specified herein. Install in accordance with applicable Provincial gas codes. Install in accordance with CSA B149.1. Install drip points: .1 At low points in piping system. .2 At connections to equipment. Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage. Provide clearance for access and for maintenance. Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and out. Install piping to minimize pipe dismantling for equipment removal.
.5 .6 .7 .8
Section 23 11 23 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.1 PIPING (Cont'd)
.9 .10 .11 .12
Welding to be in accordance with Section 23 05 17.

Paint all exposed gas piping yellow. Label gas piping as described in Section 23 05 53.01. Provide pressure-treated wood or pre-manufactured sleepers to support roof-mounted piping. .1 Spacing: in accordance with CSA B149.1. Install and test piping in strict accordance with applicable Provincial gas codes as revised to date, together with any local rules and regulations which are applicable. Weld, vent and protect concealed piping in accordance with requirements of local gas company. Do not make installation until approval is obtained from local gas company. Buried Pipe: .1 Pipe must be buried 610 mm under parking or driveways and be buried at least 400 mm in other locations. .2 Pressure design and other general requirements shall be as found in CSA Z662. .3 Procedure for the installation of plastic piping shall be acceptable to the local gas company. .4 Provide tracer wire for plastic piping.
.13
.14
.15
3.2
VALVES
.1
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless otherwise approved by Departmental Representative. Install valves at branch take-offs to isolate pieces of equipment, and as indicated.
.2
.1
Test system in accordance with CSA B149.1 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4
PURGING
.1
Purge after pressure test in accordance with CSA B149.1.
Section 23 11 23 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.5
GAS REGULATOR
.1 .2
Provide natural gas pressure regulators to equipment at locations shown on drawings. Regulators shall be sized to handle the total gas demand served by the regulator and reducing the line pressure as required. Pipe regulator vent lines to the exterior when installed inside the building.
.3
3.6 PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS
.1
Check vents from regulators, control valves, terminate outside building in approved location, protected against blockage, damage. Check gas trains, entire installation is approved by authority having jurisdiction.
.2
3.7 CLEANING AND START-UP
.1 .2
In accordance with Section 23 08 02, supplemented as specified herein. In accordance with requirements of CSA B149.1, supplemented as specified herein.
END
HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: COPPER
Sect 23 21 13.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 Copper piping valves and fittings for hydronic systems.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Welding Society (AWS) .1 ANSI/AWS A5.8/A5.8M:2004, Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B16.4-2006, Gray Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250. .2 ANSI/ASME B16.15-2006, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.18-2001(R2005), Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .4 ANSI/ASME B16.22-2001(R2005), Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM B32-08, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. .2 ASTM B61-08, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. .3 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. .4 ASTM B88M-05, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric). .5 ASTM E202-10, Standard Test Methods for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and Propylene Glycols. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) .1 MSS SP-67-2002a, Butterfly Valves. .2 MSS SP-70-2006, Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .3 MSS SP-71-2005, Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .4 MSS SP-80-2008, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. .5 MSS SP-85-2002, Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Sect 23 21 13.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate on manufacturers catalogue literature the following: valves. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Regulatory Requirements: ensure Work is performed in compliance with CEPA, CEAA, TDGA, and applicable Provincial regulations. Health and Safety: .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.2
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and Section 01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Sect 23 21 13.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TUBING
.1
Type L hard drawn copper tubing: to ASTM B88M.
2.2
FITTINGS
.1 .2 .3
Cast bronze threaded fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.15. Wrought copper and copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.22. Cast copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.18.
2.3
FLANGES
.1 .2 .3
Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are jointed. Brass or bronze: threaded. For pipe sizes 2 NPS and under, provide di-electric unions or couplings.
2.4
JOINTS
.1 .2
Solder, tin-antimony, 95:5: to ASTM B32, lead free. Screwed fittings: with orange teflon tape and metallic compound pipe thread sealant.
2.5
VALVES
.1
Connections: .1 NPS 2 and smaller: ends for soldering. .2 NPS 2-1/2 and larger: flanged or grooved ends. Gate Valves: .1 NPS 2 and under: .1 Mechanical Rooms: Class 125, rising stem, solid wedge disc, as specified Section 23 05 23.01. .2 Elsewhere: Class 125, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, as specified Section 23 05 23.01. .2 NPS 2-1/2 and over: .1 Mechanical Rooms: rising stem, solid wedge disc, bronze trim, as specified Section 23 05 23.02.
.2
Sect 23 21 13.01 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.5 VALVES (Cont'd)
.2
Gate Valves:(Cont'd) .2 NPS 2-1/2 and over:(Cont'd) .2 Elsewhere: Non- rising stem, solid wedge disc, bronze trim, as specified Section 23 05 23.02. Drain valves: gate, Class 125, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, as specified Section 23 05 23.01. Swing check valves: .1 NPS 2 and under: .1 Class 125, swing, with composition disc, as specified Section 23 05 23.01. .2 NPS 2-1/2 and over: .1 Flanged ends: as specified Section 23 05 23.02. Ball valves: .1 NPS 2 and under: as specified Section 23 05 23.01. Circuit Balancing valves (CBV): .1 Sizes: calibrated balancing valves, as specified. .2 NPS 2 and under: .1 General: .1 Y style globe valve, designed to provide precise flow measurement and control, with valved ports for connection to differential pressure meter. .2 Accuracy: .1 Readout to be within plus or minus 2% of actual flow at design flow rate. .3 Pressure die-cast dezincification resistant copper alloy construction, Teflon disc, screw-in bonnet. .1 Flow control: At least four 4 full turns of handwheel with digital handwheel and tamperproof concealed mechanical memory. .4 Insulation: .1 Use prefabricated shipping packaging of 5.4 R polyurethane as insulation. .5 Drain connection: .1 NPS 3/4 valved and capped, suitable for hose socket. .2 Incorporated into valve body or provided as separate item.
.3
.4
.5
.6
Sect 23 21 13.01 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
.1
Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise indicated. Install concealed pipes close to building structure to keep furring space to minimum. Install to conserve headroom and space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping where ever practical. Slope piping in direction of drainage and for positive venting. Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage or positive venting. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of equipment, valves and fittings. Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards. Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and outside, before and after assembly. Install all pipe wells or other devices supplied by Division 23.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6 .7 .8
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
.1
Refer to Sections 23 05 23.01 and 23 05 23.02.
.1 .2 .3
Install flow measuring stations and flow balancing valves as indicated. Remove handwheel after installation and TAB is complete. Tape joints in prefabricated insulation on valves installed in chilled water mains.
Sect 23 21 13.01 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.4 FLUSHING AND CLEANING
.1
3.5 FILLING OF SYSTEM
.1
Refill system with clean water adding water treatment as specified and glycol as per Section 23 25 00.
.1
Testing: .1 Test system in accordance with Section 23 05 00. For glycol systems, retest with specified quality of glycol after cleaning. Balancing: .1 Balance water systems to within plus or minus 5% of design output. .2 Refer to Section 23 05 93 for applicable procedures.
.2 .3
3.7 GLYCOL CHARGING
.1 .2 .3
Provide mixing tank and positive displacement pump for glycol charging. Retest for concentration to ASTM E202 after cleaning. Provide report to Departmental Representative.
3.8
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: STEEL
Sect 23 21 13.02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Materials and installation for steel piping, valves and fittings for hydronic systems in building services piping. Related Sections. .1 Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results Mechanical. .2 Section 23 05 17 - Pipe Welding. .3 Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems. .4 Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework. .5 Section 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze. .6 Section 23 05 23.02 - Valves - Cast Iron. .7 Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. .8 Section 23 21 13.01 - Hydronic Systems: Copper.
.2
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). .1 ANSI/ASME B16.1-2010 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125 and 250. .2 ANSI/ASME B16.3-2006, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.5-2009, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. .4 ANSI/ASME B16.9-2007, Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. .5 ANSI/ASME B18.2.1-2010, Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws (Inch Series). .6 ANSI/ASME B18.2.2-2010, Nuts for General Applications: MAchine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series). American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A47/A47M-99(2009), Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. .2 ASTM A53/A53M-10, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
.2
Sect 23 21 13.02 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .3 ASTM A536-84(2009), Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. .4 ASTM B61-08, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. .5 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. .6 ASTM E202-10, Standard Test Methods for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and Propylene Glycols. American Water Works Association (AWWA). .1 ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-07, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA B242-05, Groove- and Shoulder-Type Mechanical Pipe Couplings. .2 CSA W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS). .1 MSS SP-67-2002a, Butterfly Valves. .2 MSS SP-70-2006, Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .3 MSS SP-71-2005, Cast Iron Swing Check Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends. .4 MSS SP-80-2008, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. .5 MSS SP-85-2002, Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
.3
.4
.5
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Closeout Submittals. .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 and include following: .1 Special servicing requirements.
.1
Health and Safety. .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
Sect 23 21 13.02 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
Waste Management and Disposal. .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
2.1
PIPE
.1
Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Sch. 40, as follows: .1 Steel piping is only allowed on closed hydronic water system NPS 2-1/2 and above. .2 NPS 2 and under shall be copper only as per Section 23 21 13.01.
2.2
PIPE JOINTS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
NPS 2-1/2 and over: welding fittings and flanges to CSA W48. Roll grooved: rigid coupling to CSA B242. Flanges: plain or raised face, weld neck to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Flange gaskets: to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Pipe thread: taper. Bolts and nuts: to ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 and ANSI/ASME B18.2.2. Roll grooved coupling gaskets: type EPDM.
2.3
FITTINGS
.1 .2
Screwed fittings: malleable iron, to ANSI/ASME B16.3, Class 150. Pipe flanges and flanged fittings: .1 Cast iron: to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125. .2 Steel: to ANSI/ASME B16.5. Butt-welding fittings: steel, to ANSI/ASME B16.9. Unions: malleable iron, to ASTM A47/A47M and ANSI/ASME B16.3. Fittings for roll grooved piping: malleable iron to ASTM A47/A47M, ductile iron to ASTM A536.
.3 .4 .5
Sect 23 21 13.02 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.4
VALVES
.1
Connections: .1 NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Flanged or grooved ends. Gate valves: .1 NPS 2-1/2 and over: .1 Mechanical Rooms: rising stem, solid wedge disc, lead free bronze trim, as specified Section 23 05 23.02. .2 Elsewhere: Non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, lead free bronze trim, as specified Section 23 05 23.02. Balancing, for TAB: .1 Refer to Section 23 21 13.01. Drain valves: Gate, Class 125, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, as specified Section 23 05 23.01. Swing check valves: to MSS SP-71. .1 NPS 2-1/2 and over: .1 Flanged Grooved ends: as specified Section 23 05 23.02. Butterfly valves: .1 NPS 2-1/2 and over: grooved ends, as specified in Section 23 05 23.05.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Install pipework in accordance with Section 23 05 05.
.1 .2 .3
Install flow measuring stations and flow balancing valves as indicated. Remove handwheel after installation and when TAB is complete. Tape joints in prefabricated insulation on valves installed in chilled water mains.
Sect 23 21 13.02 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.3 CLEANING, FLUSHING AND START-UP
.1
In accordance with Section 23 08 02.
3.4 FILLING OF SYSTEM
.1
Refill system with clean water adding water treatment and glycol as per Section 23 25 00.
3.5
TESTING
.1 .2
Test system in accordance with Section 23 05 00. For glycol systems, retest with specified quality of glycol after cleaning.
3.6
BALANCING
.1 .2
Balance water systems to within plus or minus 5% of design output. Refer to Section 23 05 93 for applicable procedures.
3.7 GLYCOL CHARGING
.1 .2 .3
Provide mixing tank and positive displacement pump for glycol charging. Retest for concentration to ASTM E202 after cleaning. Provide report to Departmental Representative.
END
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
Section 23 21 14 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ASME-2010, Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM A47/A47M-99(2009), Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. .2 ASTM A278/A278M-01(2006), Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperatures up to 650 degrees F (350 degrees C). .3 ASTM A516/A516M-10, Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service. .4 ASTM A536-84(2009), Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. .5 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B51-09, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code. Includes Update No.1 (2009).
.2
.3
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for expansion tanks, air vents, separators, valves, and strainers, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.1
Submit maintenance and operation data in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
Section 23 21 14 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BLADDER TYPE EXPANSION TANK
.1 .2 .3 .4
Vertical steel pressurized bladder type expansion tank. Capacity: as indicated. Size: as indicated. Bladder sealed in EPDM suitable for glycol solution up to 115 degrees C operating temperature. Working pressure: 860 kPa with ASME stamp and certification. Air precharged to initial fill pressure of system. Base mount for vertical installation. Supports: provide supports with hold down bolts and installation templates. Replaceable bladder.
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9
2.2 MANUAL AIR VENT
.1
Industrial float vent: cast iron body and NPS 1/2 connection and rated at 1034 kPa working pressure. Float: solid material suitable for 115 degrees C working temperature.
.2
2.3 AIR SEPARATORIN-LINE
.1
Tangential separator with offset inlet/outlet, ss air collector tube, baffle, bottom access and top air outlet. Working pressure: 860 kPa.
.2
Section 23 21 14 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3 AIR SEPARATORIN-LINE (Cont'd)
.3
Size: as indicated.
2.4 COMBINATION LOW PRESSURE RELIEF AND REDUCING VALVE
.1 .2 .3 .4
Adjustable pressure setting: 206 kPa relief, 55 to 172 kPa reducing. Low inlet pressure check valve. Removable strainer. Working pressure: 860 kPa.
2.5 PIPE LINE STRAINER
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
NPS 1/2 to 2: bronze body to ASTM B62, screwed connections, Y pattern. NPS 2-1/2 to 12: cast steel body to ASTM A278/A278M, Class 30, flanged connections. Blowdown connection: NPS 3/4. Screen: stainless steel with 1.19 mm perforations. Working pressure: 860 kPa.
2.6 SUCTION DIFFUSER
.1 .2
Body: cast iron with flanged connections. Strainer: with built-in, disposable 1.19 mm mesh, low pressure drop screen and NPS 3/4 blowdown connection. Permanent magnet particle trap. Full length straightening vanes. Pressure gauge tappings. Adjustable support leg.
.3 .4 .5 .6
Section 23 21 14 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install as indicated and to manufacturer's recommendations. Run drain lines and blow off connections to terminate at glycol fill tank. Maintain adequate clearance to permit service and maintenance. Should deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Departmental Representative's directive. Check shop drawings for conformance of tappings for ancillaries and for equipment operating weights.
.5
3.2
STRAINERS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install in horizontal or down flow lines. Ensure clearance for removal of basket. Install ahead of each pump. Install ahead of each automatic control valve larger than NPS 1 and as indicated.
3.3
AIR VENTS
.1 .2
Install at high points of systems. Install ball valve on manual air vent inlet. Run discharge to nearest glycol fill tank.
3.4 EXPANSION TANKS
.1 .2
Adjust expansion tank pressure as indicated to suit design criteria. Install lockshield type valve at inlet to tank
3.5 PRESSURE SAFETY RELIEF VALVES
.1
Run discharge pipe to terminate at glycol fill tank.
Section 23 21 14 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.6 SUCTION DIFFUSERS
.1
Install on inlet to pumps having suction size greater than 50.
3.7
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 (I-P), Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings (ANSI Approved; IESNA Co-Sponsored). Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Advisory Council (EEMAC) Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B214-07, Installation Code for Hydronic Heating Systems, Includes Update No. 1 (2008). National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) .1 NEMA MG 1-2009, Revision 1-2010, Motors and Generators, Revision 1.
.2 .3
.4
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for pump, circulator, and equipment, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations indicate point of operation, and final location in field assembly. Submit manufacturer's detailed composite wiring diagrams for control systems showing factory installed wiring and equipment on packaged equipment or required for controlling devices or ancillaries, accessories and controllers.
.3
.1
Provide maintenance and operation data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4
MAINTENANCE
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.1 .2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
.1
Low maintenance type; cast iron body; silicon carbide mechanical seal; high efficiency close coupled dry motor; capacities as indicated; UL listed and CSA approved; suitable for use with propylene glycol. .1 Impeller: composite. .2 Shaft: stainless steel. .3 Gasket: EPDM. .4 Bearings: Permanently lubricated stainless steel. .5 Power: as indicated. .6 Maximum working pressure: 1034 kPa. .7 Maximum fluid temperature: 110C.
2.2 SINGLE SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
.1 .2
General: base-mounted pump complete with motor; suitable for use with propylene glycol. Base: cast iron or fabricated structural steel with drip rim and tapping for drain connection. Base shall have mounting hardware for spring isolators. Volute: cast iron radially split, end suction, flanged suction and discharge, with drain plug and vent cock, suction and discharge pressure gauge tappings. Impeller: cast bronze, keyed drive with locking nut or screw.
.3
.4
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 SINGLE SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMP (Cont'd)
.5 .6
Shaft: stainless steel with two point support, machined shoulders for ball bearing mounting.
Seal assembly: shall have a brass housing, Buna bellows, seat gasket, stainless steel spring and be of a carbon ceramic design. Coupling: flexible self-aligning. Motor: high efficiency EEMAC Class B, squirrel cage induction, 1750 r/min, continuous duty, drip proof, ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 50C.
.7 .8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
In line circulators: install as indicated by flow arrows. .1 Support at inlet and outlet flanges or unions. .2 Install with maintenance points accessible. .3 Confirm mounting orientation and support with manufacturer prior to installation. Base mounted type: supply templates for anchor bolt placement. .1 Include anchor bolts with sleeves. Place level, shim unit and grout. .2 Align coupling in accordance with manufacturer's recommended tolerance. Provide millwright's alignment certificate at completion. .3 Check oil level and lubricate. After run-in, tighten glands. Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. .1 Provide stanchions or hangers for this purpose. .2 Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for details. Pipe drain tapping c/w valve and cap for glycol recovery. Install volute venting pet cock in accessible location. Check rotation prior to start-up. Install pressure gauge test cocks.
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.2
START-UP
.1
General: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00; supplemented as specified herein. .2 In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Procedures: .1 Before starting pump, check that cooling water system over-temperature and other protective devices are installed and operative. .2 After starting pump, check for proper, safe operation. .3 Check installation, operation of mechanical seals, packing gland type seals. Adjust as necessary. .4 Check base for free-floating, no obstructions under base. .5 Run-in pumps for 12 continuous hours minimum. .6 Verify operation of over-temperature and other protective devices under low- and no-flow condition. .7 Eliminate air from scroll casing. .8 Adjust water flow rate through water-cooled bearings. .9 Adjust flow rate from pump shaft stuffing boxes to manufacturer's recommendation. .10 Adjust alignment of piping and conduit to ensure true flexibility. .11 Eliminate cavitation, flashing and air entrainment. .12 Adjust pump shaft seals, stuffing boxes, glands. .13 Measure pressure drop across strainer when clean and with flow rates as finally set. .14 Replace seals if pump used to degrease system or if pump used for temporary heat. .15 Verify lubricating oil levels.
.2
3.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV)
.1
General: .1 Verify performance in accordance with Section 01 91 00, supplemented as specified herein. Verify that manufacturer's performance curves are accurate. Ensure valves on pump suction and discharge provide tight shut-off. Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH):
.2 .3 .4
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV) (Cont'd)
.4
Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH):(Cont'd) Application: measure NPSH for pumps which .1 operate on open systems and with water at elevated temperatures. .2 Measure using procedures prescribed in Section 01 91 00. .3 Where procedures do not exist, discontinue PV, report to Departmental Representative and await instructions. Multiple Pump Installations - Series and Parallel: .1 Repeat PV procedures specified above for pump performance and pump BHP for combinations of pump operations. Mark points of design and actual performance at design conditions as finally set upon completion of TAB. Commissioning Reports: in accordance with Section 01 91 00, supplemented as specified herein. Reports to include: .1 Record of point(s) of actual performance at maximum and minimum conditions and for single and parallel operation as finally set at completion of commissioning on pump curves. .2 Use Report Forms specified in Section 01 91 00. .3 Pump performance curves (family of curves).
.5
.6
.7
3.4
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT
Section 23 23 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 23 05 05 - Installation of Pipework.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B16.22-2001(R2005), Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .2 ANSI/ASME B16.24-2006, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.26-2006, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. .4 ANSI/ASME B31.5-2010, Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A307-10, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. .2 ASTM B280-08, Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA B52-05(R2009), Mechanical Refrigeration Code. Environment Canada (EC) EPS 1/RA/1-96, Environmental Code of Practice for the Reduction of Fluorocarbon Emissions from Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.1
Section 23 23 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TUBING
.1
Processed for refrigeration installations, deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed. .1 Hard copper: to ASTM B280, type ACR. .2 Annealed copper: to ASTM B280, with minimum wall thickness as per CSA B52 and ANSI/ASME B31.5.
2.2
FITTINGS
.1 .2
Service: design pressure 2070 kPa and temperature 121C. Brazed: .1 Fittings: wrought copper to ANSI/ASME B16.22. .2 Joints: silver solder, 45% Ag-15% Cu or copper-phosphorous, 95% Cu-5%P and non-corrosive flux. Flared: .1 Bronze or brass, for refrigeration, to ANSI/ASME B16.26.
.3
2.3
PIPE SLEEVES
.1
Hard copper or steel, sized to provide 6 mm clearance around between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation.
2.4
VALVES
.1
NPS 3/4 and under: Class 500, 3.5 MPa, globe or angle non-directional type, diaphragm, packless type, with forged brass body and bonnet, moistureproof seal for below freezing applications, brazed connections.
2.5
ACCESSORIES
.1
Provide check valves, sight glasses, filter driers, mufflers as recommended by the equipment supplier. Provide rigid pipe covering over all exterior refrigerant piping to protect piping and insulation from falling ice and snow. Pipe covering shall be comprised of: .1 Lengths of heavy duty black HDPE pipe; inverted 'half-pipe' cross sectional profile; corrugated exterior.
.2
Section 23 23 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .2 Complete with base mounted height adjustable supports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Install in accordance with CSA B52, EPS1/RA/1 and ANSI/ASME B31.5. Do work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe between evaporatory and condensing units on A/C systems. Piping layout and sizes to be verified by equipment supplier. Connect to equipment with isolating valves and unions. Provide space for servicing, dissembly and removal of equipment and components all as recommended by manufacturer. Protect all openings in piping against entry of foreign material.
.4 .5
.6
3.2 BRAZING PROCEDURES
.1 .2 .3
Bleed inert gas into pipe during brazing. Remove valve internal parts, solenoid valve coils, sight glass. Do not apply heat near expansion valve and bulb.
.1 .2
General: Hard drawn copper tubing: do not bend. Minimize use of fittings. Hot gas lines: .1 Pitch at least 1:240 down in direction of flow to prevent oil return to compressor during operation. .2 Provide trap at base of risers greater than 2400 mm high and at each 7600 mm thereafter. .3 Provide inverted deep trap at top of risers.
Section 23 23 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.2
Hot gas lines:(Cont'd) Provide double risers for compressors .4 having capacity modulation. .1 Large riser: install traps as specified above. .2 Small riser: size for 5.1 m/s at minimum load. Connect upstream of traps on large riser.
3.4 PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING
.1 .2 .3
Close valves on factory charged equipment and other equipment not designed for test pressures. Leak test to CSA B52 before evacuation to 2 MPa and 1 MPa on high and low sides respectively. Test Procedure: Build pressure up to 35 kPa with refrigerant gas on high and low sides. Supplement with nitrogen to required test pressure. Test for leaks with electronic or halide detector. Repair leaks and repeat tests.
3.5 DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING
.1 .2 .3 .4
Close service valves on factory charged equipment. Ambient temperatures to be at least 13C for at least 12 hours before and during dehydration. Use copper lines of largest practical size to reduce evacuation time. Use two-stage vacuum pump with gas ballast on 2nd stage capable of pulling 5 Pa absolute and filled with dehydrated oil. Measure system pressure with vacuum gauge. Take readings with valve between vacuum pump and system closed. Triple evacuate system components containing gases other than correct refrigerant or having lost holding charge as follows: .1 Twice to 14 Pa absolute and hold for 4 h. .2 Break vacuum with refrigerant to 14 kPa. .3 Final to 5 Pa absolute and hold for at least 12 h. .4 Isolate pump from system, record vacuum and time readings until stabilization of vacuum. .5 Submit test results to Departmental Representative.
.5
.6
Section 23 23 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.5 DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING (Cont'd)
.7
Charging: Charge system through filter-drier and .1 charging valve on high side. Low side charging not permitted. .2 With compressors off, charge only amount necessary for proper operation of system. If system pressures equalize before system is fully charged, close charging valve and start up. With unit operating, add remainder of charge to system. .3 Re-purge charging line if refrigerant container is changed during charging process.
Checks: .1 Make checks and measurements as per manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions. .2 Record and report measurements to Departmental Representative.
.8
3.6
INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Post instructions in frame with glass cover in accordance with Section 01 78 00 and CSA B52.
3.7 REGISTRATION AND INSPECTION
.1
Register refrigeration system with Technical Standards and Safety Authority when required by CSA B52 and Technical Standard and Safety Act 2000. Apply, pay for and have T.S.S.A. inspect refrigeration system when required by CSA B52 or Technical Standards and Safety Act 2000.
END
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
Section 23 25 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VII-2010. American Society for Testing Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM D1384-05e1, Standard Test Method for Corrosion Test for Engine Coolants in Glassware.
.2
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Include following: .1 Log sheets as recommended by manufacturer.
.2
.1
2.1
MANUFACTURER
.1
Equipment, chemicals, service shall be provided by one supplier.
2.2
POT FEEDER
.1
Welded steel, pressure rating 1378 kPa. Temperature rating: 90C.
2.3 SHIPPING/ FEEDING CHEMICAL CONTAINERS
.1
High density moulded polyethylene, with liquid level graduations, cover.
Section 23 25 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.4 WATER TREATMENT FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1 .2
Glycol water heating system: Pot feeder, 19 L. Sidestream filter for each pot feeder: .1 Capacity 2% of pump recirculating rate at operating pressure up to 0.6 Lps. .2 Provide spare filter cartridges, twenty (20) filter cartridges for each type, size of micron filter.
2.5 GLYCOL SOLUTION
.1
The following systems shall be charged with premixed propylene glycol mix at the noted concentration: .1 Heating system - 50/50 glycol/water. Premixed propylene glycol shall be provided by a recognized supplier of that product. Glycol shall meet standards of ASTM D1384 for corrosion levels and shall be specifically prepared for use in building heating systems. Glycol shall not be provided from a recycled source. A complete fluid analysis shall be provided as an approval drawing prior to construction start. Certificate of Analysis shall provide as minimum: .1 Reserve alkalinity testing. .2 Fluid pH testing. .3 Freeze point testing. .4 Corrosion levels. .5 Glycol concentration. .6 Contaminants. Water used shall be from deionized or demineralised source and shall meet the following minimum requirements: .1 Chloride content: less than 25 ppm. .2 Sulphate content: less than 25 ppm. .3 Hard water ions: less than 50 ppm. .4 Total hardness: less than 100 ppm.
.2
.3
.4
2.6
CHEMICALS
.1 .2
Provide 1 years supply. Obtain chemicals from manufacturer with existing valid contract with CSC.
2.7
TEST EQUIPMENT
.1
Provide one set of test equipment for each system to verify performance.
Section 23 25 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.7 TEST EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
.2
Complete with carrying case, reagents for chemicals, all specialized or supplementary equipment.
Provide one (1) optical glycol strength tester calibrated for propylene glycol and automatically compensated for temperature.
.3
2.8 GLYCOL SOLUTION MAKE-UP SYSTEM
.1
Provide packaged solution feeder manufactured for the specific purpose of glycol solution makeup, consisting of reservoir, pump, expansion tank and operating controls. Feed pump shall be self priming, duplex diaphragm with pressure control operable with 115 V standard power. Storage reservoir shall be polyethylene, 180 litre capacity with cover. Expansion tank to be welded steel with precharged EPDM diaphragm, tested for 690 kPa. Operating controls consisting of adjustable pressure regulating valve, pressure gauge, y-strainer, bronze check valves, shut off valves with union and pressure switch control.
.2
.3 .4 .5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install HVAC water treatment systems in accordance with ASME Boiler Code Section VII, and requirements and standards of authorities having jurisdiction, except where specified otherwise. Ensure adequate clearances to permit performance of servicing and maintenance of equipment.
.2
3.2 CLEANING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM
.1
Section 23 25 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.3 WATER TREATMENT SERVICES
.1
Provide water treatment monitoring and consulting services for period of one year after system start-up. Service to include: .1 Initial water analysis and treatment recommendations. .2 System start-up assistance. .3 Operating staff training. .4 Visit plant every 120 days during period of operation and as required until system stabilizes, and advise on treatment system performance. .5 Provide necessary recording charts and log sheets for one year operation. .6 Provide necessary laboratory and technical assistance. .7 Instructions and advice to operating staff to be clear, concise and in writing.
3.4 GLYCOL MAKE-UP PACKAGE
.1 .2
Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Charge system with 50% premixed solution after piping systems have been tested and cleaned.
3.5
START-UP
.1
Start up water treatment systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.6
COMMISSIONING
.1 .2
Commissioning Agency: To be water treatment supplier. Timing: .1 After start-up deficiencies rectified. .2 After start-up and before TAB of connected systems. Pre-commissioning Inspections: .1 Verify: .1 Presence of test equipment, reagents, chemicals, details of specific tests to be performed, operating instructions. .2 Suitability of log book. .3 Currency and accuracy of raw initial water analysis. .4 Required quality of treated water. Commissioning procedures - applicable to all Water Treatment Systems: .1 Establish, adjust as necessary and record all automatic controls and chemical feed rates.
.3
.4
Section 23 25 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.6 COMMISSIONING (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) .2 Monitor performance continuously during commissioning of connected systems and until acceptance of project. .3 Establish test intervals, regeneration intervals. .4 Record on approved report forms commissioning procedures, test procedures, dates, times, quantities of chemicals added, raw water analysis, treated water analysis, test results, instrument readings, adjustments made, results obtained. .5 Establish, monitor and adjust automatic controls and chemical feed rates as necessary. .6 Visit project at specified intervals after commissioning is satisfactorily completed to verify that performance remains as set during commissioning (more often as required until system stabilizes at required level of performance). .7 Advise Departmental Representative in writing on matters regarding installed water treatment systems. Commissioning procedures - Closed Circuit Hydronic Systems: .1 Analyse water/glycol in system. .2 Based upon an assumed rate of loss approved by Departmental Representative, establish rate of chemical feed. .3 Record types, quantities of chemicals applied. Training: .1 Commission systems, perform tests in presence of, and using assistance of, assigned O&M personnel. Certificates: .1 Upon completion, furnish certificates confirming satisfactory installation and performance. Commissioning Reports: .1 To include system schematics, test results, test certificates, raw and treated water analyses, design criteria, other data required by Departmental Representative. Commissioning activities during Warranty Period: .1 Check out water treatment systems on regular basis and submit written report to Departmental Representative. END
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA
Sect 23 31 13.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 Materials and installation of low-pressure metallic ductwork, joints and accessories. Related Sections: .1 Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. .2 Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. .3 Section 23 05 94 - Pressure Testing of Ducted Air Systems. .4 Section 23 41 00 - Particulate Air Filtration.
.2
1.2
REFERENCES
.1 .2
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE). American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A480/A480M-11a, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .2 ASTM A635/A635M-09b, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Alloy, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, General Requirements for. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. Department of Justice Canada (Jus). .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS). .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). .1 NFPA 90A-2009, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. .2 NFPA 90B-2009, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems.
.3
.4
.5
Sect 23 31 13.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.6
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA). .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition 2005. .2 SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985, 1st Edition. .3 SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction 1995, 1st Edition.
Transport Canada (TC). .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34.
.7
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Sealants. .2 Tape. .3 Proprietary Joints.
.1
.1 .2
Protect on site stored or installed absorptive material from moisture damage. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEAL CLASSIFICATION
.1
Classification as follows: Maximum Pressure Pa 500 SMACNA Seal Class C
.2
Seal classification: .1 Class C: transverse joints and connections made air tight with sealant. Longitudinal seams unsealed.
Sect 23 31 13.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2
SEALANT
.1
Sealant: oil resistant, polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature range of minus 30C to plus 93C.
2.3
TAPE
.1
Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 50 mm wide.
2.4
DUCT LEAKAGE
.1
In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
2.5
FITTINGS
.1 .2
Fabrication: to SMACNA 500 Pa Class. Radiused elbows: .1 Rectangular: Centreline radius of 1.5 times duct dimension in plane of rotation except where duct velocities are less than 4 m/s where radius may be reduced to 1 times. .2 Round: Centreline radius of 1.5 times duct diameter except where duct velocities are less tan 4 m/s where radius may be reduces to 1 times. .3 Oval: Centreline radius of 1.5 times duct dimension in-line of rotation except where duct velocities are less than 4 m/s where radius may be reduced to 1 times. Mitred elbows, rectangular: .1 To 400 mm: with single thickness turning vanes. .2 Over 400 mm: with double thickness turning vanes. Branches: .1 Rectangular main and branch: with radius on branch 1.5 times width of duct. .2 Round main and branch: enter main duct at 45 degrees with conical connection. .3 Provide volume control damper in branch duct near connection to main duct. Transitions: .1 Diverging: 20 degrees maximum included angle. .2 Converging: 30 degrees maximum included angle. Offsets: .1 Full short radiused elbows.
.3
.4
.5
.6
Sect 23 31 13.01 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.6
FIRE STOPPING
.1
Retaining angles around duct, on both sides of fire separation in accordance with Section 07 84 00. Fire stopping material and installation must not distort duct.
.2
2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL
.1 .2 .3
Lock forming quality: to ASTM A653/A653M, Z90 zinc coating. Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA 500 Pa Class. Joints: to SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint. Proprietary manufactured flanged duct joint to be considered to be a Class C seal.
2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
.1
Hangers and Supports: in accordance with Section 23 05 29. .1 Strap hangers: of same material as duct but next sheet metal thickness heavier than duct. .1 Maximum size duct supported by strap hanger: 500 mm. .2 Hanger configuration: to SMACNA. .3 Hangers: galvanized steel angle with galvanized steel rods to SMACNA or the following table (whichever is heavier construction): Duct Size (mm) up to 750 751 to 1050 1051 to 1500 1501 to 2100 2101 to 2400 .4 Angle Size (mm) 25 x 25 x 3 40 x 40 x 3 40 x 40 x 3 50 x 50 x 3 50 x 50 x 5 Rod Size (mm) 6 6 10 10 10
Upper hanger attachments: .1 For concrete: manufactured concrete inserts. .2 For steel joist: manufactured joist clamp. .3 For steel beams: manufactured beam clamps.
Sect 23 31 13.01 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.9 INTERIOR LINED ROUND DUCTWORK
.1 .2
Provide and install lined round ductwork where shown for individual cell exhaust systems. Outer duct shall be solid round spiral duct of gauges required by SMACNA. duct shall be factory lined with 25 mm thick insulation as specified for internal acoustic and shall be fully adhered with adhesive coat. Cover internal surfaces with 24 ga (minimum) galvanized steel perforated sheet. Fittings shall be factory lined in similar manner as duct.
.3
2.10
DRYER EXHAUST
.1
Dryer exhaust duct systems shall be fabricated from aluminum. Duct shall be one gauge heavier than specified for equivalent size galvanized steel duct. fittings shall be two gauges heavier than for galvanized steel. Lap joints in direction of flow. Connect joints with draw bands. No fasteners are to penetrate ductwall. Arrange to allow access to all sections for cleanout. Seal all joints except at draw bands and equipment. Connection at dryer to be made with aluminum flexible duct as specified elsewhere. Arrange flexible duct to be in vertical section maximum 750 mm in length. Flexible duct must be installed to be straight with no turns or offsets when in final installed position. Provide galvanized steel wallcap at discharge. Wallcap shall be complete with backdraft damper, less screen. Wallcap shall be acid etched ready for painting.
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6
.7
Sect 23 31 13.01 Page 6 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1 .2
Do work in accordance with NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B and SMACNA. Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods. .1 Insulate strap hangers 100 mm beyond insulated duct. Support risers in accordance with SMACNA. Install breakaway joints in ductwork on each side of fire separation. Install proprietary manufactured flanged duct joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Manufacture duct in lengths and diameter to accommodate installation of acoustic duct lining
.3 .4 .5
.6
3.2
HANGERS
.1 .2 .3
Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA. Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers. Hanger spacing: in accordance with SMACNA as follows: Duct Size (mm) to 1500 1501 and over Spacing (mm) 3000 2500
3.3 WATERTIGHT DUCT
.1
Provide watertight duct for: .1 Minimum 3000 mm from duct mounted humidifier in all directions. Form bottom of horizontal duct without longitudinal seams. .1 Weld joints of bottom and side sheets. .2 Seal other joints with duct sealer. Slope horizontal branch ductwork down towards low point. Slope header ducts down toward risers.
.2
.3
Sect 23 31 13.01 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.4 SEALING AND TAPING
.1 .2
Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations. Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of one coat of sealant to manufacturers recommendations.
3.5
LEAKAGE TESTS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Refer to Section 23 05 94. In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual. Do leakage tests in sections. Make trial leakage tests as instructed to demonstrate workmanship. Do not install additional ductwork until trial test has been passed. Test section minimum of 10 m long with not less than two branch takeoffs and two 90 degrees elbows. Complete test before performance insulation or concealment Work.
.7
END
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Section 23 33 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) .1 SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 95.
1.2
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Flexible connections. .2 Duct access doors. .3 Turning vanes. .4 Instrument test ports. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.3
1.3 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
.1
Catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
.1
2.1
GENERAL
.1
Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
.1
Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame 100 mm long, 24 gauge thick with fabric clenched by means of double locked seams. Material: .1 Fire resistant, self extinguishing, neoprene coated glass fabric, temperature rated at minus 40C to plus 90C, density of 1.3 kg/m2.
.2
Section 23 33 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.3 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS
.1
Non-insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame. Insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame and 25 mm thick rigid glass fibre insulation. Gaskets: neoprene. Hardware: .1 Up to 300 x 300 mm: two sash locks complete with safety chain. .2 301 to 450 mm: four sash locks complete with safety chain. .3 451 to 1000 mm: piano hinge and minimum two sash locks.
.2
.3 .4
2.4
TURNING VANES
.1
Factory or shop fabricated single thickness with trailing edge, to recommendations of SMACNA and as indicated.
2.5 INSTRUMENT TEST
.1 .2 .3 .4
1.6 mm thick steel zinc plated after manufacture. Cam lock handles with neoprene expansion plug and handle chain. 28 mm minimum inside diameter. Length to suit insulation thickness. Neoprene mounting gasket.
2.6 DUCT SECURITY GRIDS
.1
Provide steel security grids in all ducts through security barriers where duct has a minimum dimension larger than 130 mm and a total 2 cross sectional area greater than 0.05 m . Grids to be installed where noted on Drawings or as follows where ducts pass: .1 One major inmate area to another. .2 Inmate area to non-inmate area. .3 Inmate area to exterior. .4 Exterior to control post. Construct security grids of mild steel bars not less than 12 mm diameter on 140 mm centers.
.2
Section 23 33 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.6 DUCT SECURITY GRIDS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) Where opening is between inmate area and a security corridor the bars shall be of tool resistant homogenized steel. Maximum bar length without cross bar not to exceed 610 mm. All bars shall be welded together where they intersect. Weld bars to a flat steel frame secured to structure with bolts set a minimum of 50 mm into expansion type anchors. Maximum bolt spacing 400 mm o/c. No less than 4 bolts per grille.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Flexible connections: .1 Install in following locations: .1 Inlets and outlets to supply air units and fans. .2 Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans. .3 As indicated. .2 Length of connection: 100 mm. .3 Minimum distance between metal parts when system in operation: 75 mm. .4 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA. .5 When fan is running: .1 Ducting on sides of flexible connection to be in alignment. .2 Ensure slack material in flexible connection. .3 Do not install flexible connection direct to fan inlet. Provide minimum 1 fan diameter straight duct length at inlet. Access doors and viewing panels: .1 Size: .1 600 x 600 mm for person size entry. .2 300 x 300 mm for servicing entry. .3 150 x 150 mm for viewing. .4 As indicated. .2 Locations: .1 Fire dampers. .2 Control dampers. .3 Devices requiring maintenance. .4 Locations required by code. .5 Before and after turning vanes. .6 At inlets and outlets of terminal units (VAV boxes, etc.). .7 Duct coils. .8 Elsewhere as indicated. Instrument test ports.
.2
.3
Section 23 33 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) .1 General: .1 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Locate to permit easy manipulation of instruments. .3 Install insulation port extensions as required. .4 Locations. .1 For traverse readings: .1 Ducted inlets to roof and wall exhausters. .2 Inlets and outlets of other fan systems. .3 Main and sub-main ducts. .4 And as indicated. .2 For temperature readings: .1 At outside air intakes. .2 In mixed air applications in locations as approved by Departmental Representative. .3 At inlet and outlet of coils. .4 Downstream of junctions of two converging air streams of different temperatures. .5 And as indicated. Turning vanes: .1 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and as indicated. Duct access: .1 Access doors shall be provided for inspection of duct-mounted components and clearing of the duct systems. Access doors shall have positive seal and locking mechanisms. .2 Access doors shall be located: .1 such that any section of duct is not more than 15m from a point of access; .2 at the base of all main risers; .3 before and after turning vanes; .4 at fire, smoke and motorized dampers; and .5 at locations having an internally mounted piece of equipment or device. Duct security grids: .1 Locate grid in plane of security barrier. .2 Bolt grid into structure of wall at security barrier. .3 Coordinate security grid installation with installation of fire dampers. Security grid shall be mounted in plane of security barrier. Extend rating of separation so that fire damper
.4
.5
.6
Section 23 33 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
.6
Duct security grids:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) installation does not interfere with security grid.
END
DAMPERS - BALANCING
Section 23 33 14 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA) .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible - 1985.
1.2
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Performance data.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.
2.1
GENERAL
.1
Manufacture to SMACNA standards.
2.2 SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Of same material as duct, but one sheet metal thickness heavier. V-groove stiffened. Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height 300 mm. Locking quadrant with shaft extension to accommodate insulation thickness. Inside and outside nylon end bearings. Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.
2.3 MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS
.1 .2 .3
Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct. Opposed blade: configuration, metal thickness and construction to recommendations of SMACNA. Maximum blade height: 100 mm.
DAMPERS - BALANCING
Section 23 33 14 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.3 MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS (Cont'd)
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8
Bearings: self-lubricating nylon.

Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant. Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop. Maximum leakage: 0.7% at 750 Pa. Provide shaft extension and standoff for insulated ducts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install where indicated and as required to balance system. Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. For supply, return and exhaust systems, locate balancing dampers in each branch duct. Runouts to registers and diffusers: install single blade damper located as close as possible to main ducts. All dampers to be vibration free. Ensure damper operators are observable and accessible.
.3 .4
.5 .6
END
DAMPERS - OPERATING
Section 23 33 15 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Performance data.
.1
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency.
.1
DAMPERS - OPERATING
Section 23 33 15 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MULTI-LEAF DAMPERS
.1 .2
Opposed blade type as indicated. Structurally formed steel, interlocking blades, complete with extruded PVC seals, spring stainless steel side seals, structurally formed and welded galvanized steel frame. Pressure fit self-lubricated synthetic bearings. Linkage: plated steel tie rods, brass pivots and plated steel brackets, complete with plated steel control rod. Performance: .1 Leakage: in closed position to be less than 2% of rated air flow at 500 Pa differential across damper. .2 Pressure drop: at full open position to be less than 11 Pa differential across damper at 300 m/s. Insulated aluminum dampers: .1 Frames: insulated with extruded polystyrene foam with R factor of 5.0. .2 Blades: constructed from aluminum extrusions with internal hollows insulated with polyurethane or polystyrene foam, R factor of 5.0. .3 Dampers shall be designed for service temperature range from minus 40C to 100C.
.3 .4
.5
.6
2.2 BACK DRAFT DAMPERS
.1
Automatic gravity operated, multi leaf, extruded 1.8 mm thick aluminum construction with synthetic bearings, set in 3.2 mm thick aluminum frame.
DAMPERS - OPERATING
Section 23 33 15 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Install where indicated. Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and manufacturer's instructions. Seal multiple damper modules with silicon sealant. Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section 23 33 00. Ensure dampers are observable and accessible. Dampers on ducts or openings connected directly to outside (eg. O/A intake, exhaust, relief, etc.) shall be insulated aluminum style.
END
DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE
Section 23 33 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA) .1 NFPA 90A-2009, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S112-10, Standard Methods of Fire Test of Fire-Damper Assemblies. .2 ULC CAN4-S112.2-M84, Standard Method of Fire Test of Ceiling Firestop Flap Assemblies. .3 ULC S505-1974, Fusible Links for Fire Protection Services.
.2
1.2
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Fire dampers. .2 Fire stop flaps. .3 Fusible links. .4 Design details of break-away joints.
.1
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide following: .1 6 fusible links of each type.
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
Section 23 33 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
2.1
FIRE DAMPERS
.1
Fire dampers: arrangement Type B or C, listed and bear label of ULC, meet requirements of Federal Fire Commissioner and NFPA 90A. Fire damper assemblies to be fire tested in accordance with CAN/ULC S112. Mild steel, factory fabricated for fire rating requirement to maintain integrity of fire wall and/or fire separation. Top hinged: multi-blade hinged, sized to maintain full duct cross section as indicated. Fusible link actuated, weighted to close and lock in closed position when released or having negator-spring-closing operator for multi-leaf type or roll door type in horizontal position with vertical air flow. Retaining angle iron frame as per damper assembly listing, on full perimeter of fire damper, on both sides of fire separation being pierced.
.2
.3 .4
.5
2.2 FIRE STOP FLAPS
.1 .2
To be ULC listed and labelled and fire tested in accordance with ULC CAN4 S112.2. Construct of minimum 1.5 mm thick sheet steel with 1.6 mm thick non asbestos ULC listed insulation and corrosion resistant pins and hinges. Flaps to be held open with fusible link conforming to ULC S505.
.3
Section 23 33 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and in accordance with conditions of ULC listing. Maintain integrity of fire separation. After completion and prior to concealment obtain approvals of complete installation from authority having jurisdiction. Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section 23 33 00. Coordinate with installer of firestopping. Ensure access doors/panels, fusible links, damper operators are easily observed and accessible. Install break-away joints of approved design on each side of fire separation. Fire Damper: .1 Installation of all fire dampers shall be performed according to Manufacturers listed installation instructions. Installation instructions to be submitted to Departmental Representative with approval drawings. .2 All fire dampers shall adhere to all requirements including but not limited to: .1 sleeve including proper gauge thickness; .2 retention angles and securement; .3 damper to sleeve securement; .4 duct to sleeve breakaway connection; .5 clearance between opening and sleeve; and .6 duct access door. .3 After installation is completed, remove fusible link, operate curtain, replace fusible link after curtain is returned to open position. Curtain shall operate freely to closed position without assistance or other intervention. .4 Installer shall certify each installation on completion of installation and curtain operation test. Certification shall be recorded and shall be turned over to Departmental Representative prior to inspection of installation.
.4 .5 .6
.7 .8
Section 23 33 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
.9
Coordinate with work of Section 23 05 93. Repair or replace installations where required for completion of TAB contract.
END
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Section 23 33 46 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation. Section 23 31 13.01 - Metal Ducts - Low Pressure to 500 Pa.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 90A-2009, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. .2 NFPA 90B-2009, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 95 and Addendum No.1 1997. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S110-07, Standard Methods of Test for Air Ducts. .2 UL 181-2005, Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
.2
.3
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Thermal properties. .2 Friction loss. .3 Acoustical loss. .4 Leakage. .5 Fire rating.
.1
Catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Section 23 33 46 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples with product data of different types of flexible duct being used in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
2.1
GENERAL
.1 .2
Factory fabricated to CAN/ULC S110. Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of 1.00. Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50 for any portion of flexible duct including jacket.
.3
2.2 METALLIC UNINSULATED
.1 .2
Type 1: Spiral wound flexible aluminum. Performance: .1 Factory tested to 3.0 kPa without leakage.
2.3 METALLIC INSULATED
.1
Type 2: Spiral wound flexible aluminum with factory applied, 25 mm thick flexible glass fibre thermal insulation with vapour barrier and vinyl jacket. Performance: .1 Factory tested to 3.0 kPa without leakage.
.2
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Section 23 33 46 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install in accordance with: SMACNA. Maximum length of flexible duct: 1.5 m. Support flexible duct to prevent deforming or restricted air flows. All ductwork to diffusers including the elbow shall be rigid ductwork. Hanger or saddle material in contact with the flexible duct shall be of sufficient width to prevent any restriction of internal diameter of duct when the weight of the supported section rests on the hanger or saddle material. In no case will the material contacting the flexible duct be less than 25 mm wide, and cover one half the circumference of the outside diameter of the flexible duct. Transverse duct joints at connections to rigid ductwork and equipment shall be sealed in accordance with Section 23 31 13.01. The ends of ducts shall be trimmed squarely prior to installation. Collars to which flexible duct is attached shall be a minimum of 50 mm in length. Collars and sleeves shall be inserted into flexible ducts a minimum of 25 mm before fastening. Metallic flexible duct shall be attached using a minimum of three #8 sheet metal screws equally spaced around the duct's circumference; ducts larger than 300 mm diameter shall have a minimum of five #8 sheet metal screws. Screws shall be located at least 12 mm from the duct end. Insulation and vapour barriers shall be fitted over the core connection and shall be supplementally secured with a draw band. Insulated metallic flexible ductwork shall be provided where ductwork is identified to be insulated under Section 23 07 13. Flexible ductwork is not to be used for return air. Flexible ductwork may be used as described above for supply air only. END
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7
.8
.9
.10
.11
ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING
Section 23 33 53 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM C177-10, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 90A-2009, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. .2 NFPA 90B-2009, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible-95 (Addendum No.1, Nov. 97). Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.
.2
.3
.4
1.2
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
2.1
DUCT LINER
.1
General: .1 Mineral fibre (fibrous glass) duct liner: air stream side faced with mat facing. .2 Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50 when tested in accordance with CAN/ULC S102. Rigid: .1 Use on flat surfaces where indicated.
.2
Section 23 33 53 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.1 DUCT LINER (Cont'd)
.2
Rigid:(Cont'd) .2 25 mm thick, fibrous glass rigid board duct liner. 3 .3 Density: 48 kg/m minimum. .4 Thermal resistance to be minimum 0.76 m 2.C/W for 25 mm thickness when tested in accordance with ASTM C177, at 24C mean temperature. Flexible: .1 Use on round or oval surfaces. .2 25 mm thick, fibrous glass blanket duct liner. .3 Density: 24 kg/m3 minimum. .4 Thermal resistance to be minimum 0.74 m 2.C/W to 25 mm thickness when tested in accordance with ASTM C177, at 24C mean temperature.
.3
2.2
ADHESIVE
.1 .2
Meet requirements of NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature range minus 29C to plus 93C.
2.3
FASTENERS
.1
Weld pins 2.0 mm diameter, length to suit thickness of insulation. Metal retaining clips, 32 mm square.
2.4
JOINT TAPE
.1
Poly-Vinyl treated open weave fiberglass membrane 50 mm wide.
2.5
SEALER
.1 .2
Meet requirements of NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature range minus 68C to plus 93C.
Section 23 33 53 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Do work in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA duct liner standards as indicated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, except as specified otherwise. Line inside of ducts where indicated. Duct dimensions, as indicated, are clear inside duct lining.
.2 .3
3.2
DUCT LINER
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows: .1 Fasten to interior sheet metal surface with 100% coverage of adhesive. .2 In addition to adhesive, install weld pins not less than 2 rows per surface and not more than 425 mm on centres to compress duct liner sufficiently to hold it firmly in place.
3.3
JOINTS
.1
Seal butt joints, exposed edges, weld pin and clip penetrations and damaged areas of liner with joint tape and sealer. Install joint tape in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations, and as follows: .1 Bed tape in sealer. .2 Apply two coats of sealer over tape. Replace damaged areas of liner at discretion of Departmental Representative. Protect leading and trailing edges of duct sections with sheet metal nosing having 15 mm overlap and fastened to duct.
.2 .3
END
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
AMCA 99-10, Standards Handbook. ANSI/AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. ANSI/AMCA 300-08, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. ANSI/AMCA 301-06, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. CAN/CGSB 1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. ASTM B117-09, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide: .1 Fan performance curves showing point of operation, BHP and efficiency. .2 Sound rating data at point of operation. Indicate: .1 Motors, sheaves, bearings, shaft details. .2 Minimum performance achievable with variable speed controllers and variable inlet vanes as appropriate.
.3
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .1 Spare parts to include: .1 Matched sets of belts. Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual.
.2
1.6 MANUFACTURED ITEMS
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FANS GENERAL
.1
Capacity: flow rate, external static pressure, bhp, efficiency, power, size, as indicated on schedule. Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99. Sound ratings: comply with ANSI/AMCA 301, tested to ANSI/AMCA 300. Unit shall bear AMCA certified sound rating seal. Performance ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with ANSI/AMCA 210. Unit shall bear AMCA certified rating seal, except for propeller fans smaller than 300 mm diameter. Motors: .1 In accordance with Section 23 05 13 supplemented as specified herein. .2 Sizes as indicated. .3 For use with variable speed controllers where noted. .4 Two speed with two windings and speeds as indicated. Accessories and hardware: matched sets of V-belt drives, adjustable slide rail motor bases, belt guards, coupling guards fan inlet safety screens as indicated and as specified in Section 23 05 13.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.1 FANS GENERAL (Cont'd)
.7 .8
Factory primed before assembly in colour standard to manufacturer.

Bearing lubrication systems plus extension lubrication tubes where bearings are not easily accessible. Vibration isolation: to Section 23 05 48. Flexible connections: to Section 23 33 00. Scroll casing drains: as indicated.
.9 .10 .11
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
.1
Fan wheels: .1 Welded steel construction. .2 Maximum operating speed of centrifugal fans not more than 50% of first critical speed. .3 Air foil, forward curved or backward inclined blades, as indicated. Bearings: heavy duty split pillow-block grease lubricated ball or roller self aligning type with oil retaining, dust excluding seals and a certified minimum rated life of 100,000 h. Housings: .1 Volute with inlet cones: fabricated steel for wheels 300 mm or greater, steel or aluminum for smaller wheels, braced, and with welded supports. .2 For horizontally and vertically split housings provide flanges on each section for bolting together, with gaskets of non-oxidizing non-flammable material. .3 Provide bolted airtight access doors with handles.
.2
.3
2.3 CABINET FANS GENERAL PURPOSE
.1 .2
Fan characteristics and construction: as centrifugal fans. Cabinet hung single or multiple wheel with DWDI centrifugal fans in factory fabricated casing complete with vibration isolators and seismic control measures, motor, variable speed V-belt drive and guard inside or outside casing. Fabricate casing of zinc coated or phosphate treated steel reinforced and braced for rigidity. Provide removable panels for access to interior. Uncoated, steel parts shall be painted over with corrosion resistant paint to
.3
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.3 CABINET FANS GENERAL PURPOSE (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) CAN/CGSB-1.181. Finish inside and out, over prime coat, with rust resistant enamel. Internally line cabinet with 50 mm thick rigid acoustic insulation, pinned and cemented, 48 kg/m3 density, complete with perforated metal liner and complete with metal nosings on all exposed edges.
2.4 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
.1
Characteristics and construction: as for centrifugal fan wheels, with axial flow construction and direct or belt drive as indicated. Provide AMCA arrangements 1 or 9 as indicated with stiffened flanges, smooth rounded inlets, and stationary guide vanes.
.2
2.5
UTILITY SETS
.1 .2
Characteristics and construction: for centrifugal fans. Preassemble single width centrifugal fan with removable weatherproof protective hood with vents. Provide belt driven sets with adjustable motor bed plate.
.3
2.6
PROPELLER FANS
.1 .2
Wall mounted, belt driven, steel supply fan. Fan to be constructed of bolted and welded components utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. Motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a heavy duty welded tubular steel support frame. Propeller shall be high-efficiency fabricated steel design with blades securely fastened to a minimum 7 gauge hub. Hub to be keyed and locked to fan shaft with minimum two set screws. Bearings shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in cast iron pillow blocks selected for minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. All steel fan components shall be electrostatically coated and baked with polyester powder coating. Paint must exceed
.3
.4
.5
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.6 PROPELLER FANS (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.5
(Cont'd) 1,000 hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method.
3.1 FAN INSTALLATION
.1
Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountings specified in Section 23 05 48, flexible electrical leads and flexible connections in accordance with Section 23 33 00. Provide sheaves and belts required for final air balance. Bearings and extension tubes to be easily accessible. Access doors and access panels to be easily accessible.
.2 .3 .4
END
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI/AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 90A-2009, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. International Organization of Standardization (ISO) .1 ISO 3741-2010, Acoustics-Determination of Sound Power Levels and Sound Energy Levels of Noise Sources Using Sound Pressure - Precision Methods for Reverberation Test Rooms. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) .1 UL 181-2005, Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 130-2008, Methods of Testing Air Terminal Units (ANSI/ASHRAE Approved).
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Capacity. .2 Pressure drop. .3 Noise rating. .4 Leakage. .5 Air flow sensor. .6 Recommended installation.
.1
1.4
CERTIFICATION
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from certified ADC (Air Diffusion Council) testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Terminal units of the same type to be product of one manufacturer.
2.2 SINGLE DUCT TERMINAL UNITS
.1
Units shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel with primary air valve damper of heavy gauge steel with peripheral gasket and solid steel shaft pivoted in self-lubricating bearings. Air leakage past the fully closed damper shall not exceed 2% of the nominal catalogue rating at 740 Pa. pressure when tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 130. Units shall be pressure independent and shall be adjustable to any airflow between zero and the maximum catalogued volume. Air flow sensor shall be of a cross configuration located on the inlet of the unit. Sensor shall provide accuracy of within 5% with a duct elbow located directly on the inlet. Unit shall include protective metal shroud for housing of site installed digital controller. Controller to be supplied and installed by EMCS contractor.
.2
.3
.4
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Support independently of ductwork. Install with at least four duct diameters of straight inlet duct, same size as inlet, and two duct diameters of straight duct on outlet. Locate so that controls, dampers and access panels are easily accessible.
.4
END
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Section 23 37 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Capacity. .2 Throw and terminal velocity. .3 Noise criteria. .4 Pressure drop. .5 Neck velocity. .6 Construction and finish. .7 Mounting details.
1.2
SAMPLES
.1 .2
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples are required for the following: .1 Secure area grilles.
1.3
CERTIFICATIONS
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
.1
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 Keys for volume control adjustment. .2 Keys for air flow pattern adjustment.
Section 23 37 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
To meet capacity, pressure drop, terminal velocity, throw, noise level, neck velocity as indicated. Frames: .1 Full perimeter gaskets. .2 Plaster frames where set into plaster or gypsum board. .3 Tamper proof security screws, concealed fasteners. .4 Security sleeves where noted. Concealed manual volume control damper operators. Volume control dampers located in diffuser necks are not acceptable for main air system balancing, unless specifically noted otherwise. Balancing dampers shall be provided in ductwork at branch take-offs to all diffusers. Colour: as indicated in schedules on drawings and/or as directed by Departmental Representative. Confirm mounting type with architectural reflected ceiling plan.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Grilles, registers and diffusers of same generic type to be product of one manufacturer.
2.3 SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1
Type A: Steel, square 4 cone ceiling supply diffuser, adjustable air pattern, for mounting in T-bar grid, white powder coat finish. Provide safety chain from back side of diffuser to structure independent of ductwork. Type B: Steel, square 3 cone ceiling supply diffuser, adjustable air pattern, for mounting in T-bar grid, white powder coat finish. Type C: Steel, square 4 cone ceiling supply diffuser, adjustable air pattern, for surface mount application, white powder coat finish. Type K: Steel, heavy duty, 0 deflection grille with 19 mm blade spacing, for surface mount application, 32 mm boarder, blades parallel to
.2
.3
.4
Section 23 37 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3 SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS (Cont'd)
.4
Type K:(Cont'd) long dimension, white powder coat finish. Grille complete with steel balancing damper.
2.4 RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1
Type D: Steel, square perforated face exhaust diffuser, for mounting in T-bar grid, white powder coat finish. Provide safety chain from back side of diffuser to structure independent of ductwork. Type E: Steel, maximum security, risk resistant exhaust grille with non-vision core, all welded construction. 5mm hot rolled steel face plate, 25 mm 45 deflection angle louvres on 6 mm centres with 44 mm x 12 gauge hot rolled steel mullions on 13 mm centres. Integral 5 mm thick sleeve of hot rolled steel with continuous welded seams. Sleeve length to suite wall thickness plus retainer angles plus duct connection. Provide 4 sided mounting frame of 25 mm x 25 mm x 5 mm hot rolled steel angle shipped loose for field welding to sleeve. Finish to be white powder coating. Type F: Steel frame with 13 mm x 13 mm x 13 mm aluminum grid core eggcrate style return grille for surface mount installation, white powder coat finish. Type G: Steel frame with aluminum grid as listed for Type F except grille to be complete with steel damper for exhaust applications. Type H: Steel, medium security, all welded screen face grille with integral sleeve. 5 mm hot rolled steel face plate, 10 gauge x 10 mm clear opening steel mesh secured by angles behind face plate. Provide sleeve and mounting angels as listed for Type E grille. Finish to be white powder coating. Type J: As listed for Type K grille except without balancing damper.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 23 37 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Install with flat head colour matched screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are visible. All fasteners shall be tamperproof security type fasteners. Provide concealed safety chain on each grille, register and diffuser as specified. Secure area grilles shall be mounted in place with angle frame welded to sleeve clamped tightly to wall. Welding may be stitch style provided 50% of overall length is welded. No un-welded length longer than 25 mm will be accepted. Grille face to be pulled tight on cell side and adjusted so no gap exists prior to welding. Redo installation if grille is loose in wall or if gap exists upon completion.
END
LOUVRES, INTAKES AND VENTS
Section 23 37 20 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) . .1 ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA). Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).
.1
.2 .3
.1
Performance Requirements: .1 Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items: obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturer from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. .2 Indicate following: .1 Pressure drop. .2 Face area. .3 Free area. .4 Materials of construction and construction methods. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Test Reports: .1 Submit certified data from independent laboratory substantiating acoustic and aerodynamic performance to ASTM E90.
.2
.3
Section 23 37 20 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRAVITY ROOF INTAKE
.1
Constructed of galvanized steel sheet with formed, arched panels with interlocking seams. Base height (top of curb cap to underside of intake screen) shall be 300 mm minimum. Hood support members shall be galvanized steel structure connected to hood with tamper resistant fasteners. Hood is not to be hinged or otherwise easily removable. Hoods shall be internally insulated with 25 mm fibreglass as specified for acoustic duct insulation. Birdscreen of 12 mm galvanized steel mesh shall be mounted horizontally across intake of hood. Intake shall be factory painted with baked enamel finish over primer compatible with galvanized finish. Colour selected by Architect.
.2
.3 .4
Section 23 37 20 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
In accordance with manufacturer's and SMACNA recommendations. Reinforce and brace as indicated. Anchor securely into opening. Seal with caulking to ensure weather tightness. All hood to curb fasteners shall be installed from inside throat of intake hood so as not to be accessible from roof areas.
3.2
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
Section 23 41 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB 115.10-M90, Disposable Air Filters for the Removal of Particulate Matter from Ventilating Systems. .2 CAN/CGSB 115.11-M85, Filters, Air, High Efficiency, Disposable, Bag Type. .3 CAN/CGSB 115.12-M85, Filters, Air, Medium Efficiency, Disposable, Bag Type. .4 CAN/CGSB 115.13-85, Filter Media, Automatic Roll. .5 CAN/CGSB 115.14-M91, High Efficiency Cartridge Type Supported Air Filters for the Removal of Particulate Matter from Ventilating Systems. .6 CAN/CGSB 115.15-M91, High Efficiency Rigid Type Air Filters for Removal of Particulate Matter from Ventilating Systems. .7 CAN/CGSB 115.16-M82, Activated Carbon for Odor Removal from Ventilating Systems. .8 CAN/CGSB 115.18-M85, Filter, Air, Extended Area Panel Type, Medium Efficiency. .9 CAN/CGSB 115.20-95, Polarized Media Air Filter. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada .1 ULC S111-07, Standard Method of Fire Tests for Air Filter Units.
.2
.1 .2
Submit shop drawing and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Filters. .2 Filter gauges.
.1
.1
Section 23 41 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as frames and filters, addresses of suppliers, list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing for inclusion in operating manual.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Spare filters: in addition to filters to be installed immediately prior to acceptance by Departmental Representative, supply 1 complete set of filters for each filter unit or filter bank in accordance with section 01 78 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1 .2
Media: suitable for air at 100% RH and air temperatures between minus 40 and 50C. Number of units, size and thickness of panels, overall dimensions of filter bank, configuration and capacities: refer to equipment schedules and details on drawings. Pressure drop when clean and dirty, sizes and thickness: as indicated on schedule.
.3
2.2
ACCESSORIES
.1
Holding frames: permanent channel section construction of galvanized steel, 1.6 mm thick, except where specified otherwise. Seals: to ensure leakproof operation. Blank-off plates: as required, to fit all openings and of same material as holding frames. Access and servicing: through doors/panels on each side and/or from upstream face of filter bank where indicated.
.2 .3 .4
Section 23 41 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3 RIGID, SUPPORTED PLEAT TYPE FILTERS, 25-30% EFFICIENCY
.1 .2 .3
Media: disposable preformed cotton/polyester blend cartridge. Holding frame: high wet strength cardboard. Performance: .1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency 25-30%. .2 MERV 7. Fire rated: to ULC S111.
.4
2.4 CARTRIDGE TYPE FILTERS 80-85% EFFICIENCY
.1 .2 .3 .4
Media: disposable, high efficiency, to CAN/CGSB-115.14. Holding frame: galvanized steel with bracing. Media support: welded wire grid. Performance: .1 average atmospheric dust spot efficiency 80-85%. .2 MERV 13. Fire rated: to ULC S111.
.5
2.5 FILTER GAUGES - DIAL TYPE
.1
Diaphragm actuated, direct reading. Compatible with air from minus 6C to 48C. Scale calibrated to read full range of filter from clan installation through fully loaded at 50% pressure beyond changeout limit. Two phototransistor actuated DPDT relays included for low/high limit sensing. Electrically rated for 10A@ 28 VDC, 10A@ 120 VAC.
.2
Section 23 41 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with adequate space for access, maintenance and replacement.
3.2 REPLACEMENT MEDIA
.1 .2
Replace all media with new upon acceptance. Filter media to be new and clean, as indicated by pressure gauge, at time of acceptance.
3.3
FILTER GAUGES
.1
Install type as indicated across each filter bank (pre-filter and final filter) in approved and easy readable location. Mark each filter gauge with value of pressure drop for clean condition and manufacturer's recommended replacement (dirty) value.
.2
END
BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS
Section 23 51 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 03 30 11 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1 .2 .3
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM). .1 ASTM D1785-06, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. .2 ASTM D2241-09, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series).
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Clearly indicate following: .1 Methods of sealing sections. .2 Methods of expansion. .3 Details of thimbles. .4 Bases/Foundations. .5 Supports. .6 Termination details.
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.6
CERTIFICATIONS
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by independent testing agency or manufacturer signifying adherence to codes and standards.
BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS
Section 23 51 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
2.1 TYPE 'AL29-4C' GAS VENT
.1
ULC labelled, for exterior installation of natural gas-fired category III and IV appliances, boilers. Sectional, prefabricated, double wall with 25 mm air space AL29-4C. Stainless steel inner wall. Pre-finished aluminized steel outer wall. Mated fittings and couplings. Include all required elbows, drain section, stack cap, roof flashing, storm collar, firestop, plate support, guy ring, appliance adapter, sealant.
.2
.3
2.2
PVC
.1
Venting shall be provided as listed by Manufacturer and acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. Material to be PVC, class 160, ASTM D2241, schedule 40, ASTM D1785 and assembled using compatible primer and cement certified for use on this material.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations. Support chimney at equipment connection, roof and intermediate levels as required. Install thimbles where penetrating roof. Install flashings on chimneys penetrating roofs. Install vent terminations as recommended by manufacturers of equipment and chimney. Boiler equipment shall be vented using AL29-4C product only (no PVC). END
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1 .2
American Boiler Manufacturer's Association (ABMA) American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV, 2010. Canadian Gas Association (CGA) .1 CAN1 3.1-77(R2006), Industrial and Commercial Gas-Fired Package Boilers. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA B51-09, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code. Includes Update No. 1 (2009). .2 CSA B149.1-10, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code, Includes Update No. 1 (2010). .3 CSA ANSI Z21.13-2010/CSA 4.9-2010, Gas-Fired Low Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers. Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada (EEMAC)
.3
.4
.5
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 General arrangement showing terminal points, instrumentation test connections. .2 Clearances for operation, maintenance, servicing, tube cleaning, tube replacement. .3 Piping hook-ups. .4 Equipment electrical drawings. .5 Burners and controls. .6 All miscellaneous equipment. .7 Flame safety control system. .8 Breeching and stack configuration. Engineering data to include: .1 Boiler efficiency at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of design capacity.
.3
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1
1.6
MAINTENANCE
.1
Maintenance materials to include: .1 Special tools for burners, manholes, handholes and Operation and Maintenance. .2 Spare parts for 1 year of operation. .3 Spare gaskets. .4 Spare gauge glass inserts. .5 Probes and sealants for electronic indication. .6 Spare burner tips. .7 Spare burner gun. .8 Safety valve test gauge.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BOILERS
.1
Furnish and install boilers as shown on plans with all applicable codes and authorities having local, provincial and federal jurisdiction. The boiler plant shall consist of two (2) hydronic boiler modules. Boiler shall be UL listed, CSD-1 approved with ASME coded and stamped. Boiler shall have an input of 586 kW with a gross output of 539 kW. Electrical service to each unit shall be 120 V/1/60 Hz 15 amp service. The boiler control panel shall be of a modular component design with the boiler flame safeguard control, temperature controller and annunciator board field replaceable. Boiler shall have a footprint of no more than 710 mm W, 1410 mm L, 2000 mm H with a UL listing for zero side wall clearance. The boiler installed weight shall not exceed 770 kg dry. The boiler shall have an ASME approved relief valve setting of 410 kPa. Boiler modules shall be natural gas fired, condensing fire tube design with a modulating forced draft power burner and positive pressure vent discharge. The boiler burner shall be capable of a 15 to 1 turndown ratio of the firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency or staging of gas valves. The burner
.2
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.1 BOILERS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) shall be nozzle mix design, with spark ignition and flame rectification. The burner head shall be cast stainless steel. All burner material exposed to the combustion zone shall be of stainless steel construction. There shall be no moving parts within the burner itself. The air and natural gas input shall be metered by a modulating air / fuel valve. The modulating motor must be linked to both the gas valve body and air valve body with a single linkage. The linkage shall not require any field adjustment. The boiler shall be capable of handling return water temperatures down to 4.5C without any failure due to thermal shock or fireside condensation. The heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than 1034 kPa. The pressure vessel shall have a maximum water volume of 114 L. The boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed 28 kPa at 11.3 L/S. The boiler water connections shall be 100 mm flanged 150 lb. ANSI rated. The pressure vessel is constructed of SA53 carbon steel, with a 6 mm thick wall and 13 mm thick upper head. Inspection openings in the pressure vessel shall be in accordance with ASME Section IV pressure vessel code. The boiler control system shall be segregated into three components: Control Panel, Power Box, and Input / Output Connection Box. The entire system shall be Underwriters Laboratories Recognized. The control panel shall consist of six (6) individual circuit boards utilizing state-of-the-art surface-mount technology, in a single enclosure. These circuit boards shall be defined as follows: display board incorporating LED display to read temperature, and a VFD display module for all message annunciation; CPU board which houses all control functions; electric low water cut-off board with test and manual reset functions; power supply board; ignition / stepper board incorporating flame safeguard control; and connector board. Each board shall be individually field replaceable. The combustion safeguard / flame monitoring system shall utilize spark ignition and a rectification type flame sensor. The control panel hardware shall support both RS-232 and RS-485 remote communications. The controls shall annunciate boiler and sensor status and include extensive self-diagnostic capabilities that incorporates a minimum of 8 separate status messages and 34 separate fault messages. The control panel shall incorporate three
.3
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) self-governing features designed to enhance operation in modes where it receives an external control signal by eliminating nuisance faults due to over-temperature, improper external signal or loss of external signal. These features are called: Setpoint High Limit, Setpoint Low Limit, and Failsafe Mode. The boiler control system shall incorporate the following additional features for external system interface: system start temperature feature; pump delay timer; auxiliary start delay timer; auxiliary temperature sensor; mA output feature which allows for simple monitoring of either temperature setpoint, outlet temperature, or fire rate; remote interlock circuit; delayed interlock circuit; and fault relay for remote fault alarm. Each boiler shall utilize an electric single seated safety shut-off valve with proof of closure switch in its gas train and incorporate dual over-temperature protection with manual reset in accordance with ASME Section IV and CSD-1. .1 Temperature Control Modes: The boiler shall operate in the control modes listed below: .1 Internal Setpoint. .2 Indoor / Outdoor Reset. .3 4 ma to 20 ma Temperature Setpoint. .4 4 ma to 20 ma Direct Drive. .5 Boiler Management System (BMS). .6 Combination Control System (CCP). Open protocol interface shall be included with boiler for connection with building control system. Coordinate with Division 25 Contractor. All aspects of installation of the boiler shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The vent system must conform with all manufacturer's recommendations and utilize UL listed stainless steel AL-29-4C Positive Pressure. The vent must be sized in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Boiler plant piping shall be field constructed of materials as specified. Boiler shall have individually isolating shut-off valves for service and maintenance. Boiler shall require a 3 minimum gas pressure of 1.7 kPa at 56.6 m /h (full load rated capacity). Boiler shall be provided with a supply gas regulator for proper gas regulation with a 50 mm NPT connection. The pressure vessel / heat exchanger of the boiler shall carry a 7 year prorated, limited warranty against failure due to condensate
.4
.5
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
.5
(Cont'd) corrosion, thermal stress, mechanical defects or workmanship. A Warranty Certificate must be issued to the Owner from the manufacturer and a copy of warranty must be submitted for Departmental Representative's approval. Contractor shall provide the services of a local factory authorized representative to supervise all phases of equipment start-up. A letter of compliance with all factory recommendations and installation instructions shall be submitted to the Departmental Representative with operation and maintenance instructions.
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code Section IV, regulations of Province having jurisdiction, except where specified otherwise, and manufacturers recommendations. Make required piping connections to inlets and outlets recommended by boiler manufacturer. Maintain clearances as indicated or if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for operation, servicing and maintenance without disruption of operation of any other equipment/system. Mount unit level on concrete housekeeping pad and maintain clearances as indicated or if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for operation, servicing and maintenance without disruption of operation of any other equipment/system. Confirm adequate space surrounds installation for acceptable servicing prior to proposing boiler equipment. Natural gas fired installations in accordance with CSA B149.1.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.2 MOUNTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
.1
Safety valves and relief valves: .1 Run separate discharge from each valve. .2 Run drain pipe from each valve outlet back to glycol make-up tank.
3.3
COMMISSIONING
.1
Manufacturer to: .1 Certify installation. .2 Start up and commission installation. .3 Carry out on-site performance verification tests. .4 Demonstrate operation and maintenance. Provide Departmental Representative at least 24 hours notice prior to inspections, tests, and demonstrations. Submit written report of inspections and test results.
.2
END
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
Section 23 72 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 84-2008, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers (ANSI/ASHRAE Approved). Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Indicate following: .1 Performance at conditions listed. .2 Construction. .3 Electrical characteristics. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Certificates: .1 Catalogued or published ratings: obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force. .2 Provide confirmation of testing.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Section 23 72 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and Section 01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20
.2
1.5
MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials: .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .2 Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment include: .1 Bearings and seals. .2 Addresses of suppliers. .3 List of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1 .2
Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 84. Coordinate with Section 23 73 10.
2.2 AIR TO AIR FIXED PLATE EXCHANGER
.1 .2 .3
Casing: 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel. Heat transfer surfaces: 6 mil embossed aluminum, edge sealed and bonded to casing. Cross contamination: not permitted up to 2490 Pa pressure differential between air streams. Condensate drain: NPS 2. Removable access panels. Performance characteristics: as indicated. Plate heat exchanger shall be sectioned within the unit to allow for a section replacement without requiring any lifting devices. All sections to be joined together with a silicone gasket for airtight assembly.
.4 .5 .6 .7
Section 23 72 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 AIR TO AIR FIXED PLATE EXCHANGER (Cont'd)
.8
Access to all four sides of the air/air plate exchanger shall be provided for cleaning and inspection.
An access section with sloped drain pan shall be provided upstream and downstream of the air/air heat exchanger to allow for service, collection of condensate and cleaning of the plate exchanger without allowing standing water to be contained within the unit cabinet.
.9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Support independently of adjacent ductwork.
3.2
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
AIR HANDLING - BUILT-UP
Section 23 73 10 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Definitions: .1 Catalogued or published ratings: ratings obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or manufacturer's designated independent testing agency which signify adherence to codes and standards in force. Reference Standards: .1 American National Standards Institute/National Fire Prevention Association (ANSI/NFPA) .1 NFPA 90A-2009, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. .2 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Condition Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 (I-P), Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings, (ANSI Approved; IESNA Co-Sponsored). .2 ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-2007, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size (ANSI/ASHRAE Approved). .3 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) .4 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB 1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. .5 Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 MPI-INT 5.3-2007, Galvanized Metal. .6 Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)
.2
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for refrigerant, insulation, filters, and paints, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Indicate following: fans, fan curves showing point of operation, motor drive, bearings, filters, mixing box, dampers, coils, controls, wiring, plus all performance data.
.3
Section 23 73 10 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual. Spare filters: in addition to filters to be installed immediately prior to acceptance by Departmental Representative supply 1 complete set of filters for each filter or filter bank in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Spare drive belts: in addition to belts installed in equipment prior to acceptance by Departmental Representative, supply 1 belt or matched belt set for each unit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.3
.4
.1 .2
.3
Section 23 73 10 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
Air Handling Units shall be built to the level of quality as herein specified and to the description of the Air Handling Unit Schedule. Proposed products shall not deviate below the stated capacities, air flow rate, heat transfer rate, filtration efficiency and air mixing quality. Power requirements must not be exceeded, and where specifically defined, sound power levels must not be exceeded. Unless stated otherwise, air handling units are to be shipped to the job in one piece, factory assembled. Units shall be manufactured ready for field wiring. All internal wiring connection points shall be brought to junction boxes external to the unit. Conduit inside units shall be standard EMT except where connection is made to vibration isolated equipment where liquid-tight flex shall be used. Size conduit to requirements of Canadian Electric Code with at least 50% spare capacity. Minimum size motor connections shall be 25 mm diameter. Separate low voltage control from line voltage power systems. Seal conduit penetrations of unit walls. External junction boxes shall be mounted along exterior connection side for interior units and to bottom side adjacent to duct connections for exterior units. Label all conduit runs at junction boxes. Wiring and connections to be provided in field by respective controls or electrical division. Provide conduit, fixtures and switches for interior lighting system with lights located in each compartment equipped with access door. Fixtures shall be sealed waterproof marine style sized for use with compact fluorescent bulbs (bulbs included). Locate fixtures so as not to impede access to components. Provide one switch located on outside of unit adjacent to filter access. Switch shall include pilot light to indicate circuit is on. Provide weatherproof assembly on external unit. Continue conduit to junction box located as noted in .4 (previous) for exterior unit. Wiring and connections to be provided in field by electrical division. The air handling units and major components shall be products of manufacturers regularly
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 23 73 10 Page 4 2011-05-25
.6
(Cont'd) engaged in the production of such equipment and with a minimum of fifteen continuous years of proven production experience. Manufacturer shall have a fully implemented and auditable quality assurance program, equal to the ISO-9002 Quality Standard.
.7
2.2 UNIT CONSTRUCTION
.1
Unit casing shall be of minimum 16 gauge (1.6 mm) satin coat galvanized sheet metal. Surfaces shall be cleaned with a degreasing solvent to remove oil and metal oxides and primed with a two part acid based etching primer. Finish coat shall be an electrostatically applied enamel, to all exposed surfaces. All unprotected metal and welds shall be factory coated. All walls, roofs and floors shall be of formed construction, with at least two breaks at each joint. Joints shall be secured by sheet metal screws or pop rivets. Wall and floor joints shall be broken in and, on all outdoor units roof joints broken out (exposed) for rigidity. All joints shall be caulked with a water resistant sealant.
.2
.3
.4
The following components shall be provided with a 22 gauge (0.85 mm) solid, or 24 gauge (0.70 mm) (40% free area) perforated galvanized metal liner over insulated wall and roof areas: Solid LIner Perf. Liner Fan Sections --X Coil Sections X --Filter Sections X --Mixing Sections X --Access Sections --X Heat Recovery Sections X --Units shall be provided with access doors to the following components: fans and motors; filters; dampers and operators; access plenums and humidifiers/wet cells/ electrical control panels; burner compartments; compressor compartments. Access doors shall be large enough for easy access. Removal of screwed wall panels will not be acceptable. Provide 18 gauge (1.3 mm), double walled, hinged access doors, fully lined, with locking lever handles, operable from both sides for all units. Provide hinged access doors in welded
.5
Section 23 73 10 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.2 UNIT CONSTRUCTION (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) steel frames. Doors shall be sealed with closed cell bulb gasket. Whenever possible, hinged access doors to areas of negative pressure shall open out, and to areas of positive pressure shall open in. Where space constrictions require the use of outward opening doors to an area of positive pressure, a clear warning label must be affixed. Hinged access doors shall be provided with tie back clips. Hinges shall be heavy duty corrosion resistant aluminum that allow door to open 180. Continuous hinges are not acceptable. Casings shall be supported on formed galvanized steel channel or structural channel supports, designed and welded for low deflections. Integral lifting lugs shall be provided for hoisting. All units shall be internally insulated with 50 mm thick nominal 48 kg./cu.m. density acoustic insulation (rigid polyurethane min. R13 acceptable). Nominal 48 kg/cu.m. insulation is secured with steel angles. All longitudinal insulation joints and butt ends shall be covered by a sheet metal break to prevent erosion of exposed edges. Drain pans and all floor areas shall be insulated on the underside. Where polyurethane is used, all liners shall be solid. Unit casing floors in walk in sections shall be fabricated with 14 ga. (2.0 mm) galvanized checker plate steel. Provide reinforcing channels under floor to minimize deflection. Floors shall be double walled with insulation to match other sections. In air-to-air heat reclaim units, the exhaust section drain pans shall be an integral part of the floor paneling, a minimum of 50 mm deep, with welded corners. Drain pans shall extend over the full exhaust fan plenum and be connected with a 38 mm M.P.T. drain connection. All drain pans shall be stainless steel with fully welded seams. Exterior units. .1 Units for exterior mounting shall be designed and manufactured for that purpose and shall not be interior constructed units weatherized for outside mounting. .2 Air handling units located outdoors shall be weatherproofed and equipped for installation outdoors. This shall include generally for the prevention of infiltration of rain and snow into
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 23 73 10 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.2 UNIT CONSTRUCTION (Cont'd)
.10
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) the unit, louvers or hoods on air intakes and exhaust openings with 25 mm galvanized inlet screens; rain gutters or diverters over all access doors, all joints caulked with a water resistant sealant; roof joints turned up 50 mm with three break interlocking design; outer wall panels extend a minimum of 6 mm below the floor panel; drain trap(s) connections for field supply and installation of drain traps. Units mounted on roof curbs incorporate welded floor to base construction. Floors are of three break upstanding design with welded corners and free of penetrations. Unit underside joints are caulked. Units shall be provided with optional channel flashing constructed of 22 gauge (0.85 mm) galvanized steel, painted to match unit. .3 All exterior access doors shall be equipped with heavy duty padlock hasps to allow securement in closed position. .4 Provide full perimeter roof mounting curb for outdoor units of heavy gauge sheet metal, minimum of 400 mm high, and complete with wood nailer, neoprene sealing strip, and fully welded "Z" bar with 25 mm upturn on inner perimeter, to provide a complete seal against the elements. Curb shall be double wall (1.3 mm) insulated with 50 mm rigid fiberglass. Structural wall to be minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. Contractor shall provide 25 mm x 20 mm thick neoprene gasket between curb and unit.
2.3
FANS
.1
Centrifugal fans shall be rated in accordance with AMCA Standard Test Code, Bulletin 210. Fan manufacturer shall be a member of AMCA. All fans and fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced during factory test run. Fan shafts shall be provided with a rust inhibiting coating. Fans shall be equipped with greaseable, self aligning ball or roller type pillow block bearings. Extend lubrication lines where required to provide access for greasing. Drives shall be adjustable on fans with motors 5 HP (3.73 kW) or smaller. On fans with larger motors, fixed drives shall be provided. All drives shall be provided with a rust inhibiting coating. The air balancer shall provide for drive changes (if required) during the air balance procedure.
.2
.3
Section 23 73 10 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.3 FANS (Cont'd)
.4
Provide full section return air fan(s) as scheduled. The use of power exhaust propeller or centrifugal fan arrangements will not be considered.
Motor, fan bearings and drive assembly shall be located inside the fan plenum to minimize bearing wear and to allow for internal vibration isolation of the fan-motor assembly, where required. Motor mounting shall be adjustable to allow for variations in belt tension. Provide belt guards on all units with walk in sections over 1524 mm high. Fan-motor assemblies shall be provided with vibration isolators. Isolators shall be bolted to steel channel welded to unit floor which is welded to the structural frame of the unit. The isolators shall be neoprene-in-shear type of single 230 mm to 380 mm forward curved fans. All other fans shall incorporate vertical spring type isolators with leveling bolts, bridge bearing waffled pads with minimum 25 mm static deflection designed to achieve high isolation efficiency. Fans shall be attached to the discharge panel by a polyvinyl chloride coated polyester woven fabric, with a sealed double locking fabric to metal connection. Refer to Section 23 05 48. All single phase belt drive motor applications shall include rubber isolation for motors HP (0.19 kW) through 1- HP (1.1 kW). Provide internal spring isolation for single phase motors over 1- HP (1.1 kW). Provide single extended grease line from far side to access side bearing. Fan motors shall be high efficiency TEFC. Refer to Section 23 05 13.
.5
.6 .7
.8
.9 .10
2.4
COILS
.1
Coils shall be 16 mm (5/8") O.D. constructed of copper tube, aluminum fin, copper headers with schedule 40 steel pipe connectors. Fins constructed of aluminum or copper shall be rippled for maximum heat transfer and shall be mechanically bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion of the tubes. The coils shall have a galvanized steel casing. All coils shall be factory tested with air at 2070 kPa while immersed in an illuminated water tank. Headers
Section 23 73 10 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.4 COILS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) with schedule 40 steel pipe connections utilize male N.P.T. up to 50 mm. For 65 mm, 75 mm and 100 mm connections are standard grooved pipe connection. Headers on indoor units shall be outside the air handling unit for maximum serviceability. The non-headered end of the coil shall be fully concealed. Provide an insulated header cover to conceal headers exposed to outside. Coils shall be removable from the unit at the header end, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. All water coils shall be equipped with a capped vent tapping at the top of the return header, and a capped drain tapping at the bottom of the supply header. Coils shall be cleanable type provided with brass fittings and removable plugs for each tube at the return end. Water and glycol coils shall be circuited to provide adequate tube velocities to meet design requirements. Internal turbulators are not acceptable. Multiple row coils shall be of staggered tube design circuited to optimize capacity with minimum pressure drop. Outdoor units with glycol coils shall be provided with a fully insulated and weatherproofed piping vestibule, to allow for the entry of piping from the building into the air handling unit, and for connection to the coil(s). The piping vestibule shall be designed to accommodate piping, valves and controls as shown on the drawings. Access panels shall be large enough for easy access.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.5
FILTERS
.1
Filter sections shall be provided with adequately sized access doors to allow easy removal of filters. Filter removal shall be from one side as noted on the drawings. For units with filter banks up to 1825 mm high, the filter modules shall be designed to slide out of the unit. Side removal 50 mm filters shall slide into a formed metal track, sealing against metal spacers at each end of the track. Cartridge type filters shall slide into an
.2
Section 23 73 10 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.5 FILTERS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) extruded aluminum track against a gasketted sealer strip. Associated 50 mm prefilters shall slide into an integral track in the aluminum extrusion. For units with filter banks 1854 mm high and larger, the filters shall be lift out, from an access plenum upstream of the filters. Lift out 50 mm filters shall fit into a horizontal track from which they are lifted up and out. Cartridge filters shall be inserted into a frame grid, from the upstream side of the filter section. Associated prefilters shall slip into the same frame structure, and all shall be secured with clips. Filter frame structure shall be reinforced to withstand a 1490 Pa. differential pressure. Where filters are provided in air handling units for make-up air applications and where hoar frost may occur, only steel frame filters are acceptable. Where indicated, units shall have both summer (upstream of heating coil or gas heat exchanger) and winter (downstream of heating coil or gas heat exchanger) filter sections. Only one set of filters is installed depending on ambient conditions. Refer to Section 23 41 00.
.3
.4
.5
2.6
DAMPERS
.1
Damper frames shall be u-shaped galvanized metal sections securely screwed or welded to the air handling unit chassis. Pivot rods of 13 mm aluminum, shall turn in nylon or bronze bushings. Rods shall be secured to the blade by means of straps and set screws. Blades shall be 18 gauge (1.3 mm) galvanized metal with two breaks on each edge and three breaks on centreline for rigidity. The pivot rod shall "nest" in the centreline break. Damper edges shall interlock. Maximum length of damper between supports shall be 1070 mm. Damper linkage brackets shall be constructed of galvanized metal. Dampers shall be: .1 Standard construction for all dampers include blade ends sealed with an adhesive backed foam polyurethane gasketting. Dampers are interlocked from the centre.
.2
.3
Section 23 73 10 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.6 DAMPERS (Cont'd)
.3
Dampers shall be:(Cont'd) .2 Dampers exposed to outdoor conditions shall be insulated, extruded aluminum as specified in Section 23 33 15. Mixing dampers shall be parallel blade type. Two position inlet dampers shall be parallel blade type. Face and bypass dampers shall be opposed blade type.
.4 .5 .6
2.7
WEATHER HOODS
.1
All air intakes and air discharge openings shall be protected with weatherhoods. Hoods shall be constructed with birdscreens and rain gutters. Face velocity through the outside air intake or discharge dampers shall not exceed 500 fpm to prevent water or snow carryover.
2.8 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
.1
Exterior condensing units: .1 Cabinets shall be of heavy gauge galvanized steel with powder coat paint finish. Construction shall allow all access panels to be removed without affecting the structural integrity of the unit. Stamped louvre panels shall provide full protection of condenser coil surfaces. Unit shall sit on a galvanized steel base. .2 Compressor shall be scroll type, hermetically sealed with internal high temperature protection. Compressor shall be mounted on rubber supports to reduce vibration. Compressor shall have internal pressure relief. Compressors larger than 17.6 kW capacity shall have crankcase heater. .3 Condenser coils to be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tube surface. .4 Low ambient control shall allow operation down -18C. Units shall include low and high pressure control. .5 Condensing unit refrigerant circuits shall include service isolation valves. Interior housed evaporator coils: .1 Horizontal housed evaporator coils shall be mounted in galvanized steel duct casing with 12 mm fiberglass insulation coated on air side. Cabinet shall include drain pan piped to
.2
Section 23 73 10 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.8 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (Cont'd)
.2
Interior housed evaporator coils:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) exterior of cabinet. Field pipe drain to nearest floor drain. .2 Evaporator coils shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Evaporator shall be matched to condenser capacity and efficiency. .3 Coils shall be equipped with expansion valves mounted at factory. Piping - refer to Section 23 23 00.
.3
2.9
HUMIDIFIERS
.1
To Section 23 84 13.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Provide appropriate protection apparatus. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated. Ensure adequate clearance for servicing and maintenance.
3.2
FANS
.1 .2 .3
Install fan sheaves required for final air balance. Install flexible connections at fan inlet and fan outlets. Install vibration isolators.
3.3
DRIP PANS
.1
Install deep seal P-traps and trap seal primer on drip lines. .1 Depth of water seal to be 1.5 minimum times static pressure at this point. .2 Pipe all drains to nearest floor drain. Terminate directly over drain with air gap separation.
Section 23 73 10 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.4 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
.1 .2
Install according to manufacturer's instructionS and as supplemented herein. Exterior condensing units shall be set on roof on top of precast concrete patio blocks. Provide sufficient quantity so that all portions of units are supported on blocks. Clean any debris from roof prior to setting blocks in place. Condensing units shall be mounted level. Seal and flash line sets at roof penetrations. Interior housed evaporator coils shall be supported independently from structure. Do not support from ducts. Do not support ducts from unit. Set level for proper drainage from condensate drip pan. Pipe pan to nearest floor drain. Piping material shall be as specified for sanitary sewer.
.3
3.5
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING
Section 23 81 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International) .1 ASTM C547-07e1, Standard Specification for Mineral Fibre Pipe Insulation. .2 ASTM B280-08, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. .3 ASTM E84-10b, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB 115.10-M90, Disposable Air Filters for the Removal of Particulate Matter from Ventilating Systems. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B52-05 (R2009), Mechanical Refrigeration Code. .2 CAN/CSA C656-05 (R2010), Performance Standard for Split-System and Single-Package Central Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (Includes Update #1). Environment Canada, (EC)/Environmental Protection Services (EPS) .1 EPS 1/RA/2-1996, Code of Practice for Elimination of Fluorocarbons Emissions from Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems. .2 Environment Canada-1994, Ozone-Depleting Substances Alternatives and Suppliers List.
.2
.3
.4
.1 .2 .3
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate major components and accessories including sound power levels of units. Type of refrigerant used.
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
Section 23 81 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
1.5
WARRANTY
.1
For refrigeration compressors, the 12 months warranty period prescribed in GC3.13 of General Conditions is extended to 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
The units shall be rated in accordance with Air-conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute's (AHRI) Standard 210 and bear the ARI Certification label. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the indoor section. The outdoor unit shall be pre-charged with R-410a refrigerant for 20 metres of refrigerant tubing. System efficiency shall meet or exceed minimum 14 SEER.
.2 .3 .4
.5
2.2
OUTDOOR UNIT
.1
The outdoor unit shall be compatible with the indoor units as specified. The connected indoor unit shall be of the same capacity as the outdoor unit. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with a control board that interfaces with the indoor unit to perform all necessary operation functions. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at -40C ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. Optional wind baffle shall be provided on air inlet and discharge. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of 30 metres between indoor and outdoor units.
.2
.3
.4
Section 23 81 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 OUTDOOR UNIT (Cont'd)
.5
System shall operate up to a maximum refrigerant tubing length of 50 metres between indoor and outdoor units without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil. Unit shall be pre-charged for a maximum of 20 metres of refrigerant tubing.
The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory. Outdoor unit sound level shall not exceed: 48 dBa. Cabinet: .1 The casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection. .2 Mounting feet shall be provided and shall be welded to the base of the cabinet and be of sufficient size to afford reliable equipment mount and stability. .3 Access shall be afforded to all serviceable parts by means of removable panel sections. .4 The fan grill shall be of ABS plastic. .5 Cabinet mounting and construction shall be sufficient to withstand 250 kph wind speed conditions. Fan: .1 Unit shall be furnished with a single AC fan motor. .2 Fan blade shall be or aerodynamic design for quiet operation, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. .3 The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent external contact with moving parts. Coil: .1 L shaped condenser coil shall be of copper tubing with flat aluminum fins to reduce debris build up and allow maximum airflow. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. .2 Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of an electronic linear expansion valve (LEV) metering device. The LEV shall be controlled by a microprocessor controlled step motor.
.6
.7 .8
.9
.10
Section 23 81 23 Page 4 2011-05-25
.10
Coil:(Cont'd) .3 All refrigerant lines between outdoor and indoor units shall be of annealed, refrigeration grade copper tubing, ACR Type, meeting ASTM B280 requirements, individually insulated in twin-tube, flexible, closed-cell, CFC-free (ozone depletion potential of zero), elastomeric material for the insulation of refrigerant pipes and tubes with thermal conductivity equal to or better than 0.27 BTU-inch/hour per SqFt/ F, a water vapor transmission equal to or better than 0.08 Perm-inch and superior fire ratings such that insulation will not contribute significantly to fire and up to 25 mm thick insulation shall have a Flame-Spread Index of less than 25 and a Smoke-development Index of less than 50 as tested by ASTM E84 and CAN/ULC S102. Compressor: .1 The compressor shall be a DC twin-rotor rotary compressor with Variable Speed Inverter Drive Technology. .2 The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load. .3 To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be automatically, intermittently applied to the compressor motor windings to maintain sufficient heat to vaporize any refrigerant. .4 The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high pressure safety switch. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. Electrical: .1 The electrical power of the unit shall be 208 volts, single phase, 60 hertz. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. .2 Power for the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit. .3 The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit. The control signal between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC. .4 The unit shall have Pulse Amplitude Modulation circuit to utilize 98% of input power supply. Operating Range:
.11
.12
.13
Section 23 81 23 Page 5 2011-05-25
.13
Operating Range:(Cont'd)
Operating Range Indoor Air Intake Outdoor Air Intake _ Temperature __________________Temperature Cooling: Maximum D.B. 35C W.B. 21.7C D.B. 46C Minimum D.B. 19.4C W.B. 13.9C D.B. -40C
2.3
INDOOR UNIT
.1
The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring and internal piping, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit, in conjunction with the wired, wall mounted controller shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen before shipment from the factory. Capacity of indoor unit shall match that of the outdoor unit. Unit Cabinet: The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded plastic with smooth finish, flat front panel design with access for filter. The unit shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied, pre-drilled, mounting plate. Fan: The indoor unit fan shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct drive fan with a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds: Low, Mid, and Hi and Auto. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will adjust the fan speed based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature. Vane: There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a horizontal and downward direction for uniform air distribution. The horizontal vane shall significantly decrease downward air resistance for lower sound levels, and shall close the outlet port when operation is stopped. There shall also be a set of vertical vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow movement. Filter: Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter. Coil: The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre-coated aluminum
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
Section 23 81 23 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.3 INDOOR UNIT (Cont'd)
.6
Coil:(Cont'd) strake fins on copper tubing. All tube joints shall be brazed with silver alloy. Coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. Electrical: The electrical power of the unit shall be 208 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. The power to the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit. For A-Control, a three (3) conductor AWG-14 wire with ground shall provide power feed and bi-directional control transmission between the outdoor and indoor units. Performance: Each system shall perform in accordance to the ratings shown in the table below. Cooling performance shall be based on 26.7C DB, 19.4C WB for the indoor unit and 35C DB, 29.3C WB for the outdoor unit.
.7
.8
Cooling Capacity TPW SEER L/s kW ____________Cooling___________(Hi/Dry)______ 3.5 - 10.0 5,030 14.0 434 TPW = Total Power Watts .9 System Control: The indoor unit shall be connected to a wall mounted wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. The wired controller shall have a large liquid crystal display (LCD). The controller shall consist of an On/Off button, Increase/Decrease Set Temperature buttons, a Heat/Cool/Auto/Dry mode selector, a Timer Menu button, a Timer On/Off button, Set Time buttons, a Fan Speed selector, a Ventilation button, a Test Run button, and a Check Mode button. The controller shall have a built-in temperature sensor. Temperature shall be displayed in either Fahrenheit (F) or Celsius (C). Temperature changes shall be by increments of 1F (1C) with a range of 67F to 87F (19C to 30C).
Section 23 81 23 Page 7 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Install as indicated, to manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with EPS 1/RA/2. Manufacturer to certify installation. Run drain line from cooling coil condensate drain pan to terminate over nearest floor drain. Ensure adequate clearance for servicing and maintenance. Exterior condensing units shall be set on roof on top of precast concrete patio blocks. Provide sufficient quantity so that all portions of units are supported on blocks. Clean any debris from roof prior to setting blocks in place. Condensing units shall be mounted level. Seal and flash line sets at roof penetrations. Interior housed evaporator coils shall be supported independently from structure. Do not support from ducts. Do not support ducts from unit. Set level for proper drainage from condensate drip pan. Pipe pan to nearest floor drain. Piping material shall be as specified for sanitary sewer.
.2 .3 .4 .5
.6
3.2 EQUIPMENT PREPARATION
.1
Provide services of manufacturer's field engineer to set and adjust equipment for operation as specified.
END
UNIT HEATERS
Section 23 82 39 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal.
1.2
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit product data sheets for unit heaters. Include: .1 Product characteristics. .2 Performance criteria. .3 Mounting methods. .4 Physical size. .5 kW rating, voltage, phase. .6 Cabinet material thicknesses. .7 Limitations. .8 Colour and finish. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures.
.3
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate: .1 Equipment, capacity and piping connections. .2 Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method of installation with proposed structural steel support, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes.
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for unit heaters for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
UNIT HEATERS
Section 23 82 39 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with Waste Reduction Workplan.
2.1 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
.1
Cabinet: type as indicated, 1.6 mm thick steel with rounded exposed corners and edges, removable panels, glass fibre insulation and integral air outlet and inlet. Finish with factory applied primer coat. Special cabinets and front panels: as indicated. Coils: aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Hydrostatically tested to 1 MPa. Fans: centrifugal double width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven, sleeve bearings, resilient mounted. Motor: multi-speed, tapped wound permanent split capacitor type with sleeve bearings, built-in thermal overload protection and resilient rubber isolation mounting. Filters: removable 25 mm thick fibrous glass throwaway type. Capacity: as indicated. Control: .1 3 speed switch with integral overloads in cabinet. .2 Low limit aquastat strapped on to hot water heating supply set to prevent fan operating below 27C. .3 Control thermostat: room electric, line voltage, rating to suit cabinet unit heater, locking cover, set point locking device, concealed adjustment, brushed aluminum cover and lockable metal security-grade guard within inmate accessible areas, thermometer in cover. .1 Thermostat for vestibule unit shall be integral to cabinet.
.2 .3 .4 .5
.6
.7 .8 .9
UNIT HEATERS
Section 23 82 39 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 HORIZONTAL UNIT HEATERS
.1
Casing: 1.6 mm thick cold rolled steel, gloss enamel finish, with threaded connections for hanger rods. Coils: seamless copper tubing, silver brazed to steel headers with evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubing. Hydrostatically test to 1 MPa. Fan: direct drive propeller type, factory balanced, with anti-corrosive finish and fan guard. Motor: speed as indicated continuous duty, built-in overload protection, and resilient motor supports. Air outlet: two-way adjustable louvres. Capacity: as indicated. Control thermostat: room electric, line voltage, rating to suit unit heater, locking cover, set point locking device, concealed adjustment, brushed aluminum cover (and lockable metal security-grade guard within inmate accessible areas), thermometer in cover.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide double swing pipe joints as indicated. Check final location with Departmental Representative if different from that indicated prior to installation. .1 Should deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Departmental Representative's directive. Hot water units: for each unit, install gate valve on inlet and calibrated balancing valve on outlet of each unit. Install drain valve at low point. .1 Install manual air vent at high point. Clean finned tubes and comb straight. Provide supplementary suspension steel as required.
.4
.5 .6
UNIT HEATERS
Section 23 82 39 Page 4 2011-05-25
.7
Install thermostats in locations indicated. Install lockable metal security-grade guards over thermostats located within inmate accessible areas.
Before acceptance, set discharge patterns and fan speeds to suit requirements.
.8
END
RADIANT HEATING UNITS
Section 23 83 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate: .1 Equipment, capacity, piping, and connections. .2 Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method of installation with proposed structural steel support, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes. .3 Special enclosures.
.1
Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.4
SAMPLES
.1 .2
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit 1200 mm length sample of each secure type panel showing method of securing to structure and connecting to adjacent length of enclosure. Include sample fasteners with submittal.
.1
Section 23 83 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SECURE RADIANT PANELS - STEEL TYPE A
.1
Each panel shall consist of one piece flat face with side angle broken up to form secure panel/chase unit. Panel face material shall be 3.5 mm cold reduced rigid steel with no welded seams or joints. Each panel shall be factory finished in white polyester powder coat. Pipe coil shall be 16 mm O.D. continuous copper set at 150 mm on centre. Piping shall sit firmly on an extruded aluminum heat transfer saddle which shall be uniform and one piece through longitudinal lengths of the piping. A non-hardening heat transfer paste shall be added between the saddle and pipe as well as between the saddle and panel. Piping shall be firmly retained to the saddle with pre-sprung metal clips at 300 mm spacing. Saddles shall be bolted to the back of panels by means of steel studs which are to be welded to the back of the face plate. Panels shall be continuous across from wall to wall. No field joining will be accepted except as follows. Panels less than 2 m may be constructed with a removable section (maximum 300 mm wide) at one end to assist installation. Removable section shall bolt in to angle backing with same securement as panel. Panel heat output shall take into account this section. Panels shall be provided with predrilled elongated mounting holes and shall be provided complete with continuous mounting angles drilled and tapped to match panel. Angles shall be minimum 50 mm x 50 mm x 7 mm. Provide security screws with bushings sized for panel mount holes. Security screws shall have tapered / pan head and Torx with pin operators. Panel performance shall be as scheduled on drawings.
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9
Section 23 83 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 SECURE RADIANT PANELS - ALUMINUM TYPE B
.1
Panels shall be constructed substantially as required for Type A - Secure Steel Panels except that panel faces shall be of 4.8 mm thickness aluminum. Pipe saddles shall be welded to panel face rather than bolted. Provide panel support system similar to that specified for Type A. Provide dieletric isolation gasket between carbon steel support angle and aluminum panel face. Gasket shall be Teflon or other such material which will provide resistance to heat but will not bind expansion / contraction of panel.
.2
2.3 LINEAR RADIANT CEILING PANELS ALUMINUM TYPE C
.1
Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans and room finish schedule in addition to mechanical drawings to determine location, quantity, and finish of radiant panels. Panels shall run continuously from wall to wall unless otherwise indicated and specified widths are minimum allowable. Where breaks in panels are required, ensure location lines up with nearest ceiling tile joint. The radiant ceiling extrusions shall consist of extruded aluminum with copper tubing of 12.8 mm I.D. mechanically attached to the aluminum faceplate. The copper tube shall be held in place by an aluminum saddle which extends more than halfway around the diameter of the tube. A non-hardening heat conductive paste shall be placed between the copper tubing and the aluminum faceplate. Panels shall weigh no more than 10.5 kg/ m2 when operating. Panels shall be finished in the manufacturer's standard colour as selected by the Owner.
.2
.3
.4
Section 23 83 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with piping layout and reviewed shop drawings. Provide for pipe movement during normal operation. Maintain sufficient clearance to permit performance of service maintenance. Valves: .1 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless approved otherwise. .2 Install isolating valves on inlet and circuit balancing valves on outlet of each unit. .3 Valves shall be accessible in Y-chases or other non-inmate areas. Venting: .1 Install vent on piping at high points and other locations where air will collect.
.6
3.2 LINEAR RADIANT CEILING PANELS INSTALLATION
.1
The mechanical contractor shall cooperate with other trades working in the ceiling to achieve a neat, well coordinated overall installation. Refer to Architectural and mounting details for installation requirements. Piping to the panels shall be as detailed by the manufacturer. All interconnecting of radiant panels by the mechanical contractor shall consist of 12 mm O.D. soft copper tubing or accessories as recommended by the manufacturer. Supply first to panel tubing pass closest to perimeter wall. All radiant panels shall run continuous from wall-to-wall and shall be field trimmed to length ensuring adequate expansion allowance while maintaining panel end coverage by architectural mouldings. Inactive filler panels will be permitted only where indicated on drawings. Ensure ceiling openings and wall mouldings are installed as per radiant panel shop drawings.
.2
.3
.4
Section 23 83 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.2 LINEAR RADIANT CEILING PANELS INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.5
All radiant panels shall be installed by personnel wearing clean white gloves, to avoid soiling of panel face. Hanger wires for safety and seismic restraint shall be installed at 1200 mm o.c. or as recommended by the manufacturer. Wire supports to be vertical. Adjust so that primary weight of panel is on wire supports. Panel shall lay in contact with ceiling support grid along its full perimeter.
All system piping shall be thoroughly cleaned, flushed , drained, and refilled before radiant panels are connected into the system. No installation of finished radiant panels shall begin until all glazing has been completed and all exterior openings closed in. All active panels shall be covered with a minimum of 50 mm thick fibreglass batt insulation. Insulation shall have foil face both sides, edges with foil tape so that no fibres are exposed in return air space. Secure panel installations shall be rigid with no gaps, crevices or openings accessible to space. Installations shall be smooth and continuous with no protruding edges or fasteners. If installation panel section is provided, this seam shall be caulked after final installation with secure caulking as specified in Section 07 92 00.
.6
.7
.8
.9
END
HUMIDIFIERS
Section 23 84 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning - General Requirements. Section 23 31 13.01 - Metal Ducts - Low Pressure to 500 Pa.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1 .2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA). Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC).
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Capacity. .2 Construction. .3 Control interface.
.1
.1
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment, addresses of suppliers, list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for inclusion into operating manual. Provide following: .1 One complete set of renewable evaporator media.
.3
HUMIDIFIERS
Section 23 84 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.7 MANUFACTURED ITEMS
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturer from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED ELECTRODE STEAM GENERATING TYPE
.1 .2
CSA certified and ULC listed. Components housed in factory fabricated cabinet with factory enamelled finish. Unit complete with factory fabricated floor stand. Probe style water level control compatible with local water conditions. Automatic drain adjustable for duration and frequency. Provide automatic drain water cooler system to limit temperature of discharge. Integral water skimmer/overflow port. Incoloy sheathed heating elements designed to shed mineral scale. Heating elements shall be removable for replacement. Access cover for service of evaporating chamber shall be operable without use of tools. Cleanout tray for periodic removal of sediment from evaporator chamber. Controls to consist of: .1 Solid state panel with solid state relay. .2 Solenoid valves on water fill, drain lines and drain cooler. .3 Real time clock/timer. .4 User input keypad. .5 Tank temperature sensor. .6 Modulating, time-proportional with operating and high limit humidistats. .7 Provide modulated input from EMCS system of 0-10 vdc. Provide steam dispersion unit matched to required performance and manufactured by same source as humidifier. Dispersion unit shall consist of bottom header (sloped for condensate removal) and vertical dispersion tubes equipped with performance calibrated oriface nozzles.
.3 .4
.5 .6
.7 .8 .9
.10
HUMIDIFIERS
Section 23 84 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.1 PACKAGED ELECTRODE STEAM GENERATING TYPE (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.11
Power requirements: 600 V, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Humidifier and evaporator media to be new and clean when project is accepted. Water service overflow drain: to manufacturers' recommendation. Install access doors or panels in adjacent ducting. When installing in ducting, provide waterproof duct up and downstream in accordance with Section 23 31 13.01. Install capped drain connection at low point in duct.
.6
3.2
START-UP
.1
General: In accordance with Section 01 91 00: General Requirements, supplemented as specified herein. Verify: .1 Steam lines are sloped to ensure steam condensate is drained away from the humidifier. .2 Vapour lines and manifolds are sloped to ensure condensate is drained away from the duct system. .3 Visually check distribution manifold to ensure: .1 Even distribution of vapour and property steam absorption. .2 Freedom from water deposits and proper condensate draining.
.2
END
EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION AND COMMISSIONING
Section 25 01 11 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Methods and procedures for start-up, verification and commissioning, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) and includes: .1 Start-up testing and verification of systems. .2 Check out demonstration or proper operation of components. .3 On-site operational tests.
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning - General Requirements. Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training. Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1
For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
.1
Commissioning personnel to be fully aware of and qualified to interpret Design Criteria and Design Intents.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Final Report: submit report to Departmental Representative. .1 Include measurements, final settings and certified test results. .2 Bear signature of commissioning technician and supervisor Report format to be approved by Departmental Representative before commissioning is started. Revise "as-built" documentation, commissioning reports to reflect changes, adjustments and modifications to EMCS as set during
.3 .4
Section 25 01 11 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) commissioning and submit to Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Recommend additional changes and/or modifications deemed advisable in order to improve performance, environmental conditions or energy consumption.
.5
.1
Provide documentation, O&M Manuals, and training of O&M personnel for review of Departmental Representative before interim acceptance in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
1.7 ISSUANCE OF FINAL CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
.1
Final Certificate of Completion will not be issued until receipt of written approval indicating successful completion of specified commissioning activities including receipt of commissioning documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1 .2
Provide sufficient instrumentation to verify and commission the installed system. Instrumentation accuracy tolerances : higher order of magnitude than equipment or system being tested. Locations to be approved, readily accessible and readable. Application: to conform to normal industry standards.
.3 .4
Section 25 01 11 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROCEDURES
.1 .2 .3
Test each system independently and then in unison with other related systems. Debug system software. Optimize operation and performance of systems by fine-tuning PID values and modifying CDLs as required. Test emergency and life safety procedures including operation and integrity of refuge systems under normal and emergency power conditions as applicable.
.4
.1
Pre-Installation Testing. .1 General: consists of field tests of equipment just prior to installation. .2 Equip each Building Controller with sensor and controlled device of each type (AI, AO, DI, DO). .3 Additional instruments to include: .1 DP transmitters. .2 DP switches used for dirty filter indication and fan status. .4 In addition to test equipment, provide inclined manometer, digital micro-manometer, milli-amp meter, source of air pressure infinitely adjustable between 0 and 500 Pa, to hold steady at any setting and with direct output to milli-amp meter at source. .5 After setting, test zero and span in 10% increments through entire range while both increasing and decreasing pressure. .6 DP switches to open and close within 2% of setpoint. Completion Testing. .1 General: test after installation of each part of system and after completion of mechanical and electrical hook-ups, to verify correct installation and functioning. .2 Include following activities: .1 Test and calibrate field hardware including stand-alone capability of each controller. .2 Verify each A-to-D convertor. .3 Test and calibrate each AI using calibrated digital instruments.
.2
Section 25 01 11 Page 4 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .2 Include following activities:(Cont'd) .4 Test each DI to ensure proper settings and switching contacts. .5 Test each DO to ensure proper operation and lag time. .6 Test each AO to ensure proper operation of controlled devices. Verify tight closure and signals. .7 Test operating software. .8 Test application software and provide samples of logs and commands. .9 Verify each CDL including energy optimization programs. .10 Debug software. .11 Blow out flow measuring and static pressure stations with high pressure air. .12 Provide point verification list in table format including point identifier, point identifier expansion, point type and address, low and high limits and engineering units. This document will be used in final startup testing. .3 Final Startup Testing: Upon satisfactory completion of tests, perform point-by-point test of entire system under direction of Commissioning Manager and provide: .1 Technical personnel capable of re-calibrating field hardware and modifying software. .2 Detailed daily schedule showing items to be tested and personnel available. .3 Commissioning to commence during final startup testing. .4 O&M personnel to assist in commissioning procedures as part of training. .5 Commissioning to be supervised by qualified supervisory personnel. .6 Operate systems as long as necessary to commission entire project. .7 Monitor progress and keep detailed records of activities and results. .4 Final Operational Testing: to demonstrate that EMCS functions in accordance with contract requirements. .1 Prior to beginning of 20 day test demonstrate that operating parameters (setpoints, alarm limits, operating control software, sequences of operation, trends, graphics and CDL's) have been implemented to ensure proper operation and operator
Section 25 01 11 Page 5 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .4 Final Operational Testing:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) notification in event of off-normal operation. .1 Repetitive alarm conditions to be resolved to minimize reporting of nuisance conditions. .2 Test to last at least 20 consecutive 24 hour days. .3 Tests to include: .1 Demonstration of correct operation of monitored and controlled points. .2 Operation and capabilities of sequences, reports, special control algorithms, diagnostics, software. .4 System will be accepted when: .1 EMCS equipment operates to meet overall performance requirements. Downtime as defined in this Section must not exceed allowable time calculated for this site. .2 Requirements of Contract have been met. .5 In event of failure to attain specified AEL during test period, extend test period on day-to-day basis until specified AEL is attained for test period. .6 Correct defects when they occur and before resuming tests.
3.3
ADJUSTING
.1
Final adjusting: upon completion of commissioning as reviewed by Departmental Representative, set and lock devices in final position and permanently mark settings.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Demonstrate to Departmental Representative operation of systems including sequence of operations in regular and emergency modes, under normal and emergency conditions, start-up, shut-down interlocks and lock-outs in accordance with Section 01 79 00.
END
EMCS: TRAINING
Section 25 01 12 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Requirements and procedures for training program, instructors and training materials, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work.
.1 .2 .3
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning - General Requirements. Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1 .2
CDL - Control Description Logic. For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, supplemented and modified by requirements of this Section. Submit training proposal complete with hour-by-hour schedule including brief overview of content of each segment to Departmental Representative 30 days prior to anticipated date of beginning of training. .1 List name of trainer, and type of visual and audio aids to be used. .2 Show co-ordinated interface with other EMCS mechanical and electrical training programs. Submit reports within one week after completion of training program that training has been satisfactorily completed.
.2
.3
.1
Provide competent instructors thoroughly familiar with aspects of EMCS installed in facility. Departmental Representative reserves right to approve instructors.
.2
EMCS: TRAINING
Section 25 01 12 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.6
INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide instruction to designated personnel in adjustment, operation, maintenance and pertinent safety requirements of EMCS installed. Training to be project-specific. Training shall be done as per requirements of Section 01 91 00.
.2 .3
1.7 TIME FOR INSTRUCTION
.1
Number of days of instruction to be as specified in this section (1 day = 8 hours including two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunch time).
1.8 TRAINING MATERIALS
.1 .2
Provide equipment, visual and audio aids, and materials for classroom training. Supply manual for each trainee, describing in detail data included in each training program. .1 Review contents of manual in detail to explain aspects of operation and maintenance (O&M).
1.9 TRAINING PROGRAM
.1 .2
To be in 2 phases over 6 month period. Phase 1: 1 day program to begin before 20 day test period at time mutually agreeable to Contractor, Departmental Representative and Commissioning Manager. .1 Train O&M personnel in functional operations and procedures to be employed for system operation. .2 Supplement with on-the-job training during 20 day test period. .3 Include overview of system architecture, communications, operation of computer and peripherals, report generation. .4 Include detailed training on operator interface functions for control of mechanical systems, CDL's for each system, and elementary preventive maintenance. Phase 2: 1 day program to begin 8 weeks after acceptance for operators, equipment maintenance personnel and programmers.
.3
EMCS: TRAINING
Section 25 01 12 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.9 TRAINING PROGRAM (Cont'd)
.3
Phase 2:(Cont'd) Provide multiple instructors on .1 pre-arranged schedule. Include at least following: .1 Operator training: provide operating personnel, maintenance personnel and programmers with condensed version of Phase 1 training.
1.10 ADDITIONAL TRAINING
.1
List courses offered by name, duration and approximate cost per person per week. Note courses recommended for training supervisory personnel.
1.11 MONITORING OF TRAINING PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Departmental Representative to monitor training program and may modify schedule and content.
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI/ISA 5.5-1985, Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. .2 IEEE 260.1-2004, IEEE Standards Letter Symbols for Units of Measurement (SI Customary Inch-Pound Units, and Certain Other Units). Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA C22.2 NO. 0-2010, General Requirements - Canadian Electrical Code, Part II. .2 CAN/CSA Z234.1-00(R2006), Metric Practice Guide.
.2
1.2 ACRONYMS, ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
.1
Acronyms used in EMCS. .1 AI - Analog Input .2 AO - Analog Output .3 BACnet - Building Automation and Control Network .4 BSCS - Building Services Control System .5 CAD - Computer Aided Design .6 CDL - Control Description Logic .7 COSV - Change of State or Value .8 CPU - Central Processing Unit .9 DI - Digital Input .10 DO - Digital Output .11 ECU - Equipment Control Unit .12 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control System .13 HVAC - Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning .14 IDE - Interface Device Equipment .15 I/O - Input/Output .16 ISA - Industry Standard Architecture .17 LAN - Local Area Network .18 LCU - Local Control Unit .19 LonTalk - Echelon Corporation (proprietary protocol) .20 MCU - Master Control Unit .21 OS - Operating System .22 O&M - Operation and Maintenance .23 OWS - Operator Work Station .24 PC - Personal Computer .25 PCI - Peripheral Control Interface .26 PCMCIA - Personal Computer Micro-Card Interface Adapter .27 RAM - Random Access Memory .28 ROM - Read Only Memory .29 TCU - Terminal Control Unit .30 USB - Universal Serial Bus
Section 25 05 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 ACRONYMS, ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)
.1 .2
(Cont'd) .31 UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply Definitions: .1 Point: a point may be logical or physical. Logical points are values calculated by system such as totals, counts, derived corrections i.e. as result of and/or statements in CDL's. Physical points are inputs or outputs which have hardware wired to controllers which are measuring or providing status conditions of contacts or relays providing interaction with related equipment (stop, start) or valve or damper actuators. Symbols and engineering unit abbreviations utilized in displays: to ANSI/ISA 5.5. .1 Printouts: to IEEE 260.1.
.3
1.3 PERMITS AND FEES
.1
In accordance with General Conditions of Contract.
1.4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
.1 .2
Refer to control schematics and system descriptions for system architecture. Work covered by sections referred to above consists of fully operational EMCS, including, but not limited to, following: .1 Building Controllers. .2 Control devices as listed in I/O Summaries. .3 OWS. .4 Data communications equipment necessary to effect an EMCS data transmission system including gateway and LAN hardware and software for connection to BACnet network. .5 Field control devices. .6 Software complete with full documentation for software and equipment. .7 Complete operating and maintenance manuals and field training of operators, programmers and maintenance personnel. .8 Acceptance tests, technical support during commissioning, full documentation. .9 Wiring interface co-ordination of equipment supplied by others. .10 Miscellaneous work as specified in these sections and as indicated.
Section 25 05 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 METRIC REFERENCES
.1 .2
Conform to CAN/CSA Z234.1. Provide required adapters between Metric and Imperial components.
1.6 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
.1
All equipment and material to be from manufacturer's regular production, CSA certified, manufactured to standard quoted plus additional specified requirements. Where CSA certified equipment is not available submit such equipment to inspection authorities for special inspection and approval before delivery to site. Submit proof of compliance to specified standards with shop drawings and product data. Label or listing of specified organization is acceptable evidence. For materials whose compliance with organizational standards/codes/specifications is not regulated by an organization using its own listing or label as proof of compliance, furnish certificate stating that material complies with applicable referenced standard or specification.
.2
.3
.4
1.7 ACCEPTABLE EMCS MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCTS
.1
EMCS manufacturer to be Johnson Controls Inc. (JCI). JCI products to be Johnson Metasys and shall be required to communicate seamlessly with the existing JCI building automation system already present on site without the use of open protocols such as but not limited to BACNet, LON, Modbus or third party interfaces. The EMCS system shall also share the same operating platform and operator workstation as the existing JCI control system.
1.8 SYSTEM DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
.1
Design and provide all conduit and wiring linking all elements of system, including future capability. Supply sufficient programmable controllers of all types to meet project requirements. Quantity and points contents to be approved by Departmental Representative prior to installation.
.2
Section 25 05 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.8 SYSTEM DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY (Cont'd)
.3
Location of controllers to be approved by Departmental Representative prior to installation.

Provide utility power to controllers.
.4
1.9 LANGUAGE OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
.1 .2
Operator to interface to system in English. Use non-linguistic symbols for displays on graphic terminals wherever possible. All other information to be in English. Operating system executive: primary hardware-to-software interface (specified as part of hardware purchase) with associated documentation to be in English. System manager software: to include system definition point database, additions, deletions or modifications, control loop statements, use of high level programming languages, report generator utility and other OS utilities used for maintaining optimal operating efficiency. These functions to be in English. EMCS operator: include, in English: .1 All input and output commands and messages from operator-initiated functions and/or field related changes and/or alarms as defined in CDL's or assigned limits (i.e. all commands relating to day-to-day operating functions and not related to system modifications, additions, or logic re-definements). .2 Graphic "display" functions, point commands to turn systems on or off, manually override automatic control of specified hardware points. To be in English at all specified OWS. Point name expansions in English. .3 Reporting function such as trend log, trend graphics, alarm report logs, energy report logs, maintenance generated logs.
.3
.4
.5
1.10 MATERIALS DELIVERY SCHEDULE
.1
Provide Departmental Representative with "Materials Delivery Schedule" within 2 weeks after award of Contract.
Section 25 05 01 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.11 BSCS/EMCS INTERFACE
.1
EMCS contractor shall interface with BSCS contractor in order to complete control functions of the following systems: .1 Secure fire hose shutdown. .2 Range ventilation override. .3 Range exhaust. Refer to appropriate sections for control descriptions. BSCS contractor shall provide interface panel at location shown on drawings. Interface shall include dry contacts (NO & NC) rated at 25 V, 60 Hz, 10 A for each interface condition. It shall be the responsibility of the EMCS contractor to complete systems between contacts and controlled equipment. The EMCS contractor shall fully commission their work in conjunction with the BSCS contractor to ensure and prove correct operation of interfaced systems.
.2 .3
.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS MANUFCTURERRS
.1
Johnson Controls.
2.2 LOCKABLE PANELS
.1 .2
Panel to be NEMA rated to suit environmental requirements. To have hinged doors equipped with standard keyed-alike cabinet locks, keyed to same key.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
.1
Installation to be to manufacturer's recommendations. Provide printed copies of recommendations with shop drawings or product data.
3.2
PAINTING
.1
Painting to be in accordance with Section 09 91 13, supplemented as follows:
Section 25 05 01 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.2 PAINTING (Cont'd)
.2
Clean and touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factory finished equipment to match original finish.
Restore to new condition, finished surfaces which have been damaged too extensively to be primed and touched up to make good. Clean and prime exposed hangers, racks, fastenings, and other support components. Paint all unfinished equipment installed indoors to CEMA 2Y.1.
.3
.4 .5
3.3 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION
.1
During and after system commissioning this Trade shall provide on-site operator instruction to the Owner's operating personnel. Operation instruction during normal working hours shall be performed by competent representatives familiar with the installed system. At a time mutually agreed upon with the Owner the Control Contractor shall give eighteen (18) hours of instructions to up to five (5) of the owner's designated personnel on the operation of all equipment in the system and describe its intended use. Training to be accomplished as follows: .1 Initial instruction period - 2 days at 6 hours each. .2 Followed by two (2) - three (3) hour instruction periods within the maintenance period at a date requested by the Owner. .3 Record attendance log for each training period and submit to Departmental Representative. An Owner's Manual, prepared for the project by the Control Contractor shall be used during instruction. Copies of the Owner's Manual shall be provided to the Owner with Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
.2
.3
.4
END
EMCS: SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS
Section 25 05 02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Methods and procedures for shop drawings submittals, preliminary and detailed review process including review meetings, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).
.1 .2 .3
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 25 05 01 - General Requirements. Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1
Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01.
.1
Preliminary Design Review: to contain following contractor and systems information. .1 Names of sub-contractors and site-specific key personnel. .2 Sketch of site-specific system architecture. .3 Specification sheets for each item including memory provided, programming language, speed, type of data transmission. .4 Descriptive brochures. .5 Sample CDL and graphics (systems schematics). .6 Response time for each type of command and report. .7 Item-by-item statement of compliance.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and coordinate with requirements in this Section. Shop Drawings to consist of 10 hard copies and 1 soft copy of design documents, shop drawings, product data and software. Hard copy to be completely indexed and coordinated package to assure compliance with contract requirements and arranged in same
.2
.3
Section 25 05 02 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) sequence as specification and cross-referenced to specification section and paragraph number. Soft copy to be in Autocad - latest version and Microsoft Word latest version format, structured using menu format for easy loading and retrieval on OWS.
.4
1.6 DETAIL SHOP DRAWING REVIEW
.1
Submit detailed shop drawings within 60 working days after award of contract and before start of installation and include following: .1 Corrected and updated versions (hard copy only) of submissions made during preliminary review. .2 Wiring diagrams. .3 Piping diagrams and hook-ups. .4 Interface wiring diagrams showing termination connections and signal levels for equipment to be supplied by others. .5 Shop drawings for each input/output point, sensors, transmitters, showing information associated with each particular point including: .1 Sensing element type and location. .2 Transmitter type and range. .3 Associated field wiring schematics, schedules and terminations. .4 Complete Point Name Lists. .5 Setpoints, curves or graphs and alarm limits (high and low, 3 types critical, cautionary and maintenance), signal range. .6 Software and programming details associated with each point. .7 Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and procedures. .8 Input and output signal levels or pressures where new system ties into existing control equipment. .6 Control schematics, narrative description, CDL's fully showing and describing automatic and manual procedure required to achieve proper operation of project, including under complete failure of EMCS. .7 Graphic system schematic displays of air and water systems with point identifiers and textual description of system, as specified. .8 Listing and example of specified reports. .9 Listing of time of day schedules. .10 Mark up to-scale construction drawing to detail control room showing location of equipment and operator work space. .11 Type and size of memory with statement of spare memory capacity.
Section 25 05 02 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.6 DETAIL SHOP DRAWING REVIEW (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
(Cont'd) .12 Full description of software programs provided.
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
EMCS: PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
Section 25 05 03 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Requirements and procedures for final control diagrams and operation and maintenance (O&M) manual, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
.1 .2 .3
BECC - Building Environmental Control Centre. OWS - Operator Work Station. For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00, supplemented and modified by requirements of this Section. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual to Departmental Representative in English. Provide soft copies and hard copies in hard-back, 50 mm 3 ring, D-ring binders. .1 Binders to be 2/3 maximum full. .2 Provide index to full volume in each binder. .3 Identify contents of each manual on cover and spine. Provide Table of Contents in each manual. Assemble each manual to conform to Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before instructions covering subject.
.2 .3
.4 .5
1.4
AS-BUILTS
.1
Provide 1 copy of detailed shop drawings generated in Section 25 05 02 and include: .1 Changes to contract documents as well as addenda and contract extras. .2 Changes to interface wiring. .3 Routing of conduit, wiring and control air lines associated with EMCS installation. .4 Locations of obscure devices to be indicated on drawings. .5 Listing of alarm messages.
Section 25 05 03 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 AS-BUILTS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .6 Panel/circuit breaker number for sources of normal/emergency power. .7 Names, addresses, telephone numbers of each sub-contractor having installed equipment, local representative for each item of equipment, each system. .8 Test procedures and reports: provide records of start-up procedures, test procedures, checkout tests and final commissioning reports as specified in Section 25 01 11. .9 Basic system design and full documentation on system configuration. Submit for final review by Departmental Representative. Provide before acceptance 5 hard and 1 soft copy incorporating changes made during final review.
.2 .3
1.5
O&M MANUALS
.1
Custom design O&M Manuals (both hard and soft copy) to contain material pertinent to this project only, and to provide full and complete coverage of subjects referred to in this Section. Provide 4 complete sets of hard and soft copies prior to system or equipment tests Include complete coverage in concise language, readily understood by operating personnel using common terminology of functional and operational requirements of system. Do not presume knowledge of computers, electronics or in-depth control theory. Functional description to include: .1 Functional description of theory of operation. .2 Design philosophy. .3 Specific functions of design philosophy and system. .4 Full details of data communications, including data types and formats, data processing and disposition data link components, interfaces and operator tests or self-test of data link integrity. .5 Explicit description of hardware and software functions, interfaces and requirements for components in functions and operating modes. .6 Description of person-machine interactions required to supplement system description, known
.2 .3
.4
Section 25 05 03 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 O&M MANUALS (Cont'd)
.4
Functional description to include:(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) or established constraints on system operation, operating procedures currently implemented for implementation in automatic mode. System operation to include: .1 Complete step-by-step procedures for operation of system including required actions at each OWS. .2 Operation of computer peripherals, input and output formats. .3 Emergency, alarm and failure recovery. .4 Step-by-step instructions for start-up, back-up equipment operation, execution of systems functions and operating modes, including key strokes for each command so that operator need only refer to these pages for keystroke entries required to call up display or to input command. Software to include: .1 Documentation of theory, design, interface requirements, functions, including test and verification procedures. .2 Detailed descriptions of program requirements and capabilities. .3 Data necessary to permit modification, relocation, reprogramming and to permit new and existing software modules to respond to changing system functional requirements without disrupting normal operation. .4 Software modules, fully annotated source code listings, error free object code files ready for loading via peripheral device .5 Complete program cross reference plus linking requirements, data exchange requirements, necessary subroutine lists, data file requirements, other information necessary for proper loading, integration, interfacing, program execution. .6 Software for each Controller and single section referencing Controller common parameters and functions. Maintenance: document maintenance procedures including inspection, periodic preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis, repair or replacement of defective components, including calibration, maintenance, repair of sensors, transmitters, transducers, controller and interface firmware's, plus diagnostics and repair/replacement of system hardware.
.5
.6
.7
Section 25 05 03 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.5 O&M MANUALS (Cont'd)
.8
System configuration document: .1 Provisions and procedures for planning, implementing and recording hardware and software modifications required during operating lifetime of system. .2 Information to ensure co-ordination of hardware and software changes, data link or message format/content changes, sensor or control changes in event that system modifications are required.
Programmer control panel documentation: provide where panels are independently interfaced with BECC, including interfacing schematics, signal identification, timing diagrams, fully commented source listing of applicable driver/handler.
.9
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
EMCS: IDENTIFICATION
Section 25 05 54 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Requirements and procedures for identification of devices, sensors, wiring tubing, conduit and equipment, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work and nameplates materials, colours and lettering sizes.
.1 .2
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part I (24th Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Includes Update No. 1 (July 2010).
1.4
DEFINITIONS
.1
For acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
.1
Language Operating Requirements: provide identification for control items in English.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 supplemented and modified by requirements of this Section. Submit to Departmental Representative for approval samples of nameplates, identification tags and list of proposed wording.
.2
Section 25 05 54 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES FOR PANELS
.1
Identify by Plastic laminate, black core, square corners, lettering accurately aligned and engraved into core. Sizes: 25 x 67 mm minimum. Lettering: minimum 7 mm high, white. Inscriptions: machine engraved to identify function.
.2 .3 .4
2.2 NAMEPLATES FOR FIELD DEVICES
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Identify by plastic encased cards attached by chain. Sizes: 50 x 100 mm minimum. Lettering: minimum 5 mm high. Data to include: point name and point address. Companion cabinet: identify interior components using plastic enclosed cards with point name and point address.
2.3 NAMEPLATES FOR ROOM SENSORS
.1 .2 .3
Identify by stick-on labels using point identifier. Location: as directed by Departmental Representative. Letter size: to suit, clearly legible.
2.4
WARNING SIGNS
.1
Equipment including motors, starters under remote automatic control: supply and install orange coloured signs warning of automatic starting under control of EMCS. Sign to read: "Caution: This equipment is under automatic remote control of EMCS" as reviewed by Departmental Representatives.
.2
Section 25 05 54 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.5
WIRING
.1
Supply and install numbered tape markings on wiring at panels, junction boxes, splitters, cabinets and outlet boxes. Colour coding: to CSA C22.1. Use colour coded wiring in communications cables, matched throughout system. Power wiring: identify circuit breaker panel/circuit breaker number inside each EMCS panel.
.2
.3
2.6
CONDUIT
.1
Colour code EMCS conduit. Colour code to be coordinated with Electrical Division to avoid colour code conflicts and where already established, match existing site colour coding. Pre-paint box covers and conduit fittings.
3.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1
Ensure that manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible and legible at all times.
3.2 EXISTING PANELS
.1
Correct existing nameplates and legends to reflect changes made during Work.
END
EMCS: WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Section 25 08 20 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Requirements and procedures for warranty and activities during warranty period and service contracts, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS). .2 References. .1 Canada Labour Code (R.S. 1985, c. L-2)/Part I - Industrial Relations. .2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .3 CSA Z204-94(R1999), Guideline for Managing Indoor Air Quality in Office Buildings.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
.1 .2 .3
BC(s) - Building Controller(s). OWS - Operator Work Station. For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit detailed preventative maintenance schedule for system components to Departmental Representative. Submit detailed inspection reports to Departmental Representative. Submit dated, maintenance task lists to Departmental Representative and include the following sensor and output point detail, as proof of system verification: .1 Point name and location. .2 Device type and range. .3 Measured value. .4 System displayed value. .5 Calibration detail .6 Indication if adjustment required, .7 Other action taken or recommended. Submit network analysis report showing results with detailed recommendations to correct problems found.
.3 .4
.5
Section 25 08 20 Page 2 2011-05-25
.6
Records and logs: in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .1 Maintain records and logs of each maintenance task on site. .2 Organize cumulative records for each major component and for entire EMCS chronologically. .3 Submit records to Departmental Representative, after inspection indicating that planned and systematic maintenance have been accomplished.
Revise and submit to Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 78 00 "As-built drawings" documentation and commissioning reports to reflect changes, adjustments and modifications to EMCS made during warranty period.
.7
1.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
.1
Provide services, materials, and equipment to maintain EMCS for specified warranty period. Provide detailed preventative maintenance schedule for system components as described in Submittal article. Emergency Service Calls: .1 Initiate service calls when EMCS is not functioning correctly. .2 Qualified control personnel to be available during warranty period to provide service to "CRITICAL" components whenever required at no extra cost. .3 Furnish Departmental Representative with telephone number where service personnel may be reached at any time. .4 Service personnel to be on site ready to service EMCS within 2 hours after receiving request for service. .5 Perform Work continuously until EMCS restored to reliable operating condition. Operation: foregoing and other servicing to provide proper sequencing of equipment and satisfactory operation of EMCS based on original design conditions and as recommended by manufacturer. Work requests: record each service call request, when received separately on approved form and include: .1 Serial number identifying component involved. .2 Location, date and time call received. .3 Nature of trouble.
.2
.3
.4
Section 25 08 20 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD (Cont'd)
.4
Work .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
requests:(Cont'd) Names of personnel assigned. Instructions of work to be done. Amount and nature of materials used. Time and date work started. Time and date of completion.
Provide system modifications in writing. .5 No system modification, including operating parameters and control settings, to be made without prior written approval of Departmental Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Perform as minimum (3) three minor inspections and one major inspection (more often if required by manufacturer) per year. Provide detailed written report to Departmental Representative as described in Submittal article. Perform inspections during regular working hours, 0800 to 1630 hours, Monday through Friday, excluding statutory holidays. Following inspections are minimum requirements and should not be interpreted to mean satisfactory performance: .1 Perform calibrations using test equipment having traceable, certifiable accuracy at minimum 50% greater than accuracy of system displaying or logging value. .2 Check and calibrate each field input/output device in accordance with Canada Labour Code - Part I and CSA Z204. .3 Provide dated, maintenance task lists, as described in Submittal article, as proof of execution of complete system verification. Minor inspections to include, but not limited to: .1 Perform visual, operational checks to BC's, peripheral equipment, interface equipment and other panels.
.2
.3
.4
Section 25 08 20 Page 4 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) .2 Check equipment cooling fans as required. .3 Visually check for mechanical faults, air leaks and proper pressure settings on pneumatic components. .4 Review system performance with Departmental Representative to discuss suggested or required changes. Major inspections to include, but not limited to: .1 Minor inspection. .2 Clean OWS(s) peripheral equipment, BC(s), interface and other panels, micro-processor interior and exterior surfaces. .3 Check signal, voltage and system isolation of BC(s), peripherals, interface and other panels. .4 Verify calibration/accuracy of each input and output device and recalibrate or replace as required. .5 Provide mechanical adjustments, and necessary maintenance on printers. .6 Run system software diagnostics as required. .7 Install software and firmware enhancements to ensure components are operating at most current revision for maximum capability and reliability. .1 Perform network analysis and provide report as described in Submittal article. Rectify deficiencies revealed by maintenance inspections and environmental checks. Continue system debugging and optimization. Testing/verification of occupancy and seasonal-sensitive systems to take place during four (4) consecutive seasons, after facility has been accepted, taken over and fully occupied. .1 Test weather-sensitive systems twice: first at near winter design conditions and secondly under near summer design conditions.
.5
.6 .7 .8
END
EMCS: EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
Section 25 10 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
NOT USED
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
The Building Management System shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions, including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, and trend data collection. The BMS shall consist of the following: .1 Digital Panel. .2 Standalone Application Specific Controllers (ASC's). .3 Color Graphics Workstation. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, ASCs, and operator devices. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. Acceptable Supplier: This specification is based upon a "Metasys" system by Johnson Controls Ltd.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.2 NETWORKING / COMMUNICATIONS
.1
Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a local network, auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or a combination of the two networking schemes. Local Network .1 Panel Support: The Digital Panel shall directly oversee a local network such that communications may be executed directly to and between ASC's. .2 Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application data on the network. Access to system data shall not be
.2
Section 25 10 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.2 NETWORKING / COMMUNICATIONS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .2 Data Access:(Cont'd) restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management system. .3 Global Data Sharing: Global Data Sharing or Global point broadcasting shall allow point data to be shared between ASCs, when it would be inefficient or impractical to locate multiple sensors. .4 General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions: .1 Data transfer rates for alarm reporting and quick point status from multiple ASCs. The minimum baud rate shall be minimum 19200 baud. .2 Support of any combination of ASCs. A minimum of 100 ASCs shall be supported on a single local network. The bus shall be addressable for up to 255 ASCs. .3 Detection of single or multiple failures of ASCs or the network media. .4 Error detection, correction, and re-transmission to guarantee data integrity. .5 Commonly available, multiple-sourced, networking components shall be used. .6 Use of an industry standard protocol, such as Optomux, and IEEE RS-485 communications interface. Dial-Up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow Digital Panels to communicate with remote operator terminals on an occasional basis via telephone lines. .1 Dial-Up Digital Panels: Auto-Dial Digital Panels shall automatically place calls to remote terminals to report critical alarms. .1 Digital Panels shall analyze and prioritize all alarms to minimize the initiation of calls. Non-critical alarms shall be buffered in memory and reported as a group of alarms, or until an operator manually requests a report of all alarms. .2 The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no-answers," and incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called when communications cannot be established with primary devices. .2 Dial-Up Remote Operator Terminals: Operators at dial-up remote operator terminals shall be able to perform all control functions and all data base generation and modification functions as described for local operator
.3
Section 25 10 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 NETWORKING / COMMUNICATIONS (Cont'd)
.3
Dial-Up Communications:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) terminals connected via the RS-232 port. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls, and display information sent from remote Digital Panels. The fact that communication is taking place with remote control systems over telephone lines shall be completely transparent to an operator. .1 An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selecting any facility by its logical name. The PC Dial-Up program shall maintain a user-definable cross-reference of buildings and associated telephone numbers, so the user shall not be required to remember or manually dial telephone numbers. .2 Alarm and data file transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not interfere with local network activity, nor shall local network activity keep the remote operator's terminal from handling incoming calls. .3 Both local and remote operators shall be able to access and perform functions with the Digital Panel simultaneously. .4 Manual and Automatic transfer of Database and Trend Information shall capable of being accomplished over the Dial-up connection to the remote Digital Panels. Modem Characteristics: Dial-up communications shall make use of 56,600 baud modems and voice grade telephone lines. Each Digital Panel shall have its own modem for remote monitoring or diagnostics purposes.
.4
2.3
DIGITAL PANELS
.1
General: Digital Panels shall be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, digital control processors. Memory: Each Digital Panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including: Control processes Energy Management Applications Alarm Management Trend Data Maintenance Support Applications Operator I/O Dial-Up Communications
.2
Section 25 10 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.3 DIGITAL PANELS (Cont'd)
.2
Memory:(Cont'd) - Manual Override Monitoring
.3
Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through the addition of field controllers, sensors, and actuators. Serial Communication Ports: Digital Panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices, such as laptop computers, Personal Computers, and Video Display terminals. Override Monitoring: Digital Panels shall monitor the status of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. Integrated On-line Diagnostics: Each Digital Panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. Digital Panels shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each Digital Panel. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network termination's, as well as all field point termination's, to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of the Digital Panel to prevent the loss of data base or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the Digital Panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 25 10 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.3 DIGITAL PANELS (Cont'd)
.8
Powerfail Restart:(Cont'd) intervention. Should Digital Panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the Digital Panel via the local RS-232C port, or telephone line dial-in. UPS: Provide uninterruptible power supply to hold panel operation for a minimum of 15 minutes to allow an orderly shutdown of control systems in a power interruption situation. If additional capacity is required for this situation, the EMCS contractor shall include in the tender price.
.9
2.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
.1
General .1 All necessary software to form a complete operating system, as described in this specification, shall be provided. .2 The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the Digital Panel, and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. Control Software Description: .1 Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period. .2 Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation. .3 All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment described in the "Execution" portion of this specification. Programming Capability: Digital Panels shall be able to execute configured processes defined by the user to automatically perform calculations and control routines. .1 Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a configured process: - Any system-measured point data or status - Any calculated data - Any results from other processes
.2
.3
Section 25 10 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES (Cont'd)
.3
Programming Capability:(Cont'd) .1 Process Inputs and Variables:(Cont'd) - Boolean logic operators (and, or) .2 Process Triggers: Configured processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following: Time of day Calendar Date Other processes Events (e.g., point alarms)
.3 Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other ASCs. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other ASCs on the local network. .4 Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each Digital Panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the Digital Panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at the local I/O device, or communications with other ASCs on the network. .1 Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence. .2 Prioritizing: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of four (4) priority levels shall be provided. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define conditions under which point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or logged for analysis at a later date. .3 Report Routing: Alarm reports and messages shall be directed to an operator device. .4 Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store a 60-character alarm message to more fully
Section 25 10 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
.4
Alarm Management:(Cont'd) .4 Alarm Messages:(Cont'd) describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. .5 Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by time-stamping and saving reports until a manual request is received, or until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms. .6 Remote Alarm Horn: Each Digital Panel shall be capable of triggering a binary output on an ASC when a critical or network alarm is received. The alarm horn feature shall be silenced when the critical alarm is acknowledged. .7 Trend Analysis: A data collection utility shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data. Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 24 hours, in one-minute or one-hour intervals, shall be provided. Each Digital Panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of storing 32 trend logs. Each trend log shall have up to 4 points trended at 168 data samples each. Data shall be stored at the Digital Panel. .8 Runtime Totalization: Digital Panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime hours for binary input and output points specified in the "Execution" portion of this specification. .1 The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute. .2 The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. Pulse Totalization: Digital Panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected binary pulse input-type points. .1 Totalization shall provide calculation and storage accumulations of up to 9,999,999 units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.). .2 The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute.
.5
Section 25 10 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
.5
Pulse Totalization:(Cont'd) The user shall have the ability to define .3 a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. .4 The information available from the Pulse Totalization shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Peak Demand, with date and time stamp 24-hour Demand Log Accumulated for day Sunday through Saturday usage Sunday through Saturday Demand Demand annual history for past 12 periods Annual history for past 12 periods
.6
Event Totalization: Digital Panels shall have the ability to count events, such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. .1 The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset. .2 The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.5 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS HVAC APPLICATIONS
.1
Each Digital Panel shall be able to extend its monitoring and control through the use of standalone Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including: - Control Processes - Energy Management Applications - Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)
.2
.3
.4
The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through the Digital Panel or portable operator's terminal connected to any ASC on the network.
Section 25 10 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.5 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS HVAC APPLICATIONS (Cont'd) (Cont'd)
.5
ASCs shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service terminal that can be connected to the ASC via zone temperature or directly at the controller. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
Display temperatures Display status Display setpoints Display control parameters Override binary output control Override analog setpoints Modification of gain and offset constants
.6
Powerfail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the ASC.
2.6 OPERATOR INTERFACE
.1
Basic Interface Description: .1 Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting and English language point identification. .2 The operator interface shall also have the option of using a mouse or similar pointing device for a "point and click" approach to facilities management. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change setpoints from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device. .3 Graphical and Text-Based Displays: At the option of the user, the Operator interface shall provide consistent graphical or text-based displays of all system point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all operator devices. .4 Password Protection: Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit control, display, and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. .1 Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices.
Section 25 10 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.6 OPERATOR INTERFACE (Cont'd) (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .4 Password Protection:(Cont'd) .2 A minimum of four (4) levels of access shall be supported: Level 1 = Data Access and Display Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator Overrides and Commands Level 3 = Level 2 + Operator Management Level 4 = Level 3 + Database Generation and Modification.
.3 A minimum of eight (8) passwords shall be supported at each Digital Panel. .4 Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on. .5 User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices logged on. .5 Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following: Start-up or shutdown selected equipment Adjust setpoints Add/Modify/Delete time programming Enable/Disable process execution Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point Enable/Disable Totalization for each point Enable/Disable Trending Enter temporary override schedules Define Holiday Schedules Change time/date Enter/Modify analog alarm limits Enable/Disable demand limiting Enable/Disable duty cycle Enable/Disable average/high/low signal select and reset. .6 Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated manually, and directed to the displays. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports: .1 A general listing of all points in the system shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
Section 25 10 00 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.6 OPERATOR INTERFACE (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .6 Logs and Summaries:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) Points currently in alarm Off-line points Points currently in override status Points in Weekly Schedules Holiday Programming.
.2 Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user-selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system information. .7 System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control. .1 The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions: Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning constants. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications. Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar-based programming. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point. Add/Delete/Modify configured control processes. Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages. .8 Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, ASCs,
Section 25 10 00 Page 12 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .8 Programming Description:(Cont'd) individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through fill-in-the-blank templates. .1 Network-Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single ASC, but shall be able to include data from any and all other ASCs to allow the development of network-wide control strategies. .9 System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall be self-documenting to provide hardcopy printouts of all configuration and application data. .10 Data base Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all ASC and Digital Panel data bases shall be stored in at least one personal computer or laptop. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute downloads of an ASC or Digital Panel data base. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided as specified in the Execution portion of this specification to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition. .1 System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text-based commands. .2 Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention. Areas in a building or equipment within a building shall be capable of being assigned to change color to reflect the condition within the area or status of the equipment. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. .1 The EMCS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant
.2
.3
Section 25 10 00 Page 13 2011-05-25
.3
Graphics Definition Package:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) volume-terminal reheat, etc.) and electrical symbols. .2 The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following: Define symbols Position and size symbols Define background screens Define connecting lines and curves Locate, orient and size descriptive text Define and display colors for all elements Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other displays. Define an area of a graphic or a symbol and select colors for each of the point states
.3 Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout, or any other logical grouping of points which aids the operator in the analysis of the facility. .4 To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point data from multiple application specific controllers. .4 Hardware Requirements .1 Personal Computer: .1 Provide a desktop PC complete with Quad Core Intel Core i7 processor with a minimum 12 GB DDR3 memory, 1 TeraBit hard drive, Blu-ray/DVD combo writer, 1.5 GB graphics card, 19" ultra resolution LCD color monitor, a 56,600 Baud modem, Ethernet LAN card, Enhanced Keyboard and wireless Mouse. .2 Printer: .1 Provide a suitable alarm and report colour laser printer for connection to either the Digital Panel or Personal Computer. .3 Modem: .1 Provide a Hayes compatible 56,600 baud modem. .4 UPS: Provide uninterruptible power supply to hold equipment operation for a minimum of 15 minutes to allow an orderly shutdown of control systems in a power interruption situation. If additional capacity is required for this
Section 25 10 00 Page 14 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) .4 UPS:(Cont'd) situation, the EMCS contractor shall include in the tender price. .5 OWS Desk .1 Provide desk to mount P.C., printer, modem and support other activities of operator. Minimum desk surface to be 1200 mm (wide) x 750 mm (front / back) x 750 mm (high). Desk shall have shelf below top surface to support computer with monitor, keyboard and mouse on desk surface. Unit shall be mounted on casters. Location as noted on drawing.
2.7
FIELD SENSORS
.1
Temperature Sensors .1 Temperature sensors shall be 1000 OHM platinum RTD type. Analog temperature sensors shall provide an output signal that varies continuously with the sensed temperature, within a specified range. Binary temperature sensors shall provide an output signal that is either on or off depending upon whether the sensed temperature is above or below the setpoint temperature. All sensors of a particular category shall be of the same type and manufacturer. Provide temperature sensors suitable for one or more of the following mounting methods: duct mount, pipe thermowell mount. .2 Insertion Type - Suitable for insertion into air ducts at any angle, and shall have a minimum insertion of 150 mm. .3 Immersion Type - Suitable for immersion into fluids in tanks or pipes with separable well and heat transfer compound. Sensor wells shall be brass and compatible with the sensor. .4 Averaging Type with Extended Element Suitable for duct mounting to obtain average temperature by sampling along a capillary tube element. .5 Outside Air Sensing Type - Shall have sun shades to minimize solar effects and shall be mounted to minimize building outside air film effects. .6 Space Type - Non-Secure Areas occupied/unoccupied override switches. Thermostats/ sensors for terminal boxes shall have lockable access to temperature setpoint adjustment. Portable operator terminal shall be able to connect to space thermostat/sensor. .7 Space Type - Secure Areas - Cells - locate sensors in secure &-chase areas in exhaust ducts
Section 25 10 00 Page 15 2011-05-25
2.7 FIELD SENSORS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .7 (Cont'd) from cells. Sensors shall be moisture resistant, general purpose RTD/thermistor sensing element suitable for duct mounting. Sensing element to be securely attached to metal enclosure with conduit connections. Enclosure to be firmly attached to duct. Sensing element to be selected to suit actual duct size. .8 Space Type - Secure Areas - Common Spaces - locate sensors as shown on drawings. Sensors shall be moisture resistant, general purpose RTD/thermistor sensing element suitable for mounting concealed on rear side of blank wall plate. Sensing element to be firmly adhered to back of blank plate. Enclosure shall be designed and manufactured for secure installation in poured concrete walls and shall consist of 10 ga steel backplate for cast-in-place concrete construction, one-piece blank 10 ga steel front plate finished in baked white enamel and fastened with secure screws in each corner. Differential Pressure Switches .1 All pressure sensing elements shall be corrosion resistant. .2 Pressure sensing elements shall be diaphragm type as required by the application. .3 Units shall have adjustable range and differential pressure settings. .4 Pressure sensor switches shall be snap action type. .5 Sensor assembly shall operate automatically and reset automatically when conditions return to normal. .6 Protect complete sensor assembly against vibration at all critical movement pivots and slides. .7 Sensors on all liquid lines shall have an isolation valve installed between each sensor and its pressure source. Control Valves .1 Sized by temperature control manufacturer and guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling requirements; each tagged for project location. Valves shall be sized on the basis of 15% of the total system pressure drop, but not more than 34.5 kPa (5 psi) drop. Pressure drop for valves shall be submitted for review. .2 Equal percentage type, equipped with characteristic type throttling plug, stainless steel stem, removable composition discs, and rubber diaphragms. Provided with necessary features to operate in sequence with other
.2
.3
Section 25 10 00 Page 16 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) valves or damper operators and adjustable throttling range. .3 Valves NPS2 and smaller: screwed bodies; NPS 2-1/2 and larger: flanged bodies; designed for 125 PSI operating pressure. Arranged to fail-safe as called for, tight closing and quiet operating. .4 Physical sizes of valves will be such that they will fit within the physical space provided within radiation and equipment enclosures. Verify before ordering materials. Electric Operators (Valve) .1 Provide a 24 VAC control operators which are 0-10 VDC input proportional and designed for water or steam service valve bodies. Operator shall be Synchronous motor driven with 222 N (50 lbf) force and force sensor safety stop. Enclosure shall be cast aluminum. Electric Operators (Damper) .1 Provide 24 VAC damper actuators which are 0-10 VAC input proportional and designed to operate position dampers. Operator shall be synchronous motor driven with up to 11.3 N-m (100 in-lb)force sensor safety stops and spring return as required. Enclosure shall be cast aluminum. Unit shall be complete with end switch where indicated or rquired. Static Pressure Transmitters .1 The sensors shall be a variable capacitance type, utilizing a stainless steel diaphragm and insulated electrode for positioning of the diaphragm. .2 The sensor shall produce a linear 4 to 20 mA or 0-5 VDC with accuracy's of 1% full scale in normal ambient temperature environments. .3 Pressure ranges 0 to 25 Pa. through 0 to 6227 Pa. .4 The transmitter shall be temperature compensated to account for any thermal error over the entire temperature range of 4.4C to -37.8C, 0-95% RH. Over-pressurization 2491 Pa. up to ten times range. .5 The transmitter shall have zero span adjustment capability, but shall be factory calibrated. Relative Humidity Sensors .1 Relative humidity sensors shall be an analog precision resistance type relative
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 25 10 00 Page 17 2011-05-25
.7
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) humidity detector. Sensor shall have an overall accuracy of +/- three (3%) percent of span over a range of 5% - 95% relative humidity. Air Flow Measurement .1 Airflow measurement stations shall be provided in inlets of air handler equipment as shown. .2 Sensing elements shall be manufactured of extruded aluminum with integral total and static pressure monitor chambers. .3 Airflow sensing elements shall increase system pressure drop by less than 0.03.
.8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install the digital panel, PC, printer, and other associated hardware as per manufacturers' recommendations. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with drawings before installation. Locate thermostats at same elevation as light switches. Install damper motors on outside of ducts. Do not locate in air stream, except for roof mounted equipment. Wire "hand/off/auto" selector switches such that automatic operating controls and not safety controls and electrical over current protection shall be overridden when switch is in the "hand" position. Unless specified otherwise, install all outdoor air sensors on the north exposure of the building. Install all safety limits at the operator's level. Where secure area temperature sensors are installed in masonry construction, coordinate installation with masonry trade. Temperature sensors shall be installed in steel block section as specified in Section 04 20 00.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6 .7
END
EMCS: LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
Section 25 10 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 System requirements for Local Area Network (LAN) for Building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA T568.1-05 (R2010), Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements. .2 CSA T568.2-05 (R2010), Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components. .3 CSA T530-99, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (Adopted ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)/Standard for Information technology - Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks - Specific requirements. .1 IEEE 802.3-2008, Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)/Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) .1 TIA/EIA 568-2009, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Set (Contains: TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, and TIA-568-C.3 with Addendums and Erratas). .2 TIA/EIA 569-December 2001, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. Treasury Board Information Technology Standard (TBITS). .1 TBITS 6.9-2000, Profile for the Telecommunications Wiring System in Government Owned and Leased Buildings - Technical Specifications.
.2
.3
.4
Section 25 10 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1
Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01.
.1
Data communication network to link Operator Workstations and Master Control Units (MCU) in accordance with CSA T568.1, CSA T568.2, TIA/EIA 568 and CSA T530, TIA/EIA 569 and TBITS 6.9. .1 Provide reliable and secure connectivity of adequate performance between different sections (segments) of network. .2 Allow for future expansion of network, with selection of networking technology and communication protocols. Data communication network to include, but not limited to: .1 EMCS-LAN. .2 Modems. .3 Network interface cards. .4 Network management hardware and software. .5 Network components necessary for complete network.
.2
.1
EMCS Local Area Network (EMCS-LAN). .1 High speed, high performance, local area network over which MCUs and OWSs communicate with each other directly on peer to peer basis in accordance with IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Standard. .2 EMCS-LAN to: BACnet,. .3 Each EMCS-LAN to be capable of supporting at least 50 devices. .4 Support of combination of MCUs and OWSs directly connected to EMCS-LAN. .5 High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from multiple controllers, upload/download information between network devices. Bit rate to be 10 Megabits per second minimum. .6 Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either OWSs, MCUs or network media. Operational equipment to continue to perform designated functions effectively in event of single or multiple failures. .7 Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components and protocols to allow system to co-exist with other networking applications including office automation.
Section 25 10 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.2
Dynamic Data Access. LAN to provide capabilities for OWSs, .1 either network resident or connected remotely, to access point status and application report data or execute control functions for other devices via LAN. .2 Access to data to be based upon logical identification of building equipment.
Network Medium. .1 Network medium: shielded twisted cable, or fibre optic cable compatible with network protocol to be used within buildings. Fibre optic cable to be used between buildings.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
EMCS: FIELD INSTALLATION
Section 25 30 02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Institute of Electrical and Electrtonics Engineers (IEEE) .1 IEEE C2-2007, National Electrical Safety Code. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (24th Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Includes Update No. 1 (July 2010). .2 CSA C22.2 NO. 45-M1981 (R2003), Rigid Metal Conduit. .3 CSA C22.2 NO. 56-04, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. .4 CSA C22.2 NO. 83-M1985 (R2008), Electrical Metallic Tubing. .5 CSA C22.3 NO. 1-10, Overhead Systems. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70-2011, National Electrical Code.
.2
.3
.1
Electrical: .1 Division 26 to provide power wiring from power panels to EMCS field panels. Circuits to be for exclusive use of EMCS equipment. Panel breakers to be identified on panel legends tagged and locks applied to breaker switches. Mechanical: .1 Pipe Taps Required For EMCS equipment will be supplied and installed by Divisions 22 and 23. .2 Wells and Control Valves Shall Be Supplied by EMCS Contractor and Installed by Divisions 22 and 23 .3 Installation of air flow stations, dampers, and other devices requiring sheet metal trades to be mounted by Division 23. Costs for installation to be carried by designated trade. Structural: .1 Special steelwork as required for installation of work.
.2
.3
Section 25 30 02 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Qualified supervisory personnel to: .1 Continuously direct and monitor all work. .2 Attend site meetings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SPECIAL SUPPORTS
.1
Structural grade steel, primed and painted after construction and before installation.
2.2
WIRING
.1 .2
As per requirements of Division 26. For 70 V and above copper conductor with chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulation rated RW90 and 600 V. Colour code to CSA 22.1. For wiring under 70 volts use FT6 rated wiring where wiring is in conduit. Sizes: .1 120 V Power supply: to match or exceed breaker, size #12 minimum. .2 Wiring for safeties/interlocks for starters, motor control centres, to be stranded, #14 minimum. .3 Field wiring to digital device: 20 AWG stranded twisted pair. .4 Analog input and output: shielded #20 minimum stranded twisted pair. Wiring must be continuous without joints. .5 More than 4 conductors: #22 minimum solid copper. Terminations: .1 Terminate wires with screw terminal type connectors suitable for wire size, and number of terminations.
.3 .4
.5
2.3
CONDUIT
.1 .2
As per requirements of Division 26. Electrical metallic tubing to CSA C22.2 NO. 83. Flexible and liquid tight flexible metal conduit to CSA C22.2 NO. 56. Rigid steel threaded conduit to CSA C22.2 NO. 45. Junction and pull boxes: welded steel. .1 Surface mounting cast FS: screw-on flat covers.
.3
Section 25 30 02 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3 CONDUIT (Cont'd)
.3
Junction and pull boxes:(Cont'd) .2 Flush mounting: covers with 25 mm minimum extension all round. Cabinets: sheet steel, for surface mounting, with hinged door, latch lock, 2 keys, complete with perforated metal mounting backboard. Panels to be keyed alike for similar functions and or entire contract as approved. Outlet boxes: 100 mm minimum, square. Conduit boxes, fittings: .1 Bushings and connectors: with nylon insulated throats. .2 With push pennies to prevent entry of foreign materials. Fittings for rigid conduit: .1 Couplings and fittings: threaded type steel. .2 Double locknuts and insulated bushings: use on sheet metal boxes. .3 Use factory "ells" where 90 degree bends required for 25 mm and larger conduits. Fittings for thin wall conduit: .1 Connectors and couplings: steel, compression type.
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
2.4 SUPPORTS FOR CONDUIT, FASTENINGS EQUIPMENT
.1
Solid masonry, tile and plastic surfaces: lead anchors or nylon shields. .1 Hollow masonry walls, suspended drywall ceilings: toggle bolts. Exposed conduits or cables: .1 50 mm diameter and smaller: one-hole steel straps. .2 Larger than 50 mm diameter: two-hole steel straps. Suspended support systems: .1 Individual cable or conduit runs: support with 6 mm diameter threaded rods and support clips. .2 Two or more suspended cables or conduits: support channels supported by 6 mm diameter threaded rod hangers.
.2
.3
Section 25 30 02 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install equipment, components so that manufacturer's and CSA labels are visible and legible after commissioning is complete.
3.2
SUPPORTS
.1
Install special supports as required and as indicated.
3.3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL
.1
Do complete installation in accordance with requirements of: .1 Division 26, this specification. .2 CSA 22.1 Canadian Electrical Code. .3 NFPA 70. .4 IEEE C2. Fully enclose or properly guard electrical wiring, terminal blocks, high voltage above 70 V contacts and mark to prevent accidental injury. Do underground installation to CSA C22.3 NO. 1, except where otherwise specified. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for storage, handling and installation. Check factory connections and joints. Tighten where necessary to ensure continuity. Install electrical equipment between 1000 and 2000 mm above finished floor wherever possible and adjacent to related equipment. Protect exposed live equipment such as panel, mains, outlet wiring during construction for personnel safety. Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 120 VOLTS" or other appropriate voltage. Install conduits, and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete. Holes through exterior wall and roofs: flash and make weatherproof. Make necessary arrangements for cutting of chases, drilling holes and other structural work
.2
.3 .4 .5 .6
.7
.8 .9 .10 .11
Section 25 30 02 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL (Cont'd)
.11
(Cont'd) required to install electrical conduit, cable, pull boxes, outlet boxes. Install cables, conduits and fittings which are to be embedded or plastered over, neatly and closely to building structure to minimize furring.
.12
3.4
CONDUIT SYSTEM
.1
All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Provide complete conduit system to link Building Controllers to main control panel. Conduit sizes to suit wiring requirements and to allow for future expansion capabilities specified for systems. Maximum conduit fill not to exceed 40%. Design drawings do not show conduit layout. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines, to conserve headroom and to minimize interference. Conduit shall be installed tight to building structure unless authorized by the Departmental Representative. Do not run exposed conduits in normally occupied spaces unless otherwise indicated or unless impossible to do otherwise. Obtain approval from Departmental Representative before starting such work. Provide complete conduit system to link field panels and devices with main control centre. Conduit size to match conductors plus future expansion capabilities as specified. Locate conduits at least 150 mm parallel from hot pipes and at least 50 mm at crossovers. Bend conduit so that diameter is reduced by less than 1/10th original diameter. Field thread on rigid conduit to be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight. Limit conduit length between pull boxes to less than 30 m. Use conduit outlet boxes for conduit up to 32 mm diameter and pull boxes for larger sizes. Fastenings and supports for conduits, cables, and equipment: .1 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
Section 25 30 02 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.4 CONDUIT SYSTEM (Cont'd)
.9
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) as indicated and as required to support cable and conduit runs. .2 Provide adequate support for raceways and cables, sloped vertically to equipment. .3 Use supports or equipment installed by other trades for conduit, cable and raceway supports only after written approval from Departmental Representative. Install polypropylene fish cord in empty conduits for future use. Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked sections. Pass conduits through structural members only after receipt of Departmental Representative 's written approval. Conduits may be run in flanged portion of structural steel. Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface channels. Pull boxes: .1 Install in inconspicuous but accessible locations. .2 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits. .3 Fill boxes with paper or foam to prevent entry of construction material. .4 Provide correct size of openings. Reducing washers not permitted. .5 Mark location of pull boxes on record drawings. .6 Identify AC power junction boxes, by panel and circuit breaker. Install terminal blocks or strips indicated in cabinets. Install bonding conductor for 120 volt and above in conduit. No conduit shall be exposed in non-secure areas. Particular care is to be taken when laying out and installing conduit and devices in secure Y-chases. Conduit and devices are to be mounted so they do not protrude into service space.
.10 .11 .12
.13 .14 .15
.16 .17 .18 .19
Section 25 30 02 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.4 CONDUIT SYSTEM (Cont'd)
.19
(Cont'd) Orient to back side of duct or pipe to be close to wall.
3.5
WIRING
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install multiple wiring in ducts simultaneously. Do not pull spliced wiring inside conduits or ducts. Use CSA certified lubricants of type compatible with insulation to reduce pulling tension. Tests: use only qualified personnel. Demonstrate that: .1 Circuits are continuous, free from shorts, unspecified grounds. .2 Resistance to ground of all circuits is greater than 50 Megohms. Provide Departmental Representative with test results showing locations, circuits, results of tests. Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and install to manufacturer's recommendations. Accommodate all strands in lugs. Where insulation is stripped in excess, neatly tape so that only lug remains exposed. Wiring in main junction boxes and pull boxes to terminate on terminal blocks only, clearly and permanently identified. Junctions or splices not permitted for sensing or control signal covering wiring. Do not allow wiring to come into direct physical contact with compression screw. Install ALL strands of conductor in lugs of components. Strip insulation only to extent necessary for installation.
.5
.6
.7
.8 .9
3.6
GROUNDING
.1
Install complete, permanent, continuous grounding system for equipment, including conductors, connectors and accessories. Install separate grounding conductors in conduit within building.
.2
Section 25 30 02 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.6 GROUNDING (Cont'd)
.3
Tests: perform ground continuity and resistance tests, using approved method appropriate to site conditions.
3.7
TESTS
.1
General: .1 Perform following tests. .2 Give 14 days written notice of intention to test. .3 Conduct in presence of Departmental Representative and authority having jurisdiction. Departmental Representative will have option to forgo attendance and allow test to proceed. .4 Conceal work only after tests satisfactorily completed. .5 Report results of tests to Departmental Representative in writing. .6 Preliminary tests: .1 Conduct as directed to verify compliance with specified requirements. .2 Make needed changes, adjustments, replacements. .3 Insulation resistance tests: .1 Megger all circuits, feeders, equipment for 120 - 600 V with 1000 V instrument. Resistance to ground to be more than required by Code before energizing. .2 Test insulation between conductors and ground, efficiency of grounding system to satisfaction of Departmental Representative and authority having jurisdiction.
END
EMCS: SITE REQUIREMENTS, APPLICATIONS AND SYSTEMS SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
Section 25 90 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PURPOSE
.1
Control sequences are intended to relay the general intent of how mechanical systems are to operate. They are not intended to give direct instruction in the construction or programming of the system. Each control sequence to be custom programmed for its intended function. Provide documentation of control sequence logic used herein.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Contractor shall provide full EMCS control of all mechanical components of building unless noted specifically to be controlled otherwise. All noted set points to be adjustable through EMCS.
.2
3.2
SEQUENCE
.1
Air Handler Unit AHU-1 (Living Unit): .1 Outside air intake path: .1 Unit is configured as follows: .1 Heat recovery unit HRV-1: .1 Outside air intake damper. .2 Summer prefilter. .3 Outside air preheat coil. .4 Winter prefilter. .5 Heat recovery core. .6 Ventilation air supply fan. .2 Indoor air supply fan: .1 Isolation damper. .2 Final filter. .3 Heating coil. .4 Supply air fan. .3 Duct system: .1 Air control valves. .2 Inside air exhaust path:
Section 25 90 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
3.2 SEQUENCE (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .2 Inside air exhaust path:(Cont'd) .1 Duct system: .1 Air control valves. .2 Isolation damper. .2 Heat recovery unit HRV-1: .1 Prefilter. .2 Heat recovery core. .3 Exhaust air fan. .4 Exhaust air discharge damper. .3 Scheduling .1 This system is intended to operate full time. .2 Provide ability to schedule on daily, weekly, annual, holiday (fixed and floating). Owner will have complete access for scheduling and override. Owner access shall be from a dedicated screen in the graphic interface. .4 Operation .1 Upon system start-up: .1 The outside air intake damper with its associated isolation damper and the exhaust air discharge damper with its associated isolation damper shall be fully opened. When the status of the dampers are proven by their end switches, the ventilation air supply fan, supply air fan and exhaust air fan shall be started. .2 Upon proof of status of all fans, the control routines for the heat recovery section, preheat coil and heating coil shall be enabled. .2 Supply Air Temperature Control: .1 If OAT is below -5C, 3 way control valve at preheat coil shall position to maintain -5C downstream of the coil (before entering heat recovery core). 3 way control valve at heating coil shall position to maintain 20C downstream of the coil in the supply duct system. .2 If OAT is above -5C, preheat coil shall be bypassed. 3 way control valve at heating coil shall position to maintain 20C downstream of the coil in the supply duct system. Provide supply air temperature reset to lower SAT as outdoor air temperature rises. .3 Where conditions permit, enable economizer control of HRV-1 so that variable amounts of outdoor air bypass heat recovery core.
Section 25 90 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) .3 Supply / Exhaust Air Volume Control .1 Supply and exhaust air valves shall monitor and control airflow to all spaces served by this system. .2 A variable speed drive on the supply air fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain a constant downstream duct pressure. Measure pressure at two locations. Control to average. Provide warning if individual measurements vary more than 15%. .3 A variable speed drive on the exhaust air fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain the sum of the exhaust air valves equal to the sum of the supply air valves plus an offset of 100 l/s. .4 A variable speed drive on the ventilation air supply fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain the ventilation supply airflow equal to the sum of the supply air valve flows. .4 Air Conditioning (Open Staff, Unit Control, Living Unit Galleries) .1 When the economizer cycle is no longer able to maintain space temperature activate air conditioning system. .2 Air conditioning shall be provided by a single stage dx system consisting of a duct mounted coil and remote roof mounted condensing unit. Individual branches shall be equipped with air flow control valves with flow sensing and duct reheat coils. .3 EMCS shall monitor duct temperature and cycle condensing unit to maintain S/A temperature of 13C. Individual zones shall control temperatures by varying air flow volume down to minimum (at 70% of design). If all air valves have reduced airflow, reset S/A temperature higher to maintain airflow through the dx coil. If any airflow zone is at minimum and still calling for hat while another is at maximum airflow, modulate zone reheat coil to satisfy heating requirement. .5 Emergency Sequences .1 Owner's staff shall be able to implement special airflow routines throughout a touch screen associated
Section 25 90 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) with the BSCS system. Cooperate fully with BSCS contractor to ensure complete and fully integrated systems. .2 Exhaust air flow may be stopped from any spaces associated with any air valve. In this condition, supply air flow will continue as described for normal operation. Remaining exhaust air valves will adjust to try to maintain the sum of the supply air flows. If remaining air valves are full open and air flow does not match design, reduce set point of supply air valves equally until flows equalize. Adjust speed of ventilation air supply fan to match revised system air flow. .3 Supply air flow may be stopped to any spaces associated with any air valve. In this condition, exhaust air flow will continue as described for normal operation. Remaining supply air valves will adjust to try to maintain the sum of the exhaust air flows. If remaining air valves are full open and air flow does not match design, reduce setpoint of exhaust air valves equally until flows equalize. Adjust speed of ventilation air supply fan to match revised system air flow. .4 Exhaust and supply air flow may be stopped for any spaces associated with air valve sets. In this condition all other shall remain normal and system will adjust to reduced total air flow condition. Alarms: .1 Air handling unit AHU-1 shall be equipped with the following alarms: .1 Low temperature downstream of preheat coil. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of preheat coil falls 5C below setpoint and remains for longer than 5 minutes or falls 10C below setpoint, shutdown AHU-1 and associated HRV-1 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed), initiate alarm at OWS.
.5
Section 25 90 01 Page 5 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .5 Alarms:(Cont'd) .2 Low temperature downstream of heat recovery core. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of heat recovery core falls below 0C reset LAT of preheat coil to maintain temperature. .2 If preheat coil remains reset for longer than 5 minutes, initiate alarm at OWS. System shall remain in operation unless LWT from preheat coil reaches 5C at which time shutdown AHU-1 and associated HRV-1 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed), initiate alarm at OWS. .3 Low temperature downstream of heating coil. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of heating coil falls below 15C and remains for longer than 5 minutes, initiate an alarm at OWS. System shall remain in operation unless LAT falls below 13C in which case shutdown AHU-1 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed), initiate alarm at OWS. .4 High supply air temperature. .1 If all system conditions are met and at minimum and supply air temperature downstream of AHU-1 rises more than 5C above outdoor air temperatures and remains for longer than 5 minutes, initiate alarm at OWS. System will continue to operate until operator intervenes to shutdown. .5 Each filter bank location shall be monitored for pressure drop with a change filter warning initiated when pressure differential rises beyond an acceptable value. .6 High Duct Static Pressure:
Section 25 90 01 Page 6 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .5 Alarms:(Cont'd) .1 Monitor duct pressures as follows: .1 Supply air discharge relative to building. .2 Exhaust air inlet relative to building. .2 Adjust associated fan operating speeds to maintain maximum pressure differentials at monitored points. .3 If pressure differential rises above the positive (or falls below the negative) pressure that the duct systems can safely maintain, shut fan system down and initiate alarm.
.2
Air Handler Unit AHU-2 (Programs and Administration): .1 Outside air intake path: .1 Unit is configured as follows: .1 Heat recovery unit HRV-2: .1 Outside air intake damper. .2 Summer prefilter. .3 Outside air preheat coil. .4 Winter prefilter. .5 Heat recovery core. .6 Ventilation air supply fan. .2 Indoor air handler unit AHU-2: .1 Return air prefilter. .2 Return air fan. .3 Return air / ventilation in mixing box complete with isolation damper on ventilation air inlet. .4 Final filter. .5 Heating coil. .6 Supply air fan. .3 Duct system: .1 Administration / Gallery .2 DX cooling coil. .3 Humidifier distribution. .4 Air control valves (including bypass air valve). .4 Programs .1 Air control valves. .2 Indoor air exhaust path: .1 Duct system: .1 Administration / Gallery .1 Ducting only.
Section 25 90 01 Page 7 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .2 Indoor air exhaust path:(Cont'd) Programs .1 Ducting only. .3 Isolation damper (on combined Administration / Gallery / Programs). .2 Heat recovery unit HRV-2: .1 Prefilter. .2 Heat recovery core. .3 Exhaust air fan. .4 Exhaust air discharge damper. Scheduling: .1 Unit shall operate on a daily, weekly, annual, holiday (fixed and floating schedule). Owner will have complete access for scheduling and override. Owner access shall be from a dedicated screen in the graphic interface. Operation: .1 Upon system start-up: .1 The outside air intake damper with its associated isolation damper and the exhaust air discharge damper with its associated isolation damper shall be fully opened. When the status of the dampers are proven by their end switches, the ventilation air supply fan, return fan, supply fan and exhaust air fan shall be started. .2 Upon proof of status of all fans, the control routines for the heat recovery section, preheat coil and heating coil shall be enabled. .2 Supply Air Temperature Control: .1 If OAT is below -10C, 3 way control valve at preheat coil shall position to maintain -10C downstream of the coil (before heat recovery core). 3 way control valve at heating coil shall position to maintain 20C downstream of the coil in the supply duct system. .2 If OAT is above -10C, preheat coil shall be bypassed. 3 way control valve at heating coil shall position to maintain 20C downstream of the coil in the supply duct system. Provide supply air temperature reset to lower SAT as outdoor air temperature rises. .3 Where conditions permit, enable economizer control of HRV-2 so that variable amounts of outdoor air bypass heat recovery core. .2
.3
.4
Section 25 90 01 Page 8 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .4 Operation:(Cont'd) .3 Supply / Exhaust / Return Air Volume Control: .1 Supply air valves shall monitor and control airflow to all spaces served by this system as follows: .1 Administration - a system of air valves as shown on drawings will monitor and vary air flow to zones served in response to space conditions. Minimum air flow will be set at 50% of design air flow. .2 Programs Gallery - an air valve as shown on drawings will monitor and vary air flow in response to space conditions. Minimum airflow will be set at 50% of design air flow. .3 Programs - A system of air valves as shown on drawings will monitor and control air flow to zones served at constant volume. .2 Ventilation air supply fan and exhaust air fan shall operate at constant speed with no dynamic volume control. .3 A variable speed drive on the supply air fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain a constant downstream duct pressure. .4 A variable speed drive on the return air fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain air flow equal to supply air delivered to the administration and gallery areas. Measure supply air as sum of air valve box flows. Measure return air flow by fan inlet volume probes. .4 Air Conditioning (Administration and Programs Gallery) .1 When the economizer cycle is no longer able to maintain space temperature activate air conditioning system. .2 Air conditioning shall be provided by a single stage dx system consisting of a duct mounted coil and remote roof mounted condensing unit. Individual branches shall be equipped with air flow control valves with flow sensing. .3 EMCS shall monitor duct temperature and cycle condensing unit
Section 25 90 01 Page 9 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .4 Operation:(Cont'd) to maintain S/A temperature of 13C. Individual rooms and zones shall control temperatures by varying air flow volume down to minimum (at 60% of design). Bypass airvalve shall maintain flow at dx coil by opening in response to duct pressure rise. If all air valves have reduced airflow, reset S/A temperature higher to maintain maximum airflow through the dx coil. .5 Humidification (Administration) .1 Maintain space humidity by measuring return air humidity level from space served. Provide humidity high limit control downstream of humidifier in duct. .2 Humidity level to be reset based on outside air temperature. Initially set indoor humidity level at 25% when outdoor air temperature is -25C rising to 40% at indoor air temperature of 10C. Alarms: .1 Air handling unit AHU-2 shall be equipped with the following alarms: .1 Low temperature downstream of preheat coil. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of preheat coil falls 5C below setpoint and remains for longer than 5 minutes or falls 10C below setpoint, shutdown AHU-2 and associated HRV-2 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed, humidifier off), initiate alarm at OWS. .2 Low temperature downstream of heat recovery core. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of heat recovery core falls below 0C reset LAT of preheat coil to maintain temperature. .2 If preheat coil remains reset for longer than 5 minutes, initiate alarm at OWS. System shall remain in operation unless LWT from preheat coil reaches 5C
.5
Section 25 90 01 Page 10 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .5 Alarms:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) at which time shutdown AHU-2 and associated HRV-2 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed, humidifier off), initiate alarm at OWS. .3 Low temperature downstream of heating coil. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of heating coil falls below 15C and remains for longer than 5 minutes, at which time shutdown AHU-2 and associated HRV-2 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed, humidifier off), initiate alarm at OWS. .4 Each filter bank location shall be monitored for pressure drop with a change filter warning initiated when pressure differential rises beyond an acceptable value. .5 On humidity level above setpoint for longer than 15 minutes, initiate warning at OWS. On high humidity, shut down humidifier, initiate alarm at OWS.
.3
Boilers: .1 System is configured as follows: .1 Two (2) boilers piped in reverse return parallel. .2 Two (2) circulation pumps piped in parallel. .2 Scheduling: .1 Refer to Operation. .3 Operation: .1 Boilers: .1 EMCS shall communicate with boiler control interface. Interface shall allow EMCS to send HWS setpoint and monitor boiler controller generated fault and error messages including boiler failure alarms. .2 Heating water supply temperature shall reset in response to outside air temperature. .3 Monitor water temperatures in order to reset supply water
Section 25 90 01 Page 11 2011-05-25
.3
Boilers:(Cont'd) .3 Operation:(Cont'd) temperature to maintain lowest return water temperature possible. If all modulating heating control valves are less than 90% open and have remained so for longer than 30 minutes and if all two position control valves have been open less than 75% of the same period, reduce supply water temperature by 5C. Continue monitoring and adjusting to maintain lowest possible operating temperature. .4 Boilers shall modulate both at same value so as to maintain lowest individual firing level. .5 Boilers shall remain off until associated loop circulation pump is commanded on and proven by current transformer relays. Circulation Pumps P-1 and P-2: .1 P-1 and P-2 are each 100% capacity and are activated by the EMCS and a lead/lag algorithm. .2 One pump will start when outdoor air temperature drops below 15C. Cycle lead/lag pumps based on operating time. Pump will shut down when outdoor temperature rises above 18C. .3 On failure of lead pump, switch operation to lag pump, initiate alarm. .4 Provide off season cycle whereby one pump shall operate for 20 minutes once per month in non-heating season. Cycle pump at 05:00 a.m. accordance to schedule.
.2
.4
Perimeter Heating Systems: .1 Radiant Ceiling Panels: .1 Secure Areas - Cells: .1 Units configured as follows: .1 Radiant panel heaters. .2 Cell temperature sensor located in exhaust air stream secure in y-chase. .2 Scheduling: .1 Capable of being scheduled for daytime/nightime setpoint adjustment. Initially set for constant temperature. .3 Operation:
Section 25 90 01 Page 12 2011-05-25
.4
Perimeter Heating Systems:(Cont'd) .1 Radiant Ceiling Panels:(Cont'd) .1 Primary heat source for rooms so equipped will be the perimeter radiant panel system. .2 Control valve shall be 2 position on/off. Locate control valves remote from cell in secure y-chase. .3 On drop in room temperature, open control valve until setpoint is satisfied. .2 Secure Areas - Corridors and Programs: .1 Units configured as follows: .1 Radiant panel heater. .2 Space temperature sensor located in space - complete with blank cover with tamperproof (Torx with pin) fasteners. .2 Scheduling: .1 Cell corridor systems shall be capable of being scheduled for daytime/night time setpoint adjustment. Initially set for constant temperature. .2 Program area systems shall be capable of being scheduled for daily and weekly daytime/night time setpoint adjustment. Initially set for constant temperature. .3 Operation: .1 Primary heat source for rooms so equipped will be the perimeter radiant panel system. .2 Control valve shall be 2 position on/off. Locate control valves as follows: .1 Cell corridor in adjacent secure Y-chase. .2 Program - in adjacent gallery space. .3 On drop in room temperature, open control valve until setpoint is satisfied. .3 Administration: .1 Units configured as follows: .1 Radiant panel heater. .2 Room temperature sensor located in room as shown. Temperature sensor to be blank face with +/- temperature adjust slide bar and
Section 25 90 01 Page 13 2011-05-25
.4
Perimeter Heating Systems:(Cont'd) .1 Radiant Ceiling Panels:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) occupied/non-occupied override push button. Scheduling: .1 Capable of being scheduled for daily and weekly daytime/night time setpoint adjustment. Operation: .1 Primary heat source for rooms so equipped will be the perimeter radiant panel system. .2 Control valve shall be 2 position on/off. .3 On drop in room temperature, open control valve until setpoint is satisfied. .4 Refer to central system description for cooling operation.
.2
.3
.5
Standalone Systems: .1 The following equipment systems shall be controlled by standalone electric controls. System setpoints shall be adjustable locally at the controller. .2 Unit Heaters: .1 Unit configured as follows: .1 Supply air fan. .2 Heating coil (hydronic). .2 Scheduling: .1 No schedule. .3 Operation: .1 Room thermostat will open a 2 position control valve and cycle the unit fan on in order to maintain space temperature. .2 Control system shall be low voltage electric. Provide all line voltage relays required for operation. .3 Console Style Force Flows: .1 Unit configured as follows: .1 Supply air fan. .2 Heating coil (hydronic). .2 Scheduling: .1 No schedule. .3 Operation: .1 Room thermostat will open a 2 position control valve and cycle the unit fan on in order to maintain space temperature.
Section 25 90 01 Page 14 2011-05-25
.5
Standalone Systems:(Cont'd) .3 Console Style Force Flows:(Cont'd) .2 Control system shall be low voltage electric. Provide all line voltage relays required for operation. .3 Where force flow is located in entry or exit vestibule, include freezestat to shutoff unit fan to prevent coil freeze-up.
.6
Secure Fire hose Isolation: .1 For each hose isolation solenoid valve a set of normally open dry contacts will be provided by BSCS. Closure of these contacts will be through the BSCS touch screen. Complete a low voltage circuit between each contact set to the electric pilot valve at each isolation valve. Power supply shall be by EMCS contractor. Cooperate fully with BSCS contractor to ensure a complete and fully integrated system. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Pump P-4: .1 Pump shall be operated on an adjustable daily schedule through the OWS. .2 Initial schedule as follows: 6:01 a.m. to 6:30 a.m. 29 min on / 0 min off 6:31 a.m. to 10:00 a.m. 5 min on / 25 min off 10:01 a.m. to 12:00 noon 5 min on / 10 min off 12:01 p.m. to 2:00 p.m. 5 min on / 25 min off 2:01 p.m. to 5:00 p.m. 5 min on / 15 min off 5:01 p.m. to 8:00 p.m. 5 min on / 25 min off 8:01 p.m. to 10:00 p.m. 5 min on / 15 min off 10:01 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. 5 min on / 15 min off Range Exhaust: .1 Systems are configured as follows: .1 Range A and B: .1 Range A exhaust fan EF-1 with motorized damper. .2 Range B exhaust fan EF-2 with motorized damper. .3 Roof hood over Dining Area A with motorized damper. .2 Range C and D: .1 Range C exhaust fan EF-3 with motorized damper. .2 Range D exhaust fan EF-4 with motorized damper. .3 Roof hood over Dining Area C with motorized damper. .3 Range E and F: .1 Range E exhaust fan EF-5 with motorized damper.
.7
.8
Section 25 90 01 Page 15 2011-05-25
.8
Range Exhaust:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .2 Range F exhaust fan EF-6 with motorized damper. .3 Roof hood over Dining Area E with motorized damper. .4 Range G and H: .1 Range G exhaust fan EF-7 with motorized damper. .2 Range H exhaust fan EF-8 with motorized damper. .3 Roof hood over Dining Area G with motorized damper. Scheduling: .1 No schedule. Operation: .1 For each exhaust fan listed, a set of normally open dry contacts will be provided by BSCS. Closure of these contacts will be through the BSCS touch screen. Complete a low voltage circuit between each contact and its corresponding exhaust fan starter and damper end switch. Power supply shall be by EMCS contractor. Cooperate fully with BSCS contractor to ensure a complete and fully integrated system. .2 Upon closure of any selected exhaust fan run contact: .1 Open associated motorized dampers on exhaust fan and at Dining Area roof intake. .2 When dampers are proven open by end switches start exhaust fan. .3 Either or both exhaust fans associated with each Dining Area may be run. .3 Upon deactivation of selected exhaust fan run contract: .1 Stop exhaust fan. .2 Close motorized dampers. .4 Alarms: .1 Range exhaust systems shall be equipped with the following alarms: .1 System in operation: .1 An alarm will be issued when any system is in operation. .2 Low temperature in range: .1 When temperature in range drops to 5C as measured by temperature sensor at end of range, issue an alarm to OWS. System shall remain in
.2 .3
Section 25 90 01 Page 16 2011-05-25
.8
Range Exhaust:(Cont'd) .3 Operation:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) operation until shutdown through BSCS.
END
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (24th Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.3 No. 1-10, Overhead Systems. .3 CAN3-C235-83(R2006), Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 to 50,000 V. .4 Do underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No.7-10, Underground Systems, except where specified otherwise. Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada (EEMAC) .1 EEMAC 2Y-1-1958, Light Gray Colour for Indoor Switch Gear. Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). The Ontario Electrical Safety Code 2009, and all bulletins (Ontario). Hydro requirements and local applicable codes and regulations. CSC Technical Criteria: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 .20 .21 ES/STD0101 ES/STD0102 ES/STD0203 ES/STD0204 ES/STD0205 ES/STD0207 ES/STD0208 ES/STD0209 ES/STD0213 ES/STD0214 ES/STD0215 ES/STD0218 ES/STD0219 ES/STD0220 ES/STD0221 ES/STD0222 ES/STD0223 ES/STD0227 ES/STD0228 ES/STD0229 ES/STD0230 Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 2 0
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
Section 26 05 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.6
CSC Technical Criteria:(Cont'd) .22 ES/STD0231 Revision 0 .23 ES/STD0232 Revision 0 .24 ES/STD0234 Revision 0 .25 ES/STD0601 Revision 3 .26 ES/STD0602 Revision 3 .27 ES/STD0801 Revision 1 .28 ES/STD0802 Revision 1 .29 ES/STD0803 Revision 2 .30 ES/STD0804 Revision 2 .31 ES/STD0805 Revision Original .32 ES/SOW-0101 Revision 3 .33 ES/SOW-0102 Revision 6 .34 ES/SOW-0110 Revision 1 .35 ES/SPEC-0005 Revision 5 .36 ES/SPEC-0006 Revision 2 .37 ES/SPEC-0101 Revision 2 .38 ES/SPEC-0102 Revision 2 .39 ES/SPEC-0103 Revision 2 .40 ES/SPEC-0200 Revision 3 .41 ES/SPEC-0303 Revision 2 .42 ES/SPEC-0500 Revision 4 .43 ES/SPEC-0600 Revision 2 .44 ES/SPEC-0602 Revision 3 .45 ES/SPEC-0603 Revision 2 .46 ES/SPEC-0800 Revision 2 .47 ES/SPEC-0900 Revision 2
.1 .2
Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235-2006. Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard. .1 Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment. Language operating requirements: provide identification nameplates for control items in English.
.3
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS.
Section 26 05 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Submit for review single line electrical diagrams in glazed frames and locate in electrical rooms. .1 Electrical distribution system in main electrical room. .2 Colour Code single line electrical diagrams as follows: .1 Normal Power - Black. .2 Essential Power - Red. .3 Kirk key interlocks - Blue.
Provide fire alarm riser diagram, plan and zoning of building in glazed frame under plexiglass at fire alarm control panels to all buildings and an active graphic annunciator depicting buildings, walls, towers, at the main entrance to the Institution at Building A-1. Active Graphic: 750 x 750 mm minimum size. Passive Graphic: 450 x 450 mm minimum size. Shop drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario within 3 weeks of Award of Contract. .2 Submit 3 copies of 600 x 600 mm minimum size drawings and product data to inspection authorities. .3 If changes are required, notify Departmental Representative of these changes before they are made. Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Provide CSA certified equipment and material. .2 Where CSA certified equipment and material is not available, submit such equipment and material to inspection authorities for special approval before delivery to site. .3 Submit test results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation. .4 Permits and fees: in accordance with General Conditions of contract. Pay associated fees. Departmental Representative will provide drawings and specifications required by Electrical Inspection Department and Supply Authority at no cost. .5 Submit, upon completion of Work, load balance report as described in PART 3 - Load Balance. .6 Submit certificate of acceptance from Electrical Inspection Department authority
.4
.5 .6 .7
.8
Section 26 05 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.8
Quality Control:(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) having jurisdiction upon completion of Work to Departmental Representative.
.1 .2
Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Qualifications: electrical Work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians who hold valid Master Electrical Contractor license or apprentices as per the conditions of Provincial Act respecting manpower vocational training and qualification. .1 Employees registered in provincial apprentices program: permitted, under direct supervision of qualified licensed electrician, to perform specific tasks. .2 Permitted activities: determined based on training level attained and demonstration of ability to perform specific duties. Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.3
.1
Material Delivery Schedule: provide Departmental Representative with schedule within 2 weeks after award of Contract. Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
1.6
SYSTEM STARTUP
.1
Instruct Departmental Representative and operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of systems, system equipment and components. Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel. Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel
.2
.3
Section 26 05 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.6 SYSTEM STARTUP (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.3
(Cont'd) are conversant with aspects of its care and operation.
2.1 SUSTAINABLE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Materials and products.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
.1 .2
Provide material and equipment in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Material and equipment to be CSA certified. Where CSA certified material and equipment is not available, obtain special approval from inspection authorities before delivery to site and submit such approval as described in PART 1 - Submittals. Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.
.3
2.3 ELECTRIC MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS
.1
Control wiring and conduit: in accordance with Section 26 29 03 except for conduit, wiring and connections below 50 V which are related to control systems specified in mechanical sections and as shown on mechanical drawings.
2.4
WARNING SIGNS
.1
Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of inspection authorities and Departmental Representative. Decal signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm.
.2
2.5 WIRING TERMINATIONS
.1
Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for copper conductors.
2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify electrical equipment with nameplates as follows: .1 Nameplates: lamicoid 3 mm thick plastic engraving sheet, black face, white core, lettering accurately aligned and engraved into
Section 26 05 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .1 Nameplates:(Cont'd) core mechanically attached with self tapping screws. .2 Lamicoid 3 mm thick plastic engraving sheet red face, white core, mechanically attached with self tapping screws for essential (Emergency) power. .3 Sizes as follows: 1 line 1 line 2 lines 1 line 2 lines 1 line 2 lines 3 mm high letters 5 mm high letters 3 mm high letters 8 mm high letters 5 mm high letters 12 mm high letters 6 mm high letters
Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7
10 x 50 mm 12 x 70 mm 12 x 70 mm 20 x 90 mm 20 x 90 mm 25 x 100 mm 25 x 100 mm .2
Wording on nameplates to be approved by Departmental Representative prior to manufacture. Allow for minimum of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate. Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics. Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage. Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage. Transformers: indicate capacity, primary and secondary voltages.
.3 .4
.5 .6 .7
2.7 WIRING IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, numbered, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring. Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
.2
Section 26 05 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.7 WIRING IDENTIFICATION (Cont'd)
.3 .4
Colour coding: to CSA-C22.1-09.

Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.
2.8 CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
.1 .2 .3
Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables. Code by prepainting couplings, connectors and boxes. Colours: Service Colour up to 250 V yellow up to 600 V brown Telephone/lan green Public address/Intercom purple Cable television (CATV) white Closed Circuit television (CCTV) orange Fire Alarm red Fixed point alarm (Cell Call) blue Door Control black
2.9
FINISHES
.1
Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel. .1 Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green". .2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light gray to EEMAC 2Y-1-1958.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Do complete installation in accordance with CSA-C22.1-09 except where specified otherwise. Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CAN/CSA-C22.3 No.1-10 and CAN/CSA-C22.3 No. 7-10 except where specified otherwise.
Section 26 05 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.2 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1
Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible and legible after equipment is installed.
3.3 CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION
.1
Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete. .1 Sleeves through concrete: plastic, sized for free passage of conduit, and protruding 50 mm. If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors, remove before conduit installation. Install cables, conduits and fittings to be embedded or plastered over, neatly and close to building structure so furring can be kept to minimum.
.2 .3
3.4 LOCATION OF OUTLETS
.1 .2
Locate outlets in accordance with Section 26 05 32. Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm horizontal clearance between boxes. Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3000 mm, and information is given before installation. Locate light switches on latch side of doors. .1 Locate disconnect devices in mechanical and elevator machine rooms on latch side of floor.
.3
.4
3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
.1
Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise. If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation. Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise. .1 Local switches: 1400 mm. .2 Wall receptacles: .1 General: 300 mm.
.2
.3
Section 26 05 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) .2 Wall receptacles:(Cont'd) .2 Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200 mm. .3 Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 175 mm. .4 In mechanical rooms: 1400 mm. .3 Panelboards: as required by Code or as indicated. .4 Telephone and interphone outlets: 300 mm. .5 Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 1500 mm. .6 Fire alarm stations: 1400 mm. .7 Fire alarm bells/strobes: 2100 mm. .8 Television outlets: 300 mm. .9 Door bell pushbuttons: 1500 mm. .10 Manual starters: 1500 mm. .11 Isolating switches: 1500 mm. .12 Cell Call: 1400 mm. .13 Cell Call cancellation: 1400 mm.
3.6 CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
.1
Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are installed to required values and settings.
.1
Load Balance: .1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance; adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes. .2 Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of equipment. .3 Provide upon completion of work, load balance report as directed in PART 1 Submittals: phase and neutral currents on panelboards, dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load, as well as hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test. Conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00: .1 Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing. .2 Circuits originating from branch distribution panels. .3 Lighting and its control.
.2
Section 26 05 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) Motors, heaters and associated control .4 equipment including sequenced operation of systems where applicable. .5 Systems: fire alarm system, communications. .6 Insulation resistance testing: .1 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument. .2 Megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V instrument. .3 Check resistance to ground before energizing. Carry out tests in presence of Departmental Representative. Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project. Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS. .2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE. Verification requirements include: .1 Materials and resources. .2 Storage and collection of recyclables. .3 Construction waste management. .4 Resource reuse. .5 Recycled content. .6 Local/regional materials. .7 Certified wood. .8 Low-emitting materials.
.3 .4
.5
.6
3.8
CLEANING
.1
Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint. Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting.
.2
Section 26 05 00 Page 11 2011-05-25
.3
At time of final cleaning, clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces that have been exposed to construction dust and dirt.
Remove construction materials from wiring devices, coverplates, outlets, cabinets, enclosures, tubs, etc.
.4
3.9
FIREPROOFING
.1
Where cables or conduits pass through floors and fire rated walls proper firestopping for the specific construction shall be used. Refer to Section 07 84 00.
3.10 POWER SHUTDOWN
.1
Power shutdown shall be kept to a minimum. Schedule shutdowns well in advance with Engineer stating time(s) and duration(s). Maintain all electrical services to the occupied areas of the buildings. Power shutdowns will be allowed during normal working hours and has to be approved by the institution. Shutdowns to be 4 hours maximum. Provide temporary services, equipment and wiring as necessary to maintain continuity of services throughout, during construction of this project. Ensure all services, ie. security, fire alarm, telephone, LAN, normal and essential power, etc. remain operational during construction.
.2
.3
3.11
REMOVALS
.1 .2
Remove existing electrical equipment, wiring, conduit and other devices. Where existing walls and partitions are to be removed, remove existing outlets, devices and wiring located therein and make safe. Remove existing equipment, devices and outlets as necessary. Relocate or reinstall these items as indicated and as required. Co-ordinate with applicable trades. Maintain continuity of power, lighting, fire alarm and communication circuits as required. Turn over all removed material to the Engineer as described.
.3 .4
Section 26 05 00 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.11 REMOVALS (Cont'd)
.5
Remove all existing redundant wiring associated with all devices. Co-ordinate and arrange for telephone company to remove redundant telephone cables.
Any material the engineer does not want shall be removed from the site by this contractor.
.6
3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 01 78 00. Include in operation and maintenance data: .1 Details of design elements, construction features, component function and maintenance requirements, to permit effective start-up, operation, maintenance, repair, modification, extension and expansion of any portion or feature of installation. .2 Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component illustrations, exploded views, technical descriptions of items, and parts lists. Advertising or sales literature not acceptable. .3 Wiring and schematic diagrams and performance curves. .4 Names and addresses of local suppliers for items included in maintenance manuals. .5 Copy of reviewed shop drawings. Provide two distinct manuals, one for operational personnel and one for maintenance personnel. Provide a simplified operation instruction sheet for each system. (ie. fire alarm, door control, intercom, public address, CCTV, CATV, Telephone/Lan, etc.).
.2
.3
3.13
TRIAL USAGE
.1
Power supply, distribution system and equipment may be put into service for trial usage provided such use will not damage equipment or void guarantees. Engineer may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Provide labour and equipment required for testing.
.2 .3
Section 26 05 00 Page 13 2011-05-25
3.14 AS-BUILT RECORDS
.1
As work progresses, maintain accurate records to show deviations from contract drawings. The Engineer will provide a set of clean white prints for this purpose.
3.15 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
.1
Provide information for a computerized maintenance schedule indicating regular maintenance checks, procedures and results for insertion into a computerized maintenance program at the institution by institution personnel. Manufacturer: Voltage: Phase: Model: Serial No.: Etc.
END
ARC FLASH ELECTRICAL COORDINATION AND STUDIES
Section 26 05 03 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
.1
Co-ordination Study: .1 A Short Circuit Study will be conducted to determine the maximum duty that the system protective devices, cables, transformers, and interconnections will be subjected to in the event of three phase faults. .2 The portion of the system included in the study will be that represented by the composite one-line diagram. .3 Input data shall include the utility short circuit contribution, resistance and reactance components of the branch impedance's, the X/R ratios, motor and generator contributions, base quantities selected, and other source impedance's. .4 Calculate the maximum available fault current at each significant location in the system. The short circuit tabulations shall include symmetrical fault currents and X/R ratios, for both momentary and interrupting conditions. For each fault location, the total duty on the bus, as well as the individual contribution from each connected branch, shall be included with its respective S/R ratio. .5 All short circuit calculations will be made in accordance with the latest standards adopted by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC). .6 Each interrupting protective device will be analyzed to determine if its interrupting and momentary ratings can withstand interrupting and momentary duties. If the study reveals problems, the study will recommend changes to improve system performance. .7 Using the SKM Systems Analysis, Power Tools For Windows Computer Program, plot time-current co-ordination curves showing phase and ground-fault protective device time-current characteristics. The curves will illustrate the co-ordination among the devices shown on the system one-line diagram. .8 The co-ordination curves will include, as a minimum, the following information: .1 Appropriate CEC and ANSI protection criteria for equipment. .2 Magnetizing inrush points of transformers. .3 A simplified one-line diagram identifying the devices plotted.
Section 26 05 03 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.1 DESCRIPTION (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .8 (Cont'd) .4 Short-circuit current levels used for coordination. .5 Motor starting characteristics, where applicable. Arch Flash: .1 Complete the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis in accordance with the procedures of IEEE St 1584. .2 The analysis is performed in conjunction with a short circuit analysis of the existing system and will utilize the existing settings and ratings of the protective devices. Fault currents and protective device clearing times are required to perform the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. Results of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis are used to define the flash protection boundary and the incident energy at all locations described in the scope of work below. .3 Arc flash study to CSA Z462-08 Workplace Electrical Safety.
.2
1.2
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Contractor shall have the coordination study prepared by qualified engineers of an independent consultant. Consultant shall be a Registered Professional Electrical Engineer (licensed in the province where the project is completed) who has at least ten (10) years of experience and specializes in performing power system studies. Perform short circuit and coordination study and Arc Flash using the industry recognized program for Windows computer software package.
.2
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit power system studies within 30 days after the electrical equipment submittals have been received for review by the Departmental Representative. Submit three (3) copies of the power systems study.
.2
Section 26 05 03 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RESULTS SHORT CIRCUIT AND CO-ORDINATION
.1
At the conclusion of the Study, submit the following: .1 Fault current calculation summary listing momentary and interrupting duties with their respective X/R ratios; .2 Tabulated summaries listing circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device interrupting and momentary duties in percent of their respective ratings; .3 Complete fault current magnitudes, including individual branch current contributions, for each bus in the electrical distribution system; .4 Complete tabulation of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device momentary and interrupting ratings versus calculated short circuit duties for every protective device in the scope of the Short Circuit Analysis; .5 Recommendations for replacement or retrofit of over-dutied protective devices; and .6 Definitions of terms and guidelines for interpretation of computer printout; .7 Time-current co-ordination curves containing the information described above; .8 Tabulations of recommended protective device settings identified by location, equipment number, function number and adjustable range; and .9 General recommendations for replacement devices when the study determines those existing devices do not provide proper protection or co-ordination.
3.2 RESULTS ARCH FLASH
.1
Incident energy calculations will be performed and the printed label data will be based on the worst case at the label location. In addition, for any label location that is fed by an emergency generator, the worst case (Normal or Emergency) will be used for the label printing.
Section 26 05 03 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.2 RESULTS ARCH FLASH (Cont'd)
.2
At the conclusion of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis, submit the following for each circuit condition and arc location analyzed: .1 Arcing fault magnitude; .2 Device clearing time; .3 Duration of arc; .4 Arc flash boundary; .5 Working distance; .6 Incident energy; .7 Suggested clothing based on Table 130.7(11) of NFPA 70E-2009; and .8 One Arc Flash Label for each location identified.
This study will model the system "as is" with recommended changes to protective device settings to enhance selectivity and reliability. Run a minimum of 3 scenarios for the A-F analysis as follows: .1 Maximum utility contribution with all motors in service; .2 Minimum utility contribution with no motors in service; .3 Maximum Diesel Generator and CoGen contribution with all motors in service. Where the hazard risk category is high, offer general recommendations to reduce the incident energy.
.3
.4
END
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0-1000 V
Section 26 05 20 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for wire and box connectors.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18.4-04(R2009), Hardware for the Support of Conduit, Tubing and Cable. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18-98(R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware. .3 CSA C22.2 No.65-03, Wire Connectors. Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC) .1 EEMAC 1Y-2, 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters (1200 Ampere Maximum Rating). National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
.2
.3
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
All fixtures and Branch Circuit wiring joints, in junction and outlet boxes shall be made with CSA Certified Pressure Type connectors rated at 600 volts maximum (1,000 volts when enclosed in fixture or sign). Connector body shall consist of a cone-shaped coil spring insert, insulated with a colour-coded, flame-retardant shell which shall be knurled for easy grip and capable for use with an Electrician's Pliers.
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0-1000 V
Section 26 05 20 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and: .1 Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with appropriate compression tool recommended by manufacturer. Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65-03. .2 Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replace insulating cap. .3 Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with NEMA.
END
WIRES AND CABLES (0-1000 V)
Section 26 05 21 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Section 26 05 20 - Wire and Box Connectors - 0 - 1000 V.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1 .2
CSA C22.2 No .0.3-09, Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables. CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131-07, Type TECK 90 Cable.
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Provide product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRES
.1 .2
Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG. Copper conductors: size as indicated, with 600 or 1000 V insulation of cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene material rated RW90 XLPE or RWU90 XLPE, Non Jacketted.
2.2
TECK 90 CABLE
.1 .2
Cable: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131-07. Conductors: .1 Grounding conductor: copper. .2 Circuit conductors: copper, size as indicated. Insulation: .1 Chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene rated type RW90, 600 or 1000 V. Inner jacket: polyvinyl chloride material. Armour: flat interlocking aluminum.
.3
.4 .5
Section 26 05 21 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.2 TECK 90 CABLE (Cont'd)
.6 .7 .8
Overall covering: thermoplastic material.

To CSA C22.2 No. 0.3 Vertical Tray Fire Test. Fastenings: .1 'P' clamps on 'U' channels. .2 Channel type supports for two or more cables at 900 mm centers. .3 Threaded rods: 6 mm dia. to support suspended channels. Connectors: .1 Watertight approved for TECK cable.
.9
2.3 MINERAL-INSULATED CABLES
.1 .2
Conductors: solid bare soft-annealed copper, size as indicated. Insulation: compressed powdered magnesium oxide or silicon dioxide to form compact homogeneous mass throughout entire length of cable. Outer covering: annealed seamless copper sheath, Type M1 rated 600 V, 250 degrees C. Overall jacket: PVC applied over the sheath to CSA C22.2 No. 0.3 vertical tray fire test. Two hour fire rating. Connectors: watertight, field installed approved for MI cable. Termination kits: field installed approved for MI cable
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7
2.4 ARMOURED CABLES
.1 .2 .3 .4
Conductors: insulated, copper, size as indicated. Type: AC90. Armour: interlocking type fabricated from aluminum strip. Type: ACWU90 flame retardant jacket over thermoplastic armour and meeting requirements of vertical tray fire test of CSA C22.2 No. 0.3 with maximum flame travel of 1.2 m. Connectors: anti short connectors.
.5
Section 26 05 21 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.5
CONTROL CABLES
.1
Type: LVT: 2 soft annealed copper conductors, sized as indicated: .1 Insulation: thermoplastic. .2 Sheath : thermoplastic jacket. Type: low energy 300 V control cable: stranded annealed copper conductors sized as indicated LVT: 2 soft annealed copper conductors, sized as indicated: .1 Insulation: TWH. .2 Shielding: tape coated with paramagnetic material wire over each conductor. .3 Overall covering: polyethylene jackets. Type: 600 V stranded annealed copper conductors, sizes as indicated: .1 Insulation: RW90 (x-link). .2 Shielding: non-magnetic tape over each conductor. .3 Overall covering: thermosetting jackets.
.2
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Perform tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Departmental Representative and local authority having jurisdiction over installation. Perform tests before energizing electrical system.
.3
3.2 GENERAL CABLE INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Lay cable in cable trays in accordance with Section 26 05 36. Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 05 20. Cable Colour Coding: to Section 26 05 00. Conductor length for parallel feeders to be identical. Lace or clip groups of feeder cables at distribution centres, pull boxes, and termination points.
Section 26 05 21 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.2 GENERAL CABLE INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.6
Wiring in walls: typically drop or loop vertically from above to better facilitate future renovations. Generally wiring from below and horizontal wiring in walls to be avoided unless indicated.
Branch circuit wiring for surge suppression receptacles and permanently wired computer and electronic equipment to be 2-wire circuits only, i.e. common neutrals not permitted. Provide wiring. drawing control numbered wire collars for control Numbers to correspond to control shop legend. Obtain wiring diagram for wiring.
.7
.8
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES
.1
Install .1 In Section .2 In Section
wiring as follows: conduit systems in accordance with 26 05 34. underground ducts in accordance with 33.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF TECK90 CABLE (0-1000 V)
.1 .2
Group cables wherever possible on channels. Install cable exposed, securely supported by straps.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERALINSULATED CABLES
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Install cable exposed, securely supported by straps. Support 2 hour fire rated cables at 1 m intervals. Make cable terminations by using factory-made kits. Cable terminations: use thermoplastic sleeving over bare conductors. Where cables are buried in cast concrete or masonry, sleeve for entry or exit of cables. Do not splice cables unless indicated.
Section 26 05 21 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.6 INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED CABLES
.1 .2
Group cables wherever possible on channels. Install AC90 armoured cable from junction boxes located in main EMT runs in all accessible T-Bar ceilings, mechanical and electrical rooms with no ceilings to lights. Maximum length 1.5 meters.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL CABLES
.1 .2
Install control cables in conduit and cable troughs. Ground control cable shield.
END
GROUNDING - SECONDARY
Section 26 05 28 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - For Electrical.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Grounding equipment based on CSA C22.2 No. 41-07.
.1
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Clamps for grounding of conductor: size as required to electrically conductive underground water pipe. Copper conductor: minimum 6 m long for each concrete encased electrode, bare, stranded, soft annealed, size as indicated. Rod electrodes: copper clad steel 19 mm dia. by 3 m long.
2 Plate electrodes: copper, surface area 0.2 m , 1.6 mm thick.
.2
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, soft annealed, size as indicated. Insulated grounding conductors: green, type RW90. Ground bus: copper, size as indicated, complete with insulated supports, fastenings, connectors. Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as indicated, including but not necessarily limited to: .1 Grounding and bonding bushings. .2 Protective type clamps. .3 Bolted type conductor connectors. .4 Thermit welded type conductor connectors. .5 Bonding jumpers, straps.
Section 26 05 28 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.1 EQUIPMENT (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.8
(Cont'd) .6 Pressure wire connectors.
.1
Install complete permanent, continuous grounding system including, electrodes, conductors, connectors, accessories. Where PVC, flexible conduit and EMT is used, run ground wire in conduit. Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury. Make buried connections, and connections to conductive water main, electrodes, using copper welding by thermit process permanent mechanical connectors or inspectable wrought copper compression connectors to IEEE 837-2002. Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with lugs. Soldered joints not permitted. Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both one ends to grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit. Install flexible ground straps for bus duct enclosure joints, where such bonding is not inherently provided with equipment. Install separate ground conductor to outdoor lighting standards. Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections terminating at single grounding point street side of water pipe. Avoid loop connections. Bond single conductor, metallic armoured cables to cabinet at supply end, and provide non-metallic entry plate at load end and load end.
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6 .7
.8
.9 .10
.11
Section 26 05 28 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.2
MANHOLES
.1
Install conveniently located grounding stud, electrode, size #6 stranded copper conductor in each manhole. Install ground rod in each manhole so that top projects through bottom of manhole. Provide with lug to which grounding connection can be made.
.2
3.3
ELECTRODES
.1
Make ground connections to continuously conductive underground water pipe on street side of water meter. Install water meter shunt. Install concrete encased electrodes in building foundation footings, with terminal connected to grounding network. Install rod, electrodes and make grounding connections. Bond separate, multiple electrodes together. Use size 3/0 AWG copper conductors for connections to electrodes. Make special provision for installing electrodes that will give acceptable resistance to ground value where rock or sand terrain prevails. Ground as indicated.
.2 .3
.4 .5 .6 .7
3.4 SYSTEM AND CIRCUIT GROUNDING
.1
Install system and circuit grounding connections to neutral of primary 347/600 V system, secondary 120/208 V system.
3.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
.1
Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily limited to following list. Service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems, frames of motors, motor control centres, starters, control panels, building steel work, generators, elevators and escalators, distribution panels, outdoor lighting.
Section 26 05 28 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.6
GROUNDING BUS
.1 .2
Install copper grounding bus mounted on insulated supports on wall of electrical room. Ground items of electrical equipment in electrical room to ground bus with individual bare stranded copper connections size 2/0 AWG.
3.7 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
.1
Install grounding connections for telephone, sound, fire alarm, intercommunication systems as follows: .1 Telephones: make telephone grounding system in accordance with telephone company's requirements. .2 Sound, fire alarm, intercommunication systems as indicated.
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Departmental Representative and local authority having jurisdiction over installation. Perform tests before energizing electrical system. Disconnect ground fault indicator during tests.
.3 .4
END
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 29 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
1.2
RESTRICTIONS
.1
Explosive driven fasteners shall not be used except by specific approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT CHANNELS PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted or suspended.
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Secure equipment to solid masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with epoxy anchors. Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts. Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with expandable inserts. Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before installation.
Section 26 05 29 Page 2 2011-05-25
.5
Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members.
Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps. .1 One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller. .2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm. .3 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work. Suspended support systems. .1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia. threaded rods and spring clips. .2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm dia. threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical. For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 1.5 m on centre spacing. Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs. Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support. Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables. Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Departmental Representative. Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations. Provide channels for mounting of conduit, wiring and devices on walls of tunnels, mechanical rooms and attics. Provide spacers to prevent direct contact between 'U' channels and concrete.
.6
.7
.8 .9
.10
.11 .12
.13
.14
.15
Section 26 05 29 Page 3 2011-05-25
.16
File rough edges of cut 'U' channels and paint with galvanizing paint.
END
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
Section 26 05 31 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 21st Edition.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
.3
.1
2.1 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
.1 .2 .3 .4
Construction: welded steel enclosure. Covers Flush Mounted: 25 mm minimum extension all around. Covers Surface Mounted: screw-on flat covers. Cast junction and pull boxes in tunnels and attics.
2.2
CABINETS
.1 .2
Construction: welded sheet steel hinged door, latch and catch. Type E Empty: flush overlapping sides mounting as indicated.
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
Section 26 05 31 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.2 CABINETS (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.3
Type T Terminal: flush overlapping sides mounting as indicated containing 19 mm G1S plywood backboard.
3.1 JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations. Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m above finished floor except where indicated otherwise. Install terminal block as indicated in Type T cabinets. Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install additional pull boxes soas not to exceed 30 m of conduit run between pull boxes.
.3 .4
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
.1 .2
Equipment Identification: to Section 26 05 00. Identification Labels: size 2 indicating system name voltage and phase.
END
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Section 26 05 32 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 21st Edition.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit samples for floor box in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1 .2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1-09. 102 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required. Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped. Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices. Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.
2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL OUTLET BOXES
.1 .2
One-piece electro-galvanized construction. Single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as indicated. 102 mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.
Section 26 05 32 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL OUTLET BOXES (Cont'd)
.3
Utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 102 x 54 x 48 mm.
102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets. Extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished plaster or tile walls.
.4 .5
2.3
MASONRY BOXES
.1
Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for devices flush mounted in exposed block walls.
2.4
CONCRETE BOXES
.1
Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required.
2.5
FLOOR BOXES
.1
Concrete tight electro-galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with adjustable finishing rings to suit floor finish with brass faceplate. Device mounting plate to accommodate short or long ear duplex or single receptacles. Minimum depth: 73 mm for receptacles and communication outlets. Adjustable, watertight, concrete tight, cast floor boxes with openings drilled and tapped for 16, 21 and 27 mm conduit. Minimum size: 73 mm deep.
.2
2.6
CONDUIT BOXES
.1
Cast FS or FD feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of devices in mechanical rooms and attics.
2.7 FITTINGS GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4
Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats. Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris. Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits. Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.
Section 26 05 32 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Support boxes independently of connecting conduits. Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work. For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening. Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Do not install reducing washers. Vacuum clean interior of outlet boxes before installation of wiring devices. Identify systems for outlet boxes as required.
.3
.4
.5 .6
END
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS
Section 26 05 34 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 18-98(R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware, A National Standard of Canada. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 18.1-04 (R2009), Metallic Outlet Boxes. .3 CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 18.2-06, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes. .4 CSA C22.2 No. 45-M1981(R2003), Rigid Metal Conduit. .5 CSA C22.2 No. 56-04, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. .6 CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2008), Electrical Metallic Tubing. .7 CSA C22.2 No. 211.2-06, Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets. .1 Submit cable manufacturing data. Quality assurance submittals: .1 Test reports: submit certified test reports. .2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .3 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.3
.1 .2 .3
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
Section 26 05 34 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUITS
.1
Rigid metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45-M1981C(R2003), hot dipped galvanized steel threaded. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): to CSA C22.2 No. 83, with expanded ends. Rigid pvc conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2. Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56, aluminum liquid-tight flexible metal.
.2 .3 .4
2.2 CONDUIT FASTENINGS
.1
One hole conduits .1 Two than NPS
steel straps to secure surface NPS 2 50 mm and smaller. hole steel straps for conduits larger 2 50 mm.
.2 .3 .4
Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work. Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 1.2 m on centre. Threaded rods, 6 mm diameter, to support suspended channels.
2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS
.1
Fittings: to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18-98(R2003), manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit. Ensure factory "ells" where 90 degrees bends for NPS 1 27 mm and larger conduits. Watertight connectors and couplings for EMT. .1 Set-screws are not acceptable.
.2 .3
2.4
FISH CORD
.1
Polypropylene.
Section 26 05 34 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass. Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms and in unfinished areas such as attics. Use rigid hot dipped galvanized steel threaded conduit for surface mounting in inmate areas for all wiring. Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) in electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, areas not accessible to inmates and inaccessible ceilings. Use rigid pvc conduit underground. Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry areas, transformers, connection to recessed incandescent fixtures and connection to surface or recessed fluorescent fixtures. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment in damp, wet or corrosive locations. Minimum conduit size for lighting and power circuits: NPS 3/4 21 mm. Bend conduit cold: .1 Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter. Mechanically bend steel conduit over 21 mm diameter. Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight. Install fish cord in empty conduits. Run 2-NPS 1 27 mm spare conduits up to accessible ceiling space and 2-NPS 1 25 mm spare
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8 .9
.10 .11 .12 .13
Section 26 05 34 Page 4 2011-05-25
.13
(Cont'd) conduits down to accessible ceiling space from each flush panel. .1 Terminate these conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm junction boxes in ceiling space or in case of an exposed concrete slab, terminate each conduit in surface type box. Remove and replace blocked conduit sections. .1 Do not use liquids to clean out conduits. Dry conduits out before installing wire.
.14 .15
3.3 SURFACE CONDUITS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m clearance. Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel. Group conduits wherever possible on surface channels. Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated. Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25 mm at crossovers.
3.4 CONCEALED CONDUITS
.1 .2 .3
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls. Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.
3.5 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
.1 .2 .3
Locate to suit reinforcing steel. .1 Install in centre one third of slab. Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete. Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall.
Section 26 05 34 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.5 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (Cont'd)
.4
Provide oversized sleeve for conduits passing through waterproof membrane, before membrane is installed. .1 Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit.
Conduits in slabs: minimum slab thickness 4 times conduit diameter. Encase conduits completely in concrete with minimum 27 mm concrete cover. Organize conduits in slab to minimize cross-overs.
.5 .6 .7
3.6 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE SLABS ON GRADE
.1
Run conduits NPS 1 27 mm and larger below slab and encase in 75 mm concrete envelope. .1 Provide 50 mm of sand over concrete envelope below floor slab.
3.7 CONDUITS UNDERGROUND
.1 .2
Slope conduits to provide drainage. Waterproof joints (pvc excepted) with heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.8
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 36 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.126-M91(R1997), Cable Tray Systems. Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC) .1 EEMACF5-1-1976, Cabletrough Systems and Accessories.
.2
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Identify types of cabletroughs used. Show actual cabletrough installation details and suspension system.
.2 .3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL CABLETROUGH
.1 .2
Cabletrough tray and fittings: to EEMAC F5-1 and CSA C22.2 No. 126-M91(R1997). Load Class D1, ladder type, minimum inside depth 100 mm, 450 mm wide unless otherwise noted, or required. Cabletrough tray shall be constructed of hot dipped galvanized steel. Factory manufactured horizontal elbows, end plates, drop outs, vertical risers, drops, tees, wyes, expansion joints, and reducers as required. Fittings manufactured on site will not be accepted. Cabletrough tray shall be supported on a trapeze style hanger constructed of 41 mm x 43 mm galvanized steel channel. Channel shall be supported by two 12.5 mm threaded rods. Install trapeze hangers minimum 3 metres on centre, as well as at all elbows and fittings.
.3 .4
.5
Section 26 05 36 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.2 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAY
.1 .2
Cable tray and fittings: to EEMAC F5-1-1977 and CSA C22.2 No. 126-M91(R1997). Communication Cable Tray - Wire basket cable runway type, minimum inside depth 50 mm, minimum inside width 300 mm, minimum 4.4 mm wire diameter, 5.08 x 101.6 mesh pattern, tested load capacity of 43 lbs/ft with supports @ 1524 mm on centre). Cable tray shall be constructed of ASTM A510-08 high strength steel wires with electroplated zinc galvanized finish. Horizontal elbows, end plates, drop outs, vertical risers, drops, tees, wyes, expansion joints, and reducers as required to be manufactured on site according to manufacturer's instructions. Suspend tray 9.5 mm threaded rods at 1524 mm on centre with centre hanger assembly. Attach to beams and joists with beam clamps. Two steel barrier strips shall be provided to divide the communication tray into three sections (voice, data and BSCS/comm. systems).
.3
.4
.5
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install complete cable tray system. Remove sharp burrs or projections to prevent damage to cables or injury to personnel. Arrange for opening in fire rated walls, and floors for width and depth of cable tray. Make good, fire rating of floors and walls after cables have been installed. Install tray soas to be fully accessible at all locations. Install a continuous green insulated ground conductor (#6 AWG minimum) the entire length of the cable tray system. Bond the ground conductor to each section of the cable tray. Terminate ground conductor at the main building ground grid. Install cables individually and secure cables in cable tray at 3 metres on centre with nylon ties.
.2
.3 .4
.5
Section 26 05 36 Page 3 2011-05-25
.6
For power cables, maintain minimum air space of 100% of the largest cable diameter between cables.
Use rollers when necessary to pull cables. Locate cable trays a minimum of 200 mm clear above suspended ceiling tile grid to accommodate installation/removal of luminaires and ceiling tiles. Coordinate with depth of luminaires to allow a minimum 75 mm clearance between top of recessed luminaires and bottom of cable tray. Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires (cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor) and pneumatic tubing (supplied by Section 11 19 12 DEC Contractor) in conduit and wire trays provided by Electrical Contractor (Division 26). Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted. Coordinate control cabling, low voltage wires and pneumatic tubing in conduit, raceways and cable trays with Section 11 19 12 DEC Contractor Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor.
.7 .8
.9
.10
END
INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS
Sect 26 05 43.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 31 23 10 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1 .2
Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International) Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA)
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Unused sealant material must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of preservative treated wood through incineration. Do not dispose of preservative treated wood with other materials destined for recycling or reuse. Dispose of treated wood, end pieces, wood scraps and sawdust at sanitary landfill approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
.6 .7
.8
.9
Sect 26 05 43.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DIRECT BURIAL OF CABLES
.1 .2
Underground cable splices not acceptable. Minimum permitted radius at cable bends for rubber, plastic or lead covered cables, 8 times diameter of cable; for metallic armoured cables, 12 times diameter of cables or in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Cable separation: .1 Maintain 75 mm minimum separation between cables of different circuits. .2 Maintain 300 mm horizontal separation between low and high voltage cables. .3 When low voltage cables cross high voltage cables maintain 300 mm vertical separation with low voltage cables in upper position. .4 At crossover, maintain 75 mm minimum vertical separation between low voltage cables and 150 mm between high voltage cables. .5 Maintain 300 mm minimum lateral and vertical separation for fire alarm and control cables when crossing other cables, with fire alarm and control cables in upper position.
.3
3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION IN DUCTS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install cables as indicated in ducts. .1 Do not pull spliced cables inside ducts. Install multiple cables in duct simultaneously. Use CSA approved lubricants of type compatible with cable jacket to reduce pulling tension. To facilitate matching of colour coded multiconductor control cables reel off in same direction during installation. Before pulling cable into ducts and until cables are properly terminated, seal ends of lead covered cables with wiping solder; seal ends of non-leaded cables with moisture seal tape.
.5
Sect 26 05 43.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION IN DUCTS (Cont'd)
.6
After installation of cables, seal duct ends with duct sealing compound.
.1 .2 .3 .4
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Perform tests using qualified personnel. Provide necessary instruments and equipment. Check phase rotation and identify each phase conductor of each feeder. Check each feeder for continuity, short circuits and grounds. Ensure resistance to ground of circuits is not less than 50 megohms. Pre-acceptance tests. .1 After installing cable but before splicing and terminating, perform insulation resistance test with 1000 V megger on each phase conductor. .2 Check insulation resistance after each splice and/or termination to ensure that cable system is ready for acceptance testing. Acceptance Tests .1 Ensure that terminations and accessory equipment are disconnected. .2 Ground shields, ground wires, metallic armour and conductors not under test. .3 High Potential (Hipot) Testing. .1 Conduct hipot testing at 100% of original factory test voltage in accordance with manufacturer's ICEA recommendations. Provide Departmental Representative with list of test results showing location at which each test was made, circuit tested and result of each test. Remove and replace entire length of cable if cable fails to meet any of test criteria.
.5
.6
.7
.8
END
FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS
Section 26 05 80 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA C22.2 No. 100-04R2009), Motors and Generators. Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC) .1 EEMAC M1-6 1978. .2 EEMAC M1-1.
.2
1.2
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. WHMIS acceptable to Labour Canada, and Health and Welfare Canada. Submit product data sheets for motors. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, horsepower, watt rating, limitations and finish.
.3
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate dimensions, recommended installation procedure, wiring diagrams, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes and recommended support method.
.1
Provide maintenance data for fractional horsepower motors for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS
Section 26 05 80 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with the Waste Management Plan.
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling. Collect, package and store expired motors for either recycling or rebuilding and return to recycler or rebuilder.
.5 .6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTOR
.1 .2
Non-hazardous locations: to CSA C22.2 No. 100-04(R2009) and EEMAC M1-6. Motor with inherent overheating protectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install wiring, flexible connections and grounding. Check rotation before coupling to driven equipment.
END
MOTORS: 0.746 TO 149 KW
Section 26 05 81 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No. 100-04(R2009), Motors and Generators. Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC) .1 EEMAC M1-7-1992, Standard for Motors and Generators. .2 EEMAC M2-1-1966, Standard for Lead Marking and Connections for Single-Phase and Polyphase Induction Motors.
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets and include: product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, horsepower, watt rating, limitations and finish. Shop drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate: .1 Overall dimensions of motor. .2 Shaft centreline to base dimension. .3 Shaft extension diameter and keyway, coupling dimensions and details. .4 Fixing support dimensions. .5 Dimensioned position of ventilation openings. Details of ventilation duct attachments. .6 Terminal box location and size of terminals. .7 Arrangement and dimensions of accessories. .8 Diagram of connections. .9 Starting current and relative data necessary for use in design of motor starting equipment. .10 Speed/torque characteristic. .11 Weight. .12 Installation data.
.3
Section 26 05 81 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data for motors for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. .2 Data necessary for maintenance of motors. .3 Manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts.
Quality Assurance: .1 Departmental Representative reserves the right to witness standard factory testing of motors 50 hp, 37.3 kW and above. .2 Submit site tests results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation.
.5
.1 .2
Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Handle motors with suitable lifting equipment. Store motors in heated, dry, weather-protected enclosure.
.3 .4
.1 .2
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect, package and store expired motors for either recycling or rebuilding and return to recycler or rebuilder.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials and spare parts in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
Section 26 05 81 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Motors: .1 Non-hazardous locations: to CSA C22.2 No. 100-04(R2009) and EEMAC M1-7. Lead markings: to EEMAC M2-1.
.2
2.2 CORROSION PREVENTION AND FINISH PAINTING
.1
Provide equipment resistant to corrosion from severe moisture conditions.
2.3
MOTOR TYPE
.1
Squirrel cage.
2.4
DESIGN LETTERS
.1 .2
Polyphase squirrel cage induction motors design B. Single phase integral induction motors design L.
2.5
ENCLOSURE
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Open drip proof fully guarded. Open guarded. Totally enclosed non-ventilated. Totally enclosed fan cooled. Totally enclosed pipe ventilated for use in non-hazardous location.
2.6
APPLICATION
.1
Motor suitable for driving pump, fan, blower or compressor.
2.7
INSULATION
.1 .2
Class: H. Ambient temperature: 40 degrees C.
Section 26 05 81 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.8 DIRECTION OF ROTATION
.1
Direction of rotation, counter when facing end of machine opposite drive.
2.9
BEARINGS
.1
Antifriction type bearings, fitted with readily accessible facilities for lubrication while motor running or stationary.
2.10 MOTOR MOUNTING AND TERMINAL HOUSING
.1
Horizontal floor mounting, assembly F-1 horizontal wall mounting, assembly W-1 horizontal ceiling mounting, assembly C-1. Vertical flange mounting with thrust bearing. Slide rails for motor mounting.
.2 .3
2.11 STARTING METHOD
.1
Terminate winding connection necessary for appropriate starting method and identify in motor terminal box.
2.12
ACCESSORIES
.1
Shaft extension: on drive end as necessary for accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Dry out motor if dampness present in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install motor on baseplate, structure or concrete base, ensuring it has fully cured before installation rigid plumb and square, using only lifting facilities provided. Make wiring connections. .1 Use liquid tight pvc jacketed flexible conduit between rigid conduit and motor.
.3
Section 26 05 81 Page 5 2011-05-25
.4
Make flexible conduit long enough to permit movement of motor over entire length of slide rails.
Check for correct direction of rotation, with motor uncoupled from driven equipment. Align and couple motor to driven machinery to manufacturer's instructions, using only correct parts such as couplings, belts, sheaves, as provided by manufacturer.
.5 .6
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
3.4
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
METERING AND SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS
Sec 26 09 23.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1
GENERAL
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
Provide data for incorporation into Electrical Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 33 00.
.1
Micro-processor based solid state instrument unit capable of displaying voltage and current for each phase as well as KVA-KVAR-KW-PF-HZ and the accumulated MWHR and KW demand. The unit shall also continuously monitor and store minimum values of volts and power factor and maximum values of AMPS-KW-KVA-KVAR-KWD.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 DIGITAL METERING UNIT
.1 .2 .3 -
Digital metering unit shall be suitable for flush mounting in panel. Unit shall be capable of measuring and displaying the following:
volts (each phase) current (each phase) frequency power factor KVA KW KW demand KVAR Total MWHR Total MQHR Selector pushbuttons shall allow selection of the following: Phase Function Maximum Value Minimum Value
METERING AND SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS
Sec 26 09 23.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.1 DIGITAL METERING UNIT (Cont'd)
.4 .5 .6
Unit shall be complete with RS232C port to allow connection to computer.

A test block shall allow testing of the meter for accuracy. A normally open set point relay shall operate when measured KW demand exceeds selected set point. Relay shall release when the measured KW demand equals or is less than the selected set point. Contacts shall be rated at minimum 1 amp 120 V (dry).
2.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
.1
Current transformers: doughnut to 5 A, 600 V to monitor total building. C.T. primary current the rating of the bus on which installed.
type, ratio 400 load current of rating to match the C.T. will be
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install current transformers on main bus. Connect secondary of current transformers to unit as per manufacturers recommendations. Digital metering unit shall be flush mounted on front panel of main distribution centre at eye level.
3.2
TESTING
.1 .2
Energize system and test to ensure peak load controller functions as intended. Provide necessary metering apparatus to check accuracy of digital metering unit.
END
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PHOTOELECTRIC
Sect 26 09 23.02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PRODUCT DATA
.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOELECTRIC LIGHTING CONTROL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Wall or luminaire mounting. Capable of switching 1800 W of lighting at 120 V. Voltage variation: plus or minus 10%. Temperature range: minus 40C to plus 40C. Rated for 5000 operations. Options: .1 Lightning arrester. .2 Fail-safe circuit completed when relay de-energized. .3 Twist-lock type receptacle. .4 Terminal strip. .5 Sensitivity adjustment. Switching time delay of 30 s. Wall mounting bracket. Colour coded leads: size 10 AWG, 460 mm long.
.7 .8 .9
2.2
CONTACTOR
.1 .2 .3 .4
Cabinet mounting. Capable of switching multiple lamp circuits with total lighting load of 6000 W. Waterproof enclosure. Manual override.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PHOTOELECTRIC
Sect 26 09 23.02 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install photoelectric controls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES INCANDESCENT DIMMING
Sect 26 09 23.03 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C802.2-06, Solid-State Dimming Controls.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed exit light product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Quality Assurance Submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence and cleaning procedures.
.3
.1
2.1 FULL RANGE DIMMER
.1
Full range dimmer: to CSA C802.2-06, designed to produce 0% to 100% brightness control by means of single dial and to provide smooth and continuous square law dimming curve, and: .1 Fit single-gang standard switch box. .2 Gangable without removing side sections or derating capacity. .3 Advanced solid-state circuitry providing symmetrical ac wave form to input of low voltage magnetic ballasts, when used. .4 Two moving parts: .1 Single pole or Three way switch. .2 Long life potentiometer. .5 Push to turn ON or OFF without disturbing preselected brightness setting.
Sect 26 09 23.03 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.1 FULL RANGE DIMMER (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .6 Rated: 1800 W at 120 V, AC. .7 Voltage regulated to maintain plus or minus 5% light output variation with plus or minus 10% line voltage variation. .8 No perceptible flicker in dimming range and no perceptible humming. .9 Audio/Radio/TV interference filter. .10 Operate at ambient temperature of 0 to 40 C.
2.2 COMMERCIAL DIMMERS
.1
Commercial dimmers: to CSA C802.2-06, designed to control brightness of incandescent lamps up to 5 kW, single phase 10 kW, three phase and consisting of: .1 Intensity control kit. .2 Power sections. .3 Manual or Motor control. .4 Motorized control unit. .5 Remote control station. .6 Remote monitor station. .7 Master Control station. Manual control for dimming from single location as indicated. Motorized control for dimming from one location as indicated. .1 Standard intensity master control mechanically coupled to motor drive unit with status light. Remote control station: .1 Remote control switch increases-decreases brightness, momentary action, center position off. Fits single gang switch box. .2 Remote control switch increases-decreases brightness, momentary action, center position off, plus meter calibrated 0 to 100% brilliance, and pilot light that glows with same relative brilliance as lamps being controlled. Fits double gang switch box. .3 Number of stations as indicated. .4 Preset remote dimming control with 4 light scenes and 4 independent lighting zones with each scene. .1 Four touch buttons activate corresponding scenes. .2 Separate button turns off control unit.
.2 .3
.4
Sect 26 09 23.03 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 COMMERCIAL DIMMERS (Cont'd)
.5
Remote monitor station: Used to observe lamp brilliance from .1 location out of sight, as indicated. .2 Meter calibrated 0 to 100% brilliance. .3 Pilot light glows with same relative brilliance as lamps being controlled; fits single gang switch box.
Master control station: .1 Controls up to 4 motorized systems from single remote point as indicated. .2 Each motorized system has option of being operated independently from its remote control station. .3 Next to each control, status light indicator to display status of each element controlled.
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install dimmers or manual or motorized control stations in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Connect lamp circuits to dimmer or power sections. Install remote monitoring station.
.2 .3
.1 .2 .3
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Demonstrate that dimming systems are installed as indicated. Demonstrate that dimming systems: .1 Operate as intended. .2 That there are no problems in starting lamps, nor in keeping them lit. .3 That they flicker-free at any setting of dimming intensity control.
Sect 26 09 23.03 Page 4 2011-05-25
.4 .5
Demonstrate that no audio, radio or TV interference is carried by system.

Commissioning: .1 Commission system using commissioning agent, when installation has been completed. .2 Perform commissioning after ballasts and controls have been installed and wiring has been connected and checked for proper continuity. .3 Commissioning agent to calibrate and verify system operation for specified functions and controls.
3.4
CLEANING
.1 .2
END
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES FLUORESCENT DIMMING
Sect 26 09 23.04 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 02 81 01 - Hazardous Materials. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results Electrical. Section 26 50 00 - Lighting.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA C802.2-06-96(R2006), Solid-State Dimming Controls.
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets acceptable to Labour Canada, and Health and Welfare Canada for. Submit product data sheets for fluorescent lighting control equipment. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, limitations and finish. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures and.
.3
.4
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Indicate shielded wiring requirements.
.1 .2 .3 .4
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
Sect 26 09 23.04 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.5
2.1 EQUIPMENT GENERAL
.1
Dimming system: to CSA C22.2 No. 184.1, packaged in accordance with the Canadian Code for Preferred Packaging guidelines, components to be from one manufacturer, and to comprise an integrated system. System to start, and operate continuously, within intensity setting of 20 to 100%. System to include approved radio, VCR and TV interference suppressors. System voltage as indicated.
.2 .3 .4
2.2 INTENSITY SELECTOR
.1
Intensity selector unit, containing solid state firing circuit, master potentiometer, manually operated or motorized for remote control, providing for continuous adjustment from maximum intensity, to 20% of maximum intensity, and actuating up to 100 multiple dimming auxiliaries, suitable for installation in three gang wall box and complete with knob and faceplate.
2.3
ON-OFF SWITCH
.1
On-off switch mounted in same wall box as intensity selector.
2.4 DIMMING AUXILIARIES
.1
Dimming auxiliaries, to control 6 multiple dimming ballasts, suitable for mounting in lighting fixture.
2.5
BALLASTS
.1
Sect 26 09 23.04 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.6 RELAYS, CONTACTORS PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Enclosed solid-state relays, contactors and controls for independent or multipoint control.
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install components comprising dimming system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated. Install wiring, shielding, grounding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure shielded leads between intensity selector potentiometer and intensity controls have outer insulating jackets and are connected to ground at one point only. Keep radio, VCR, TV and intercom wiring a minimum of 1.8 m away from dimming circuitry. Where crossing of wiring is essential, ensure that grounded shields surround such intercom wiring, and that crossings take place at 90. Locate intensity controls and "on-off" switches as indicated. Ensure positive, low resistance lamp to pin contact within lampholder. Age lamps by operating at full intensity for 100 h prior to final inspection. Operate ballasts in ambient temperature above 18C. Ensure connections are correctly made and to same phase before energizing.
.2 .3
.4
.5 .6 .7
.8
.1 .2 .3
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Demonstrate that dimming systems are installed as indicated. Demonstrate that dimming systems operate as intended and that there are no problems in starting lamps, nor in keeping them lit, and free of perceptible flicker at any setting of dimming intensity control. Demonstrate that no radio, VCR or TV interference is carried by system and that there
.4
Sect 26 09 23.04 Page 4 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) is no interference between dimming system and locally used infrared-based remote/integral controls.
END
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT - LOW VOLTAGE
Section 26 09 24 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Low voltage control system designed to provide remote switching of lighting loads by use of: .1 Low voltage momentary contact switches .2 Low voltage relays. .3 Control transformers. Provide Low Voltage Remote Control System equipment for lighting and factory tested by a single manufacturer. Low voltage relay panels shall be supplied, factory-assembled and factory tested by a single manufacturer. The low voltage relay panels shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings. The numbered relays in the panel shall be wired to control the power to each load as indicated on the Panel Wiring Schedules included in the drawings. All power wiring will be identified with the number of relay controlling it at the load. Plug-in intelligence cards in panels shall provide programmable operation. Occupant-Sensitive Operating Scenarios: The intelligence cards must support the following operating scenarios: .1 Schedule With Flick Warn: Occupant sensitive scheduling capability shall be provided for each relay. Individual relays may be programmed to "flick" (blink) five minutes before a scheduled OFF. Individuals pressing the associated low voltage direct wired switch (or placing a phone override) during this period will be exempted from the OFF sweep. .2 Time-delay Overrides With Flick Warn: Each relay may be assigned a time delay which will be compatible with scheduled occupancy. In particular, direct overrides of the relay by an occupant will initiate a programmable time delay of 2 minutes to 24 hours. The time-delay OFF action will be ignored if it falls within a scheduled ON period. The time-delay OFF action will be preceded by a flick warn if that relay is "flickable". .3 Pre-emptive Override Capability (HID Scenario): Any relay that is ON and has a time delay will intelligently monitor a local occupants ON override before the scheduled off sweep. If the relays time delay would cause the
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
Section 26 09 24 Page 2 2011-05-25
.6
(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) relay to go OFF before the scheduled OFF, the override is ignored. If the time delay would cause the relay to stay ON after its scheduled OFF, it shall be accepted by the system. .4 Common Area Interlock With Egress Timer: Common areas or loads such as halls, support equipment, fans, etc. shall remain ON as long as any associated occupant area is ON. Turning OFF the last such occupant area will initiate a programmable regress time delay to allow that last occupant to exit the area safely. .5 Master Switch Control With Flick Option: Programmable switches in each panel shall allow relays to be "softwired" into groups while still retaining individual relay control. These master switches shall be capable of either direct ON/OFF control or ON/Flick-OFF control. Any remote master switch which could cause an individual occupant to be left in the dark must have the flick warn function. .6 Cleaning Scenario: The system shall allow the cleaning crew to turn ON specified lighting via a special Cleaning Switch. This switch will not turn OFF any area which is scheduled ON or has an occupancy override in effect; ie. occupant overrides will have priority over cleaning. These lights will automatically time out after the normal time delay for each relay is reached, although a forced time delay ranging from 1 minute to 24 hours can be substituted on a panel by panel bases. Status and Runtime Data: The intelligence cards shall also store the current status of all relays, how that status was initiated, and historical runtime data for management analysis. Communications: Each intelligence card shall support two communications ports - an RS232 port and a dataline port. Either or both may be used for programming, monitoring, and control. The dataline shall allow simultaneous operation of multiple RS232 communications access points to support multiple operator terminals and communications with other building automation systems. All relay changes of state and programmable switch actions shall be communicated over both the RS232 port and the dataline to support interactive graphics and online status monitoring. Distributed Control With Direct Relay Override: Each panel shall be capable of standalone
.7
.8
.9
Section 26 09 24 Page 3 2011-05-25
.9
(Cont'd) automatic operation. None of the operating scenarios discussed above shall depend on the operation of a central computer. Furthermore, the direct relay override switches and occupancy sensors shall continue to operate should a local intelligence card fail. Off-Line Programming: All programming shall be possible offline on an IBM PC compatible computer with English descriptions of all loads, windows, and help screens. Program data for the panel intelligence shall then be transferred from the PC to the panel with all data transferred confirmed for accuracy. Program data in each panel shall also be possible to be transferable to the PC for editing. Operating Scenarios: The operating scenarios described above must reside within each controller card. Systems which rely on the operator to develop these scenarios using a programming language will not be allowed.
.10
.11
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
.1
Submit maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with Waste Reduction Workplan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
.2 .3
1.5
CODES
.1
All components shall carry CSA approval and conform to CEC Code 22.0 for Class Two Energy Limiting Systems. All external control wiring between Low Voltage Relay Panels, local switches, area masters, etc. shall be installed in accordance with
.2
Section 26 09 24 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.5 CODES (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) manufacturer's recommendations and in conformance to CEC Code 22.1 for Class II Systems.
1.6
SYSTEM CONTROL
.1
Control of the low voltage relays shall be by local low voltage switches and/or by inputs from the building security control system (BSCS). Cell lighting and power circuit relays shall be controlled by the BSCS. Local cell switches shall be wired to the BSCS. Control logic will be a function of the BSCS System. All timed programs and group control inputs for office lights and exterior lights shall be integral to the lighting control system. Programming of the relays into groups shall reside in the lighting control system.
.2
.3
.1 .2
All components and assemblies are to be factory pre-tested and burned-in prior to installation. Factory trained technicians shall be available to functionally test each component after installation to verify proper operation. Factory application Engineers shall be available for on-site training as well as telephone support.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Control system: by one manufacturer and assembled from compatible components.
2.2 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES
.1
Single pole, double throw, momentary contact, heavy duty, rated 3 A, 28 VAC, double push-button centre pivot rocker action with pilot lights. Single switches shall be mounted on a single gang brushed stainless steel wallplate.
.2
Section 26 09 24 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.2 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES (Cont'd)
.3
At multiple switches locations, switches shall be mounted on one common brushed stainless steel cover plate.
2.3 LOW VOLTAGE RELAYS
.1 .2
Electrically operated by momentary impulse, mechanically latched until activated. Two coil solenoid type with one coil to close relay contacts and one coil to open relay contacts. Operating voltage: 24 V, AC. Load contacts: 20 A, 120 V, AC. Auxiliary contacts for pilot light. Heavy duty relay coil resistance 54 ohms, 85 ohms impedance at 60 Hz rated for HID ballasts. Clamp type screw terminals for line circuit connections. Coloured pre-stripped leads for low voltage circuit connections.
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
2.4 CONTROL TRANSFORMER
.1
Low voltage power Class 2, input 120 V, AC, 60 Hz, output at 24 VAC, VA rating to suite each panel application plus 50% spare capacity. Transformers shall include internal overcurrent protection with automatic reset, and metal oxide varistor protection against voltage spikes.
.2
2.5 FACTORY ASSEMBLED LOW VOLTAGE PANELS
.1 .2 .3
Relay panel complete with pre-mounted relays as indicated on drawings. Panels shall be constructed of 14 ga. cold rolled steel and painted Grey ASA 61. All panels shall have knockouts line up for joining two or more panels horizontally or vertically by using conduit nipples. Each panel shall be complete with stepped barrier separating high voltage and low voltage compartments. High voltage compartment shall have only one system voltage unless proper steel barrier provided.
.4
Section 26 09 24 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.5 FACTORY ASSEMBLED LOW VOLTAGE PANELS (Cont'd)
.5
Panel cover shall be hinged and lockable. A wiring schedule directory card shall be affixed to the inside of the door to allow ready identification of relay, circuits, and loads controlled.
Relay panels shall contain, in a single enclosure all components necessary to perform the system functions as noted in the specifications and drawings. All components shall be pre-assembled and pre-wired on a removable steel backplate at the factory as per approval drawings. Arboron or Plywood back panels are not acceptable. Component leads shall be wired to L.V. terminal strips which shall include extra points as necessary for external interconnects by the contractor. Terminal strips and relays shall be labelled by the manufacturer to correspond with the approval drawings.
.6
.7
.8
.9
2.6 TIME/PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL
.1 .2
Photoelectric sensor housing shall be CSA Type 4 enclosure for exterior mounting. Time/Photo controller for control of exterior lighting shall be microprocessor based electronic type with the capability of 7 day programming, astronomic time programming and photo based programming. Controller shall be an integral component of the low voltage panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Locate and install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated. Connect low voltage circuits in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Connect line voltage circuits from designated panels. Switches shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings. Low voltage wiring from the switches to the low voltage relay panel or the BSCS system l/o cabinets shall be contained in
Section 26 09 24 Page 7 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) conduit. Each low voltage wire shall be labelled with the relay number (1-48) at each switch. All relays and switches shall be tested after installation to confirm proper operation and the loads recorded on the directory card in each panel. All panels shall provide expansion slots for the addition of automation cards. The automation cards in selected panel shall be totally compatible with the manual operation of the low voltage switches and, in the event of a card failure, the switches shall continue to operate to provide relay control. All low voltage wiring shall be installed in conduit or cable trays. Low voltage wiring shall be multi-conductor, low voltage control cables, conductor size #18 insulated c/w overall FT4 rated jacket. To facilitate installation and minimize risk of on-site damage to panels the manufacturer shall make provision for shipment of panel tubs for installation prior to shipment of pre-assembled removable backplates.
.5
.6 .7
.8
3.2
TESTS
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Actuate control units in presence of Departmental Representative to demonstrate lighting circuits are controlled as designated. Panels shall be fully tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment. Test all connections to/from the BSCS control system and confirm correct operation of all control interfaces between the BSCS and the low voltage lighting control equipment.
.3 .4
END
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY
Sect 26 12 16.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and components for dry type transformers up to 600 V primary, equipment identification and transformer installation.
.1
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results For Electrical.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.47-M90(R2007), Air-Cooled Transformers (Dry Type). .2 CSA C9-02(R2007), Dry-Type Transformers. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
.2
1.4
PRODUCT DATA
.1
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
Sect 26 12 16.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TRANSFORMERS
.1
Use transformers of one manufacturer throughout project and in accordance with CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.47-M90(R2007) and CSA-C9-02(R2007). Design 1. .1 Type: ANN. .2 3 phase, 600 V input, 120/208 V output, 60 Hz. .3 Voltage taps: 2 - 2% FCAN, 2 - 2% FCBN. .4 Insulation: Class H, 150 degrees C temperature rise. .5 Basic Impulse Level (BIL): standard. .6 Hipot: standard. .7 Average sound level: less than 60 decibels measured in any third octave band between 60 Hz and 1000 Hz. (300-500 KVA rating). .8 Impedance at 17 degrees C: 6% maximum. .9 Enclosure: NEMA 3R, removable metal front panel. Sprinklerproof. .10 Mounting: floor. .11 Finish: in accordance with Section 26 05 00. .12 Windings: copper. .13 To CAN/CSA C802.2-00. . .14 T-Tap transformers are NOT ACCEPTABLE
.2
.1 .2 .3
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Label size: 7. Wording: Fed from DP B06A 600 V - 120/208 V 75 KVA feeding DP B06B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Mount floor mounted dry type transformers on 100 mm concrete housekeeping pad. Ensure adequate clearance around transformer for ventilation. Install transformers in level upright position.
Sect 26 12 16.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
.4
Remove shipping supports only after transformer is installed and just before putting into service.
Loosen isolation pad bolts until no compression is visible. Make primary and secondary connections in accordance with wiring diagram. Connect chasis and ground terminals to building ground. Energize transformers after installation is complete. Use flexible conduit to make connections to transformer.
.5 .6
.7 .8
3.2
CONNECTIONS
.1 .2 .3
Make primary and secondary connections shown on wiring diagram. Energize transformers immediately after installation is completed, where practicable. Adjust primary taps as necessary to produce rated secondary voltage at no-load.
3.3 NOISE/ VIBRATION ISOLATION
.1
Isolate transformer noise and vibration from occupied areas of the building. Provide neoprene isolation for support of the transformer, and utilize flexible wiring connections. Advise other trades not to locate services tin the area adjacent to the transformer, that may hinder the isolation of the transformer noise and vibration. Utilize Vibro-Acoustics type NSN resilient elements below transformers.
.2
.1 .2
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Nameplate for each transformer Size 7 engraved in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Indicate transformer designation, capacity, primary and secondary voltages, phase, and name of load the transformer energizes (ie. "T-2, 300 kVA, 500/120/208 V, three phase, feeds Sub-Distribution SD-1"). Mount on front face of transformer. END
SPRINKLER PROOF EQUIPMENT
Section 26 24 05 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
.1
Provide all wall mounted equipment in sprinklered areas with accessories to prevent the entry of water into the enclosures in the event that the sprinkler system is activated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3
Gaskets on on lighting, receptacle and distribution panelboards. Gaskets on doors and drip shields on fire alarm and communication systems panels and enclosures. Louvres facing outward and downward where openings are required for heat dissipation. Expanded metal screening is not acceptable. CSA certified sealing rings for rigid steel galvanized conduit and CSA certified raintight connectors for steel galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install sealing rings and raintight connectors on all conduit terminations entering the top or side of all panel enclosures and for all conduit terminations for pull boxes, junction boxes, splitter troughs, wireways, auxiliary gutters, cable troughs and disconnect switches installed below the level of the sprinkler heads.
END
PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
Sect 26 24 16.01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for standard and custom breaker type panelboards.
.1 .2 .3
Section 06 10 12 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood Backboard. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results Electrical. Section 26 28 16.02 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.29-M1989(R2004), Panelboards and enclosed Panelboards.
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, quantity, ampacity and enclosure dimension.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
Sect 26 24 16.01 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PANELBOARDS
.1
Panelboards: to CSA C22.2 No.29-M1989(R2004) and product of one manufacturer. .1 Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment. .2 In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplate must show fault current that panel including breakers has been built to withstand. 250 or 600 V panelboards: bus and breakers rated for 10000 A (symmetrical) interrupting capacity or as indicated. Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left and even on right, with each breaker identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number and phase. Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of branch circuit breakers as indicated. Two keys for each panelboard and key panelboards alike. Copper bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains. Mains: suitable for bolt-on breakers. Trim with concealed front bolts and hinges. Trim tub and door finish: baked grey enamel.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9
2.2 CUSTOM BUILT PANELBOARD ASSEMBLIES
.1
125 mm relay section on both sides of panels for installation of low voltage remote control switching components. Double stack panels as indicated. Contactors in mains as indicated. Feed through lugs as indicated.
.2 .3 .4
Sect 26 24 16.01 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3
BREAKERS
.1 .2 .3
Breakers: to Section 26 28 16.02. Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panelboards except as indicated otherwise. Main breaker: separately mounted on top or bottom of panel to suit cable entry. When mounted vertically, down position should open breaker. Lock-on devices for receptacles, fire alarm, emergency, door supervisory, intercom, stairway, exit and night light circuits.
.4
.1 .2 .3 .4
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Nameplate for each panelboard size 4 engraved as indicated. Nameplate for each circuit in distribution panelboards size 2 engraved as indicated. Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location and load of each circuit and breaker size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Locate panelboards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surfaces. Install surface mounted panelboards on plywood backboards in accordance with Section 06 10 12. Where practical, group panelboards on common backboard. Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 26 05 00 or as indicated. Connect loads to circuits. Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with respective neutral identified. Co-ordinate the thickness of partition walls in which panelboards are to be located prior to rough-in. Failure to do this work shall require this Contractor to assume any costs for
.2
.3 .4 .5 .6
Sect 26 24 16.01 Page 4 2011-05-25
.6
(Cont'd) modifying walls, revising panels or electrical components. Thoroughly vacuum all panelboards to remove construction debris and dust, prior to installation of panel covers. Multi-section double wide panelboard tubs shall be spaced 40 mm apart and secured together using manufacturer's spacers and mounting hardware. A minimum of two close nipples complete with locknuts shall be installed between the tubs. Install 3 - 25 mm spare conduits up to ceiling space from each flush panel. Terminate these conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm junction boxes located in the accessible ceiling space above.
.7
.8
.9
END
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Section 26 24 19 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-ISO 9000-05(R2010), Quality Management Systems - Fundamentals and Vocabulary. .2 CAN/CSA-ISO 9001-08, Quality Management and Quality Assurance Standards - Guidelines for Selection and Use.
1.2
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. WHMIS acceptable to Labour Canada, and Health and Welfare Canada. Submit product data sheets for sills, busbars and compartments. Include product characteristics, physical size and finish. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.
.3
.4
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate: .1 Outline dimensions .2 Configuration of identified compartments. .3 Floor anchoring method and dimensioned foundation template. .4 Cable entry and exit locations. .5 Dimensioned position and size of busbars and details of provision for future extension. .6 Schematic and wiring diagrams.
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect, package and store existing busbars, wireways, sills, copper ground straps and other associated components for recycling and reuse.
Section 26 24 19 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for motor control centre for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Include data for each type and style of starter.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS
.1
347/600 V, 60 Hz, wye connected, 3 phase, wire, grounded neutral.
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Compartmentalized vertical sections with common power busbars. Floor mounting, free standing, enclosed dead front. Indoor CSA 12 gasketted enclosure, front mounting. Class I Type B.
2.3 VERTICAL SECTION CONSTRUCTION
.1
Independent vertical sections fabricated from rolled flat steel sheets bolted together to form rigid, completely enclosed assembly. Each vertical section divided into compartment units, minimum 305 mm high, as indicated. Each unit to have complete top and bottom steel plate for isolation between units. Horizontal wireways, equipped with cable supports, across top and bottom, extending full width of motor control centre, isolated from busbars by steel barriers. Vertical wireways c/w doors for load and control conductors extending full height of vertical sections, and equipped with cable tie supports. Installation wiring to units accessible with doors open and units in place. Openings, with removable coverplates, in side of vertical sections for horizontal wiring between sections.
.2 .3 .4
.5
.6
Section 26 24 19 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3 VERTICAL SECTION CONSTRUCTION (Cont'd)
.7 .8 .9 .10
Incoming cables to enter as indicated. Provision for outgoing cables to exit via top or bottom with terminals.
Removable lifting means. Provision for future extension of both ends of motor control centre including busbars without need for further drilling, cutting or preparation in field. Divide assembly for shipment to site, as indicated complete with hardware and instructions for re-assembly.
.11
2.4
SILLS
.1
Continuous 25 mm channel iron floor sills for mounting bases with 19 mm diameter holes for bolts.
2.5
BUSBARS
.1
Main horizontal and branch vertical, three phase and neutral high conductivity tin plated copper busbars in separate compartment bare self-cooled, extending entire width and height of motor control centre, supported on insulators and rated: .1 Main horizontal busbars: as indicated. .2 Branch vertical busbars: 300 A. Branch vertical busbars for distribution of power to units in vertical sections. No other cables, wires, equipment in main and branch busbar compartments. Brace buswork to withstand effects of short-circuit current of 42 kA rms symmetrical. Bus supports: with high dielectric strength, low moisture absorption, high impact material and long creepage surface designed to discourage collection of dust.
.2 .3 .4 .5
2.6
GROUND BUS
.1 .2
Copper ground bus extending entire width of motor control centre. Vertical ground bus strap, full height of section, tied to horizontal ground bus, engaged by plug-in unit ground stab.
Section 26 24 19 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.7 MOTOR STARTERS AND DEVICES
.1 .2
Provide starters in accordance with Section 26 29 10. Provide AFT's in accordance with Section 26 29 23.
2.8 STARTER UNIT COMPARTMENTS
.1
Units EEMAC size 5 and smaller, circuit breaker units 225A and smaller, plug-in type with self-disconnect. Guide rail supports for units to ensure that stabs make positive contact with vertical bus. Provision for units to be installed or removed, off load, while buses energized. Unit mounting: .1 Engaged position - unit stabbed into vertical bus. .2 Withdrawn position - unit isolated from vertical bus but supported by structure. Terminal block accessible for electrical testing of starter. .3 Provision for positive latching in either engaged or withdrawn position and padlocking in withdrawn position. .4 Stab-on connectors free floating tin plated clips, self-aligning, backed up with steel springs. External operating handle of circuit switch interlocked with door to prevent door opening with switch in "on" position. Provision for 3 padlocks to lock operating handle in "off" position and lock door closed. Hinge unit doors on same side. Overload relays manually reset from front with door closed. Pushbuttons and indicating lights mounted on door front. Devices and components by one manufacturer to facilitate maintenance. Pull-apart terminal blocks for power and control to allow removal of starter units without removal of field wiring.
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8
Section 26 24 19 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.9 WIRING IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide wiring identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. .1 Motor control centre main nameplate: size No. 7, engraved as indicated. .2 Individual compartment nameplates: size No. 5, engraved as indicated.
2.11
FINISHES
.1 .2
Apply finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Paint motor control centre exterior light gray and interiors white.
.1
Provide manufacturer's type test certificates including short circuit fault damage certification up to short circuit values specified under bus bracing. Departmental Representative to witness standard factory testing of complete motor control centre including operation of switches, circuit breakers, starters and controls. Manufacturer to provide proof of quality control program in accordance with CAN/CSA-ISO 9000CAN/CSA-Q9000.
.2
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Set and secure motor control centre in place on channel bases, rigid, plumb and square to building floor and wall. Make field power and control connections as indicated. Ensure correct overload heater elements are installed.
.2 .3
Section 26 24 19 Page 6 2011-05-25
.1 .2 .3
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Ensure moving and working parts are lubricated where required. Operate starters in sequence to prove satisfactory performance of motor control centre during 8 hour period.
END
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Switches, receptacles, wiring devices, cover plates and their installation.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-C22.2 No.42-10, General Use Receptacles, Attachment Plugs and Similar Devices. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.42.1-00(R2004), Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices (Bi-National standard, with UL 514D). .3 CSA-C22.2 No.55-M1986(R2008), Special Use Switches. .4 CSA-C22.2 No.111-10, General-Use Snap Switches (Bi-national standard, with UL 20).
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SWITCHES
.1
20 A, 120 V, single pole, three-way, four-way switches to: CSA-C22.2 No.55-M1986(R2008) and ANSI/CSA-C22.2 No.111-10. Manually-operated general purpose ac switches with following features: .1 Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire. .2 Silver alloy contacts. .3 Urea or melamine moulding for parts subject to carbon tracking. .4 Suitable for back and side wiring. .5 brown toggle.
.2
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.1 SWITCHES (Cont'd)
.3
Toggle operated fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps, and up to 80% of rated capacity of motor loads.
Switches of one manufacturer throughout project.
.4
2.2
RECEPTACLES
.1
Duplex receptacles, CSA type 5-15 R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground, to: CSA-C22.2 No.42 with following features: .1 Brown urea moulded housing. .2 Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring. .3 Break-off links for use as split receptacles. .4 Eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws. .5 Triple wipe contacts and rivetted grounding contacts. Safety type duples receptacles shall be CSA type 5-15R, 125 V, U-ground with the following features: .1 Duplex receptacle T-slot. .2 Heavy duty, one-piece, chromate plated steel mounting strap secured to body of receptacle at both ends. .3 Heavy-duty brown urea molded housing. .4 Break off links for use as split receptacle. .5 Triple wipe constant power pressure contacts with fingers in contact when receptacle is not in use. Surge suppression receptacles: .1 Duplex receptacle, CSA 5-15R 125 V, 15 A, 'U' ground with following features: .1 Blue urea molded housing for normal power, red for emergency and orange for UPS power. .2 Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring. .3 Damage alter-alarm with muting screw. .4 Power-on indicator. .5 CSA certified to C22.2 No.42. .6 120V-60 Hz. .7 Response time 5NS. .8 Peak energy 210 joules. .9 Peal current 13000 amps. .10 EMI/RFI attenuation at 50 OHMS-500 KHZ-100 MHZ. .11 Metal oxide varistor to absorb and dissipate transient surges.
.2
.3
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 RECEPTACLES (Cont'd)
.4
Single receptacles CSA type 5-15 R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground with following feature: .1 Brown urea moulded housing. .2 Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring. .3 Four back wired entrances, 2 side wiring screws. Other receptacles with ampacity and voltage as indicated. Receptacles of one manufacturer throughout project.
.5 .6
2.3
COVER PLATES
.1 .2 .3
Cover plates for wiring devices to: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.42.1. Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project. Sheet steel utility box cover for wiring devices installed in surface-mounted utility boxes. Stainless steel, vertically brushed, 1 mm thick cover plates for wiring devices mounted in flush-mounted outlet box. Cast cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes. Weatherproof double lift spring-loaded cast aluminum cover plates, complete with gaskets for duplex receptacles as indicated. Maximum security grade wall plates for wiring devices in cells and all inmate areas. Maximum security wall plates shall include a 10 gauge CRS backplate with provision for attachment to outlet box and wall structure, mounting of the device and attachment of the cover. The cover shall be 10 gauge CRS, one piece die-formed, continuous welded with ground smooth edges attached with four security screws. Use tamperproof mounting screws for coverplayes of complete installations in inmate accessible areas.
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Switches: .1 Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed. .2 Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location. .3 Mount toggle switches at height in accordance with Section 26 05 00. .4 Locate light switches on latch side of door. Receptacles: .1 Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one location. .2 Mount receptacles at height in accordance with Section 26 05 00 as indicated. .3 Where split receptacle has one portion switched, mount vertically and switch upper portion. Cover plates: .1 Protect stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic film until painting and other work is finished. .2 Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are grouped. .3 Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes. Device Identification: 1 Identify all receptacles with self adhesive marker describing circuit number (ie. "A-32"). Marker shall be fastened around mounting ears of receptacle. .1 Identify all receptacle coverplates with clear self-adhesive mylar tape with black lettering. .2 Identify receptacle coverplates for designated computer receptacles with additional label (as above) indicating "COMPUTER ONLY".
.2
.3
.4
END
SNOW MELTING CABLE
Section 26 27 30 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
.1
Furnish and install a complete UL Listed, CSA Certified, and FM Approved system of specified heating cable, components, and controls listed specifically for keeping roof eaves, gutters, and downspouts from being clogged by ice and snow.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HEATING CABLE
.1
The self-regulating heating cable shall consist of two (2) 14 AWG nickel-coated copper bus wires embedded in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature along its length, allowing the cable to be crossed over itself without overheating, to be used with wood, plastic, and asphalt building materials and to be cut-to-length in the field. The heating cable shall be covered by a crosslinked dielectric jacket and protected by a tinned-copper braid and a 70-mil-thick modified polyolefin outer jacket. The heating cable shall operate on 208 volts.
.2
2.2
COMPONENTS
.1
All heating cable components shall be UL listed, as De-icing and Snow Melting Equipment, CSA Certified as Designation 1B, 2B, or FM approved for use as part of the system to provide roof and gutter de-icing. Component enclosure shall meet NEMA 4X requirements to prevent water ingress and corrosion.
2.3 ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES
.1
The system will be supplied complete with attachment clips for all roof surfaces and valleys, as well as downspout hangers.
2.4
POWER OUTPUT
.1
For sufficient power for roof and gutter de-icing and energy conservation, the self-regulating heating cable shall have a nominal power output of 4 watts per meter in snow and ice and 1.7 watts per meter in air, per
SNOW MELTING CABLE
Section 26 27 30 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.4 POWER OUTPUT (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) IEEE 515-1997, and a crush resistance of 907 kg. per UL1588-1993.
2.5 MECHANICAL TOUGHNESS
.1
To provide superior abrasion resistance and mechanical impact resistance, the heating cable outer jacket shall be an abrasion-resistant fluoropolymer. The cable shall have ea minimum impact resistance per IEEE 515-1997, and a crush resistance of 907 kg. per UL1588-1993.
2.6
UV STABILITY
.1
Cable and components shall be qualified for prolonged exposure to the sun per IEEE 515.1-1995, Section 4.3.2, and UL1588-1993.
2.7 SUBMERSION IN WATER
.1
The cable and components shall be qualified to withstand continuous submersion in water for 2000 hours per IEEE 515.1-1995, Section 4.3.1.
2.8 AUTOMATIC SNOW CONTROLLER
.1
The system shall be controlled by one gutter-mounted sensor along with an aerial-mounted sensor in combination with an automatic snow controller through an appropriate contactor.
2.9
CONTACTOR
.1
The contactor shall be a three-pole contactor with a rating of 40 amps per pole in a NEMA-4X enclosure.
2.10 GROUND-FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER
.1
The system shall be protected by a 30-mA trip ground-fault circuit breaker.
SNOW MELTING CABLE
Section 26 27 30 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
The heating cable shall be laid in gutters, shall be suspended in downspouts either as a loop or a single length and held in place by a downspout hanger, and shall be attached to the roof using the appropriate roof clip. The heating cable shall be protected from damage and installed according to manufacturer's instructions. Furnish and install a complete UL Listed, CSA Certified, and FM Approved system of specified heating cable, components, and controls listed specifically for keeping roof eaves, gutters, and downspouts from being clogged by ice and snow.
.2
.3
3.2
TESTS
.1
After installation, the dielectric jacket's insulation resistance from the conductors to the shield shall be greater than 1000 megohms. The heating cable shall be tested for insulation resistance with a 2500-VDC Megger after installation, and annually thereafter according to the manufacturer's recommendations and following the instructions provided in the Installation and Operation Manual.
.2
END
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Sect 26 28 16.02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials for moulded-case circuit breakers, and ground-fault circuit-interrupters.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA-C22.2 No. 5-09, Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (Tri-national standard with ANSI/UL 489, and NMX-J-266-ANCE).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers with ampacity of 600 A and over or with interrupting capacity of 22,000 A symmetrical (rms) and over at system voltage.
.1 .2
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal and Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.3
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Sect 26 28 16.02 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BREAKERS GENERAL
.1 .2
Moulded-case circuit breakers, and Ground-fault circuit-interrupters: to CSA C22.2 No. 5-09. Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quickmake, quick-break type, for manual and automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40 degrees C ambient. Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications. Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of current reaches setting. .1 Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3-8 times current rating. Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated. Circuit breakers to have minimum 10,000 A symmetrical rms interrupting capacity rating.
.3 .4
.5 .6
2.2 THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS DESIGN A
.1
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install circuit breakers as indicated.
END
GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS - CLASS "A"
Section 26 28 20 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Equipment and installation for ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI).
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.144-M91(R2061), Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit product data and shop drawings. Submit test report for field testing of ground fault equipment to Departmental Representative and a certificate that system as installed meets criteria specified herein.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS - CLASS "A"
Section 26 28 20 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Equipment and components for ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI): to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.144-M91(R2006). Components comprising ground fault protective system to be of same manufacturer.
.2
2.2 BREAKER TYPE GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER
.1
Single pole ground fault circuit interrupter for 15 A, 120 V, 1 phase circuit c/w test and reset facilities.
2.3 GROUND FAULT PROTECTOR UNIT
.1
Self-contained with 15 A, 120 V circuit interrupter and duplex receptacle complete with: .1 Solid state ground sensing device. .2 Facility for testing and reset. .3 CSA Enclosure 1, flush mounted with stainless steel face plate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Do not ground neutral on load side of ground fault relay. Pass phase conductors including neutral through zero sequence transformers. Connect supply and load wiring to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Arrange for field testing of ground fault equipment by Contractor before commissioning service. Demonstrate simulated ground fault tests.
.3
END
DISCONNECT SWITCHES FUSED AND NON-FUSED
Section 26 28 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PRODUCT DATA
.1
.1
2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
.1
Non-fusible, horsepower rated disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure 3R for exterior or 12 for interior, size as indicated. Provision for padlocking in on-off switch position by three locks. Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position. Quick-make, quick-break action. ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.2 .3 .4 .5
.1 .2
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Indicate name of load controlled on size 4 nameplate.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES FUSED AND NON-FUSED
Section 26 28 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install disconnect switches complete with fuses if applicable. Mount securely at 1800 mm above finished floor to top of switch. Provide a minimum of 1000 mm clear floor space in front of the switch.
.1 .2
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section Identification 26 05 00. Nameplate for each disconnect switch Size 5 engraved in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Indicate disconnect load, amperage, voltage, and phase (e.g., rooftop unit, 60 amp, 120/208 V, 3 phase). Identify circuit number and power supply equipment on disconnect switch (e.g. "B-36").
.3
END
CONTACTORS
Section 26 29 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for contactors for system voltages up to 600 V.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.14-10, Industrial Control Equipment.
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1
.1
2.1
CONTACTORS
.1 .2
Contactors: to CSA C22.2 No.14-10. Electrically held controlled by pilot devices as indicated and rated for type of load controlled. Half size contactors not accepted. Breaker combination contactor as indicated. Complete with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts unless indicated otherwise. Mount in CSA Enclosure 12 unless otherwise indicated. Include following options in cover: .1 Red indicating lamp. .2 Hand-Off-Auto selector switch. Control transformer: in accordance with Section 26 29 03, in contactor enclosure.
.3 .4
.5 .6
.7
CONTACTORS
Section 26 29 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Size 4 nameplate indicating name of load controlled voltage and circuit identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install contactors and connect auxiliary control devices.
END
CONTROL DEVICES
Section 26 29 03 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for industrial control devices including pushbutton stations, control and relay panels.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.14-10, Industrial Control Equipment. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) .1 NEMA ICS 1-2002(R2008), Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements.
.2
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include schematic, wiring, interconnection diagrams.
.1
Submit to Departmental Representative one copy of test results.
.1
2.1 AC CONTROL RELAYS
.1 .2
Control Relays: to CSA C22.2 No.14-10 and NEMA ICS 1-200(R2008). Convertible contact type: contacts field convertible from NO to NC, electrically held. Coil rating: 120 V, 50 VA. Contact rating: 120 V, 15 A. Sealed contact type: electrically held with 3 poles and front mounted contact block to provide
.3
CONTROL DEVICES
Section 26 29 03 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.1 AC CONTROL RELAYS (Cont'd)
.3
Sealed contact type:(Cont'd) 3 additional poles. Coil rating: 120 V, 50 VA. Contact rating: 120 V, 15 A. Universal pole type: electrically held with 3 poles, convertible from NO to NC by changing wiring connections. Coil rating: 120 V, 50 VA. Contact rating: 120 V, 15 A. Fixed contact plug-in type: heavy duty with 3 poles. Coil rating: 120 V, 50 VA. Contact rating: 120 V, 15 A.
.4
.5
2.2 RELAY ACCESSORIES
.1
Standard contact cartridges: normally-open convertible to normally-closed in field.
2.3 INSTANTANEOUS TRIP CURRENT RELAYS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Enclosure: open type. Contacts: NO, NC automatic reset with adjustable tripping point. Control: 3 wire, with provision for shorting contacts during accelerating period of motor. Contact rating: NEMA ICS 1.
2.4 OPERATOR CONTROL STATIONS
.1
Enclosure: CSA Type 12, surface or flush mounting.
2.5
PUSHBUTTONS
.1
Heavy duty Oil tight. Operator flush or extend mushroom type, as indicated. Black with 1-NO and 1-NC contacts rated at 15 A, AC, labels as indicated. Stop pushbuttons coloured red, provision for padlocking in depressed position labelled "emergency stop".
2.6 SELECTOR SWITCHES
.1
Maintained, 3 position labelled as indicated heavy duty oil tight, operators wing lever, contact arrangement as indicated, rated 120 V, 15 A, AC DC.
CONTROL DEVICES
Section 26 29 03 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.7 INDICATING LIGHTS
.1
Heavy duty Oil tight, full voltage, lens colour: red as indicated, supply voltage: 120 V, lamp voltage: 120 V, labels as indicated.
2.8 CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS
.1
CSA Type 12 sheet steel enclosure with hinged padlockable access door, accommodating relays timers, labels, as indicated, factory installed and wired to identified terminals.
2.9 CONTROL CIRCUIT TRANSFORMERS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Single phase, dry type. Primary: 208 or 600 V, 60 Hz AC. Secondary: 120 V, AC. Rating: 50 VA. Secondary fuse: 1 A. Close voltage regulation as required by magnet coils and solenoid valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install pushbutton stations, control and relay panels, control devices and interconnect.
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Depending upon magnitude and complexity, divide control system into convenient sections, energize one section at time and check out operation of section. Upon completion of sectional test, undertake group testing. Check out complete system for operational sequencing.
.3 .4
END
MOTOR STARTERS TO 600 V
Section 26 29 10 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) .1 IEC 60947-4-1-2002, Part 4: Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters.
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Provide shop drawings for each type of starter to indicate: .1 Mounting method and dimensions. .2 Starter size and type. .3 Layout and components. .4 Enclosure types. .5 Wiring diagram. .6 Interconnection diagrams.
.3
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Submit operation and maintenance data for each type and style of motorstarter for incorporation into maintenance manual. Extra Materials: .1 Provide listed spare parts for each different size and type of starter. .1 3 contacts, stationary. .2 3 contacts, movable. .3 1 contacts, auxiliary. .4 1 control transformer. .5 1 operating coil. .6 2 fuses. .7 10% indicating lamp bulbs used.
.3
Section 26 29 10 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Starters: to IEC 60947-4-1 with AC4 utilization category.
2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
.1
Single or Three phase manual motor starters of size, type, rating, and enclosure type 12 or flush mount, with components as follows: .1 Switching mechanism, quick make and break. .2 One, Two or Three overload heaters, manual reset, trip indicating handle. Accessories: .1 Toggle: heavy duty labelled as indicated. .2 Indicating light: heavy duty type and colour as indicated. .3 Locking tab to permit padlocking in "ON" or "OFF" position.
.2
2.3 FULL VOLTAGE MAGNETIC STARTERS
.1
Magnetic and combination magnetic starters of size, type, rating and enclosure type as indicated with components as follows: .1 Contactor solenoid operated, rapid action type. .2 Motor overload protective device in each phase, manually reset from outside enclosure. .3 Wiring and schematic diagram inside starter enclosure in visible location. .4 Identify each wire and terminal for external connections, within starter, with permanent number marking identical to diagram. .5 Power and control terminals. Combination type starters to include motor circuit interrupter with operating lever on
.2
Section 26 29 10 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.3 FULL VOLTAGE MAGNETIC STARTERS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) outside of enclosure to control motor circuit interrupter, and provision for: .1 Locking in "OFF" position with up to 3 padlocks. .2 Independent locking of enclosure door. .3 Provision for preventing switching to "ON" position while enclosure door open. Accessories: .1 Pushbuttons or Selector switches: heavy duty oil tight labelled as indicated. .2 Indicating lights: heavy duty oil tight type and color as indicated. .3 1-N/O and 1-N/C spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwise indicated.
.3
2.4 CONTROL TRANSFORMER
.1
Single phase, dry type, control transformer with primary voltage as indicated and 120 V secondary, complete with secondary fuse, installed in with starter as indicated. Size control transformer for control circuit load plus 20% spare capacity.
.2
2.5
ACCESSORIES
.1 .2 .3
Pushbutton: heavy duty, oil tight as required. Selector switches: heavy duty, oil tight as required. Indicating lights: heavy duty, oil tight, type and colour as indicated.
2.6
FINISHES
.1
Apply finishes to enclosure in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.1 .2
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Manual starter designation label, black plate white letters for normal, red plate white letters for emergency, size 1, engraved as indicated. Magnetic starter designation label, black plate white letters for normal, red plate white
.3
Section 26 29 10 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.3
(Cont'd) letters for emergency, size 2 engraved as indicated.
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Install starters and control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install and wire starters and controls as indicated. Ensure correct fuses installed. Confirm motor nameplate and adjust overload device to suit. The electrical contractor shall complete all control wiring required which is not specifically related to the controls systems as outlined in the mechanical specifications. All control wiring outlined in the mechanical specifications as part of the controls systems shall be completed by the controls contractor. The electrical contractor shall supply all control equipment specifically noted on plans or specifications. All other equipment required shall be supplied by mechanical or other trades. The electrical contractor shall cooperate with the mechanical trades to ensure that all control sequences and equipment are correct. The electrical contractor shall be supplied with all electrical equipment from other trades and shall verify that its characteristics are correct. It will be the responsibility of the electrical contractor to obtain from the mechanical contractor, and all other trades, complete detailed wiring diagrams for all equipment supplied by these trades requiring electrical wiring by the electrical contractor's work and the work of other trades. It is the electrical contractor's responsibility to point out immediately any discrepancies in these diagrams or any reason they cannot be adhered to. All control equipment such as immersion type thermostats, coil freeze protection, pneumatic control devices, etc. shall be installed by the trade responsible for its supply and operation. It is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to provide a dedicated line voltage power source where required for control systems.
.6
Section 26 29 10 Page 5 2011-05-25
.7
It is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to provide all control devices such as pushbutton stations, when they do not form part of a control panel.
END
ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Section 26 29 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1
General
.1 .2
Shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Manufacturer shall provide a complete set of shop drawings for this specific project. Drawings shall include, but not limited to, dimensioned outline drawing, schematic diagram, power and control connection diagram, full list of features, installation instructions, and operating instructions produced specifically for this project. Drawings shall be approved by the Departmental Representative before fabrication and supply of equipment.
1.2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
Provide data for incorporation into Electrical Maintenance Manual specified in Section 26 05 00. Submit a detailed operating, maintenance and testing procedure document prepared specifically for this project. The Owner's operating personnel shall be instructed in the operation of the systems for a minimum of one (1) hour. Written documentation bearing name and signature of Owner's personnel who received the above instructions shall be included in the operating instructions and service manuals. All AFD parameter settings shall be documented in the operating and maintenance manual.
.2
.3
.4
1.3 SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS
.1
The supplier shall be fully qualified in the performance of work specified herein. Service personnel shall be located within the Province of Ontario and shall be experienced in the installation and operation of the system.
1.4
VERIFICATION
.1
The AFD manufacturer shall supply on site start-up, commissioning and operator training. Allow for all cost and labour for as many trips as necessary to complete these requirements. Labour, expenses and all parts shall be at the
Section 26 29 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) AFD suppliers cost until the warranty period expires. Warranty shall be for 24 months. Upon completion of installation of the system, a factory trained manufacturer's representative shall perform a completion verification and inspection of all installed equipment. A certificate of verification confirming that the commissioning and inspection have been performed, shall be submitted. The factory trained manufacturer's representative shall witness all connections between building automated controls system (BACS) and the AFD and shall assist the controls contractor with all input and output connections between the AFD and the BACS.
.2
.3
1.5
STANDARDS
.1
The AFD shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of IEC, UL, CUL, CSA and NEMA.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS
.1
The adjustable frequency drive operation shall be based on Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) design utilizing insulated gate bi-polar transitors (IGBT's). Each unit shall be built to CSA Z299.3-85(R2006) level of quality control or equivalent. The AFD shall be complete with a digital control system. All AFD's shall use the same common logic for all units as specified for this project. The AFD shall be rated for continuous duty while operating standard squirrel cage induction motors as listed in the motor schedule. The AFD shall have a continuous current rating at least 10% in excess of the motor full load amp rating. An overload service factor of 110% for one minute duty (variable torque) must be supplied to ensure adequate safety margins for all applications. For maintenance and testing purposes, the AFD shall have a test mode whereas the AFD shall be capable of stable operation over entire speed
.2 .3
.4
Section 26 29 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.1 PRODUCTS (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) range (starting, stopping, running) with the motor disconnected. The AFD efficiency shall be a minimum of 95% for all inverters when operated at full speed and load. Input voltage shall be rated for the system voltage and have a minimum voltage tolerance of + 10% from nominal, and a line frequency variation of 48 to 62 Hz. The output voltage shall vary linearly with the speed to maintain the motors design voltage to frequency ratio from zero speed to 60 hertz. Frequency stability shall be maintained within 1% over the entire speed range. AFD shall be enclosed in the motor control centres unless otherwise noted. The AFD shall maintain the line side displacement power factor at no less than 0.96 regardless of speed or load. The AFD shall be capable of starting a spinning motor. The AFD shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. Protective devices to be incorporated are: .1 Main incoming door interlocked circuit breaker or disconnect switch. .2 The AFD shall be protected by three Class J high interrupting capacity fuses to supply fault protection of the drive for faults up to 100,000 amps RMS symmetrical. .3 A fully rated external AC line reactor to minimize line current harmonics and provide transient protection for a minimum of 5000 volts, 50 microseconds pulse. .4 Integral electronic motor overload protection adjustable from 50 to 110% of the drive rating to coordinate with actual motor full load ampere rating. Current in excess of this setting will cause a timed overload trip to occur. .5 Instantaneous output short circuit protection for phase to phase and phase to ground faults. .6 Over voltage DC Bus monitor/protection. .7 Supply under voltage protection as required to maintain logic and control during power dips and power loss conditions, such as transfer switch operations.
.5
.6
.7 .8
.9
.10
Section 26 29 23 Page 4 2011-05-25
.10
(Cont'd) .8 Loss of supply voltage and loss of phase protection. .9 AFD heat sink over temperature detection circuit to shut down the AFD and provide an O/T fault indication. .10 Capable of operating without a motor over the entire frequency range for maintenance and testing purposes. .11 Accepts the motor output circuit being opened, while the motor is operating without damaging inverter. .12 The following motor protection shall be provided for the motor. The following protection shall be related to the specific motor and not the AFD. .1 Separate I2t overload protection (AFD overload protection not acceptable for motor overload). .2 Stall protection. .3 Phase to ground fault protection. .4 Instantaneous overcurrent protection. .5 Phase to phase fault protection. .6 Adjustable torque limit setpoints. .13 The AFD shall have an active current limit to prevent the motor from operating in an overload condition. When the current limit setting is reached, the output frequency is reduced such that the load reduces to less than the current limit setpoint. When the actual load decreases, the speed will ramp back to process setpoint. .14 Provide an output isolation contactor to provide for a positive isolation between the motor and the inverter. The contactor shall remain energized for power interruptions of up to 0.5 seconds. Operational Features: .1 Regenerative override circuit to allow deceleration of high inertia loads without nuisance shutdowns. .2 Instantaneous fault shutdown. .3 Automatic restart after power outage, if the run command is maintained closed. .4 Automatic attempt to restart after any fault. If unable to restart, the drive shall lockout the inverter after 3 unsuccessful attempts within a 90 second time period. The Fault counter will reset to zero automatically after 3 minutes of continuous operation. .5 Adjustable minimum speed setting from 0-70% and a maximum speed setpoint from 50-100% of the 60 hertz rating.
.11
Section 26 29 23 Page 5 2011-05-25
.11
Operational Features:(Cont'd) .6 Separately adjustable accelerating and deceleration ramp rates programmable between 1 and 300 seconds. A fast acceleration to minimum speed shall be used on all starts. .7 Input speed reference signal shall be 4-20 mA DC for remote auto mode operation and local potentiometer or keypad entry for manual mode of operation. The 4-20 mA input shall be isolated such that either input line can be grounded or both floating. .8 Output speed monitoring shall be by a 4-20 mA isolated signal. .9 Output load monitoring shall be by a 4-20 mA isolated signal. .10 Provide digital or analog displays for the following functions on each AFD front panel: .1 Speed reference input. .2 Speed output (%). .3 Motor frequency (hertz). .4 Current (%). .5 Motor voltage (%). .11 High performance inner current loop regulator. .12 Optimized tuning of air gap flux. .13 Programmable V/Hz profiles. .14 The AFD shall have a "SELF TUNE MODE" which will automatically do the calibration of motor parameters to match AFD regulator settings. .15 AFD shall indicate date and time display of all trips (or the time elapsed since failure displayed). .16 AFD shall have elapsed time meter (non-re-settable) or indicate hours and minutes of operation (inverter running). .17 The AFD shall have a rotating restart circuit that will allow for a safe start into a motor that is rotating in the forward or reverse direction and accelerate it to the desired speed in the proper direction. .18 Audible noise generated by AFD shall not exceed 85 dBA at 1 metre intervals around AFD. Environmental Capabilities: .1 The drive shall operate without mechanical or electrical damage under any combination of the following conditions: .1 Ambient temperature 0-40C. .2 Humidity 0-95% (non condensing). .3 Vibration up to 0.5 G. .4 Altitude 0-1000 metres. AFD self cooled by natural convection shall automatically shutdown if heat sink temperature
.12
.13
Section 26 29 23 Page 6 2011-05-25
.13
(Cont'd) exceeds setpoint. If forced air cooling is used the AFD shall provide immediate shutdown on cooling air loss and provide annunciation of this shutdown. The AFDs shall limit harmonic distortion reflected onto the utility system by utilizing standard 3% nominal impedance integral ac three-phase line reactors. Customer terminal blocks for control wires shall be separated from power wire connections and shall be able to accept connections for 12 AWG wires. Printed circuit board terminal blocks are not acceptable. The AFD shall be manufactured and tested to quality control CSA Z299.3-85(R2006) standards or better. Each unit shall be full load tested in heat chamber at 40C for a minimum of four hours of continuous operation without any trips or faults. Bypass: .1 Provide a bypass control scheme to safely apply full voltage to the driven motor in the event of a failure to the Adjustable Frequency Drive. The bypass scheme shall meet the following requirements: .1 Provide a sectional CSA Approved enclosed cabinet or use the AFD cabinet with proper shrouding of all live parts, to provide isolation for maintenance of the AFD when in bypass mode. .2 Provide a separate circuit disconnect in parallel to the AFD circuit disconnect to feed the 3 phase power to the bypass section only. .3 Provide high interrupting capacity fuses on the load side of the circuit disconnect for fault clearing capability of 100,000 Amperes RMS Symmetrical. .4 Provide a door mounted Line-Off-AFD selections switch to select operations at constant speed or at adjustable speed. .5 Provide two mechanically and electrically interlocked contactors for line and AFD operations. .6 Provide a thermal overload relay which will protect the motor in either mode of operation. .7 Provide a separate start/stop pushbutton to start the bypass mode manually. In auto mode, the same run
.14
.15
.16
.17
Section 26 29 23 Page 7 2011-05-25
.17
Bypass:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) command from the DDC will start and stop the motor in either mode. .8 Provide all the necessary control logic, time delay relays and interlocks to provide a safe reliable bypass control scheme. The control scheme shall provide a safe transfer to either mode of operation for all possible operating conditions. .9 Control logic shall maintain all external interlocks active in either mode of operation.
.18
The AFD shall be complete with a communication card for interface with the building management system. The AFD shall be complete with an input EMI filter to minimize conducted electrical noise to meet the requirements of IEC 61800-3. Control Functions: .1 Frequently accessed AFD programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digital operator keypad located on the front of the AFD. When the AFD is located in a motor control centre, the digital operator keypad shall be located on the face of the motor control centre. The AFDs shall have a 3 line x 16 character alphanumeric programmable display with status indicators. Display shall be adjustable for contrast with large characters easily visible in normal light. .2 Standard advanced programming and trouble-shooting functions shall be available by using a personal computer's RS-232 port and Windows TM based software. In addition, the software shall permit control and monitoring via the AFD's RS232 port. The manufacturer shall supply a compact disk with the required software. An easily understood instruction manual and software help screens shall also be provided. The computer software shall be used for modifying the drive set-up and reviewing diagnostic and trend information. .3 The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the following: .1 Monitor .2 Operate .3 Parameter set-up .4 Actual parameter values .5 Active faults
.19
.20
Section 26 29 23 Page 8 2011-05-25
.20
Control Functions:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) .6 Fault history .7 LCD contrast adjustment .8 Information to indicate the standard software and optional features software loaded. .4 The following set-ups and adjustments, at a minimum, are to be available: .1 Start command from keypad, remote or communications port .2 Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port .3 Motor direction selection .4 Maximum and minimum speed limits .5 Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges .6 Critical frequency avoidance .7 Torque limit .8 Multiple attempt restart function .9 Multiple pre-set speeds adjustment .10 Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection .11 Programmable analog output .12 DC brake current magnitude and time .13 Proportional / integral process control. .5 The AFDs shall have the following system interfaces: .1 Inputs - a minimum of six (6) programmable digital inputs, two (2) analog inputs and serial communications interface shall be provided with the following available as a minimum: .1 Remote manual / auto .2 Remote start / stop .3 Remote forward / reverse .4 Remote pre-set speeds .5 Remote external trip .6 Remote fault reset .7 Process control speed reference interface, 4-20 mA DC .8 Potentiometer and 0-10 VDC speed reference interface .9 RS232 (or DPI Scanport) programming and operation interface port .10 Serial communications port or DPI Scanport (c/w communications module). .2 Outputs - a minimum of two (2) discrete programmable digital outputs, and one (1) programmable analog output shall be
Section 26 29 23 Page 9 2011-05-25
.20
Control Functions:(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) provided, with the following available at minimum: .1 Programmable relay outputs with one (1) set of Form C contacts for each, selectable with the following available at minimum: .1 Fault .2 Run .3 Ready .4 Reversing .5 At speed .6 In torque limit .7 Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded .8 Overtemperature. .2 Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at minimum: .1 Output current .2 Motor speed .3 Motor torque .4 Motor power .5 Motor voltage .6 DC link voltage. Monitoring and Displays .1 The AFD's display shall be a LCD type capable of displaying the following indicators: .1 Run .2 Forward .3 Reverse .4 Stop .5 Ready .6 Alarm .7 Fault. .2 The AFDs LCD display shall be capable of indicating the following monitoring functions at a minimum: .1 Output frequency .2 Output speed .3 Motor current .4 Motor torque .5 Motor power .6 Motor voltage .7 DC-link voltage .8 Heatsink temperature .9 Total operating days counter .10 Total megawatt hours .11 Voltage level of analog input .12 Current level of analog input .13 Digital inputs status .14 Digital relay outputs status
.6
Section 26 29 23 Page 10 2011-05-25
.20
Control Functions:(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) .15 Motor temperature rise, percentage of allowable. Diagnostic Features .1 Fault History .1 Recorded and log faults .2 Indicate the most recent first, and store up to 4 faults
.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install AFD according to manufacturers recommendations.
END
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS STATIC
Section 26 33 53 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Both single and three phase Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS).
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI/ASA S1.13-2005(R2010), Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels in Air. .2 ANSI/ASA S1.4-1983(R2001), Specification for Sound Level Meters. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-C813.1-01(R2006), Performance Test Method for Uninterruptible Power Supplies. CSC Specifications: .1 ES/SPEC-0103RZE - Uninterruptible Power Supply For Use in Federal Correctional Institutions.
.2
.3
.1
System to consist of: .1 Rectifier cubicle; .2 Invertor cubicle; .3 Battery cubicle; .4 Bypass switch cubicle; .5 Controls and meters; System to use normal power supply mains and battery to provide continuous, regulated ac power to isolated load. Equipment to operate continuously and unattended. Ensure that Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) is compatible with equipment that it feeds.
.2
.3 .4
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.1
Normal operation: .1 System operates on mains power when mains voltage is within +/-10% of nominal value and mains frequency is between 59.5 and 60.5 Hz. Battery operation: .1 System transfers automatically to battery operation. .1 When manually selected at control panel;
.2
Section 26 33 53 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (Cont'd)
.2
Battery operation:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .2 When mains power fails; .3 When mains voltage varies more than 10% from nominal or mains frequency varies more than 0.5 Hz from 60 Hz; .4 When mains power is restored and mains voltage is within 10% of nominal and mains frequency is within 0.3 Hz of 60 Hz, system automatically resynchronizes with mains; .5 Slew rate of frequency during transition period of system output automatically synchronizing with mains and return to its internal frequency to be set between 0.5 to 1.0 Hz per second. Bypass operation: .1 For maintenance purposes, system can be bypassed automatically by manual selection at control panel to connect load directly to ac mains. Transfer without load interruption and leaving inverter energized. .2 Load transfer from mains back to system automatically by manual selection at control panel when maintenance completed. .3 Automatic transfer of load to mains in not more than 1/4 cycle including sensing with inverter left energized but disconnected from load in case of: .1 Inverter overloaded; .2 Short circuit in load; .4 Automatic retransfer of load to system without load interruption when above conditions disappear. .5 Automatic transfer of load to mains in not more than 1/4 cycle including sensing and shutdown of inverter in case of inverter internal malfunctions. .6 Automatic transfer of load to mains without load interruption and inverter shutdown in case of: .1 Over temperature harmful to system. .2 Loss of forced ventilation. .3 Low voltage of dc supply to inverter. .7 Bypass capable of closing onto and withstanding momentary fault current of 800% of rating for 0.01 s.
.3
Section 26 33 53 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.5 SYSTEM PROTECTION
.1
Circuit breakers in system used to isolate it from load and from mains for safe working on equipment, and for manual blocking of bypass automatic control to prevent inadvertent operation of bypass during Work on inverter. Automatic circuit breakers and protection included in: .1 Ac input to rectifier; .2 Battery input; .3 Bypass circuit input; .4 Inverter output. Surge suppressors: .1 To protect system against supply voltage switching transients; .2 To protect internal circuits where necessary against voltage transients. Current limiting devices, with panel front indication of device operation, to protect inverter SCR's. Suitable devices, with panel front indication of device operation, to protect rectifier diodes. Failure of circuit or component not to cause equipment to operate in dangerous or uncontrolled mode.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.6
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include: .1 Outline sketch showing arrangement of cubicles, meters, controls, recommended aisle spaces, battery rack, battery arrangement and dimensions. .2 Shipping weight .3 Schematic diagram showing interconnection of rectifier, inverter, battery, bypass switch, meters, controls and indicating lamps. .4 Description of system operation, referenced to schematic diagram, for: .1 Manual control during initial start-up and load transfer to bypass and back to inverter output; .2 Inverter; .3 Bypass; .5 System performance and reliability: .1 Consider any deviation from the required output power waveform as failure
Section 26 33 53 Page 4 2011-05-25
.2
Include:(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) in UPS and include estimate, with supporting calculations, of the Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) expressed in hours. .2 Provide estimate with supporting data for Mean Time to Repair factor (MTTR). .6 Full load kVA output at unity power factor. .7 Efficiency of system at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% rated load. .8 Type of ventilation: natural or forced. .9 Battery: .1 Number of cells; .2 Maximum and minimum voltages; .3 Type of battery; .4 Type of plates; .5 Catalogue data with cell trade name and type; .6 Size and weight of each cell; .7 Cell charge and discharge curves of voltage, current, time and capacity; .8 Derating factor for specified temperature range; .9 Nominal ampere hour capacity of each cell; .10 Maximum short circuit current; .11 Maximum charging current expected for fully discharged condition; .12 Recommended low voltage limit for fully discharged condition; .13 Expected life. .10 Inverter: .1 Type and catalogue number; .2 Dc current at minimum battery voltage to produce full load ac output. .11 Rectifier: .1 Type and capacity, with catalogue number; .2 Battery charging sequence; .3 Current-time data for Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) protective devices; .4 Guaranteed noise level; .5 Estimated life; .6 Metering; .7 Alarms. .12 Manufacturer's field experience with UPS of similar ratings including engineering expertise, manufacturing facilities and listing of UPS units manufactured and installed during last 5 years including model, customer, location and installation dates. .13 Evaluation of Canadian content.
Section 26 33 53 Page 5 2011-05-25
.2
Include:(Cont'd) .14 Heat losses at no load, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of rated output, in kW. 3 .15 Cooling air required in m /s. .16 List of recommended spare parts, tools and instruments with catalogue numbers and current prices. .17 Typical operation and maintenance manual. .18 Description of factory test facilities. .19 Manufacturer's maintenance capabilities including: .1 Willingness to undertake maintenance contract; .2 Number of trained personnel available; .3 Location of trained personnel and repair facilities.
.1
Submit for approval to Departmental Representative, indicating and recording instruments calibration certificates, including meters installed as part of system, in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
Provide data for incorporation into operation and maintenance manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Submit interim, draft final, and final Operation and Maintenance (OM) Manual. Final manual approved by Engineer. Submit interim copies to Engineer prior to notification of factory test date. Operation and Maintenance Manual to include: .1 Operation and maintenance instructions concerning design elements, construction features, component functions and maintenance requirements to permit effective operations maintenance and repair. .2 Technical data: .1 Approved shop drawings; .2 Characteristic curves for automatic circuit breakers and protective devices; .3 Project data; .4 Technical description of components; .5 Parts lists with names and addresses of suppliers.
.2
.3
Section 26 33 53 Page 6 2011-05-25
.1
Crating: .1 Adequately enclosed and protected from weather and shipping damage by use of minimum 12 mm plywood with vapour barrier inside. .2 For tractor train or sea shipment use double layer of vapour barrier and 19 mm plywood covering. .3 Subassemblies may be packed separately. .4 Label crates: .1 Shipping address. .2 Weight and dimensions .3 Serial number of unit and brief description of contents. .4 Stencilled with durable paint on at least two sides of each crate. .5 List of contents: .1 In weatherproof envelope stapled on outside of each crate; .2 Copy placed inside each crate.
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused batteries from landfill to local battery recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.3
.4
1.11
WARRANTY
.1
For Work of this Section 26 33 53 Uninterruptible Power Systems Static, 12 month warranty period prescribed in subsection GC3.13 of General Conditions is extended to 20 years.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
.1
Arrange with Departmental Representative: .1 For factory service engineer to supervise start-up of system, checking, adjusting and testing on site; .2 For instruction of personnel on theory, construction, installation, operation and maintenance of system: .1 After installation and during site testing; .2 At factory during shop testing.
Section 26 33 53 Page 7 2011-05-25
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP (Cont'd)
.2
Advise on: Expected failure rate of equipment; .1 .2 Type of expected failures; .3 Estimated time between major overhauls based on 20 year equipment life; .4 Estimated cost of major overhaul based on current costs and excluding travelling expenses; .5 Type and cost of test equipment needed for fault isolating and performing preventive maintenance.
1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 Four sets of each type and size of fuses used; .2 Four sets indicating lamps; .3 Spare parts provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
.1
Input power: .1 Three phase, 208 V, 4 wire, grounded neutral, 60 Hz. .2 Normal supply from ac mains. .3 Emergency supply from standby automatic diesel-electric unit. Output power: .1 Three phase, 208 V, 4 wire, grounded neutral, 60 Hz. .2 Full load output at 0.8 power factor lagging 30 kVA, (24 kW). .3 Overload capability: 125% of rated full load current at 0.8 power factor and rated voltage for 10 min. .4 Frequency - nominal 60 Hz: .1 Adjustable from 58.5 to 61.5 Hz. .2 Maximum variation from set value under load changes, including transients, not to exceed 0.3 Hz. .3 Drift from set value - after two months normal operation within ambient temperature range of 0 degrees to 40C, not to exceed 0.6 Hz. .5 Duration of full load output after mains failure not less than 15 min.
.2
Section 26 33 53 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.1 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM (Cont'd)
.2
Output power:(Cont'd) Output voltage control: .6 Continuously adjustable on load at .1 least 5% from rated value. .2 Voltage regulation: voltage not to change by more than 2% as load increases gradually from zero to 100%, or for specified duration of full load after mains failure. .3 Transient voltage change not to exceed +/-10% of rated voltage upon 50% sudden load change, loss or return of ac input voltage to system when fully loaded or transfer of full load from inverter to bypass and vice versa, and return to normal within 3 Hz. .4 Harmonics over entire load range: .1 Total rms value not to exceed 5% rms value of total output voltage. .2 Single harmonic not to exceed 3% of total output voltage. .5 Proper angular phase relation maintained within 4 electrical degrees at up to 20% load unbalance. .7 Efficiency: Overall system efficiency at rated load with battery fully charged not less than 75%. .8 Interference suppression: .1 If UPS equipment generates electromagnetic rf interference at levels which adversely affects other equipment in vicinity, install suppression circuits or shielding as required to eliminate such interference. .2 If harmonics reflected back to mains from rectifier adversely affect other loads connected to same bus, install suppression circuits to prevent that condition.
2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
.1 .2
In accordance with Section 26 05 00. Bring out test points to protected coded pin jacks at convenient locations to permit testing without hazard, including: .1 Inverter output ahead of output switch, 3 phase and neutral. .2 Mains power 3 phase and neutral. .3 Voltage across each SCR. .4 Points requiring monitoring for on-site alignment, for determination of faulty sub-assemblies or printed circuit cards, including indication of oscillator pulse and operation of voltage control.
Section 26 33 53 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.3 .4
No battery, other than main battery incorporated in design.

Wires number tagged or colour coded with same designation on drawings. Tags: non deteriorating type. Variable resistors: fine adjustment, rheostat type. Phasing marked on input and output terminals, viewed from front of equipment: .1 Left to right; .2 Top to bottom; .3 Front to back. Indicator lamps: long life incandescent or neon, rated for continuous duty, with sockets having adequate heat dissipation of lamps and dropping resistor if used. Solid state circuits used where more reliable than mechanical timers or control relays. Standard components available from commercial sources used throughout, with 10 years minimum shelf life. Arrangement to permit easy removal of defective components to facilitate servicing, by replacing with stock spares. Small components, related to specific function, removable plug-in modular sub-assembly or printed circuit card. Heavy sub-assemblies easily accessible, or slide on runners of anti-friction material, and have flexible leads and bolted connections. Components and sub-assemblies accurately made for interchangeability.
.5 .6
.7
.8 .9
.10
.11
.12
.13
2.3
ENCLOSURE
.1 .2 .3
Dead front free standing sheet steel minimum 2.5 mm thick, CSA Enclosure 3. Access preferably from front only, or from front and rear. Meters, indicating lamps and controls group mounted in panel front.
Section 26 33 53 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.3 ENCLOSURE (Cont'd)
.4
Panel front enclosed by hinged doors to prevent tampering and to protect instruments and controls during shipping. Doors formed wrap-around type, rigid, to open and close smoothly, locking type handle with 2 keys. Hinges to permit doors to be lifted off cubicle.
Cubicle height not to exceed 1.8 m. External cable connections at top of cubicle through bolted plate for drilling at site to suit. Ambient temperature range during operation -20C to +40C. Natural or forced ventilation as required. For forced ventilation power from inverter output and fan directly driven by single phase motor mounted on vibration isolators. Each enclosure to have redundant fans, with fan failures alarmed. Air inlet and outlet openings protected with screens and metal guards. Disposable air filters on fan cooled enclosures. Method of attachment and opening locations to make removal convenient and safe. Maximum operating sound level not to exceed 80 db(A) as measured on sound level meter with A weighting and slow response, at distance of 1.8 m. Enclosure frames interconnected by ground bus with ground lug for connection to ground.
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9
.10
2.4
RECTIFIER
.1
Input power supply from: .1 AC mains; .2 Automatic diesel engine driven generating unit. Input disconnect: bolt-on moulded case three pole air circuit breaker, quick make, quick break type for manual or automatic operation, temperature compensated for 40C ambient, magnetic instantaneous trip element. Isolating transformer: connected between ac input and rectifier input Surge suppressor: to protect equipment from supply voltage switching transients.
.2
.3 .4
Section 26 33 53 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.4 RECTIFIER (Cont'd)
.5
Rectifier: .1 Silicon controlled rectifier assembly or sealed silicon diodes.

Filter: for rectifier dc output. Fuse: to protect dc output. Meters: .1 DC voltmeter, switchboard type, accuracy +/-2% of full scale, to measure rectifier output voltage. .2 DC ammeter, switchboard type, accuracy +/-2% of full scale, to measure rectifier output current. Adjustments and controls: .1 Line voltage adjusting taps to allow for +/-10% variation from nominal. .2 Manual adjustment of float voltage with range of +/-5%. .3 Manual adjustment of equalizing voltage. .4 Automatic current limiting on rectifier adjustable between 80 and 120% of normal rating. .5 Provision to disconnect rectifier from inverter and battery if rectifier dc output exceeds safe voltage limits of battery. Metres, adjustments and controls to be grouped on front panel. Performance of rectifier: .1 Automatically maintain battery in fully charged state while mains power available, and maintain dc float voltage within +/-1% of setting, no load to full load, during mains voltage variations up to +/-10%. .2 Battery charging rate such that after battery has provided full load power output for specified duration, charger returns battery to 95% of fully charged state in 4 hours. .3 Automatic equalize charging circuit to initiate equalize charging of battery for 24 hours after discharge of 5% of ampere hour battery rating. .4 Manually initiated equalize charging feature with automatic timer adjustable from 0 to 24 hours to return unit to float charge.
.6 .7 .8
.9
.10 .11
2.5
INVERTER
.1
Input power supply from: .1 Rectifier dc output; .2 Battery dc output.
Section 26 33 53 Page 12 2011-05-25
2.5 INVERTER (Cont'd)
.2
Input disconnect: bolt-on moulded case, single pole, circuit breaker, quick make, quick break type, for manual or automatic operation, temperature compensated for 40C ambient, magnetic instantaneous trip element.
Input filter: with separately fused computer grade capacitor banks and indicator lights, to eliminate inverter source noise and restrictions on input cable length. Power stage: high frequency switching type, dual cooled disc type silicon controlled rectifier (SCR). Components, solid state devices capable of satisfactory operation under ambient conditions of -35C to +55C. Logic module: .1 Integrated circuit logic. .2 Silicon semiconductors. .3 Plug-in modules. .4 Gold plated plug-in connector. .5 Front accessible field adjustments for voltage and frequency. .6 Front accessible test points: suitably protected coded pin jacks. .7 Frequency reference module. .8 Current limiting module, automatic high speed by controlled reduction of output voltage. .9 Voltage regulator. Output filter: output of high frequency switching stage contains elements of carrier frequency which are filtered to low harmonic sine wave. Metres: .1 AC voltmeter: switchboard type, accuracy +/-2% of full scale, to measure inverter output voltage with 7 position selector switch to select phase to neutral, phase to phase, off. .2 AC ammeter: switchboard type, accuracy +/-2% of full scale, to measure inverter output current with 4 position selector switch to select each phase and off. .3 Wattmeter: switchboard type, accuracy +/-2% of full scale to measure inverter load. .4 Frequency meter: switchboard type, scale 58 to 62 Hz, pointer type, to measure inverter output frequency. .5 Synchroscope: with switch to check inverter output potential against supply mains potential.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 26 33 53 Page 13 2011-05-25
2.5 INVERTER (Cont'd)
.8
Output disconnect: bolt-on, moulded case, three pole circuit breaker, quick make, quick break type, for manual or automatic operation, temperature compensated for 40C ambient, magnetic instantaneous trip element.
Metres and controls: grouped on front panel.
.9
2.6
BATTERY
.1
A separate battery module which shall include the system batteries and a disconnect device housed in a dedicated enclosure, shall be provided. System batteries shall be long life, valve regulated, high rate discharge lead - calcium type with expected life of 200 complete full load discharge cycles when operated and maintained within specifications. Batteries shall have a 10 year pro rata warranty under full float operation. The battery cabinet shall be Nema 3 type sized to accommodate the number of battery cells required plus 15% and shall match the UPS module enclosures in appearance and depth. The cabinet shall be complete with spill containment apparatus. The battery module shall include a D.C. rated main circuit breaker to protect the batteries in the module and to provide disconnection of the batteries from the UPS module. The breaker shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts wired to the monitoring circuits of the UPS module and a D.C. shunt trip. The battery module shall be complete with interconnecting wiring of the battery cells with quick disconnect wiring devices. Each battery module shall be sized to support the full load of 30 KVA (24 KW) for a period of 60 minutes.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.7 STATIC BYPASS SWITCH
.1 .2
Two solid state closed circuit automatic transfer switches. Logic unit with three normal source voltage sensors, which monitor overvoltage undervoltage and loss of voltage.
Section 26 33 53 Page 14 2011-05-25
2.7 STATIC BYPASS SWITCH (Cont'd)
.3
High speed automatic transfer from normal voltage to alternate source when: .1 Normal source voltage lost: transfer time and sensing 1/4 cycle; .2 Normal source: undervoltage at 80% of nominal value; adjustable. .3 Normal source: over voltage at 110% of nominal value. .4 Loss of normal source static switch continuity. .5 Short circuit on normal source trips normal source breaker.
Return to normal source: .1 When normal source remains within return voltage limits of 95% to 110% of nominal value (adjustable) for approximately 1 s timing interval, circuit checks voltage balance and phase synchronization, then initiates return with zero switching time. Switch position lights and contacts. Synchronizing verification light. Manual reset pushbutton. Transfer test switch. Alternate power source monitor light. Accessories: .1 Manual bypass switch for maintenance and testing without load disturbance. .2 Continuity monitor: automatic transfer to alternate source in event of static switch discontinuity. .3 Alternate power source loss alarm contacts.
.4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10
2.8 OPERATING DEVICES
.1
Operating accessories: .1 Counter for number of failures of normal mains ac power: non-reset type, zero to 99,999 operations. .2 Elapsed time meter indicating accumulated time of battery discharge in minutes non-reset type, zero to 99,999.9 minutes. .3 Elapsed time meter indicating accumulated time of inverter operation in hours, non-reset type, zero to 99,999.9 hours.
Section 26 33 53 Page 15 2011-05-25
2.8 OPERATING DEVICES (Cont'd)
.2
Mode lights mounted on front panel to indicate: Ac output on inverter - green; .1 .2 Ac input available - green; .3 Inverter and ac input synchronized green; .4 Inverter and ac input not synchronized amber; .5 Static bypass switch in bypass position red; .6 Overtemperature alarms: .1 Rectifier - red; .2 Inverter - red; .3 Bypass switch - red; .7 Cooling fan fuse open - red; .8 Inverter output over voltage - red; .9 Inverter output under voltage - red; .10 Battery over voltage - red; .11 Battery under voltage - red; .12 Inverter fuse/breaker open - red; .13 Rectifier fuse/breaker open - red; .14 Static bypass switch fuse/breaker open red; .15 UPS on battery operation - red; .16 Rectifier in equalize mode - amber; .17 Battery discharging indicator - red, to change from steady to flashing during final 5 to 10 min of battery duration.
Alarms: audible alarm when any mode light shows red. Silence pushbutton not to extinguish trouble light. Remote annunciator panel and alarms: .1 One cabinet for remote points including: .1 Normal operating mode - green; .2 UPS operating from battery - red; .3 Bypass switch in operation - red; .2 Buzzer to sound when any mode light at main UPS panel shows red. .3 Size of cabinet as required. .4 Wiring between UPS and remote annunciator panel by electrical contractor. .5 Power for remote lights and alarm from UPS output.
.3
.4
2.9
FABRICATION
.1
Shop .1 .2 .3 .4
assemble: Rectifier unit; Inverter unit; Bypass switch unit; Battery rack and battery.
.2
Interconnect units, and add remote mode lights, alarms and controls to produce complete
Section 26 33 53 Page 16 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) uninterruptible power system before requesting Departmental Representative to witness factory tests.
2.10
FINISHES
.1 .2
Apply finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Cubicles: .1 Inside finish: white; .2 Exterior finish: manufacturers standard colour; .3 Exterior hardware and trim: corrosion resistant and not requiring painting such as stainless steel or aluminum.
.1 .2
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. For major components such as ac input breaker, inverter breakers and bypass switch: size 4 nameplates. For mode lights, alarms and meters: size 2 nameplates.
.3
.1
Complete system including rectifier, inverter, bypass switch, remote annunciator panel, controls and battery factory tested in presence of Departmental Representative. Notify Departmental Representative: .1 One week in advance of date of factory test; .2 That system has had preliminary testing and has met design requirements satisfactorily. Test procedures: .1 Prepare blank forms and check sheet with spaces for recording data. .2 Mark check sheet and record test data on forms in duplicate as test proceeds. Attach meter recordings. .3 Provide Departmental Representative's signature on form to indicate concurrence in results reported. .4 Duplicate given to Departmental Representative at end of test.
.2
.3
Section 26 33 53 Page 17 2011-05-25
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd)
.3
Test procedures:(Cont'd) Information from original presented as .5 part of O&M Manual. Test equipment: .1 Instruments used during test, including indicating meters installed as part of system to have recent calibration certificate. .2 Dummy load for testing, adjustable to 150% of system rated output at 0.8 power factor lagging. Load on each phase adjustable from zero to 100% so that unbalanced output maybe tested for 3 phase systems. Tests: .1 Visual inspection to determine: .1 Materials, workmanship, and assembly conform with design requirements; .2 Parts are new and free of defects; .3 Battery and components are not damaged; .4 Battery cells are of identical construction; .5 Electrolyte in each cell is at manufacturer's recommended full level; .6 Each battery cell polarity and polarity of connections to inverter are correct; .7 Proper size fuses are installed; .8 Metres have suitable range; .9 Accessories are present; .10 Portable metres for acceptance tests are suitable and instrument transformers connected correctly. .2 Demonstrate: .1 System start-up and shut down; .2 Operation during mains power failure, recording output during failure and return of mains power, using oscilloscope and camera attachment. Repeat several times; .3 Adjustable settings; .4 Record values measured at test points using oscilloscope, digital multimetre, visicorder and camera attachment; .5 Protective devices and indications function as designed. Record actual settings, and note operation of remote indications and transfer to bypass. Tests to include: .1 Annunciator lights correct indication; .2 Overcurrent on inverter output; .3 Over voltage and under voltage of inverter output;
.4
.5
Section 26 33 53 Page 18 2011-05-25
.5
Tests:(Cont'd) .2 Demonstrate:(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) .4 Dc input voltage to inverter too low. Gradually reduce dc input voltage to inverter while delivering full load output and load to transfer automatically to bypass and inverter shut down. Record input and output values. .6 Simulate over temperature by applying heat to sensor with hot air blower. .7 Simulate fuse blowing to test indication response. .8 Simulate fan failure. .9 Bypass switch automatic operations. Record with camera/oscilloscope absence of load disturbance during automatic bypass switching. .10 Over voltage of rectifier dc output. .3 Harmonic test: .1 With system fully loaded, one-half loaded, and at no load, determine total harmonic content with harmonic distortion meter at output terminals. .2 Determine each harmonic magnitude with harmonic wave analyzer. .3 Measure phase to neutral at 0.8 lagging power factor. .4 Transients: .1 With normal power input, apply full load to system. .2 Remove one half load from each phase. .3 Reapply one half load instantly. .4 Record voltages and currents using oscilloscopes and visicorder. .5 Steady load: .1 Switch system onto ac mains, start inverter and connect dummy 0.8 power factor load. .2 Operate system each module at full rated load for 24 hours and at 125% load for 10 min in ambient temperature of 40C. .3 Record data at start of test and at half hour intervals thereafter; including: .1 Input frequency; .2 Input voltage each phase; .3 Input current each phase; .4 Input kW; .5 Output voltage phase to phase, phase to neutral; .6 Output current each phase; .7 Output kW; .8 Temperature of ventilating air-in;
Section 26 33 53 Page 19 2011-05-25
.5
Tests:(Cont'd) .5 Steady load:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) .9 Temperature of ventilating air-out; .10 Temperature at critical zones; .11 Dc voltage to inverter; .12 Dc current to inverter; .13 Rectifier dc current. .6 Varying loads: .1 Take one set of readings as above of no load, 25% load, 50% load, 75% load and 125% load. .2 Calculate efficiencies of rectifier, inverter, and complete system. .7 Unbalanced loads: .1 Adjust loads on inverter to full load on two phases, 80% load on third phase. .2 Adjust loads on inverter to zero load on two phases, 20% load on third phase. .3 For both cases, record phase and line voltages and currents with phase angles to prove that phase relation remains unchanged with unbalanced loads. .8 Battery: .1 Charge battery to ensure cells fully charged. When voltage reaches steady value at end of charge, record: .1 Ambient temperature; .2 Temperature of each cell; .3 Voltage of each cell; .4 Voltage of battery; .5 Charging current; .6 Specific gravity of each cell (lead acid battery only). .2 Discharge battery by operating uninterruptible power system with ac mains open, at full rated output for duration quoted in design requirements. Record, at 5 min intervals: .1 Voltage of battery; .2 Current; .3 Voltage of 10% random cells; .4 Ambient temperature; .5 Battery temperature; .6 Specific gravity of 10% random cells (lead acid only); .3 Recharge battery automatically by closing ac mains supply to system for 4 hours period, with dummy load connected. Record at 15 min intervals. .1 Battery voltage; .2 Charging current. .4 At start and finish of charge record ambient and battery temperatures, and
Section 26 33 53 Page 20 2011-05-25
.5
Tests:(Cont'd) .8 Battery:(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) specific gravity of each cell (lead acid only). .5 Repeat discharge test and readings to prove battery was at least 95% recharged in 4 hours charge period. .6 Recharge battery. .9 Operating sound level: .1 Measure sound level according to ANSI/ASA S1.13-2005(R2010) using sound level meter with A weighting and slow response, conforming to ANSI/ASA S1.4-1983(R2001). .2 Operator to take reading by placing meter in front of him with microphone pointed at right angles to path of travel of generated sound, positioned at height of 1.5 m and distance of 1 m from equipment to be tested. .3 Measure sound level during low ambient sound level.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
Locate UPS cubicles, battery rack and battery as indicated. Locate and install remote mode lights and alarm cabinet as indicated. Assemble and interconnect components to provide complete UPS as specified. Connect ac mains to main input terminal. Connect UPS output to load. Start-up UPS and make preliminary tests to ensure satisfactory performance. Set and secure equipment rigid, plumb and square with the BCS system racks. Make field connections to manufacturer's recommendations. Render the entire assembly rodent and insect-proof by means of plates, screens and grouting.
Section 26 33 53 Page 21 2011-05-25
3.2
TESTING
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and CAN/CSA-C813.1-01(R2006). Provide: .1 Competent field personnel to perform test, adjustments and instruction on UPS equipment. .2 Dummy load adjustable to 150% of system rated output. Notify Departmental Representative 10 working days in advance of test date. Tests: .1 Inspection of cubicles, battery rack and battery. .2 Inspection of electrical connections. .3 Inspection of installation of remote mode lights and alarms. .4 Demonstration of system start-up and shut-down. .5 Run UPS for minimum period of 4 hours at full rated load to demonstrate proper operation with AC mains input, emergency generator input, no AC input. .6 Discharge battery by operating UPS with AC mains open for specified duration of full load. Record readings of temperature of each cell. .7 Recharge battery automatically with full rated load on UPS for 4 hours and record readings of voltage of each cell. Start-up and commissioning of the system shall include but not be limited to the following: .1 Visual inspection of all equipment for signs of damage or foreign materials. Ensure that all barriers and warning signs are in place. .2 Check all power connections for tightness. Check control wiring terminations and plugs for tightness or proper seating. .3 Check the DC buses for possible short circuits. .4 Check all input power supplies for correct voltage and phase rotation. .5 Check all lamp test functions. .6 Verify that all alarms are in a "go" condition. .7 Inspect battery modules for proper electrolyte levels, proper polarity and any signs of damage. .8 Energize the UPS modules and verify the correct DC voltage, walk-up and AC phase on. .9 Check the DC link holding voltages, AC output voltages and output waveforms.
.3 .4
.5
Section 26 33 53 Page 22 2011-05-25
3.2 TESTING (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) .10 Check the final DC link voltage and inverter AC output and adjust if required. .11 Check for proper synchronization. .12 Check for the voltage difference between the inverter output and the bypass source. .13 With the equipment connected to the load, measure and record the following: .1 Input Power Demand. .2 Input Power Factor. .3 Input Waveform Harmonics & THD. .4 Output Power Demand. .5 Output Power Factor. .6 Output Waveform Harmonics & THD. .14 Simulate utility outages and verify correct operation and proper recharge.
3.3 OWNER ON-SITE TRAINING
.1 .2
Include the Owner's maintenance personnel in the start-up and commissioning of the system. After commissioning is complete and the system is connected and operating, and before leaving the site, the manufacturer's service technician shall provide a minimum of two hours of Owner instruction. The instruction session shall include but not be limited to the following: .1 Complete review of all system drawings and correlation of the drawings with the physical equipment. .2 Complete review of the operating and maintenance manuals and correlation of the manuals with the physical equipment. .3 Complete review of all system operating parameters, indicators and alarm conditions. .4 Hands-on operation of all system controls including system energization, static bypass and maintenance bypass. .5 Hands-on instruction of all safety procedures and features relative to operation and maintenance of the equipment. .6 System troubleshooting instruction.
.3
END
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS
Section 26 43 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
.1
These specifications describe pertinent material requirements and installation practices for Low Voltage AC Power Panel Surge Protective Devices (SPD), also known as Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS). The contractor shall furnish and install the SPDs equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings and modifications as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings.
1.2
APPLICABILITY
.1
SPDs shall be fully applicable for the purpose of protecting all facility AC electrical circuits from the hazardous effects of transient voltages. These transients may be generated externally by lightning induced energies, utility load factor corrections, and substation switching or they can be internally generated due to inductive and/or capacitive load switching.
1.3
SUITABILITY
.1
SPDs shall be suitable for all service entrance switchboards, panelboards and motor control centres as indicated on the electrical floor plans. Products are to be configured for parallel installation - no series designs shall to be considered acceptable. Design products to allow installation as a stand-alone device allowing mounting adjacent to panelboards, MCCs. Installation is to be accomplished by a qualified electrical contractor.
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Section 06 10 12: Fire retardant treated plywood backboards. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results Electrical. Section 26 05 28: Grounding - Secondary. Section 26 05 29: Fastenings and Supports. Section 26 05 20: Wire and Box Connectors 0-1000 V. Section 26 05 21: Wires and Cables (0-1000 V).
Section 26 43 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS (Cont'd)
.7 .8 .9
Section 26 05 34: Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings. Section 26 28 21: Moulded Case Circuit Breakers. Section 26 28 23: Disconnect Switches - Fused and Non-Fused.
1.5
REFERENCES
.1
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): .1 IEEE C62.41-1991, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. .2 IEEE C62.45-2002, Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. .3 IEEE C62.62-2000, Standard Test Specifications for Surge Protective Devices. .4 IEEE 142-2007, Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - Green Book. .5 IEEE 1100-2005, Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment Emerald Book. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA-C22.1-2009, Canadian Electrical Code, Part I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL): .1 UL 1449(R2006), Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. .2 UL 1283 (Fourth Edition)- 2005, Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): .1 NEMA LS1 - 1992 (R2000), Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices (1000 volts or less).Withdrawn Other relevant standards: .1 MIL-STD-220B, Method of Insertion-Loss Measurement.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.6
DEFINITIONS
.1
L-G: measurements from phase to equipment grounding conductor as line terminals of utilization equipment.
Section 26 43 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
.2
L-L: measurements from phase to phase in a polyphase system, or from one line to another line in a single phase system.
L-N: measurement from phase(s) to neutral for both single and three phase systems. N-G: measurements from neutral to equipment grounding conductor at line terminal of utilization equipment. External mounted surge suppressor: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) mounted outside of the power panel as a separate component.
.3 .4
.5
1.7
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Maintenance data: submit operation and maintenance data, and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Test reports: submit cover sheet of Test Report certifying compliance with UL 1449 Second Edition. .1 Submit Test Reports in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit copy of Test Report certifying compliance with MIL-STD-220B for sound attenuation. .3 Submit documentation showing equipment testing to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 and C1 (combination wave) and B3 (ringwave) and IEEE C62.45. Provide spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD-220A test procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying the device's noise attenuation exceeds 44 dB at 100 kHz. Provide test report from a recognized independent testing laboratory verifying the suppressor components can survive published surge current rating on both a per mode and per phase basis using the IEEE C62.41, 8 x 20 microsecond current wave. Note that test data on individual module is not accepted.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 26 43 13 Page 4 2011-05-25
.6
SPD submittals shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following information: .1 Data for each suppressor type indicating conductor sizes, conductor types, and connection configuration and lead lengths. .2 Manufacturer's certified test data indicating the ability of the product to meet or exceed requirements of this specification. .3 Drawings, with dimensions, indicating SPD mounting arrangement and lead length configuration, and mounting arrangement of any optional remote diagnostic equipment and assemblies. .4 List and detail all protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting means and protective materials. .5 Indicate SPD wiring, bonding, and grounding connections on wiring diagrams for each system. Include installation details demonstrating mechanical and electrical connections to equipment to be protected.
.1
Qualifications: .1 All SPDs shall be manufactured by a single ISO-9001 registered company normally engaged in the design, development and manufacture of such devices for electrical and electronic system equipment protection. .2 Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of surge suppression products for the specified categories for minimum of ten (10) years. .3 Manufacturer shall offer repair or replacement service for all materials and components incorporated in the Surge Protective Devices. .4 Technical assistance (no cost to customer) shall be provided by manufacturer through a factory representative or a local distributor and a factory staffed toll-free technical hotline. .5 Manufacturer shall provide a toll-free Customer Service number to facilitate all inquiries regarding product returns, warranty claims, purchasing requirements and payment or credit issues. .6 Equipment certification: "Listed" by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall exhibit the UL Listing Mark for the category "Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors" or TVSS. Provide UL Listing Card under category TVSS to confirm compliance to UL 1449 Second Edition
Section 26 43 13 Page 5 2011-05-25
.1
Qualifications:(Cont'd) .6 Equipment certification:(Cont'd) Standard and assigned Suppressed Voltage Ratings. Pre-installation meetings: .1 Pre-installation meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this Section and on-site installations to verify project requirements, substrate conditions and co-ordination with other building subtrades, to review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
.2
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Store materials in dry, secure location and protect from weather. Protect from moisture and humidity. Store in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Waste management and disposal in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
1.10
WARRANTY
.1
For the work of this Section 26 43 13 the 12 month warranty period prescribed in GC3.13 of General Conditions is extended to twenty (20) years. Any SPD device that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation, during twenty (20) year warranty period, shall be replaced by the manufacturer without question. Repairs to modules are not acceptable, only new and unused materials are to be allowed (Excludes installation labour and site preparations). Since "Acts of Nature" or similar statements typically include the threat of lightning to which the SPD shall be exposed, any such clause limiting warranty responsibility in the general conditions of this specification shall not apply to this section. This is, the warranty shall cover the effects of lightning, single phasing, and all other electrical anomalies. The warranty
.2
.3
Section 26 43 13 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.10 WARRANTY (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) shall cover the entire device, not just various components, such as modules only. All SPD devices, subassemblies, and components are to be 100% tested and certified by the manufacturer to meet their published performance parameters. A certificate of compliance shall be provided with all goods delivered.
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
Surge suppression device (SPD): In accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition, Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors and UL listed to UL 1283, Standard for Safety, Electromagnetic Interference Filters (Fourth Edition). SPD shall protect all modes and there shall be seven discrete suppression circuits: 3 modes connected Line to Ground, 3 modes connected Line to Neutral, and 1 mode connected Neutral to Ground for a 3 phase, 4 wire, plus ground voltage system. Line to Neutral to Ground is not an acceptable substitute for Line to Ground. Line to Neutral to Line and Line to Ground to Line (in combination) will be acceptable for Line to Line Protection. All SPDs must have passed the UL 1449 Second Edition Fault Current Test with a rating of 200,000 AIC. Documentation substantiating this claim must be provided. SPDs shall use a separate path to building ground; equipment safety ground is not to be used as a transient ground path. Supplementary grounding and bonding connections required between the bonding bus or ground plane for each equipment cluster and other locations as indicated: #6 AWG core copper conductor and approved connections unless otherwise noted. All SPDs are to be MOV based and not include SAD technology as a means of suppression. Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all components shall not be less than 125% for a 120 V system and 115% for 208 V, 240 V, 347 V, and 600 V systems.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6 .7
Section 26 43 13 Page 7 2011-05-25
.8
Standard diagnostic features shall include green LEDs (one per phase - normally on) indicating power and suppression status and a form "C" dry relay contact.
Extended diagnostics features are not required. EMI/RFI filtering: To MIL-STD-220B, 50 dB minimum at 100 kHz with insertion ratio 50:1. Maximum response time: 0.5 nanoseconds. Environmental requirements: .1 Relative humidity: 0% to 95%. .2 Operating temperature: -40C to 65C. .3 Storage temperature: -55C to 85C. .4 Operating frequency: 47 Hz to 63 Hz. .5 Audible noise: Less than 45 dBA at 1.5 m. .6 Operating altitude: 5,400 m above sea level.
.9 .10 .11 .12
2.2
PERFORMANCE
.1
SPD equipment shall meet or exceed the minimum performance criteria: .1 SPD for this location shall be indicated as TVSS Type 1 on drawings. .2 Service entrance applications, Category C location. .1 240 kA per phase, 120 kA per mode, maximum suppression voltage ratings listed to UL 1449 Second Edition as follows: Voltage L-N L-G N-G MCOV 208Y/120V 400V 400V 400V 150V 600Y/347V 1200V 1200V 1200V 420V .3 SPD for this location shall be indicated as TVSS Type 2 on drawings. .4 Distribution applications, Category B location: 160 kA per phase, 80 kA per mode, maximum suppression voltage ratings listed to UL 1449 as follows: Voltage L-N 208Y/120V 400V 600Y/347V 1200V .5 SPD for this as TVSS Type 3 on L-G N-G MCOV 400V 400V 150V 1200V 1200V 420V location shall be indicated drawings.
Section 26 43 13 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.2 PERFORMANCE (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .6 Subpanel applications, Category A location: 80 kA per phase, 40 kA per mode, maximum suppression voltage ratings listed to UL 1449 as follows: Voltage L-N L-G N-G MCOV 208Y/120V 400V 400V 400V 150V 600Y/347V 1200V 1200V 1200V 420V .7 SPDs shall be of compact design. The mounting position of the SPD shall allow a straight and short lead-length connection between the SPD and the point of connection in the panelboard. .8 Visual indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be easily viewed on the front panel of the enclosure. Indicatior lights shall indicate suppression circuit status, phase status, phase loss, reduced protection level and suppression fault. .9 Provide a set of normally open/normally closed Form "C" dry contacts for remote monitoring. .10 Enclosure type: minimum NEMA 4 rating. .11 Device shall be certified (report to be submitted) to withstand a minimum of 20,000 Volts Category C3 (Combination wave 20,000 Volts - 1.2x50 s Open Circuit Voltage (OCV) and 10,000 Amps - 8x20 s Short Circuit Current (SCC) as defined by ANSI/IEEE C62.41) impulses with less than 10% change in the baseline to final let-through voltage. This data shall be submitted as an independently verified and certified test report. .12 Maximum value for attenuation for suppressor shall exceed a minimum of 33 dB. All measurements for this requirement shall be taken using the MIL STD 220A method and with only six 152.4 mm of lead length extending outside of the normal exit location of leads for the enclosure. Test results taken with leads extending past 152.4 mm (6") are not acceptable or compliant. Additional or excessive lead length used in the test setup is NOT acceptable.
(Cont'd)
2.3 JOULE RATINGS AND RESPONSE TIMES
.1
Selection of TVSS devices shall not be made solely, or in part, based upon either of these two ambiguous specifications. These terms currently are no longer recognized by ANSI, NEMA, IEEE or IEC Standards as bonafide suppressor performance parameters. The key selection elements of a quality suppressor is
Section 26 43 13 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.3 JOULE RATINGS AND RESPONSE TIMES (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
(Cont'd) its low clamping and its maximum surge handling capacity.
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions. Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0 and ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and all other applicable codes. Locate surge suppressors as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square to adjoining surfaces. Install surface mounted surge suppressors on fire-retardant plywood backboards as recommended in manufacturer's written instructions. Where practical, group surge suppressors on common backboard with other equipment. Mount housings and enclosures on fireretardant plywood backboard with top not higher than 1.8 m above finished floor. Mount SPD as close as possible to panel being protected in a position that will minimize lead lengths between suppressor and control breaker to which suppressor connects. Utilize EMT conduit, to accomplish these connections with a recommended minimum wire size of #10 AWG or a maximum of #4 AWG (for ease of dressing). Suppressor leads shall not be extended beyond manufacturer's recommended maximum length without specific approval. The rationale for this is the longer connecting leads between the SPD and the power panel, the higher the residual transient voltage. The recommended length is a maximum of 152.4 mm. Connect SPD to service panel being protected via a circuit breaker for each phase, based on the number of poles and the connecting wire size, with a 30 amp maximum. Install SPD in a neat, workmanlike manner. Lead dress shall be as short and as straight as possible and be consistent with recommended industry practices for the application on which these units are installed. Bind phase, neutral,
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 26 43 13 Page 10 2011-05-25
.8
(Cont'd) and ground conductors tightly, over entire run, from suppressor to service panel and always use the shortest length of connecting cable possible.
.1
Have manufacturer of products supplied under this Section review Work involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning of it's products. Submit written reports in acceptable format to verify compliance of Work with Contract in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Schedule site visits to review work at stages listed: .1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory work on which the work of this Section depends is complete, but before installation begins. .2 Upon completion of the work, after cleaning is carried out. Obtain reports within three (3) days of review and submit immediately to Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
END
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI C82.1, American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. .2 ANSI/NEMA C82.4-2002, American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type). American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ( ANSI/IEEE) .1 ANSI/SCTE81 2007, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM F1137-11, Standard Specification for Phosphate/Oil and Phosphate/Organic Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). ICES-005-07, Radio Frequency Lighting Devices. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Provide complete photometric data prepared by independent testing laboratory for luminaires where specified, for review by Departmental Representative. .3 Photometric data to include: .1 Total input watts. .2 Candela. .3 Distribution zonal lumen summary. .4 Luminaire efficiency. .5 Coefficient of utilization. .6 Lamp type.
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.3
Quality assurance submittals: provide following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Manufacturer's instructions: provide .1 manufacturer's written installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.
.1
Provide mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.1 .2
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets crates paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility. Disposal and recycling of fluorescent lamps as per local regulations. Disposal of old PCB filled ballasts.
.3
.4 .5 .6
1.5 SPARE LAMPS AND BALLASTS
.1 .2
Provide spare lamps as follows: .1 5% of each lamp type. Provide spare ballasts as follows: .1 Two (2) spare ballasts for each type and wattage of fluorescent ballast.
1.6
GUARANTEE
.1
Replace: .1 Incandescent and tungsten halogen lamps burning out within 3 months of Substantial Performance of Work. .2 Fluorescent and HID lamps burning out within 6 months of takeover. .3 Ballasts that fail or exceed their original noise level rating within 12 months of Substantial Performance of Work.
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LAMPS
.1
Fluorescent lamps shall be T8 diameter bulb, medium bipin, rapid start type, rated at 20,000 hour life, 3000 initial lumens (32W), 3500K correlated colour temperature, 85 colour rendering index (CRI). Compact fluorescent lamps shall be T-4 amalgam bulb type rated at 10,000 hour life, 3000K correlated colour temperature, 82 colour rendering index (CRI). 18 26 32 42 W W W W 1200 1800 2400 3200 initial initial initial initial lumens lumens lumens lumens
.2
.3
High pressure sodium lamps shall be rated at 2100K correlated colour temperature, coated lamp. 35W 2,150 initial lumens, 16,000 hour life 50W 3,800 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 70W 6,000 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 100W 8,800 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 150W 15,000 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 250W 27,500 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 400W 47,500 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life
.4
Metal halide lamps shall be rated at 3500K correlated colour temperature, 70 colour rendering index (CRI). 175W 14,000 initial lumens, 10,000 hour life 250W 18,000 initial lumens, 10,000 hour life 400W 36,000 initial lumens, 20,000 hour life
2.2
BALLASTS
.1
Fluorescent Ballasts (T8): .1 Voltage rating shall be as indicated in luminaire schedule with a range of plus or minus 10% of nominal. .2 Fluorescent ballasts shall be high frequency, electronic rapid start type, operating lamps at a frequency of 21 kHz or higher. .3 Ballasts shall meet all applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding harmonic
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.2 BALLASTS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) distortion, and as a minimum, input current THD content shall be less than 10%. .4 Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure, and shall yield normal lamp life. .5 Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.6. .6 Power factor shall be minimum 99%. .7 Ballast shall carry a minimum five year warranty. .8 Input line amps shall be less than 0.53 for two F32T8 lamps (120 Volt). .9 Maximum total ballast watts (2-F32T8 lamps) shall not exceed 63 input watts. .10 Sound level rating shall be Class A. .11 EMI/RFI emissions shall meet FCC CFR 47 Part 18 Subpart C Class A. .12 Line transient / auto surge protection compliance with ANSI 62.41. .13 Ballast factor: minimum 0.875. .14 Mounting: Integral with luminaire. Fluorescent Dimming Ballast (T8:) .1 Dimming range of electronic dimming ballast shall be from 100% to 1% with continuous, smooth, and flicker free light level output over the entire dimming range. .2 Dimming ballasts shall be high frequency, electronic rapid start, operating lamps at a frequency of 25 kHz or higher. .3 Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.6. .4 Power factor shall be minimum 95%. .5 Ballast shall carry a three year warranty. .6 Input line amps shall be 0.57 for two F32T8 lamps (120 volt). .7 Maximum total ballast watts (2-F32T8 lamps) shall not exceed 67 watts. .8 Sound level rating shall be Class A. .9 Line transient / auto surge protection compliance with ANSI/SCTE 81 2007. .10 Ballast factor: minimum .93. .11 Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10%. .12 Ballast shall internally limit in rush current to not exceed seven amps at 120 volts. .13 Ballast shall preheat lamp cathodes to ensure rated lamp life is not diminished. .14 EMI/RFI emissions shall meet FCC CFR 47 Part 18 Subpart C Class A.
.2
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.2 BALLASTS (Cont'd)
.3
Fluorescent Ballast (Compact Fluorescent Lamps): .1 Electronic ballasts shall be high frequency, electronic rapid start, operating lamps at a frequency of 25 kHz or higher. .2 Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.5. .3 Power factor shall be minimum 99%. .4 Ballast shall carry a five year warranty. .5 Input line amps shall be .44 for one 42 watt compact fluorescent lamp (120 volt). .6 Maximum total ballast watts shall not exceed 44 watts (1-42 watt TT compact fluorescent lamp). .7 Sound level rating shall be Class A. .8 Line transient / auto surge protection compliance with ANSI/SCTE 81-2007. .9 Ballast factor: minimum 1.0. .10 Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10%. .11 EMI/RFI emissions shall meet FCC CFR 47 Part 18 Subpart C Class A.
High Pressure Sodium ballasts: .1 Voltage rating shall be as indicated in luminaire schedule with a range of plus or minus 10% of nominal. .2 Ballast shall be totally encased and designed for operation in 40C ambient temperature. .3 Power factor shall be minimum 95% with 95% of rated lamp lumens. .4 Capacitor shall be non-PCB. .5 Minimum starting temperature of minus 34C at 90% line voltage. Metal Halide Ballasts: .1 Voltage rating shall be as indicated in luminaire schedule with a range of plus or minus 10% of nominal. .2 Ballast shall be totally encased and designed for operation in 40C ambient temperature. .3 Power factor shall be minimum 95% with 95% of rated lamp lumens. .4 Capacitor shall be non PCB. .5 Minimum starting temperature of minimum 29C at 90% line voltage.
.4
.5
2.3
FINISHES
.1
Light fixture finish and construction to meet ULC listings and CSA certifications related to intended installation.
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.4 OPTICAL CONTROL DEVICES
.1
As indicated in detail sheets.
2.5
LUMINAIRES
.1
As indicated in detail sheets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Locate and install luminaires as indicated. Provide adequate support to suit ceiling system. Provide plaster frame and trim as required, and turn over to trade providing ceiling installation. Support luminaires directly from building structure. Provide low temperature rated ballasts for exterior installations. Install recessed fluorescent luminaires so that they can be completely removable from below the finished ceiling. Recessed lighting luminaires in inaccessible ceilings shall be secured to blocking attached to building structure. Where no finished ceiling exists, luminaires shall be suspended on rigid conduit hangers complete with ball aligner, and outlet box canopy. All suspension components shall be degreased and painted white, unless otherwise noted. Replace ballasts, which in the opinion of The Departmental Representative, are found to exhibit excessive noise. Coordinate installation of luminaires with Divisions 22, 23 and 24 to avoid conflicts between luminaires, and mechanical system components. A maximum of two fluorescent luminaires recessed in t-bar shall be energized from one junction box mounted on the underside of the structural ceiling. A separate armoured cable
.4 .5 .6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
.11
(Cont'd) drop shall be provided for each luminaire. Length of drop shall be adequate to allow relocation of luminaire one tile in all directions from its specified location. Luminaires in inmate cells, range corridors, shower stalls and all maximum security areas shall be solidly attached to the building structure with concrete anchors and tamper-proof hardware to prevent luminaires from being knocked or pried off by the inmates. Seal all around the luminaire body with epoxy caulking to prevent concealment of contraband behind the luminaire.
.12
3.2
WIRING
.1
Connect luminaires to lighting circuits: .1 Install flexible or rigid conduit for luminaires as indicated.
3.3 LUMINAIRE SUPPORTS
.1
For suspended ceiling installations support luminaires independently of ceiling.
3.4 LUMINAIRE ALIGNMENT
.1 .2
Align luminaires mounted in continuous rows to form straight uninterrupted line. Align luminaires mounted individually parallel or perpendicular to building grid lines.
3.5
CLEANING
.1
.2
END
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Section 26 52 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for emergency lighting systems.
.1 .2
Section 26 05 21 - Wires and Cables (0-1000 V). Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.141-02, Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Data to indicate system components, mounting method, source of power and special attachments.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Dispose of unused batteries at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
.6
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Section 26 52 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.6
WARRANTY
.1
For batteries, the 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC3.13 of General Conditions is extended to 120 months, with no-charge replacement during the first 5 years and pro-rate charge on the second 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Emergency lighting equipment: to CSA C22.2 No.141-02. Supply voltage: 120 V, AC. Output voltage: 6 V DC. Operating time: 60 min. Battery: sealed, maintenance free. Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature compensated, short circuit protected with regulated output of plus or minus 0.01 V for plus or minus 10% input variations. Solid state transfer circuit. Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output voltage. Signal lights: solid state, for 'AC Power ON' and 'High Charge'. Lamp heads: integral on unit, 345 degrees horizontal and 180 degrees vertical adjustment. Lamp type: tungsten, 9 W. Auxiliary equipment: .1 Test switch. .2 Time delay relay. .3 Battery disconnect device. .4 RFI suppressors.
.7 .8 .9 .10
.11
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Section 26 52 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install unit equipment. Direct heads. Connect emergency light to unswitched side of lighting circuit in area served.
3.2
TESTING
.1
Perform tests for battery units as outlined in CSA C22.1-2009, Section 46 Rule 46-202(1)(a).
END
EXIT LIGHTS
Section 26 53 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.141-02, Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting. .2 CSA C860-07, Performance of Internally Lighted Exit Signs. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 101-2009, Life Safety Code.
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Quality Assurance Submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence and cleaning procedures.
.3 .4
.1
EXIT LIGHTS
Section 26 53 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SELF-POWERED UNITS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Exit lights: to CSA C22.2 No.141-02 and CSA C860-07. Housing: extruded aluminum housing, brush aluminum finish. Face and back plates: extruded aluminum. LEDs shall be connected in parallel (not series) so that failure of an LED shall not cause more than 5 LEDs to be extinguished. Exit light input shall be maximum 1.5 watts. LEDs shall operate on 120 volt without the use of any external transformer. Design life for the exit light shall be minimum 25 years. Operation: designed for over 100,000 hours of continuous operation without relamping. Green Pictogram. Downlight: translucent acrylic in bottom of unit. Third lamp socket for emergency lamp lighting circuit. .1 Third lamp: 9 W, 6 V DC AC. Face plate to remain captive for relamping. Supply voltage: 120 V, AC. Output voltage: 6 V DC. Operating time: 60 minimum. Recharge time: 12 hours. Battery: sealed, maintenance free. Charger: solid state, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature compensated, short circuit protected, with regulated output of plus or minus 0.01 V for plus or minus 10% V input variation. Solid state transfer circuit.
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11
.12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18
.19
EXIT LIGHTS
Section 26 53 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.1 SELF-POWERED UNITS (Cont'd)
.20 .21
Signal lights: solid state, for 'AC Power ON' and 'High Charge' condition.
Mounting: suitable for universal mounting directly on junction box and c/w knockouts for conduit. .1 Removable or hinged front panel for easy access to batteries. Cabinet: finish: white. Auxiliary equipment: .1 Lamp disconnect switch. .2 Test switch. .3 AC/DC output terminal blocks inside cabinet. .4 RFI suppressor.
.22 .23
2.2
DESIGN X1
.1 .2 .3 .4
Recessed wall end to wall ceiling mounting. Single Double face with die-cast face plate to remain captive for relamping. Arrow: right left both directions knock-outs. Wireguard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install exit lights to manufacturer's recommendations, listing requirements, NFPA standard and local regulatory requirements. Connect fixtures to exit light circuits. Connect emergency lamp sockets to emergency circuits. Ensure that exit light circuit breaker is locked in on position and painted red. Coordinate installation of exit lights with ceiling or wall construction. If necessary,
.2 .3 .4 .5
EXIT LIGHTS
Section 26 53 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.5
(Cont'd) provide hanger to suspend exit light below visual obstructions.
3.3
CLEANING
.1 .2
3.4
TESTS
.1
Perform tests for battery units as outlined in CSA C22.1-2009, Section 46 Rule 46-202(1)(d).
END
COMMUNICATION CABLES INSIDE BUILDINGS
Section 27 05 14 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International) .1 CSA-T568.1.05(R2010), Telecommunications Cabling Systems in Commercial Buildings (Adopted CSA T568.2-05(R2010) with modifications). .2 CSA-C22.2 No. 214-08, Communications Cables (Bi-national Standard, with UL 444). .3 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4-M90(R2010), Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors for Communication Systems. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) .1 TIA/EIA-568-2009, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards Set. CSC Specification ES/SOW-0110 Installation of Structured Cable System in Federal Institutions.
.2
.3
.1
Structured system of telecommunications cables (copper and optical fibre) installed within buildings for distributing voice and data (including video) signals. Installed in physical star configuration with separate horizontal and backbone sub-systems. Horizontal cables link work areas to telecommunications closet located on same floor. Telecommunications closets linked to central equipment room by backbone cables.
.2
.1
Section 27 05 14 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STATION WIRE (ZSW)
.1
4-pair, 24 AWG, 100 ohm cable with insulated copper conductor in separate outer jacket: to C22.2 No. 214. FT-6 fire-rated jacket. Blue for staff data and orange for inmate data. Voice-grade electrical transmission requirements: to CSA T568.1-05(R2010) and TIA/EIA-568. Data-grade electrical transmission requirements to: CSA T568.1-05(R2010) and TIA EIA-568.
.2
.3
2.2 COMMUNICATIONS BUILDING CABLE (CBC)
.1
50 pair 24 AWG insulated copper conductors grouped in 25-pair separately identified modules surrounded by metallic tape shield and covered with thermoplastic jacket: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 214-08 and CSA T529. FT-6 fire-rated jacket. Voice-grade electrical performance to: CSA T568.1-05(R2010).
.2
2.3 COAXIAL CABLE (CXC)
.1
24 AWG coaxial members, 50 ohm impedance each having metallic centre conductor surrounded by dielectric material and metal outer conductors separated by dielectric material and surrounded by jacket: to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 214-08. FT-6 fire-rated jacket. For data communications, 24 AWG, 50 ohm impedance. Electrical transmission performance: to CSA T568.1-05(R2010). For cable television, 75 ohm impedance. Centre conductor No. 24 AWG solid bare copper; insulation of solid polyethylene foamed teflon; shield of aluminum foil plus braid; shield coverage 97%. Loss at 500 MHz not to exceed 3.5 dB per 30 m. For 50 ohm coaxial cable systems, type BNC connector for service outlet to: CSA T568.1-05(E2010).
.2
.3
.4
Section 27 05 14 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.4 OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE (OFC)
.1
12 pair tight buffer tube 62.5/125 micrometre multi-mode graded index fibre: to CSA T568.1-05(R2010). Fibre Optic Cable: .1 Six strand multi-mode 62.5/125 distribution fibre optic cable providing the following: - Wavelength: 850/1300 mm - Maximum Attenuation: 3.5/1.5 dB/km - Typical Attenuation: 3.0/1.0 dB/km - Minimum Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz/km. .2 Cable color shall be orange.
.2
2.5
P/A WIRING
.1
4C #22 Solid Copper Conductors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLES
.1
Install ZSW, OFC, CBC and CXC horizontal cables, as indicated in conduits or cable troughs in ceiling space from termination in telecommunications closet to outlets. Install ZSW and CXC cables, as indicated in equipment room. Terminate 2 ZSW cables per work station terminated in accordance with CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 182.4-M90(R2010) and CSA T568.1-05(R2010). Figure 11-1. 2 service outlet(s) terminated in accordance with CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4-M90(R2010) and CSA T529. Figure 11-1. For distribution of television signals, terminate CXC cable on type F connectors. For distribution of data signals, terminate CXC cable in accordance with CSA T568.1-05(R2010).
.2 .3
.4
.5
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BACKBONE CABLES
.1
Install CXC and ZSW cable, as indicated in conduit from termination in each telecommunications closet to equipment room. Termination: to CSA T568.1-05(R2010). Figure 11-1. Terminate ZSW cables in accordance with CSA-T568.1-05(R2010)on patch panel.
.2
Section 27 05 14 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BACKBONE CABLES (Cont'd)
.3
For distribution of television signals, terminate CXC cable on type F connectors. For distribution of data signals, terminate CXC cable in accordance with CSA-T568.1-05(R2010). Figure 11-1.
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Test UTP cable installations for: .1 Continuity: including open/short, polarity, and pair transpositions. .2 DC loop resistance. .3 Length using TDR. .4 Noise Attenuation at 160 MHz. .5 Test optical fibre cables for: .1 End-to-end loss at 850 nm. .2 OTDR tests. .6 Test coaxial cables for: .1 Continuity. .2 Attenuation at 160 MHz.
END
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 26 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results Electrical.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI J-STD-607-A-2002.
.1
Telecommunications raceways system consists of outlet boxes, cover plates, terminal distribution cabinets, conduits, cabletroughs, pull boxes, sleeves and caps, fish wires, concrete encased ducts. Overhead Cabletrough distribution system.
.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Conduits: EMT type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34. Underground cable ducts: PVC type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34. Junction boxes, cabinets type E and T: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Outlet boxes, conduit boxes, and fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Fish wire: polypropylene type.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 26 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install empty raceway system, including overhead distribution system, fish wire, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, floor boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, cabletroughs, miscellaneous and positioning material to constitute complete system.
END
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 28 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Empty telecommunications raceways system consists of outlet boxes, cover plates, terminal distribution cabinets, conduits, cabletroughs, pull boxes, sleeves and caps, fish wires, service poles, service fittings, concrete encased ducts. Overhead Cabletrough distribution system.
.2
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal, conduit and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Conduits: EMT type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34. Underground cable ducts: PVC type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34. Cabletroughs: wire basket type, in accordance with Section 26 05 36. Junction boxes, cabinets type E and T: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Outlet boxes, conduit boxes, and fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 31.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 28 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.1 MATERIAL (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.6
Fish wire: polypropylene type.
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install empty raceway system, including distribution system, fish wire, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, floor boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, cabletroughs, miscellaneous and positioning material to constitute complete system.
END
STRUCTURED CABLING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 10 05 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-C22.2 No. 214-08, Communications Cables (Bi-National standard with UL 444). .2 CSA-C22.2 No. 232-09, Optical Fiber Cables. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)/Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) .1 TIA/EIA-568-B.1-(2001), Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements. .2 TIA/EIA-568-B.2-(2001), Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components. .3 TIA/EIA-568-B.3-(2000), Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. .4 TIA/EIA-606-A-(2002), Administration Standard for the Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure. .5 TIA TSB-140-2004, Telecommunications Systems Bulletin - Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems. .6 TIA-598-C-(2005), Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding. CSC Telecommunications Standards: .1 ES/SOW-0102R6E - Quality Control For Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems. .2 ES/SOW-011R1E - Structured Cable Systems For Electrical Security Installations. .3 ES/SOW-0502R2E - Electrical Systems/Equipment Test & Evaluation Guidelines.
.2
.3
1.2
DEFINITIONS
.1
Refer to TIA/EIA-598-C, Annex A for definitions of terms: optical-fiber interconnect, distribution, and breakout cables.
.1
Structured telecommunications wiring system consist of unshielded-twisted-pair and optical fiber cables, terminations, connectors, cross-connection hardware and related equipment installed inside building for occupant's
Section 27 10 05 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) telecommunications systems, including voice (telephone), data, and image. Installed in physical star configuration with separate horizontal and backbone sub-systems. .1 Horizontal cables link work areas to telecommunications rooms located on same floor. .2 Telecommunications rooms linked to main terminal/equipment room (MT/ER) by backbone cables. .3 MT/ER also linked to Entrance Room by backbone cables.
.2
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. As-built Records and Drawings: .1 Provide Microsoft Access database reflecting cable installation and cross-connections. .2 Provide electronic drawings in AutoCAD 2008 format depicting all construction. .3 Provide two (2) bound complete hard-copy sets of as-built records to the Departmental Representative. .1 Provide and place one hard copy of as-built records for each telecommunications room in plan holder in each telecommunications room.
.1
Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.1
Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Section 27 10 05 Page 3 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOUR-PAIR 100 OHM BALANCED BALANCED PAIR CABLE
.1
Four-pair, 100 ohm balanced unshielded-twisted-pair (UTP) cable, flame test classification FT6 to: CSA-C22.2 No. 214-08, Category 6 (Cat 6). To: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2.2 WORK AREA UTP 2 PAIR MODULAR JACK
.1
Eight-position modular jack ("RJ-45"), type T568A Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2: .1 In self-contained surface-mount box, 4 jacks per box. .2 Mounted in compatible single gang faceplate, flush entry, jack positions per faceplate.
2.3 TERMINATION AND CROSSCONNECTION HARDWARE FOR UTP
.1
IDC Terminal strips, 25 pair, for terminating multi 4 pair 100 OHM balanced twisted pair cables and supporting cross-connections using jumper wires or compatible plug-ended patch cords: Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Mount on block for housing 12 IDC terminal strips, mounted on wall. .1 Distribution rings or channels capable of externally mating with the above mount for managing cross-connection wires. Patch panel, 45 rack units high, 24 ports: .1 Each port equipped with factory installed "RJ-45" jacks, type T568A Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. .2 Horizontal cable-management unit for every 48 ports. Consolidation point, terminates 12 UTP horizontal cables from telecommunications room on IDC terminations. Cables extending to work areas terminate on RJ-45 jacks, type T568A. Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
.2
.3
.4
2.4 UTP CROSS-CONNECT WIRE
.1
Category 6, 4 pairs to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
Section 27 10 05 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.5 UTP PATCH CORDS
.1
3 metres long, with factory-installed male plug at one end to mate with "RJ-45" jack and with factory-installed male plug at other end to mate with "RJ-45" jack Category 6, 4 pairs to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2.6 UTP EQUIPMENT CABLE
.1
4 pair "pigtail", 1 metre long, with factory-installed male plug on one end to mate with "RJ-45" jack and other end equipped with factory-installed male plug to mate with "RJ-45" jack: Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2.7 UTP WORK AREA CORDS
.1
3 metres long, each end equipped with "RJ-45" plug Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2.8 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE
.1
Distribution, with conductive members, 62.5/125 micron single mode, 12 strands to: CSA-C22.2 No. 232-09 and TIA/EIA-568- B.3, flame test classification FT6, each end terminated with duplex SC connectors.
2.9 CONSOLIDATION POINT FOR OPTICAL FIBER
.1
Consolidation point, terminates 12 optical-fiber horizontal cables from telecommunications room on duplex SC compatible adapters.
2.10 OPTICAL-FIBER PATCH PANEL
.1
Mounted in rack or cabinet 600 mm wide, 45 rack units, with lockable cover, capable of terminating 24 pairs of fiber, equipped with duplex SC compatible adapters.
2.11 OPTICAL-FIBER PATCH CORDS
.1
Interconnect cable, 2 strands, 1 metre long, each end equipped with duplex SC connectors. 62.5/125 micron single mode to: TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
Section 27 10 05 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF TERMINATION AND CROSS-CONNECT HARDWARE
.1
Install termination and cross-connect hardware in rack as indicated and according to manufacturers' instructions. Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A. Install consolidation points, as indicated according to manufacturer's instructions. Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.
.2
3.2 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLES
.1
Install horizontal cables as indicated in conduits and cable trays from telecommunication rooms to individual work-area jacks. Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A. Support horizontal cables at intervals not exceeding 2 metres. .1 Where raceways are used to distribute cables to each zone, provide supplementary "J" hooks to support cables at intervals not exceeding 2 metres. Install horizontal cables from consolidation point to individual work-area jacks. .1 Provide supplementary "J" hooks to support cables at intervals not exceeding 2 metres. .2 Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A. Terminate horizontal cables in telecommunications room and at individual work-area jacks. .1 Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A. Coil spare cables and store in ceiling space in zone. Harness slack cable in cabinets, racks, and wall-mounted termination and cross-connection hardware.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKBONE CABLES
.1
Install backbone cables from each telecommunications room to main terminal/equipment room (MT/ER) as indicated and according to manufacturers' instructions.
Section 27 10 05 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKBONE CABLES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Identify and label as indicated to: .1 TIA/EIA-606-A. Install backbone cables from MT/ER to carrier demarcation point in Entrance Room as indicated and according to manufacturer's instructions. .1 Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.
.2
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT CABLES
.1
Install equipment cables from equipment patch panel as indicated. .1 Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.
3.5 IMPLEMENT CROSS-CONNECTIONS
.1
Implement cross-connections using patch cords as specified.
.1
Test horizontal UTP cables as specified below and correct deficiencies provide record of results as hard copy and electronic record on CD or USB drive. .1 Perform tests for Permanent Link on installed cables, including spares: .1 Category 6 using certified level III tester to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. .2 Perform tests for Channel on 20% of cross-connected data horizontal cabling installed from each telecommunications room, including shortest and longest drops from each telecommunications room: should more than 5% of tested cables fail, test remaining cross-connected data cables. .1 Category 6 using certified level III tester to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Test backbone UTP cables as specified below and correct deficiencies: provide record of results as hard copy and electronic record on CD or USB drive. .1 Perform tests for Permanent Link on 4-pair cables: .1 Category 6 using certified level III tester to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. .2 Perform Wire Map tests on multi-pair UTP cables to: TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Test Optical-fiber strands for attenuation to: TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and correct deficiencies:
.2
.3
Section 27 10 05 Page 7 2011-05-25
.3
(Cont'd) provide record of results as hard copy and electronic record on CD or USB drive. .1 Test horizontal links need at only one wavelength (850 nm or 1300 nm) and in one direction. .1 Attenuation to be less than 2.0 dB, unless consolidation point is used. .2 If consolidation point is used, attenuation test result to be less than 2.75 dB when testing between horizontal cross-connect and telecommunications outlet/connector. .2 Test backbone links in both directions. Backbone links: .1 Test multi-mode fiber at both applicable wavelengths (850 nm and 1300 nm). .2 Test single-mode fiber at both applicable wavelengths (1550 nm and 1310 m). .3 Maximum attenuation: Cable attenuation + Connector loss + Splice loss. .1 Multi-mode-fiber attenuation coefficients: .1 3.5 db/km @ 850 nm; and .2 1.5 db km @ 1300 nm .2 Single-mode fiber attenuation coefficients at both 1310 nm and 1550 nm: .1 1.0 db/km for inside plant cable; and .2 0.5 db/km for outside plant cables. .3 Maximum connector insertion loss: 0.75 db per pair and maximum splice insertion loss: 0.3 db. insertion loss: 0.3 db.
END
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Section 27 13 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER OPTIC CABLES
.1
Optical characteristics: 12 Fibres, singlemode 1310 and 1550 nm 0.4 db/km 0.3 db/km
Type Operating Wavelength Maximum Attenuation at 1310 nm Maximum Attenuation at 1550 nm .2
Cable characteristics: 600 lbs 132 lbs 16.5 cm 8.2 cm 641 m -40C to +80C
Maximum Installing Tension Maximum Operating Tension Minimum Installing Bending Radius Minimum Operating Radius Maximum Vertical Rise Operating and Storage Temperature .3 PART 3 - EXECUTION Terminations: ST connectors.
3.1 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Contractor shall test cables before installation. Contractor shall not exceed manufacturer's minimum bend radius of the maximum tensile rating. Use pull boxes to allow fiber optic cable access for backfeeding at every third 90 degree bend. When pulling long lengths of fiber optic cables in conduit, maintain less than 80% fill ratio by cross section. Pull cables through conduit or lay-in tray. In the FEC No. 5, all cables shall be securely fastened in place with cable ties and identified as fiber optic cables.
.3
.4
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Section 27 13 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
3.1 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.5 .6
Take care not to damage the fiber or connector during shipping, handling and installation.
Arrange for test equipment to demonstrate that the cables are performing in accordance with these specifications. Perform a continuity test to detect splice fractures or other defects through analysis of backs scattering signal using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Provide Departmental Representative with written certified results of testing. Splicing to existing F.O. cables and terminations shall be carried out by an approved fiberoptic contractor. No splice is allowed for new F.O. cables. Mark fiber optic cables in maintenance holes and pullpits with yellow PVC tape.
.7
.8 .9
END
TELEVISION SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 27 41 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1
GENERAL
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Data shall include system components.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
.1 .2
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings - Section 26 05 34. Splitters, Junction and Pull Boxes, Cabinets Section 26 05 31.
.1
A complete raceway and cabling system shall be furnished to provide a television signal in selected rooms. The distribution system shall consist of a separate coaxial cable for each television outlet, terminated at the system distribution cabinets. A branch distribution cabinet shall be provided for each cell area. The system shall include the supply and installation of outlet boxes, conduit cabinets, outlet coverplates and system cables. The system shall be equipped with a reverse direction cut-out to prevent CATV Network to be used as a LAN.
.2
.3
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT
.1
EMT or PVC type 21 mm minimum.
2.2
COAXIAL CABLE
.1
To Section 27 05 14.
2.3
OUTLET BOXES
.1
Outlet boxes shall be a 100 x 100 mm square outlet box with a square cut single device raised cover. Mount where shown on the plans. Outlet boxes shall be of adequate depth so as not to exceed maximum bending radius of coaxial cable (five times radius).
Section 27 41 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.4 WALL OUTLET JACKS
.1 .2
Audio visual outlet jacks shall be F81 coaxial connectors mounted to coverplate. Coverplates shall be as specified in Section 26 27 26 for maximum security areas.
2.5 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION CABINETS
.1
The distribution cabinets shall be complete with lockable hinged (piano) doors. The racks shall be 200 mm deep, 1220 mm high and 610 mm wide.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Provide a 120 volt, 15 amp duplex receptacle in each television distribution equipment cabinet. Identify coaxial cable with room or cell number, at both the outlet, and equipment cabinet ends of cable. Install a #6 AWG insulated ground conductor from the main building ground grid, to a lug in each equipment cabinet. Provide sweep test certification upon completion of the system. Replace any cable shown to be damaged or defective.
.3
.4 .5
3.2 TESTING AND VERIFICATION
.1
The Equipment Manufacturer's representative shall make an inspection of the CATV equipment including those components necessary for the direct operation of the system. The inspection shall confirm: .1 That the type of equipment installed is that designated by the specifications. .2 That the wiring connections to all equipment components show that the installer undertook to have observed ULC requirements. .3 That the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The manufacturer shall supply to the electrical contractor reasonable amounts of technical assistance with respect to any changes necessary to conform to the work to paragraphs 1, 2, and 3
.2
Section 27 41 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.2 TESTING AND VERIFICATION (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) above. During the period of inspection by the manufacturer, the electrical contractor shall make available to the manufacturer, one electrician for the duration of the verification. Contractor shall supply to the manufacturer all ladders, equipment, and assistance necessary to perform the verification. Manufacturer shall be responsible for testing each device and circuit for proper picture quality as well as proper cable identification at the splitter panel. To assist the electrical contractor in preparing his bid, the manufacturer shall indicate the number of hours necessary to complete this inspection. When all of the above conditions have been complied with, the manufacturer shall issue to the contract the following documents: .1 A copy of the inspecting technicians report showing the location and signal strength at each outlet and certifying the test results of each outlet. .2 All costs involved in this inspection both from the manufacturer and electrical contractor shall be included in the contract.
.3
.4
.5
3.3 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
.1
The Contractor shall submit at least two draft copies of maintenance manuals for approval with shop drawings. The manuals (4 of)shall be prepared to best commercial standards, and shall be consistent in format, quality and content, with sample manuals submitted with shop drawings. The final maintenance manual shall meet the following minimum requirements: .1 A title page. .2 Warranty page - explaining the warranty and expiry date. .3 A revision notice page, lined, with columns for revision numbers, dates, and initials. .4 Table of contents. .5 Introduction - general information including a full description of equipment for system(s), technical summary/specifications and detailed block diagram. .6 Theory of operation, including an in-depth explanation of all circuits and parts.
.2
Section 27 41 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.3 MAINTENANCE MANUALS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) Alignment and test procedures. .7 .8 Repair procedures, including step-by-step fault finding or fault localizing. .9 Block diagrams. .10 Circuit schematics (clear, easy to read, fold-out type). .11 Complete parts lists. .12 Mechanical drawings, chassis layout illustrations where applicable, and wiring data lists. .13 Drawings, including as-built and as-installed drawings.
END
PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS
Section 27 51 16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Industry Canada - Terminal Attachment Program .1 CS-03-1996, Telecommunication Apparatus Compliance Specification, Issue 8.
.1
Public address loudspeaker system to incorporate: .1 Voice paging. .2 Additional features as specified. Operations: .1 Paging: .1 Voice paging from microphone. .2 Selective area page to areas as indicated. .3 Emergency page to all areas. .4 Speaker selection made via touch screen and relay assembly. Systems in various configurations to be rack mounted.
.2
.3
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2 .3
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include, riser diagram, block diagram of complete public address system. Public address system design criteria.
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for public address system for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 Operation instructions. .2 Description of system operation. .3 Description of each subsystem operation. .4 List specifying each piece of equipment in system or subsystem by its original manufacturer name and model number. .5 Part list specifying parts used in equipment by identification numbers that are standard to electronic industry.
.2
Section 27 51 16 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.3
1.6
SYSTEM STARTUP
.1
Manufacturer's factory service engineer to instruct: .1 Maintenance personnel in maintenance of system. .2 Operating personnel in use of system.
1.7 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1
CSC Specifications: .1 ES/SOW-0101 - Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 ES/SOW-0102 - Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SOW-0404 - Electronic System Proposal Evaluation Criteria (Revision 1) .4 ES/SPEC-0006R2E - Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2). EIA-310-C Electronic Industries Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment. CSA-C22.1-09 Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Part 1. UL 2572. Drawings.
.2
.3 .4 .5
1.8
DEFINITIONS
.1
Definitions: .1 ATP - Acceptance Testing Procedure/Plan. .2 BSCS - Building Security & Communication System. .3 CEC - Canadian Electrical Code. .4 CER - Common Equipment Room. .5 CSA - Canadian Standards Association. .6 CSC - Correctional Service of Canada. .7 EIA - Electronic Industries Association. .8 ES - Electronic Systems.
Section 27 51 16 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
Definitions:(Cont'd) .9 FAAS - Facility Alarm Annunciation System. .10 FAT - Factory Acceptance Test. .11 FDR - Final Design Report. .12 GFE - Government Furnished Equipment. .13 GUI - Graphical User Interface. .14 I/O - Input/Output. .15 LAN - Local Area Network. .16 LCP - Local Control Post. .17 MCCP - Main Communications Control Post. .18 MTBF - Mean Time before Failure. .19 OFC - Optical Fibre Cable. .20 PC - Personal Computer. .21 PDC - Power Distribution Cable. .22 PDR - Preliminary Design Report. .23 PE - Principal Entrance. .24 PLC - Programmable Logic Controller. .25 PWC - Public Works Canada (PWGSC's predecessor). .26 PWGSC - Public Works & Government Services Canada. .27 PTT - Push-to-Talk. .28 RU - Rack Units (45 mm vertical space in an EIA-310C standard equipment rack). .29 SAC - System Administration and Control. .30 SCP - Secure Control Post. .31 SOW - Statement of Work. .32 SPEC - Specification. .33 STD - Standard. .34 T&E - Telecommunications and Electronics. .35 TES - Telecommunications Equipment Space. .36 UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply. .37 VAC - Volts, Alternating Current. .38 VDC - Volts, Direct Current.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 One .2 One .3 One .4 One .5 One .6 One (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) 8 channel amplifier. signal generator card. trouble detector card. trouble indicator card. power supply. distribution amplifier.
.3
Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled intercommunications and program spare parts cabinet.
Section 27 51 16 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Conduits: to Section 26 05 34. Communication conductors: as indicated, to Section 27 05 14.
2.2
COMPONENTS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Continuous duty cycle. Modular system design. Solid state, and suitable for rack mounting. Maximum operating temperature: 65C. Grounding conductor for system components.
2.3
EQUIPMENT RACK
.1
Rack, to accommodate system components, enclosed type, steel construction with internal mounting rails, wire and cable entrances with smooth edges protected by rubber edging, four adjustable rack levelling feet. Metal outlet raceway with colour coded outlets wired to 120 V, 60 Hz supply controlled by key type locking switch. Louvres and ventilation apertures in sides of rack for convection ventilation. Racks to contain but not necessarily limited to following components. .1 Monitor panel. .2 Relay assembly. .3 Page selection panel. .4 Timer: program time system with battery backup. .5 Telephone paging interface equipment. .6 Patch bay. .7 Pre-amplifier mixer. .8 Power amplifiers. .9 Power supplies. .10 Installation and service connections to various panels by plug-in type terminal blocks with barriers and screw type terminals.
.2
.3 .4
Section 27 51 16 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.4
MONITOR PANEL
.1
Monitor panel to contain VU metre, selector, 150 mm monitor speaker and volume control to provide audible and visual monitoring of programmes. .1 VU metre to have black scale for normal conditions, and red scale for overload conditions.
2.5
MICROPHONE
.1
Microphone: omni-directional, noise cancellation, dynamic type, complete with cradle: .1 Frequency response: 100-6000 Hz. .2 Output level: approximately -55 dB. .3 Output impedance, balanced to ground, 150 ohms. .4 Housing, metal, flexible goose neck mounting. .5 Push-to-talk switch. .6 Magnetic dust shield.
2.6 PRE-AMPLIFIER MIXER
.1 .2
Modular design. Inputs: .1 6-continuously variable microphone volume controls. .2 1-continuously variable master gain control. .3 1-bass tone control with centre position flat and 10 dB boost to 10 dB cut either side. .4 1-treble tone control switch with centre position flat and 10 dB boost 10 dB cut either side. Mixer also to operate on 12 to 24 V DC. Output volts: 1 V rms at less than 1% distortion. Frequency response: 30-20,000 Hz plus or minus 1 dB at full output. Hum and noise level: -65 dB minimum at full output.
.3 .4 .5 .6
2.7
PATCH BAY
.1
C/w 2 jacks corresponding to input and output of every signal processing equipment that is installed in rack. Each jack wired for 'normalled' configuration.
.2
Section 27 51 16 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.8 POWER BOOSTER AMPLIFIER
.1 .2
Overload and output short circuit protection. Power output: 100 W stated in rms power at 1% harmonic distortion over frequency range 25 to 18,000 Hz plus or minus 1 dB. Signal and noise level: 80 dB below rated output. Maximum gain: 75 dB. Outputs: 8 ohm, 25 or 70 V balanced or unbalanced line. Peak power: 100 W. Controls and indicators: .1 Volume control screwdriver adjustable. .2 ac power switch. .3 Fused primary. .4 'on' indicator light.
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7
2.9
POWER SUPPLY
.1
Power supply unit, well filtered, regulated, constant voltage under load. .1 Output: 24 V DC. .2 Input: 120 V, 60 Hz, nominal. .3 Rectifier, silicon full wave bridge. .4 Filter, choke and dual condensers. .5 Hook-up (+) (-) terminal strip with terminal screws. .6 Line cord: 2 m, 3 conductor with specially constructed strain relief.
2.10 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
.1 .2 .3
Tone signal generator for time and alarm signals. Interface with closed circuit television. Bridging control to provide facilities between local sound source and sound control rack. .1 Three pole, three position, non-shorting type switch with positions marked '1', 'off', '2', to allow programmes to originate, remain in or terminate. .2 Volume control to provide local volume regulations of programme received from console. .3 Programme control relay. Notch filters for accoustic treatment.
.4
Section 27 51 16 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.11 SOUND REPRODUCERS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Re-entrant type. Wall mounting. Finish colour: white. Outdoor, weather proof enclosure. Line transformer: 20 to 70 V primary with tapped secondary for volume adjustment.
2.12
P/A SPEAKERS
.1
Each speaker installation shall be complete, including where applicable, drivers, matching transformers, mounting brackets, acoustically treated back boxes and baffles selected with audio characteristics and physical construction compatible with the total system. Speakers shall be installed in security type enclosure. Baffle shall consist of high tensile strength cast aluminum alloy outer ring and stainless steel woven wire mesh speaker screen spun over and attached to sub-plate mounting assembly. 200 mm square surface mount enclosure and speaker. Speakers shall be installed in steel enclosure, painted white suitable for installation in non-inmate areas. Speakers shall be recess mounted in acoustically treated shallow type backbox and shall be provided with square aluminum baffle. 200 mm square flush mount speaker. 200 mm cone speaker, 5 watt, 152 gram ceramic magnet and 8 OHM voice coil. 90 dBA (4 watt) at 3 meters.
.2
.3 .4
.5 .6 .7
Section 27 51 16 Page 8 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated.
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Conduct intelligibility test and submit test report to Departmental Representative.
3.3
TESTS
.1
Perform tests in accordance with CSC Specification ES/SOW-0101 - Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) and ES/SOW-0102 - Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5).
END
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS
Section 27 51 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PRODUCT DATA
.1 .2
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include riser diagram, talk paths of complete intercom system.
.1 .2 .3
Provide data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Sections 01 78 00. Include description of system operation. Include parts list using component identification numbers standard to electronics industry.
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative . Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.3
.1
CSC Specifications: .1 ES/SOW-0101 - Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3). .2 ES/SOW-0102 - Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SOW-0404 - Electronic System Proposal Evaluation Criteria (Revision 1) .4 ES/SPEC-0006R2E - Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/SPEC-0303 - Limited Call Intercom System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2). EIA-310-C Electronic Industries Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment.
.2
Section 27 51 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS (Cont'd)
.3 .4 .5
CSA-C22.1-09 Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Part 1.

UL 2572. Drawings.
1.5
DEFINITIONS
.1
Definitions. .1 ATP - Acceptance Testing Procedure/Plan. .2 BSCS - Building Security & Communication System. .3 CEC - Canadian Electrical Code. .4 CER - Common Equipment Room. .5 CSA - Canadian Standards Association. .6 CSC - Correctional Service of Canada. .7 EIA - Electronic Industries Association. .8 ES - Electronic Systems. .9 FAAS - Facility Alarm Annunciation System. .10 GFE - Government Furnished Equipment. .11 GUI - Graphical User Interface. .12 LAN - Local Area Network. .13 LCIS - Limited Call Intercom System. .14 LCP - Local Control Post. .15 MCCP - Main Communications Control Post. .16 MTBF - Mean Time before Failure. .17 PC - Personal Computer. .18 PE - Principal Entrance. .19 PLC - Programmable Logic Controller. .20 PWC - Public Works Canada (PWGSC's predecessor). .21 PWGSC - Public Works & Government Services Canada. .22 PTT - Push-to-Talk. .23 RU - Rack Units (45mm vertical space in an EIA-310C standard equipment rack). .24 SAC - System Administration and Control. .25 SCP - Secure Control Post. .26 SOW - Statement of Work. .27 SPEC - Specification. .28 STD - Standard. .29 T&E - Telecommunications and Electronics. .30 TES - Telecommunications Equipment Space. .31 UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply. .32 VAC - Volts, Alternating Current. .33 VDC - Volts, Direct Current.
1.6 SYSTEM START-UP
.1
Provide instructions in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
Section 27 51 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1 .2
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 One (1) Digital Communication Controller (DCC). .2 One (1) Digital Communication Expander (DCE). .3 One (1) Station Port Adapter. .4 Two (2) Two Gang 1-button Intercom station .5 One (1) Two Gang 1-button Intercom station - weather proof. .6 One (1) Two Gang 2-button Intercom station. .7 One (1) Full duplex Handset. .8 One (1) 8 channel amplifier. .9 One (1) signal generator card. .10 One (1) trouble detector card. .11 One (1) trouble indicator card. .12 One (1) power supply. .13 One (1) distribution amplifier. Spare parts are to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled intercommunications and program spare parts cabinet.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Conduits: type EMT or rigid galvanized steel, size as indicated, in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Communication conductors: type, size as indicated, in accordance with Section 27 05 14.
.2
2.2 MASTER STATIONS
.1 .2
Electronic, desk type for un-interrupted two-way voice communication. Digital pushbutton system including: hands free operation, talk back and conference facilities, electronic switchboard complete with power supply, amplifiers. Hand set: with carbon button transmitter and magnetic receiver for confidential conversations. Privacy, incoming call, in-use, busy lights. Audible signalling by soft electronic chimes.
.3
.4 .5
Section 27 51 23 Page 4 2011-05-25
2.2 MASTER STATIONS (Cont'd)
.6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15
Manual noise free volume control.

Built-in volume-matic circuit to automatically adjust incoming and outgoing volume levels. Switching components to have, operating life expectancy exceeding 5,000,000 cycles. Built-in transistorized amplifier: output power of 3-7 W with sensitivity of 93 dB. Speaker: built-in 100 mm dia. Power consumption: 30 mA at standby, 70 mA at full output from 24 V supply. Input and output line impedance: 80 ohms. Cabinet: die-cast finish colour baked enamel. Interconnects: plug and socket. Ventilation: natural convection.
2.3
SUB-STATIONS
.1
Desk, Wall, Outdoor or Console type. .1 Signalling automatically sounds soft chime to indicate incoming calls. .2 Call origination switch, with palladium contacts, illuminated privacy indicator, printact relay, volume control, transformer and housing. .3 Speaker: 100 mm diameter 93 dB sensitivity, with permanent magnet of 20 g. .4 Rugged wire wound volume control to adjust incoming volume level. .5 Housing: die cast with colour baked enamel finish.
2.4
POWER SUPPLY
.1
Power supply unit, for selector switch type system, well filtered, regulated, constant voltage under load. .1 Output: 24 V DC at A. .2 Input: 110-120 V, 60 Hz. .3 Power consumption: 60 W. .4 Rectifier: silicon full wave bridge. .5 Filter, choke and dual capacitors. .6 Hook-up, (+) (-) terminal strip with terminal screws. .7 Line cord: 2 m, 3 conductor with specially constructed strain relief. .8 Housing: metal case.
Section 27 51 23 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.4 POWER SUPPLY (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .9 Finish: hammertone paint, colour: Black.
2.5 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
.1
Interface with pocket paging system.
2.6 MASTER VIDEO AND INTERCOM STATION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11
Hands-free. Colour video master monitor 89 mm TFT. Connection of 2 video door stations. Talk button for PTT or VOX activate communication. Door release button. Call in LED. Door chime. Communication volume control and brightness control. Built-in picture memory for 400 images. Voice memo for three (3) ten (10) second messages. Wall mount.
2.7 SUB-STATIONS VIDEO AND INTERCOM
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
Vandal resistant. Surface mount to single gang box with plate. Cast-zinc faceplate. Metal call button. Clear Lexan lens cover protects colour CCD camera. Speaker and microphone for communications. Illuminated call directory with white LED.
Section 27 51 23 Page 6 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install equipment as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Interconnect system components.
3.2
TESTS
.1 .2 .3
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Conduct intelligibility and performance test. Perform tests in accordance with CSC Specification ES/SOW-0101 - Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) and ES/SOW-0102 - Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5).
END
COMMISSIONING FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Section 28 08 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PURPOSE
.1 .2
To verify that installations are in accordance with project requirements. To ensure proper system operation.
1.2 COMMISSIONING ORGANIZATIONS
.1
Certified member of ECAO or CFAA.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning.
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROCEDURES
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Follow manufacturer's recommendations for testing. Inspect wiring connections to all devices comprising the system. Verify supervision of wiring at every device connection to a supervised circuit. Test operation of every device on a system to verify its function. Examine equipment for any apparent damage or tampering that may interfere with its intended operation. Test equipment with capabilities for field adjustment to establish that it functions as intended under the conditions prevailing at its point of installation. Examine devices for evidence of damage or obstructions which may interfere with their operating mechanisms.
.6
.7
Section 28 08 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
3.1 PROCEDURES (Cont'd)
.8 .9
Test automatic devices by simulating an operating condition.

Wiring: .1 Inspect every device and test to demonstrate that disconnection of the device from the circuit or malfunction of the equipment or wiring activates the required supervisory signals. Inspection shall include verification that: .1 Supervisory signals operate in response to open circuits, short circuits, ground faults and disconnection of plug-in components; .2 Terminations of conductors entering and leaving equipment have been made; .3 Circuit polarities are in accordance with the system design, where applicable. .2 In addition, test to establish that the power supplied to any device is within its recommended operating range and that the required voltage levels are maintained and that the fusing is correct. Initiating Devices - Manual: .1 Inspect manual alarm stations in consideration of the following: .1 The device shall be mounted with sufficient clearance to facilitate ease of access and proper operation; .2 Operate each manual alarm station, toggle switch and key switch to verify proper functions. Automatic heat detectors: .1 Use a heat source reproducible in its intensity, as recommended by the manufacturer of the device, to initiate an alarm. .2 Test equipment - Heat lamp or Air heater. DO NOT USE AN OPEN FLAME HEAT SOURCE. .3 Apply heat source as to not damage or operate fusible disc parts. Automatic heat detectors - non-resettable: .1 Test by simulating its electrical operation by jumpering the wiring points (creating a short) adjacent to its operating mechanism. Automatic smoke detectors - area type: .1 Test by introducing smoke into its detecting chamber. This may consist of actual smoke from burning materials or artificially generated smoke aerosol spray as recommended by
.10
.11
.12
.13
Section 28 08 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
.13
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) the manufacturer. The sensitivity should be noted and adjusted if necessary. Automatic smoke detectors: .1 Examine the air sampling arrangements of the detectors under actual conditions of balanced air circulation by conducting a check of the field sensitivity and a check of the air velocity in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. .2 Test gas to be used similar to Automatic Smoke Detector. Alarm signals - audible: .1 Test on main power supply and standby power supply with the maximum expected load on the system. .2 The audible signalling appliances shall function as intended and shall be audible throughout the building over the background noise present. .3 Decibel recordings in each are covering 100 sq. metres shall be taken. .4 The level of sound should usually be 15 dB above ambient noise level. Alarm signals - visual: .1 The visual signal appliances shall function as intended and shall be clearly visible. Annunciators, printers and workstations: .1 Inspect and operate to establish that their operation in conjunction with the control equipment and other system components, is as intended. The equipment shall be inspected to ensure: .1 The zone of each alarm initiating device is properly indicated; .2 The legend is clearly visible; .3 Adequate voltage under local conditions is present; .4 Wiring connections have been made in a workmanlike manner. .5 Proper care must be taken to establish that each item is complete and satisfactory. Standby power supplies - batteries: .1 Examine batteries for possible damage and consideration of the following: .1 The charging system functions as intended;
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
Section 28 08 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
.18
Standby power supplies - batteries:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .2 The installation has not resulted in the bypassing of a fuse or a similar protective device; .3 The installation protects the batteries from accidental or mechanical damage. .4 The batteries must be able to operate the fire alarm system with the charger input disconnected for one rated load cycle. Control equipment and transponders: .1 Test to establish that they function as intended. The following examinations and tests shall be performed: .1 A visual and physical inspection of all cables, plug interconnections, plug-in circuit components, lamps, sockets and controls to establish that their mechanical and electrical connections and mounting are as required for intended function and, where applicable, to confirm electrical supervision; .2 Verification that all field wiring is terminated in a workman-like manner; .3 All lamps and indicators shall be tested for operation and intended function; .4 All keypad functions shall be tested for operation and intended function; .5 All control unit functions shall be operated to verify appropriate response including all software routines and programme functions are simulated; .6 Simulation of open circuits, short circuits and ground faults on all relevant internal circuits in order to confirm the appropriate supervisory response; .2 Commissioning Report: .1 Provide in accordance with requirements of Section 01 91 00, supplemented as specified herein. .2 Report to include relevant information of the system including: .3 Each system part described. .4 How the system is operated. .5 What functions the system performs. .6 Requirements for tests and service. .7 Itemization of all devices connected on the system, their general location. .8 The date of the performed tests. .9 All pertinent details of the report sheets requested.
.19
Section 28 08 01 Page 5 2011-05-25
.19
Control equipment and transponders:(Cont'd) .3 Verification: .1 The Commissioning Report to be submitted to the Commissioning Manager upon completion of commissioning and will be subject to verification by the Commissioning Manager.
END
PATHWAYS FOR GUARD TOUR SYSTEM
Section 28 13 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal. Section 26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets. Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
.1
Empty guard tour raceways system consists of outlet boxes, cover plates, conduits, pull boxes, sleeves and caps and fish wires.
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal, conduit and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
PATHWAYS FOR GUARD TOUR SYSTEM
Section 28 13 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Conduits: Rigid galvanized and EMT type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings. Junction boxes, cabinets type E: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Outlet boxes, conduit boxes and fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Fish wire: polypropylene type. Outlet boxes for RFID type readers. Single gang deep box.
.2 .3 .4 .5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install empty raceway system, including distribution system, fish wire, outlet boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, miscellaneous and positioning material to complete system.
END
SECURITY DOOR SUPERVISION
Section 28 13 27 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
Programmable Logic Controllers. Graphical User Interfaces. Network Equipment. System Software. Magnetic Door Switches. Terminal Cabinets and Block. End of Line Resistors. Local Alarm.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (21st edition) Safety Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 94.1-07 and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 94.2-07 Non-hazardous enclosures. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70 National Electric Code. .2 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. .3 Electronic Industries Association (EIA) .1 EIA-310-C Electronic Industries .4 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 ULC-S317-96Installation and Classification of Closed Circuit Video Equipment (CCVC) Systems for Institutional and Commercial Security Systems. .2 Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) .3 UL 294 (1999) Standard for Safety for Access Control System Units. .4 UL 1076 (Revision 1) Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems. .5 Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment. .6 Standards Video Display Unit Electronic Systems. .7 CSC Telecommunications Standards: .1 ES/SOW-0101 - Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3)
.2
Section 28 13 27 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .7 (Cont'd) .2 ES/SOW-0102R6E - Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SPEC-0006R2E - Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .4 ES/SPEC-0303 - Limited Call Intercom System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/SOW-0404 Electronic System/Equipment Evaluation Criteria Guidelines .6 ES/STD-0803 Electronics Engineering .7 ES/SPEC-0900R2E - Door/Barrier/Gate Control System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2).
.1
System to consist of alarm control panel, motion detectors and intrusion switches located at door to be supervised. System to interface to the CCTV and intercom systems to send messages to each one and allow for interactive audio and video information when processing door calls. System to interface with fire hose cabinet solenoid valves for alarm monitoring. System to have the capability to review and print the data archive. System to interface with the MCCP S-100 FAAS console for this emergency feature to be reset from the MCCP.
.2
.3 .4 .5
1.4
WARRANTY
.1
Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Consultant's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Provide one year warranty on defective parts and installation labour, commencing on the date of system acceptance by CSC.
.2
Section 28 13 27 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC. Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. Onsite work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working onsite cooperate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements. All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the institutional staff. Contractor Experience .1 The contractor shall provide evidence of five years' experience in the detail design, supply and installation of Security Door Supervision Systems in Federal Correctional Facilities. .2 Contractor shall demonstrate full compliance with the mandatory requirements set out in ES/SPEC-0404, including corporate capability; qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to the project; a full understanding, and capability to fulfill warranty obligations; ability to obtain the necessary level of security clearance for its onsite personnel to the installation locations; and the ability to execute the Contract in the language designated at the installation site. Service Response Capability Contractor shall provide service response capability within 24 hours both during and after the system warranty period.
.2
.3 .4
.5 .6
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
General: Submit two sets hardcopy (paper) plus one set softcopy (computer files) documentation at each submittal. Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.1.
.2
Section 28 13 27 Page 4 2011-05-25
.3
Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.3.
Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fibre optic communications channels. Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 8.2. Operator Manual: Provide generic manual for touch-screen operation, as well as system-specific information summarizing the operator-training course content. Submit final copy of source code (uncompiled) of all softwares, PLC Programs on completetion of project.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.1 .2 .3
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Consultant. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
Section 28 13 27 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Equipment to be designed and manufactured in accordance with ISO-9001-1994 Quality System Standard. Manufacturer's quality control program to be registered in accordance with the above noted standard. Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Material will conform to the applicable requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories and the National Standards Institute. All system equipment and field devices to be held securely in place. Fastenings and supports shall be selected to provide a safety factor of three. All systems equipment equipped with plug in power connectors to be connected to a dedicated receptacle. Do not use tap connectors for plugging in multiple plugs into a single receptacle.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
.1
Enclosures: .1 Provide CSA Type 12 enclosures size 900 W x 900 H x (max) 300 D, suitable for wall mounting on concrete block wall. Provide hinged lockable door. Equip enclosure with removable backpan. .2 Allow for top and bottom entry of surface mount conduits. Power Supplies: .1 Provide 110 VAC/24 VDC power supply for door position switch contact wetting. Modular PLC equipment: .1 Use family components and input/output (I/O) modules as required. Field Wiring Terminations:
.2
.3
.4
Section 28 13 27 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (Cont'd)
.4
Field Wiring Terminations:(Cont'd) Use disconnect test terminal blocks and .1 fuse terminal blocks assembled on DIN rails with appropriate end plates and terminal markers. .2 Use wire guide to contain incoming field wiring and panel wiring. .3 Use heat-shrink wire markers on all cable and wire terminations. Network interfaces: .1 Use processors incorporating Ethernet communications interface.
.5
2.3 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACES
.1
Computers: .1 Provide rack-mount package, Industrial Grade PC. Minimum clock-speed 500 MHz. .2 Touch-screens: .1 Provide 450 mm LCD touch screens, desktop package in locations other than LCPs. Bottom-hinged display not acceptable. Comply with CSC's ES/STD-0803. .2 Provide 450 mm LCD touchscreens, panel-mount in LCPs. Comply with CSC's ES/STD-0803. .3 Pointing Devices: .1 Provide 2-button serial mouse.
2.4 NETWORK EQUIPMENT
.1
Fiber-optic Satellite Hub .1 Provide Micro-hub 10/100. Provide 8-drop micro-hub compatible with switch provided as GFE. Computer KVM Extenders .1 Provide ATen PC Extenders w/serial port, range up to 305 m.
.2
2.5 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
.1
Preference will be given to solutions where the system logic is resident in the PLC units and is not computer based. Computer displays for HMI is acceptable but the functionality should be limited to display functions only. The system design philosophy should be clearly identified in the proposal submission. PLC software .1 Use Ladder Logistics PLC programming and configuration language.
.2
Section 28 13 27 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.5 SYSTEM SOFTWARE (Cont'd)
.3 .4
LAN software Use Windows 2003 or compatible upgrade. .1

Software licenses .1 Issue software licenses to CSC authorizing the use of all supplied system software at Bath Institution in perpetuity and defining the terms and conditions of post-warranty software support, including provision of software upgrades if offered.
2.6 MAGNETIC DOOR SWITCHES
.1
Door switches: suitable for surface and flush mounting on door as indicated.
2.7 TERMINAL CABINETS AND BLOCKS
.1 .2
Terminal cabinets: Type T. In accordance with Section 26 05 31. Terminal Blocks: In accordance with Section 27 10 05.
2.8 END-OF-LINE RESISTORS
.1
Mount end-of-line resistors to control supervisory current in each circuit, in control panel.
2.9
LOCAL ALARM
.1
Buzzer for local alarm at each door location and mount in single gang box as indicated.
2.10 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE
.1
Provide space for the rack mounted PC for the Door Control System in the Intercom and Public Address, Inmate Cell Call, or CCTV rack. Provide clear labeling and partitioning in the rack.
2.11
SPARE PARTS
.1 .2
Provide all listed spare parts with spare parts list. Provide: .1 One .2 Two .3 One .4 One .5 Two .6 Two .7 One (1) (2) (1) (1) (2) (2) (1) 48 input/48 output combo module input modules output module KVM extender push buttons button operators 16 port fibre switch
Section 28 13 27 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.11 SPARE PARTS (Cont'd)
.2
Provide:(Cont'd) .8 One (1) rack mount server .9 One (1) touchscreen .10 One (1) relay base .11 Fifteen (15) relays. Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled security door supervision spare parts cabinet.
.3
2.12 CUFF MODE OPERATION
.1
Provide individual adjustable time delay for each sliding cell door to ensure consistent and accurate operation for each stage of the Cuff Mode Operation function.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Installation Methods .1 Install equipment so that manufacturers', ULC and CSA labels are visible and legible. All system components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as specified and shown. Units to be mounted outside or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproof or be mounted in weatherproof enclosures. Provide for and ensure that all equipment and systems will operate under the radio frequency interference at the site. Any remedial action will be at the Contractors cost. All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall. Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires (cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor) and pneumatic tubing (supplied by Section 11 19 12 DEC Contractor) in conduit and wire trays provided by Electrical Contractor (Division 26). Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted. Coordinate control cabling, low voltage wires and pneumatic tubing in conduit, raceways and
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 28 13 27 Page 9 2011-05-25
.6
(Cont'd) cable trays with Section 11 19 12 DEC Contractor and Electrical Contractor (Division 26). All serviceable devices such as locks and door position indicators shall have connection terminated with connectors provided by the hardware supplier. All connections on the controls side of the lock pigtail shall be secure and shall be terminated by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor.
.7
3.2 DETAILED DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
.1 .2 .3
Upon Contract Award, prepare and submit PDR to CSC Design Authority Upon CSC acceptance of PDR, prepare and submit FDR to CSC Design Authority Upon CSC acceptance of FDR, proceed with procurement, manufacture and staging of products compliant with FDR. Prepare subsystem configurations using licensed software. Prepare and submit ATP, training course outlines and materials and operating manual to CSC Design Authority. Conduct off-site Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) witnessed by CSC Design Authority, to demonstrate compliant subsystem operation, subsystem non-interference, system-wide control transfer and redundancy performance.
.4
.1
The primary purpose of the Door Control System (DCS) is to provide control and status monitoring of all secure doors in the facility. On a failure of the primary PLC the operator must be notified by an alarm that indicates the failure and what action is required. The system shall switch over to the secondary PLC and continue to operate. The system shall remain operational on the backup unit even if the primary comes back on-line. Switching back to the primary shall only occur if the secondary fails or by manual command from the maintenance terminal
.2
Section 28 13 27 Page 10 2011-05-25
.3
Systems shall have audible tones to alert the operator as follows: .1 Audible signals shall be clearly heard at any position within a Control Post. .2 Audible tones shall be user selectable. .3 Tones will be different and distinct for each system event. .4 The volume of the tone signal shall be adjustable. .5 Provide a disable function so that audible alarms can be eliminated on maintenance terminals and adjustable at each console position individually. .6 Audible tone for all changes from inactive to active state, i.e. communication failure, door forced open, server failure.
The DCS shall be connected to the other components of the BSCS system to provide fully integrated operation as described in this specification. The DCS shall be powered from UPS power and shall operate for a minimum of 30 minutes on UPS. The system shall provide for redundant file servers. The communications network between the PLC and the Field I/O shall be via the Ethernet network. The DCS shall provide data entry screens for addition, deletion or modification of all input and output points and their operating characteristics. Data entry shall be customized and allow system administrators to modify points without having to understand or use traditional PLC programming techniques such as ladder logic. The DCS shall provide data entry screens for the creation and modification of logical points. This would include the defining of doors where a door is the logical association of multiple and different low level points. Programming functions shall be from Microsoft Windows style dialog boxes, Microsoft design principles shall be applied for the creation of all data entry screens. For each door the system shall allow the definition of: .1 Input point for the door monitor switch. .2 Input point for the lock status switch. .3 Output point that activates the lock. .4 Intercom stations on either side of the door.
.4
.5
.6 .7 .8
.9
Section 28 13 27 Page 11 2011-05-25
.9
(Cont'd) CCTV cameras on either side of the door. .5 .6 Amount of time the door lock is activated for .7 Amount of time the alarm switches are bypassed or shunted when the door is commanded to open. .8 Membership in a door interlock group. .9 The above items are intended to present a general intent and is not a complete listing of required functions. Submit with graphic screen presentation samples of all data entry screens for all system functions specified herein. These items are to be considered a shop drawing submittal. The system shall have a master disable icon on primary workstations. Activation of this icon shall cause the system to suspend all functions at all operator consoles in the room. The workstations will be reset in the BSCS equipment room via the maintenance screen. Install an Unman Switch in the vestibule outside the LCP that is connected to the system in such a manner that activating it will disable all monitoring and control functions in the LCP. This can be done by disabling the AC power or through software features. Enabling the system will be done in the BSCS room. A device icon (door) selected at a workstation shall only be controllable (lock/unlock) from that same workstation while it is selected. Other workstations that display that same icon shall indicate that the device has been selected but shall not be controllable until the first location has unselected or completed the operation. Following a power failure the door control system shall resume normal operation without human intervention and shall display the real time status of all the doors. Operators will be required to login on restoration of the system. Power failure is defined as any action or activity that causes a loss of electricity to the system motherboard. The system shall provide for an orderly shutdown. Orderly shutdowns shall close all files and protect data such that no data is lost during the shutdown process.
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
Section 28 13 27 Page 12 2011-05-25
.15
Any number of cell doors, up to the maximum installed complement shall be capable of group operation without a system overload.
The unlocking of doors shall executable at any time regardless of whether there is an intercom connection to the door or not. The audio switcher intercom channels will remain active when changing screens. The DCS shall log all events and activities to a database. Include a flexible reporting module that allows retrieval of all information or subsets of information.
.16
.17
3.4
SCOPE OF WORK
.1
Detail-design, supply, install, configure, program and commission new DCS subsystem in accordance with CSC's ES/SPEC-0900 and as shown on the Drawings. Operator shall be provided with the capability to identify the occupant of each cell with a 4-character numeric or abbreviation configurable from the touch-screen GUI. Detail-design, supply, install, configure, program and commission two new operator interfaces in accordance with CSC's ES/SPEC-0900 and as shown on the Drawings. Operator Interface shall be associated with alternate control of any networked DCS subsystem. Detail-design, configure, program and commission a local area network (LAN) as shown on the Drawings. Interface the door control system and the electrical systems for the control of lighting throughout the Unit. All lighting zones are to be controlled from the touch screens in the Local Control Post. In the cells individual controls for the room light, night light and cell receptacle are to be provided. Install a separate PLC in the electrical room along with the necessary interface input/ output modules and terminal blocks to control these functions. Provide functionality and indicate interlock doors on screen. System design will include monitoring of Fire Hose Cabinets.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6 .7
Section 28 13 27 Page 13 2011-05-25
3.4 SCOPE OF WORK (Cont'd)
.8
Integrate DCS subsystems and LAN into one complete DCS employing control transfer and redundant operation as shown on the Drawings.
Provide all documentation, reports, plans, schedules, and manuals as defined within ES/SOW-0101. Provide all specified spare parts and service manuals for maintenance of the Security Door Supervision system. Provide complete listing of provided parts including quantity, manufacturer, model number, and unit price.
.9
.10
3.5
SCHEDULE
.1
The general contractor will be responsible for establishing and coordinating the project schedule. Documentation pre-requisites .1 Installation shall not commence until Preliminary and Final Design Reports (PDR/FDR) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. .2 Acceptance testing shall not commence until project-specific Acceptance Testing Procedures (ATP) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. Operator and Maintenance Technician Training shall not commence until project-specific Training course outlines and trainee handouts defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. System substantial performance and commencement of the warranty period shall not commence until acceptable ATPs have been completed and signed off by both Contractor and CSC Technical Authority, and Operator training is complete. Substantial performance may nevertheless be granted in the presence of noted deficiencies at the discretion of the Crown. Final completion will not be granted until system is in full operation, all noted deficiencies have been cleared and all documentation deliverables have been received by the Crown in the quantities specified.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 28 13 27 Page 14 2011-05-25
3.6 CO-ORDINATION WITH INSTITUTIONAL OPERATIONS
.1
Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC. Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. On-site work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working on-site co-operate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements.
.2
3.7 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
.1
System operation: when supervised door is opened, zone indicating lamp flashes and operates audible alarm at control panel. When "acknowledge" button is operated, audible signal is silenced and flashing light changes to steady glow. System restored to normal when door is closed and "reset" key switch on control panel operated. Buzzer located at each door to give pulsating signal when door opened. Upon acknowledgment from control panel signal to change to continuous note. Buzzer at door location to be silenced only after door reclosed and "reset" key switch operated. Closing of door alone not to affect signal once it has started to sound. When deactivating switch is operated, supervised door on that zone opened without causing alarm. Zone trouble lamp illuminated when zone is deactivated but audible trouble signal not to sound. Fault in wiring of one zone to cause audible signal to sound even if zone in deactivated position. The following Interlock Groups are to be provided so that no door will open in the Interlock Group should one of the other doors is already open. .1 Interlock Group A:
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 28 13 27 Page 15 2011-05-25
3.7 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION (Cont'd)
.6
(Cont'd)
S2-003 S2-005 S2-029 S2-035 S2-059 S2-083 S2-089 .2 S2-005 S2-030 S2-006 S2-018 .3 S2-035 S2-031 S2-036 S2-048 .4 S2-059 S2-084 S2-060 S2-072 .5 S2-089 S2-085 S2-090 S2-102 .6 S2-029 S2-030 S2-031 S2-032 .7 S2-083 S2-084 S2-085 S2-086 .8 S2-001 S2-002 .9 S2-032 S2-033
To dome from lobby To dining G from dome To Gym 1 from dome To dining H from dome To dining I from dome To Gym 2 from dome To dining J from dome Interlock Group B: To dining G from dome To Gym 1 from dining G Lower Range (G-1) Upper Range (G-2) Interlock Group C: To dining H from dome To Gym 1 from dining G Lower Range (H-1) Upper Range (H-2) Interlock Group D: To dining I from dome To Gym 2 from dining I Lower Range (I-1) Upper Range (I-2) Interlock group E: To dining J from dome To Gym 2 from dining I Lower Range (J-1) Upper Range (J-2) Interlock Group F: To Gym 1 from To Gym 1 from To Gym 1 from Interior Yard Interlock Group G: dome dining G dining H sallyport door
To Gym 2 from dome To Gym 2 from dining I To Gym 2 from dining J Inner Yard sallyport door Interlock Group H: Exterior to Vestibule sallyport Vestibule sallyport to Lobby Interlock Group I: Inner Yard sallyport door Outer Yard sallyport door
Section 28 13 27 Page 16 2011-05-25
3.7 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION (Cont'd)
.6
(Cont'd)
.10 S2-086 S2-087 .7
Interlock Group J: Inner Yard sallyport door Outer Yard sallyport door
All Interlocks must be able to be disabled so that individual door operation can be easily enabled for each Interlock Group doors.
3.8 GRAPHIC SCREENS
.1
Develop a complete set of graphic screens that provide the functionality shown in the following examples and as described herein. Contractors shall submit three drafts and one final version of the screens prior to installing the screens on the system. Users shall provide feedback and this feedback will be incorporated in to the next submission. Complete all screen submissions and install on the system for the FAT. These sample screens are to convey the general intent and do not include all details. Contractor is to confirm final operating characteristics with CSC. Costs for this consultation and the subsequent changes are to be included in the total contact price. Ensure that interlocked doors are included in the "Screen Layouts", "Control System Operation", and "Logging and Reporting" sections. Sample Legend
.2
.3
.4
.5
Figure 1: Legend, attached. .6 Sample Screens .1 The general operation of the system will be to navigate to the respective screen using the navigation pane then select the item or items to be actioned and execute the appropriate action from the action area. .2 Selection of one of the four cell range screens with the navigation menu will cause the four cameras in the respective range to be displayed on the CCTV viewing screen adjacent the DCS touch screen. The camera display shall be in a quad display mode with the upper range
Section 28 13 27 Page 17 2011-05-25
3.8 GRAPHIC SCREENS (Cont'd)
.6
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) cameras in the two upper quadrants and the lower range in the lower quadrants. .3 When using other screens the selection of cameras will be based on which door is selected. In all cases display at least the two closest cameras to the selected door on the quad display and blank any quadrants not used. .4 The Logout, System Disable and All Call buttons are common to all screens and operate as follows: .1 Logout - selecting this button will logoff the current operator and will then display the logon screen. The touch screen will be inactive until a new operator logs on. .2 System Disable - this button will shutdown all terminals in the Control Post will be equivalent to pressing the emergency mushroom button located at the exit to the Post. Unless it can be accomplished in software we suggest disabling 120 VAC to all equipment in the Control Post. Re-enabling the equipment will be done from the BSCS Room on Level Two. .3 All Call - Pressing the All Call button will turn on all amplifiers and connect the microphone to the paging system. Provide a visual feedback when the amplifiers are ready to page (this feedback applies to all call paging and zone paging on the paging screen). .5 Selection Pane .1 The selection pane allows operators to select one or more cell doors for action as well as the slider doors between the cells and the most common movement areas for inmates (to programs and drug dispensary). .2 To select one or more cells an operator can select all cells by using the Select All button or can select each cell individually by touching the cell button. Each selected cell will have a coloured ring around it. When a cell is selected it can be deselected by touching the cell button again. To deselect all cells use the Clear Selection button. .3 Selecting sliding movement doors is similar you just touch the respective door and it will be selected. One difference with movement doors is that only one can be selected at one time.
Section 28 13 27 Page 18 2011-05-25
.6
(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) .4 Once the cell(s) is selected it can be actioned using the action buttons. .6 Action Buttons .7 Open, Close and Stop - These buttons will perform the described action. If the Partial Open Button is selected before pressing the Open or Close buttons then the door will stop at the partial open position when it is opening or closing. .8 Intercom Connection - If the barrier has an intercom station pressing this button will connect to the door station and the operator will be able to speak to the person from the master station. .9 Cell Excluded - cells that are excluded will not be included in any group actions until such times as the cell is selected and the Cell Excluded button pressed again. This is to allow cells to be taken out of service or to leave an inmate in his cell. .10 Gang Lock/ Unlock- these buttons will open all twelve cells in the range at one time. Due to the risk involved in doing this if the Gang Unlock is pressed a confirmation button will display and must be pressed before the action will be executed. .11 Interlock Group K: S2-145 Correctional Officer to SallyPort S2-146 SallyPort to Open Staff Station S2-147 SallyPort to Stair 1 .12 Interlock Group L: S2-147 SallyPort To Stair 1 S2-148 Stair to Unit Control. Button Design .1 Buttons are to be design with a three dimensional look and will show depressed when active. Buttons that change state and latch i.e. Intercom connected are to display a unique colour in either state. .2 Coordinate all button colours and states with CSC during the design phase. Cell Button States .1 Cell buttons shall have at minimum the following states .1 Door is closed and locked .2 Door is open .3 Door is partially open .4 Door is in travel .5 Door is excluded .6 Door is selected
.7
.8
Section 28 13 27 Page 19 2011-05-25
.9
Barrier Door States Barrier doors will have at minimum the .1 following states .1 Door is closed and locked .2 Door is open .3 Door is in travel .4 Door is selected .5 Intercom Call has been placed from the door station
Refer Figure 2: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range G, attached. Figure 3: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range H, attached. Figure 4: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range I, attached. Figure 5: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range J, attached. Figure 6: Movement Doors Screen, attached. .10 Refer to Figure 6: Movement Doors Screen, door operations here shall generally be the same as operating barrier doors from the cell screens. When doors are swing type then the appropriate action button for Unlock will display. When the selected door is a slider then the open, close and stop buttons will display. The Door buttons shall have the following states: .1 Door is closed and locked .2 Door is open .3 Door is in travel .4 Door is selected .5 Intercom Call has been placed from the door station
Figure 7: Emergency Evacuation Screen, attached. .11 Refer to Figure 7: Emergency Evacuation Screen, these buttons shall operate in the same manner as movement screens except the door will remain unlocked until the operator actions the Secure Fire Unlocked Doors button, this is to allow all persons to exit to a safe point without being locked in.
Figure 8: Zone Paging Screen, attached. .12 Zone paging will allow operators to page individual zones or zone groups. The buttons will indicate when selected and when the amplifiers are ready the ready to page
Section 28 13 27 Page 20 2011-05-25
.12
(Cont'd) indication will display. When the operator presses the push to talk button on the intercom master all selected zones will receive the page.
Figure 9: Utility Control, attached. .13 Refer to Figure 9: Utility Control, this screen shall operate generally as other screens where the item is selected and then actioned on or off. The current state of the function is to be displayed.
3.9
SITE TESTS
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code. Test system components in presence of Departmental Representative to ensure correct operation of system. On completion of tests, submit to Departmental Representative certificate listing components tested.
3.10 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
.1
Upon completion of the work and during interim periods as required under the Contract, perform all final adjustments of levels, timing, equalization, limits, and operational sequences. Conduct detailed testing of all systems and equipment. Submit certified test results to the Consultant for review. Conduct commissioning procedures as required under the Contract. Submit report of results together with all required statements and certificates.
.2
.3
END
Figure 1: Legend
Figure 2: Door, Lighting and Receptacle Control Range G
Figure 3: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range H
Figure 4: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range I
Figure 5: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range J
Figure 6: Movement Doors Screen
Figure 7: Emergency Evacuation Screen
Figure 8: Zone Paging Screen
Figure 9: Utility Control
EMERGENCY INMATE CELL CALL
Section 28 13 29 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4
Call Originating Devices (COD) Call Cancellation Devices (CCD) Primary Annunciation and Control GUI Data Logging.
1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
.1
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70, Article 517, National Electric Code. .2 NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) .1 REC 12749, Power Supplies. .2 RS 16051, Sound Systems.
.2
.1
Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (21st edition) Safety Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4-M90 (R2010), Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors for Communication Systems. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70 National Electric Code. .2 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) .1 EIA-310-C Electronic Industries .2 REC 12749, Power Supplies. .3 ANSI/EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 ULC S317-96 Installation and Classification of Closed Circuit Video Equipment (CCVC) Systems for Institutional and Commercial Security Systems. .2 Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) .3 UL 294 (1999) Standard for Safety for Access Control System Units. .4 UL 1076 (Revision 1) Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems.
.2
.3
.4
Section 28 13 29 Page 2 2011-05-25
.5 .6
Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment.

CSC Telecommunications Standards: .1 ES/SOW-0101 - Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 ES/SOW-0102 - Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SOW-0404 - Electronic System Proposal Evaluation Criteria (Revision 1) .4 ES/SPEC-0006R2E - Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/SPEC-0500R4E - Inmate Cell Call System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .6 ES/SPEC-0900R2E - Door/Barrier/Gate Control System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .7 ES/STD-0803 - Video Display Unit Electronic Systems (Revision 2).
1.4
DEFINITIONS
.1
Definitions: .1 ATP Acceptance Testing Procedure/Plan .2 CEC Canadian Electrical Code .3 CER Common Equipment Room .4 CSA Canadian Standards Association .5 CSC Correctional Service of Canada .6 DCS Door Control System/subsystem .7 DIN Deutsches Institute fur Normung (a European Standards Organization) .8 ECCS Emergency Cell Call System .9 EIA Electronic Industries Association .10 ES Electronic Systems .11 FAAS Facility Alarm Annunciation System .12 FAT Factory Acceptance Test .13 FDR Final design Report .14 GFE Government Furnished Equipment .15 GUI Graphical User Interface .16 I/O Input/Output .17 ICCS Inmate Call System .18 KVM Keyboard/Video/Mouse .19 LAN Local Area Network .20 LCIS Limited Call Intercom System .21 LCP Local Control Post .22 MCCP Main Communications Control Post .23 MTBF Mean Time before Failure .24 PDC Power Distribution Centre .25 PDR Preliminary Design Report .26 PUI PIDS Integration Unit .27 PLC Programmable Logic Controller
Section 28 13 29 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
Definitions:(Cont'd) .28 PWC Public Works Canada (PWGSC's predecessor) .29 PWGSC Public Works & Government Services Canada .30 PTT Push-to-Talk .31 RU Rack Units (45mm vertical space in an EIA-310C standard equipment rack) .32 SAC System Administration and Control .33 SCP Secure Control Post .34 SOW Statement of Work .35 SPEC Specification .36 STD Standard .37 T&E Telecommunications and Electronics .38 TES Telecommunications Equipment Space .39 UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply .40 VAC Volts, Alternating Current .41 VDC Volts, Direct Current.
1.5 DESIGN PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Provide an ECCS complete with Call Originating Devices, key operated Call Cancellation Devices and annunciation at the LCP. .1 Provide backup monitoring capability for the ECCS at the MCCP, route the signal from the COD to the MCCP if it is not answered at the LCP. .2 The Inmate Cell Call alarms are to be displayed and recorded on the FAAS in the MCCP. .3 Provide equipment, cabling, installation, programming, configuration, software interface, testing, and training for upgrade to existing FAAS system for datalogging of cell call in the 96 bed living unit. Environment: Design components and systems to operate with all specified requirements under following ambient temperatures: .1 Indoor installations: .1 Temperature: 0C to 30C. .2 Humidity: 10 to 90%. .2 Outdoor installations: .1 Temperature: -40C to 60C. .2 Humidity: 10 to 100%.
.2
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Section 28 13 29 Page 4 2011-05-25
.2
Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .1 Submit shop drawings to indicate project layout, camera locations, point-to-point diagrams, cable schematics, risers, mounting details and identification labelling scheme including: .1 Functional description of equipment. .2 Technical data sheets of all devices. .3 Device location plans and cable lists.
Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .1 Submit one sample of each COD, CCD, Primary Annunciation and Control selected complete with housing, brackets and mounting hardware. .2 Samples will be returned for incorporation into work as appropriate. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. .1 Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Certificates: Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .1 Submit UL Product safety Certificates. .2 Submit verification Certificate that service company is "UL List alarm service company". .3 Submit verification Certificate that monitoring facility is "UL Listed central station". .4 Submit verification Certificate that video surveillance system is "Certified alarm system". .3 Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. .4 Manufacturer's Field Services: Submit copies of manufacturer's field reports. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Include following: .1 System configuration and equipment physical layout.
.3
.4
.5
Section 28 13 29 Page 5 2011-05-25
.5
Maintenance Data:(Cont'd) .4 Manufacturer's Field Services:(Cont'd) .2 Functional description of equipment. .3 Instructions on operation, adjustment and cleaning. .4 Illustrations and diagrams to supplement procedures. .5 Manufacturer's operation instructions. Document Requirements: .1 General: Submit three copies of each hard and computer disk copies of all documents in accordance with ES/SOW0101. .2 Submit ten copies of operational manuals in accordance with ES/SOW0101. .3 Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Section 4.1. .4 Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Section 4.3. .5 Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fiber optic communications channels. .6 Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW 0101 9 Section 8.2.3 Operator and Maintenance Technician Training shall not commence until project-specific Training course outlines and trainee handouts defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. Operator Manual(s): All CCTV related components and provide generic manual for touch9screen operation, CCTV interface, as well as system specific information summarizing the operator training course content. Maintenance Manual: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Section.
.6
.7
.8
.1 .2 .3
Deposit packaging materials in appropriate container on site for recycling or reuse. Avoid using landfill waste disposal procedures when recycling facilities are available. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard.
Section 28 13 29 Page 6 2011-05-25
.4
Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene and plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin.
1.8
WARRANTY
.1
Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Consultant's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Provide one year warranty on defective parts and installation labour, commencing on the date of substantial completion.
.2
.1
Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC. Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. Onsite work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working onsite cooperate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements. All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the institutional staff. Contractor Experience .1 The contractor shall provide evidence of five years' experience in the detail design, supply and installation of Emergency Inmate Cell Call Systems in Federal Correctional Facilities. .2 Contractor shall demonstrate full compliance with the mandatory requirements set out in ES/SPEC-0404, including corporate capability; qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to the project; a full understanding, and capability to fulfill warranty obligations; ability to obtain the necessary level of security clearance for its onsite personnel to the installation locations;
.2
.3 .4
Section 28 13 29 Page 7 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) and the ability to execute the Contract in the language designated at the installation site. Service Response Capability .1 Contractor shall provide service response capability within 24 hours both during and after the system warranty period.
.5
1.10
SCOPE OF WORK
.1
The word `provide' shall mean to detail-design, supply and install, configure and test, program, commission and warrant the system. Provide a new Cell Call Subsystem in accordance with the CSC ES/ ES/SPEC-0500 and as shown on the drawings utilizing state-of-art technology with major brand name from a manufacturer with ISO9001 or better standards. Provide a completed system with all necessary components, programming, commissioning, patch cables, and interface devices as required and regardless of mention to provide a complete functioning system. Provide all required software updates and telephone technical support for no less then five years from the date of substantial completion. All cables must be installed in rigid steel conduit fitted with double the normal number of support hangar. Administration areas not normally accessed by inmates may use standard EMT. Conduits will be provided by Division 26. Review the scope of work as defined in Division 26 and include any additional raceways that may be required to suit the system being installed. Use CAT-6 cable with a specific colour different from the rest of the facility's colour coding to clearly identify the cable as for use with the Cell Call system. Provide all specified spare parts and service manuals for maintenance of the Cell Call system. Provide complete listing of provided parts including quantity, manufacturer, model number, and unit price.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 28 13 29 Page 8 2011-05-25
1.11
DESCRIPTION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Call Originating Devices (COD). Call Cancellation Devices (CCD). Primary Annunciation and Control (GUI). Data Logging shall be via the PIU FAAS.
1.12 CELL CALL GENERAL OPERATION
.1
Refer to ES/SPEC-0500.
1.13 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.14 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
2.1
MATERIALs
.1
Cell call equipment to be designed and manufactured in accordance with ISO-9001 1994 Quality System Standard. Manufacturer's quality control program to be registered in accordance with the above noted standard. Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Material will conform to the applicable requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories and the National Standards Institute. All system equipment and field devices to be held securely in place. Fastenings and supports shall be selected to provide a safety factor of three. All systems equipment equipped with plug in power connectors to be connected to a dedicated receptacle. Do not use tap connectors for
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 28 13 29 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.1 MATERIALs (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) plugging in multiple plugs into a single receptacle.
2.2
JUNCTION BOX
.1
Metal, sized to handle all system conduit interconnections with appropriate expansion.
2.3 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
.1
Ensure that all equipment and systems are capable of operating under RFI conditions at the site. All corrective action is to be at the Contractors cost.
2.4 IN CELL CALL ORIGINATING DEVICE
.1 .2
In cell COD shall be a vandal resistant long life switch designed for this purpose. Units to be designed for mounting in concrete or block walls with the switch on the opposite side of the wall from the actuator to provide an extremely high level of ruggedness and security. In cell COD to be mounted don heavy duty 11 gauge cover plate mounted to the back box with approved security screws. Units to include line supervision circuitry. Call Originating Device refer to detail sheet.
.3
.4 .5
2.5 CALL CANCELLATION DEVICE
.1
Call cancellation device to be cylinder operated switch mounted on 11 gauge steel single gang plate. To be of same manufacturer and model to match cylinders used in existing institution. All Call Cancellation Device cylinders to be keyed to the same key. Refer to detail sheet. Provide 50 keys with the project.
.2 .3
.1
Provide an equipment enclosure (rack) to house the Cell Call equipment. Rack shall be complete with all necessary ventilation fans, power supplies, storage drawers, rear locking door, and front smoked glass locking door. Rack must meet CSC standard for Racks EIA-310-C. Provide
Section 28 13 29 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.6 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) cable management devices to allow for future moves, adds and changes without tools. Ensure sufficient venting for racks below the cable tray in the BSCS room. Do not raise the cable tray beyond the height as mandated by code.
.2
2.7
WIRE AND CABLE
.1
CSC Specification ES/SPEC-0006 - Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) applies. Factory manufactured field interface cables to be provided, as required for all: .1 Master station ports. .2 Station control card ports. Field wiring to conform to manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise noted, all wiring is to be installed in conduit or wireways. If more or larger conduit is required than exists or is indicated on the drawings, allow for such additional conduit in contract price. All cable within equipment racks, cupboards, and cabinets, or on backboards, to be neatly bundled and secured. Wires shall not be nicked, have strands removed, or have frayed strands when removing insulation or terminating. Factory manufactured interface cables to be provided for each field interface board. Terminal blocks to be provided in cabinet or on backboard for factory cable interface to field wiring. Wiring shall be executed in strict adherence to standard broadcast practices. Colour identification of wiring: .1 Identify wiring by continuous insulation colour. .2 Where multi-conductor cables are used, use the same colour-coding system for identification throughout.
.2
.3 .4 .5
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10
Section 28 13 29 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.7 WIRE AND CABLE (Cont'd)
.11 .12
Maintain uniform phasing and colour-coding throughout system.

Name identification of wiring: .1 Identify wiring at all equipment locations, pull boxes, junction boxes and outlet boxes. .2 Develop a uniform identification scheme for use throughout the system. .3 Record wire name identification on all applicable drawings and provide wiring tables within the operating and installation manuals. Use one of the following marking materials: .1 Heat shrink sleeves. .2 Clear plastic tape wrap-on strips with designated labelling sections. .3 Slip-on identification bead markers or sleeves.
.13
2.8
SPARE PARTS
.1 .2
Provide all listed spare parts with spare parts list. Provide: .1 Ten (10) 0.5 A Fuses .2 Ten (10) 5 A Fuses .3 oNE (1) 24 V 16pt input/12pt output monitored module. .4 One (1) 24 V 32pt input module. .5 Ten (1) COD and CCD devices. .6 One (1) LCD touchscren operator panel. Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled cell call spare parts cabinet.
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DETAILED DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
.1 .2 .3
Upon Contract Award, prepare and submit PDR to CSC Design Authority. Upon CSC acceptance of PDR, prepare and submit FDR to CSC Design Authority. Upon CSC acceptance of FDR, proceed with procurement, manufacture and staging of products compliant with FDR. Prepare subsystem configurations using licensed software. Prepare and submit ATP, training course outlines and materials and operating manual to CSC Design Authority.
Section 28 13 29 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.1 DETAILED DESIGN DEVELOPMENT (Cont'd)
.4
Conduct off-site Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) witnessed by CSC Design Authority, to demonstrate compliant subsystem operation, subsystem non-interference, and system-wide control transfer and redundancy performance.
Provide all work for inmate cell call alarms to be displayed, controlled, and logged on the FAAS, in the MCCP. New cell call annunciation and controls on the FAAS are to be consistent with existing system naming conventions and procedures. Confirm response procedures with Owner regarding delay times for response from the MCCP.
.5
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
.1
Inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. Verify the accuracy of all dimensions, allowance, and clearances on site prior to commencing with any work that may be affected by those dimensions, allowances, and clearances. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in the Contract Documents. All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the Work, completed or in progress is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Precautions shall be taken to guard against electrostatic and electromagnetic susceptibility and interference. Provide adequate ventilation for all heat radiating equipment.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 28 13 29 Page 13 2011-05-25
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS (Cont'd)
.9
Install equipment so as to provide maximum safety to the operating and maintenance personnel.
3.3 METHOD OF WORK
.1 .2 .3
METHOD OF WORK Work to be performed by fully competent technicians in a thorough manner. All workmanship to be of the highest quality and meet recognized standards of craftsmanship. Areas of installation deemed not acceptable by the Owner to be redone at the Contractor's expense.
.1
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and datasheet. Manufacturers' directions shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of equipment or materials used in the Work furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or Specifications.
.2
3.5
INSTALLATION
.1
Installation shall not commence until Preliminary and Final Design Reports (PDR/FDR) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the Institutional staff. Provide complete Inmate cell call system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Install cable, boxes, mounting hardware, brackets, and system components in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install components secure, properly aligned and in locations shown on reviewed shop drawings.
.2 .3 .4
.5
Section 28 13 29 Page 14 2011-05-25
.6
Install equipment so that manufacturers', ULC and CSA labels are visible and legible. Install ULC labels where required.
Units to be mounted outside or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproof or be mounted in weatherproof enclosures. Engrave all cell call coverplates with "CALL", including installed coverplates and spares. Coverplates to be engraved prior to installation. Nylon tubing for Section 11 19 12 shall be run with the low voltage device wires in conduit, raceways or cable trays. Low voltage wire and pneumatic tubing shall be pulled in the same conduit raceway by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Nylon tubing must be run continuously from pneumatic lock to manifold in BSCS Room, or other designated location where pneumatic manifolds will be installed. Splices or tees shall NOT be permitted. Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor is responsible for pulling the nylon tubing.
.7
.8
.9
.1
Manufacturer's Services: .1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this Section, review Work involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning, of its products and submit written reports, in acceptable format, to verify compliance of Work with Contract. .2 Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.7 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
.1
General: Submit two sets hardcopy (paper) plus one set softcopy (computer files) documentation at each submittal. Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.1. Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.3.
.2
.3
Section 28 13 29 Page 15 2011-05-25
3.7 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION (Cont'd)
.4
Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fibre-optic communications channels.
Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 8.2. Operator Manual(s): All CCTV related components and provide generic manual for touch-screen operation, CCTV interface, as well as system-specific information summarizing the operator-training course content.
.5
.6
3.8
VERIFICATION
.1
Operator and Maintenance Technician Training shall not commence until project-specific Training course outlines and trainee handouts defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. System substantial performance and commencement of the warranty period shall not commence until acceptable ATPs have been completed and signed off by both Contractor and CSC Technical Authority, and Operator training is complete. Substantial performance may nevertheless be granted in the presence of noted deficiencies at the discretion of the Crown. Final completion will not be granted until system is in full operation, third party written tests submitted and verified by the Departmental Representative, all noted deficiencies have been cleared and all documentation deliverables have been received by the Crown in the quantities specified. Acceptance testing shall not commence until project Acceptance Testing Procedures (ATP) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. Conduct offsite Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) witnessed by CSC Design Authority, to demonstrate compliant subsystem operation, subsystem non-interference, system-wide control transfer and redundancy performance.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 28 13 29 Page 16 2011-05-25
.6
Obtain reports, within 3 days of review, and submit, immediately, to the Departmental Representative . Upon completion of the work and during interim periods as required under the Contract, perform all final adjustments of levels, timing, equalisation, limits, and operational sequences.
Conduct detailed testing of all systems and equipment. Submit test results to the Departmental Representative for review. Conduct commissioning procedures as required under the Contract. Submit report of results together with all required statements and certificates. Final completion will not be granted until system is in full operation, all noted deficiencies have been cleared and all documentation deliverables have been received by the Crown in the quantities specified. Perform verification inspections and test in the presence of Departmental Representative. .1 Provide all necessary tools, ladders and equipment. .2 Ensure appropriate subcontractors, and manufacturer's representatives are present for verification. Visual verification: Objective is to assess quality of installation and assembly and overall appearance to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Visual inspection to include: .1 Sturdiness of equipment fastening. .2 Non existence of installation related damages. .3 Compliance of device locations with reviewed shop drawings. .4 Compatibility of equipment installation with physical environment. .5 Inclusion of all accessories. .6 Device and cabling identification. .7 Application and location of ULC approval decals. Technical verification: Purpose to ensure that all systems and devices are properly installed and free of defects and damage. Technical verification includes: .1 Measurements of tension and power. .2 Connecting joints and equipment fastening. .3 Measurements of signals (dB, baud rate, etc).
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
Section 28 13 29 Page 17 2011-05-25
.12
Technical verification:(Cont'd) .4 Compliance with manufacturer's specification, product literature and installation instructions. Operational verification: Purpose to ensure that devices and systems' performance meet or exceed established functional requirements. Operational verification includes: .1 Operation of each device individually and within its environment. .2 Operation of each device in relation with programmable schedule and or/specific functions. .3 Demonstrate: .1 Refer to ES/SPEC-0500.
.13
3.9 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
.1 .2 .3
Remove protective coverings from components. Adjust for correct function. Clean housing, system components, free from marks, packing tape, and finger prints, in accordance with manufacturer's written cleaning recommendations.
END
PORTABLE PERSONAL ALARM SYSTEM (PPA)
Section 28 16 02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 GENERAL
.1
System. .1 Software .2 Receiver .3 High Gain Antenna Transmitters. Transmitter Programmer. Power supply. UPS. Cable.
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6
.1
CSC Specifications: .1 ES/SOW-0101 - Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 ES/SOW-0102 - Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SOW-0404 - Electronic System Proposal Evaluation Criteria (Revision 1) .4 ES/SPEC-0006R2E - Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/SPEC-0600R2E - Personal Portable Alarm Systems (Revision 2) .6 ES/SPEC-0601 - Fixed Point Security Alarm System (Revision 2) .7 ES/SPEC-0602 - PPA system (Revision 3) Canadian Standards Association (CSA) International .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (21st edition) Safety Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4-M90 (R2010), Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors for Communication Systems. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) .1 REC 12749, Power Supplies. .2 ANSI/EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) .1 UL 1635 (1996) The Standard for Digital Alarm Communicator System Units.
.2
.3
.4
Section 28 16 02 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1
Definitions: .1 ATP - Acceptance Testing Procedure/Plan .2 BSCS - Building Security & Communication System .3 CEC - Canadian Electrical Code .4 CER - Common Equipment Room .5 CSA - Canadian Standards Association .6 CSC - Correctional Service of Canada .7 DCS - Door Control System/subsystem .8 EIA - Electronic Industries Association .9 ES - Electronic Systems .10 FAAS - Facility Alarm Annunciation System .11 FAT - Factory Acceptance Test .12 FDR - Final design Report .13 GFE - Government Furnished Equipment .14 GUI - Graphical User Interface .15 LCP - Local Control Post .16 LED - Light Emitting Diode. .17 MCCP - Main Communications Control Post .18 MTBF - Mean Time before Failure .19 OFC - Optical Fibre Cable .20 PC - Personal Computer .21 PDC - Power Distribution Centre .22 PDR - Preliminary Design Report .23 PE - Principal Entrance .24 PIN - Personal Identification Number. .25 PIU - Perimeter Intrusion Unit .26 PPA - Portable Personal Alarm .27 PPD - Personal Protection Device .28 PWC - Public Works Canada (PWGSC's predecessor) .29 PWGSC - Public Works & Government Services Canada .30 RFI: Radio Frequency Interference. .31 RU - Rack Units (1.75" vertical space in an EIA-310C standard equipment rack) .32 SAC - System Administration and Control .33 SCP - Secure Control Post .34 SOW - Statement of Work .35 SPEC - Specification .36 STD - Standard .37 STP - Shielded Twisted Pair. .38 T&E - Telecommunications and Electronics .39 TES - Telecommunications Equipment Space .40 UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply .41 UTP - Unshielded Twisted Pair. .42 VAC - Volts, Alternating Current .43 VDC - Volts, Direct Current .44 LCD - Liquid Crystal Display.
Section 28 16 02 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC. Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. Onsite work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working onsite cooperate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements. All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the institutional staff. Contractor Experience .1 The contractor shall provide evidence of five years' experience in the detail design, supply and installation of Portable Alarm Location Systems in Federal Correctional Facilities. .2 Contractor shall demonstrate full compliance with the mandatory requirements set out in ES/SPEC-0404, including corporate capability; qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to the project; a full understanding, and capability to fulfill warranty obligations; ability to obtain the necessary level of security clearance for its onsite personnel to the installation locations; and the ability to execute the Contract in the language designated at the installation site. Service Response Capability .1 Contractor shall provide service response capability within 24 hours both during and after the system warranty period.
.2
.3 .4
.5
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
General: Submit two sets hardcopy (paper) plus one set softcopy (computer files) documentation at each submittal. Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.1.
.2
Section 28 16 02 Page 4 2011-05-25
.3
Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.3.
Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fibre optic communications channels. Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 8.2. Operator Manual: Provide generic manual for touch-screen operation, as well as system-specific information summarizing the operator-training course content. Provide data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in CSC Specification ES/SOW-0101 - Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) Include description of system operation. .1 Include parts list using component identification numbers standard to electronics industry.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.1
Provide data for incorporation into Operation & Maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. O&M manuals to include: .1 Table of contents. .2 Warranty information. .3 Completed test reports and certificates. .4 Include parts list using component identification to electronics industry standard and serial numbers. .5 Description of system operation. .6 Functional description for equipment. .7 Product data. .8 Manufacturer's installation instructions. .9 Maintenance schedule. .10 Cleaning instructions. .11 Training manual. As-built Drawings to include: .1 Equipment layout, indicate device type at each location on the floorplans. .2 Device mounting and location details. .3 Wiring diagrams.
.2
.3
Section 28 16 02 Page 5 2011-05-25
.4 .5 .6
Typical devices connection detail drawings.

Wiring diagrams. Zone layout drawing indicating number and location of zones and areas covered.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
1.8
WARRANTY
.1
Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Consultant's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Provide one year warranty on defective parts and installation labour, commencing on the date of substantial completion.
.2
.1
Installation Contractor shall be a fully authorized dealer. Proof of authorization shall accompany all documents. The Contractor must show proof of trained technical personnel as per manufacturer's requirements. System shall be installed to provide ease of operation, servicing, maintenance, testing and expansion of additional services. The Portable Personal Alarm (PPA) system shall meet safety requirements specified in accordance with UL standards. The system shall be provided with a high level of flexibility and comprehensive system management and database reporting facilities. Allow monitoring of overall system for functionality and alarms from multiple points. Demonstrated MTBF for the PPA system (excluding consumable items such as batteries) shall be less than one failure per two years per 4,645 square metres of indoor coverage, and less than one failure per two years per 18,580 square metres of outdoor coverage.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
Section 28 16 02 Page 6 2011-05-25
1.10
SCOPE OF WORK
.1
Supply and install a new PPA system integrating with the present Sewstar PPA system, as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Supply and install a completed system integrated with other systems with all necessary components, panels, equipment, devices, programming, configuration, testing, commissioning, patch cables and interface devices as required and regardless of mention to form a complete functioning system. Integration with the Video Surveillance System to allow control by partition. Provide training and Operation & Maintenance manuals, as-built documentation, personnel training, demonstration, commissioning and extended warranty. Supply and install PPA system as follows: .1 Supply and install all system equipment, monitoring devices and equipment, workstations, transmitters, interface equipment, transmitters and cabling. .2 Systems programming, configuration, testing and commissioning. .3 Spare parts All cables will be installed in raceways unless noted otherwise. Provide written test results on a device-by-device basis as part of the base bid. Supply and install equipment enclosures to house control panels complete with keyboard/mouse/LCD monitor console. Provide all specified spare parts, training, and service manuals for maintenance of the PPA system. Provide complete listing of provided parts including quantity, manufacturer, model number, and unit price.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6 .7 .8
.9
Section 28 16 02 Page 7 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
.1
The PPA system shall provide a means of identifying and locating a person wearing a Personal Protection Device (PPD) within a prescribed area, when the person initiates a duress alarm. An alarm is on the PPD unit by pressing the button on the unit, removing a pin attached to a lanyard from the PPD, or by tilting the PPD beyond a specified angle for a specified period (man-down feature). The PPA system shall consist of individual PPDs that are carried by staff, a receiving system that determines the identification and location of each PPD transmitting an call and a reporting system, which is capable of displaying both the identification and location of the PPD that has generated the duress call on computer-based facility maps. The PPA system shall have the ability to simultaneously display the identity and the location of multiple PPDs that are reporting duress alarms, within a facility. The PPA system shall maintain a historical record and archive of all duress alarms, from all PPDs. The record shall include the alarm ID, date and time at which the duress alarm was received. The record shall be saved in a common format so that the data can be exported and accessed for analysis and archiving. The PPA system shall, as an option, be capable of communicating duress alarm information to computer-based third party equipment, through the development of appropriate software data protocols. The PPA system shall operate within a licensed frequency band that will not be shared by other RF equipment at the same location. The PPA system equipment shall carry the appropriate RF registrations for use in the country where it will be installed.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 28 16 02 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.2
MATERIALS
.1
Provide an integrated PPA system of type, size, capacity, and characteristics as indicated. System shall consist of pocket transmitters, receivers, software, and all programming and configuration for connecting to the existing system for datalogging of all events. Ancillary equipment will include power supplies, terminal cabinets, enclosures, brackets, wall plates, outlets, connectors, mounting hardware, identification, cabling, boxes and fittings, supporting devices, grounding and other components as required for a complete installation. All systems, products and equipment shall be rated for 24 hour per day continuous operation. Provide tamper-resistant, stainless steel enclosures with security screws. Panels and cabinets shall be equipped with hinged doors and locks that are keyed alike. Mount power supplies and power distribution terminal strips in locked wall-mounted cabinets. All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall. Equipment shall operate from a primary power source of 110 V AC, 60 Hz AC power. Provide transformers and power supplies to achieve required system voltage levels. Contractor shall provide the system set-up and data entry for a complete and fully operational system. Provide the Departmental Representative with data forms and instructions on how to fill out the forms for all user defined data. Contractor shall install and configure the graphic maps for the system. The entire facility shall be shown on the maps and all installed devices shall be shown on the maps. The maps shall be laid out in a logical manner consistent with the operating areas of the facility. Submit draft maps to the Departmental Representative for review and approval. Correct and modify the maps as directed by the Departmental Representative.
.2
.3 .4
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9
Section 28 16 02 Page 9 2011-05-25
2.3
OPERATION
.1
The PPA system shall audibly report the occurrence of a duress alarm within two seconds of the PPD transmission. The identity and location of the duress alarm shall be displayed on a graphic site map of the facility within six seconds of the PPD transmission. The PPA system shall be capable of identifying and locating transmitting PPDs outside of a building to a minimum distance of 91 m from the building, without requiring the installation of any system equipment outside the building. The PPA system shall be capable of reporting the identification and location of PPD transmissions in outdoor areas, regardless of size, by installing the appropriate system equipment. A valid alarm from a PPD shall never fail to be reported by the PPA system because a person's body covered the PPD. The PPA system shall provide both indoor and outdoor identification and location in multi-building (campus) configurations. In fully enclosed structures, where floors and rooms are completely delimited by concrete and steel materials, the system shall be able to locate PPDs with an indoor accuracy to within a 6 m radius. The system shall be able to locate PPDs with an outdoor accuracy to within a 15 m radius. In fully enclosed structures, where floors and rooms are completely delimited by concrete and steel materials, the PPA system shall provide accurate PPD transmission locations to the correct floor of a building, on the correct side of an exterior wall, and within the defined locating accuracy, with a minimum success rate of 95%, averaged over the entire site. PPD transmission location accuracy shall be qualified through a predefined, and agreed upon, site acceptance test procedure, performed by the installer. A valid alarm from a PPD shall be reported by the PPA system anywhere within the defined area of indoor and outdoor coverage with a minimum reliability of 99.9%. An alarm shall never fail to be reported because of the presence of nearby concrete walls, metal structures, or other environmental considerations inside or outside of buildings, if such considerations were in
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 28 16 02 Page 10 2011-05-25
2.3 OPERATION (Cont'd)
.7
(Cont'd) place at the time of the installation of the system. A valid alarm from a PPD shall never fail to be reported by the PPA system anywhere within the defined area of indoor and outdoor coverage as a result of doors to cells, corridors, or other rooms or areas being closed or opened. Locating accuracy and alarm reporting reliability shall not be degraded by smoke, sunlight, infrared or visible light sources, or by sonic or ultrasonic noise. Locating accuracy and alarm reporting reliability shall not be degraded by the presence of metal in concrete or block walls, in floors, or in other structures providing the metal was in place at the time of the system's installation. Locating accuracy and alarm reporting reliability shall not be degraded by the presence of nearby electrical equipment including computers, radios, and other devices, provided the equipment meets current National Regulatory requirements for RF emissions. Each person using the PPA system shall wear a PPD. A user shall be capable of transmitting a duress alarm, which will be reported at the control computer, by pressing a button on the PPD. Optionally, a PPD shall be capable of transmitting a duress alarm by the removal of a pin attached to a lanyard from the PPD, or by the activation of the man-down function. The man-down function shall include the following user-programmable features: .1 tilt angle, .2 audible warning of pending alarm, .3 silent mode (no audible warning), .4 time delay before warning of pending alarm, .5 warning duration, and .6 optional retransmission of the man-down alarm at user-defined intervals. An alarm shall always be reported as originating from one location. A duress alarm shall not be reported as originating from more than a single location, or from several possible locations.
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
Section 28 16 02 Page 11 2011-05-25
.14 .15
An alarm shall report floor level in multi-level facilties.

The location of a duress alarm transmission shall be visually presented on a computer generated graphic floor plan of all, or part, of the facility. The boundary of the zone in alarm shall be highlighted. Optionally, the alarm point within the zone shall be displayed. The acknowledgement and clearing of duress alarms, and all other alarm handling functions, shall be performed using a computer mouse and a point-and click interface. A computer keyboard shall not be required for the alarm processing operation of the PPA system. The PPA system shall continuously monitor the state of all system hardware. The system shall be capable of immediately reporting a maintenance or diagnostic alarm, upon the detection of a system problem or the failure of a hardware component. The failure of AC power, resulting in the operation of any installed equipment on its integral backup battery, shall result in a warning alarm within 10 minutes of the condition having been continuously present. The PPA system shall create and maintain a record of all system equipment failure alarms. The PPA system shall report duress alarms with a distinct audible and visual indication that is easily distinguished from equipment, maintenance, and diagnostic alarms. The system shall archive all alarm data. The archive shall include the ID, location, and time of each duress alarm, for all alarm occurrences. The log shall include the time at which each duress alarm was acknowledged and the time it was cleared. Each PPD shall be configurable by the system administrator to report any desired identification code, without return to the factory. This will enable any PPD to be used as a replacement for another PPD that is damaged or otherwise needs to be replaced. Optionally, each PPD shall be capable of being configured by the system administrator to transmit repeatedly after a duress call is
.16
.17
.18
.19 .20
.21
.22
.23
Section 28 16 02 Page 12 2011-05-25
.23
(Cont'd) initiated. In this way, a PPD can be tracked and located if the person carrying it does not remain in one location. The PPD shall automatically report a low battery condition. The PPD shall be capable of operating normally for a minimum of one week, following the reporting of a low battery condition. The PPD shall use non-rechargeable, commercially available batteries, which can be replaced by the user, or by the system administrator. Under normal operating conditions (i.e., 3 test transmissions per day, standard PPD) the PPD battery shall provide a minimum life time of one year, before a low battery condition is reported.
.24 .25
.26
.27
2.4 RECORDING AND STORAGE OF ALARM DATA
.1
The PPA system shall log all duress alarms, equipment failure alarms, and warning alarms to computer hard disk. Duress alarms shall be displayed as a distinct log, separate from equipment failure and other alarms. The data logged for each alarm shall include the identification and location of the alarm, the time of the alarm, the time that the alarm condition was acknowledged and the time that the alarm was cleared from the system. All logged data shall be saved in a current Windows-compatible, commonly accessible data format, from which data can be exported or retrieved by the system administrator, or others, for analysis or to archive. The PPA system administrator shall be provided with the capability of selecting and printing any, or all, alarms from the alarm logs on demand. It shall be possible to convert and edit Autocad files of the facility for use as floor plans in the control computer.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 28 16 02 Page 13 2011-05-25
2.5 SYSTEM HARDWARE & SOFTWARE FUNCTIONALITY
.1
The PPA system shall support communications between the distributed receivers and the control computer using any of, or a combination of, the following media: .1 unused existing fiber-optic links, .2 unused existing wire-pairs such as telephone or data lines, .3 shielded twisted-pair cabling, and .4 wireless paths (RF). The PPA system shall be capable of locating PPDs accurately in all prescribed parts of a facility without requiring the installation of locating hardware in every room, closet, and other discrete location throughout the facility. Each receiver and each system electrical device shall be capable of including, individual integral battery backup. When fully charged, the backup batteries shall provide a minimum of 4 continuous hours of operation following the loss of AC power. It shall be possible to configure the PPA system to operate at any of a number of frequencies within the approved band. The selection of the operating frequency for each site enables the system to avoid RF interference from pre-existing RF sources on, or near, the site. The RF receivers, transmitters and other hardware items shall be microprocessor based, and shall be designed such that software reconfigurations and software upgrades can be accomplished without removing the units from the site. Installed equipment shall be capable of receiving software patches or software upgrades from the control computer at the site, without the need to physically access each piece of equipment. The PPA system shall run regular diagnostic checks on all installed equipment, and it shall report any exceptions or failures as alarms on the control computer. The PPA system shall perform a locating accuracy check, and RF receiver functionality verification a minimum of once per day, to ensure that all receiver equipment is functioning correctly.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 28 16 02 Page 14 2011-05-25
2.5 SYSTEM HARDWARE & SOFTWARE FUNCTIONALITY (Cont'd)
.8
The PPA system shall provide notification of the failure of any integral backup battery by means of a failure alarm or warning alarm.
.1
The PPDs shall be water resistant such that they will not malfunction after being exposed to 30 seconds of heavy rain. Other than for cosmetic damage, the PPDs shall not be damaged or malfunction after six drops onto a tiled floor from a height of 1.5 m with one drop on each of the six sides on three orthogonal axes. The PPDs shall have an operating temperature range of -20C to +60C. The receivers and other installed devices shall have an operating temperature range of -0C to +60C.
.2
.3 .4
2.7 SYSTEM CAPACITY
.1 .2
The PPA system shall support a minimum of 4,000 unique PPD identification codes. The PPA system shall utilize local emergency power (from the closest mechanical room) to install IR locators for zone designation and wireless repeaters to extend coverage areas. All transmissions of alarms shall be activated and transmitted through RF (radio frequency) signals. No additional wiring, trenching or conduit runs shall be acceptable to achieve alarm status between multiple structures. The PPA system shall have several ways of presenting incoming alarms. Central computer and alarm software shall control all alarms and configuration of system operation. System modules and transmitters shall be field programmable through the use of a laptop computer or programming module. No components of the system shall require dis-assembly in order to change features or software programming parameters.
.3
.4
.5
Section 28 16 02 Page 15 2011-05-25
2.8 PERSONAL PROTECTION DEVICE (PPD)
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Size, excluding holster: .1 120 x 50 x 25 mm. Weight including holster and battery: .1 200 g. Temperature Range: .1 -40C to +50C. Humidity: .1 0% to 90% non-condensing. Enclosure: .1 Black ABS plastic .2 Tamper resistant screws. Holster: .1 Black leather with belt loop and snaps. Battery: .1 9 Volt alkaline. .2 User replaceable. .3 Battery life: .1 One to two years. .4 Low battery warning: .1 Alarm to head end computer. .5 Battery life after low battery warning: .1 At least 15 days. Antenna: .1 Internal (optional external) .2 Frequency range: .1 Operates in the international public safety band: 420 to 470 MHz. .2 Reprogrammable to meet local frequency allocation guidelines: (Canada: 420 to 450 MHz). .3 Frequency within band: .1 Factory programmable. Quantity: (200) Two Hundred.
.6 .7
.8
.9
2.9 TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMER
.1
Connection to Transmitter: .1 457 mm cable connects to header beneath battery cover. Connection to Computer: .1 1.82 m RS-232C cable. Software .1 CD ROM with manual.
.2 .3
Section 28 16 02 Page 16 2011-05-25
2.9 TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMER (Cont'd)
.4 .5
Software Platform: Windows. .1

User .1 .2 .3 Programmable Functions: ID code Man-down time and angle Man-down reset option.
2.10
POWER SUPPLY
.1 .2 .3 .4
Continuous low-voltage operation output Voltage shall be compatible with equipment requirements. Fitted with tamper contact. Power supplies shall meet or exceed all applicable UL/ULC and CSA standards.
2.11
UPS
.1
To overcome the risk of power outage, an uninterruptible power supply sub-system shall be provided to ensure constant power supply during generator start-up. Should the generator fail to start up and take over after 10 minutes, the system should start the execution of an activity interruption program aimed at placing the system in stand-by mode in an orderly fashion, without loss of information and prepare it for re-start. The application server should be installed in service mode so that no human intervention is required during the re-start. UPS equipment shall be Line Interactive type.
.2
.3
.4
2.12
SPARE PARTS
.1 .2 .3
Provide all listed spare parts with spare parts list. Provide: .1 One (1) receiver. Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled PPA spare parts cabinet.
Section 28 16 02 Page 17 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and datasheet.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install PPA system and ancillary equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that the Personal Portable Alarm System fulfills all requirements. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations, procedures and standards for the assembly and operation of the PPA system. Provide system feature program requirements as per Departmental Representative directives. Provide detailed documentation on all programming and numbering of the system's modules, locators and transmitters for future reference. Consideration be given to heat sensitive equipment so that it is not placed near or immediately over a heat source, such as a large power supply or a high power transceiver. All system modules that include microprocessor chips and related component equipment will be installed in an environmentally controlled room with an operating range of 0-/+40C. Equipment shall be located away from interference sources. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to insure that no interference on the radio frequency will disrupt or impede the performance or function of the PPA system. System should not be installed next to or near high voltage transformers or electrical devices. Receivers shall not be installed into metal cabinets or restrictive areas where RF signal would be impeded. All terminations and connectors throughout the system shall have crimp on coaxial connectors, multi-pin connectors, solder terminals, telephone-type punch down terminal strips or machine wire-wrapped terminals in cabinets, and screw type or plug and socket connections at all equipment. Properly utilize terminations in the
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 28 16 02 Page 18 2011-05-25
.5
(Cont'd) applications for which they are intended by the manufacturer. Do not install control cables and power distribution wiring adjacent to signal cables. Power distribution cabling shall be on the opposite side from signal wiring in equipment enclosures and shall be uniformly located throughout an installation. Construct rand cabinets to easily accommodate interconnecting cables entering from above or below. Provide interconnecting cables with plugs for disconnecting each incoming and outgoing cable on at least one end. All power w interconnects in each group of equipment racks or consoles shall be done with flexible conduit, properly installed and of the proper size. Supply and install a custom cabinet to store PPDs. All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall.
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10
3.3
METHOD OF WORK
.1 .2 .3
Work to be performed by fully competent technicians in a thorough manner. All workmanship be of the highest quality and meet recognized standards of craftsmanship. Areas of installation deemed not acceptable by the Departmental Representative to be redone at the Contractor's expense.
3.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
.1
Except where otherwise specified, arrange and pay for testing, adjusting and balancing of system. If test do not conform to applicable requirements, repair, replace, adjust or balance equipment and systems. Repeat testing as necessary until acceptable results are achieved. Log and test results in appropriate test plan.
.2
.3
Section 28 16 02 Page 19 2011-05-25
3.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (Cont'd)
.4
Test, ad balance to verify the full and proper operation of each system component and integrated function.
.1
Manufacturer's Services: .1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this Section, review Work involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning, of its products and submit written reports in acceptable format to verify compliance of Work with Contract. .2 Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed: .1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work, or other Work, on which the Work of this Section depends, is complete but before installation begins. .2 Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete. .3 Upon completion of the Work, after cleaning is carried out. .4 Obtain reports, within three (3) days of review and submit immediately to the Departmental Representative.
3.6
VERIFICATION
.1 .2 .3
Perform verification inspections and test in the presence of Departmental Representative. Provide necessary tools, ladders and equipment. Ensure appropriate subcontractors and manufacturer's representatives are present for verification. Visual verification: .1 Objective is to assess quality of installation and assembly and overall appearance to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. .2 Visual inspection to include: .1 Sturdiness of equipment fastening. .2 Non-existence of installation related damages.
.4
Section 28 16 02 Page 20 2011-05-25
.4
Visual verification:(Cont'd) .2 Visual inspection to include:(Cont'd) .3 Compliance of device locations with reviewed shop drawings. .4 Compatibility of equipment installation with physical environment. .5 Inclusion of all accessories. .6 Device and cabling identification. .7 Application and location of ULC approval decals. Technical Verification: .1 Purpose to ensure that all systems and devices are properly installed and free of defects and damage. .2 Technical verification includes: .1 Measurements of coverage patterns. .2 Connecting joints and equipment fastening. .3 Compliance with manufacturer's specification, product literature and installation instructions. Operational Verification: .1 Purpose to ensure that devices and systems' performance meet or exceed established functional requirements. .2 Operational verification includes: .1 Operation of each device individually and within its environment. .2 Operation of each device in relation with programmable schedule and or/specific functions. .3 Verify that System is fully operational and meets all system performance requirements of this specification. .4 Total system test .1 Proceed with testing when system and subsystems are functionally tested and accepted. Total System tests to verify that requirements have been met for DC (and/or audio), sub carrier and control signals in accordance with this specification. .5 Safety .1 Demonstrate with documentation that access control system meets safety requirements specified in UL 294 (Revision 4). Performance testing and commissioning: .1 Test procedure: perform test on a "go-no-go" basis. .1 Make only operator adjustments required to show proof of performance.
.5
.6
.7
Section 28 16 02 Page 21 2011-05-25
.7
(Cont'd) .1 Test procedure:(Cont'd) .2 Test to demonstrate and verify that installed System complies with installation and technical requirements of this specification under operating conditions. .3 Test results to be evaluated by Departmental Representative as either acceptable or unacceptable using following procedures. .2 Documentation review: .1 This review will determine if information provided is sufficient to meet requirements of this specification. .2 Provide for review all system manuals, as installed drawings, pretest forms, antenna radiation patterns, equipment cabinet pictorials, antenna pictorials, antenna mount pictorials, video and audio equipment details. .3 Mechanical inspection: .1 Arrange site tour for Departmental Representative, Owners representatives and Contractor to review all areas to insure that all systems and subsystems are installed in place for proof of performance testing. .2 Provide system inventory at this time. Verify following items before beginning proof of performance tests: .1 All electrical power circuits designated for system equipment are properly labeled, wired, phased, protected and grounded. .2 Conductor ends are protected by heat shrink wrap; audio spade lugs, barrier strips and punch blocks are used. .3 Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc. are cleaned and removed from site. .4 All equipment and cabling is properly labeled. .5 All equipment identified in system's equipment lists are in-place and properly installed. .6 Each system ground is installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and this specification.
Section 28 16 02 Page 22 2011-05-25
3.7
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3
Remove coverings from accessories and components. Adjust all components for correct function. Clean housings and system components, free from dirt, marks, packing tape, and finger prints, in accordance with manufacturer's written cleaning recommendations.
END
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Cameras: .1 Fixed and PTZ cameras. .2 Lenses Camera enclosures. .3 Camera enclosures .4 Camera power supply. Digital video management system. Video handling. .1 Sequential switcher .2 Quad splitter. .3 Matrix switch. .4 Master distribution amplifier. Encoders. Network video recorders/archivers. Network video user stations. KVM extenders. KVM switch and console. Monitors. Power over Ethernet injectors. Power supplies. UPS. Cable.
.2 .3
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13
.1
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70-2011, Article 517, National Electric Code. .2 NFPA 101-2009, Life Safety Code. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) .1 REC 12749, Power Supplies. .2 RS 16051, Sound Systems.
.2
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (24th edition) Safety Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN/CSA C22.2 No.182.4-M90(R2010), Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors for Communication Systems. .3 CAN/CSA C22.3 No. 1-10 overhead systems. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70-2011, National Electric Code. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) .1 REC 12749, Power Supplies. .2 ANSI/EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 ULC-S317-96, Installation and Classification of Closed Circuit Video Equipment (CCVC) Systems for Institutional and Commercial Security Systems. .2 Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) .3 UL 294 (Revision 4) Standard for Safety for Access Control System Units. .4 UL 1076 (Revision 1) Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems. CSC Standards: .1 ES/SOW-0101 - Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 ES/SOW-0102 - Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SOW-0404 - Electronic System Proposal Evaluation Criteria (Revision 1) .4 ES/SPEC-0006R2E - Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/STD-0204 - Fixed/Zoom Lens Closed Circuit Television (Revision 1) .6 ES/STD-0207 - High Security Enclosure Closed Circuit Television (Revision 1) .7 ES/STD-0221 - Fixed Network Colour Closed Circuit Television Camera (Revision 0) .8 ES/STD-0222R0E - Indoor Network Colour Dome Camera (with Pan/Tilt/Zoom) Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .9 ES/STD-0223R1E - Outdoor Network Colour Dome PTZ CCTV .10 ES/STD-0227R0E - LCD Colour Computer Monitor Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .11 ES/STD-0228R0E - Network Video User Station Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0)
.2 .3
.4
.5
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.5
CSC Standards:(Cont'd) .12 ES/STD-0229R2E - Network Video Recorder Closed Circuit Television (Revision 3) .13 ES/STD-0230 - NTSC-IP Video Converter Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .14 ES/STD-0231 - IP-NTSC Video Converter Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .15 ES/STD-0232R0E - Outdoor Network Colour Dome CCTV .16 ES/STD-0234R0E - Indoor Network Colour Dome CCTV .17 ES/STD-0803 - Video Display Unit Electronic Systems (Revision 2).
1.4
DEFINITIONS
.1
Definitions: .1 AGC: Automatic Gain. .2 ATP: Acceptance Testing Procedure/Plan. .3 CCTV: Closed Circuit Television. .4 CCVC: Closed Circuit Video. .5 CCD: Charge Coupled Device. .6 CEC: Canadian Electrical Code. .7 CER: Common Equipment Room. .8 CSA: Canadian Standards Association. .9 CSC: Correctional Service of Canada. .10 DIN: Deutsches Institut fur Normung (a European Standards Organization. .11 EIA: Electronic Industries Association. .12 ES: Electronic Systems. .13 FAAS: Facility Alarm Annunication System. .14 FAT: Factory Acceptance Test. .15 FDR: Final Design Report. .16 FOV: Field of View. .17 GFE: Government Furnished Equipment. .18 GUI: Graphical User Interface. .19 I/O: Input/Output. .20 KVM: Keyboard/Video/Mouse. .21 LAN: Local Area Network. .22 LCP: Local Control Post. .23 MTBF: Mean Time Before Failure. .24 NVRS: Network Video Recorder System. .25 OFC: Optical Fiber Cable. .26 PC: Personal Computer. .27 PDC: Power Distribution Centre. .28 PE: Principal Entrance. .29 PIU: PIDS Integration Unit. .30 PWC: Public Works Canada (PWGSC's predecessor). .31 PWGSC: Public Works and Government Services Canada. .32 RU: Rack Units. .33 SCP: Secure Control Post. .34 SOW: Statement of Work. .35 SPEC: Specifications.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
.1
Definitions:(Cont'd) .36 STD: Standard. .37 T&E: Telecommunications and Electronics. .38 TES: Telecommunications Equipment Space. .39 UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply. .40 V&C: Visits and Correspondence. .41 VAC Volts: Alternating Current. .42 VDC Volts: Direct Current. .43 VVMS: Virtual Video Matrix Switcher.
1.5 DESIGN PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Support: Camera functions such as pan/tilt and zoom fully supported by CCTV system. .1 Provide operator with ability to control all camera functions. Alarm point monitoring : System capable, upon alarm recognition, of switching CCTV cameras associated with alarm point. Switching: .1 Provision to switch any camera in system to any monitor in system manually or automatically. .2 Provision to switch system video recorders to selective monitor outputs in system. Control: Provision for any camera equipped with pan, tilt, and/or motorized zoom lens: .1 Manually control pan, tilt and lens functions. .2 Set pan and tilt home position. .3 Set and clear movement limits of pan and tilt mechanism. .4 Adjust motorized zoom lens. Enter and edit CCTV programs and save them for future use. Set dwell time for viewing of any camera picture. Define sequence for viewing cameras on each monitor. Bypass cameras in system during sequencing to monitor. Provide ability to display stored 'video image' of cardholder, and switch real-time camera to card reader location for specific card usage.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
1.5 DESIGN PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.10
Overall control of CCTV provided through software control, which provides complete integration of security components.
Environment: Design video components and systems to operate with all specified requirements under following ambient temperatures: .1 Indoor installations: .1 Temperature: 0C to 30C. .2 Humidity: 10 to 90%. .2 Outdoor installations: .1 Temperature: -40C to 60C. .2 Humidity: 10 to 100%.
.11
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit shop drawings to indicate project layout, camera locations, point-to-point diagrams, cable schematics, risers, mounting details and identification labeling scheme including: .1 Functional description of equipment. .2 Technical data sheets of all devices. .3 Device location plans and cable lists. .4 Video camera surveillance chart. .5 Video interconnection detail drawings. .6 Calculation of the recording period for video storage and raid array. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit one sample of each camera selected complete with housing, brackets and mounting hardware. .2 Camera will be returned for incorporation into work as appropriate. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Certificates: Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply
.2
.3
.4
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
.4
Quality Assurance Submittals:(Cont'd) .2 Certificates:(Cont'd) with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .1 Submit UL Product safety Certificates. .2 Submit verification Certificate that service company is "UL List alarm service company". .3 Submit verification Certificate that monitoring facility is "UL Listed central station". .4 Submit verification Certificate that video survelliance system is "Certified alarm system". .3 Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. .4 Manufacturer's Field Services: Submit copies of manufacturer's field reports. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Include following: .1 System configuration and equipment physical layout. .2 Functional description of equipment. .3 Instructions on operation, adjustment and cleaning. .4 Illustrations and diagrams to supplement procedures. .5 Manufacturer's operation instructions. Document requirements: .1 General: Submit three copies of each hard and computer disk copies of all documents in accordance with ES/SOW 0101. .2 Submit ten copies of operational manuals in accordance with ES/SOW 0101. .3 Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW 0101 Section 4.1. .4 Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW 0101 Section 4.3. .5 Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW 0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fiber optic communications channels. .6 Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW 0101 Section 8.2.7 Operator and Maintenance Technician Training shall not commence until project-specific Training course outlines and trainee handouts defined by document ES/SOW 0101
.5
.6
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
.6
Document requirements:(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. .7 Operator Manual(s): All CCTV related components and provide generic manual for touch screen operation, CCTV interface, as well as system specific information summarizing the operator training course content. .8 Maintenance Manual: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW 0101 Section.
.1 .2 .3 .4
Deposit packaging materials in appropriate container on site for recycling or reuse. Avoid using landfill waste disposal procedures when recycling facilities are available. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene and plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin.
1.8
WARRANTY
.1
Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Departmental Representative's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Provide one year warranty on defective parts and installation labour, commencing on the date of substantial completion.
.2
.1
Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC. Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. Onsite work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working onsite cooperate
.2
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
.2
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements. Contractor Experience .1 The contractor shall provide evidence of five years' experience in the detail design, supply and installation of Closed Circuit Television Systems in Federal Correctional Facilities. Due to the complex IP virtual matrix design, contractor to provide evidence of team member IT technology and PC Network competency (MCSE or equal). .2 Contractor shall demonstrate full compliance with the mandatory requirements set out in ES/SPEC-0404, including corporate capability; qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to the project; a full understanding, and capability to fulfill warranty obligations; ability to obtain the necessary level of security clearance for its onsite personnel to the installation locations; and the ability to execute the Contract in the language designated at the installation site. Service Response Capability .1 Contractor shall provide service response capability within 24 hours both during and after the system warranty period.
.3
.4
1.10
SCOPE OF WORK
.1
Provide a high resolution CCTV system utilizing state of art IP technology for real time viewing and digital network recording with the highest possible clarity for post event investigations. Cameras and recorders shall operate using MJPEG compression. System will be from a major brand name from a manufacturer with ISO 9000 or better standards. System shall be sized to provide 54.2 GB of storage per camera. Provide a complete system with high quality colour (auto switching to black and white at low light) pictures, with all necessary components, programming, commissioning, patch cables, and interface devices as required and regardless of mention to provide a complete functioning system.
.2 .3
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
.4
Provide all required phase lock, common ground reference filters, ground loop transformers, synchronization and any other equipment required to ensure proper video transmission with zero picture roll or tearing.
Provide CCTV Monitors and keyboards and all necessary devices to call any camera to any monitor or quad monitor view position. Provide Joystick with vector control of any moveable camera and programming control of basic pre-position locations from the same keypad via operator password protection. Provide all devices in accordance to the following CSC's ES/STD-0207, ES/STD-0221, ES/STD-0204, ES/STD-0231, ES/STD-0203, ES/STD-0222, ES/STD-0214 specifications. Each CCTV control position will be provided with a keyboard connected to the virtual software based, matrix switch to allow manual selection of cameras via the IP Network. Connect, terminate and focus all cameras to IP streaming devices as located on the drawings with virtual matrix IP control system with `group salvo' macro commands for area by area camera call-up, integrate camera programming and PTZ commands, video display IP decoders and monitors, and network video recorders and storage devices. Integrate the CCTV Subsystem as with the Door Control system. Provide all documentation, reports, plans, schedules, and manuals as defined within ES/SOW-0101. All cables shall be installed in conduit provided by Division 26, coordinate with Division 26 and ensure all conduits as laid out are adequate and of size to meet CEC.If any conduit is inadequate then identify the discrepancy prior to the close of tenders. Use Cat 6 cable from all cameras to the network switches located in the BSCS T & E room. Where the use of IP based cameras is not possible i.e. for zoom pan tilt cameras then locate the digital streamer box as close as possible to the camera location. Use CAT6 cable for Low Voltage power to all cameras for Camera Power. Use 16
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10
.11
.12
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
.12
(Cont'd) Gauge wire for Heater and Blower power and 16 Gauge wire for Dome Zoom Pan and Tilt power. Provide terminal servers, communication and closed CCTV network 10/100Mb/1Gig switches etc as required. Provide all specified spare parts and service manuals for maintenance of the Video Surveillance system. Provide complete listing of provided parts including quantity, manufacturer, model number, and unit price.
.13
.14
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Video Cameras: .1 Existing cameras are Axis 211 Network cameras complete with 3.0 - 8.0 mm Auto Iris, Varifocal lens. .2 Provide new cameras Axis 221 Network cameras complete with 3.0 - 8.0 Auto Iris, Varifocal lens. Housings: .1 Existing outdoor housings are Pelco EH-5723-2 complete with WD57-2 defroster, T1-57 thermal insulation, SS-5723 sun shroud and EM22 wall mount bracket. .2 Provide new outdoor housings Pelco EH-5723-2 complete with WD57-2 defroster, T1-57 thermal insulation, SS-5723 sun shroud and EM22 wall mount bracket for installation on 150 diameter fence post or parapet mounting. Power supplies: .1 Provide camera power through Power Dsine PD-3012/AC, 12 channel, 802.3 compliant power-over-Lan midspan power supplies. .2 Provide outdoor housing power through Bemag E200P120/24, 200 VA, 120/24 VAC transformers. (One transformer for 2 outdoor housings.) Network Switches: .1 Provide 16 port or 24 port switchers as required for new camera inputs. User stations Control Post: .1 Each Network Video User Station will consist of one or more Genetec Omnicast Enterprise latest version Client Station
.2
.3
.4
.5
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 11 2011-05-25
.5
User stations Control Post:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) Software Licenses supported by one or more CPU's. The number of CPU's provided for a particular Network Video User Station is determined by the number of monitors required for that station. As a minimum, each CPU shall consist of the following: .2 CPU .1 Dual processors; 1000 MHz HT, 2.0 GHZ, 1 MB cache. .2 Eight DDR DIMM sockets: up to 16 GB reg. ECC DDR 400/333/266 mem. .3 Two Gbe LAN controllers; Integrated audio: Integrated FireWire IEE 1394a. .4 Two x 16 PCle with FULL SPEED x 16 lanes. .5 Three 64-bit PCI-X slots; One 32-bit 33 MHZ PCI. .6 Serial ATA II controller. .7 SSI EEB footprint (12" x 13"; 304.8 mm x 330.2 mm). .3 Memory .1 Memory Size: 1024 MB. .2 Memory Speed: 533 MHz PC4200. .3 Memory CAS Latency: 3-3-3-8. .4 Memory Type: DDR2. .5 Pins: 240. .4 Hard Drive .1 Capacity (GB): 80 GB Minimum. .2 Interface: Serial ATA/150. .3 Spindle Speed (RPM): 7200. .4 Buffer Memory: 8MB. .5 Average Seek (msec): 8.5. .6 Maximum Internal Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec): 757. .7 Maximum External Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec): 150. .8 Sustained Transfer Rate: 61.4-29.7. .9 Track-to-Track Seek Time (typical read, ms): 1.1. .10 Track-to-Track Seek Time (typical read, ms): 1.1. .5 PCI Express Card .1 256 MB DDR memory .2 Direct X9 .3 Dual VGA .4 4 GB/s memory bandwith. .6 DVD-RW Read Write Drive. .7 Industrial rack Mount Chassis / Mid Tower Case as per Site. .8 Power Supply. .9 Windows XP Professional Operating System. .10 Genetec Omnicast Enterprise latest version Software.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 12 2011-05-25
.5
User stations Control Post:(Cont'd) .11 Synergy KWM Software. .12 This high end CPU configuration allows one CPU to support two monitors while providing in excess of the specified quad view @ 640x480 resolution @ 30fps per view using medium MJPEG compression settings or one CPU to support one monitor while providing in excess of nine video windows @ 640x480 resolution @ 30fps per view using medium MJPEG compression settings. Network video Recorder: .1 Each Network Video Recorder consists of a Genetic Omnicast Enterprise latest version Archive Server configured as follows: .2 CPU .1 Dual processors; 1000 MHz HT, 2.0 GHZ, 1 MB cache. .2 Eight DDR DIMM sockets: up to 16BG reg. ECC DDR 400/333/266 mem. .3 Two Gbe LAN controllers; Integrated audio: Integrated FireWire IEE 1394a .4 Two x16 PCle with FULL SPEED x16 lanes. .5 Three 64-bit PCI-X slots; One 32-bit 33 MHZ PCI .6 Serial ATA II controller. .7 SSI EEB footprint (12" x 13"; 304.8 mm x 330.2 mm). .3 Memory .1 Memory Size: 1024 MB. .2 Memory Speed: 533 MHz PC4200. .3 Memory CAS Latency: 3-3-3-8. .4 Memory Type: DDR2. .5 Pins: 240. .4 Hard Drives .1 Operating System Capacity (GB): 80. .2 Interface: Serial ATA/150. .3 Spindle Speed (RPM): 7200. .4 Buffer Memory: 8 MB. .5 Average Seek (msec): 8.5. .6 Maximum Internal Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec): 757. .7 Maximum External Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec): 150. .8 Sustained Transfer Rate: 61.4-29.7 .9 Track-to-Track Seek Time (typical read, ms): 1.1. .10 Track-to-Track Seek Time (typical read, ms): 1.1. .5 RAID Drive .1 Serial ATA Raid 5 Controller .2 7 ea 320 GB Hard Drives (Archive Storage). .3 Capacity (GB): 320.
.6
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 13 2011-05-25
.6
Network video Recorder:(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) .4 Interface: Serial ATA/150. .5 Spindle Speed (RPM): 7200. .6 Buffer Memory: 8 MB. .7 Average Seek (msec): 8.9. .8 Average latency (msec): 4.2. .9 Track-to-Track Seek (msec): 2.0. .10 MTBF: 1,000,000 hours. .11 Buffer to host: 100 MB/s. .12 Buffer to disk: 61 MB/s sustained. .6 Rack Mount Server Chassis. .7 Power Supply. .8 PCI Express Video Card .1 256 MB DDR memory. .2 Direct X 9. .3 Dual VGA. .4 4 GB/s memory bandwith. .9 DVD-RW Read Write Drive. .10 Windows Server Operating System. .11 Genetec Omnicast Enterprise latest version Software. Monitors: .1 The monitors shall be integrated and compatible with the video switching and control system. The monitor shall meet the following requirements: .1 All monitors shall have DC restoration switch. .2 Both horizontal and AFC time constants. .3 All internal circuitry, with the exception of the CRT, shall incorporate solids state design throughout. .4 Operating controls for brightness, contrast, vertical hold, horizontal hold and power on/off shall be accessible from the front of the monitor. .5 Provide video monitors with a diagonal screen size of 432 mm (17 in.) with a horizontal resolution of 700 TV lines. .6 Furnish the necessary mounting kits to install all monitors in their final location at the CX Offices. .7 The video input impedance to the video monitor shall be switch selectable for either 75 ohms or high impedance. .8 The composite video input level shall be 1.0 0.2 Volt peak to peak (V p-p) sync-negative and shall be looped to a video output port.
.7
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 14 2011-05-25
.8
Accessories: .1 For the monitors in the Control Posts, provide rail mounting brackets, stainless steel trim and mounting hardware. .2 For the monitors in the Galleries, provide wall mount brackets as follows: .1 Suitable for 300 mm to 430 mm monitor. .2 Maximum load: 68 KG. .3 Pan: 360. .4 Tilt: 40 (20 Up, 20 Down). .5 Finish: Black. .6 Weight: 13.8 KG. .7 Dimensions: 343 to 534 W x 324 to 457 H x 254 D with arm reach of 457.
2.2 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
.1
Ensure that all equipment and systems are capable of operating under RFI conditions at the site. All corrective action is to be at the Contractors cost.
.1
Provide an equipment enclosure (rack) to house the CCTV head end equipment including termination panels and space allowance for all future equipment. Rack shall be complete with all necessary ventilation fans, power supplies, storage drawers, rear locking door, and front smoked glass locking door. Rack must meet CSC standard for Racks EIA-310-C. Provide cable management devices to allow for future moves, adds and changes without tools. Ensure sufficient venting for racks below the cable tray in the BSCS room. Do not raise the cable tray beyond the height as mandated by code.
.2
.3
2.4
SPARE PARTS
.1 .2
Provide all listed spare parts with spare parts list. Provide: .1 Two .2 One .3 One .4 One .5 One .6 One (2) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) fixed IP network camera PTZ IP network camera encoder vari-focal lens with IR filter video keyboard joystick controller 24 port PoE switch
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 15 2011-05-25
2.4 SPARE PARTS (Cont'd)
.2
Provide:(Cont'd) .7 One (1) power supply .8 One (1) server/archiver .9 One (1) workstation .10 Two (2) monitors .11 One (1) KVM extender .12 One (1) monitor extender .13 One (1) KVM switcher .14 One (1) RS-232 to RS-485 converter. Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled video surveillance spare parts cabinet.
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and datasheet. Manufacturers' directions shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of equipment or materials used in the Work furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or Specifications.
.2
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Installation shall not commence until Preliminary and Final Design Reports (PDR/FDR) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the Institutional staff. Install video surveillance equipment and components in accordance with ULC S317. All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall. Install cable, boxes, mounting hardware, brackets, video cameras and system components in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.
.2 .3 .4
.5
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 16 2011-05-25
.6 .7 .8
Install components secure, properly aligned and in locations shown on reviewed shop drawings.
Connect cameras to cabling in accordance with installation instructions. Install equipment so that manufacturers', ULC and CSA labels are visible and legible. Install ULC labels where required. Units to be mounted outside or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproof or be mounted in weatherproof enclosures. Camera Mounting: .1 Locate ceiling mounted cameras in tiles or in secure ceiling in locations. .2 Ensure camera views are consistent for each dining area. Viewing Station Installation: .1 Provide wall mounting equipment, anchors, and bracing as required for a stable installation. .2 Provide tilt adapters compatible with swivel arms for monitors to allow flexibility to adjust monitor angles. .3 Account for screen glare when positioning monitors. .4 Install the keyboard shelf for mouse controls at 900 mm and monitors directly above at 1700 mm AFF. Coordinate location with existing pipes to maximize corridor width and with site instructions regarding location within the Security Galleries. Nylon tubing for Section 11 19 12 shall be run with the low voltage device wires in conduit, raceways or cable trays. Low voltage wire and pneumatic tubing shall be pulled in the same conduit raceway by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Nylon tubing must be run continuously from pneumatic lock to manifold in BSCS Room, or other designated location where pneumatic manifolds will be installed. Splices or tees shall NOT be permitted. Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor is responsible for pulling the nylon tubing.
.9
.10
.11
.12
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 17 2011-05-25
.1
Manufacturer's Services: .1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this Section, review Work involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning, of its products and submit written reports, in acceptable format, to verify compliance of Work with Contract. .2 Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4
VERIFICATION
.1
Acceptance testing shall not commence until project Acceptance Testing Procedures (ATP) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. System substantial performance and commencement of the warranty period shall not commence until acceptable ATPs have been completed and signed off by both Contractor and CSC Technical Authority, and Operator training is complete. Substantial performance may nevertheless be granted in the presence of noted deficiencies at the discretion of the Crown. Conduct offsite Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) witnessed by CSC Design Authority, to demonstrate compliant subsystem operation, subsystem non-interference, system-wide control transfer and redundancy performance. Obtain reports, within 3 days of review, and submit, immediately, to Consultant. Upon completion of the work and during interim periods as required under the Contract, perform all final adjustments of levels, timing, equalisation, limits, and operational sequences. Conduct detailed testing of all systems and equipment. Submit test results to the Departmental Representative for review. Conduct commissioning procedures as required under the Contract. Submit report of results together with all required statements and certificates. Final completion will not be granted until system is in full operation, all noted deficiencies have been cleared and all
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 18 2011-05-25
.7
(Cont'd) documentation deliverables have been received by the Crown in the quantities specified. Perform verification inspections and test in the presence of Departmental Representative. .1 Provide all necessary tools, ladders and equipment. .2 Ensure appropriate subcontractors, and manufacturer's representatives are present for verification. Visual verification: Objective is to assess quality of installation and assembly and overall appearance to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Visual inspection to include: .1 Sturdiness of equipment fastening. .2 Non existence of installation related damages. .3 Compliance of device locations with reviewed shop drawings. .4 Compatibility of equipment installation with physical environment. .5 Inclusion of all accessories. .6 Device and cabling identification. .7 Application and location of ULC approval decals. Technical verification: Purpose to ensure that all systems and devices are properly installed and free of defects and damage. Technical verification includes: .1 Measurements of tension and power. .2 Connecting joints and equipment fastening. .3 Measurements of signals (dB, lux, baud rate, etc). .4 Compliance with manufacturer's specification, product literature and installation instructions. Operational verification: Purpose to ensure that devices and systems' performance meet or exceed established functional requirements. Operational verification includes: .1 Operation of each device individually and within its environment. .2 Operation of each device in relation with programmable schedule and or/specific functions. .3 Operation control of camera lens, pan, tilt and zoom. .4 Switching of camera to any monitor. .5 Switching of system video recorder to selective monitor. .6 Set dwell times.
.8
.9
.10
.11
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 19 2011-05-25
.11
Operational verification:(Cont'd) .7 Demonstrate: .1 Sequence viewing of cameras on each monitor. .2 Bypass capability. .3 Display of stored image to cardholder.
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
.1 .2 .3
Remove protective coverings from cameras and components. Adjust cameras for correct function. Clean camera housing, system components and lens, free from marks, packing tape, and finger prints, in accordance with manufacturer's written cleaning recommendations.
END
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
NBC 2010, National Building Code of Canada.
.2
Government of Canada .1 TB OSH Chapter 3 03, 1997 01 28, Treasury Board of Canada, Occupational Safety and Health, Chapter 3 03, Standard for Fire protection Electronic Data Processing Equipment. .2 TB OSH Chapter 3 04, 1994 12 22, Treasury Board of Canada, Occupational Safety and Health, Chapter 3 04, Standard for Fire Alarm Systems. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S524-06-AM1, Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, Includes Amendment 1 (Feb 2011). .2 ULC S525-07, Audible Signal Appliances for Fire Alarm. .3 CAN/ULC S526-07, Visual Signal Appliances, Fire Alarm. .4 ULC S527-99, Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems. .5 CAN/ULC S528-05, Manual Pull Stations. .6 CAN/ULC S529-09, Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems. .7 UL 268-09, Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. .8 CAN/ULC S531-02 AMD1, Smoke Alarms, Inlcudes Amendment 1 (Feb 2011). .9 CAN/ULC S536-04, Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems. .10 CAN/ULC S537-04, Verification of Fire Alarm Systems.
.3
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
.1
New System Equipment includes: .1 Control panel to carry out fire alarm and protection functions including receiving alarm signals, initiating two-stage alarm, supervising system continuously, actuating zone annunciators, and initiating trouble signals. .2 Communication link to the existing facility fire alarm system network. .3 Power supply facilities. .4 Manual alarm stations. .5 Automatic alarm initiating devices. .6 Audible signal devices. .7 End of line devices. Annunciators. .8 Visual alarm signal devices. .9 Ancilliary devices.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM (Cont'd)
.2
Existing System Modification: Main system modifications and programming .1 to accept communication with the new control panel. (Existing system Siemens MXL type.)
1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF AGENCIES
.1
System: .1 To TB OSH Chapter 3-04. .2 Subject to Fire Commissioner of Canada (FC) approval. .3 Subject to FC inspection for final acceptance. .4 System components: listed by ULC and comply with applicable provisions of National Building Code, Local/Provincial Building Code, and meet requirements of local authority having jurisdiction.
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include: .1 Detail assembly and internal wiring diagrams for control units. Consoles Auxiliary cabinets. .2 Overall system riser wiring diagram identifying control equipment initiating zones signaling circuits; identifying terminations, terminal numbers, conductors and raceways. .3 Details for devices. .4 Details and performance specifications for control, annunciation and peripherals with item by item cross reference to specification for compliance. .5 Step-by-step operating sequence, cross referenced to logic flow diagram.
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for Fire Alarm System for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 Instructions for complete fire alarm system to permit effective operation and maintenance. .2 Technical data - illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers. .3 Copy of approved shop drawings with corrections completed and marks removed except review stamps.
.2
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 3 2011-05-25
.2
Include:(Cont'd) List of recommended spare parts for .4 system. Upon completion of verification of the fire alarm system, submit a copy of verification certificate and report to The Departmental Representative, who will forward a copy to Fire Commissioner of Canada FCC. Notify The Departmental Representative for arrangement of final acceptance by FCC. Make available Contractor's electrician at time of testing by FCC. Fire alarm system shall be subject to an inspection and test performed by the installer and witnessed by FCC for final acceptance.
.3
.4
.5
1.6
MAINTENANCE
.1
Provide one year's free maintenance with two inspections by manufacturer during warranty period. Inspection tests to conform to CAN/ULC S536. Submit inspection report to The Departmental Representative.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
1.8 SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS
.1
The supplier shall be fully qualified in the performance of work specified herein. Service personnel shall be located within the Province of Ontario and shall be experienced in the installation and operation of the system. The supplier shall be an established fire alarm supplier with a service department maintained in the Province of Ontario both current, and for the previous five (5) years.
1.9 CELL SMOKE DETECTOR MOCK-UP
.1 .2
Prepare in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Supply and install a full-size mock-up of the cell detection system for one four cell group. Mock-up to be indicative of the final installation in every aspect with all functions operable for review and testing.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.9 CELL SMOKE DETECTOR MOCK-UP (Cont'd)
.3 .4
Notify the Engineer at least seven (7) days in advance for review of the mock-up.
Simulate expected atmosphere and smoke conditions in each of the four cells and record system sensitivity adjustments required to provide reliable smoke sensing without false alarms. The mock-up may be used as part of the work provided it meets the Engineer's approval. The approved mock-up will establish the minimum acceptable standard for the remaining work.
.5 .6
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
.2 .3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
Equipment and devices: ULC listed and labelled and supplied by single manufacturer. Power supply: to CAN/ULC-S524. Audible signal devices: to ULC-S525. Visual signal devices: to CAN/ULC-S526. Control unit: to ULC-S527. Manual pull stations: to CAN/ULC-S528. Thermal detectors: to UL 268. Smoke detectors: to CAN/ULC-S529. Smoke alarms: to CAN/ULC-S531-02 AMD1.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 5 2011-05-25
2.2 SYSTEM OPERATION
.1
The alarm activation of any area smoke detector, heat detector, manual pull station, cell smoke sampling device monitor module or sprinkler waterflow, shall cause the following functions to automatically occur: .1 First Stage .1 The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel and / or remote annunciator(s). .2 The displays on system fire alarm control panels and network controllers shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including; zone, device type, device location and time / date. .3 All system activity / events shall be documented in system history. .4 Any remote or local annunciator LCD / LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated. .5 Activate audible notification appliances throughout the building with an `alert' tone at 30 strokes per minute. .6 Activate visual strobe notification appliances throughout the building. The visual strobe shall continue to flash until the system has been reset. .7 Transmit signal to the Central Station with point identification. .8 All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated. .9 All self-closing fire / smoke doors held open shall be released. .10 Shut down all ventilation air fans. .11 If the alarm is initiated from a pre-action system initiating device, the pre-action valve shall be activated to release water into the sprinkler piping. .12 Shut down central vacuum cleaning system. .2 Second Stage .1 The alarm activation of any automatic or manual second stage initiating device shall cause the functions as described in the first stage to occur with the exception that the audible notification appliances shall sound an `evacuation' tone at 120 strokes per minute. The second stage shall be initiated under the following circumstances: .1 Automatically if the first stage signal is not acknowledged within 5 minutes of its initiation.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.2 SYSTEM OPERATION (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .2 Manually from a switch at the Command Post. .3 Manually from a second stage pull station keyswitch. .3 The Supervisory activation of any sprinkler valve supervisory switch, shall cause the following functions to automatically occur: .1 The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel and / or remote annunciator. .2 The displays on the system fire alarm control panels and network controllers shall indicate all applicable information associated with the supervisory condition including; zone, device type, device location and time / date. .3 All system activity / events shall be documented on the system history file. .4 Any remote or local annunciator LCD / LED's associated with the supervisory zone shall be illuminated. .5 All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated. .6 Transmit signal to the Central Station with point identification. .4 The trouble activation of any internal or field device or wiring fault shall cause the following functions to occur: .1 The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel and / or remote annunciator. .2 The displays on the system fire alarm control panels and network controllers shall indicate all applicable information associated with the trouble condition including; zone, device type, device location and time / date. .3 All system activity / events shall be documented on the system history file. .4 Any remote or local annunicator LCD / LED's associated with the trouble zone shall be illuminated. .5 Transmit trouble signal to the Central Station. .5 Silencing the System .1 Audio tones (but not the visual devices) may be silenced by activation of any of the "System Silence" switches. Note that this does not acknowledge the alarm, and if the "acknowledge" switch is not
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.2 SYSTEM OPERATION (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) turned on, the audible evacuation tone will automatically come on after 5 minutes. .2 If a new alarm comes in after the system has been silenced, the alert tone will re-sound throughout the building, and the 5 minute evacuation tone timeout will be re-initiated. The silence switch must be turned off, then back on to re-silence the new audible alarm. .3 To silence the strobes, the panels must be reset. .6 Resetting the System .1 It shall be possible to reset the system by operation of the `system reset' function devices at the fire alarm control panel. .7 System Testing and Maintenance .1 For the purposes of system testing and maintenance, "output disable" functions shall be implemented to reduce the volume of the audio signal circuits, to disable the audio and visual (i.e. strobe) signal circuits, magnetic door release functions, fire shutter releases, smoke damper operations, fan controls, and pre-action valve operation. .2 Activation of the output disables shall be possible by individual function or group of functions and on individual devices or circuits, by zone or globally. .3 Activation of any of the bypass functions shall result in a trouble alarm to be initiated on the system. The system bypass function shall have to be turned off in order for the trouble alarm to be removed. .4 Activation of the bypass functions shall be initiated via switches at the main fire alarm panel.
2.3 MASTER FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
.1
The master fire alarm control panel shall provide the following features: .1 Capacity for up to ten isolated intelligent signalling line circuits each with the capacity for up to 318 individually identifiable and controllable detection/control points; .2 Capacity to monitor addressable initiating modules to monitor normally open and normally closed contacts;
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 8 2011-05-25
2.3 MASTER FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) Automatic drift compensation of .3 intelligent smoke detectors; .4 Automatic system test to activate and verify all detection devices in the system; .5 Multiple two wire communication loops each supporting up to 60 intelligent detection devices; .6 Completely field programmable from the front panel keyboard; .7 Automatic default programming; .8 Programmable timers for silence inhibit, alarm cutout, and alarm verification; .9 4000 event history log stored in non-volatile memory with display, scale, and print options; .10 Real time non-volatile clock for time and date stamp of all events; .11 Multiple user assignable passwords; .12 Maintenance alert function to automatically warn of contaminated detectors before a false alarm occurs; .13 Status report for all devices in system, including detector sensitivity and verification tally; .14 Keypad with full alphabet capacity; .15 Keypad controls for: .1 Acknowledge Switch: Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new Alarms and/or Troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the Alarm and Trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady-On mode. If multiple Alarm or Trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the 32 character LCD display to the next Alarm or Trouble condition. .2 Signal Silence Switch: Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all programmed Alarm Indicating Appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto silence timers. .3 System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to their normal conditionl. Holding the
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 9 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .15 Keypad controls for:(Cont'd) .3 System Reset Switch:(Cont'd) RESET switch shall perform a Lamp Test function. .4 System Test Switch: Activation of the System Test Switch shall initiate an automatic test of all Intelligent/Addressable detectors in the system. The System Test shall activate the electronics in each intelligent sensor, simulating an alarm condition from that sensor to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall interpret the data from each sensor installed in the system. A report summarizing the results of this test shall be displayed automatically on the System Liquid Crystal Display, as well as on any CRTs or printers in the System. .5 Lamp Test Switch: Activation of the Lamp Test Switch shall sequentially turn on all LED indicators, System Liquid Crystal Display and Local Piezo-Electric signal, and then automatically return the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the previous condition. .16 Separate LED display of: .1 system trouble (yellow) .2 supervisory/security (yellow) .3 ac power .4 signals silenced (yellow) .5 system alarm (red) .6 pre-alarm (yellow) .7 ground fault .8 cpu fail .9 test. .17 Capacity to annunciate custom descriptive identification of each addressable device on a 32 character Multi-line alphanumeric LCD display with LED backlight. .18 LED display shall simultaneously display type of event, type of device, custom point label, custom zone label, time and date, and point number; .19 Remote printer option; .20 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all analog intelligent smoke detectors in the system from the System keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 10 2011-05-25
.2
The fire alarm control panel shall communicate with each of the devices via one pair of conductors.
The control panel shall contain a power supply module to provide 24 VDC and 5 VDC power to the system. The panel shall contain a standby power source (24 V gell-cell batteries) to power the fire alarm panel and all of the cell smoke detection aspirator units for not less than 24 hours plus 1 hour in alarm mode at 100% load upon a normal AC power failure. Batteries shall be completely maintenance free, with no liquids required. The fire alarm system shall include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery. The Control Panel shall be equipped with a network control module to communicate alarm and trouble information with the main building system via a communication link. This contract shall provide a fibre optic cable from the Control panel to the main network panel in the CCMS. Fibre Optic Cable to be armoured type. The Master Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be compatible with the Institution Fire Alarm System.
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.4 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL STATIONS
.1
Addressable Manual Stations shall be two-stage type provided to connect to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signalling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops. The Manual Station shall, on command from the Control Panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after activation they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. Second stage action shall be key controlled. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation that cannot be reset without the use of a key. Manual Stations shall be constructed of LEXAN or extruded aluminum with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover.
.2
.3
.4
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 11 2011-05-25
2.4 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL STATIONS (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) "FIRE/FEU" shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on a recessed outlet box. The Manual Station shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches. Addressable manual stations shall be two-stage, non-coded.
.5 .6 .7
2.5 INTELLIGENT MULTI SENSOR DETECTORS
.1
Multi Sensor Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable, and shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signalling Line Circuit loops. The multi sensor detector shall process and analyze information from ionization, photoelectric, and heat sensors within the detector. The detectors shall use a unipolar chamber to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. The detectors shall be ceiling mounted and shall include a twist-lock base. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated remotely on command from the control panel. The detectors shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs to indicate "normal" system polling status and "alarm" state. The detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time of day basis. Using software in the Fire Alarm Control Panel, the detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
.7
.8
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 12 2011-05-25
2.5 INTELLIGENT MULTI SENSOR DETECTORS (Cont'd)
.8
(Cont'd) changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72E.
2.6 INTELLIGENT HEAT DETECTORS
.1
Heat Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable, and shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signalling Line Circuits. The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions (fixed temperature/rate of rise) caused by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of such thermal measurements. The detectors shall be ceiling mounted and shall include a twist-lock base. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated on command from the control panel. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs to indicate "normal" polling status and "alarm" state. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
2.7 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE
.1
Addressable Monitor Modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of Alarm Initiating Devices to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signalling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops (ie sprinkler flow and tamper switches). The Monitor Module shall mount in a 102 mm square, 54 mm deep electrical box. The Monitor module shall be identified by a device specific address. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.
.2 .3
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 13 2011-05-25
2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE
.1
Addressable Control Modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of conventional signal devices, fan shutdown, elevator return to home signal, electro-magnetic door holders, and other auxiliary control functions. The control module may be set to operate as a dry contact relay. The Control Module shall mount in a 102 mm square, 54 mm deep electrical box. The Control Module shall be identified by a device specific address. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Control Module is operational, and is in regular communication with the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
.2 .3
2.9 INTELLIGENT DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HOUSING
.1
The Duct Smoke Detector Housing shall accommodate an Intelligent photoelectric type smoke detector, as specified elsewhere in the specifications. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and appropriate action taken to shutdown air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. Appropriate length of sampling tube shall be provided and installed to suit the duct upon which the in duct smoke detector housing is mounted.
.2
.3
2.10 AUDIBLE / VISUAL SIGNAL DEVICES
.1
Both audible and visual signals shall be contained in one common flush mounted device. The lens for the visual section shall be constructed of polycarbonate with "FIRE/FEU" in contrasting letters on both sides of the lens. The lens shall project from the face of the enclosure to allow visibility from the side of the device. The visual signal shall consist of xenon flash tube which shall flash at a rate of between one and three flashes per second. The visual signal shall produce a minimum effective luminous intensity of 15 cd, a flash duration of 200 ms or less, with a maximum duty cycle of 40% (as per ULC/CAN-S526). The audible portion of the device shall have two tone options, two audibility options, and the option to switch
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 14 2011-05-25
2.10 AUDIBLE / VISUAL SIGNAL DEVICES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) between a temporal 3 pattern and a non-temporal continuous pattern. Sound level shall be minimum 97 dBA (measured in anechoic room at 3 metres, and shall meet requirements of ULC Standard S525.
2.11 END OF LINE DEVICES
.1
End of line devices to control supervisory current in signalling circuits, sized to ensure correct supervisory current for each circuit. Open, short or ground fault in any circuit will alter supervisory current in that circuit, producing audible and visible alarm at main control panel and remote annunciator.
2.12 SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP ISOLATOR MODULES
.1
Short circuit loop isolator modules shall be provided between each floor or floor area so that a fault on one floor does not affect the operation of devices on another floor area. No more than twenty-five (25) devices shall be connected between short circuit isolators. If a fault occurs, isolators shall remove power to all devices beyond the isolator on the loop to the next isolator. When the fault is removed, the module shall automatically restore the loop to normal condition.
.2
2.13 LCD ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
.1
The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, back-lit LCD display containing a minimum six hundred and forty (640) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system.
.2
2.14 CELL SMOKE DETECTION
.1
Cell smoke detection shall be provided by an air sampling system with a central 15 port aspirator unit to draw air from the exhaust air ducts of up to 15 cells through an integral high sensitivity smoke detector unit. The air sampling pipes shall be 13 mm internal diameter installed to draw air from the cell exhaust duct and return the air sample to the same duct.
.2
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 15 2011-05-25
2.14 CELL SMOKE DETECTION (Cont'd)
.3
Smoke detection in each of the four sampling ports shall be annunciated separately. The air sampling system outputs shall be connected to the main fire alarm system via monitor modules to provide activation of the system alarms.
The air sampling system shall be designed to be relatively "maintenance-free". Regular required cleaning of filters is not acceptable. The use of distilled water with re-fillable water storage at the aspirator unit is not acceptable. The air sampling system and detector shall be ULC listed for use in the proposed application. The air sampling/smoke detection unit panel assembly shall include the following: .1 LED's indicating alarms on each of the sampling tubes .2 Power indicator. .3 Fault indicator. .4 RS-232 serial computer interface port. .5 Reset switch to clear all alarms. .6 Output alarm contacts. .7 Output 'system control' contacts. Programming shall be via a unit mounted keypad or via a network computer. Each zone (sampling tube) shall be individually programmable to any of ten sensitivity settings. It shall be possible to automatically change the settings three times per day with different settings for each day of the week. The air sampling detector units shall be networkable via a RS485 loop. Each zone shall be individually monitored and programmed via a remote LCD display. Cell Smoke Detection System shall be ULC listed and utilize microbore sampling tube good for maximum distance of 50 m. All of the detector units shall be connected together on a RS485 loop with an annunciator programmer to be located at the main fire alarm panel location.
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9
.10
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 16 2011-05-25
2.15 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
.1
Standard Duty Door Holders .1 Standard duty electromagnetic door holders shall be constructed of a brushed zinc housing, with a minimum holding force of 111 Newtons. .2 Door holders shall be flush wall mounted or floor mounted as indicated on the drawings. .3 Door holders shall operate at 24 V AC/DC. Heavy Duty Door Holders .1 Heavy Duty holders shall be constructed of brushed stainless steel, fully sealed and tamper-proof with a holding force of 860 kg. .2 Door holders shall be surface wall mount type. Strike plate and magnetic unit shall mount using steel, recessed, tamper-proof screws. .3 Door holders shall operate at 24 V DC.
.2
2.16 DEVICE SECURITY COVERS
.1
Smoke detector cages for detectors within reach in prisoner areas shall be maximum security rated protective type. Protective covers for alarm signalling devices located in prisoner areas shall be suitable for flush mount application.
.2
2.17 AS-BUILT RISER DIAGRAM PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Fire alarm system riser diagram: in glazed frame, minimum size 600 x 600 mm.
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install systems in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524-06-AM1 and TB OSH Chapter 3-04. Install main control panel and connect to ac power supply. Locate and install manual alarm stations and connect to alarm circuit wiring. Locate and install detectors and connect to alarm circuit wiring. Do not mount detectors within 1 m of air outlets. Maintain at least 600 mm radius clear space on ceiling, below and around detectors. Locate duct type detectors in straight portions of ducts. Connect alarm circuits to main control panel.
.5
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 17 2011-05-25
.6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13
Locate and install audible / visual signal device and connect to signalling circuits.
Connect signalling circuits to main control panel. Install end-of-line devices at end of signalling circuits. Install remote annunciator panels and connect to annunciator circuit wiring. Install door releasing devices. Locate and install control modules to control fan shut down. Install 21 mm conduit to the telephone service board. Class "A" wiring shall be used for the fire alarm system. The primary wiring circuit and the return circuit shall not be installed in the same conduit. Wiring for initiating device circuits shall be 2c #18FAS105C, and signalling line circuits shall be 4c #14FAS105C minimum. Wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded. Wiring for signals shall be minimum #14 gauge, THHN, 600 volt, solid copper, or as recommended by Manufacturer. Signal circuit conductors shall be red and black in colour. Pull stations, bells, indicator lights, and E.O.L. resistors shall be aligned vertically where grouped at one location. Devices staggered vertically will not be accepted. Energize fire alarm panel from breaker located in main distribution centre. The breaker shall be coloured red and be locked in the "on" position. All fire alarm system wiring shall be contained in conduit. Ensure that air sampling tube, and exhaust tube for duct detectors are properly aligned within the ventilation duct, according to manufacturer's installation instructions.
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18 .19
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 18 2011-05-25
.20
All fire alarm conductors shall be free of splices and t-taps and shall be installed continuous between devices.
All monitor and control modules shall be identified with a plastic laminate label (size 3) indicating what device the module is monitoring or controlling (i.e. "TAMPER SWITCH #5", "ELECTRO-MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN", etc.). Each trouble and alarm zone shall be identified at the fire alarm panel with a size 1 plastic laminate label. When the fire alarm system installation is complete and before verification, the Contractor shall provide written notification to The Departmental Representative requesting authorization to connect to the Institution's Fire Alarm network system. During verification, confirm that activation of the fire alarm system in the Living Unit results in communication of the alarm annunciation to the MCCP. Secure all fire alarm devices and security cages with security anchors and fasteners which are CSC approved.
.21
.22
.23
.24
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 Electrical General Requirements and CAN/ULC S537-04. Fire alarm system: .1 Test each device and alarm circuit to ensure manual stations, thermal and smoke detectors transmit alarm to control panel and actuate presignals and general alarms. .2 Check annunciator panels to ensure zones are shown correctly. .3 Simulate grounds and breaks on alarm and signalling circuits to ensure proper operation of system. .4 Class A circuits. .1 Test each conductor on all circuits for capability of providing alarm signal on each side of single open circuit fault condition imposed near midmost point of circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test. .2 Test each conductor on all circuits for capability of providing alarm signal during ground fault condition imposed near
.2
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
Sect 28 31 00 Page 19 2011-05-25
.2
Fire alarm system:(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) midmost point of circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test. .5 Class B circuits. .1 Test each conductor on all circuits for capability of providing alarm signal on line side of single open circuit fault condition imposed at electrically most remote device on circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test. .2 Test each conductor on all circuits for capability of providing alarm signal during ground fault condition imposed at electrically most remote device on circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test.
3.3
TRAINING
.1
Arrange and pay for on site lectures and demonstrations by fire alarm equipment manufacturer to train operational personnel in use and maintenance of fire alarm system.
END
ROUGH GRADING
Section 31 22 13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 01 29 83 - Payment Procedures: Testing Laboratory Services. Section 31 23 10 - Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM D698-07e1, Standards Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-16ft/ft3 (600 KN-m/m3)).
1.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS
.1 .2
Examine subsurface investigation report which is bound into specification. Known underground and surface utility lines and buried objects are as indicated on site plan. Lines shown for information purposes only. Contractor is responsible for obtaining locates prior to commencing work. Refer to dewatering in Section 31 23 10.
.3
1.4
PROTECTION
.1
Protect and/or transplant existing fencing trees, landscaping, natural features, bench marks, buildings, pavement, surface or underground utility lines which are to remain as directed by Departmental Representative. If damaged, restore to original or better condition unless directed otherwise. Maintain access roads to prevent accumulation of construction related debris on roads.
.2
ROUGH GRADING
Section 31 22 13 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Fill material: Type 3 in accordance with of Section 31 23 10. Excavated or graded material existing on site may be suitable to use as fill for grading work if approved by Departmental Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
.1
Do not handle topsoil while in wet or frozen condition or in any manner in which soil structure is adversely affected as determined by Departmental Representative. Commence topsoil stripping of areas as directed by Departmental Representative after area has been cleared of brush weeds and grasses and removed from site. Strip topsoil to depths as indicated. Rototill weeds and grasses and retain as topsoil on site. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil. Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m. Dispose of unused topsoil off site.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.2
GRADING
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Rough grade to levels, profiles, and contours allowing for surface treatment as indicated. Rough grade to following depths below finish grades as indicated: Slope rough grade away from building as indicated (offers more choice). Grade ditches to depth as indicated. Prior to placing fill over existing ground, scarify surface to depth of 150 mm. Maintain fill and existing surface at approximately same moisture content to facilitate bonding.
ROUGH GRADING
Section 31 22 13 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.2 GRADING (Cont'd)
.6
Compact filled dry density to .1 85% under .2 95% under
and disturbed areas to maximum ASTM D698, as follows: landscaped areas. paved and walk areas.
.7
Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs to remain.
3.3
TESTING
.1
Inspection and testing of soil compaction will be carried out by an independent testing agency, acceptable to the Departmental Representative. Submit testing procedure, frequency of tests, testing results to Departmental Representative for review.
.2
3.4 SURPLUS MATERIAL
.1
Remove surplus material and material unsuitable for fill, grading or landscaping off site.
END
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
Section 31 23 10 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Section 31 22 13: Rough Grading. Section 31 05 17: Aggregates: General. Section 33 11 18: Water Mains. Section 33 44 01: Storm Sewers. Section 33 34 02: Sanitary Sewers and Force Mains.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM C117-04, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer Than 75-micro m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. ASTM C136-06, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. ASTM D422-63(2007), Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil 3 Using Standard Effort (12400 ft-lbf/ft (600 kN-m/m 3)). ASTM D1557-09, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m 3)). ASTM D4318-10, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series. CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric. CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete, Includes Update No. 1 (2011). Typ. for all references to OPSS S14, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Construction Specification for Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting.
.2 .3 .4
.5
.6
.7 .8 .9
.10
Section 31 23 10 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.3
DEFINITIONS
.1
Excavation classes: two classes of excavation will be recognized; common excavation and rock excavation. .1 Rock excavation: excavation of material from solid masses of igneous, sedimentary or metamorphic rock which, prior to its removal, was integral with its parent mass, and boulders or rock fragments having individual volume in excess of 1 m3. .2 Common excavation: excavation of materials of whatever nature, which are not included under definitions of rock excavation. Topsoil: material capable of supporting good vegetative growth and suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping and seeding. Waste material: excavated material unsuitable for use in work or surplus to requirements. Borrow material: material obtained from locations outside area to be graded, and required for construction of fill areas or for other portions of work. Unsuitable materials: .1 Weak and compressible materials under excavated areas. .2 Frost susceptible materials under excavated areas. .3 Frost susceptible materials: .1 Fine grained soils with plasticity index less than 10 when tested to ASTM D4318, and gradation within limits specified when tested to ASTM D422 and ASTM C136: Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1. Sieve Designation % Passing 2.00 mm 100 0.10 mm 45-100 0.02 mm 10-80 0.005 mm 0-45 .2 Coarse grained soils containing more than 20% by mass passing 0.075 mm sieve.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
Unshrinkable fill: very weak mixture of Portland cement, concrete aggregates and water that resists settlement when placed in utility trenches, and capable of being readily excavated.
Section 31 23 10 Page 3 2011-05-25
1.4
SAMPLES
.1
Inform Departmental Representative at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work, of proposed source of fill materials and provide access for sampling.
1.5 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES
.1
Existing buried utilities and structures: .1 Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated are for guidance only. Completeness and accuracy are not guaranteed. .2 Prior to commencing excavation work, notify applicable owner or authorities having jurisdiction, establish location and state of use of buried utilities and structures. Owners or authorities having jurisdiction to clearly mark such locations to prevent disturbance during work. .3 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful test excavations. .4 Maintain and protect from damage, water, steam, sewer, gas, electric, telephone and other utilities and structures encountered as indicated. .5 Where utility lines or structures exist in area of excavation, obtain direction of Departmental Representative before re-routing. Costs for such work to be paid by Departmental Representative. .6 Record location of maintained, re-routed and abandoned underground lines. Existing buildings and surface features: .1 Conduct, with Departmental Representative, condition survey of existing buildings, trees and other plants, lawns, fencing, service poles, wires, rail tracks, pavement, survey bench marks and monuments which may be affected by work. .2 Protect existing buildings and surface features from damage while work is in progress. In event of damage, immediately make repair to approval of Departmental Representative. .3 Where required for excavation, cut roots or branches as approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
1.6 SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING
.1
Engage services of qualified professional engineer who is registered or licensed in province of Ontario, Canada in which work is to be carried out to design and inspect cofferdams, shoring, bracing and underpinning required for work.
Section 31 23 10 Page 4 2011-05-25
1.6 SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING (Cont'd)
.2 .3
Submit design and supporting data at least 2 weeks prior to commencing work.
Design and supporting data submitted to bear stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in province of Ontario, Canada.
1.7 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING REQUIRED BY OTHER SECTIONS
.1
Excavation and backfilling for site services, mechanical and electrical work is included in this Section and shall be carried out in accordance with provisions specified herein and as indicated on drawings. This work to be laid out and supervised by trade concerned.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Type 1 fill: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, April 2004 for Granular A aggregate. Maximum size 19.0 mm. Type 2 fill: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, April 2004 for Granular B Type 2 aggregate. Maximum size 26.5 mm. Type 3 fill: selected material from excavation or other sources, approved by Departmental Representative for use intended, unfrozen and free from rocks larger than 75 mm, cinders, ashes, sods, refuse or other deleterious materials. Unshrinkable fill: proportioned and mixed to provide: .1 Maximum compressive strength of 0.4 MPa at 28 days. .2 Maximum Portland cement content of 25 kg/m3. .3 Minimum strength of 0.07 MPa at 24 h. .4 Concrete aggregates: to CSA A23.1/A23.2. .5 Portland cement: Type 10. .6 Slump: 160 to 200 mm.
.2
.3
.4
Section 31 23 10 Page 5 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE PREPARATION
.1
Remove obstructions, ice and snow, from surfaces to be excavated within limits indicated. Cut pavement or sidewalk neatly along limits of proposed excavation in order that surface may break evenly and cleanly.
.2
.1
Commence topsoil stripping of areas as indicated after area has been cleared of brush, weeds, and grasses and removed from site. Strip topsoil to depths as indicated. Do not mix topsoil with subsoil. Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m. Dispose of unused topsoil off site.
.2 .3
.4
3.3
STOCKPILING
.1
Stockpile fill materials in areas designated by Departmental Representative. Stockpile granular materials in manner to prevent segregation. Protect fill materials from contamination.
.2
3.4 COFFERDAMS, SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING
.1
Construct temporary works to depths, heights and locations as indicated or directed by Departmental Representative. During backfill operation: .1 Unless otherwise as indicated or as directed by Departmental Representative, remove sheeting and shoring from excavations. .2 Do not remove bracing until backfilling has reached respective levels of such bracing. .3 Pull sheeting in increments that will ensure compacted backfill is maintained at an elevation at least 500 mm above toe of sheeting. When sheeting is required to remain in place, cut off tops at elevations as indicated.
.2
.3
Section 31 23 10 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.5 DEWATERING AND HEAVE PREVENTION
.1 .2
Keep excavations free of water while work is in progress. Submit for Departmental Representative's approval details of proposed dewatering or heave prevention methods, such as dikes, well points, and sheet pile cut-offs. Avoid excavation below groundwater table if quick condition or heave is likely to occur. Prevent piping or bottom heave of excavations by groundwater lowering, sheet pile cut-offs, or other means. Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run-off. Dispose of water in accordance with Section 01 35 43 and in manner not detrimental to public and private property, or any portion of work completed or under construction. Provide flocculation tanks, settling basins, or other treatment facilities to remove suspended solids or other materials before discharging to storm sewers, water courses or drainage areas.
.3
.4 .5
.6
3.6
EXCAVATION
.1
Excavate to lines, grades, elevations and dimensions as indicated as directed by Departmental Representative. Remove concrete masonry paving walks demolished foundations and rubble and other obstructions encountered during excavation in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Excavation must not interfere with normal 45 splay of bearing from bottom of any footing. Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs that are to remain. If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe or saw. For trench excavation, unless otherwise authorized by Departmental Representative in writing, do not excavate more than 30 m of trench in advance of installation operations and do not leave open more than 15 m at end of day's operation. Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material off site.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
Section 31 23 10 Page 7 2011-05-25
3.6 EXCAVATION (Cont'd)
.7 .8
Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or natural watercourses.

Earth bottoms of excavations to be undisturbed soil, level, free from loose, soft or organic matter. Notify Departmental Representative when bottom of excavation is reached. Obtain Departmental Representative's approval of completed excavation. Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom to extent and depth as directed by Departmental Representative. Correct unauthorized over-excavation as follows: .1 Fill under bearing surfaces and footings with concrete specified for footings. .2 Fill under other areas with Type 2 fill compacted to not less than 95% of Standard Proctor Density to ASTM D698. Hand trim, make firm and remove loose material and debris from excavations. Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, compact foundation soil to density at least equal to undisturbed soil. Clean out rock seams and fill with concrete mortar or grout to approval of Departmental Representative.
.9 .10 .11
.12
.13
3.7 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION
.1
Use fill of types as indicated or specified below. Compaction densities are percentages of maximum densities obtained from ASTM D698, ASTM D1557 Standard Proctor Density. .1 Exterior side of perimeter walls: use Type 3 fill to subgrade level. Compact to 95%. .2 Within building area: use Type 2 to underside of base course for floor slabs. Compact to 98%. .3 Under concrete slabs: provide 150 mm compacted thickness base course of Type 1 fill to underside of slab. Compact base course to 100%. .4 Retaining walls: use Type 2 fill to subgrade level on high side for minimum 500 mm from wall and compact to 95%. For remaining portion, use Type 3 fill compacted to 95%. .5 Place unshrinkable fill in areas as indicated.
Section 31 23 10 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.8 BEDDING AND SURROUND OF UNDERGROUND SERVICES
.1
Place and compact granular material for bedding and surround of underground services as indicated. Place bedding and surround material in unfrozen condition.
.2
3.9
BACKFILLING
.1
Do not proceed with backfilling operations until Departmental Representative has inspected and approved installations. Areas to be backfilled to be free from debris, snow, ice, water and frozen ground. Do not use backfill material which is frozen or contains ice, snow or debris. Place backfill material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to grades indicated. Compact each layer before placing succeeding layer. Backfill around installations. Place unshrinkable fill in areas as indicated. Consolidate and level unshrinkable fill with internal vibrators. .1 Place bedding and surround material as specified elsewhere. .2 Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete within 24 h after placing of concrete. .3 Place layers simultaneously on both sides of installed work to equalize loading. Difference not to exceed 0.6 m. .4 Where temporary unbalanced earth pressures are liable to develop on walls or other structures: .1 Permit concrete to cure for minimum 14 days or until it has sufficient strength to withstand earth and compaction pressure and approval obtained from Departmental Representative or: .2 If approved by Departmental Representative, erect bracing or shoring to counteract unbalance, and leave in place until removal is approved by Departmental Representative. Install drainage system in backfill as indicated.
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6
.7
Section 31 23 10 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.10
RESTORATION
.1
Upon completion of work, remove waste materials and debris, trim slopes, and correct defects as directed by Departmental Representative. Replace topsoil as indicated. Reinstate pavement, sidewalks and lawns to elevation which existed before excavation. Clean and reinstate areas affected by work as directed by Departmental Representative. Use temporary plating to support traffic loads over unshrinkable fill for initial 24 h.
.2 .3 .4 .5
END
BORED CONCRETE PILES
Section 31 63 23 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. Section 03 30 11 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.2 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
.1 .2
Measure caissons in total linear metres of length incorporated into work. Amount of bored pile shaft added or deducted in event actual bearings are below or above elevations indicated will be measured in metres for each type of caisson. Base bid on number and lengths of piles as indicated. Actual number and lengths of piles installed: established by Departmental Representative from piling records. Measure piles in metres measured from base elevation including rock socket to cut-off elevation at pile cap.
.3 .4
.5
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. .2 CSA G30.18-09, Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet. Shop Drawings: indicate reinforcing details and concrete mix design. Quality assurance submittals: .1 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply
.3 .4
Section 31 63 23 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
Quality assurance submittals:(Cont'd) .1 Certificates:(Cont'd) with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Records and reports: submit concrete tests as described in PART 2 - SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL. .3 Submit for review by Departmental Representative five (5) copies of pile installation records as described in PART 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
.1
Remove excavated material from site unless reuse for site grading is approved by Departmental Representative.
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Concrete mixes and materials: in accordance with Section 03 30 11. Reinforcing steel: to CSA G30.18.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Concrete tests: to CSA A23.1/A23.2.
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Bore holes to diameters and depths until required bearing stratum as determined by Departmental Representative is reached. Departmental Representative to inspect and test bottom of bore holes. Rock sockets: excavate sockets 500 mm into rock. Protective steel casing: .1 Where required, use steel protective casing. Ensure penetration of casing to required depths either by self mass or driving. Check each bored shaft for toxic and explosive gases and provide appropriate protective measures for personnel working in shaft.
.2 .3 .4
.5
Section 31 63 23 Page 3 2011-05-25
.6 .7
Dispose of excavated materials as directed by Departmental Representative.

Departmental Representative to inspect pile excavation prior to placing of concrete. .1 Remove loose material, foreign matter and water as directed by Departmental Representative. Install steel reinforcement in accordance with Section 03 20 00 and as indicated. Fill pile excavations with concrete to elevations as indicated. .1 Place concrete in one continuous pour in accordance with Section 03 30 11. Steel protective casing may be removed at option of Contractor, unless otherwise specified. Where steel protective casing is to be removed, provide concrete with minimum slump of 200 mm to prevent arching or setting of concrete. .1 Withdraw casing in conjunction with concrete placing, keeping bottom of casing 600 mm below level of concrete. .2 Do not vibrate concrete internally. Use tremie pipe or concrete pumping to place concrete.
.8 .9
.10
.11
.12
3.2 DEFECTIVE PILES
.1
Cased concrete shaft piles rejected where: .1 Soil has entered casing. .2 Water has entered casing. .3 Casing is damaged, out of tolerance or alignment. Defective pile, as directed by Departmental Representative Consultant, may be left in place to be cut off at elevation specified by Departmental Representative Consultant and filled with sand. Where pile has encountered obstruction during driving before reaching its specified bearing stature: considered unsuitable dealt with in conformance with Departmental Representative Consultant instructions. .1 Payment for unused section according to PART 1 - MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES' article.
.2
.3
Section 31 63 23 Page 4 2011-05-25
.1
Field Records: maintain installation record for each pile, including elevation of bedrock and cut-off elevation.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END
GRANULAR BASE
Section 32 11 20 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section: 32 11 24 - Granular Sub-Base. Section: 32 12 17 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Granular A: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 01010, April 2004. Maximum size Granular A 19.0 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLACING
.1 .2 .3
Place on a clean surface, properly shaped and compacted and free from snow or ice. Place material in layers not exceeding 150 mm when compacted. Spread each layer uniformly using approved grading equipment and methods.
3.2
COMPACTING
.1 .2
Compact each layer to minimum 100% Standard Proctor Density. Add water as required to maintain material at or near optimum moisture content while compacting.
3.3
FINISHING
.1
Finish compacted surface to within 12 mm of established grade as indicated by a 3 m straightedge placed in any direction Correct irregularities greater than 12 mm by loosening the surface and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.
.2
GRANULAR BASE
Section 32 11 20 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
The Departmental Representative may perform field and laboratory tests for control of moisture, density and aggregate gradation. Results will control Contractor's operations.
END
GRANULAR SUB-BASE
Section 32 11 24 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section: 32 11 20 - Granular Base. Section: 32 12 17 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Granular B Type II: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 1010, April 2004. Maximum size Granular B Type 2, 26.5 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLACING
.1 .2 .3
Place on a clean surface, properly shaped and compacted and free from snow or ice. Place material in layers not exceeding 150 mm when compacted. Spread each layer uniformly using approved grading equipment and methods.
3.2
COMPACTING
.1 .2
Compact each layer to minimum 100% Standard Proctor Density. Add water as required to maintain material at or near optimum moisture content while compacting.
3.3
FINISHING
.1
Finish compacted surface to within 12 mm of established grade as indicated by a 3 m straightedge placed in any direction Correct irregularities greater than 12 mm by loosening the surface and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.
.2
GRANULAR SUB-BASE
Section 32 11 24 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
The contractor will perform field and laboratory tests for control of moisture, Density (compaction) and aggregate gradation. Results will control Contractor's operations. Testing shall be carried out by an independant testing agency, acceptable to the Departmental Representative.
.2
END
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
Section 32 12 17 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 32 11 20 - Granular Base. Section 32 11 24 - Granular Sub-base.
1.2
PROTECTION
.1
Protect buildings, landscaping, roads, driveways, sidewalks, trees and shrubs on site that may be damaged by paving machinery, equipment or personnel. Make good property damaged due to paving operations. Take necessary precautions to protect workmen and public from hazards of paving operations. Keep vehicular traffic off newly paved areas until paving properly cured. Provide access to building at all times. Arrange paving schedule so as not to interfere with normal use of premises.
.2 .3 .4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Asphalt base course: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1150, November 2010 for type HL 8. Maximum size aggregate 19.0 mm. Asphalt surface course: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1150, November 2010 for type HL 3. Maximum size aggregate 13.2 mm. Primer: emulsified asphalt to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1103, November 2007 for rapid setting type.
.2
.3
Section 32 12 17 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CLEANING
.1 .2 .3
Remove dust, contaminants, loose and foreign materials, oil and grease in designated areas. Use rotary power brooms supplemented by hand brooming as required. Where directed, remove to existing pavement level, sealing compound which has protruded excessively and dispose of removed material as directed. Keep drainage system clear of loose and waste materials.
.4
3.2
EXCAVATING
.1 .2 .3
Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated or required for construction of work. Make excavation to clean lines to minimize quantity of fill material required. Earth bottoms of excavations to be dry undisturbed soil, reasonably level, free from loose or organic matter.
3.3
INSPECTION
.1
Check graded subgrade for conformity with elevations and cross-sections before placing granular sub-base and granular base material. Proof-roll subgrade sub-base and base surface with mass and type of roller approved by Departmental Representative. .1 Check for unstable areas. .2 Check for areas requiring additional compaction. Notify Departmental Representative of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. When complete, have Departmental Representative inspect excavations to verify soil bearing capacity, depths and dimensions.
.2
.3 .4
.5
Section 32 12 17 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.3 INSPECTION (Cont'd)
.6
Excavation, beyond limits shown on drawings, if authorized in writing by Departmental Representative, will be paid for as extra to Contract price in accordance with General Conditions. Quantities will be calculated in place, compaction included. Truck load measurements not acceptable.
Correct unauthorized excavation at no extra cost by filling with Granular A material.
.7
3.4
ASPHALT COURSE
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
2 Apply primer at approximately 0.5 L/m .
Place compacted asphaltic concrete base course to thickness as indicated. Place compacted asphaltic concrete surface course to thickness as indicated. Minimum 7C air temperature when placing mixture. Minimum 120C mixture temperature when spread. Maximum 149C mixture temperature at any time. Compact each course with roller when it can support roller mass without undue cracking or displacement. Roller, power driven, minimum mass 9 tonnes, minimum wheel width 600 mm. Roll until roller marks are eliminated. Compact to 96% laboratory density. Keep roller speed slow enough to avoid mixture displacement. Moisten roller wheels to prevent mixture adhesion. Compact mixture with hot tampers in areas inaccessible to roller. Finish surface true to grade and free from deviations exceeding 1:1000 when measured in any direction with a 3 m straight edge.
.8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13
Section 32 12 17 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.5
JOINTS
.1
Cut back bituminous course to full depth in straight or curved lines as required to expose fresh vertical surfaces. Remove any broken or loose material. Paint exposed edge of asphaltic joints, edges of manholes and catchbasin frames, curbs and similar items with asphalt primer prior to placing asphalt courses. Where paving comprises two courses overlap longitudinal joints not less that 600 mm. Carefully place and compact hot asphaltic material against joints.
.2
.3 .4
END
STEEL CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES
Section 32 31 14 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 12, 11 19 13, 11 19 14, and 08 50 50. Refer to Section 11 19 13 - Detention Doors and Frames, Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A53/A53M-10, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .3 ASTM A90/A90M-09, Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc Alloy Coatings. .4 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. .5 ASTM C618-08a, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33. .2 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-138.1 96 CORR., Fabric for Chain Link Fence. .2 CAN/CGSB-138.2 96, Steel Framework for Chain Link Fence. .3 CAN/CGSB-138.3 96, Installation of Chain Link Fence. .4 CAN/CGSB-138.4 96, Gates for Chain Link Fence. .5 CAN/CGSB-1.181 99, Ready Mixed Organic Zinc Rich Coating. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.2
.3
.4
Section 32 31 14 Page 2 2011-05-25
.4
(Cont'd) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete. .2 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Drawings to indicate all pertinent dimensions, connections, details, materials, finishes and all other information required to completely describe the chain link fence installation to this project. Shop Drawings to indicate: .1 Each type of swing gate and sliding gate, reinforcements, anchor locations, exposed fasteners and finishes. .2 Preparations for hardware. .3 Preparations for alarm monitoring and for door control system. .4 Schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and in door schedule.
.3
.1 .2 .3
.4
.5
Section 32 31 14 Page 3 2011-05-25
.1
Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Manufacturer's factory representative must be present to sign off and verify the detention door and hardware system during the final commissioning process.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Concrete mixes and materials: in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2. .1 Nominal coarse aggregate size: 20-5. .2 Compressive strength: 20 MPa minimum at 28 days. .3 Additives: fly ash to ASTM C618. .4 20 Mpa, 50 to 80 mm slump, 6% air entrainment. Chain link fence fabric: to CAN/CGSB-138.1. .1 Type 1, Class A, heavy style 50.8 mm diamond mesh, interwoven 4.8 mm (6 gauge) wire diameter with twisted tight selvage at top and bottom. .2 Height of fabric: as indicated. Concertina: to CAN/CGSB-138.2, barbed type galvanized to CSC standards and the approval of the Departmental Representative. 20 x 0.5 mm clenched around a 2.5 mm diameter spring steel galvanized core wire to form a concertina coil with a nominal exterior coil diameter of 710 mm. The coil, when installed, shall have a minimum diameter of 635 mm. The barbed concertina shall have a 20 mm long blade type barbs measured from tip to tip of the blade, and barb clusters shall be spaced approximately 45 mm on centre. The concertina shall be formed by clipping adjacent loops of single helical coils together at a minimum of three (3) points on the
.2
.3
Section 32 31 14 Page 4 2011-05-25
.3
Concertina:(Cont'd) circumference. Clips shall be galvanized. The resulting coil, when stretched, shall form a cylindrical pattern. The loop spacing shall not exceed 230 mm. Barbed wire: for concertina coil support at fence top, two barbed wires stretched and fixed to post arms shall be provided. Barbed wire shall consist of two strands of 12 gauge wire with 4 point barbs at 130 mm spacings, all galvanized. Posts, braces and rails: to CAN/CGSB-138.2, galvanized steel pipe. .1 Line Posts: 73 mm O.D. standards continuous, weld Schedule 40 pipe, galvanized, minimum 8.6 kg/m. .2 Terminal Posts: End, gate posts, corner and straining posts, 168 mm O.D. standard continuous weld Schedule 40 pipe, galvanized, minimum 21.0 kg/m. .3 Bottom and Top Rail: 42.2 mm O.D. galvanized pipe, plain ends random lengths, standard continuous weld Schedule 40 pipe. Minimum 3.4 kg/m. .4 Intermediate rails shall not be used. Bottom tension wire: to CAN/CGSB-138.1, Table 2, single strand, galvanized steel wire, 5 mm diameter. Tie wire fasteners: to CAN/CGSB-138.1, Table 2 (galvanized steel wire), single strand. Tie and tack weld each tie wire on the opposite side of the patient side. Tension bar: to ASTM A653/A653M, 5 x 20 mm minimum galvanized steel complete 3 x 20 mm tie bands with 6 mm diameter zinc coated nuts and bolts with nuts welded to bolts or threads damaged after install to prevent removal of nuts. Touch up with galvanizing touch-up paint. Tie bands to secure chain link fabric to bottom rail and top rail at 300 mm o/c. Steel Sections: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21 of type W - weldable steel. Minimum yield strength of 350 Mpa for Hollow Structural Sections and 300 Mpa for Rolled Sections and Plates. Galvanized steel arms with integral post top combination shall be provided on all posts where concertina is to be installed as detailed and in accordance with CSC standards. Post top arms to
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 32 31 14 Page 5 2011-05-25
.10
(Cont'd) provide waterproof fit. Galvanized steel post top arms to be welded to posts and touched up with galvanizing touch-up paint. Gates: to CAN/CGSB-138.4-96, Type II cold rolled, electric resistance welded; Type 1 single swing, Type 4 - sliding, frame, braces and post sizes to Table 1. .1 Gates fabricated as indicated with electrically welded joints, and hot-dip galvanized after welding. .2 Gate frames: to ASTM A53/A53M, galvanized steel pipe, standard weight, 73 mm outside diameter pipe for outside frame, 43 mm outside diameter pipe for interior bracing. .3 Fence fabric fastened to gate with twisted selvage at top. .4 Furnished gates with galvanized malleable self closing iron hinges, latch and latch catch with provision for padlock which can be attached and operated from either side of installed gate. .5 Rollers: factory-lubricated, permanently sealed bearings, adjustable on shaft with locking set screw. .6 Sliding Gates: .1 Locking to be accomplished by high security padlocks. Acceptable material: to match Institution standards and keying. .2 Provide supporting structures connected with track box and housing. Track to be formed from structural steel. .3 Hang each gate on three trolley hangers of ample capacity. .4 Provide base plates with forged or welded steel guides. .5 Provide support columns at open end of gate travel. Welding Materials: to CSA W59. All welded in place connections to be touched-up with galvanizing touch-up paint. Galvanize: hot dip galvanize to ASTM A123/A123M, minimum coating Grade 85, 600 g/m2, after fabrication. Galvanizing Touch-up Paint: Make good corrosive protection after welding where burnt by welding operations and where removed to facilitate welding operations, using 2 coats zinc touch-up primer conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.181.
.11
.12 .13 .14
.15
Section 32 31 14 Page 6 2011-05-25
.16 .17 .18
Grounding rod: 16 mm diameter copperwell rod, 3 m long. Fasteners: stainless steel Torx with pin security fasteners. Fittings and hardware: to CAN/CGSB-138.2, cast aluminum alloy, galvanized steel or malleable or ductile cast iron. Post caps to provide waterproof fit, to fasten securely over posts and to carry top rail. Turnbuckles to be drop forged. Top rails to be in lengths of 5500 mm, and shall be fitted with couplings or swedged for connecting the lengths into a continuous run. The couplings shall be not less than 152 mm long, with 2.0 mm minimum wall thickness, and shall allow for expansion and contraction of the rail. Sleeves for horizontal rails shall allow for expansion and contraction. Sleeves to be 2.0 mm minimum wall thickness. Sleeves to be securely fastened to posts. Privacy slats: 90% privacy factor, profile and colour from manufacturer standard offering.
.19
.20
.21
2.2 STEEL DETENTION GATES
.1
Fabricate as detailed and in accordance with reviewed shop drawings using limited fasteners. Weld all connections. Construct frame using steel hollow structural steel sections, steel shapes, steel plates, and bar material. Perimeter frame to be hollow structural steel sections of sizes detailed/indicated. Detention gates to be fabricated using a perimeter frame of hollow structural steel sections. Intermediate horizontal support of hollow structural steel section at mid height of door. Mesh Wire to be mechanically fastened with spanner screws spaced 200 mm centre to centre to HSS mid-rail with a continuous 25 x 6 mm steel pressure bar. Continuous 20 x 6 mm tension bar to be provided around the perimeter of Mesh Wire and welded to the HSS members 20 x 6 mm steel bars welded to the tension bars and to the HSS members.
.2
.3 .4
Section 32 31 14 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.2 STEEL DETENTION GATES (Cont'd)
.5
Corners of frame and gate to be mitred and welded in accordance with CSA W59 using welders holding current certification under CSA W47.1. Continuous deep-penetration arc weld at all joints.
Prepare for hardware. Provide all holes and reinforcements required for proper attachment and operation of hardware, in accordance with hardware manufacturers' recommendations. Prepare for alarm monitoring and for door control system. Provide all boxes and conduit required to accommodate wiring inside gates and frames. Exposed conduits and wiring will not be accepted. Limit clearance at front edge between swinging gate when closed and adjacent frame to 5 mm maximum. Remove welding slag and spatter. Grind smooth all edges and welds. Remove all rust, scale, oil and other foreign substances by wire brush, sand blasting or any other means which provides clean steel surfaces ready to receive galvanized finish. Galvanize after fabrication.
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10
.11
2.3
FINISHES
.1
Galvanizing: .1 For chain link fabric: to CAN/CGSB-138.1 Grade 2, 610 g/m2 minimum. .2 For pipe: 550 g/m2 minimum to ASTM A90. .3 For other fittings: to ASTM A123/A123M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GRADING
.1
Remove debris and correct ground undulations along fence line to obtain smooth uniform gradient between posts.
3.2 ERECTION OF FENCE
.1
Erect fence along lines as indicated and to CAN/CGSB-138.3.
Section 32 31 14 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.2 ERECTION OF FENCE (Cont'd)
.2
Install line, straining and corner posts plumb, set in concrete footings as follows: .1 Line posts, straining, gate, corner & end posts: .1 Concrete depth: 1800 mm. .2 Diameter at Top: 400 mm. .2 Ensure top of concrete piles are convex sloping away from the fence post to the outer edges of the pile. .3 Ensure top edge of concrete pile is minimum 25 mm above adjacent asphalt surface.
Use tubular concrete forms in accordance with Section 03 10 00 for construction of fence posts footings. Place concrete in post holes then embed posts into concrete to depths indicated. Extend concrete 50 mm above ground level and slope to drain away from posts. Brace to hold posts in plumb position and true to alignment and elevation until concrete has set. Ensure posts are centred in post holes. Space line posts maximum 2.5 m apart, measured parallel to ground surface. Install additional straining posts at sharp changes in grade and where directed by Departmental Representative. Install corner post where change in alignment exceeds 10 degrees. Install end posts at end of fence and at buildings. Install gate posts on both sides of gate openings. Do not install fence fabric until concrete has cured minimum of 5 days. Install brace between end and gate posts and nearest line post, placed in centre of panel and parallel to ground surface. Install braces on both sides of corner and straining posts in similar manner. Install galvanized steel arms with integral post top combination. Weld in place and touch-up with galvanizing touch-up paint. Install top and bottom rail between posts. Secure top rail to posts through post top holes and bottom rail to post sleeves. Ensure expansion and contraction is provided for top and bottom rails.
.3
.4 .5
.6 .7
.8 .9
.10
.11
Section 32 31 14 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.2 ERECTION OF FENCE (Cont'd)
.12
Lay out fence fabric. Stretch tightly to tension recommended by manufacturer and fasten to end, corner, gate and straining posts with tension bar secured to post with tension bar bands spaced at 300 mm intervals. Ensure distance between tension bar and posts does not exceed 13 mm. Tight twisted selvedge at top and bottom.
Secure fabric to line posts with tie wire at 300 mm o/c max. Twist and tack weld tie wire on non-patient side of fence. Secure fabric to top rails, line posts and bottom rails with tension bars and tension bar bands spaced at 300 mm intervals. Ensure distance between tension bar and posts does not exceed 13 mm. Install grounding rods as directed by the Departmental Representative. Install barbed wire and concertina as indicated on the drawings, reviewed shop drawings and as directed by the Departmental Representative in accordance with CSC standards.
.13
.14
.15 .16
3.3 INSTALLATION OF GATES
.1 .2 .3
Install gates in locations as indicated. Level ground between gate posts and set gate bottom approximately 40 mm above ground surface. Install gate stops where indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF DETENTION GATES
.1
The Detention Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for the building-in, bracing and welding of exterior gates to locations indicated on drawings. Below grade work and concrete base supplied and installed by others. Install detention gates in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. Install gates plumb, level, square and true to line of building. Install hardware in accordance with templates and hardware manufacturers' directions.
.2 .3 .4
Section 32 31 14 Page 10 2011-05-25
3.4 INSTALLATION OF DETENTION GATES (Cont'd)
.5
Co-operate with detention hardware engineering supervisor as required to ensure proper hardware installation, adjustment and hardware operation.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FABRIC TO DETENTION EXTERIOR GATES
.1
Install chain link fabric to Detention Exterior Gates, complete with tension bars to all sides of fabric in each opening and securely fastened to gate frame with tension bar bands spaced no more than 300 mm o/c.
3.5 TOUCH-UP
.2 .3
Touch up field welds with rust inhibiting zinc paint. Clean damaged surfaces with wire brush removing loose and cracked coatings. Pre treat damaged surfaces according to manufacturers' instructions for zinc rich paint.
3.6
CLEANING
.1
Clean and trim areas disturbed by operations. Dispose of surplus material as directed by Departmental Representative.
END
TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING
Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Agriculture and Agri-Food Canada .1 The Canadian System of Soil Classification, Third Edition, 1998. Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment .1 PN1340-2005, Guidelines for Compost Quality. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) / Office of Water .1 EPA 833-R-06-004, May 2007, Developing Your Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan - A Guide for Construction Sites. Canadian Nursery Landscape Association (CNLA) .1 Canadian Standards for Nursery Stock, 8th Edition, 2006.
.2
.3
.4
1.2
DEFINITIONS
.1
Compost: .1 Mixture of soil and decomposing organic matter used as fertilizer, mulch, or soil conditioner. .2 Compost is processed organic matter containing 40% or more organic matter as determined by Walkley-Black or Loss On Ignition (LOI) test. .3 Product must be sufficiently decomposed (i.e. stable) so that any further decomposition does not adversely affect plant growth (C:N ratio below (25) (50)), and contain no toxic or growth inhibiting contaminates. .4 Composed bio-solids to: CCME Guidelines for Compost Quality, Category (A) (B).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Quality control submittals : .1 Soil testing: submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties as described in PART 2 - SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL. .2 Certificates: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance
Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 2 2011-05-25
.2
Quality control submittals :(Cont'd) .2 Certificates:(Cont'd) characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.1
Pre-installation meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, installation instructions and warranty requirements in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06.
.1 .2
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused soil amendments from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused soil amendments into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TOPSOIL
.1
Topsoil for seeded areas: mixture of particulates, micro organisms and organic matter which provides suitable medium for supporting intended plant growth. .1 Soil texture based on The Canadian System of Soil Classification, to consist of 20 to 70% sand, minimum 7% clay, and contain 2 to 10% organic matter by weight. .2 Contain no toxic elements or growth inhibiting materials. .3 Finished surface free from: .1 Debris and stones over 50 mm diameter. .2 Course vegetative material, 10 mm diameter and 100 mm length, occupying more than 2% of soil volume. .4 Consistence: friable when moist.
Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 3 2011-05-25
2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS
.1
Fertilizer: .1 Fertility: major soil nutrients present in following amounts: .2 Nitrogen (N): 20 to 40 micrograms of available N per gram of topsoil. .3 Phosphorus (P): 40 to 50 micrograms of phosphate per gram of topsoil. .4 Potassium (K): 75 to 110 micrograms of potassium per gram of topsoil. .5 Calcium, magnesium, sulfur and micro-nutrients present in balanced ratios to support germination and/or establishment of intended vegetation. .6 Ph value: 6.5 to 8.0. Sand: washed coarse silica sand, medium to course textured. Limestone: .1 Ground agricultural limestone. .2 Gradation requirements: percentage passing by weight, 90% passing 1.0 mm sieve, 50% passing 0.125 mm sieve. Fertilizer: industry accepted standard medium containing nitrogen, phosphorous, potassium and other micro-nutrients suitable to specific plant species or application or defined by soil test.
.2 .3
.4
.1
Advise Departmental Representative of sources of topsoil and manufactured topsoil to be utilized with sufficient lead time for testing. Contractor is responsible for amendments to supply topsoil as specified. Soil testing by recognized testing facility for PH, P and K, and organic matter. Testing of topsoil will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. .1 Soil sampling, testing and analysis to be in accordance with Provincial standards.
.2 .3 .4
Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 4 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
.1
Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction sediment and erosion control drawings sediment and erosion control plan, specific to site, that complies with EPA 833-R-06-004 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
.2
.3
.1
Begin topsoil stripping of areas as indicated after area has been cleared of brush weeds and grasses and removed from site. Strip topsoil to depths as indicated. .1 Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil where textural quality will be moved outside acceptable range of intended application. Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. .1 Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m. Disposal of unused topsoil is to be in an environmentally responsible manner but not used as landfill. Protect stockpiles from contamination and compaction.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.3 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE
.1
Verify that grades are correct. .1 If discrepancies occur, notify Departmental Representative and do not commence work until instructed by Departmental Representative.
Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.3 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE (Cont'd)
.2 .3
Grade soil, eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuring positive drainage.
Remove debris, roots, branches, stones in excess of 50 mm diameter and other deleterious materials. .1 Remove soil contaminated with calcium chloride, toxic materials and petroleum products. .2 Remove debris which protrudes more than 75 mm above surface. .3 Dispose of removed material off site. Cultivate entire area which is to receive topsoil to minimum depth of 100 mm. .1 Cross cultivate those areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading has compacted soil.
.4
3.4 PLACING AND SPREADING OF TOPSOIL/PLANTING SOIL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Place topsoil after Departmental Representative has accepted subgrade. Spread topsoil in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm. For sodded areas keep topsoil 15 mm below finished grade. Spread topsoil as indicated. Manually spread topsoil/planting soil around trees, shrubs and obstacles.
3.5
FINISH GRADING
.1
Grade to eliminate rough spots and low areas and ensure positive drainage. .1 Prepare loose friable bed by means of cultivation and subsequent raking. Consolidate topsoil to required bulk density using equipment approved by Departmental Representative. .1 Leave surfaces smooth, uniform and firm against deep footprinting.
.2
3.6
ACCEPTANCE
.1
Departmental Representative will inspect and test topsoil in place and determine acceptance of material, depth of topsoil and finish grading.
Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.7 SURPLUS MATERIAL
.1
Dispose of materials except topsoil not required.
3.8
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
END
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 31 22 13 - Rough Grading. Section 32 91 19.13 - Topsoil Placement and Grading
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Nursery Landscape Association (CNLA) .1 Canadian Standards for Nursery Stock, 8th Edition, 2006.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data. .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Provide product data for: .1 Seed. .2 Mulch. .3 Tackifier. .4 Fertilizer. .3 Submit in writing to Departmental Representatives days prior to commencing work: .1 Volume capacity of hydraulic seeder in litres. .2 Amount of material to be used per tank based on volume. .3 Number of tank loads required per hectare to apply specified slurry mixture per hectare.
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, installation instructions and warranty requirements.
.2
.3
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 2 2011-05-25
1.5
SCHEDULING
.1
Schedule hydraulic seeding to coincide with preparation of soil surface.
.1 .2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused fertilizer from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused fertilizer into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Seed: "Canada pedigreed grade" in accordance with Government of Canada Seeds Act and Regulations. .1 Grass mixture: "Certified", "Canada No.1 Lawn Grass Mixture" in accordance with Government of Canada "Seeds Act" and "Seeds Regulations". .1 Mixture composition: .1 55% Creeping Red Fescue. .2 27% Kentucky Bluegrass. .3 15% Perennial Ryegrass. .4 3% White Clover. Mulch: specially manufactured for use in hydraulic seeding equipment, non-toxic, water activated, green colouring, free of germination and growth inhibiting factors with following properties: .1 Type I mulch: .1 Made from wood cellulose fibre. .2 Organic matter content: 95% plus or minus 0.5%. .3 Value of pH: 6.0. .4 Potential water absorption: 900%. .2 Type II mulch: .1 Made from newsprint, raw cotton fibre and straw, processed to produce fibre lengths of 15 mm minimum and 25 mm maximum. Greater proportions of ingredients to be straw. Tackifier: water dilutable, liquid dispersion.
.2
.3
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 3 2011-05-25
.4 .5
Water: free of impurities that would inhibit germination and growth.

Fertilizer: .1 To Canada "Fertilizers Act" and "Fertilizers Regulations". .2 Complete synthetic, slow release with 35% of nitrogen content in water-insoluble form. Inoculants: inoculant containers to be tagged with expiry date.
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
.1
Do not spray onto structures, signs, guide rails, fences, plant material, utilities and other than surfaces intended. Clean-up immediately, any material sprayed where not intended, to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Do not perform work under adverse field conditions such as wind speeds over 10 km/h, frozen ground or ground covered with snow, ice or standing water. Protect seeded areas from trespass until plants are established.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Fine grade areas to be seeded free of humps and hollows. Ensure areas are free of deleterious and refuse materials. Cultivated areas identified as requiring cultivation to depth of 25 mm. Ensure areas to be seeded are moist to depth of 150 mm before seeding. Obtain Departmental Representative approval of grade and topsoil depth before starting to seed.
.2 .3 .4
3.3 FERTILIZING PROGRAM
.1
Fertilize prior to fine grading incorporating fertilizer equally distributed in accordance with the following program:
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.3 FERTILIZING PROGRAM (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd)
Date k to k to k to .2
Date
Rate g/ha g/ha g/ha
Ratio
Fertilize during establishment and warranty periods to following program: Date k to k to g/ha g/ha Date Rate Ratio
3.4 PREPARATION OF SLURRY
.1
Measure quantities of materials by weight or weight-calibrated volume measurement satisfactory to Departmental Representative. Supply equipment required for this work. Charge required water into seeder. Add material into hydraulic seeder under agitation. Pulverize mulch and charge slowly into seeder. After all materials are in the seeder and well mixed, charge tackifier into seeder and mix thoroughly to complete slurry.
.2
.3
3.5 SLURRY APPLICATION
.1
Hydraulic seeding equipment: .1 Slurry tank. .2 Agitation system for slurry to be capable of operating during charging of tank and during seeding, consisting of recirculation of slurry and/or mechanical agitation method. .3 Capable of seeding by 50 m hand operated hoses and appropriate nozzles. .4 Tank volume to be certified by certifying authority and identified by authorities "Volume Certification Plate". Slurry mixture applied per hectare. .1 Seed: Grass mixture kg. .2 Mulch: Type I II kg. .3 Tackifier: kg.
.2
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.5 SLURRY APPLICATION (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) Water: Minimum 30,000 L. .4 .5 Fertilizer: kg, ratio. Apply slurry uniformly, at optimum angle of application for adherence to surfaces and germination of seed. .1 Using correct nozzle for application. .2 Using hoses for surfaces difficult to reach and to control application. Blend application 300 mm into adjacent grass areas or sodded areas to form uniform surfaces. Re-apply where application is not uniform. Remove slurry from items and areas not designated to be sprayed. Protect seeded areas from trespass satisfactory to Departmental Representative. Remove protection devices as directed by Departmental Representative.
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8
3.6 MAINTENANCE DURING ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
.1
Perform following operations from time of seed application until acceptance by Departmental Representative. Grass Mixture: .1 Repair and reseed dead or bare spots to allow establishment of seed prior to acceptance. .2 Mow grass to 50 mm whenever it reaches height of 70 mm. Remove clippings which will smother grass. .3 Fertilize seeded areas after first cutting in accordance with fertilizing program. Spread half of required amount of fertilizer in one direction and remainder at right angles ;water in well. .4 Control weeds by mechanical means utilizing acceptable integrated pest management practices. .5 Water seeded area to maintain optimum soil moisture level for germination and continued growth of grass. Control watering to prevent washouts. .6 Water seeded areas to maintain optimum soil moisture level for germination and continued growth. Control watering to prevent washouts.
.2
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 6 2011-05-25
3.7
ACCEPTANCE
.1
Seeded areas will be accepted by Departmental Representative provided that: .1 Seeded areas are free of rutted, eroded, bare or dead spots. .2 Areas have been mown at least twice. .3 Areas have been fertilized. Areas seeded in fall will achieve final acceptance in following spring, one month after start of growing season provided acceptance conditions are fulfilled.
.2
3.8 MAINTENANCE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
.1
Perform following operations from time of acceptance until end of warranty period: .1 Repair and reseed dead or bare spots to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.
3.9
CLEANING
.1
END
MAINTENANCE HOLE REPAIRS
Section 33 01 30 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
.1
Work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all materials, labour, supervision, equipment, plant and to perform all necessary work to repair sanitary and storm maintenance holes as specified.
.1 .2
Section 33 34 02 - Sanitary Sewers and Forcemains. Section 33 44 01 - Storm Sewers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Concrete mix design to produce 25 MPa minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Mortar: .1 Aggregate: to CAN/CSA A179-04. .2 Cement: to CSA-A3002-08, Type GU MCN 14.5 MCS 25.0 MPa @ 28 days. Ladder rungs: to CSA-G30.18-09, No. 25M billet steel deformed bars, hot dipped galvanized to AASHTO M 111M/M 111-04. Rungs to be safety pattern (drop step type). Maintenance hole steps: aluminum to OPSD 405.010, Nov. 2008. Adjusting rings: to ASTM C478M-09. Concrete brick: to CAN/CSA-A165.2-06. Sealing materials: as specified in Section. 31 01 30. Circular locking maintenance hole covers: to OPSD 401.060, Nov. 2007. Precast reinforced concrete maintenance hole sections: to ASTM C478M-09. Benching: to OPSD 701.021, Nov. 2009. Concrete: 30 MPa @ 28 days.
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10
Section 33 01 30 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTENANCE HOLE CLEANING
.1
Maintenance hole structures which are to be rehabilitated shall have their surfaces cleaned thoroughly, free of dirt and any loose material. Cleaning shall be accomplished with a high pressure water blast equipment capable of removing all loose deleterious foreign matter with pressures from 17,236 kPa to 24,132 kPa (2500-3500 psi) Such equipment shall provide low water volumes at high pressure.
3.2 PATCHING OBJECTIVE MASONRY CONCRETE
.1 .2 .3
Patch defective rough brick and concrete to produce a smooth flush surface. Patching shall be effected by using fast-set patching mortar. Mix and apply materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's data sheets. Mix only the amount of material which can be placed within the set time. Discard if initial set takes place. To seal: cracks, cold pore joints or defects should be chipped out to a depth and width of 20 mm and sufficient to ensure a sound substrate. Mix mortar and force into repair. To patch: in larger defects, chip defect until sound substrate is reached. In deep patches it may be necessary to build up in layers. Mix mortar and force well into repair. Surfaces to receive repair mortars shall be dampened prior to application and must be frost free.
.4
.5
.6
3.3 RAISING MAINTENANCE HOLES
.1 .2 .3
Raise maintenance hole frames and caves to the specified height. Adjusting hinges or concrete bricks may be used to build up the chimneys. Chimneys to be paved with mortar inside and out to provide a durable smooth surface.
Section 33 01 30 Page 3 2011-05-25
3.4 GRANTING MAINTENANCE HOLE FRAMES
.1 .2
Clean surfaces and grant maintenance hole frame in place. The finish surface shall be smooth, durable and shall drain as indicated.
3.5 SEALING UNUSED SEWER PIPES
.1 .2
Seal unused sewer lines at the last downstream maintenance holes. Reshape benching to suit.
3.6 MAINTENANCE HOLE RUNGS
.1
Install additional rungs as required and at spacings to match existing ones.
3.7 FLASHING AROUND MAINTENANCE HOLES
.1
Backfill around maintenance holes at the locations shown on the drawings. Fill material is available from the Institution Stockpile. Flash the backfill material to provide positive drainage away from the maintenance hole. Supply and place topsoil, minimum 100 mm thick, over the backfill. Seal exposed area.
.2 .3 .4
3.8 MAINTENANCE HOLE BENCHING
.1
Benching: to OPSD 701.021, Nov. 2009, slope and height indicated on drawings and as directed by Departmental Representative.
3.9
LOCKING COVERS
.1
Install circular locking maintenance hole covers to OPSD 401.060, Nov. 2007.
3.10
GUARANTEE
.1
Guarantee restoration for 12 months.
END
MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS
Section 33 05 14 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 31 23 10: Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. Section 33 44 01: Storm sewers. Section 33 34 01: Sanitary sewers and forcemains.
1.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Departmental Representative will inspect material at construction site.
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Cement: to CSA-A3001-08, Type GU. Water, aggregates, admixtures: to CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. Frames, gratings, covers: to plan dimensions and to following requirements for designated materials: .1 Metal gratings and covers to bear evenly on frames. A frame with grating or cover to constitute one unit. Assemble and mark unit components before shipment. .2 Sanitary maintenance hole frames and covers: cover cast without perforations and complete with two 25 mm square lifting holes to OPSD 401.010 Nov. 2007, Type A. .3 Storm maintenance hole frames and covers: cover cast with perforations and complete with two 25 mm lifting hole to OPSD 401.010 Nov.2007 Type B. .4 Catch basin frames and covers: to OPSD 400.020 Nov. 2007. Complete with bolt holes to secure, as indicated. Precast maintenance holes: to ASTM C478M-09. Ladder rungs: to OPSD 405.010 Nov. 2008. Mortar: .1 Aggregate: to CAN/CSA A179-04(R2009). .2 Cement: to CSA-A3002-08.
.3
.4 .5 .6
Section 33 05 14 Page 2 2011-05-25
.7 .8
Brick: to CSA-A82-06, Grade SW, Type FBS. Adjustment rings: precast concrete to ASTM C478M-09.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
.1 .2
Excavation and backfill to Section 31 23 10. Excavation requires approval prior to installing maintenance holes or catch basins.
3.2
CONCRETE WORK
.1 .2
Do concrete work to CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09. Position metal inserts to dimensions and details shown or required.
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Construct units to details indicated, plumb and true to alignment and grade. Complete maintenance holes as pipe laying progresses. Maximum of 3 maintenance holes behind point of pipe laying will be allowed. Pump maintenance hole excavation dry and remove soft and foreign material before placing concrete base. Set precast concrete slab on 300 mm minimum of well compacted granular A material. Set bottom section of precast unit in place. Make each successive joint watertight with approved rubber ring gaskets, mastic joint filler, cement mortar, or combination thereof. Clean surplus mortar and joint compounds from interior surface of unit as work progresses. Plug lifting holes with precast concrete plugs set in cement mortar or compound. For sanitary sewers: .1 Place stub outlets and bulkheads at elevations and in positions indicated. .2 Bench to provide a smooth U-shaped channel. Side height of channel to be half diameter of sewer. Adjacent floor to be sloped
.3
.4 .5
.6 .7 .8
Section 33 05 14 Page 3 2011-05-25
.8
For sanitary sewers:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) at 75 mm/m. Channels to be curved smoothly. Slope invert to establish sewer grade. For pipes smaller than 150 use standard fittings, breaking out upper half of fitting upon completion of maintenance hole. Installing units in existing systems: .1 Where new unit is within existing run of pipe, carefully remove existing pipe to dimensions required and install new unit as specified. .2 Make joints watertight between new unit and existing pipe. .3 Where deemed expedient to maintain service around existing pipes and when systems constructed under this project are ready to be put into operation, complete the installation with appropriate break-outs, removals, redirection of flows, blocking unused pipes or any other necessary work. Set frame and cover to required elevation, parge and make smooth and watertight. Place frame and cover on top section to elevation indicated. If adjustment required use concrete ring. Clean units of debris and foreign materials; remove fins or sharp protuberances.
.9
.10 .11
.12
3.4 ADJUSTING TOPS EXISTING UNITS
.1
Remove existing gratings, and frames, and store for re-use at locations designated by Departmental Representative. Sectional units: .1 Raise or lower straight walled sectional units by adding or removing precast sections as required. .2 Raise or lower tapered units by removing cone section, adding, removing, or substituting riser sections to obtain required elevation, then replace cone section. Monolithic units: .1 Raise monolithic units by roughening existing top to ensure proper bond and extend to required elevation with: .1 Mortared brick course for 150 mm or less alteration. .2 Cast-in-place concrete.
.2
.3
Section 33 05 14 Page 4 2011-05-25
3.4 ADJUSTING TOPS EXISTING UNITS (Cont'd)
.3
Monolithic units:(Cont'd) Lower monolithic units with straight wall .2 by removing concrete to elevation indicated for rebuilding. .3 When monolithic units with tapered upper section are to be lowered more than 150 mm remove concrete for entire depth of taper plus as much straight wall as necessary, then rebuild upper section to required elevation with cast-in-place concrete. .4 Install additional maintenance hole ladder rungs in adjusted portion of units as required. .5 Re-use existing gratings, frames. .6 Re-set gratings and frames to required elevation on full bed of cement mortar, parge and trowel smooth.
3.5 SEALING OVER EXISTING UNITS
.1
Cut galvanized iron sheet to extend 50 mm beyond opening of existing maintenance hole or catch basin grating. Center iron sheet over existing grating and spot or stitchweld to grating.
END
SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
Section 33 11 17 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for water mains, hydrants, valves, valve boxes, and valve chambers, including service connections.
.1 .2
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 31 23 10 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
American Water Works Association AWWA .1 ANSI/AWWA B300-10, Hypochlorites. .2 AWWA B301-10, Liquid Chlorine. .3 ANSI/AWWA B303-10, Sodium Chlorite. .4 ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4-08, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings, Includes Erratum (2010). .5 ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-07, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. .6 ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-08, Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for water. .7 ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53-06, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. .8 ANSAI/AWWA C200-05, Steel Water Pipe 6 in. (150 mm) and Larger. .9 AWWA C205-07, Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe, 4 In. (100 mm) and Larger, Shop Applied. .10 ANSI/AWWA C206-03, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. .11 ANSI/AWWA C207-07, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm through 3,600 mm). .12 ANSI/AWWA C208-07, Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. .13 ANSI/AWWA C300-04, Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type. .14 ANSI/AWWA C500-09, Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. .15 ANSI/AWWA C504-10, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves, 3 In. (74mm) Through 72 In. (1800mm). .16 ANSI/AWWA C600-10, Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. .17 ANSI/AWWA C602-06, Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place - 4 In. (100 mm) and Larger.
Section 33 11 17 Page 2 2011-05-25
.1
(Cont'd) .18 AWWA C651-05, Disinfecting Water Mains. .19 ANSI/AWWA C800-05, Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. .20 ANSI/AWWA C900-07, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. - 12 In. (100 mm - 300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution. .21 ANSI/AWWA C907-04, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Fittings for Water - 4 In. Through 200 mm.) American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A53/A53M-10, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. .3 ASTM C117-04, Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 75 - micro m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. .4 ASTM C478M-09, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections (Metric). .5 ASTM F714-10, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series. .2 CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric. .3 CAN/CGSB-1.88-92, Gloss Alkyd Enamel, Air Drying and Baking. .4 CGSB 41-GP-25M, Pipe, Polyethylene, for the Transport of Liquids. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B137 Series-09, Thermoplastic Pressure Piping Compendium. (Consists of B137.0, B137.1, B137.2, B137.3, B137.3.1, B137.4, B137.4.1, B137.5, B137.6, B137.8, B137.9, B137.10, B137.11 and B137.12). .1 CSA B137.1-09, Polyethylene Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings for Cold-Water Pressure Services. .2 CSA B137.3-02, Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe for Pressure Applications.
.2
.3
.4
Section 33 11 17 Page 3 2011-05-25
.5
Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA).
Transport Canada (TC) .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA). The Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual - March 1998(R2002). Ontario Provincial Standard Specificiation (OPSS) and Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings (OPSD) .1 OPSS 441, November 2010 (typical for all references to OPSS 701), Construction Specification for Watermain Installation in Open Cut. .2 OPSS 442 (typical for all references to OPSS 702), November 2010, Construction Specification for Corrosion Protection of New and Existing Watermains.
.6
.7
.8
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit complete shop drawings and construction schedule for water mains. Include method for installation of water main. Inform Departmental Representative of proposed source of bedding materials and provide access for sampling at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work. Submit Hydrostatic and leak test procedure identifying location of blow-offs and pressure gauge location 2 weeks prior to commencement. Submit a flushing and disinfection plan 2 weeks prior to commencement. Submit manufacturer's test data and certification that pipe materials meet requirements of this section at least 4 weeks prior to beginning work. Include manufacturer's drawings, information and shop drawings where pertinent. Pipe certification to be on pipe.
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
Section 33 11 17 Page 4 2011-05-25
.1
Provide record drawings, including directions for operating valves, list of equipment required to operate valves, details of pipe material, location of air and vacuum release valves, hydrant details, maintenance and operating instructions in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .1 Include top of pipe, horizontal location of fittings and type, valves, valve boxes, valve chambers and hydrants.
.1 .2 .3
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused concrete materials from landfill to local facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused aggregate materials from landfill to facility for reuse as approved by Departmental Representative. Dispose of unused disinfection material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5 .6
.7 .8
.9
.10
.11
Section 33 11 17 Page 5 2011-05-25
.12
Do not dispose of unused disinfection material into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where they will pose health or environmental hazard.
.13
.1
Schedule Work to minimize interruptions to existing services. Maximum interruption time of 6 hours will be permitted. Submit schedule of expected interruptions to Departmental Representative for approval and adhere to interruption schedule as approved by Departmental Representative. Notify Departmental Representative minimum of 48 h in advance of interruption in service. Do not interrupt water service for more than 6 h and confine this period between 10:00 and 16:00 hours local time unless otherwise authorized. Notify fire department of any planned or accidental interruption of water supply to hydrants. Provide "Out of Service" sign on hydrant not in use.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, JOINTS AND FITTINGS
.1
Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe (PVC): to ANSI/AWWA C900, pressure class 150, DR18, Mpa gasket bell end. .1 CSA-B137.3, PVC Series 160, 1.1 MPa elastomeric gasket coupling. .2 Joints shall be a gasket fitted to the bell groove. The pipe and or fittings shall be joined by push fitting bell and spigot joint to the depth indicated on pipe. .3 Fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C907 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Fittings and be certified to CSA B137.2. They shall be UL listed and FM approved. Ductile iron fittings may also be used. They shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. Mechanical joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Fittings
Section 33 11 17 Page 6 2011-05-25
2.1 PIPE, JOINTS AND FITTINGS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) shall be cement lined and in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe and fittings to ANSI/AWWA C900, DR11 (160 psi). .1 Joints shall be made by either thermal butt fusion or approved socket fusion coupling. .2 Fittings shall be plain end fittings and connected using thermal butt fusion or socket fusion fittings.
.2
2.2 GATE VALVES AND BOXES
.1
Potable water gate valves shall be ANSI/AWWA C-509 resilient seat gate valve type with cast iron or ductile iron body. Valves shall open counter-clockwise. Valve box shall be a 130 mm diameter slide valve box complete with extension, cap, and cast iron lid. Valves shall be equipped with "50 mm operating nuts". Values shall have flanged ends.
.2 .3
.4 .5
2.3 CORROSION PROTECTION
.1 .2
Cathodic protection must be to the OPSS 442 and OPSD 1109 Standard. Anodes to be labelled as follows: "X-XX-XX ANODE".
2.4
TRACING WIRE
.1
Tracing wire to be TWU or RWU, 10 gauge, 7 strands or more, copper, 60C or higher, 600 V, plastic coated or approved equivalent. C-Tap to be approved by CSA and to be sized to connect two tracing wires as specified above. Tapes to be rugged, pressure-sensitive, PVC-based, minimum 0.25 mm thickness. Tapes must protect against water, salts and sewage and be suitable for direct burial applications.
.2 .3
Section 33 11 17 Page 7 2011-05-25
2.5 PIPE BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIAL
.1
Granular material to: Granular 'A' as per OPSS 1010.
2.6 BACKFILL MATERIAL
.1
In accordance with Section 31 23 10 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.
2.7 PIPE DISINFECTION
.1
Contractor to proceed with disinfection only after written approval that disinfection plan has been approved by Departmental Representative. Sodium hypochlorite or Calcium hypochlorite in powder form or Liquid chlorine to disinfect water mains. Undertake disinfection of water mains in accordance with OPSS 441. Contractor is responsible for all sampling/testing costs.
.2
.3 .4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Clean pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants, and appurtenances of accumulated debris and water before installation. .1 Inspect materials for defects to approval of Departmental Representative. .2 Remove defective materials from site as directed by Departmental Representative. .3 Swab all pipes and fittings with liquid chlorine prior to installation.
3.2
TRENCHING
.1 .2
Do trenching work in accordance with Section 31 23 10 - Excavating Trenching and Backfilling. Trench depth to provide cover over pipe of not less than 1.7 m from finished grade or as indicated.
Section 33 11 17 Page 8 2011-05-25
3.3 GRANULAR BEDDING
.1
Place granular bedding material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness to depth as indicated. Do not place material in frozen condition. Shape bed true to grade to provide continuous uniform bearing surface for pipe. Shape transverse depressions in bedding as required to suit joints. Compact each layer full width of bed to at least 95% SPD.
.2 .3 .4 .5
3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION
.1
Terminate building water service 1.0 m outside building footprint as indicated on the detail drawings and at location indicated by mechanical drawings. Lay pipes to manufacturer's standard instructions and specifications. Do not use blocks except as specified. Join pipes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Handle pipe by methods recommended by pipe manufacturer. Do not use chains or cables passed through pipe bore so that weight of pipe bears on pipe ends. Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade. .1 Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bed throughout its full length. .2 Take up and replace defective pipe. Do not exceed permissible deflection at joints as recommended by pipe manufacturer. Keep jointing materials and installed pipe free of dirt and water and other foreign materials. .1 Whenever work is stopped, install a removable watertight bulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry of foreign materials. Position and join pipes with equipment and methods approved by Departmental Representative. Cut pipes in approved manner as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without damaging pipe or its
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6 .7
.8 .9
Section 33 11 17 Page 9 2011-05-25
3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.9
(Cont'd) coating and to leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Align pipes before jointing. Install gaskets to manufacturer's recommendations. Support pipes with hand slings or crane as required to minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity until gasket is properly positioned. Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other foreign material. .1 Remove disturbed or contaminated gaskets. .2 Clean, lubricate and replace before jointing is attempted again. Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe. Minimize deflection after joint has been made. Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure that joint is completed to manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure completed joints are restrained by compacting bedding material alongside and over installed pipes. When stoppage of work occurs, block pipes in an approved manner to prevent creep during down time. Do not lay pipe on frozen bedding. Do hydrostatic test and have results approved by Departmental Representative before surrounding and covering joints and fittings with granular material. Backfill remainder of trench. Do not connect any new watermain to an existing watermain without consent of Departmental Representative.
.10 .11
.12
.13 .14 .15
.16
.17
.18 .19
.20 .21
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
.1
Install valves to manufacturer's recommendations at locations as indicated.
Section 33 11 17 Page 11 2011-05-25
3.9 HYDROSTATIC AND LEAKAGE TESTING (Cont'd)
.6
Expel air from main by slowly filling main with potable water from source and method approved by Departmental Representative.
Thoroughly examine exposed parts and correct for leakage as necessary. Examine exposed pipe, joints, fittings and appurtenances while system is under pressure. Remove joints, fittings and appurtenances found defective and replace with new sound material and make watertight. Repeat hydrostatic test until defects have been corrected and leakage amount has been deemed acceptable in the opinion of the Departmental Representative.
.7 .8 .9
.10
3.10
PIPE SURROUND
.1
Upon completion of pipe laying and after Departmental Representative has inspected Work in place, surround and cover pipes as indicated. Hand place surround material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness as indicated. Place layers uniformly and simultaneously on each side of pipe. Do not place material in frozen condition. Compact each layer from pipe invert to underside of backfill to 100% SPD.
.2
.3 .4 .5
3.11
BACKFILL
.1
Place backfill material, above pipe surround, in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to grades as indicated. Compact Backfill to 100% SPD.
.2
3.12 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING
.1 .2
Contractor to supply hauled water for flushing and disinfecting. Flushing and disinfecting operations: witnessed by Departmental Representative carried out by Contractor.
Section 33 11 17 Page 12 2011-05-25
3.12 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) Notify Departmental Representative at .1 least 4 days in advance of proposed date when disinfecting operations will begin. All chlorinated water discharged to the natural environment shall be dechlorinated prior to release. Flush water mains through available outlets with a sufficient flow of potable water to produce velocity of 1.5 m/s, within pipe for minimum 10 minutes, or until foreign materials have been removed and flushed water is clear. Provide connections and pumps for flushing as required. Open and close valves, hydrants and service connections to ensure thorough flushing. At a point no more than 3 m downstream of the beginning of the watermain, water entering the watermain shall receive a dose of chlorine fed at a constant rate such that the water will not have less than 25 mg/L and not more than 80 mg/L of free chlorine. To ensure that this concentration is adequate, take samples at regular intervals. Samples to be tested by a certified lab to ensure chlorine levels. Measure the chlorine concentration at regular intervals. Allow chlorinated water to stay in watermain for a period of 24 hours. After the 24 hour retention period, a sample is to be tested by a certified laboratory to indicate the level of chlorine. Flush the chlorinated water from the watermain. Continue flushing the watermain until the chlorine residual of the discharge water matches that of the source water. A sample is to be tested by a certified lab to indicate the chlorine level matches the source water. After final flushing, and prior to connecting the new watermain to the distribution system, the contractor shall advise the operating authority who will collect two consecutive sets of acceptable samples, taken at least 24 hours apart shall be collected from the main. At least one set of samples shall be collected form every 360 m of the new watermain, plus one set from the end of the line and at least one set from each branch. All samples shall be tested in accordance with Standard Methods for the
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7
.8
.9
Section 33 11 17 Page 13 2011-05-25
3.12 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING (Cont'd)
.9
(Cont'd) examination of water and wastewater for E.Coli, total coliforms, and HPC. Watermain disinfection laboratory tests to be paid by the Contractor.
.10
3.13 SURFACE RESTORATION
.1
After installing and backfilling over water mains, restore surface to original condition as indicated and as directed by Departmental Representative.
3.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
.1
Contractor shall supply to the Departmental Representative an "as-built" drawing indicating the horizontal and vertical alignment of the watermain and appurtenances. All anodes, valves, bends, hydrants tees, changes in material, etc. shall be noted.
END
SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCEMAINS
Section 33 34 02 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 33 05 14: Maintenance holes and catch basins.
1.2 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION
.1
At least 2 weeks prior to commencing work submit manufacturer's test data and certification that pipe materials meet requirements of this section.
1.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
Provide as built drawings of sewers on project completion. Give details of pipe material, location of cleanouts, directions and list of equipment to operate valves, other maintenance and operating instructions.
.1 .2 .3
Schedule work to minimize interruptions to existing services. Maintain existing sewage flows during construction. Submit schedule of expected interruptions for approval and adhere to approved schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC PIPE
.1
Gravity sewer pipe and fittings: Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC): to ASTM D3034-08. .1 Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR): 28. .2 Locked-in gasket and integral bell system. .3 Nominal lengths: 4 m.
2.2 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
.1
Cast iron pipe: to CSA-B70-06 with rubber gasket push-on joints to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Fittings: to CSA-B70-06. Cast iron service saddles: with oil resistant gaskets, stainless steel clamp and oil resistant "0" rings in branch end.
.2
Section 33 34 02 Page 2 2011-05-25
2.3 PIPE BEDDING MATERIALS
.1
Granular material to following requirements: .1 Crushed or screened stone, gravel or sand free from clay lumps, cementation, organic material, frozen material and other deleterious materials. .2 Granular 'A': to OPSS 1010, April 2004, maximum size 19 mm. Concrete required for thrust blocks to be 20 MPa.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Clean pipes and fittings of debris and water before installation. Inspect materials for defects before installing. Remove defective materials from site.
3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL
.1 .2 .3 .4
Carry out trenching work as required to install sewers to lines and grades indicated. Do not allow contents of any sewer or sewer connection to flow into trench. Trench line require approval prior to placing bedding material and pipe. Do not backfill trenches between joints until pipe grade and alignment have been checked and accepted by Departmental Representative. Do not backfill at joints until pressure and leakage test results are within limits specified unless otherwise approved by Departmental Representative. Protect pipe from freezing if tested at temperatures lower than 5C. Remove excess excavated material from the site.
.5
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Place 150 mm granular bedding materials under piping. Shape bed true to grade and to provide continuous, uniform bearing surface for barrel of pipe. Do not use blocks when bedding pipe. Shape transverse depressions as required to receive bell if bell and spigot pipe is used.
.3
Section 33 34 02 Page 3 2011-05-25
.4 .5 .6 .7
Compact full width of bed to at least 95% Standard Proctor density.

Lay and join pipes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Handle pipe carefully with equipment recommended by manufacturer. Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade, with pipe invert smooth and free of sags or high points. Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bed throughout its full length. Commence laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction with socket ends of pipe facing upgrade. Do not exceed maximum joint deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer. Do not allow water to flow through pipe during construction, except as may be permitted by Departmental Representative. Whenever work is suspended, install removable watertight bulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry of foreign materials. Position and join pipes by approved methods. Do not use excavating equipment to force pipe sections together. Install PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with CSA-B1800-06. Pipe jointing: .1 Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Support pipes with hand slings or crane as required to minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity until gasket is properly positioned. .3 Align pipes carefully before joining. .4 Maintain pipe joints free from mud, silt, gravel and other foreign material. .5 Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other foreign material. Gaskets so disturbed shall be removed, cleaned and lubricated and replaced before joining is attempted. .6 Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe.
.8
.9 .10
.11
.12
.13 .14
Section 33 34 02 Page 4 2011-05-25
.14
Pipe jointing:(Cont'd) .7 Minimize joint deflection after joint has been made to avoid joint damage. .8 Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure that joint is complete as outlined in manufacturer's recommendations. Cut pipes as required for special inserts, fittings or closure pieces in a neat manner, as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without damaging pipe or its coating and to leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Make watertight connections to maintenance holes. Use non-shrink grout when suitable gaskets are not available. Place concrete thrust blocks between bends, tees and fittings and undisturbed ground for forcemain lines. Keep pipe couplings free of concrete. Upon completion of pipe laying and after Departmental Representative has inspected pipe joints, place minimum 150 mm granular bedding material around and over top of pipes and compact as for bedding material. Backfill remainder of trench with excavated material. Plug service laterals with water tight caps or plugs as approved by Departmental Representative. Place location marker at ends of plugged or capped unconnected sewer lines.
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
3.4
FIELD TESTING
.1 .2 .3
Test force main in presence of Departmental Representative. Brace caps, bends and tees to prevent movement during tests. Expel air from main by slowly filling with water. High points to be drilled and tapped and suitable cocks installed to vent air and to be shut when pressure is applied. Remove cocks after satisfactory testing and seal holes with tight fitting plugs. Apply hydrostatic test pressure of 690 kPa based on lowest point in line and corrected to elevation of test gauge for hydrostatic test and 345 kPa for leakage test.
.4
Section 33 34 02 Page 5 2011-05-25
3.4 FIELD TESTING (Cont'd)
.5 .6 .7
Apply pressures for 1 h for pressure test and 2 h for leakage test. Remove defective joints, pipe and fittings where found and replace with new sound material. Define leakage as amount of water from source tank in order to maintain test pressure for 2 h. Allowable leakage to be as defined in ANSI/AWWA C600-10. Repeat testing until test results fall within accepted allowances. Upon the approval of the Departmental Representative CCTV inspection shall be considered an approved alternative to the testing outlined above. Contractor to submit copies of video inspections and reports to Departmental Representative for review and approval.
.8 .9
END
STORM SEWERS
Section 33 44 01 Page 1 2011-05-25
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 31 23 10:Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. Section 33 05 14: Maintenance holes and catch basins.
1.2 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION
.1
At least 2 weeks prior to commencing work, submit manufacturer's test data and certification that pipe materials meet requirements of this section.
.1 .2 .3
Schedule work to minimize interruptions to existing services. Maintain existing flow during construction. Submit schedule of expected interruptions for review and adhere to approved schedule.
1.4 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Make available 1 copy of manufacturer's installation instructions.
2.1
PLASTIC PIPE
.1
Gravity sewer pipe and fittings: Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride): to ASTM D3034-08. .1 Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR): 28. .2 Locked-in gasket and integral bell system. .3 Nominal lengths: 4 m.
2.2 PIPE BEDDING MATERIALS
.1 .2
Granular material: Granular A as per OPSS 1010. Concrete required for cradles, encasement, supports: to Section 03 30 11.
STORM SEWERS
Section 33 44 01 Page 2 2011-05-25
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Clean pipes and fittings of debris and water before installation. Carefully inspect materials for defects before installing. Remove defective materials from site.
3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
.1 .2 .3
Do trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 10. Trench line and depth require approval prior to placing bedding material and pipe. Water jetting of backfill under haunches of corrugated steel pipe may be permitted if recommended by manufacturer and approved by Departmental Representative.
3.3 GRANULAR BEDDING
.1 .2
Place granular bedding materials to details indicated or directed. Shape bed true to grade and to provide continuous, uniform bearing surface for barrel of pipe. Do not use blocks when bedding pipe. Shape transverse depressions as required to receive bell if bell and spigot pipe is used. Compact full width of bed to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density. Use bedding stone in lieu of sand bedding material when directed. Fill excavation below bottom of specified bedding adjacent to maintenance holes or catch basins with bedding material or common backfill as directed.
.3 .4 .5 .6
3.4
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Lay and join pipe in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Handle pipe by approved methods. Do not use chains or cables passed through rigid pipe bore so that weight of pipe bears upon pipe ends.
STORM SEWERS
Section 33 44 01 Page 3 2011-05-25
.3
Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade with pipe inverts smooth and free of sags or high points. Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bed throughout its full length.
Commence laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction with socket ends of pipe facing upgrade. Do not exceed maximum joint deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer. Do not allow water to flow through pipes during construction except as may be permitted by Departmental Representative. Position and join pipes by approved methods. Do not use excavating equipment to force pipe sections together. Joints: .1 Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Support pipes with hand slings or crane as required to minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity until gasket is properly positioned. .3 Align pipes carefully before joining. .4 Maintain pipe joints free from mud, silt, gravel and other foreign material. .5 Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other foreign material. Gaskets so disturbed shall be removed, cleaned and lubricated and replaced before joining is attempted. .6 Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe. .7 Minimize joint deflection after joint has been made to avoid joint damage. .8 Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure that joint is complete as outlined in manufacturer's recommendations. When any stoppage of work occurs, block pipes as directed to prevent "creep" during down time. Plug lifting holes with approved prefabricated plugs set in non-shrink grout. Cut pipes as required for special inserts, fittings or closure pieces in a neat manner, as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without damaging pipe or its coating and to leave a smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe.
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9 .10 .11
STORM SEWERS
Section 33 44 01 Page 4 2011-05-25
.12
Use prefabricated saddles or approved field connections for connecting pipes to existing sewer pipes. Joint to be structurally sound and watertight.
Plug open upstream ends of pipes with removable watertight concrete, steel or wooden bulkheads.
.13
END

CB Specs

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

CB Specs

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Public Works and Government Services Canada Architectural and Engineering Services Ontario Region

COLLINS BAY INSTITUTION BUILDING CBB11

Issued for Bid 2011-05-25

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 1 2011-05-25

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 2 2011-05-25

STEEL STEEL METAL METAL

JOIST FRAMING DECKING FABRICATIONS STAIRS AND LADDERS

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 3 2011-05-25

DETENTION WINDOW SECURITY GRILLES

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 4 2011-05-25

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 5 2011-05-25

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 6 2011-05-25

E118 E119 E120 E121 E122 E123 E124

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 01 11 00 Page 1 2011-05-25

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.3 CONTRACT METHOD

Construct Work under single, stipulated price contract.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT

1.5 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 01 11 00 Page 2 2011-05-25

1.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

1.9 DEPARTMENTAL REPRESENTATIVE FURNISHED ITEMS

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 01 11 00 Page 3 2011-05-25

1.9 DEPARTMENTAL REPRESENTATIVE FURNISHED ITEMS (Cont'd)

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

Section 01 14 00 Page 1 2011-05-25

1.1 EXISTING SERVICES

1.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Submit schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

Section 01 29 83 Page 1 2011-05-25

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

1.2 APPOINTMENT AND PAYMENT

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

Section 01 29 83 Page 2 2011-05-25

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

Section 01 31 16 Page 1 2011-05-25

1.2 PROJECT MEETINGS

1.3 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

Section 01 31 16 Page 2 2011-05-25

1.3 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP (Cont'd)

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043791.001

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

Section 01 31 16 Page 3 2011-05-25

1.3 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP (Cont'd)

Coordinate field engineering and layout work with Departmental Representative.